Table of Contents

 

 

 

UNITED STATES

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

WASHINGTON, D.C. 20549

 

FORM 20-F

 

(Mark One)

 

¨ REGISTRATION STATEMENT PURSUANT TO SECTION 12(b) OR (g) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

 

OR

 

x ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

 

For the fiscal year ended 31 December 2012

 

OR

 

¨   TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

 

For the transition period from                      to                     

 

OR

 

¨   SHELL COMPANY REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

 

Date of event requiring this shell company report                     

 

Commission file number 0-16350

 

WPP plc

(Exact Name of Registrant as specified in its charter)

 

Jersey

(Jurisdiction of incorporation or organization)

 

27 Farm Street

London, United Kingdom, W1J 5RJ

(Address of principal executive offices)

 

Andrea Harris, Esq.

Group Chief Counsel

27 Farm Street, London, United Kingdom, W1J 5RJ

+44(0) 20 7408 2204

(Name, Telephone, E-mail and/or Facsimile number and Address of Company Contact Person)

 

Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act.

 

Title of each class

 

Name of each exchange on which registered

Not applicable   Not applicable

 

Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act.

 

Ordinary Shares of 10p each

 

(Title of Class)

 

American Depositary Shares, each representing five Ordinary Shares (ADSs)

 

(Title of Class)


Table of Contents

Securities for which there is a reporting obligation pursuant to Section 15(d) of the Act.

 

None

 

(Title of Class)

 

Indicate the number of outstanding shares of each of the issuer’s classes of capital or common stock as of the close of the period covered by the annual report.

 

At December 31, 2012, the number of outstanding ordinary shares was 1,265,407,107 which included at such date ordinary shares represented by 10,159,573 ADSs.

 

Indicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act.

YES   x     NO   ¨

 

If this report is an annual or transition report, indicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934.

YES   ¨     NO   x

 

Note – Checking the box above will not relieve any registrant required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 from their obligations under those Sections.

 

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days.

YES   x     NO   ¨

 

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically and posted on its corporate Web site, if any, every Interactive Data File required to be submitted and posted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T (§232.405 of this chapter) during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit and post such files).

YES   ¨     NO   ¨

 

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, or a non-accelerated filer. See definition of “accelerated filer and large accelerated filer” in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act. (Check one):

 

Large accelerated filer   x                     Accelerated filer   ¨                     Non-accelerated filer   ¨

 

Indicate by check mark which basis of accounting the registrant has used to prepare the financial statements included in this filing:

 

U.S. GAAP   ¨

   International Financial Reporting Standards issued by the International Accounting Standards Board   x    Other   ¨

 

If “Other” has been checked in response to the previous question, indicate by check mark which financial statement item the registrant has elected to follow.

 

Item 17   ¨     Item 18   ¨

 

If this is an annual report, indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act).

YES   ¨     NO   x

 

 

 


Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

     Page  

FORWARD – LOOKING STATEMENTS

     1   

Part I

     1   

  Item 1

  

IDENTITY OF DIRECTORS, SENIOR MANAGEMENT AND ADVISERS

     1   

  Item 2

  

OFFER STATISTICS AND EXPECTED TIMETABLE

     1   

  Item 3

  

KEY INFORMATION

     1   
   A   

Selected Financial Data

     1   
   B   

Capitalization and Indebtedness

     4   
   C   

Reasons for the Offer and Use of Proceeds

     4   
   D   

Risk Factors

     5   

  Item 4

  

INFORMATION ON THE COMPANY

     7   
   A   

History and Development of the Company

     7   
   B   

Business Overview

     8   
   C   

Organizational Structure

     13   
   D   

Property, Plant and Equipment

     15   

  Item 4A

  

UNRESOLVED STAFF COMMENTS

     15   

  Item 5

  

OPERATING FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

     16   
   A   

Operating Results

     16   
   B   

Liquidity and Capital Resources

     23   
   C   

Research and Development, Patents and Licenses

     25   
   D   

Trend Information

     26   
   E   

Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements

     27   
   F   

Tabular Disclosure of Contractual Obligations

     27   

  Item 6

  

DIRECTORS, SENIOR MANAGEMENT AND EMPLOYEES

     37   
   A   

Directors and Senior Management

     37   
   B   

Compensation

     39   
   C   

Board Practices

     57   
   D   

Employees

     65   
   E   

Share Ownership

     66   

  Item 7

  

MAJOR SHAREHOLDERS AND RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

     67   
   A   

Major Shareholders

     67   
   B   

Related Party Transactions

     68   
   C   

Interests of Experts and Counsel

     68   

  Item 8

  

FINANCIAL INFORMATION

     69   
   A   

Consolidated Statements and Other Financial Information

     69   
   B   

Significant Changes

     69   

  Item 9

  

THE OFFER AND LISTING

     70   
   A   

Offer and Listing Details

     70   
   B   

Plan of Distribution

     71   
   C   

Markets

     71   
   D   

Selling Shareholders

     71   
   E   

Dilution

     71   
   F   

Expenses of the Issue

     71   


Table of Contents
     Page  

  Item 10

  

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

     72   
   A   

Share Capital

     72   
   B   

Memorandum and Articles of Association

     72   
   C   

Material Contracts

     80   
   D   

Exchange Controls

     84   
   E   

Taxation

     84   
   F   

Dividends and Paying Agents

     89   
   G   

Statements by Experts

     89   
   H   

Documents on Display

     90   
   I   

Subsidiary Information

     90   

  Item 11

  

QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE DISCLOSURES ABOUT MARKET RISK

     91   

  Item 12

  

DESCRIPTION OF SECURITIES OTHER THAN EQUITY SECURITIES

     91   
   A   

Debt Securities

     91   
   B   

Warrants and Rights

     91   
   C   

Other Securities

     91   
   D   

American Depositary Shares

     92   

Part II

     94   

  Item 13

  

DEFAULTS, DIVIDEND ARREARAGES AND DELINQUENCIES

     94   

  Item 14

  

MATERIAL MODIFICATIONS TO THE RIGHTS OF SECURITY HOLDERS AND USE OF PROCEEDS

     94   

  Item 15

  

CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES

     94   

  Item 16A

  

AUDIT COMMITTEE FINANCIAL EXPERT

     96   

  Item 16B

  

CODE OF ETHICS

     96   

  Item 16C

  

PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTANT FEES AND SERVICES

     97   

  Item 16D

  

EXEMPTIONS FROM THE LISTING STANDARDS FOR AUDIT COMMITTEES

     97   

  Item 16E

  

PURCHASES OF EQUITY SECURITIES BY THE ISSUER AND AFFILIATED PURCHASERS

     97   

  Item 16F

  

CHANGE IN REGISTRANT’S CERTIFYING ACCOUNTANT

     98   

  Item 16G

  

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

     98   

  Item 16H

  

MINE SAFETY DISCLOSURE

     98   

Part III

     99   

  Item 17

  

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

     99   

  Item 18

  

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

     99   

  Item 19

  

EXHIBITS

     99   


Table of Contents

Forward-Looking Statements

 

In connection with the provisions of the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995 (the ‘Reform Act’), the Company (as defined below) may include forward-looking statements (as defined in the Reform Act) in oral or written public statements issued by or on behalf of the Company. These forward-looking statements may include, among other things, plans, objectives, projections and anticipated future economic performance based on assumptions and the like that are subject to risks and uncertainties. As such, actual results or outcomes may differ materially from those discussed in the forward-looking statements. Important factors which may cause actual results to differ include but are not limited to: the unanticipated loss of a material client or key personnel, delays or reductions in client advertising budgets, shifts in industry rates of compensation, regulatory compliance costs or litigation, natural disasters or acts of terrorism, the Company’s exposure to changes in the values of major currencies other than the UK pound sterling (because a substantial portion of its revenues are derived and costs incurred outside of the United Kingdom) and the overall level of economic activity in the Company’s major markets (which varies depending on, among other things, regional, national and international political and economic conditions and government regulations in the world’s advertising markets). In addition, you should consider the risks described in Item 3D, captioned “Risk Factors,” which could also cause actual results to differ from forward-looking information. In light of these and other uncertainties, the forward-looking statements included in this document should not be regarded as a representation by the Company that the Company’s plans and objectives will be achieved.

 

The Company undertakes no obligation to update or revise any such forward-looking statements, whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise.

 

PART I

 

ITEM 1. IDENTITY OF DIRECTORS, SENIOR MANAGEMENT AND ADVISERS

 

Not applicable.

 

ITEM 2. OFFER STATISTICS AND EXPECTED TIMETABLE

 

Not applicable.

 

ITEM 3. KEY INFORMATION

 

Overview

 

WPP plc and its subsidiaries (WPP) comprise one of the largest communications services businesses in the world. At 31 December 2012, the Group had 115,711 employees. Including all employees of associated companies, this figure was approximately 165,000. For the year ended 31 December 2012, the Group had revenue of £10,373 million and operating profit of £1,241 million.

 

Unless the context otherwise requires, the terms “Company”, “Group” and “Registrant” as used herein shall also mean WPP plc and its subsidiaries.

 

A. Selected Financial Data

 

The selected financial data should be read in conjunction with, and is qualified in its entirety by reference to, the Consolidated Financial Statements of the Company, including the notes thereto.

 

The selected income statement data for each of the three years ended 31 December 2012, 2011 and 2010 and the selected balance sheet data as at 31 December 2012 and 2011 are derived from the Consolidated Financial Statements of the Company that appear elsewhere in this Form 20-F. The selected financial data for prior periods

 

1


Table of Contents

is derived from the Consolidated Financial Statements of the Company previously filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) as part of the Company’s Annual Reports on Form 20-F. The Consolidated Financial Statements were prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB).

 

The reporting currency of the Group is the UK pound sterling and the selected financial data has been prepared on this basis.

 

Selected Consolidated Income Statement Data

 

       Year ended 31 December  
     2012     2011     2010     2009     2008  
       £m     £m     £m     £m     £m  

Revenue

     10,373.1        10,021.8        9,331.0        8,684.3        7,476.9   

Operating profit

     1,241.1        1,192.2        973.0        761.7        876.0   

Profit for the year

     894.7        916.5        661.0        506.9        513.9   

Profit attributable to equity holders of the parent

     822.7        840.1        586.0        437.7        439.1   

Earnings per ordinary share:

          

Basic

     66.2  p      67.6  p      47.5  p      35.9  p      38.4  p 

Diluted

     62.8  p      64.5  p      45.9  p      35.3  p      37.6  p 

Earnings per ADS 1 :

          

Basic

     331.0  p      338.0  p      237.5  p      179.5  p      192.0  p 

Diluted

     314.0  p      322.5  p      229.5  p      176.5  p      188.0  p 

Dividends per ordinary share

     25.94  p      19.28  p      16.25  p      15.47  p      14.32  p 

Dividends per ADS (US dollars) 2

     207.1  ¢      151.2  ¢      126.7  ¢      135.9  ¢      139.5  ¢ 

1     Basic and diluted earnings per American Depositary Share (ADS) have been calculated using the same method as earnings per share, multiplied by a factor of five.

2     These figures have been translated for convenience purposes only, using the approximate average rates shown in the exchange rate table on page 3. This conversion should not be construed as a representation that the pound sterling amounts actually represent, or could be converted into, US dollars at the rates indicated.

        

         

 

Selected Consolidated Balance Sheet Data

 

       At 31 December  
     2012      2011      2010      2009      2008  
       £m      £m      £m      £m      £m  

Total assets

     24,877.6         24,694.9         24,345.1         22,351.5         24,463.3   

Net assets

     7,060.6         6,894.3         6,647.9         6,075.7         5,959.8   

Called-up share capital

     126.5         126.6         126.4         125.6         125.5   

Number of shares (in millions)

     1,265.4         1,266.4         1,264.4         1,256.5         1,255.3   

 

Dividends

 

Dividends on the Company’s ordinary shares, when paid, are paid to share owners as of a record date, which is fixed by the Company.

 

2


Table of Contents

The table below sets forth the amounts of first interim, final or second interim and total dividends paid on the Company’s ordinary shares in respect of each fiscal year indicated. In the United States, the Company’s ordinary shares are represented by ADSs, which are evidenced by American Depositary Receipts (ADRs) or held in book-entry form. The Group uses the terms ‘ADS’ and ‘ADR’ interchangeably. The dividends are also shown translated into US cents per ADS using the approximate average rates as shown in the exchange rate table below, for each year presented.

 

             Pence per ordinary share               US cents per ADS  
In respect of the year ended 31 December:    First
Interim
     Final or
Second
Interim
     Total      First
Interim
     Final or
Second
Interim
     Total  

2008

     5.19         10.28         15.47         48.07         95.21         143.28   

2009

     5.19         10.28         15.47         40.66         80.53         121.19   

2010

     5.97         11.82         17.79         46.15         91.37         137.52   

2011

     7.46         17.14         24.60         59.80         137.39         197.19   

2012

     8.80         19.71         28.51         69.75         156.22         225.97   

 

The 2012 first interim dividend was paid on 12 November 2012 to share owners on the register at 12 October 2012. The 2012 proposed final dividend will be paid on 8 July 2013 to share owners on the register at 7 June 2013.

 

Exchange rates

 

Fluctuations in the exchange rate between the pound sterling and the US dollar will affect the dollar equivalent of the pound sterling prices of the Company’s ordinary shares on The London Stock Exchange Limited (The London Stock Exchange) and, as a result, are likely to affect the market price of the ADSs in the United States. US dollar amounts paid to holders of ADSs also depend on the sterling/US dollar exchange rate at the time of payment.

 

The following table sets forth for each of the most recent six months, the high and low exchange rates between the pound sterling and the US dollar. As at 25 April 2013, the closing exchange rate was 1.5429.

 

Month ended    High      Low  

31 October 2012

     1.6183         1.5941   

30 November 2012

     1.6124         1.5856   

31 December 2012

     1.6276         1.6032   

31 January 2013

     1.6254         1.5692   

28 February 2013

     1.5794         1.5136   

31 March 2013

     1.5224         1.4902   

 

The annual average exchange rates between the pound sterling and the US dollar for each of the five years ended 31 December were:

 

Year ended 31 December    Average  

2008

     1.8524   

2009

     1.5667   

2010

     1.5461   

2011

     1.6032   

2012

     1.5852   

 

3


Table of Contents

B. Capitalization and Indebtedness

 

Not applicable.

 

C. Reasons for the Offer and Use of Proceeds

 

Not applicable.

 

4


Table of Contents

D. Risk Factors

 

The Company is subject to a variety of possible risks that could adversely impact its revenues, results of operations or financial condition. Some of these risks relate to the industries in which the Company operates while others are more specific to the Company. The table below sets out principal risks the Company has identified that could adversely affect it. See also the discussion of Forward-Looking Statements preceding Item 1.

 

Risk      Potential impact
Clients       
The Group competes for clients in a highly-competitive industry and client loss may have a material adverse effect on the Group’s market share and its business, revenues, results of operations, financial condition or prospects.     

Competitors include large multinational advertising and marketing communication companies and regional and national marketing services companies, database marketing and modelling companies, telemarketers and internet companies.

 

Service agreements with clients are generally terminable by the client on 90 days’ notice and many clients put their advertising and communications business up for competitive review from time to time. The ability to attract new clients and to retain or increase the amount of work from existing clients may also in some cases be limited by clients’ policies on conflicts of interest.

The Group receives a significant portion of its revenues from a limited number of large clients and the loss of these clients could have a material adverse effect on the Group’s prospects, business, financial condition and results of operations.      A relatively small number of clients contribute a significant percentage of the Group’s consolidated revenues. The Group’s 10 largest clients accounted for 17.4% of revenues in the year ended 31 December 2012. Clients generally are able to reduce advertising and marketing spend or cancel projects on short notice. The loss of one or more of the Group’s largest clients, if not replaced by new client accounts or an increase in business from existing clients, would adversely affect the Group’s financial condition.
Economic       
The Group’s businesses are subject to recessionary economic cycles. Many of the economies in which the Group operates (including the Eurozone) currently have significant economic challenges.      Reduction in client spending or postponing spending on the services offered by the Group or switching of client expenditure to non-traditional media and renegotiation of contract terms can lead to reduced profitability and cash flow.
Financial       
Currency exchange rate fluctuations could adversely impact the Group’s consolidated results.      The Company’s reporting currency is pounds sterling. Given the Group’s significant international operations, fluctuations in currency exchange rates can affect the Group’s consolidated results.
The interest rates and fees payable by the Group in respect of certain of its borrowings are, in part, influenced by the credit ratings issued by the international debt rating agencies.      If the Company’s financial performance and outlook materially deteriorate, a ratings downgrade could occur and the interest rates and fees payable on certain of the Company’s revolving credit facilities and certain of the Group’s bonds could be increased.
The Group is subject to credit risk through the default of a client or other counterparty.     

The Group is generally paid in arrears for its services. Invoices are typically payable within 30 to 60 days.

 

The Group commits to media and production purchases on behalf of some of its clients as principal or agent depending on the client and market circumstances. If a client is unable to pay sums due, media and production companies may look to the Group to pay such amounts to which it committed as an agent on behalf of those clients.

Mergers & Acquisitions       
The Group may be unsuccessful in evaluating material risks involved in completed and future acquisitions and may be unsuccessful in integrating any acquired operations with its existing businesses.      The Group regularly reviews potential acquisitions of businesses that are complementary to its operations and clients’ needs. If material risks are not identified prior to acquisition or the Group experiences difficulties in integrating an acquired business, it may not realise the expected benefits from such an acquisition and the Group’s financial condition could be adversely affected.
Goodwill and other intangible assets recorded on the Group’s balance sheet with respect to acquired companies may become impaired.      The Group has a significant amount of goodwill and other intangible assets recorded on its balance sheet with respect to acquired companies. The Group annually tests the carrying value of goodwill and other intangibles for impairment. The estimates and assumptions about results of operations and cash flows made in connection with impairment testing could differ from future results of operations and cash flows. Future events could cause the Group to conclude that the asset values associated with a given operation have become impaired which could have a material impact on the Group’s financial condition.

 

5


Table of Contents
Risk      Potential impact
Operational         
The Group operates in 110 countries and is exposed to the risks of doing business internationally.      The Group’s international operations are subject to the following risk factors: (i) restrictions and/or changes in taxation on repatriation of earnings; (ii) economic, social or political instability within different countries, regions and markets; (iii) changes in foreign laws and regulatory requirements, such as those on foreign ownership of assets or data usage; and (iv) uncertainty or potential ineffectiveness or lack of enforcement in relation to the Group’s client service agreements or other contractual rights.
People       
The Group’s performance could be adversely affected if it were unable to attract and retain key talent or had inadequate talent management and succession planning for key management roles.      The Group is highly dependent on the talent, creative abilities and technical skills of our personnel as well as their relationships with clients. The Group is vulnerable to the loss of personnel to competitors and clients leading to disruption to the business.
Regulatory/Legal       
The Group may be subject to regulations restricting its activities or effecting changes in taxation.      Governments, government agencies and industry self-regulatory bodies from time to time adopt statutes and regulations that directly or indirectly affect the form, content and scheduling of advertising, public relations and public affairs and market research or otherwise limit the scope of the activities of the Group and its clients which could have a material adverse impact on our financial position. Changes in tax laws and international tax treaties or their application may also adversely affect the Group’s reported results.
The Group may be exposed to liabilities from allegations that certain of its clients’ advertising claims may be false or misleading or that its clients products may be defective or harmful.      The Group works for a large number of clients across a broad spectrum of industries and end markets, some of which may become subject to litigation. As a consequence of providing services to such clients, the Group may itself become involved as a defendant in litigation brought against its clients by third parties, including its clients, competitors or consumers or governmental or regulatory authorities.
The Group is subject to strict anti-corruption and anti-bribery legislation and enforcement in the countries in which it operates.      The Group may be exposed to liabilities in the event of breaches of anti-corruption and anti-bribery legislation in all of the 110 countries in which it operates.
The Group is subject to strict data protection and privacy legislation in the jurisdictions in which it operates and relies extensively on information technology systems. The Group operates on a largely decentralised basis with a large number of different agencies and operating entities and the resulting size and diversity of the operational systems increases the vulnerability of such systems to breakdown or malicious intrusion.      The Group may be subject to investigative or enforcement action or legal claims or incur fines, damages, or costs if the Group fails adequately to protect data or observe privacy legislation in every instance. A system breakdown or intrusion could have a material adverse effect on the Group’s business, revenues, results of operations, financial condition or prospects.
Civil liabilities or judgements against the Company or its directors or officers based on U.S. federal or state securities laws may not be enforceable in the U.S. or in England and Wales or in Jersey.      The Company is a public limited company incorporated under the laws of Jersey. Some of the Company’s directors and officers reside outside of the United States. In addition, a substantial portion of the directly owned assets of the Company are located outside of the United States. As a result, it may be difficult or impossible for investors to effect service of process within the United States against the Company or its directors and officers or to enforce against them any of the judgements, including those obtained in original actions or in actions to enforce judgements of the U.S. courts, predicated upon the civil liability provisions of the federal or state securities laws of the United States.

 

6


Table of Contents

ITEM 4. INFORMATION ON THE COMPANY

 

The Company operates through a number of established global, multinational and national advertising and marketing services companies that are organised into four business segments. Our largest segment is Advertising and Media Investment Management where we operate the well-known advertising networks Ogilvy & Mather Advertising, JWT, Y&R, Grey, Bates CHI&Partners and the United Network, as well as Media Investment Management companies such as MediaCom, MEC, Mindshare, Maxus and tenthavenue. Our other segments are Consumer Insight, where our operations are conducted through Kantar; Public Relations & Public Affairs, where we operate through well-known companies such as Burson-Marsteller, Cohn & Wolfe, Hill+Knowlton Strategies and Ogilvy Public Relations; and Branding & Identity, Healthcare and Specialist Communications, where our operations are conducted by B to D Group, ghg, Wunderman, Sudler & Hennessey, OgilvyOne Worldwide, Ogilvy CommonHealth Worldwide, G2, OgilvyAction, 24/7 Media, POSSIBLE, AKQA and other companies.

 

The Company’s ordinary shares are admitted to the Official List of the UK Listing Authority and trade on The London Stock Exchange and American Depositary Shares (which are evidenced by ADRs or held in book-entry form) representing deposited ordinary shares are quoted on the NASDAQ Global Select Market (NASDAQ). At 25 April 2013 the Company had a market capitalisation of £13.6 billion.

 

The Company’s executive office is located at 27 Farm Street, London, United Kingdom, W1J 5RJ, Tel:+44 (0)20 7408 2204 and its registered office is located at Queensway House, Hilgrove Street, St Helier, Jersey JE1 IES.

 

A. History and Development of the Company

 

WPP plc was incorporated in Jersey on 25 October 2012 under the name WPP 2012 plc.

 

On 2 January 2013, under a scheme of arrangement between WPP 2012 Limited (formerly known as WPP plc), (Old WPP), the former holding company of the Group, and its share owners pursuant to Article 125 of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991, and as sanctioned by the Royal Court of Jersey (the Jersey Court), a Jersey incorporated and United Kingdom tax resident company, WPP 2012 plc became the new parent company of the WPP Group and adopted the name WPP plc. Under the scheme of arrangement, all the issued shares in Old WPP were cancelled and the same number of new shares were issued to WPP plc in consideration for the allotment to share owners of one share in WPP plc for each share in Old WPP held on the record date, 31 December 2012. Citibank, N.A., depositary for the ADSs representing Old WPP shares, cancelled Old WPP ADSs held in book-entry uncertificated form in the direct registration system maintained by it and issued ADSs representing shares of WPP plc in book entry uncertificated form in the direct registration system maintained by it to the holders. Holders of certificated ADSs, or ADRs, of Old WPP were entitled to receive ADSs of WPP plc upon surrender of the Old WPP ADSs, or ADRs, to the Depositary. Each Old WPP ADS represented five shares of Old WPP and each WPP plc ADS represents five shares of WPP plc.

 

Pursuant to Rule 12g-3 under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the Exchange Act), WPP plc succeeded to Old WPP’s registration and periodic reporting obligations under the Exchange Act.

 

Old WPP was incorporated in Jersey on 12 September 2008 and became the holding company of the WPP Group on 19 November 2008 when the company now known as WPP 2008 Limited, the previous holding company of the WPP Group which was incorporated in England and Wales, completed a reorganisation of its capital and corporate structure. WPP 2008 Limited had itself become the holding company of the Group on 25 October 2005 when the company now known as WPP 2005 Limited, the original holding company of the WPP Group, completed a reorganisation of its capital and corporate structure. WPP 2005 Limited was incorporated and registered in England and Wales in 1971 and is a private limited company under the Companies Act 1985, and until 1985 operated as a manufacturer and distributor of wire and plastic products. In 1985, new investors acquired a significant interest in WPP and changed the strategic direction of the Company from being a wire and plastics manufacturer and distributor to being a multinational communications services organisation. Since then,

 

7


Table of Contents

the Company has grown both organically and by the acquisition of companies, most significantly the acquisitions of JWT Group, Inc. in 1987, The Ogilvy Group, Inc. in 1989, Young & Rubicam Inc. (Young & Rubicam or Young & Rubicam Brands, as the group is now known) in 2000, Tempus Group plc (Tempus) in 2001, Cordiant Communications Group plc (Cordiant) in 2003, Grey Global Group, Inc. (Grey) in 2005, 24/7 Real Media Inc (TFSM) in 2007, Taylor Nelson Sofres plc (TNS) in 2008 and AKQA Holdings, Inc. (AKQA) in 2012.

 

The Company spent £586.6 million, £532.4 million and £215.2 million for acquisitions and investments in 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively, including payments in respect of loan note redemptions and earnout payments resulting from acquisitions in prior years, net of cash and cash equivalents acquired (net) and proceeds on disposal of investments. For the same periods, cash spent on purchases of property, plant and equipment and other intangible assets was £330.1 million, £253.2 million and £217.5 million, respectively, and cash spent on share repurchases and buy-backs was £134.5 million, £182.2 million and £46.4 million, respectively.

 

B. Business Overview

 

The Company’s business comprises the provision of communications services on a national, multinational and global basis. It operates from over 3,000 offices in 110 countries including associates. The Company organises its businesses in the following areas: Advertising and Media Investment Management; Consumer Insight; Public Relations & Public Affairs; and Branding & Identity, Healthcare and Specialist Communications (including direct, digital, promotion and relationship marketing).

 

Approximately 41% of the Company’s reported revenues in 2012 were from Advertising and Media Investment Management, with the remaining 59% of its revenues being derived from the business segments of Consumer Insight; Public Relations & Public Affairs; and Branding & Identity, Healthcare and Specialist Communications.

 

The following table shows, for the last three fiscal years, reported revenue attributable to each business segment in which the Company operates.

 

Revenue 1    2012      2011      2010  
       £m     

% of

total

     £m     

% of

total

     £m     

% of

total

 

Advertising and Media Investment Management

     4,273.2         41.2         4,157.2         41.5         3,733.3         40.0   

Consumer Insight

     2,460.2         23.7         2,458.0         24.5         2,430.2         26.0   

Public Relations & Public Affairs

     917.1         8.8         885.4         8.8         844.5         9.1   

Branding & Identity, Healthcare and Specialist Communications

     2,722.6         26.3         2,521.2         25.2         2,323.0         24.9   

Total

     10,373.1         100.0         10,021.8         100.0         9,331.0         100.0   
1    

Intersegment sales have not been separately disclosed as they are not material.

 

The following table shows, for the last three fiscal years, reported revenue attributable to each geographic area in which the Company operates and demonstrates the Company’s regional diversity.

 

Revenue 1    2012      2011      2010  
       £m     

% of

total

     £m     

% of

total

     £m     

% of

total

 

North America 2

     3,546.5         34.2         3,388.2         33.8         3,299.8         35.3   

United Kingdom

     1,275.2         12.3         1,183.5         11.8         1,087.6         11.7   

Western Continental Europe 3

     2,439.2         23.5         2,505.1         25.0         2,325.3         24.9   

Asia Pacific, Latin America, Africa & Middle East and Central & Eastern Europe

     3,112.2         30.0         2,945.0         29.4         2,618.3         28.1   

Total

     10,373.1         100.0         10,021.8         100.0         9,331.0         100.0   
1    

Intersegment sales have not been separately disclosed as they are not material.

2    

North America includes the US with revenues of £3,309.4 million (2011: £3,149.9 million, 2010: £3,097.9 million).

3    

Western Continental Europe includes Ireland with revenues of £36.6 million (2011: £40.3 million, 2010: £37.4 million).

 

8


Table of Contents

The Company’s principal disciplines within each of its business segments are described below. Item 4C sets forth the Group brands operating within each discipline.

 

Advertising and Media Investment Management

 

Advertising – The principal functions of an advertising agency are the planning and creation of marketing and branding campaigns and the design and production of advertisements for all types of media such as television, cable, the internet, radio, magazines, newspapers and outdoor locations such as billboards.

 

Media Investment Management – GroupM is WPP’s leading global media investment management operation. With its agencies, GroupM has capabilities in business science, consumer insight, communications and media planning implementation, interactions, content development, and sports and entertainment marketing. The primary purpose of GroupM is to maximise the performance of WPP’s media agencies, operating not only as a parent company but as a collaborator on performance-enhancing activities, such as trading, content creation, sports, digital, finance, tool development and other business-critical capabilities, in order to leverage the combination of GroupM’s core and talent resources. Our offering in this discipline also includes the network tenthavenue, which integrates some of the Group’s key specialist media offerings in online, mobile, experiential and out of home (OOH).

 

Consumer Insight

 

To help optimise its worldwide research offering to clients, the Company’s separate global research and strategic marketing consultancy businesses are managed on a centralised basis under the umbrella of the Kantar Group. The Kantar Group offering includes: custom research in a wide range of business sectors and areas of marketplace information including strategic market studies; brand positioning; equity research; customer satisfaction surveys; product development; international research; advanced modeling; advertising research; pre-testing, tracking and sales modeling; and trends and futures research and consultancy.

 

Public Relations & Public Affairs

 

Public Relations & Public Affairs companies advise clients who are seeking to communicate with consumers, governments and/or the business and financial communities. Public Relations & Public Affairs activities include national and international corporate, financial and marketing communications, crisis management, reputation management, public affairs and government lobbying.

 

Branding & Identity, Healthcare and Specialist Communications

 

Branding & Identity – consumer, corporate and employee branding and design services, covering identity, packaging, literature, events, training and architecture.

 

Healthcare Communications – provide integrated healthcare marketing solutions from advertising to medical education and online marketing.

 

Direct, Digital, Promotion & Relationship Marketing – the full range of general and specialist customer, channel, direct, field, retail, promotional and point-of-sale services.

 

Specialist Communications – a comprehensive range of specialist services, from custom media and multicultural marketing to event, sports, youth and entertainment marketing; corporate and business-to-business; and media, technology and production services.

 

9


Table of Contents

WPP Digital – Through WPP Digital, WPP makes acquisitions and strategic investments in companies that bolster the Group’s presence in digital marketing & media and provide access for WPP companies and their clients to a portfolio of digital experts. Services provided by WPP Digital full-service interactive agencies include: digital marketing solutions for advertisers and publishers; integrated digital marketing strategy services; mobile solutions for handset manufacturers and wireless operators; creating measurable interactive marketing; and proprietary platforms which enable advertisers to engage with global audiences across the universe of digital media.

 

Manufacturing

 

The original business of the Group remains as the manufacturing division, which operates through subsidiaries of Wire and Plastic Products Limited. The division produces a wide range of products for commercial, industrial and retail applications.

 

WPP Head Office

 

WPP, the parent company, with its offices in London, New York, Tokyo, Hong Kong, Shanghai and São Paulo develops the professional and financial strategy of the Group, promotes operating efficiencies, coordinates cross referrals of clients among the Group companies and monitors the financial performance of its operating companies. The principal activity of the Group continues to be the provision of communications services worldwide. WPP acts only as a parent company and does not trade. The parent company complements the operating companies in three distinct ways.

 

   

First, the parent company relieves them of much administrative work. Financial matters (such as planning, budgeting, reporting, control, treasury, tax, mergers, acquisitions, investor relations, legal affairs and internal audit) are co-ordinated centrally.

 

   

Second, the parent company encourages and enables operating companies of different disciplines to work together for the benefit of clients. The parent company also plays an across-the-Group role in the management of talent, property, procurement, information technology (IT), knowledge sharing, practice development, and sustainability.

 

   

And, finally, the parent company itself can function as the 21 st -century equivalent of the full-service agency. For some clients, predominantly those with a vast geographical spread and a need for a wide range of marketing services, WPP can act as a portal to provide a single point of contact and accountability.

 

The parent company operates with a limited group of approximately 400 people.

 

WPP Strategy

 

Our reason for being, the justification for WPP’s existence, continues to be to add value to our clients’ businesses and our people’s careers. Our goal remains to be the world’s most successful provider of communications services to multinational, regional and local companies, not just the largest.

 

The Group has four core strategic priorities.

 

   

Increase the share of revenues from the faster-growing markets of Asia Pacific, Latin America, Africa and the Middle East, and Central and Eastern Europe to 35-40%.

 

   

Increase the share of revenues of new media to 35-40%.

 

   

Increase the share of more measurable marketing services – such as Consumer Insight and direct, digital and interactive – to be more than 50% of revenues, with a focus on the application of new technology, big data and digital.

 

10


Table of Contents
   

Achieve ‘horizontality’ by ensuring our people work together for the benefit of clients, primarily through two horizontal integrators: client leaders and Country Managers.

 

If we implement this strategy effectively then our business will be geographically and functionally well positioned to compete successfully and to deliver on our long-term financial targets:

 

   

Revenue and gross profit growth greater than the industry average supplemented by acquisitions.

 

   

Annual improvement in headline PBIT margin of 0.5 margin points or more depending on revenue growth and staff cost to revenue ratio improvement of 0.3 margin points or more.

 

   

Annual headline PBIT growth of 10% to 15% delivered through revenue growth, margin expansion and acquisitions.

 

Sustainability

 

Sustainability issues are important to WPP in the work we do for our clients, the way we run our offices and consider our people and other stakeholders. Our five areas of focus are:

 

   

The impact of our work for clients. Our companies advise clients on sustainability, helping them to refine their strategies and create compelling communications. The value of client business supported by our sustainability credentials was worth at least $1.2 billion to the Group in 2012.

 

   

Marketing standards. We work to embed high ethical standards in our conduct and work for clients and to protect consumer data used for marketing purposes.

 

   

Employment practices. Our talent strategy includes competitive remuneration alongside a focus on diversity and inclusion, high-quality training and employee engagement. 32% of Board members and executive leaders are women, although this is still not good enough.

 

   

Environmental performance. We have reduced our carbon footprint per person by 28% since 2006. Our target is a 65% reduction by 2020.

 

   

Social investment including pro bono work. Our total social investment was worth £16.2 million, the equivalent of 1.5% of reported profit before tax.

 

Clients

 

The Group services 350 of the Fortune Global 500 companies, all 30 of the Dow Jones 30, 63 of the NASDAQ 100, 31 of the Fortune e-50 and almost 760 national or multinational clients in three or more disciplines. Almost 480 clients are served in four disciplines, and these clients account for over 57% of Group revenues. The Group also works with almost 360 clients in six or more countries.

 

The Company’s 10 largest clients accounted for 17.4% of the Company’s revenues in the year ended 31 December 2012. No client of the Company represented more than 5% of the Company’s aggregate revenues in 2012. The Group’s companies have maintained long-standing relationships with many of their clients, with an average length of relationship for the top 10 clients of approximately 50 years.

 

Government Regulation

 

From time to time, governments, government agencies and industry self-regulatory bodies in the United States, European Union and other countries in which the Company operates have adopted statutes, regulations, and rulings that directly or indirectly affect the form, content, and scheduling of advertising, public relations and public affairs, and market research, or otherwise limit the scope of the activities of the Company and its clients. Some of the foregoing relate to privacy and data protection and general considerations such as truthfulness, substantiation and interpretation of claims made, comparative advertising, relative responsibilities of clients and advertising, public relations and public affairs firms, and registration of public relations and public affairs firms’ representation of foreign governments.

 

11


Table of Contents

In addition, there is an increasing trend towards expansion of specific rules, prohibitions, media restrictions, labeling disclosures and warning requirements with respect to advertising for certain products, such as over-the-counter drugs and pharmaceuticals, cigarettes, food and certain alcoholic beverages, and to certain groups, such as children. Proposals have been made for the adoption of additional laws and regulations that could further restrict the activities of advertising, public relations and public affairs, and market research firms and their clients. Though the Company does not expect any existing or proposed regulations to have a material adverse impact on the Company’s business, the Company is unable to estimate the effect on its future operations of the application of existing statutes or regulations or the extent or nature of future regulatory action.

 

12


Table of Contents

C. Organizational Structure

 

The Company’s business comprises the provision of communications services on a national, multinational and global basis. It operates out of over 3,000 offices in 110 countries including associates. For a list of the Company’s principal subsidiary undertakings and their country of incorporation see note 29 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

The Company organises its businesses in the following segments: Advertising and Media Investment Management; Consumer Insight; Public Relations & Public Affairs; and Branding & Identity, Healthcare & Specialist Communications. These business segments are comprised of the following principal disciplines: Advertising; Media Investment Management; Consumer Insight; Public Relations & Public Affairs; Branding & Identity; Healthcare Communications; Direct, Digital, Promotion & Relationship Marketing; Specialist Communications; WPP Digital; WPP Digital partner companies; and WPP knowledge community. A listing of the Group brands operating within these disciplines as at April 2013 is set forth below.

 

Advertising

ADK 1

Bates CHI&Partners

CHI&Partners 1

Dentsu Y&R 1, 2, 4

Grey

HS Ad 1

john st.

JWT

Ogilvy & Mather Advertising

Santo

Scangroup 1

Scholz & Friends

Soho Square

TAXI 4

Team Detroit

The Jupiter Drawing Room 1

United Network

Y&R 4

 

Media Investment Management

GroupM:

KR Media

Maxus

MediaCom

MEC

Mindshare

Outrider

Catalyst

Xaxis

Quisma

Other media agencies

M/Six 2

tenthavenue:

Forward

Joule

Kinetic Worldwide

Spafax

 

Consumer Insight

Kantar:

Added Value

Center Partners

IMRB International

Kantar Health

Kantar Japan

Kantar Media

Kantar Operations

Kantar Retail

Kantar Worldpanel

Lightspeed Research

Millward Brown

  

Consumer Insight (continued)

The Futures Company

TNS

Other marketing consultancies

ohal

 

Public Relations & Public Affairs

Blanc & Otus 7

Buchanan Communications

Burson-Marsteller 4

Chime Communications PLC 1

Clarion Communications

Cohn & Wolfe 4

Dewey Square Group

Glover Park Group

Hering Schuppener

Hill+Knowlton Strategies

Ogilvy Government Relations

Ogilvy Public Relations

PBN Hill+Knowlton Strategies

Penn Schoen Berland 4

Prime Policy Group

QGA

RLM Finsbury

Wexler & Walker Public Policy Associates 7

 

Branding & Identity

Addison 6

BDG architecture + design

Coley Porter Bell

Dovetail

FITCH 6

Lambie-Nairn 6

Landor Associates 4, 6

PeclersParis 6

The Brand Union 6

The Partners 6

VBAT 6

 

Healthcare Communications

Feinstein Kean Healthcare 8

GCI Health

ghg

Ogilvy CommonHealth Worldwide

Sudler & Hennessey 4

 

13


Table of Contents

Direct, Digital, Promotion & Relationship Marketing

A. Eicoff & Co

Actis Wunderman 5

AGENDA 5

AKQA

Aqua 5

Barrows 1

Blast Radius 5

Brierley & Partners 1

Designkitchen 5

Dialogue

Digit

EWA

FullSIX 3

Grass Roots 1

G2 9

- G2 Branding & Design

- G2 Interactive

- G2 Direct & Digital

- G2 Promotional Marketing

High Co 1

iconmobile 4

Kassius 5

KBM Group 5

Mando

Maxx Marketing

OgilvyAction

OgilvyOne Worldwide

OOT 2

RTC 4

Smollan Group 1

Smollan/Headcount

Studiocom 4

These Days 5

VML 4

Wunderman 4

 

Specialist Communications

Corporate/B2B

    Ogilvy Primary Contact

Demographic marketing

    Bravo 4

    K&L 4

    MosaicaMD

    UniWorld 1

    Wing 9

Employer branding/recruitment

    JWT Inside

Event/face-to-face marketing

    MJM

    Metro

Foodservice marketing

    The Food Group

  

Specialist Communications (continued)

Sports marketing

    9ine Sports & Entertainment

    JMI 1

    PRISM Group

Entertainment marketing

    Alliance

Youth marketing

    The Geppetto Group

Real estate marketing

    Pace

Technology marketing

    Banner Corporation 4

Media & production services

    The Farm Group

    Imagina 3

    MRC 3

    United Visions

    The Weinstein Company 3

 

WPP Digital

24/7 Media

Acceleration

Blue State Digital

The Data Alliance

Fabric Worldwide 1

F.biz

Hogarth Worldwide

Johannes Leonardo 1

POSSIBLE

Rockfish

Salmon

Syzygy 1

The Media Innovation Group

 

WPP Digital partner companies

Ace Metrix 3

eCommera 3

Globant 1

HDT Holdings Technology 3

In Game Ad Interactive 3

Invidi 3

Jumptap 3

mySupermarket 3

Moment Systems 3

nPario 1

Proclivity Systems 3

Say Media 3

SFX Entertainment 3

Vice Media 3

Visible 1

WildTangent 3

 

WPP knowledge community

The Store

 

 

Notes

1     Associate

2     Joint venture

3      Investment

4     A Young & Rubicam Group company

5     Part of the Wunderman network

6     A member of B to D Group

7     A Hill+Knowlton Strategies company

8     An Ogilvy company

9     A Grey Group company

 

14


Table of Contents

D. Property, Plant and Equipment

 

The majority of the Company’s properties are leased, although certain properties which are used mainly for office space are owned. In the United States owned properties include the 214,000 square foot Young & Rubicam office condominium for their new headquarters located at 3 Columbus Circle in New York, New York and the 152,000 square foot TNS property located near Toledo, Ohio. Other owned properties are in Latin America (principally in Argentina, Brazil, Chile, Mexico, Peru and Puerto Rico), Asia (India and China) and in Europe (Spain, France, UK and Italy). In Europe owned properties include the 135,626 square foot TNS office located at 2 Rue Francis Pedron, Chambourcy, Paris, France and the 101,592 square foot TNS House at Westgate, Hangar Lane, London. Manufacturing facilities are owned in the United Kingdom. Principal leased properties, which are accounted for as operating leases, include office space at the following locations:

 

Location    Use     
 
Approximate
square footage
  
  

636 Eleventh Avenue, New York, NY

   Ogilvy & Mather      554,800   

285 Madison Avenue, New York, NY 1

   Young & Rubicam      459,900   

498 Seventh Avenue, New York, NY

   GroupM, Mindshare,
Maxus, Mediacom
     358,000   

200 Fifth Avenue, New York, NY

   Grey Global Group, Cohn &
Wolfe
     343,000   

500/550 Town Center Drive, Dearborn, MI

   Team Detroit, JWT, Ogilvy
& Mather, Y&R
Advertising, PRISM,
Burrows, ZAAZ
     282,900   

466 Lexington Avenue, New York, NY

   JWT      270,300   

230 Park Avenue South, New York, NY

   Burson-Marsteller,

Landor, Sudler & Hennessey

     270,000   
1    

Short term lease to 30 April 2013 following building sale

 

The Company considers its properties, owned or leased, to be in good condition and generally suitable and adequate for the purposes for which they are used. At 31 December 2012, the fixed asset value (cost less depreciation) representing land, freehold buildings and leasehold buildings as reflected in the Company’s consolidated financial statements was approximately £488.6 million.

 

In 2012 the Company again reduced its core property portfolio. While overall square footage rose by 1.4% from 23.2 million sq ft to 23.5 million sq ft, this was less than half the 2.9% increase in revenue attributable to acquisitions, and considerably less than the 5.8% growth in constant currency revenues.

 

Average square foot per head dropped from 211 sq ft to 207 sq ft, but this was partly offset by a 1.6% increase in cost per square foot to £29.50. As a result, the Company held the establishment cost-to-revenue ratio at 6.7%, flat with prior year and ahead of our long term 7% run-rate target.

 

The Company’s aim for 2013 is to improve on this level in spite of sharp increases in Asia property costs and the impending end of a number of significant below market leases in the region.

 

See note 3 to the Consolidated Financial Statements for a schedule by years of future minimum rental payments to be made and future sublease rental payments to be received, as at 31 December 2012, under non-cancelable operating leases of the Company.

 

ITEM 4A. UNRESOLVED STAFF COMMENTS

 

Not applicable.

 

15


Table of Contents

ITEM 5. OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

Introduction

 

Certain Non GAAP measures included in this operating and financial review and prospects have been derived from amounts calculated in accordance with IFRS but are not themselves IFRS measures. They should not be viewed in isolation as alternatives to the equivalent IFRS measure, rather they should be read in conjunction with the equivalent IFRS measure. These include constant currency, pro-forma (‘like-for-like’), headline PBIT (Profit Before Interest and Taxation), headline PBIT margin, headline PBIT margin on gross profit, headline PBT (Profit Before Taxation), headline EBITDA (Earnings before Interest, Taxation, Depreciation and Amortisation), billings, estimated net new billings, free cash flow and net and average net debt, which we define, explain the use of and reconcile to the nearest IFRS measure on pages 28 to 31.

 

A. Operating Results

 

Overview

 

The Company is one of the world’s most comprehensive marketing communications groups. It operates through a large number of established national, multinational and global advertising and marketing services companies. The Company offers services in four reportable segments:

 

   

Advertising and Media Investment Management;

 

   

Consumer Insight;

 

   

Public Relations & Public Affairs; and

 

   

Branding & Identity, Healthcare and Specialist Communications.

 

In 2012, approximately 41% of the Company’s consolidated revenues were derived from Advertising and Media Investment Management, with the remaining 59% of its revenues being derived from the remaining three segments.

 

The following objectives represent the Group’s key performance indicators.

 

1.   First, to continue to improve operating margins. In 2012, we achieved a headline PBIT margin of 14.8%, a new high. We continue to believe a headline PBIT margin of around 18% or more is a tough, but realistic, objective given that our best-performing companies in each services sector have already demonstrated they can perform at a combined Group margin of 17%. It may well be that headline PBIT as a percentage of gross profit is a more accurate competitive comparison and we achieved 16.1% in 2012, the highest level in the industry.

 

2.   Second, to increase flexibility in the cost structure. In 2012, flexible staff costs (including incentives, freelance and consultants) remained close to historical highs of around 7% of revenues and continue to position the Group extremely well, if current market conditions change.

 

3.   Third, to enhance share owner value and maximize the return on investment on the Company’s substantial free cash flow across the alternative uses of funds: capital expenditure; mergers and acquisitions; and dividends or share buy-backs.

 

4.   Fourth, we will continue to develop the value added by the parent company and build unique integrated marketing approaches for clients. WPP is not just a holding company focused on planning, budgeting, reporting and financial issues, but a parent company that can add value to our clients and our people in the areas of human resources, property, procurement, information technology and practice development including sustainability. This does not mean that we seek to diminish the strength of our operating brands, but rather to learn from one another. Our objective is to maximise the added value for our clients in their businesses and our people in their careers.

 

5.   Fifth, to emphasise revenue growth more as margins improve through our practice development activities, aimed at helping us position our portfolio in the faster-growing functional and geographic areas.

 

16


Table of Contents
6.   Sixth, to improve still further the creative capabilities and reputation of all our businesses by stepping up our training and development programs; by recruiting the finest external talent; by celebrating and rewarding outstanding creative success tangibly and intangibly; by acquiring strong creative companies; and by encouraging, monitoring and promoting our companies’ achievements in winning creative awards.

 

The following discussion is based on the Company’s audited Consolidated Financial Statements beginning on page F-1 of this report. The Group’s consolidated financial statements have been prepared in accordance with IFRS as issued by the IASB.

 

2012, our twenty-seventh year, was another record one, with revenue, profitability, headline PBIT margin and earnings per share all reaching new highs and, for the second year running, the Company was awarded a Cannes Lion for Creative Holding Company of the Year, in recognition of the Company’s collective creative excellence. These record results were achieved against a backdrop of economic uncertainty and fragile client confidence.

 

The share price rose sharply in 2012 – an increase of over 31% to 888.0p at year end. Dividends were increased by almost 16% to 28.51p, a record level.

 

Reported billings were down slightly at £44.4 billion, but up well over 1% in constant currencies. Revenues were up 3.5% to £10.4 billion and up almost 6% in constant currencies. Our revenues exceeded all our competitors for the fifth consecutive year and by an increasing amount.

 

Reported profit before interest and taxation rose over 4% to £1.311 billion from £1.258 billion. Headline PBIT was up over 7% to £1.531 billion against £1.429 billion in 2011 and up over 11% in constant currencies. Headline PBIT margin was 14.8% in 2012 against 14.3% last year, in line with target and also surpassing the historical pro- forma high of 14.3% in 2008. On gross profit, the headline PBIT margin was 16.1%, up 0.6 margin points on 2011.

 

Profit for the year decreased by 2% to £0.895 billion. Headline EBITDA increased by 7% to £1.756 billion. Headline profit before tax was up over 7% to £1.317 billion and reported profit before tax was up over 8% to £1.092 billion. Diluted earnings per share decreased by over 2% to 62.8p, reflecting the release of prior year tax provisions in 2011.

 

Net cash inflow from operating activities strengthened to £0.908 billion in the year. Free cash flow strengthened to £1.094 billion in the year, over £1 billion for the second consecutive year. Net debt averaged £3.2 billion in 2012, up £0.4 billion at 2012 exchange rates, and net debt at 31 December 2012 was £2.8 billion, £0.3 billion higher than 2011, reflecting increased spending on acquisitions (chiefly AKQA) and higher dividends.

 

Estimated net new business billings of £3.9 billion ($6.2 billion) were won in 2012, up almost 21% on 2011.

 

Segment performance

 

Performance of the Group’s businesses is reviewed by management based on headline PBIT. A table showing these amounts by operating sector and geographical area for each of the three years ended 31 December 2012, 2011 and 2010 is presented in note 2 to the Consolidated Financial Statements. To supplement the reportable currency segment information presented in note 2 to the Consolidated Financial Statements, the following tables give details of revenue growth by geographical area and operating sector on a reported, constant currency, and like-for-like basis.

 

17


Table of Contents

Geographical area

 

       Reported
revenue
growth %+/(-)
    

Constant
currency
revenue

growth %+/(-)

     Like-for-like
revenue
growth %+/(-)
 
       2012     2011      2012      2011      2012     2011  

North America

     4.7        2.7         3.7         6.3         (0.1     2.9   

United Kingdom

     7.7        8.8         7.7         8.8         4.0        6.7   

Western Continental Europe 1

     (2.6     7.7         3.7         6.3         0.1        2.2   

Asia Pacific, Latin America, Africa & Middle East and Central & Eastern Europe

     5.7        12.5         9.3         12.6         8.3        10.5   

Total Group

     3.5        7.4         5.8         8.4         2.9        5.3   

1     Western Continental Europe includes Ireland.

               

 

Like-for-like revenue growth in North America declined as the year progressed, from over 1% in the first quarter to down -0.6% in quarter four. Relatively strong growth in the Group’s Advertising and Media Investment Management businesses was more than offset by parts of the Group’s Consumer Insight, Public Relations & Public Affairs and Branding & Identity, Healthcare and Specialist Communications businesses. This seems to be indicative of continued pressure on discretionary client spending. In constant currencies, full year revenue growth was well over 3%, while like-for-like revenues were down marginally at -0.1%.

 

Conversely, and against market trends, the UK showed an improving rate of quarterly like-for-like revenue growth as the year progressed, from 2.5% in the first quarter to over 5% in quarter four. In the last quarter, particularly strong growth in Advertising and Media Investment Management was partly offset by slower growth in Consumer Insight, Branding & Identity and Healthcare Communications. Full year revenue growth in constant currencies was well over 7% and like-for-like growth was 4%.

 

Western Continental Europe, although relatively more difficult, actually showed some improvement in the fourth quarter, with growth in Italy, Turkey and (surprisingly) Greece, but Spain, Portugal, Scandinavia, France, the Netherlands and Switzerland were tougher, with the continuing effects of the Eurozone crisis impacting parts of the region. Full year revenue growth in constant currencies was well over 3%, while like-for-like growth was only slightly positive at 0.1%.

 

Our strongest region in 2012 was again Asia Pacific, Latin America, Africa & Middle East and Central & Eastern Europe, with constant currency growth of over 9% and like-for-like growth of over 8%, principally driven by Latin America and the BRICs 1 .

 

Latin America showed the strongest growth of all of our sub-regions in the year, with constant currency revenues up almost 13% and like-for-like revenues up well over 11%. The Middle East & Africa showed the strongest growth of our sub-regions in the fourth quarter, with like-for-like revenues up almost 10% and with all sectors improving. Full year revenue growth was almost 9%. Central and Eastern Europe, after a difficult third quarter, improved significantly in the final quarter, with like-for-like growth of over 12% in Russia. Full year like-for-like growth in this sub-region was 0.7%.

 

1     Brazil, Russia, India and China

 

18


Table of Contents

Full year revenues for the BRICs, which account for almost $2 billion of revenue, were up over 11% on a like-for-like basis. In 2012, 30% of the Group’s revenues came from Asia Pacific, Latin America, Africa & Middle East and Central & Eastern Europe, 0.6 percentage points more compared with the previous year and against the Group’s strategic objective of 35-40% over the next two to three years. Markets outside North America now account for 66% of our revenues.

 

Operating Sector

 

       Reported
revenue
growth %+/(-)
    

Constant
currency
revenue

growth %+/(-)

     Like-for-like
revenue
growth %+/(-)
 
       2012      2011      2012      2011      2012     2011  

Advertising and Media Investment Management

     2.8         11.4         5.2         12.2         5.1        7.4   

Consumer Insight

     0.1         1.1         2.8         1.7         0.8        0.8   

Public Relations & Public Affairs

     3.6         4.8         4.2         6.2         (1.0     4.6   

Branding & Identity, Healthcare and Specialist Communications

     8.0         8.5         10.2         10.1         2.6        6.9   

Total Group

     3.5         7.4         5.8         8.4         2.9        5.3   

 

Advertising and Media Investment Management remained the strongest-performing sector with full year revenues up 5.2% in constant currencies and 5.1% like-for-like. In the final quarter, constant currency revenues were up 4.0% and like-for-like revenues were up 5.4%, considerably stronger than the third quarter like-for-like growth of 2.9%.

 

Of the Group’s advertising networks, Ogilvy & Mather, which was named Network of the Year at Cannes, performed especially well in North America, the UK and Latin America, with Grey in North America even stronger. However, the Group’s advertising businesses in Western Continental Europe generally remained under pressure with like-for-like revenues down. Growth in the Group’s Media Investment Management businesses has been very consistent throughout the year, with constant currency revenues up over 12% for the year and like-for-like growth of 11.0%. tenthavenue, the ‘engagement’ network focused on out-of-home media, was established towards the end of 2010 and in 2012 showed strong revenue growth, with like-for-like revenues up over 7% following growth of over 14% in 2011. The strong revenue growth across most of the Group’s businesses, together with good cost control, resulted in the combined headline PBIT margin of this sector improving by 1.6 margin points to 17.7%.

 

In 2012, Ogilvy & Mather, JWT, Y&R, Grey and United generated estimated net new business billings of £1.087 billion ($1.740 billion). GroupM (the Group’s Media Investment Management arm, which includes Mindshare, MEC, MediaCom, Maxus, GroupM Search and Xaxis), together with tenthavenue, generated estimated net new business billings of £2.148 billion ($3.437 billion).

 

Consumer Insight revenues grew 2.8% on a constant currency basis, with gross profit up 0.8% on the same basis. On a like-for-like basis revenues were up 0.8% with gross profit down 1.1% on the same basis. The pattern of revenue growth seen in the first nine months continued into the final quarter, with the mature markets of North America and Continental Europe difficult but counterbalanced by strong growth in the faster growing markets of Asia Pacific, Latin America, Africa & the Middle East. In the fourth quarter, the UK also slowed. Headline PBIT margins fell 0.5 margin points to 10.0%, while headline PBIT margins on gross profit fell 0.4 margin points to 13.9%. The central issue continues to be like-for-like revenue growth in the custom businesses in mature markets, where discretionary spending remains under review by clients. Custom businesses in faster-growth markets, and syndicated and semi-syndicated businesses in all markets, remain robust, with strong like-for-like revenue growth.

 

19


Table of Contents

The Group’s Public Relations & Public Affairs businesses had a more difficult year with full-year growth in constant currencies of 4.2% and like-for-like revenues down 1.0%, with continuing pressure in North America and Continental Europe across most of the Group’s brands, only partly offset by strong growth in the UK, Latin America and the Middle East & Africa. Headline PBIT margins fell by 1.2 margin points to 14.9%.

 

At the Group’s Branding & Identity, Healthcare and Specialist Communications businesses (including direct, digital and interactive), constant currency revenues grew strongly at 10.2% with like-for-like growth of 2.6%. Like-for-like revenue growth slipped slightly in quarter four, due primarily to slower growth in parts of the Group’s Branding & Identity and Healthcare Communications businesses, but remained close to 2%. AKQA, the leading digital agency acquired in July 2012, performed well with full year like-for-like revenues up 10%. Headline PBIT margins for the sector as a whole improved slightly, up 0.1 margin points to 14.4%.

 

Over 32% of the Group’s 2012 revenues came from direct, digital and interactive, up over 1.0 percentage point from the previous year and growing 6.7% like-for-like over 2011. Marketing services comprised almost 60% of our revenues in 2012, a similar proportion to 2011.

 

2012 compared with 2011

 

Revenues

 

Reported revenue growth for the year of 3.5% was impacted by the strength of sterling, primarily against the Euro. On a constant currency basis, which excludes the impact of currency movements, revenues were up almost 6%. On a like-for-like basis, which excludes the impact of currency and acquisitions, revenues were up 2.9%, with like- for-like gross profit up 2.4%, reflecting pressure on gross profit in the Group’s Consumer Insight custom businesses in the mature markets of North America, the UK and Western Continental Europe. In the fourth quarter, like-for-like revenues were up 2.5%, an improvement on the third quarter of 1.9%, due to stronger growth in all regions except North America. This reflects a reversal of the declining quarterly like-for-like revenue growth trend which went from 4% in quarter one, to 3% in quarter two and to 2% in quarter three.

 

Operating costs

 

Operating costs increased by 2.8% in 2012 to £8,273.7 million from £8,046.3 million in 2011 on a reported basis and by 4.7% on a constant currency basis. During 2012, the Group continued to reap the benefits of containing operating costs, with improvements across most cost categories, particularly property, commercial and office costs.

 

On a like-for-like basis the average number of people in the Group increased by 1.6% in 2012. On the same basis, the number of people in the Group at 31 December 2012 was 0.4% lower than at the end of 2011. This point-to-point decrease reflects the adjustments in staff costs made in the second half of 2012, following the slowdown in revenue growth after the first quarter of the year. Also on a like-for-like basis, revenues increased by 2.9% and gross profit 2.4%.

 

Reported staff costs, excluding incentives, rose by over 5% and by over 7% in constant currency. Incentive payments amounted to £291 million (or over $465 million) which was well over 16% of headline PBIT before incentives and income from associates compared with £338 million or almost 20% in 2011. Performance in parts of the Group’s custom research, public relations and public affairs, healthcare and direct, digital and interactive businesses fell short of the maximum performance objectives agreed for 2012, as the like-for-like revenue growth rate slowed in quarters two and three in 2012. This followed the record profit and margin performance in 2011, when most of the Group’s operating companies achieved maximum incentive levels. Headline PBIT margins, before all incentives and income from associates, were 16.9%, down 0.1 margin points, compared with 17.0% last year. The Group’s staff cost to revenue ratio, including incentives, increased by 0.3 margin points to 58.9% compared with 58.6% in 2011. Following intentional reductions in 2009 and 2010 after the Lehman crisis, the Group increased its investment in people, particularly in the latter part of 2011 and in early 2012, mainly in the faster-growing geographic and functional markets (such as media investment management and digital) as like-for-like revenues and gross profit increased.

 

20


Table of Contents

In 2012, the ratio of variable staff costs (incentives, freelance and consultants costs) to total staff costs was 11.4%, compared with 12.2% in 2011. As a proportion of revenue, variable staff costs were 6.7% in 2012 compared with 7.2% in 2011.

 

In the second half of 2012, the Group received the proceeds from the sale of the stake in Buddy Media and also completed the sale of the freehold of 285 Madison Avenue, the New York headquarters of Young & Rubicam Inc. These two transactions combined resulted in a gain of £102 million. Offsetting this gain, are restructuring costs of £93.4 million which include £62.9 million of severance cost arising from a structural reassessment of certain of the Group’s operations, primarily in Western Continental Europe; and £30.5 million of other costs, primarily accelerated depreciation of IT assets in the US and Europe, arising from an overhaul of its centralised IT infrastructure.

 

Profit before interest and taxation

 

As a result of the above, reported PBIT rose over 4% to £1.311 billion from £1.258 billion, up over 8% in constant currencies. Headline PBIT rose over 7% to £1.531 billion from £1.429 billion, up over 11% in constant currencies.

 

Finance income, finance costs and revaluation of financial instruments

 

Finance income decreased to £85.9 million in 2012 from £97.3 million in 2011. Finance costs increased to £299.8 million in 2012 from £297.2 million in 2011. Therefore, net finance costs were £213.9 million, up from £199.9 million last year, reflecting higher average net debt, offset by lower funding costs. Revaluation of financial instruments resulted in a charge of £4.7 million in 2012 and a charge of £50.0 million in 2011.

 

Taxation

 

The Company’s effective tax rate on reported profit before tax in 2012 was 18.1%, compared to 9.1% in 2011. The difference in the reported tax rate is primarily due to the release in 2011 of prior year corporate tax provisions following the resolution of a number of open tax matters.

 

Profit for the year

 

Profit for the year decreased by 2.4% to £894.7 million in 2012 from £916.5 million in 2011 on a reported basis and increased by 2.4% in constant currency, reflecting a higher effective tax rate, which is only partially offset by the higher revenue and lower charges for revaluation of financial instruments. In 2012, £822.7 million of profit for the year was attributable to equity holders of the parent and £72.0 million attributable to non-controlling interests. Diluted earnings per share decreased by over 2% (increased by almost 2% in constant currencies) to 62.8p, again reflecting the release of prior year tax provisions in 2011.

 

2011 compared with 2010

 

Revenues

 

Reported revenues were up 7.4% in 2011 to £10,021.8 million from £9,331.0 million in 2010. The Group’s reported revenue growth for the year of over 7% reflected the strength of sterling, primarily against the US dollar. On a constant currency basis, which excludes the impact of currency movements, revenues were up over 8%. On a like-for-like basis, excluding the impact of acquisitions and currency, revenues were up 5.3%, with gross profit up 5.9%. In the fourth quarter, like-for-like revenues were up 4.5%, down slightly on the third quarter, primarily due to stronger comparatives.

 

Despite the slowdown in economic activity resulting from the uncertainty triggered by the Eurozone crisis, advertising and marketing services expenditures continued to rise and there seem to have been some significant changes, particularly in corporate behaviour, to explain why. In 2009, post-Lehman, all bets were off. Consumers

 

21


Table of Contents

and corporates were focused almost totally on rapidly reducing costs and de-leveraging. In 2010 and 2011, however, the situation seemed to change. The financial world did not come to an end as some had predicted. Western-based multinational companies, which today are reputed to be sitting on as much as $2 trillion net cash with relatively un-leveraged balance sheets, were still fearful of making mistakes but prepared to invest in capacity and behind brands in fast-growing markets. At the same time, they were also prepared to invest in brands to maintain or increase market share even in slow-growth Western markets, such as the US and Western Europe. This approach has the virtue of not increasing fixed costs, although we in the communications services business naturally regard brand spending as a fixed investment and not a discretionary cost.

 

On a combined basis, over the last two years, there has been a sequential improvement in like-for-like quarterly revenue growth, with 6.7% for the first quarter, 10.3% in the second, 12.2% for the third and 13.1% for the fourth. This two-year combined sequential quarterly growth continues to reflect increased client advertising and promotional spending – with the former tending to grow faster than the latter, which from our point of view is more positive – across most of the Group’s major geographic markets and functional sectors despite tougher comparatives. Nonetheless, clients understandably continue to demand increased effectiveness and efficiency, i.e. better value for money.

 

Operating costs

 

Operating costs increased by 6.0% in 2011 to £8,046.3 million from £7,587.5 million in 2010 on a reported basis and by 7.1% on a constant currency basis. During 2011, the Group continued to reap the benefits of containing operating costs, with improvements across most cost categories, particularly direct, property, commercial and office costs.

 

On a like-for-like basis the average number of people in the Group increased by 4.6% in 2011. On the same basis, the number of people in the Group at 31 December 2011 was 4.3% higher than at the end of 2010. Also on a like-for-like basis, revenues increased by 5.3% and gross profit 5.9%.

 

Reported staff costs, excluding incentives, rose by 8.6% and by 9.6% in constant currency. Incentive payments amounted to £338 million (or over $500 million) which was almost 20% of headline PBIT before incentives and income from associates and represented close to maximum achievement of agreed performance targets. The Group’s reported staff cost to revenue ratio, including incentives, increased by 0.3 margin points to 58.6% compared with 58.3% in 2010. Following intentional containment in 2009 and 2010 post-Lehman, the Group continued to increase its investment in human capital in 2011, particularly in the faster-growing geographic and functional markets as like-for-like revenues and gross profit increased significantly. However, the Group’s more representative staff costs to gross profit ratio remained flat at 63.6% compared with the prior year, as gross profit grew faster than revenues.

 

In 2011, the ratio of variable staff costs (incentives, freelance and consultants costs) to total staff costs was 12.2%, compared with 13.4% in 2010. As a proportion of revenue, variable staff costs were 7.2% in 2011 compared with 7.8% in 2010.

 

In 2011 we were able to reduce our core property portfolio. Although square footage rose by 1.7% from 22.8 million sq ft to 23.2 million sq ft at the end of the year, this increase was less than the 3.1% of revenue growth attributable to acquisitions and considerably less than constant currency revenue growth of 8.4%, meaning our core portfolio (excluding the impact of acquisitions) reduced. As a result of this improvement in space utilisation the establishment cost-to-revenue ratio in 2011 dropped to 6.7% (in spite of a 3% increase in cost per square foot) from 7.1% in 2010.

 

Profit before interest and taxation

 

As a result of the above, reported PBIT rose over 22% to £1.258 billion from £1.028 billion, up over 23% in constant currencies. Headline PBIT rose over 16% to £1.429 billion from £1.229 billion, up over 17% in constant currencies.

 

22


Table of Contents

Finance income, finance costs and revaluation of financial instruments

 

Finance income increased to £97.3 million in 2011 from £81.7 million in 2010. Finance costs increased to £297.2 million in 2011 from £276.8 million in 2010. Therefore, net finance costs were £199.9 million, up from £195.1 million last year, reflecting lower average net debt, offset by higher funding costs. Revaluation of financial instruments resulted in a charge of £50.0 million in 2011 and income of £18.2 million in 2010. The 2011 charge is predominantly attributable to revaluation of put options over non-controlling interests.

 

Taxation

 

The Company’s effective tax rate on reported profit before tax in 2011 was 9.1%, compared to 22.4% in 2010. The difference was primarily due to the release of prior year corporate tax provisions following the resolution of a number of open tax matters, together with deferred tax credits in relation to amortisation of acquired intangible assets.

 

Profit for the year

 

Profit for the year increased by 38.7% to £916.5 million in 2011 from £661.0 million in 2010 on a reported basis and increased by 40.2% in constant currency, reflecting higher profit margins and a lower effective tax rate. In 2011, £840.1 million of profit for the year was attributable to equity holders of the parent and £76.4 million attributable to non-controlling interests.

 

Inflation

 

As in 2011, in management’s opinion inflation did not have a material impact on the Company’s results for the year or financial position at 31 December 2012.

 

Foreign currency fluctuations

 

See Item 11 for a discussion of the impact of currency exchange rate fluctuations on the Group’s consolidated results.

 

B. Liquidity and Capital Resources

 

General —The primary sources of funds for the Group are cash generated from operations and funds available under its credit facilities. The primary uses of cash funds in recent years have been for debt service and repayment, capital expenditures, acquisitions, share repurchases and cancellations and dividends. For a breakdown of the Company’s sources and uses of cash and for the Company’s liquidity risk management see the “Consolidated Cash Flow Statement” and note 24, which are included as part of the Company’s Consolidated Financial Statements in Item 18 of this Report.

 

23


Table of Contents

There are broadly three alternative uses of funds.

 

   

Capital expenditure, which usually approximates the depreciation cost. Pressure here has eased as technology pricing has fallen, although we have increased investment in our digital- and technology-based service offering, in line with our strategic goals. The Group has actively assessed its IT infrastructure in 2012 and consequently accelerated its overhaul of centralised IT services, although the pace of process simplification, offshoring and outsourcing needs to be quickened. The Company has also invested significantly more in real estate following lease renewals to secure greater efficiencies. A large part of the proceeds from the sale of the freehold of 285 Madison Avenue in New York have been reinvested in relocating the headquarters of Young & Rubicam Inc. to a more modern, efficient facility at 3 Columbus Circle.

 

   

Mergers and acquisitions, which have historically taken the lion’s share of free cash flow. Here the Group has raised the hurdle rate on capital employed so that return on capital may be increased. There is a very significant pipeline of reasonably-priced small- and medium-sized potential acquisitions, with the exception of Brazil and India and digital in the US, where prices seem to have got ahead of themselves because of pressure on our competitors to catch up. This is clearly reflected in some of the operational and governance issues that are starting to surface elsewhere in the industry, particularly in fast-growing markets like China and Brazil.

 

The Group’s acquisition focus in 2012 was again on the triple play of faster-growing geographic markets, new media and consumer insight, including the application of technology and big data, totally consistent with the Group’s strategic priorities in the areas of geography, new communication services and measurability. In 2012, the Group spent £500 million on initial acquisition payments, net of cash acquired and disposal proceeds. Net acquisition spend is currently targeted at around £300 to £400 million per annum and the Group will continue to seize opportunities in line with its strategy.

 

   

Dividends or share buy-backs. The Group has increasingly come to the view, based on co-operative research with leading investment institutions, that, currently, the markets favour consistent increases in dividends and higher maintainable pay-out ratios, along with anti-dilutive buy-backs and, of course, sensibly-priced strategic acquisitions.

 

Following the strong first-half results in 2012, the Board raised the interim dividend by 18%. The final dividend has been increased by 15%, bringing the total dividend for the year to 28.51p per share, up 15.9%. Dividends paid in respect of 2012 will total almost £360 million for the year.

 

Share buy-backs will continue to be targeted to absorb any share dilution from issues of options or restricted stock, although the Company does also have considerable free cash flow to take advantage of any anomalies in market values, as it did last year. Share buy-backs in 2012 cost £135 million, representing 1.3% of issued share capital.

 

The Group’s liquidity is affected primarily by the working capital flows associated with its media buying activities on behalf of clients. The working capital movements relate primarily to the Group’s billings. Billings comprise the gross amounts billed to clients in respect of commission-based/fee-based income together with the total of other fees earned. In 2012, billings were £44.4 billion, or 4.3 times the revenue of the Group. The inflows and outflows associated with media buying activity therefore represent significant cash flow within each month of the year and are forecast and re-forecast on a regular basis throughout the year by the Group’s treasury staff so as to ensure that there is continuing coverage of peak requirements through committed borrowing facilities from the Group’s bankers and other sources.

 

24


Table of Contents

Liquidity risk management —The Group manages liquidity risk by ensuring continuity and flexibility of funding even in difficult market conditions. Undrawn committed borrowing facilities are maintained in excess of peak net borrowing levels and debt maturities are closely monitored. Targets for debt and cash position are set on an annual basis and, to assist in meeting this, working capital targets are set for all the Group’s major operations. See additional discussion on liquidity risk in note 24 to the consolidated financial statements.

 

Debt

 

The Company’s borrowings consist of bonds and revolving credit facilities, details on the Company’s borrowings are provided in note 10 to the consolidated financial statements.

 

Borrowings under the Revolving Credit Facility are governed by certain financial covenants based on the results and financial position of the Group, including requirements that (i) the interest coverage ratio for each financial period equal or exceed 5.0 to 1 and (ii) the ratio of borrowed funds to earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation and amortisation at 30 June and 31 December in each year shall not exceed 3.5 to 1, both covenants as defined in the relevant agreement. The Group is in compliance with both covenants.

 

Hedging of financial instruments —The Group’s policy on interest rate and foreign exchange rate management sets out the instruments and methods available to hedge interest and currency risk exposures and the control procedures in place to ensure effectiveness. The Group uses derivative financial instruments to reduce exposure to foreign exchange risk and interest rate movements. The Group does not hold or issue derivative financial instruments for speculative purposes.

 

In 2012, net cash inflow from operating activities was £908.3 million. Free cash flow available for debt repayment, acquisitions, share buy-backs and dividends was £1,094.0 million. This free cash flow was partially absorbed by £586.6 million in net acquisitions and disposals, by £134.5 million in share repurchases and buy-backs and by £306.6 million in dividends, leaving £66.3 million.

 

In September 2012, the Group successfully issued $500 million of 10-year bonds at a coupon of 3.625%, together with $300 million of 30-year bonds at 5.125%.

 

At 31 December 2012, the Group’s net debt was £2.8 billion, up £0.3 billion from £2.5 billion in 2011, reflecting increased spending on acquisitions (chiefly AKQA) and higher dividends. Net debt averaged £3.2 billion in 2012, up £0.4 billion at 2012 exchange rates. The Group’s average net debt was around 1.8 times headline EBITDA in 2012 compared with 1.7 times in 2011, well within the Group’s current target range of 1.5-2.0 times.

 

Interest (finance cost net of finance income, excluding revaluation of financial instruments) cover based on headline PBIT in 2012 was 7.2 times. So far, in the first three months of 2013, average net debt was up approximately £0.3 billion at £3.0 billion against £2.7 billion for the same period in 2012, at 2013 exchange rates.

 

With a current equity market capitalisation of approximately £13.6 billion, the total enterprise value of the Company is approximately £16.6 billion, a multiple of 9.3 times 2012 headline EBITDA.

 

The Company’s borrowings are evenly distributed between fixed and floating rate debt. Given the strong cash generation of the business, its debt maturity profile and available facilities, the directors believe the Company has sufficient liquidity to match its requirements for the foreseeable future.

 

Refer to Item 5F for details on the Company’s material commitments for capital expenditures at 31 December 2012.

 

C. Research and Development, Patents and Licenses

 

Not applicable.

 

25


Table of Contents

D. Trend Information

 

The discussion below and in the rest of this Item 5 includes forward-looking statements regarding plans, objectives, projections and anticipated future performance based on assumptions that are subject to risks and uncertainties. As such, actual results or outcomes may differ materially from those discussed in the forward-looking statements. See “Forward-Looking Statements” preceding Item 1 in this annual report.

 

In the first quarter of 2013, reported revenues were up 5.9% at £2.532 billion. Revenues in constant currency were up 5.1%, reflecting the slight weakness of the pound sterling against the US dollar and the Euro. On a like-for-like basis, excluding the impact of acquisitions and currency fluctuations, revenues were up 2.1% with like-for-like gross profit up 1.9% compared with the same period last year, as the scale of digital activities increased.

 

The pattern of revenue growth in 2013 has started similarly to the final quarter of 2012, with constant currency growth showing continuing improvement across all sectors, except Public Relations & Public Affairs, and across all geographies. On a like-for-like basis, Advertising and Media Investment Management and Branding & Identity, Healthcare and Specialist Communications (including direct, digital and interactive), as in the final quarter of 2012, were the strongest by sector, with Consumer Insight also improving. Our budgets for 2013 indicated like-for-like growth of around 3% over last year. For the first three months actual performance was well ahead of the projections for quarter one. A preliminary look at our quarter one revised forecasts for the full year indicates revenue growth ahead of budget with a stronger second half than previously, partly reflecting easier comparatives with the second half of 2012. The mature markets of the United States and Western Continental Europe slowed in 2012, although the United Kingdom, against market trends, grew strongly. This pattern has continued into the first quarter of 2013 and as indicated in the budgets for this year, the faster growing markets of Asia Pacific, Latin America, Africa & Middle East and Central & Eastern Europe were strongest in the first quarter, followed by the United Kingdom. Headline PBIT is above budget and well ahead of last year and the increase in margin is in line with the Group’s full year headline PBIT margin target of 0.5 margin points improvement.

 

The Group gained a total of £940 million ($1.504 billion) in net new business wins (including all losses) in the first quarter, compared to £1.159 billion ($1.855 billion) in the same period last year.

 

Concerns globally about the Eurozone crisis, the Middle East, a Chinese or BRICs hard or soft landing and, perhaps, most importantly, dealing with the US deficit and a record $16 trillion of debt, continue to make clients reluctant to take further risks, despite stronger balance sheets. Clients remain focused on a strategy of adding capacity and brand building in both fast growth geographic markets and functional markets like media and digital.

 

The pattern of 2013 looks similar to 2012 and equally demanding, perhaps with slightly increased client confidence balancing the lack of maxi- or mini-quadrennial events. Forecasts of worldwide real GDP growth still hover around 3%, with inflation of 2% giving nominal GDP growth of 5%. Advertising as a proportion of GDP should at least remain constant overall, although it is still at relatively depressed historical levels, particularly in mature markets, post-Lehman and advertising should, as a result, grow at least at a similar rate to nominal GDP. Both consumers and corporates are likely to remain cautious and risk averse, but corporates should continue to invest in capacity and brands in fast growth markets, and in slow growth markets invest in brands to maintain market share, as they squeeze capacity. 2014 looks a better prospect, however, with the World Cup in Brazil, the Winter Olympics in Sochi and the United States mid-term Congressional elections.

 

26


Table of Contents

E. Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements

 

None.

 

F. Tabular Disclosure of Contractual Obligations

 

The following summarises the Company’s estimated contractual obligations at 31 December 2012, and the effect such obligations are expected to have on its liquidity and cash flows in the future periods. Certain obligations presented below held by one subsidiary of the Company may be guaranteed by another subsidiary in the ordinary course of business.

 

                Payments due in  
(£m)    Total      2013      2014      2015      2016      2017      Beyond
2017
 

Debt financing under the Revolving Credit Facility and in relation to unsecured loan notes 1

  

Eurobonds

     1,503.2         487.5        —           406.3        609.4         —           —     

Sterling and convertible bonds

     1,050.0         —           450.0         —           —           400.0        200.0   

US$ bonds

     1,589.1         —           596.4         —           —           —           992.7   

Other

     15.4         —           15.4         —           —           —           —     

Subtotal

     4,157.7         487.5        1,061.8         406.3         609.4         400.0         1,192.7   

Interest payable

     1,120.9         233.9         183.0         123.3         98.0         65.1         417.6   

Total

     5,278.6         721.4         1,244.8         529.6         707.4         465.1         1,610.3   

Operating leases 2

     2,171.2         356.6         306.6         274.6         225.7         179.1         828.6   

Capital commitments 3

     47.0         47.0         —           —           —           —           —     

Investment commitments 3

     18.8         18.8         —           —           —           —           —     

Estimated obligations under acquisition earnouts and put option agreements

     338.3         97.7         38.6         78.4         32.5         86.7         4.4   

Total contractual obligations

     7,853.9         1,241.5         1,590.0         882.6         965.6         730.9         2,443.3   

 

1    

In addition to debt financing under the Revolving Credit Facility and in relation to unsecured loan notes, the Company had short-term overdrafts at 31 December 2012 of £586.0 million. The Group’s net debt at 31 December 2012 was £2,821.2 million and is analysed in Item 5B.

2    

Operating leases are net of sub-let rentals of £17.4 million.

3    

Capital and investment commitments include commitments contracted, but not provided for in respect of property, plant and equipment and in respect of interests in associates and other investments, respectively.

 

The Company expects to make annual contributions to its funded defined benefit plans, as determined in line with local conditions and practices. Contributions in respect of unfunded plans are paid as they fall due. The total contributions (for funded plans) and benefit payments (for unfunded plans) paid for 2012 amounted to £56.5 million (2011: £66.8 million, 2010: £53.3 million). Employer contributions and benefit payments in 2013 are expected to be in the range of £50 million to £70 million depending on the performance of the assets. Projections for years after 2013 are subject to a number of factors, including future asset performance and changes in assumptions which mean the Company is unable to make sufficiently reliable estimations of future contributions.

 

27


Table of Contents

Non-GAAP Information

 

Constant currency

 

The Company’s reporting currency is the UK pound sterling. However, the Company’s significant international operations give rise to fluctuations in foreign exchange rates. To neutralise foreign exchange impact and to better illustrate the underlying change in revenue and profit from one year to the next, the Company has adopted the practice of discussing results in both reportable currency (local currency results translated into pounds sterling at the prevailing foreign exchange rate) and constant currency.

 

The Group uses US dollar-based, constant currency models to measure performance. These are calculated by applying budgeted 2012 exchange rates to local currency reported results for the current and prior year. This gives a US-dollar denominated income statement and balance sheet which exclude any variances attributable to foreign exchange rate movements.

 

Pro-forma (‘like-for-like’)

 

Management believes that discussing like-for-like provides a better understanding of the Company’s performance and trends because it allows for more meaningful comparisons of current period to that of prior periods.

 

Pro-forma comparisons are calculated as follows: current year, constant currency actual results (which include acquisitions from the relevant date of completion) are compared with prior year, constant currency actual results, adjusted to include the results of acquisitions for the commensurate period in the prior year. The Group uses the terms ‘pro-forma’ and ‘like-for-like’ interchangeably.

 

The following table reconciles reported revenue and gross profit growth for 2012 and 2011 to like-for-like revenue and gross profit growth for the same period.

 

       Revenue        Gross profit  
       £m                £m           

2010 Reportable

     9,331                   8,561            

Impact of exchange rate changes

     (93     (1.0%)          (94)         (1.1%)  

Changes in scope of consolidation

     289        3.1%           267          3.1%   

Like-for-like growth

     495        5.3%           505          5.9%   

2011 Reportable

     10,022        7.4%           9,239          7.9%   

Impact of exchange rate changes

     (231     (2.3%)           (203)         (2.2%)   

Changes in scope of consolidation

     291        2.9%           258          2.8%   

Like-for-like growth

     291        2.9%           221          2.4%   

2012 Reportable

     10,373        3.5%           9,515          3.0%   

 

Headline PBIT

 

Headline PBIT is one of the metrics that management uses to assess the performance of the business. Management believes that it is both useful and necessary to report headline PBIT because this measure is used by management for internal performance analysis; the presentation of this measure facilitates comparability with other companies who may use similar titled measures, although management’s measure may not be calculated in the same way as similarly titled profit measures reported by other companies; and it is useful in connection with discussion with the investment community.

 

Headline PBIT is calculated as profit before finance income/costs and revaluation of financial instruments, taxation, investment gains/losses and write-downs, goodwill impairment and other goodwill write-downs, amortisation and impairment of acquired intangible assets, share of exceptional gains/losses of associates and

 

28


Table of Contents

gains/losses on remeasurement of equity interest on acquisition of controlling interest; and, in 2012, the gain on sale of freehold property in New York, Group restructuring costs and costs incurred in changing the corporate structure of the Company.

 

A tabular reconciliation of profit before interest and taxation to headline PBIT is provided in note 31 to the consolidated financial statements.

 

Headline PBIT margin

 

Calculated as headline PBIT (defined above) as a percentage of revenue.

 

Headline PBIT margin on gross profit

 

Given the significance of Consumer Insight revenues to the Group, with none of the direct competitors present in that sector, gross profit and headline PBIT margin on gross profit are a more meaningful measure of comparative, competitive revenue growth and margin performance. This is because Consumer Insight revenues include pass-through costs, principally for data collection, on which no margin is charged.

 

Calculated as headline PBIT (defined above) as a percentage of gross profit.

 

Headline PBT

 

Headline PBT is one of the metrics that management uses to assess the performance of the business. Management believes that it is both useful and necessary to report headline PBT because this measure is used by management for internal performance analysis; the presentation of this measure facilitates comparability with other companies who may use similar titled measures, although management’s measure may not be calculated in the same way as similarly titled profit measures reported by other companies; and it is useful in connection with discussion with the investment community.

 

Headline PBT is calculated as profit before taxation, investment gains/losses and write-downs, goodwill impairment and other goodwill write-downs, amortisation and impairment of acquired intangible assets, share of exceptional losses/gains of associates, gains/losses arising from the revaluation of financial instruments, and gains/losses on remeasurement of equity interest on acquisition of controlling interest; and, in 2012, the gain on sale of freehold property in New York, Group restructuring costs and costs incurred in changing the corporate structure of the Company.

 

A tabular reconciliation of profit before taxation to headline PBT is shown below.

 

       Year ended 31 December  
      

2012

£m

   

2011

£m

   

2010

£m

 

Profit before taxation

     1,091.9        1,008.4        851.3   

Amortisation and impairment of acquired intangible assets

     171.9        172.0        170.5   

Goodwill impairment

     32.0        —          10.0   

Gains on disposal of investments

     (26.8     (0.4     (4.1

Gains on re-measurement of equity on acquisition of controlling interest

     (5.3     (31.6     (13.7

Investment write-downs

     19.6        32.8        37.5   

Cost of changes to corporate structure

     4.1        —          —     

Gain on sale of freehold property in New York

     (71.4     —          —     

Restructuring costs

     93.4        —          —     

Share of exceptional losses/(gains) of associates

     3.0        (2.1     0.3   

Revaluation of financial instruments

     4.7        50.0        (18.2

Headline PBT

     1,317.1        1,229.1        1,033.6   

 

29


Table of Contents

Headline EBITDA

 

Headline EBITDA is a key metric that private equity firms, for example, use for valuing companies.

 

Headline EBITDA is calculated as profit before finance income/costs and revaluation of financial instruments, taxation, investment gains/losses and write-downs, goodwill impairment and other goodwill write-downs, amortisation and impairment of intangible assets, share of exceptional losses/gains of associates, depreciation of property, plant and equipment and gains/losses on remeasurement of equity interest on acquisition of controlling interest; and, in 2012, the gain on sale of freehold property in New York, Group restructuring costs and costs incurred in changing the corporate structure of the Group.

 

A tabular reconciliation of profit for the year to headline EBITDA is shown below.

 

       Year ended 31 December  
      

2012

£m

   

2011

£m

   

2010

£m

 

Profit for the year

     894.7        916.5        661.0   

Taxation

     197.2        91.9        190.3   

Finance income, finance cost and revaluation of financial instruments, net

     218.6        249.9        176.9   

Amortisation and impairment of acquired intangible assets

     171.9        172.0        170.5   

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment

     191.0        185.8        184.9   

Amortisation of other intangible assets

     33.7        25.7        25.4   

Goodwill impairment

     32.0        —          10.0   

Gains on disposal of investments

     (26.8     (0.4     (4.1

Gains on re-measurement of equity on acquisition of controlling interest

     (5.3     (31.6     (13.7

Investment write-downs

     19.6        32.8        37.5   

Cost of changes to corporate structure

     4.1        —          —     

Gain on sale of freehold property in New York

     (71.4     —          —     

Restructuring costs

     93.4        —          —     

Share of exceptional losses/(gains) of associates

     3.0        (2.1     0.3   

Headline EBITDA

     1,755.7        1,640.5        1,439.0   

 

Billings

 

Billings is one of the metrics that management uses to assess the performance of the business.

 

Billings comprise the gross amounts billed to clients in respect of commission-based/fee-based income together with the total of other fees earned.

 

Estimated net new billings

 

Estimated net new billings is one of the metrics that management uses to assess the performance of the business.

 

Estimated net new billings represent the estimated annualised impact on billings of new business gained from both existing and new clients, net of existing client business lost. The estimated impact is based upon initial assessments of the clients’ marketing budgets, which may not necessarily result in actual billings of the same amount.

 

Free cash flow

 

The Group bases its internal cash flow objectives on free cash flow. Management believes free cash flow is meaningful to investors because it is the measure of the Company’s funds available for acquisition related

 

30


Table of Contents

payments, dividends to shareowners, share repurchases and debt repayment. The purpose of presenting free cash flow is to indicate the ongoing cash generation within the control of the Group after taking account of the necessary cash expenditures of maintaining the capital and operating structure of the Group (in the form of payments of interest, corporate taxation and capital expenditure). Net working capital movements are excluded from this measure since these are principally associated with our media buying activities on behalf of clients and are not necessarily within the control of the Group. This computation may not be comparable to that of similarly titled measures presented by other companies.

 

A tabular reconciliation of net cash inflow from operating activities to free cash flow is shown below.

 

       Year ended 31 December  
      

2012

£m

   

2011

£m

   

2010

£m

 

Net cash inflow from operating activities

     908.3        665.2        1,361.2   

Share option proceeds

     56.0        28.8        42.7   

Proceeds on disposal of property, plant and equipment

     123.5        13.2        7.6   

Movement in working capital and provisions

     388.2        620.9        (225.5

Purchases of property, plant and equipment

     (290.3     (216.1     (190.5

Purchase of other intangible assets (including capitalised computer software)

     (39.8     (37.1     (27.0

Dividends paid to non-controlling interests in subsidiary undertakings

     (51.9     (62.2     (66.7

Free cash flow

     1,094.0        1,012.7        901.8   

 

Net debt and average net debt

 

Management believes that net debt and average net debt are appropriate and meaningful measures of the debt levels within the Group. This is because of the seasonal swings in our working capital generally, and those resulting from our media buying activities on behalf of our clients in particular, together with the fact that we choose for commercial reasons to locate the debt of the Group in particular countries and leave cash resources in others—though our cash resources could be used to repay the debt concerned.

 

Average net debt is calculated as the average daily net bank borrowings of the Group, derived from the Group’s automated banking system. Net debt at a period end is calculated as the sum of the net bank borrowings of the Group, derived from the cash ledgers and accounts in the balance sheet.

 

The following table is an analysis of net debt:

 

      

2012

£m

   

2011

£m

   

2010

£m

 

Debt financing

     (4,766.5     (4,411.4     (3,853.6

Cash and short-term deposits

     1,945.3        1,946.6        1,965.2   

Net debt

     (2,821.2     (2,464.8     (1,888.4

 

31


Table of Contents

Use of Estimates

 

The preparation of financial statements requires management to make estimates, judgements and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and disclosure of contingencies at the date of the financial statements, and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period. Actual results could differ materially from those estimates.

 

Critical Accounting Policies

 

The Company’s financial statements have been prepared in accordance with IFRS as issued by the IASB. A summary of the Group’s principal accounting policies is provided in the Accounting Policies section of the Financial Statements. The Company believes certain of these accounting policies are particularly critical to understanding the more significant judgements and estimates used in the preparation of its consolidated financial statements. Therefore, we have prepared the following supplemental discussion of critical accounting policies, which should be read together with our financial statements and notes thereto.

 

Goodwill and other intangibles

 

The Company has a significant amount of goodwill and other intangible assets. In accordance with the Group’s accounting policy, the carrying values of goodwill and intangible assets with indefinite useful lives are reviewed for impairment annually or more frequently if events or changes in circumstances indicate that the asset might be impaired.

 

The carrying values of brands with an indefinite useful life are assessed for impairment purposes by using the royalty and loyalty methods of valuation, both of which utilise the net present value of future cash flows associated with the brands.

 

In years prior to 2012, the goodwill impairment review was initially undertaken as at 30 June and then updated as at 31 December which was the annual testing date. For 2012, the annual testing date was changed to 30 September to better align the impairment testing procedures with the financial planning process. This change did not accelerate, delay, avoid or cause a goodwill impairment charge.

 

Under IFRS, an impairment charge is required for both goodwill and other indefinite lived assets when the carrying amount exceeds the ‘recoverable amount’, defined as the higher of fair value less costs to sell and value in use. Our approach in determining the recoverable amount utilises a discounted cash flow methodology, which necessarily involves making numerous estimates and assumptions regarding revenue growth, operating margins, appropriate discount rates and working capital requirements. These estimates will likely differ from future actual results of operations and cash flows, and it is possible that these differences could be material. In addition, judgements are applied in determining the level of cash-generating unit identified for impairment testing and the criteria used to determine which assets should be aggregated. A difference in testing levels could affect whether an impairment is recorded and the extent of impairment loss. Changes in our business activities or structure may also result in changes to the level of testing in future periods. Further, future events could cause the Company to conclude that impairment indicators exist and that the asset values associated with a given operation have become impaired. Any resulting impairment loss could have a material impact on the Company’s financial condition and results of operations.

 

Historically our impairment losses have resulted from a specific event, condition or circumstance in one of our companies, such as the loss of a significant client. As a result, changes in the assumptions used in our impairment model have not had a significant effect on the impairment charges recognised. The carrying value of goodwill and other intangible assets will continue to be reviewed at least annually for impairment and adjusted to the recoverable amount if required.

 

32


Table of Contents

The most significant assumptions employed by the Company in determining recoverable amounts are as follows:

 

   

Future cash flows derived from each cash-generating unit are based on a projection period of up to five years. These projections utilise the latest budget information available for each cash-generating unit covering one or more twelve month periods from the balance sheet date. These budgets have been prepared by management;

 

   

After the projection period, there is an assumed annual long-term growth rate of 3.0% (2011: 3.0%), with no improvements in operating margins. Management have made the judgement that this long-term growth rate does not exceed the long-term growth rate for the industry; and

 

   

The net present value of the future cash flows was calculated using a pre-tax discount rate of 9.5% (2011: 9.5%).

 

Acquisition accounting

 

The Group accounts for acquisitions in accordance with IFRS 3 ‘Business Combinations’. IFRS 3 requires the acquiree’s identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities (other than non-current assets or disposal groups held for sale) to be recognised at fair value at acquisition date. In assessing fair value at acquisition date, management make their best estimate of the likely outcome where the fair value of an asset or liability may be contingent on a future event. In certain instances, the underlying transaction giving rise to an estimate may not be resolved until some years after the acquisition date. IFRS 3 requires the release to profit of any acquisition reserves which subsequently become excess in the same way as any excess costs over those provided at acquisition date are charged to profit. At each period end management assess provisions and other balances established in respect of acquisitions for their continued probability of occurrence and amend the relevant value accordingly through the consolidated income statement or as an adjustment to goodwill as appropriate under IFRS 3. In 2012, operating profit includes credits totaling £19.8 million (2011: £14.0 million, 2010: £16.5 million) relating to the release of excess provisions and other balances established in respect of acquisitions completed prior to 2011.

 

Future anticipated payments to vendors in respect of contingent consideration (earnout agreements) are initially recorded at fair value which is the present value of the expected cash outflows of the obligations. The obligations are dependent on the future financial performance of the interests acquired (typically over a four- to five-year period following the year of acquisition) and assume the operating companies improve profits in line with directors’ estimates. The directors derive their estimates from internal business plans together with financial due diligence performed in connection with the acquisition. Subsequent adjustments to the fair value are recorded in the consolidated income statement within revaluation of financial instruments. For acquisitions completed prior to 1 January 2010, such adjustments are recorded in the consolidated balance sheet within goodwill. A summary of earnout related obligations included in creditors is shown in note 19 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

WPP has also entered into option agreements that allow the Group’s equity partners to require the Group to purchase the non-controlling interest. These agreements are treated as derivatives over equity instruments and are recorded in the consolidated balance sheet at fair value and the valuation is remeasured at each period end. Fair value is based on the present value of expected cash outflows and the movement in the fair value is recognised as income or expense within revaluation of financial instruments in the consolidated income statement.

 

Actual performance may differ from the assumptions used resulting in amounts ultimately paid out with respect to these earnout and option agreements at more or less than the recorded liabilities.

 

Revenue recognition

 

Advertising and Media Investment Management revenue is typically derived from commissions on media placements and fees for advertising services. Revenue may consist of various arrangements involving commissions, fees, incentive-based revenue or a combination of the three, as agreed upon with each client.

 

33


Table of Contents

Revenue is recognised when the service is performed, in accordance with the terms of the contractual arrangement. Incentive-based revenue typically comprises both quantitative and qualitative elements; on the element related to quantitative targets, revenue is recognised when the quantitative targets have been achieved; on the element related to qualitative targets, revenue is recognised when the incentive is received or receivable.

 

The Group receives volume rebates from certain suppliers for transactions entered into on behalf of clients that, based on the terms of the relevant contracts and local law, are either remitted to clients or retained by the Group. If amounts are passed on to clients they are recorded as liabilities until settled or, if retained by the Group, are recorded as revenue when earned.

 

In applying the proportional performance method of revenue recognition for both market research and other long-term contracts, management is required to make significant judgements, estimates and assumptions. In assessing contract performance, both input and output criteria are reviewed. Costs incurred are used as an objective input measure of performance. The primary input of all work performed under these arrangements is labour. As a result of the relationship between labour and cost, there is normally a direct relationship between costs incurred and the proportion of the contract performed to date. Costs incurred as a proportion of expected total costs is used as an initial proportional performance measure. The indicative proportional performance measure is subsequently validated against other more subjective criteria (i.e. relevant output measures) such as the percentage of interviews completed, percentage of reports delivered to a client and the achievement of any project milestones stipulated in the contract. In the event of divergence between the objective and more subjective measures, the more subjective measures takes precedence since these are output measures.

 

Since project costs can vary from initial estimates, the reliance on total project cost estimate represents an uncertainty inherent in the revenue recognition process. Individual project budgets are reviewed regularly with project leaders to ensure that cost estimates are based upon up to date and as accurate information as possible, and take into account any relevant historic performance experience. Also, the majority of contracted services subject to proportional performance method revenue recognition are in relation to short term projects, averaging approximately 3 months. Due to this close and frequent monitoring of budgeted costs and the preponderance of short term projects, the impact of variances between actual and budgeted project costs has historically been minimal. The Company does not believe that the effect of these uncertainties, taken as a whole, will significantly impact their results of operations in the future.

 

Pension costs

 

Pension costs are assessed in accordance with the advice of local independent qualified actuaries. The latest full actuarial valuations for the various plans were carried out at various dates in the last three years. These valuations have been updated by the local actuaries to 31 December 2012.

 

The Group’s policy is to close existing defined benefit plans to new members. This has been implemented across a significant number of pension plans. As a result, these plans generally have an ageing membership population. In accordance with IAS 19, the actuarial calculations have been carried out using the projected unit credit method. In these circumstances, use of this method implies that the contribution rate implicit in the current service cost will increase in future years.

 

The Group’s pension deficit was £334.3 million at 31 December 2012, compared to £280.8 million at 31 December 2011. The increase in the deficit is primarily due to lower discount rates. These factors are partially offset by actions taken by WPP to curtail and settle plans.

 

There are a number of areas in the pension accounting that involve judgements made by management. These include establishing the long-term expected rates of investment return on pension assets, mortality assumptions, discount rates, inflation, rate of increase in pensions, in payment and salary increases.

 

34


Table of Contents

Most of the Group’s pension plan assets are held by its plans in the UK and North America. In the UK, the forecasted weighted average return on assets decreased to 4.3% at 31 December 2012 from 4.6% at 31 December 2011, and in North America, the forecasted weighted average return decreased to 5.3% from 5.9%, broadly in line with the yields available in both markets. Management reviews the expected long-term rates of return on an annual basis and revises them as appropriate.

 

Management periodically commission detailed asset and liability studies performed by third-party professional investment advisors and actuaries that generate probability-adjusted expected future returns on those assets. These studies also project the estimated future pension payments and evaluate the efficiency of the allocation of the pension plan assets into various investment categories.

 

At 31 December 2012, the life expectancies underlying the value of the accrued liabilities for the main defined benefit pension plans operated by the Group were as follows:

 

Years life expectancy after age 65    All
Plans
     North
America
     UK     

Western
Continental

Europe

     Other 1  

Current pensioners – male

     21.9         20.4         24.4         20.5         19.3   

Current pensioners – female

     23.9         22.6         25.6         23.6         24.7   

Future pensioners (current age 45) – male

     24.1         22.5         26.5         23.0         19.3   

Future pensioners (current age 45) – female

     26.0         24.5         27.9         25.6         24.7   

1     Includes Asia Pacific, Latin America, Africa & Middle East and Central & Eastern Europe.

       

 

In the determination of mortality assumptions, management uses the most up-to-date mortality tables available in each country.

 

For a 0.25% increase or decrease in the discount rate at 31 December 2012, the effect on the year-end 2012 plan liabilities would be a decrease or increase, respectively, of approximately £34 million.

 

Taxation

 

Corporate taxes are payable on taxable profits at current rates. The tax expense represents the sum of the tax currently payable and deferred tax.

 

The Group is subject to corporate taxes in a number of different jurisdictions and judgement is required in determining the appropriate provision for transactions where the ultimate tax determination is uncertain. In such circumstances, the Group recognises liabilities for anticipated taxes based on the best information available and where the anticipated liability is both probable and estimable. Such liabilities are classified as current when the Group expects to settle the liability within 12 months and the remainder as non-current. Any interest and penalties accrued are included in income taxes both in the consolidated income statement and balance sheet. Where the final outcome of such matters differs from the amount recorded, any differences may impact the income tax and deferred tax provisions in the period in which the final determination is made.

 

We record deferred tax assets and liabilities using tax rates that are expected to apply in the period when the liability is settled or the asset is realised based on enacted, or substantively enacted legislation, for the effect of temporary differences between book and tax bases of assets and liabilities. Currently we have deferred tax assets resulting from operating loss carryforwards and deductible temporary differences, all of which could reduce taxable income in the future. Based on available evidence, both positive and negative, we determine whether it is

 

35


Table of Contents

probable that all or a portion of the deferred tax assets will be realised. The main factors that we consider include:

 

   

future earnings potential determined through the use of internal forecasts;

 

   

cumulative losses in recent years;

 

   

the various jurisdictions in which the potential deferred tax assets arise;

 

   

history of loss carryforwards and other tax assets expiring;

 

   

the timing of future reversal of taxable temporary differences;

 

   

the expiry period associated with the deferred tax assets; and

 

   

the nature of the income that can be used to realise the deferred tax asset.

 

If it is our belief that it is probable that some portion of these assets will not be realised, then no asset is recognised in relation to the portion not considered to be realisable. At 31 December 2012 no deferred tax asset has been recognised in respect of gross tax losses and other temporary differences of £4,043.0 million.

 

If market conditions improve and future results of operations exceed our current expectations, our existing recognised deferred tax assets may be adjusted, resulting in future tax benefits. Alternatively, if market conditions deteriorate further or future results of operations are less than expected, future assessments may result in a determination that some or all of the deferred tax assets are not realisable. As a result, we may need to reverse all or a portion of the deferred tax assets, which may have a significant effect on our results of operations and financial condition.

 

New IFRS Accounting Pronouncements

 

See page F-7 of the consolidated financial statements for a description of new IFRS accounting pronouncements.

 

36


Table of Contents

ITEM 6. DIRECTORS, SENIOR MANAGEMENT AND EMPLOYEES

 

A. Directors and Senior Management

 

The directors and executive officers of the Company are as follows:

 

Philip Lader, age 67: Non-executive chairman. Philip Lader was appointed chairman of WPP in 2001. The US Ambassador to the Court of St James’s from 1997 to 2001, he previously served in several senior executive roles in the US government, including as a member of the President’s Cabinet and as White House Deputy Chief of Staff. Before entering government service, he was executive vice president of the company managing the late Sir James Goldsmith’s US holdings and president of both a prominent American real estate company and universities in the US and Australia. A lawyer, he is also a senior advisor to Morgan Stanley, a director of Marathon Oil, Rusal and AES Corporations, a trustee of the Smithsonian Museum of American History and the Atlantic Council and a member of the Council on Foreign Relations.

 

Sir Martin Sorrell, age 68: Chief executive. Sir Martin Sorrell joined WPP in 1986 as a director, becoming Group chief executive in the same year. He is a non-executive director of Formula One and Alcoa Inc.

 

Paul Richardson, age 55: Finance director. Paul Richardson became Group finance director of WPP in 1996 after four years with the Company as director of treasury. He is responsible for the Group’s worldwide functions in finance, information technology, procurement, property, treasury, taxation, internal audit and sustainability. He is a chartered accountant and fellow of the Association of Corporate Treasurers. He is a non-executive director of CEVA Group plc, Chime Communications PLC and STW Communications Group Limited in Australia, the last two being companies associated with the Group.

 

Mark Read, age 46: Strategy director and CEO, WPP Digital. Mark Read was appointed a director in March 2005. He has been WPP’s director of strategy since 2002 and is also chief executive of WPP Digital. He is a member of the Supervisory Board of HighCo and a director of CHI&Partners. He worked at WPP between 1989 and 1995 in both parent company and operating company roles. Prior to rejoining WPP in 2002, he was a principal at the consultancy firm of Booz-Allen & Hamilton and founded and developed the company WebRewards in the UK. He is a trustee of the Natural History Museum Development Trust.

 

Colin Day, age 58: Non-executive director. Colin Day was appointed a non-executive director of WPP in July 2005. He is the Chief Executive of Filtrona plc and a non-executive director of Amec. He was the group finance director of Reckitt Benckiser plc until April 2011, having been appointed to its board in September 2000. Previously he has been group finance director of Aegis Group plc and held a number of senior finance positions with the ABB Group plc and De La Rue Group plc. He was a non-executive director of Vero Group plc until 1998, Bell Group plc until 2004, Imperial Tobacco plc until February 2007, easyJet plc until September 2005 and Cadbury plc until 2010.

 

Esther Dyson, age 61: Non-executive director. Esther Dyson was appointed a director of WPP in 1999. In 2004, she sold her business, EDventure Holdings, to CNET Networks, the US-based interactive media company now owned by CBS. She left CNET at the end of 2006 and now operates as an independent investor and writer, again under the name EDventure. She has been highly influential for the past 30 years on the basis of her insights into online/information technology markets and their commercial/social impact worldwide, including the emerging markets of Central & Eastern Europe, Asia and Africa. An active investor as well as an analyst/observer, she participated in the sale of Flickr to Yahoo!, of Medstory and Powerset to Microsoft, and of Vizu to Nielsen, among others. She sits on the boards of Russia’s leading search company Yandex (YNDX), and also of non-listed start-ups including 23andMe, Eventful.com, Meetup, NewspaperDirect (Canada), Voxiva (US) and XCOR Aerospace (US). Her current investments include Evernote, Gridpoint, LinkedIn, Nomanini, Omada Health, Space Adventures and Square. She is also active in public affairs and was founding chairman of ICANN, the domain name policy agency, from 1998 to 2000. She currently sits on the board of the Sunlight Foundation, which advocates transparency in government, and writes a monthly column for Project Syndicate (http://www.project-syndicate.org/contributor/esther-dyson) which is distributed worldwide.

 

37


Table of Contents

Orit Gadiesh, age 62: Non-executive director. Orit Gadiesh was appointed a director in April 2004. She is chairman of Bain & Company Inc., and a world-renowned expert on management and corporate strategy. She holds an MBA from Harvard Business School, was a Baker Scholar and was also presented the Brown Award. Ms. Gadiesh is a member of the Foundation Board for the World Economic Forum as well as a member of the International Business Council of the World Economic Forum. She is on the Board of Directors of The Peres Institute for Peace, sits on the International Advisory Board of The Atlantic Council of the United States, and the Advisory Board for the British-American Business Council, as well as an Advisory Board member at the China Europe International Business School (CEIBS). She is the Chairman of the International Business Leaders’ Advisory Council for the Mayor of Shanghai (IBLAC) and sits on the International Advisory Board at HEC School of Management in France.

 

Ruigang Li, age 43: Non-executive director. Ruigang Li was appointed a director of WPP in October 2010. He is Founding Chairman of China Media Capital (CMC), China’s first sovereign private equity fund dedicated to Media and Entertainment sector investment. Through Li’s chairmanship, CMC’s most important investments include controlling stake acquisition of News Corporation’s China assets, a joint venture with DreamWorks Animation, a joint venture with world-leading Chinese language TV content provider and broadcaster TVB, China’s largest TV shopping company OCJ, all of groundbreaking industrial significance in China and beyond. Li was CEO of SMG (Shanghai Media Group) for 10 years while he grew SMG into China’s leading media conglomerate with the most diversified media assets of national reach.

 

Stanley (Bud) Morten, age 69: Non-executive director. Bud Morten was appointed a director in 1991. He is a consultant and private investor. From 2003 to 2009 he was the Independent Consultant to Citigroup/Smith Barney with responsibility for its independent research requirements. Previously, he was the chief operating officer of Punk, Ziegel & Co., a New York investment banking firm with a focus on the healthcare and technology industries. Before that he was the managing director of the equity division of Wertheim Schroder & Co., Inc., in New York. He is a former non-executive director of Register.com, which was sold to a private equity firm in November 2005, and of The Motley Fool, Inc. He is also a non-executive director of Darien Rowayton Bank, a private company.

 

Koichiro Naganuma, age 68: Non-executive director. Koichiro Naganuma was appointed a director in February 2004. He is chairman of the Board of Asatsu-DK Inc., also known as ADK. He is also vice chairman of the Japan Advertising Association and chairman of the Japan Advertising Industry Pension Fund. Joining ADK in 1981, he was president and Group CEO from 1991-2010. ADK is Japan’s third largest advertising and communications company, and 15th largest in the world.

 

John Quelch, age 61: Non-executive director. John Quelch was appointed a director of WPP in 1988. He is the Charles Edward Wilson Professor of Business Administration at Harvard Business School and Professor in Health Policy and Management at Harvard School of Public Health. He also serves as the Honorary Consul General of the Kingdom of Morocco for New England. Between 2011 and 2013 he served as Dean, Vice President and Distinguished Professor of International Management at China Europe International Business School in Shanghai. Between 2001 and 2011 he was the Lincoln Filene Professor of Business Administration and Senior Associate Dean at Harvard Business School. Between 1998 and 2001 he was Dean of the London Business School. Between 2002 and 2011 he served as chairman of Massachusetts Port Authority and as Honorary Chairman of the British American Business Council of New England. Professor Quelch’s writings focus on global business practice in emerging as well as developed markets, international marketing and the role of the multinational corporation and the nation state. He is a non-executive director of Alere, Inc and a member of the Trilateral Commission and the Council on Foreign Relations. He served previously on the boards of Blue Circle Industries plc, easyJet plc, Pentland Group plc, Pepsi Bottling Group and Reebok International Limited. In the 2011 Honours List, he was awarded a CBE for services to the promotion of British business.

 

Jeffrey A. Rosen, age 65: Non-executive director. Jeffrey Rosen was appointed a director of WPP in December 2004. He is a deputy chairman and managing director of Lazard with over 40 years’ experience in international

 

38


Table of Contents

investment banking and corporate finance. He is a member of the Council on Foreign Relations and is President of the Board of Trustees of the International Center of Photography in New York.

 

Timothy A. Shriver, age 53: Non-executive director. Tim Shriver was appointed a director of WPP in August 2007. He is a social leader, educator, activist, film producer and business entrepreneur. As Chairman and CEO of Special Olympics, he serves nearly four million Special Olympic athletes in 180 countries all working to promote health, education, and unity through the joy of sports. Before joining Special Olympics in 1995, he was (and remains) a leading educator focusing on the social and emotional factors in learning. He co-founded and currently chairs the Collaborative for Academic, Social and Emotional Learning (CASEL), the leading research organisation in the field of social and emotional learning. He is a member of the Council on Foreign Relations. He chairs the board of Lovin’ Scoopful a cause-related consumer products brand specializing in ice cream that ‘loves you as much as you love it’.

 

Paul Spencer, age 63: Non-executive director. Paul Spencer was appointed a director of WPP in April 2004. He is a financier with 20 years’ experience in the financial management of a number of blue-chip companies, including British Leyland plc, Rolls-Royce plc, Hanson plc and Royal & Sun Alliance plc. He has held a number of non-executive directorships including until 2009 Chairman of NS&I (National Savings and Investments). He is the Independent Trustee of BT, BA and Rolls-Royce Group pension funds. He is Chairman of Hermes Asset Managers Ltd. In the 2010 Honours List he was awarded a CBE for services to the financial services industry. Paul is a governor of Motability, a UK charity for the disabled.

 

Sol Trujillo, age 61: Non-executive director. Sol Trujillo was appointed a director of WPP in October 2010. He is an international business executive with three decades’ experience as CEO of large market cap global companies in the US, the EU and Asia Pacific, including US West (now CenturyLink), Orange (now France Telecom) and Telstra, the Australian communications company. A digital pioneer operating in the telecommunications, technology, and media space, he has been a long-time champion of high-speed broadband and a pioneer and innovator of smartphone and the mobile internet to stimulate productivity and innovation across all sectors of the economy. He has managed operations in more than 25 countries – including developed and emerging markets from the EU and North America to China, South Asia, Africa and the Middle East. He currently sits on corporate boards in the US, EU and China – including Target, Western Union and ProAmerica Bank in the US and in Asia, Silk Road Technologies in China, where he is Board chairman. In the public sector, Mr Trujillo served as trade policy advisor to the Clinton and Bush administrations and remains active on public policy issues related to immigration, trade, productivity and fiscal affairs.

 

The board of directors has determined that all of the non-executive directors are independent under NASDAQ Rule 5605(a)(2).

 

B. Compensation

 

Review of compensation

 

The outcome of the 2012 Annual General Meeting (AGM) vote on the Compensation Committee Report was disappointing for the members of the Committee and the Board. The vote indicated that the changes which were made to the CEO’s compensation in 2011, and our engagement on these changes with share owners and representative bodies, fell short of the expectations of a majority of them.

 

Therefore, following the 2012 AGM, the chairman of the Company and the chairman of the Compensation Committee began a series of meetings with share owners and representative bodies to listen to their issues and concerns so that the committee could formulate proposals to address them.

 

The dialogue with share owners has been extensive; the Compensation Committee has engaged with the largest share owners and the representative bodies numerous times. Their input and approach have been very helpful and constructive. In formulating changes which the committee has made to remuneration policy in general, the CEO remuneration package, and the design of a long-term incentive plan.

 

39


Table of Contents

Details of these changes are set out later in this report. Among the key changes which have been made or which are proposed are the following:

 

   

the CEO’s remuneration package has been reduced through adjustments to base salary, pension allowance and short- and long-term incentive opportunity;

 

   

the short-term incentive plan for executive directors has been restructured, where appropriate, to emphasise Group financial performance;

 

   

a new long-term incentive plan (LTIP) is being proposed to share owners for approval at the AGM. As before, it is based on a five-year performance and vesting period, but performance will be assessed against: three measures – relative TSR; earnings per share growth; and average return on equity, rather than relative TSR alone; and

 

   

outcomes for the four Leadership Equity Acquisition Plan (LEAP) awards that vest in each of 2014-2017 will be measured on a common currency basis only, with no application of a fairness review to take account of currency movements during the five-year performance periods. For the new LTIP, the TSR outcome will be measured half in common currency, half in local currency, to reflect the division of opinion amongst share owners as to the appropriate measure.

 

The changes to the Executive Remuneration Policy and the proposed LTIP were framed against the background of WPP’s significant growth in size, complexity, and share owner value since 2007, and its strong relative TSR performance against its comparators since that date. They were also structured to be consistent with WPP’s overall philosophy of executive compensation: that it should be substantially oriented towards performance-based compensation; that a substantial proportion of that compensation should require long performance periods; and that it should be consistent with, and, indeed, reinforce, the Group’s strategy.

 

The CEO’s remuneration opportunity is now consistent with the lower levels which prevailed in the 2007-2010 period, 2007 being the last year prior to 2011 in which changes to his remuneration opportunity were implemented. This reduction in no way reflects the committee’s or the Board’s view of the importance of the CEO to the Company and its success and his unique mix of skills, and for which numerous share owners have expressed their appreciation. Nevertheless, the changes made were designed to be responsive to an environment in which moderation of executive compensation is considered necessary and appropriate.

 

The Group performed at record levels in 2012 in what proved to be a very challenging general economic environment. Because of equally challenging performance criteria, short-term incentive payments were at or just above target levels.

 

For the five years to year-end 2012, WPP’s TSR performed strongly relative to its comparators. As a result, the five-year LEAP awards which were granted in 2008 vested at a level equivalent to 86% of the maximum payout, measured on a common currency basis. This result reflects the strong underlying performance of the Company and the focus on share owner value, created by the management team which steered the Group to success over these five-years. The committee is supportive of the UK Department for Business, Innovation & Skills drive to improve the transparency and clarity in the reporting of directors’ remuneration. To that end, the Compensation Committee has voluntarily incorporated many of the proposed changes contained in the draft regulations into the report this year.

 

What we have changed

 

The changes that have been made as a result of the Compensation Committee’s consultation with share owners are described below in summary and in more detail later in this report.

 

40


Table of Contents

CEO remuneration

 

While share owners recognised the increased scale and complexity of WPP since the previous compensation changes in 2007, the global nature of the group and the exceptional performance and leadership of the CEO, share owners nonetheless advised the Company that they believed the CEO’s 2011 remuneration package was too high relative to the UK market. Informed by extensive consultation with many of our major share owners, significant reductions have therefore been made to the CEO’s remuneration package.

 

For 2012, the CEO’s short- and long-term incentive opportunities were both substantially reduced. Target short-term incentive opportunity reduced from £3.2 million to £2.5 million with a corresponding reduction in the maximum opportunity from £6.5 million to £5.0 million. This reduction was effective 1 January 2012. The maximum long-term incentive opportunity was also reduced by over 23% in 2012.

 

For 2013, further reductions to the package have been implemented. Base salary has been reduced to £1.15 million (from £1.3 million) and the pension contribution has reduced from 45% of base salary and fees to 40%. Overall, the impact of the changes is a reduction in the CEO’s target pay to result in it being at a level similar to that received from 2007 to 2010.

 

                       
         2012        2013  

Change in CEO total target pay versus 2011

       -20%           -34%   

 

Short-term incentive

 

The structure of the short-term incentive opportunities for the executive directors has remained stable over many years. However, as part of the overall review of the Executive Remuneration Policy, it was considered that there was an opportunity to update the short-term incentive arrangements and strengthen the link between payouts and the performance of the Company. With effect from 2012, the performance of the executives has been assessed relative to a scorecard, 70% of which is linked to WPP financial performance and 30% based on personal strategic goals. Previously, performance was based equally on financial performance, financial performance relative to our competitors and personal goals.

 

New 2013 long-term incentive plan

 

LEAP was one of a number of innovative co-investment plans which have served the Company well since the introduction of the first co-investment plan in 1994. The final awards under LEAP III were made in 2012. As a result, a new plan is being recommended to share owners for approval at the AGM in June 2013. This plan adopts a simpler structure while retaining some of the key features of LEAP such as a five-year performance period, ‘clawback’ and pro-ration of awards for early leavers.

 

Three independent measures will be used to assess performance over each five-year period: relative TSR against an industry peer group; earnings per share (EPS) growth; and average return on equity (ROE). These measures aim to capture and reward stretching performance in growth, capital efficiency and returns to share owners. Threshold vesting will reduce from 30% to 20% of an award.

 

These proposed changes in plan design accord with much of the feedback received from share owners during the extensive consultation process.

 

As the Company is moving from a co-investment plan structure to a more standard performance share plan design, Share Ownership Guidelines are also being introduced. These share ownership requirements will be amongst the highest in the UK.

 

41


Table of Contents

How we have performed

 

LOGO    LOGO

 

Relative TSR Rebased to 31 December 2007 1

 

LOGO

 

  1    

Measured on a common currency basis with a rolling three-month averaging period against our primary competitors and the FTSE 100 (the broad market equity index of which WPP is a constituent). Source: DataStream.

 

 

How much the executive directors earned in 2012

 

LOGO

 

2012 share owner engagement and changes to compensation

 

Following the 2012 AGM where share owners’ concerns were demonstrated by the low level of support for the Compensation Committee Report, the committee undertook a review of many aspects of the Executive Remuneration Policy, as detailed on page 39. While the changes have been discussed elsewhere, it is also important to set out how the Company dealt with another aspect of share owners’ concerns, namely how the Company engaged with share owners to address this feedback on the Executive Remuneration Policy.

 

During the summer, the chairmen of both the Company and the Compensation Committee met with WPP’s largest share owners (reflecting in excess of 40% of the Company’s issued share capital) and prominent institutional investor advisory bodies. The objective of these meetings was to solicit feedback generally, in order to understand share owner concerns and opinions before formulating new proposals.

 

These meetings provided the committee with constructive feedback with respect to its own processes, as well as the structure and level of compensation for executive directors. Building on this feedback, the committee undertook extensive discussions throughout the formulation of its recommendations for the structures and levels of compensation for executive directors in 2013.

 

42


Table of Contents

Between late September and November 2012, the committee presented these proposals to share owners for discussion, with a view to incorporating feedback into the process of fine-tuning many aspects of the Executive Remuneration Policy. In January to March 2013, the committee reverted to share owners to discuss the final proposals as disclosed in this Compensation Committee Report. Following these rounds of consultation, the aggregate changes to the CEO’s remuneration amounted to a reduction in the target package of 34% when compared to 2011.

 

While the final arrangements detailed on page 41 will not meet every share owner’s individual preferences or views on what is best for the Company, the committee has sought to balance the broad range of views expressed by share owners with the needs of the business. The committee believes that the changes to the Executive Remuneration Policy are in the best collective interests of the share owners of WPP while reinforcing the alignment with business strategy, and that they will continue to incentivise, motivate and reward the executive directors for truly exceptional performance.

 

How to use this report

 

This year’s Compensation Committee Report is split into two main sections, as envisaged by the UK Department for Business Innovation & Skills’ proposals.

 

Within this report, colour is used to denote different elements of remuneration as follows:

 

LOGO

 

Looking forward

 

This first section of the Compensation Committee Report, entitled Looking forward , contains details of the Company’s Executive Remuneration Policy that will govern the Company’s intentions as regards future payments.

 

Policy table

 

The Company’s mission statement and six business objectives shape the Executive Remuneration Policy. Broadly, this Policy is determined by three guiding principles:

 

   

performance driven reward;

 

   

competitiveness; and

 

   

alignment with share owner interests.

 

Specifically, the six business objectives (as set out on page 16) are reflected in the design of the compensation plans as set out below:

 

WPP’s six business objectives    Alignment with compensation structure
Continue to improve operating margins    Short-term incentive measure for the CEO and CFO
Increase flexibility in the cost structure    Short-term incentive measure for the CFO
Use free cash flow to enhance share owner value and improve return on capital    Total share owner return and average ROE are long-term incentive measures for the executive directors
Continue to develop the value added by the parent company    Short-term incentive measures (parent company-led efficiency projects) for the CEO and CFO
Emphasise revenue growth more as margins improve    Short-term incentive measure for the CEO and CFO (Group) and CEO Digital (Digital)
Improve still further the creative capabilities and reputation of all the businesses    Short-term incentive measure for the CEO

 

43


Table of Contents

The executive remuneration policy is designed to drive and reward exceptional performance producing long-term value for share owners. In applying this policy, the committee takes into account the pay and conditions elsewhere in the Group, which in turn are informed by general market conditions and internal factors such as the performance of the Group or relevant business unit.

 

Executive directors

 

       Operation    Changes for 2013
Fixed elements              

Base salary and fees

To maintain package competitiveness and reflect skills and experience.

  

Base salary levels are determined by taking a number of relevant factors into account, including individual and business performance, level of experience, scope of responsibility and the competitiveness of total remuneration against competitors, and companies of a similar size and complexity.

 

Base salaries are reviewed every two years or following a significant change in the scope of a role.

  

The salaries of Paul Richardson and Mark Read, last reviewed on 1 January 2011, will be reviewed in 2013.

 

Sir Martin Sorrell’s base salary was reduced to £1.15 million with effect from 1 January 2013. This will next be subject to review in 2015.

Benefits

To enable the executive to undertake their role by ensuring their wellbeing and security.

   Benefits provided to executive directors include car allowance, healthcare, life insurance, long-term disability insurance, plus spousal travel together with amounts in respect of tax liabilities incurred on expenditure considered to be essential to the delivery of the executive’s role, housing allowances and club membership which are required for business purposes. Housing allowances are paid where the executive is required to spend considerable time working away from their primary place of business or temporarily where an executive has moved location.    None

Pension

To enable provision for personal and dependant retirement benefits.

  

Pension is provided by way of defined contributions or a cash allowance determined as a percentage of base salary.

 

The pension contribution is 40% of salary for the CEO, 30% of salary for the CFO and 10% for the CEO WPP Digital.

  

The pension contributions for Paul Richardson and Mark Read will be reviewed, but not necessarily amended, as part of the remuneration review that will take place in 2013.

Short-term incentives              
To drive the achievement of business priorities for the financial year and to motivate, retain and reward executives over a medium term, while aligning with interests of share owners.   

Cash Bonus and Executive Share Awards (ESA)

Executive directors’ short-term incentive opportunity is delivered in the form of a cash bonus and a deferred share award (ESA), the latter constituting at least 50% of the total bonus achieved. The ESA will vest after a minimum of two years subject to continued employment, together with additional shares in respect of accrued dividends. ESAs are subject to clawback during the vesting period.

 

Performance measures and targets are reviewed and set annually to ensure continuing strategic alignment. Achievement levels are determined following year-end by the Compensation Committee, based on performance against targets.

 

Opportunity:

Total bonus opportunity - minimum, target and maximum (as a % of base salary and fees)

   None

 

      Min      Target     Max  

Sir Martin Sorrell

  0%      217.5     435

Paul Richardson

  0%      200     300

Mark Read

  0%      134     200

 

    

Performance conditions:

70% subject to financial performance, either at a Group or divisional level depending on the role.

30% subject to personal objectives linked to the strategy of WPP or the relevant business area.

    

 

44


Table of Contents
       Operation    Changes for 2013
Long-term incentives (proposed)       
To incentivise long-term performance and to focus on long-term retention and strategic priorities, while maximising alignment with share owner interests.   

Executive Performance Share Plan

Executives may receive an annual award of conditional shares. The Compensation Committee has the authority to make awards. The Compensation Committee will retain discretion to adjust the levels of vesting if it considers that, as a result of an exceptional event or exceptional circumstances, it is materially easier or harder for WPP to achieve a performance measure. The committee will not make adjustments based on currency fluctuations. Clawback applies to unvested awards.

 

Proposed award levels in 2013 (as a multiple of base salary and fees):

Sir Martin Sorrell = 9.74

Paul Richardson = 4.00

Mark Read = 2.00

 

Plan maximum: 9.75 times base salary and fees

 

Performance measures (measured over a five-year period):

33% relative TSR (50% common and 50% local currency)

33% EPS growth

33% average ROE

 

All measures are independent of each other.

 

Vesting schedule:

Threshold = 20%/Maximum = 100% (straight-line vesting between threshold and maximum)

   Subject to approval at the 2013 AGM, awards will be made to the executive directors and other senior management in 2013.
Long-term incentives (legacy awards)       
    

LEAP III (no further grants to be made)

Executives were invited to participate in the plan annually by the Compensation Committee. Individuals must have invested in WPP shares and committed to hold them for the five-year performance period. Investment levels were determined by the committee, subject to an overall maximum. A final number of matching shares, together with dividends that would have accrued on the matching shares, will be awarded, proportionate to the investment, dependent on the performance of WPP. Clawback applies to unvested awards. The Plan was terminated at 31 December 2012.

 

Award level:

Select employees were invited to commit investments in WPP shares at the discretion of the Compensation Committee, subject to an overall maximum of one-times the individual’s total target earnings. The maximum award is equivalent to five-times an individual’s investment.

 

Performance conditions:

100% relative TSR (common currency) performance against a customised group of WPP’s peers, weighted by market capitalisation measured over five years.

 

Following the end of the performance period, the Compensation Committee undertakes a ‘fairness review’ to determine whether any exceptional events have impacted the outcome and that the resulting match is in line with financial performance relative to the comparator group and the underlying financial performance of the Group.

 

Vesting schedule:

Threshold = 30% / Maximum = 100% (straight-line vesting between threshold and maximum)

  

For the four outstanding LEAP awards, TSR will be measured using a common currency, with vesting levels subject to a fairness review that will not consider adjustments driven by currency movements.

 

45


Table of Contents
       Operation    Changes for 2013
Long-term incentives (legacy awards) (continued)       
    

Deferred awards

The Company has previously received share owner approval to permit the CEO to defer the receipt of several of his share awards. These include the UK and US Deferred Stock Units Awards Agreements (which are the agreements that now comprise the awards granted under the Capital Investment Plan in 1995), In accordance with share owner approval, Sir Martin Sorrell receives dividend equivalent payments (DEPs) in respect of these two awards.

 

In addition, Sir Martin Sorrell has deferred receipt of his UK and US 2004, 2005 and 2007 LEAP awards and the UK part of his 2006 LEAP award. The UK awards are options that can be exercised at any time until November 2017. The US awards will vest on the earlier of the end of his employment with the Company and 30 November 2017. Sir Martin has also received share owner approval to jointly elect (with the Company) to defer receipt of his UK and US 2009 LEAP awards.

   None
    

Outstanding options

Mark Read was granted two tranches of options under the Executive Stock Option Plan prior to his appointment as a director. These options are fully exercisable and are detailed in Item 6E.

   None

 

Chairman and non-executive directors

 

      Operation         Changes for 2013
Fixed elements                  

Fees

To reflect the skills, experience and time required to undertake the role.

 

Fees are reviewed every two years and take into account the skills, experience and time required to undertake the role, as well as fee levels in similarly-sized UK companies. The chairman of the Company advised the Compensation Committee that, while entitled, his fee should not be reviewed in 2012. The review of the fees of all non-executive directors was deferred and will take place in 2013. An aggregate fee is paid to the chairman with non-executive directors receiving a Board fee and then additional fees, as appropriate, for serving on the Audit, Compensation, and Nomination and Governance Committees.

 

The committee retains the discretion to pay consultancy fees to any non-executive director whose work falls outside the remit of their role (any such payments are detailed on page 53). In addition, former non-executive directors may be retained by the Company to provide consulting services or advice to the Group.

  Subject to review in 2013
 

Current fee level (£000)

   
 

Chairman

  425  
 

Senior independent director

  20  
 

Non-executive director

  65  
 

Chairmanship of Audit or Compensation Committee

  40  
 

Chairmanship of Nomination and Governance Committee

  15  
 

Member of Audit or Compensation Committee

  20  
 

Member of Nomination and Governance Committee

  5  

Benefits

To enable the chairman and non-executive directors to undertake their roles.

  Individuals who are required to travel outside of their home country to consider Company-related matters at meetings called at short notice will be paid £1,000 for attendance at each of those meetings.   None

 

Other policies

 

     
      Operation         Changes for 2013

Share ownership guidelines

To align the interests of executives with those of share owners.

 

CEO - 600% of base salary and fees

CFO - 300% of base salary and fees

CEO WPP Digital - 200% of base salary and fees

 

Executive directors will be permitted a period of seven years from date of appointment to achieve the guideline level.

  With effect from 1 January 2013

 

46


Table of Contents

How do these policies affect potential compensation packages?

 

These graphs seek to demonstrate how pay varies with performance. Given the significant reduction to Sir Martin Sorrell’s compensation package from 1 January 2013, the committee considered it helpful to illustrate the impact of this reduction.

 

LOGO

 

In illustrating the scenario charts above, the following assumptions have been made:

 

Fixed elements

 

Consists of base salary & fees, benefits (including DEPs) and pension

  

 

Base salary & fees are as per the policy table for the CEO and the single figure table for the CFO and the CEO WPP Digital

  

 

Benefits and DEPs are as per the single figure table

  

                          
 

Pension is as per the policy table

                                   
    £000    Base salary & fees      Benefits & dividends      Pension      Total fixed  
 

Sir Martin Sorrell (2011 figures)

     1,150 (1,306)         1,297 (1,806)         460 (585)         2,907 (3,697)   
 

Paul Richardson

     684         96         205         985   
   

Mark Read

     425         3         43         471   

 

Short-term
incentives

 

On-plan scenario assumes target bonus is paid for achievement of performance measures

  

 

Maximum scenario assumes the full bonus is paid for achieving stretch performance measures

  

 

Long-term
incentives

 

On-plan scenario assumes threshold vesting of 20% of the award (2011: 30%)

  

 

Maximum scenario assumes vesting of 100% of the award

  

 

47


Table of Contents

Looking back

 

This second section of the Compensation Committee’s Report, entitled Looking back , contains details of how the Company’s Executive Remuneration Policy was implemented in 2012.

 

Fixed elements of remuneration

 

Base salary and fees

 

      

Contractual salary and fees

000

   Effective date     

2012 Base salary and fees

£000

Sir Martin Sorrell 1

   £1,300      1 Jan 2012       1,300

Paul Richardson 1

   $925 and £100      1 Jan 2011       684

Mark Read

   £425      1 Jan 2011       425

 

1    

Any US dollar amounts received in 2012 have been converted into sterling at an exchange rate of $1.5852 to £1.

 

Each executive director receives a fee of £100,000 in respect of their directorship of WPP plc, which is included above.

 

Share owners will be aware that the CEO’s base salary is one aspect of his overall remuneration that has been reduced following consultation. Effective 1 January 2013, his base salary is £1.15 million.

 

Paul Richardson and Mark Read’s base salaries have remained unchanged since 2011 and therefore both salaries are due to be reviewed. The committee will consider these after the 2013 AGM. While there was no increase in base salary and fees for executive directors in 2012, employees who were subject to a salary review globally received an average increase of approximately 3.5%.

 

Benefits, dividend equivalent payments and pension

 

                    

2012 Benefits

£000

    

2012 DEPs

£000

 

Sir Martin Sorrell

               356         940   

Paul Richardson

               96         —     

Mark Read

               3         —     

 

The benefits provided to the executive directors include car allowance, healthcare, life assurance, long-term disability allowance, spousal travel costs and housing allowance. The CEO also received club membership and an amount of £7,065 (included above) in respect of tax liabilities incurred by him on expenditure on various items considered by the UK Tax authorities as benefits in kind, but which the committee considers to be essential to his ability to deliver his services successfully to the Group. The table above also includes share owner-approved dividend equivalent payments of £940,480 (£1,339,364 during 2011) which are due on certain of Sir Martin Sorrell’s deferred share awards.

 

       Contractual pension allowance
(as a % of base salary and  fees)
       2012 Pension
£000
 

Sir Martin Sorrell

     45%           586   

Paul Richardson

     30%           205   

Mark Read

     10%           43   

 

All pension benefits for the executive directors are provided on either a defined contribution or a cash allowance basis. Only the aggregate of base salary and fees is pensionable.

 

As part of the alterations to the CEO’s remuneration package following share owner consultation, his pension allowance has been reduced to 40% (45%).

 

Paul Richardson’s and Mark Read’s pension contributions remained unchanged at 30% and 10% respectively. The amounts will be reviewed as part of the committee’s review of these two executive directors’ remuneration structures after the 2013 AGM.

 

48


Table of Contents

Determining variable elements of pay

 

Short-term incentives

 

The following tables summarise the measures and performance assessment by the Compensation Committee in respect of 2012.

 

Short-term incentives are determined based on performance across two areas:

 

Financial objectives (Group or WPP Digital)    Individual strategic objectives

70%

   30%

 

Performance against targets

 

Group Financial Objectives – Sir Martin Sorrell & Paul Richardson

    
Performance measure   Performance in 2012    Overall assessment
against targets

Headline PBT

  Headline PBT is calculated on a like-for-like basis and increased by 8.7%, midway between target and a very stretching maximum.   

Target to

Maximum

Headline PBT margin

improvement

  The PBT margin is calculated on a like-for-like basis and increased by 0.7%, more than double the target level.   

Maximum

Revenue growth

  Growth was up 2.9% on a like-for-like basis and was in the top tier of that achieved by our key competitors. However, the achievement fell below the stretching threshold requirement set by the committee.    Below threshold
    

WPP Digital Financial Objectives – Mark Read

Performance measure   Performance in 2012    Overall assessment
against targets

Group Digital Margin Growth

 

Group Digital margins performed well but grew less strongly than very stretching targets.

  

Below threshold

Percentage of Group revenue

 

The Group Digital proportion of Group revenue continued to progress and in 2012 increased by 1.2% to in excess of 32%.

  

Target to

Maximum

    

Individual Strategic Objectives

Sir Martin Sorrell

 

– Succession planning was effectively implemented with a number of key appointments to critical roles across the Group.

– Creative reputation was recognised with WPP again winning the overall Holding Company of the Year award at Cannes.

– Acquisition strategy was effectively implemented with several acquisitions that strengthened the Group including the leading digital business, AKQA.

  

Target to

Maximum

Paul Richardson

 

– Working Capital management was effectively managed with relative year-on-year improvement.

– Good progress was made toward goals of improving efficiency and cost effectiveness in IT, Property and Finance.

  

Target to

Maximum

Mark Read

 

– Management and growth of WPP Digital continued according to plan with key successes in the assimilation of AKQA into WPP, establishment of Xaxis, the development of the WPP brand in the digital market and the sale of Buddy Media.

  

Target to

Maximum

 

49


Table of Contents

Based on the performance set out above, the resulting bonus for each executive relating to 2012 is:

 

     2012 actual bonus
(% of base salary and fees)
  

2012 actual bonus delivery 1
(% of bonus)

    

2012 Short-term
incentive

       Target     Maximum     Financial
objectives
   Individual
strategic
objectives
   Total
bonus
   Cash    ESA      £000 2

Sir Martin Sorrell 3

     217.5     435   181%    87%    268%    50%    50%      3,078

Paul Richardson

     200     300   130%    75%    205%    50%    50%      1,401

Mark Read

     134     200   66%    68%    134%    50%    50%      570
 
1    

To be delivered as 50% deferred shares (ESA) and 50% cash.

2    

Paul Richardson’s bonus has been converted into sterling at an exchange rate of $1.5852 to £1.

3    

Sir Martin Sorrell’s 2012 bonus was calculated and is expressed using the reduced salary and fees of £1.15 million, the base salary that became effective 1 January 2013.

 

Long-term incentives

 

Since 1999, WPP’s sole long-term incentive plan for executive directors has been the LEAP. In 1999, an award was granted under Original LEAP, and between 2004 and 2008, annual awards were made under Renewed LEAP. Between 2009 and 2012, annual awards were made under LEAP III. Under all plans, participants were invited to make and retain an investment in WPP shares in order to receive an award of conditional ‘matching’ shares. The ultimate number of matching shares awarded varies between 150% and 500% of the participant’s investment, dependent on the relative TSR performance of WPP against a group of global competitors, measured on a common currency basis over five years.

 

The comparator group comprises of our most relevant global competitors:

 

•    Aegis 1

  

•    Interpublic

•    Arbitron

  

•    Ipsos

•    Dentsu

  

•    Nielsen (from 2011)

•    GfK

  

•    Omnicom

•    Havas

  

•    Publicis

 

1    

Following the acquisition by Dentsu, Aegis will be treated in accordance with the established policy.

 

Following the end of the performance period, the committee reviews the outcome and undertakes a ‘fairness review’ to determine whether any exceptional circumstances have occurred during the period that would warrant a discretionary adjustment, either up or down, to the final number of matching shares vesting. For awards made since 2008, no adjustments will be made to take into account relative currency movements. It is an established policy that TSR outcomes should not be impacted by the speculation or actuality of takeovers involving comparator companies (or WPP). The appropriate adjustments (described below with respect to their application to the 2008 awards) will be considered as part of the fairness review.

 

The vesting of all LEAP III awards is based solely on WPP’s TSR performance, calculated using a common currency, relative to the global comparator group. However, vesting is based on a weighted market capitalisation basis, meaning that the level of reward is more closely tied to performance against WPP’s primary competitors (Omnicom, Publicis and Interpublic).

 

Market Capitalisation Percentile    Number of matching
shares

90th and above

   500%

80th

   420%

70th

   330%

60th

   240%

50th

   150%

Below 50th

   0%

 

50


Table of Contents
       Aggregate number
of shares actively
committed to LEAP
at 31 December 2012
     Value of investment
at 31 December 2012 1
(£000)
 

Sir Martin Sorrell

     2,143,333         19,033   

Paul Richardson

     491,618         4,366   

Mark Read

     127,988         1,137   

 

1    

Share price at 31 December 2012 £8.88.

 

2008-2012 LEAP vesting

 

The awards made in 2008 were the last to be granted under Renewed LEAP. Over the five-year investment and performance period WPP’s TSR was 44.7% (i.e. a shareholding of £100 at the start of the period would be worth £144.70 at the end, including reinvested dividends).

 

In undertaking the fairness review, the committee identified one event during the period that was deemed to be ‘exceptional’. In July 2012, Dentsu made an offer to acquire Aegis, which resulted in Aegis’ share price increasing by around 45% in 24 hours. The committee applied the default approach in line with the established guidelines, removing the impact of the bid premium, with the timing of the standard adjustment informed by independent advice from market specialists. The committee also noted that Arbitron was subject to a bid by Nielsen; however, this did not result in any positive or negative impact and therefore adjustment was not required.

 

The default approach entails the target company being deemed to de-list on the day prior to the share price being impacted by the proposed transaction. After that date, the TSR performance of the target company is calculated assuming a reinvestment into an unweighted synthetic stock of the other companies in the comparator group. The reinvestment is calculated using a two-month average before deemed de-listing.

 

WPP relative TSR performance against comparator group

 

LOGO

 

WPP’s TSR performance relative to the comparator group resulted in a match of 429% on a common currency basis. During the share owner consultation, the committee made the commitment that the fairness review will no longer consider currency adjustments. In the interest of continued transparency, the match on a local currency basis would have been 493%.

 

51


Table of Contents

The committee also considered the underlying financial performance of WPP against the comparator group. The measures considered included PBIT, revenue and organic growth, and this analysis along with the underlying financial performance of the Group over the period supported the default level of match.

 

       Number of
shares
vesting
     Value of
match at
grant price
£000
     Value
added due to
share price
appreciation
and dividends
£000
    

2012

Long-term

incentives

£000

 

Sir Martin Sorrell

     1,053,465         3,516         7,852         11,368   

Paul Richardson

     526,730         1,758         3,926         5,684   

Mark Read

     105,341         352         785         1,137   

 

2012-2016 LEAP awards

 

In 2012, all three executive directors were given the opportunity to invest in WPP shares under LEAP III. The opportunity given was determined by the committee and was bespoke to the individual.

 

Executive    Number of
Investment
Shares
committed
     Maximum
number of
Matching
Shares
     Maximum
face value
at grant
000
 

Sir Martin Sorrell

     431,034         2,155,170       £ 17,500   

Paul Richardson 1

     15,517         77,585       $ 5,000   

Mark Read

     23,276         116,380       £ 945   
1    

Paul Richardson’s 2012 LEAP Award was granted in respect of ADRs.

 

The five-year performance and investment period for the 2012 LEAP awards will finish on 31 December 2016.

 

Directors’ remuneration

 

For the fiscal year ended 31 December 2012 the aggregate compensation paid by WPP to all directors and officers of WPP as a group for services in all capacities was £31.3 million. Such compensation was paid by WPP and its subsidiaries primarily in the form of salaries, performance-related bonuses, other benefits and deferred share awards. The sum of £0.9 million was set aside and paid in the last fiscal year to provide pension benefits for directors and officers of WPP.

 

52


Table of Contents

Executive directors’ total remuneration received

 

Single total figure of remuneration in 2012 and 2011

 

              Base salary
and fees
£000
    Benefits 3
£000
   

DEPs 4

£000

    Pension
£000
   

Short-term

incentives 5
£000

   

Long-term

incentives 6
£000

    Total annual
remuneration
£000
   

Total excluding
pension and
LTI

£000

 

Sir Martin Sorrell 1,2

    2012        1,300        356        940        586        3,078        11,368        17,628        5,674   
      2011        1,306        466        1,339        585        5,005        3,239        11,941        8,117   

Paul Richardson 2

    2012        684        96        —          205        1,401        5,684        8,070        2,181   
      2011        677        100        —          198        1,860        1,296        4,131        2,637   

Mark Read

    2012        425        3        —          43        570        1,137        2,177        998   
      2011        425        3        —          43        808        324        1,603        1,236   
1    

As noted on page 41, effective 1 January 2013, the CEO’s remuneration package has been reduced with decreases to base salary, pension allowance and short- and long-term incentive opportunities.

2    

Any US dollar amounts received in 2012 have been converted into sterling at an exchange rate of $1.5852 to £1.

3    

Benefits include items such as healthcare, life assurance, spouse travel, car allowance, housing allowance and club memberships. The CEO also received an amount of £7,065 (included above) in respect of tax liabilities incurred by him on expenditure on various items considered by the UK Tax authorities as benefits in kind but which the committee considers to be essential to his ability to deliver his services successfully to the Group (£7,402 in 2011).

4    

Sir Martin Sorrell receives payments in accordance with the approval granted by share owners of amounts equal to the dividends that would be payable (totalling £940,480) during 2012 (£1,339,364 during 2011) in respect of the shares reflected in the UK and US Deferred Stock Units Awards Agreements (which are the agreements that now comprise the awards granted under the Capital Investment Plan in 1995).

5    

This is the amount awarded for the 2012 financial year performance. The award is usually delivered with at least half in deferred share bonus (ESA) (vesting after two years) and half in cash.

6    

This is the value of the matching LEAP awards which vested in 2013 following the end of the five-year performance period on 31 December 2012.

 

Non-executive directors’ total remuneration received

 

The fees detailed in the single total figure of remuneration table below are the only payments received by the non-executive directors. The Compensation Committee retains the discretion to make payments to non-executive directors who will stand down at the 2013 AGM in the event that they continue to provide advisory services to the Board.

 

       Total fees  
Director     

2012

£000

  

2011

£000

Philip Lader

     425    425

Colin Day 1

     108    112

Esther Dyson

       90      90

Orit Gadiesh

       70      70

Ruigang Li

       65      65

Stanley (Bud) Morten 2

       85      85

Koichiro Naganuma 3

     —      —  

Lubna Olayan (retired from the Board in June 2012)

       35      70

John Quelch 4

       71      70

Jeffrey Rosen

     145    145

Timothy Shriver

       85      85

Paul Spencer 1

     106    106

Sol Trujillo

       85      85
1    

Received payments in respect of attendance at Company meetings which were called at short notice and held outside of the director’s home country.

2    

Fee included ex officio payment of £20,000 (£20,000 in 2011).

3    

Received no fees in 2011 and 2012.

4    

Fee includes £6,218 (£4,680 in 2011) for consulting services.

 

53


Table of Contents

Aligning pay and performance

 

As illustrated in the introduction to Looking forward , the committee has sought to align the variable remuneration with the key strategic priorities of WPP, therefore seeking to maximise the dynamic between pay and performance.

 

This dynamic is contingent upon the committee setting challenging targets each year. The following graph and table demonstrate the relationship between pay and performance in respect of the CEO.

 

Historical TSR Performance 1 Value of hypothetical £100 holding

 

LOGO

 

CEO total remuneration (£000) 2

     4,411           7,199           11,597           11,941           17,628   

Year-on-year change in CEO total remuneration

     -79%           63%           61%           3%           48%   

Short-term incentives award against maximum opportunity

     67%           32%           95%           77%           62%   

Long-term incentives award against maximum opportunity

     n/a           50%           83%           46%           86%   

Change in annual TSR 3

     -38%           66%           32%           -13%           37%   

Change in five-year TSR 4

     -15%           10%           37%           13%           45%   

 

1    

Growth in the value of a hypothetical £100 holding over five years FTSE 100 (the broad market equity index of which WPP is a constituent) comparison based on one month average of trading day values. Source: DataStream.

2    

Calculated using the single figure methodology.

3    

TSR calculated using a one month trading day average, consistent with the data shown in the graph.

4    

TSR calculated using a six month averaging period, consistent with the calculation methodology under LEAP.

 

Value creation over the longer-term

 

The following graphs compare WPP’s 20-year TSR performance relative to our primary peers and the major indices in both the US and Europe. Over this period, a £100 investment in January 1993 in WPP would have delivered a return of £3,990 in April 2013, out-performing the competitors and the local indices. An identical investment in either the S&P 500 or the FTSE 100 would have yielded £553 or £475 respectively.

 

LOGO

 

54


Table of Contents

Outstanding share-based awards

 

In the interests of transparency, the following tables summarise all unexercised share options and share-based awards either vesting in the year or subject to ongoing performance conditions.

 

Executive Share Awards (ESA) held by executive directors

 

All Executive Share Awards made under the Restricted Stock Plan are made on the basis of satisfaction of previous performance conditions and are subject to continuous employment until the vesting date.

 

The table does not include grants in relation to the 2012 ESA as these will not be granted until May 2013.

 

             

Grant

date

    Share/ADR
price on
grant
date
    No. of
shares/ADRs
granted
    Value
on
grant
date
000
    Additional
shares
granted
in lieu of
dividends
   

Total

shares

vesting

   

Vesting

date

    Share/ADR
price on
vesting
   

Value

on

vesting

000

 

Sir Martin Sorrell

    2009 ESA        04.05.10      £ 6.7775        80,560      £ 546        —          —          01.05.13        —          —     
      2010 ESA        31.03.11      £ 7.6825        123,657      £ 950        —          —          01.05.13        —          —     
      2011 ESA        30.04.12      £ 8.3325        360,396      £ 3,003        —          —          06.03.14        —          —     

Paul Richardson

    2009 ESA 1       04.05.10      $ 51.59        11,813      $ 609        826        12,639        06.03.13      $ 80.9678      $ 1,023   
      2010 ESA 1       31.03.11      $ 61.76        19,121      $ 1,181        1,173        20,294        06.03.13      $ 80.9678      $ 1,643   
      2011 ESA 1       30.04.12      $ 67.82        21,995      $ 1,492        —          —          06.03.14        —          —     

Mark Read

    2009 ESA        04.05.10      £ 6.7775        23,164      £ 157        —          —          01.05.13        —          —     
      2010 ESA        31.03.11      £ 7.6825        38,138      £ 293        —          —          01.05.13        —          —     
      2011 ESA        30.04.12      £ 8.3325        48,454      £ 404        —          —          06.03.14        —          —     

 

1    

Paul Richardson’s 2009, 2010 and 2011 ESAs were granted in respect of ADRs.

 

Long-term incentive plans – Leadership Equity Acquisition Plans

 

The following table summarises all of the awards outstanding under Renewed LEAP and LEAP III. Awards granted in 2007 and 2008 were granted under Renewed LEAP. Awards granted in 2009, 2010, 2011 and 2012 were granted under LEAP III.

 

Name   Grant/
award
date
   

Investment

and performance

period

   

Number of

investment
shares/
ADR

    Share/ADR
price on
grant date
   

Maximum
number of
matching
units at

1 Jan 2012

    During 2012    

Maximum
number of
matching
units at

31 Dec 2012

    Share/
ADR
price on
vest/
deferral
date
    Value
on vest/
deferral
date
000
 
            Granted/
(lapsed)
units
    Additional
dividend
shares
    Vested
or
deferred
shares
       

Sir Martin Sorrell

                                                                                       
      11.12.07        01.01.07-31.12.11        148,742      £ 6.2300        743,710        (400,116     42,750        386,344        —        £ 8.3846      £ 3,239   
      31.10.08        01.01.08-31.12.12        218,596      £ 3.7490        1,092,980        —          —          —          1,092,980        —          —     
      15.12.09        01.01.09-31.12.13        365,878      £ 6.1025        1,829,390        —          —          —          1,829,390        —          —     
      24.11.10        01.01.10-31.12.14        416,666      £ 7.2475        2,083,330        —          —          —          2,083,330        —          —     
      07.12.11        01.01.11-31.12.15        711,159      £ 6.6475        3,555,795        —          —          —          3,555,795        —          —     
      10.12.12        01.01.12-31.12.16        431,034      £ 8.5975        —          2,155,170        —          —          2,155,170        —          —     

Paul Richardson

                                                                                       
      11.12.07        01.01.07-31.12.11        59,497      £ 6.2300        297,485        (160,047     17,100        154,538        —        £ 8.3846      £ 1,296   
      31.10.08        01.01.08-31.12.12        109,298      £ 3.7490        546,490        —          —          —          546,490        —          —     
      15.12.09        01.01.09-31.12.13        103,423      £ 6.1025        517,115        —          —          —          517,115        —          —     
      24.11.10        01.01.10-31.12.14        100,968      £ 7.2475        504,840        —          —          —          504,840        —            
      07.12.11        01.01.11-31.12.15        100,344      £ 6.6475        501,720        —          —          —          501,720        —          —     
      10.12.12        01.01.12-31.12.16        15,517      $ 69.25        —          77,585 1       —          —          77,585        —          —     

Mark Read

                                                                                       
      11.12.07        01.01.07-31.12.11        14,874      £ 6.2300        74,370        (40,011     4,274        38,633        —        £ 8.3846        £324   
      31.10.08        01.01.08-31.12.12        21,859      £ 3.7490        109,295        —          —          —          109,295        —          —     
      15.12.09        01.01.09-31.12.13        27,406      £ 6.1025        137,030        —          —          —          137,030        —          —     
      24.11.10        01.01.10-31.12.14        25,281      £ 7.2475        126,405        —          —          —          126,405        —          —     
      07.12.11        01.01.11-31.12.15        30,166      £ 6.6475        150,830        —          —          —          150,830        —          —     
      10.12.12        01.01.12-31.12.16        23,276      £ 8.5975        —          116,380        —          —          116,380        —          —     

 

1    

Paul Richardson’s 2012 LEAP Award was granted in respect of ADRs.

 

55


Table of Contents

Reward policy for management outside the Board

 

As well as setting the policy for the executive directors, the Compensation Committee is also responsible for reviewing the policy for the most senior people at WPP outside the Board.

 

Compensation packages for these individuals are normally reviewed every 18-24 months. As with the policy for executive directors, the design of the compensation policy at WPP ensures a clear and direct link between the performance of the Group and compensation. Substantial use of performance-driven compensation not only ensures the continued alignment of the interests of share owners and senior individuals within the Group, but also enables the Group to attract, retain and motivate the talented people upon whom our success depends.

 

WPP is committed to encouraging strong performance through a reward system that aligns management’s interests with those of share owners. From a compensation perspective, this is encouraged in a number of ways:

 

   

senior executives participate in the same long-term incentive plan as the executive directors which is designed to incentivise growth, capital efficiency and share price appreciation; and

 

   

share ownership is encouraged for the WPP Leaders (approximately the top 240 executives), all of whom have stretching ownership goals.

 

Management share incentive plans

 

The Company uses share-based compensation across the workforce to incentivise, retain and recruit talent which encourages a strong ownership culture among employees. The main share plans are described below.

 

The Restricted Stock Plan

 

The RSP is used to satisfy awards under the short-term incentive plans (including deferred share bonuses (ESAs)) as well as to grant awards to management under the WPP Leaders, Partners and High Potential program. This program is used to provide awards to about 1,600 of our key executives.

 

In the program, awards are made to participants that vest three years after grant, provided the participant is still employed within the Group.

 

Executive directors are eligible to receive ESAs under the RSP but ineligible to participate in any other aspect of the management share award program.

 

The Executive Stock Option Plan

 

The ExSOP is used to make special grants of options in order to attract or retain key talent. One award was granted in 2012 (one in 2011). This plan is not generally used.

 

All-employee plan

 

The Worldwide Ownership Plan is an all-employee plan that makes annual grants of stock options to employees with two years of service who work in wholly-owned subsidiaries. During 2012, awards were made to over 48,000 employees, including over 10,000 new participants. By 31 December 2012, options under this plan had been granted to approximately 110,400 employees over 49.2 million shares since March 1997. Executive directors are ineligible to participate in this plan.

 

Share incentive dilution for 2002 to 2012

 

The share incentive dilution level, measured on a 10-year rolling basis, has remained constant at 3.7% at 31 December 2012 (4.3%-2011). It is intended that awards under all plans, other than share options, will all be satisfied with purchased shares held either in the ESOPs or in treasury.

 

56


Table of Contents

C. Board Practices

 

The role of the Board

 

The Board is collectively responsible for promoting the success of the Company by directing and supervising the Company’s policy and strategy and is responsible to share owners for the Group’s financial and operational performance. Responsibility for the development and implementation of Group policy and strategy and for day-to-day management issues is delegated by the Board to the Group chief executive and the other executive directors. The list of matters reserved to the Board can be downloaded from the Company’s website.

 

During 2012, the Board met seven times formally and held 21 committee meetings throughout the year.

 

Attendance at meetings    Board     

Audit

Committee

    

Compensation

Committee

     Nomination and
Governance Committee
 

Philip Lader 1 (chairman)

     7         9         7         5   

Sir Martin Sorrell

     7         —           —           —     

Paul Richardson

     7         —           —           —     

Mark Read

     7         —           —           —     

Colin Day

     6         8         6         —     

Esther Dyson

     7         —           6         5   

Orit Gadiesh

     5         —           —           5   

Ruigang Li

     2         —           —           —     

Bud Morten 2

     7         9         7         4   

Koichiro Naganuma

     1         —           —           —     

Lubna Olayan 3

     2         —           —           —     

John Quelch

     4         —           —           —     

Jeffrey Rosen

     6         9         7         —     

Paul Spencer

     6         9         —           —     

Tim Shriver

     6         —           6         —     

Sol Trujillo

     6         9         —           —     

 

1    

By invitation, the chairman attended all of the Audit Committee meetings.

2    

By invitation, Bud Morten attended all Audit and Compensation Committee meetings and all but one of the Nomination and Governance Committee meetings.

3    

Lubna Olayan retired on 13 June 2012.

 

Information regarding the period during which each director has served is set forth in Item 6A.

 

The role of the chairman

 

The Board is chaired by Philip Lader, who chairs the Nomination and Governance Committee, and would continue to serve as a member of the Compensation Committee through December 2013 and, at the invitation of the Audit Committee chairman, attended all meetings of that committee. The chairman provides the leadership of the Board and is the main point of contact between the Board and the management team. The chairman represents the Board in discussions with share owners, investor bodies, ensures that systems are in place to provide directors with timely and accurate information, represents the Company in extensive external gatherings, and is also responsible for the Board governance principles.

 

The role of the senior independent director

 

The senior independent director is Jeffrey Rosen who is available to share owners and acts as a sounding board for the chairman and as an intermediary for the other directors with the chairman when necessary. The senior independent director’s role includes responsibility for the chairman’s appraisal and succession. Jeffrey Rosen has been the senior independent director since April 2010.

 

Non-executive directors

 

The non-executive directors have a diverse range of skills, experience and backgrounds. As detailed in their biographies on page 37, the non-executive directors work across the globe in media and advertising, investment banking and investment management, pension fund oversight, international management consulting, private

 

57


Table of Contents

equity and angel investing, business education, manufacturing, consumer products and retail management, internet start-ups, government and non-profit organisations. They provide constructive challenge and assistance to the Group chief executive in developing the Group’s strategy. All directors have access to the services of the Company Secretary and may take independent professional advice at the Company’s expense in conducting their duties. The Company provides insurance cover for its directors and officers.

 

The composition of the Board

 

The Board was composed of 15 directors in 2012 following Lubna Olayan’s decision to step down at the 2012 AGM. Three members are executive directors and 11, plus the chairman, are non-executive directors. The independence of each non-executive director is assessed annually by the Board. The Board has confirmed that all of the non-executives standing for re-election at the 2013 AGM continue to demonstrate the characteristics of independence.

 

Succession: Board and committee membership

 

In 2012 WPP commenced a comprehensive review of the Board’s composition and effectiveness, directed by the Nomination and Governance Committee with the assistance of Egon Zehnder International, a prominent Board recruitment and advisory firm. Geographic and gender diversity together with skills and experience in marketing services, finance and pertinent technologies are among the priorities of our Board succession.

 

As a consequence of this review the composition of the Board and the committees are being refreshed. Four of the longest serving non-executive directors, Bud Morten, John Quelch, Paul Spencer and Koichiro Naganuma are not standing for re-election at the 2013 AGM. The Compensation Committee chairman, Jeffrey Rosen, will step down from the committee in December 2013, as will Esther Dyson and Philip Lader.

 

If elected to serve as newly-appointed non-executive directors, Roger Agnelli, Jacques Aigrain and Hugo Shong would join Colin Day, Sol Trujillo, Tim Shriver and Ruigang Li on the Compensation Committee, with an identified, well-qualified individual (whose client conflict clearance cannot be finalized prior to the AGM) to be appointed upon such clearance and to serve as its chair.

 

If re-elected as a director, Colin Day would succeed Paul Spencer as chairman of the Audit Committee, accompanied by continuing members, Sol Trujillo and Jeffrey Rosen, and to be joined by Jacques Aigrain, Roger Agnelli and Hugo Shong (as well as, potentially, the individual identified above who would be Compensation Committee chairman).

 

If elected, Roger Agnelli, Tim Shriver, Jeffrey Rosen, Ruigang Li, Hugo Shong and Sally Susman would join Esther Dyson and Orit Gadiesh on the Nomination and Governance Committee, with Philip Lader as chairman. The chairman of the Board participates as an ex-officio member of all Board committees.

 

Time commitment

 

Letters of appointment for non-executive directors do not set out a fixed time commitment for Board attendance and duties but give an indication of the likely time required. It is anticipated that the time required by directors will fluctuate depending on the demands of the business and other events.

 

Development

 

On joining WPP, non-executive directors are given an induction which includes one-to-one meetings with management and the external auditors, briefings on the duties of directors of a Jersey company, the Model Code, WPP Code of Conduct and the UK Corporate Governance Code. The induction also covers the Board committees

 

58


Table of Contents

that a director will join. All directors are fully briefed on important developments in the various business activities which the Group carries out worldwide and regularly receive extensive information concerning the Group’s operations, finances, risk factors and its people, enabling them to fulfil their duties and obligations as directors. The directors are also frequently advised on regulatory and best practice requirements which affect the Group’s businesses on a global basis. At the Board meeting held in France in 2012 the Board received briefings from all the heads of the Group’s European operations.

 

Evaluation

 

WPP undertakes an annual review of the Board, its committees and individual directors. The chairman’s performance evaluation by the non-executive directors is led by the senior independent director. In 2012 a review of the Board’s performance was undertaken by the Group chief counsel on the basis of a questionnaire which tested areas including strategy, risk and governance processes, levels of participation, skills, and the effectiveness of the Board and its committees. Separate conversations were held between each director and either the chairman or the senior independent director. From these findings, we concluded that the Board had been effective and is prepared for a variety of potential macroeconomic, industry, client and personnel challenges. As part of the aforementioned Egon Zehnder International consultancy assignment, that firm interviewed directors, worked closely with the Board chairman and senior independent director to analyse governance strengths and deficiencies, and continues to advise the Board as to additional ways that its effectiveness might be enhanced.

 

Re-election

 

The directors submit themselves for annual re-election at each Annual General Meeting, if they wish to continue serving and are considered by the Board to be eligible. Directors may be appointed by share owners by ordinary resolution or by the Board on the recommendation of the Nomination and Governance Committee and must then stand for re-election at the next Annual General Meeting where they may be re-elected by ordinary resolution of the share owners.

 

With only specific exceptions to ensure Board continuity, non-executive directors shall not stand for re-election after they have served for the period of their independence, as determined by then-applicable UK and US standards; that currently being a period of nine years. Further, a transition in the Board chairmanship is also planned for 2014.

 

Diversity

 

WPP recognises the importance of diversity, including gender, at all levels of the Group as well as the Board.

 

WPP is committed to increasing diversity across its subsidiaries and supports the development and promotion of talented individuals, including women. In 2012, women comprised 13% of the WPP Board, 32% of Board members and executive leaders in the subsidiaries, 47% of senior managers and 54% of total employees. Our aspiration is to increase the female representation on the Board to 30% of non-executive directors as part of the Board refreshment process.

 

Directors’ conflicts of interest

 

The Company’s Articles of Association permit the Board to consider and, if it sees fit, to authorise situations where a director has an interest that conflicts, or may possibly conflict, with the interests of the Company (Situational Conflicts). The Board has a formal system in place for directors to declare Situational Conflicts to be considered for authorisation by those directors who have no interest in the matter being considered. In deciding whether to authorise a Situational Conflict, the non-conflicted directors must act honestly and in good faith with a view to the best interests of the Company and they may impose limits or conditions when giving the authorisation, or subsequently, if they think this is appropriate.

 

59


Table of Contents

Any Situational Conflicts considered, and any authorisations given, are recorded in the relevant minutes. The prescribed procedures have been followed in deciding whether, and on what terms, to authorise Situational Conflicts and the Board believes that the systems it has in place for reporting and considering Situational Conflicts continue to operate effectively.

 

Policy on directors’ contracts

 

The Company’s policy on directors’ service contracts is that they should be on a rolling basis without a specific end date.

 

Sir Martin Sorrell’s service contract may be terminated by either the Company, or Sir Martin, without notice, or any payment in lieu of notice.

 

        Effective from    Notice period

Sir Martin Sorrell

   19 Nov 2008    ‘At will’

Paul Richardson

   19 Nov 2008    12 months

Mark Read

   19 Nov 2008    6 months

 

Executive directors are permitted to serve as non-executives on the boards of other organisations. If the Company is a share owner in that organisation, non-executive fees for those roles are waived. However, if the Company is not a share owner in that organisation, any non-executive fees can be retained by the office holder.

 

Standard terms of directors’ contracts

 

   

Cash bonus – for the purposes of any annual cash bonus entitlement, if the executive director is still employed on the bonus payment date (including if under notice, if notice was given after the performance period ended), he or she will receive his or her bonus in the usual way. No payment will be made if employment is terminated before the end of the performance period, or if the executive is not employed on the bonus payment date.

 

   

Deferred share bonus – provided the executive is a ‘Good Leaver’, any unvested deferred share awards (ESAs) will be reduced on a time pro rata basis and paid on the vesting date.

 

   

Long-term incentive awards – provided the executive director is a ‘Good Leaver’, any unvested long-term incentive awards which are in at least the second year of the performance period will vest after the end of the performance period. However, the award will be pro-rated as well as dependent on WPP’s performance for the whole of the performance period. If the executive director leaves during the first year of the performance period, the award will lapse.

 

Terms that apply to Sir Martin Sorrell

 

Sir Martin Sorrell’s deferred LEAP awards and his Deferred Stock Units (DSUs) will be paid out unconditionally on termination of employment. The performance requirements in respect of these awards have already been met and the awards are therefore no longer subject to any leaver provisions.

 

In relation to his annual bonus, if Sir Martin ceases to be an employee after the end of the performance period, he will be entitled to receive his bonus to the extent that the performance targets have been achieved. In relation to the long-term incentive plans, unless he is terminated for cause, he will be treated as having retired on leaving the Company and therefore a ‘Good Leaver’.

 

60


Table of Contents

Non-executive directors

 

       Effective from    Notice period

Philip Lader

   26 Feb 2001    2 months

Colin Day

   25 Jul 2005    2 months

Esther Dyson

   29 Jun 1999    2 months

Orit Gadiesh

   28 Apr 2004    2 months

Ruigang Li

   11 Oct 2010    2 months

Stanley Morten

   02 Dec 1991    2 months

Koichiro Naganuma

   23 Jan 2004    2 months

John Quelch

   10 Jul 1991    2 months

Jeffrey Rosen

   20 Dec 2004    2 months

Timothy Shriver

   06 Aug 2007    2 months

Paul Spencer

   28 Apr 2004    2 months

Sol Trujillo

   11 Oct 2010    2 months

 

Governance in relation to compensation

 

Compensation Committee members

 

       Meetings  

Jeffrey Rosen (chairman)

     7   

Colin Day

     6   

Esther Dyson

     6   

Philip Lader

     7   

Tim Shriver

     6   
          

By invitation:

        

Bud Morten

     7   

 

2013 Compensation Committee membership

 

The Compensation Committee chairman, Jeffrey Rosen, will step down from the committee in December 2013, as will Esther Dyson and Philip Lader. If elected to serve as newly-appointed non-executive directors, Roger Agnelli, Jacques Aigrain and Hugo Shong would join Colin Day, Sol Trujillo, Tim Shriver and Ruigang Li on the Compensation Committee, with an identified, well-qualified individual (whose client conflict clearance cannot be finalised prior to the AGM) to be appointed upon such clearance and to serve as its chair.

 

During 2012, the Compensation Committee met seven times on a formal basis, as noted above. In addition, numerous informal Compensation Committee meetings were held throughout 2012 to discuss the review of the Executive Remuneration Policy.

 

None of the committee members has any personal financial interest (other than as a share owner as disclosed in Item 6E) in the matters to be decided by the committee, potential conflicts of interest arising from cross-directorships or day-to-day involvement in running the Group’s businesses.

 

The terms of reference for the Compensation Committee are available on the Company’s website and will be on display at the AGM, as set out in the Notice of AGM. This Annual Report on Form 20-F does not incorporate by reference information on the Company’s website.

 

The committee’s principal responsibilities under its terms of reference include:

 

   

reviewing and approving the Company’s compensation strategy;

 

   

determining appropriate remuneration for executive directors;

 

61


Table of Contents
   

approving the service agreements and severance arrangements for executive directors and other senior executives of the Company;

 

   

maintaining appropriate procedures for evaluation of executive performance;

 

   

overseeing succession planning and management development for senior executives in the Group who are not members of the Board;

 

   

reviewing, approving and administering the Company’s executive long-term incentive plans, employee share schemes and other equity-related incentive plans;

 

   

reviewing proposed special incentive awards to senior executives;

 

   

monitoring prohibitions on personal loans to directors and officers;

 

   

determining targets for performance-related pay schemes;

 

   

advising on any major changes in employee benefit structures;

 

   

overseeing the provisions for selecting, appointing and setting the terms of reference for any remuneration consultants to the Company;

 

   

overseeing the preparation of and recommending to the board the approval of the annual report of the committee in compliance with the disclosure requirements of the Code of Best Practice and the Directors’ Remuneration Report Regulations 2002;

 

   

overseeing the adequacy of disclosures throughout the year regarding director compensation, stock transactions and benefits;

 

   

approving the policy for authorising claims for expenses from directors and senior executives; and

 

   

ensuring that procedures are in place concerning compliance with the employee welfare provisions of the Company’s Code of Business Conduct and Ethics and the Company’s Policy Manual.

 

Advisors to the Compensation Committee

 

The Compensation Committee regularly consults with Group executives. In particular, the committee will invite certain individuals to attend meetings, including the CEO (who is not present when matters relating to his own compensation or contracts are discussed and decided), the Company Secretary, the chief talent officer and the worldwide compensation and benefits director. The latter two individuals provide a perspective on information reviewed by the committee and are a conduit for requests for information and analysis from the Company’s external advisors.

 

The committee receives external advice on all matters relating to the determination of fair and appropriate compensation packages for the executive directors, including competitive practices in comparator companies. Towers Watson is the committee’s appointed compensation advisor. Towers Watson is a voluntary signatory to the Remuneration Consultants Group Code of Conduct in relation to Executive Remuneration Consulting in the UK. Towers Watson did not provide any other material services to the Group.

 

The level and components of remuneration

 

The shareholdings of non-executive directors are set out on Page 66.

 

Non-executive directors do not participate in the Company’s pension, share option or other incentive plans, but may receive a part of their fees in ordinary shares of the Company and may participate in the Company’s deferred compensation program.

 

The Board considers that the non-executive directors’ remuneration conforms with the requirements of the UK Corporate Governance Code.

 

62


Table of Contents

The fees payable to non-executive directors represent compensation in connection with Board and Board committee meetings and where appropriate for devoting additional time and expertise for the benefit of the Group in a wider capacity.

 

Details of non-executive directors’ remuneration are provided in Item 6B.

 

Review of the Audit Committee

 

Audit Committee members

        
       Meetings  

Paul Spencer (chairman)

     9   

Colin Day

     8   

Sol Trujillo

     9   

Jeffrey Rosen

     9   
          

By invitation:

        

Philip Lader

     9   

Bud Morten

     9   

 

The audit committee held nine meetings during the year, which were attended by the external auditors, the Company’s chairman, the Group finance director, Bud Morten, the director of internal audit, the Group chief counsel and the Company Secretary.

 

Preparatory meetings were also held with the internal and external auditors as well as members of the Company’s senior management. The committee received presentations from the heads of internal audit, finance, tax, compliance and treasury and the GroupM worldwide CFO. The committee also received reports from the Disclosure Committee on financial reports. The Board received regular reports on all matters of particular significance arising at the committee meetings.

 

The committee’s terms of reference, which are reviewed with the Board annually and most recently in November 2012, are on the Company’s website at www.wpp.com/investor. This Annual Report on Form 20-F does not incorporate by reference information on the Company’s website.

 

The committee and its members were formally assessed by the chairman of the Company as part of the annual evaluation process described on page 59 for their technical suitability to be members and also for its overall effectiveness. The Board has designated Paul Spencer as the committee’s financial expert for Sarbanes-Oxley Act (SOX) purposes and as having recent and relevant financial experience for the purposes of the UK Corporate Governance Code. Each member of the committee has considerable financial and financial services expertise as set out in their biographies in Item 6A.

 

Committee responsibilities and how they were discharged in 2012

 

The main matters dealt with during 2012 were as follows:

 

   

monitoring the integrity of the Company’s financial statements and reviewing significant financial reporting judgements;

 

   

reviewing internal financial control and internal audit activities;

 

   

assisting the Board in meeting its responsibilities in respect of reviewing and reporting on the systems and key elements of risk management as they affect the Group;

 

   

reviewing the Group Treasury policy with particular focus on debtors, funding foreign exchange and cash management and the continued ability of the Group to adopt the going concern basis in preparing financial statements;

 

63


Table of Contents
   

reviewing reports on any material litigation or regulatory reviews involving Group companies;

 

   

reviewing the Group’s mergers and acquisitions strategy, any significant acquisitions, due diligence procedures and integration processes and the debt financing by the Group;

 

   

reviewing GroupM’s trading model and its risk assessment processes;

 

   

reviewing the Group’s Code of Business Conduct and supporting training programs;

 

   

reviewing the Group’s tax strategy and domicile;

 

   

monitoring the accounting and legal reporting requirements, including all relevant regulations of the UK Listing Authority, the SEC and NASDAQ and the Jersey Financial Services Commission;

 

   

overseeing the progress towards compliance with Section 404 of SOX for 2012, through regular status reports submitted by the internal and external auditors;

 

   

reviewing the procedures and supporting training programs implemented by the Group in response to the UK Bribery Act and US Foreign Corrupt Practices Act and increased regulatory focus;

 

   

reviewing the Group’s reporting systems and back office integration initiatives;

 

   

reviewing issues raised on our Right to Speak helpline and the actions taken in response to those calls;

 

   

reviewing the funding strategy for the Group’s pension plans in response to new legislation and increased funding requirements in the US and the UK; and

 

   

reviewing the Group’s initiatives and policies on data privacy and internet security.

 

Financial reporting and significant financial judgements

 

Deloitte reported to and discussed with the committee whether suitable accounting policies had been adopted in the financial statements for the year ended 2012 and whether management had made appropriate estimates and judgements. The main areas of focus in 2012 and matters where the committee specifically considered the judgements that have been made were:

 

   

the appropriateness of the restructuring charge taken in 2012. The committee reviewed the accounting standard criteria, the methodology adopted by management to quantify the charge and the presentation of the charge and agreed that management had appropriately presented, recognised and valued the restructuring charge;

 

   

the assessments made for goodwill impairment and the committee confirmed, based on management’s expectations of future performance of certain businesses, the level of goodwill impairment charges required in 2012;

 

   

the judgements made in respect of tax, in particular deferred tax assets including their recoverability and the level of tax provisioning. The committee supported management’s assumptions in both these areas and believe the current level of provisions is reasonable;

 

   

the going concern assessment and key forecast assumptions. The committee concurs with management’s going concern assumptions as set out in note 24 to the Consolidated Financial Statements;

 

   

the approach taken to calculating fair value adjustments in respect of acquired businesses and specifically provisions for non-corporate tax, property and legal exposures which the committee considered was appropriate and in line with expectations; and

 

   

accounting for the judgemental elements of remuneration including holiday pay, pensions, bonus accruals and share-based payments. The committee agreed that the assumptions applied by management are reasonable.

 

External audit

 

Deloitte has been WPP’s auditor since 2002. The lead partner rotates every five years and the last rotation was in 2010. In line with the committee’s responsibility to review and appoint the external auditors and approve their

 

64


Table of Contents

remuneration and terms of engagement, in 2012 the committee monitored Deloitte’s independence, objectivity and performance with reference to frequent reports from Deloitte during the year covering the overall audit strategy and the progress and results of the audit. The committee concluded that it continues to be satisfied with the performance of Deloitte and that Deloitte continues to be objective and independent. The committee recommends the reappointment of Deloitte at the AGM on 12 June 2013.

 

The committee will recommend a course of action to the Board during 2013 to respond to the new requirement in the Code that the external audit contract is put out to tender at least every 10 years.

 

Non-audit fees

 

The committee has established a policy regarding non-audit services that may be provided by the external auditors, which prohibits certain categories of work in line with relevant guidance on independence, such as ethical standards issued by the Auditing Practices Board and independence rules of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States) and SEC Rules. Other categories of work may be provided by the auditors if appropriate and if pre-approved by the committee, either as individual assignments or as aggregate amounts for specified categories of services. All fees are summarised periodically for the committee to assess the aggregate value of non-audit fees against audit fees. The level of fees for 2012 is shown in note 3 on page F-15.

 

D. Employees

 

The assets of communications services businesses are primarily their employees, and the Company is highly dependent on the talent, creative abilities and technical skills of its personnel and the relationships its personnel have with clients. The Company believes that its operating companies have established reputations in the industry that attract talented personnel. However, the Company, like all communications services businesses, is vulnerable to adverse consequences from the loss of key employees due to the competition among these businesses for talented personnel. On 31 December 2012, the Group, including all employees of associated undertakings, had approximately 165,000 employees located in over 3,000 offices in 110 countries compared with 158,000 and 146,000 as at 31 December 2011 and 2010, respectively. Excluding all employees of associated undertakings, this figure is 115,711 (2011: 113,615, 2010: 104,052). The average number of employees in 2012 was 114,490 compared to 109,971 and 101,387 in 2011 and 2010, respectively, including acquisitions.

 

Their geographical distribution was as follows:

 

       2012    2011    2010

North America

   27,782    27,540    25,546

United Kingdom

   11,413    10,761    9,620

Western Continental Europe

   23,322    22,298    21,154

Asia Pacific, Latin America, Africa & Middle East and Central & Eastern Europe

   51,973    49,372    45,067
     114,490    109,971    101,387

 

Their operating sector distribution was as follows:

 

       2012    2011    2010

 

Advertising and Media Investment Management

   48,662    47,252    42,424

Consumer Insight

   28,989    29,204    28,167

Public Relations & Public Affairs

   8,437    7,869    7,364

Branding & Identity, Healthcare and Specialist Communications

   28,402    25,646    23,432
     114,490    109,971    101,387

 

65


Table of Contents

E. Share Ownership

 

Directors’ interests

 

Directors’ interests in the Company’s ordinary share capital, all of which were beneficial, are shown in the following table. Save as disclosed in this table and in the report of the Compensation Committee, no director had any interest in any contract of significance with the Group during the year. Each executive director has a technical interest as an employee and potential beneficiary in shares in the Company held under the ESOPs. As at 31 December 2012, the Company’s ESOPs (which are entirely independent of the Company and have waived their rights to receive dividends) held in total 22,570,364 shares in the Company (20,599,871 in 2011).

 

      At 1 Jan
2012
    Shares acquired
through long-
term incentive
plan awards in
2012
    Movement
during
2012 - shares
acquired
through
SCRIP in
2012
    At 31 Dec
2012 (or
resignation
date, if
earlier)
    Shares/options
acquired through
long-term incentive
plan awards in 2013
   

Other

movements

since 31
Dec 2012

   

At

22 April
2013

    Shares
contributed
to charity
2007-2013
(and no
longer
beneficially
owned)
 
    Vested     (Sold)         Vested     (Sold)        

C Day

    15,240        —          —          —          15,240        —          —          —          15,240        —     

E Dyson

    35,000        —          —          —          35,000        —          —          —          35,000        —     

O Gadiesh

    —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —     

P Lader

    11,950        —          —          —          11,950        —          —          —          11,950        —     

R Li

    —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —     

S W Morten

    20,000        —          —          —          20,000        —          —          —          20,000        —     

K Naganuma 1

    —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —     

L Olayan (retired
from the
Board on 13 June 2012)

    10,000        —          —          —          10,000        n/a        n/a        n/a        n/a        n/a   

J A Quelch

    12,000        —          —          —          12,000        —          —          —          12,000        —     

M Read 2,7

    104,731        38,633        (38,633     3,453        108,184        105,341        —          —          213,525        —     

P W G Richardson 2,3

    535,790        154,538        (77,273     —          613,055        691,395        (588,080     —          716,370        —     

J Rosen

    12,000        —          —          —          12,000        —          —          —          12,000        —     

T Shriver

    10,000        —          —          —          10,000        —          —          —          10,000        —     

P Spencer

    10,000        —          —          —          10,000        —          —          —          10,000        —     

S Trujillo

    10,000        —          —          —          10,000        —          —          —          10,000        —     

Sir Martin Sorrell 2,4,5,6,8,9

    17,529,103        386,344        —          179,782        18,095,229        1,053,465        (244,214     (200,000     18,704,480        1,005,936 10  

 

1    

K Naganuma is a director of Asatsu-DK, which at 22 April 2013 had interests in 31,295,646 WPP shares representing 2.475% of the issued share capital of the Company.

2    

Interests include investment shares committed to the 2009, 2010, 2011 and 2012 awards under the LEAP plans but do not include matching shares from these awards, if any.

3    

In December 2012, Mr Paul Richardson reduced the total number of ADRs charged to Bank of America, N. A. for security for existing bank facilities made available to him from 115,611 WPP ADRs to 85,183 WPP ADRs.

4    

Includes 4,176,833 shares pursuant to the vesting of the 2004 and 2005 awards, part of the 2006 award and the 2007 award granted under LEAP. The receipt of these awards has been deferred until November 2017.

5    

Includes 3,636,950 shares which originally formed part of the Capital Investment Plan (an award made in 1995, which vested in 1999, in respect of 4,691,392 shares in total, some of which have been received by Sir Martin Sorrell) and which now comprise the share owner- approved UK and US Deferred Stock Units Awards Agreements.

6    

Includes 579,907 shares held under option pursuant to the UK part of his 2008 LEAP award.

7    

Includes 105,341 shares held under option pursuant to his 2008 LEAP award.

8    

In March 2013, Sir Martin Sorrell gifted 200,000 ordinary shares to the JMCMRJ Sorrell Charitable Foundation.

9    

The 1 January 2012 figure now includes 5,240 WPP ordinary shares held by a family company, not previously disclosed.

10    

The JMCMRJ Sorrell Charitable Foundation, of which Sir Martin Sorrell is a joint trustee, has an interest of 1,005,936 WPP plc shares. Sir Martin has no beneficial interest in these shares.

 

66


Table of Contents

In 2013, the executive directors will be subject to share ownership guidelines. Given WPP’s long-standing ownership culture and the use of LEAP program, the executives already hold substantial interests in the Group as illustrated here.

 

LOGO

 

Options held by executive directors

 

The options held by Mark Read at 31 December 2012 were granted prior to him becoming a director of the Company.

 

       Grant/
award date
     End of
exercise
period
     Exercise
price
     At 1 Jan
2012
(no. of
shares)
    

Granted

(lapsed)
2012
(no. of
shares)

     Exercised
2012
(no. of
shares)
     Share
price on
exercise
     Value on
exercise
     At 31 Dec
2012
(no. of
shares)
     Share
price 31  Dec
2012 1
 

Mark Read

     17.11.2003         17.11.2013       £ 5.595         10,615         —           —           —           —           10,615       £ 8.88   
       29.10.2004         29.10.2014       £ 5.535         9,879         —           —           —           —           9,879       £ 8.88   
1    

Share price 12-month high/low: £8.945/£6.690.

 

ITEM 7. MAJOR SHAREHOLDERS AND RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

 

A. Major Shareholders

 

As of the dates shown below, the Company is aware of the following interests of 3% or more in the issued ordinary share capital of the Company:

 

               22 April
2013
             20 April
2012
             18 April
2011
 

BlackRock Inc.

     5.12     64,710,630         *        *         *        *   

Legal & General

     3.51     44,375,396         3.55     44,960,433         3.78     47,884,647   
*   No interests in the issued ordinary share capital of the Company in excess of 3.0% have been notified to the Company.

 

The disclosed interests refer to the respective combined holdings of those entities and to interests associated with them. The Company has not been notified of any other holdings of ordinary share capital of 3% or more. None of these shareholders has voting rights that are different from those of the holders of the Company’s ordinary shares generally. As far as WPP is aware, it is neither directly nor indirectly owned or controlled by one or more corporations or by any government, or by any other natural or legal persons severally or jointly.

 

The number of outstanding ordinary shares at 31 December 2012 was 1,265,407,107 which includes the underlying ordinary shares represented by 10,159,573 ADSs. 222 share owners of record of WPP ordinary shares were US residents at 31 December 2012.

 

67


Table of Contents

The geographic distribution of our share ownership as at 31 December 2012 is presented below:

 

United Kingdom

     36%      

United States

     34%      

Asia Pacific, Latin America, Africa & Middle East,
Canada and Continental Europe

     30%      

Total

     100%      

 

B. Related Party Transactions

 

From time to time the Group enters into transactions with its associated undertakings. These transactions were not material for any of the years presented.

 

C. Interests of Experts and Counsel

 

Not applicable.

 

68


Table of Contents

ITEM 8. FINANCIAL INFORMATION

 

A. Consolidated Statements and Other Financial Information

 

See Item 18.

 

Outstanding legal proceedings

 

The Company has claims against others and there are claims against the Company in a variety of matters arising from the conduct of its business. In the opinion of the management of the Company, the ultimate liability, if any, that is likely to result from these matters would not have a material impact on the Company’s financial position, or on the results of its operations.

 

Dividend distribution policy

 

ADS holders are eligible for all stock dividends or other entitlements accruing on the underlying WPP plc shares and receive all cash dividends in US dollars. These are normally paid twice a year. Dividend cheques are mailed directly to the ADS holder on the payment date if ADSs are registered with WPP’s US Depositary, Citibank N.A. Dividends on ADSs that are registered with brokers are sent to the brokers, who forward them to ADS holders.

 

Dollar amounts paid to ADR holders depend on the sterling/dollar exchange rate at the time of payment.

 

B. Significant Changes

 

On 2 January 2013, the Scheme of Arrangement was completed between Old WPP and its share owners, as described in Item 4A, captioned “History and Development of the Company”.

 

69


Table of Contents

ITEM 9. THE OFFER AND LISTING

 

A. Offer and Listing Details

 

Share price history

 

The Company’s ordinary shares have been traded on The London Stock Exchange since 1971.

 

The following table sets forth, for the periods indicated, the reported high and low middle-market quotations for the Company’s ordinary shares on The London Stock Exchange, based on its Daily Official List.

 

       £ per Ordinary Share  
           High              Low      

2008

     6.48         3.10   

2009

     6.15         3.53   

2010

     7.95         5.73   

2011

     

First Quarter

     8.47         7.38   

Second Quarter

     7.90         7.21   

Third Quarter

     7.86         5.79   

Fourth Quarter

     6.88         5.78   

2012

     

First Quarter

     8.80         6.69   

Second Quarter

     8.74         7.43   

Third Quarter

     8.73         7.85   

October

     8.78         7.88   

November

     8.57         8.02   

December

     8.95         8.56   

Fourth Quarter

     8.95         7.88   

2013

     

January

     9.92         9.06   

February

     10.67         9.95   

March

     10.92         10.41   

First Quarter

     10.92         9.06   

 

70


Table of Contents

The ordinary shares have traded in the United States since 29 December 1987 in the form of ADSs, which are evidenced by ADRs or held in book entry form. The Depositary for the ADSs is Citibank, N.A. in New York. The following table sets forth, for the periods indicated, the reported high and low sales prices of the ADSs as reported by NASDAQ.

 

       US dollars per ADS
           High              Low    

2008

     63.19       23.28

2009

     49.99       24.54

2010

     61.97       44.30

2011

     

First Quarter

     68.78       58.74

Second Quarter

     65.29       58.95

Third Quarter

     62.87       45.40

Fourth Quarter

     55.38       45.04

2012

     

First Quarter

     70.03       52.14

Second Quarter

     69.98       57.56

Third Quarter

     70.37       60.98

October

     70.42       63.90

November

     68.70       63.34

December

     72.90       68.60

Fourth Quarter

     72.90       63.34

2013

     

January

     78.43       72.81

February

     81.69       77.67

March

     81.78       78.96

First Quarter

     81.78       72.81

 

The Depositary held 50,797,868 ordinary shares as at 31 December 2012, approximately 4.01% of the outstanding ordinary shares, represented by 10,159,573 outstanding ADSs.

 

B. Plan of Distribution

 

Not applicable.

 

C. Markets

 

See the discussion under “Share price history” in Item 9A.

 

D. Selling Shareholders

 

Not applicable.

 

E. Dilution

 

Not applicable.

 

F. Expenses of the Issue

 

Not applicable.

 

71


Table of Contents

ITEM 10. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

 

A. Share Capital

 

Not applicable.

 

B. Memorandum and Articles of Association

 

WPP is a public limited company incorporated under the name “WPP plc” in Jersey with registered number 111714.

 

The following summarises certain provisions of our memorandum and articles of association and applicable Jersey law. This summary is qualified in its entirety by reference to the Jersey Companies Law and our memorandum and articles of association. A copy of our memorandum and articles of association in the form adopted by special resolution passed on 5 November 2012 and including amendments to reflect the change of name of WPP, which became effective on 2 January 2013, is an exhibit to this Form 20-F.

 

Objects and Purposes

 

Under the Jersey Companies Law, the capacity of a Jersey company is not limited by anything contained in its memorandum or articles of association. Accordingly, the memorandum of association of a Jersey company does not contain an objects clause.

 

Rights attaching to WPP ordinary shares

 

Voting rights of share owners – subject to disenfranchisement in the event of: (A) non-payment of any call or other sum due and payable in respect of any ordinary share; or (B) any non-compliance with any notice requiring disclosure of the beneficial ownership of any ordinary shares and subject to any special rights or restrictions as to voting for the time being attached to any ordinary shares (as to which there are none at present), on a show of hands every qualifying person (i.e. share owner, proxy or authorised corporate representative) present has one vote other than every proxy appointed by more than one member entitled to vote on the resolution who has two votes, one vote for and one against the resolution if: (i) one or more of the members instructed him to vote for and one or more of the members instructed him to vote against the resolution; or (ii) one or more of the members instructed him to vote for the resolution and one or more of the members gave him discretion as to how to vote and he exercises his discretion by voting against the resolution; or (iii) one or more of the members instructed him to vote against the resolution and one or more of the members gave him discretion as to how to vote and he exercises his discretion by voting for the resolution, and on a poll every share owner present in person or by proxy has one vote for every ordinary share of which he or she is a holder, except that any proxy who has been appointed by the Depositary shall have such number of votes as equals the number of ordinary shares in relation to which such proxy has been appointed. In the case of joint holders, the vote of the person whose name stands first in the register of members and who tenders a vote is accepted to the exclusion of any votes tendered by any other joint holders.

 

Return of capital on a winding up – the liquidator may, with the sanction of a special resolution of WPP and any other sanction required by the Statutes: (A) divide among the WPP share owners in specie the whole or any part of the assets of WPP; or (B) vest the whole or any part of the assets in trustees on such trusts for the benefit of share owners as the liquidator shall think fit, but no share owner shall be compelled to accept any assets upon which there is any liability. The “Statutes” means the Jersey Companies Law and every other statute, statutory instrument, regulation or order, for the time being in force, concerning companies registered under the Jersey Companies Law, including the Electronic Communication (Jersey) Law 2000 and the Companies (Uncertificated Securities) (Jersey) Order 1999 (as amended).

 

72


Table of Contents

Capitalisation of reserves

 

The board of directors may, with the authority of an ordinary resolution of WPP: (A) resolve to capitalise any sum standing to the credit of any reserve account of WPP (including share premium account and capital redemption reserve) or any sum standing to the credit of profit and loss account not required for the payment of any preferential dividend (whether or not it is available for distribution); and (B) appropriate that sum as capital to the share owners in proportion to the nominal amount of the ordinary shares held by them respectively and apply that sum on their behalf in paying up in full any unissued ordinary shares or debentures of WPP of a nominal amount equal to that sum and allot the ordinary shares or debentures credited as fully paid to those share owners, or as they may direct, in those proportions or in paying up the whole or part of any amounts that are unpaid in respect of any issued ordinary shares held by them respectively, or otherwise deal with such sum as directed by the resolution, provided that the share premium account and the capital redemption reserve and any sum not available for distribution in accordance with the Statutes may only be applied in paying up unissued ordinary shares to be allotted credited as fully paid up.

 

Transfer of ordinary shares

 

Subject to any restrictions in the articles of association, a share owner may transfer all or any of his ordinary shares in any manner that is permitted by the Statutes and is from time to time approved by the board of directors. WPP shall register the transfer of any ordinary shares held in uncertificated form by means of a relevant system in accordance with the Statutes. The board of directors may, in its absolute discretion, refuse to register any transfer of an uncertificated share where permitted by articles of association and the Statutes.

 

A share owner may transfer all or any of his certificated ordinary shares by an instrument of transfer in any usual form, or in such other form as the board of directors may approve. The instrument of transfer shall be signed by or on behalf of the transferor and, except in the case of a fully paid share, by or on behalf of the transferee. The board of directors may, in its absolute discretion, refuse to register any transfer of any certificated ordinary share that is not fully paid up (but not so as to prevent dealings in ordinary shares admitted to official listing by the United Kingdom Listing Authority (UKLA) from taking place on an open and proper basis) or on which WPP has a lien. The board of directors may also refuse to register any instrument of transfer of a certificated ordinary share unless it is lodged at the registered office, or such other place as the board of directors may decide, for registration, accompanied by the share certificate for the ordinary shares to be transferred and such other evidence as the board of directors may reasonably require to prove title of the intending transferor or his right to transfer the ordinary shares and it is in respect of only one class of WPP shares. If the board of directors refuses to register a transfer of a certificated ordinary share it shall, as soon as practicable and in any event within two months after the date on which the instrument of transfer was lodged or the operator-instruction was received, give to the transferee notice of the refusal. The board of directors must provide the transferee with such further information about the reasons for the refusal as the transferee may reasonably request. Unless otherwise agreed by the board of directors in any particular case, the maximum number of persons who may be entered on the register as joint holders of an ordinary share is four.

 

Changes in capital

 

Subject to the provisions of the Jersey Companies Law, WPP may by special resolution:

 

   

increase its share capital;

 

   

consolidate and divide all or any of its share capital into ordinary shares of a larger amount;

 

   

sub-divide all or part of its share capital into ordinary shares of a smaller amount;

 

   

cancel any ordinary shares that have not, at the date of the special resolution, been taken or agreed to be taken by any person and diminish the amount of its authorised share capital by the amount of the ordinary shares so cancelled; or

 

   

alter its share capital in any other manner permitted by the Jersey Companies Law.

 

73


Table of Contents

Subject to the provisions of the Jersey Companies Law, WPP may:

 

   

purchase ordinary shares, including any redeemable ordinary shares; and

 

   

by special resolution, reduce its share capital and any capital redemption reserve or share premium account.

 

Authority to allot securities and disapplication of pre-emption rights

 

WPP may from time to time pass an ordinary resolution authorising the board of directors to exercise all the powers of WPP to allot relevant securities up to the nominal amount specified in the resolution. The authority shall expire on the day specified in the resolution, not being more than five years after the date on which the resolution is passed. The term “relevant securities” means shares in WPP other than subscriber shares, or shares allotted pursuant to an employee share scheme, and any right to subscribe for or to convert any security into, shares in WPP. For the avoidance of doubt, any reference to the allotment of relevant securities includes the grant of such a right but not the allotment of shares pursuant to such a right.

 

On the passing of a special resolution, the board of directors shall have power to allot equity securities wholly for cash but that power shall be limited: (A) to the allotment of equity securities in connection with a rights issue; and (B) to the allotment (other than in connection with a rights issue) of equity securities having a nominal amount not exceeding in aggregate the sum specified in the special resolution.

 

Variation of rights

 

Whenever the share capital of WPP is divided into different classes of shares (which it is not as at the date of this document), all or any of the rights for the time being attached to any class of shares in issue may, subject to the Statutes, be varied, either in such manner as those rights may provide or with the consent in writing of the holders of two-thirds in nominal value of the issued ordinary shares of that class or with the sanction of a special resolution passed at a separate general meeting of the holders of those ordinary shares. At any separate general meeting, the necessary quorum is two persons holding or representing by proxy at least one-third in nominal amount of the issued ordinary shares of the class in question (but at any adjourned meeting, one person holding ordinary shares of the class or his proxy is a quorum).

 

Disclosure of interests in WPP’s shares

 

WPP may give a disclosure notice to any person whom it believes is either:

 

   

interested in the WPP’s shares; or

 

   

has been so interested at any time during the three years on which the disclosure notice is issued.

 

The disclosure notice may require the person:

 

   

to confirm that fact or (as the case may be) to state whether or not it is the case; and

 

   

if he holds, or has during that time held, any such interest, to give such further information as may be required.

 

The notice may require the person to whom it is addressed, where either:

 

   

his interest is a present interest and another interest in the shares subsists; or

 

   

another interest in the shares subsisted during that three year period at a time when his interest subsisted, to give, so far as lies within his knowledge, such particulars with respect to that other interest as may be required by the notice including:

 

   

the identity of persons interested in the shares in question; and

 

74


Table of Contents
   

whether persons interested in the same shares are or were parties to either an agreement to acquire interests in a particular company, or an agreement or arrangement relating to the exercise of any rights conferred by the holding of the shares.

 

The notice may require the person to whom it is addressed, where his interest is a past interest, to give (so far as lies within his knowledge) particulars of the identity of the person who held that interest immediately upon his ceasing to hold it.

 

Failure to provide the information within 14 days after the notice has been given means that the holder of the relevant shares shall not be entitled to vote either personally or by proxy at a shareholders’ meeting or to exercise any other right confirmed by membership in relation to shareholder meetings for so long as the default continues (and, if those shares represent at least 0.25 percent of the issued shares of the class, the holder shall not be entitled to receive any payment by way of dividend or to transfer any rights in the shares).

 

Register of members

 

The register of members of WPP must be kept and maintained in Jersey.

 

Uncertificated shares – general powers

 

Subject to the Jersey Companies Law and the Companies Uncertificated Securities (Jersey) Order 1999 (as amended), the board of directors may permit any class of ordinary shares to be held in uncertificated form and to be transferred by means of a relevant system and may revoke such permission. In relation to any uncertificated share, WPP may utilise the relevant system in which it is held to the fullest extent available from time to time in the exercise of any of its powers or functions under the Statutes or the articles of association or otherwise in effecting any actions. Any provision in the articles of association in relation to uncertificated shares that is inconsistent with any applicable statutory provision shall not apply. WPP may, by notice to the holder of an uncertificated share, require the holder to change the form of that share to certificated form within such period as may be specified in the notice. For the purpose of effecting any action by WPP, the board of directors may determine that holdings of the same share owner in uncertificated form and in certificated form shall be treated as separate holdings but shares of a class held by a person in uncertificated form shall not be treated as a separate class from shares of that class held by that person in certificated form.

 

Directors

 

The WPP directors (other than alternate directors) shall not, unless otherwise determined by an ordinary resolution of WPP, be fewer than six in number.

 

A director need not be a share owner.

 

At each annual general meeting every director who held office on the date seven days before the date of the notice of annual general meeting shall retire from office, but shall be eligible for re-election.

 

The directors shall be paid fees not exceeding in aggregate £2,000,000 per annum (or such larger sum as WPP may, by ordinary resolution, determine) as the board of directors may decide to be divided among them. Such fee shall be divided among them in such proportion and manner as they may agree or, failing agreement, equally.

 

The board of directors may grant special remuneration to any director who performs any special or extra services to, or at the request of, WPP. Special remuneration may be payable to a director in addition to his ordinary remuneration (if any) as a director.

 

The directors shall also be paid out of the funds of WPP all expenses properly incurred by them in and about the discharge of their duties, including their expenses of travelling to and from the meetings of the board of directors, committee meetings and general meetings.

 

75


Table of Contents

The board of directors may exercise all the powers of WPP to: (i) pay, provide, arrange or procure the grant of pensions or other retirement benefits, death, disability or sickness benefits, health, accident and other insurances or other such benefits, allowances, gratuities or insurances, including in relation to the termination of employment, to or for the benefit of any person who is or has been at any time a director of WPP or in the employment or service of WPP or of any body corporate that is or was associated with WPP or of the predecessors in business of WPP or any such associated body corporate, or the relatives or dependants of any such person. For that purpose, the board of directors may procure the establishment and maintenance of, or participation in, or contribution to, any pension fund, scheme or arrangement and the payments of any insurance premiums; (ii) establish, maintain, adopt and enable participation in any profit sharing or incentive scheme including shares, share options or cash or any similar schemes for the benefit of any director or employee of WPP or of any associated body corporate, and, subject to any restrictions under applicable legislation, to lend money to any such director or employee or to trustees on their behalf to enable any such schemes to be established, maintained or adopted; and (iii) support and subscribe to any institution or association that may be for the benefit of WPP or of any associated body corporate or any directors or employees of WPP or associated body corporate or their relatives or dependants or connected with any town or place where WPP or an associated body corporate carries on business, and to support and subscribe to any charitable or public object whatsoever.

 

Subject to any applicable statutory provisions and to declaring his interests in accordance with the articles of association, a director may enter into or be interested in any transaction or arrangement with WPP, either with regard to his tenure of any office or position in the management, administration or conduct of the business of WPP, or as vendor, purchaser or otherwise. A director may hold and be remunerated in respect of any other office or place of profit with WPP (other than the office of auditor of WPP) in conjunction with his office as a director and he (or his firm) may also act in a professional capacity for WPP (except as auditor) and may be remunerated for it.

 

A director who, to his knowledge, is in any way, whether directly or indirectly, interested in a transaction or arrangement or a proposed transaction or arrangement with WPP or any of its subsidiaries, or if any situation exists in which a director has or can have a direct or indirect interest that conflicts with or may conflict with the interests of WPP, shall disclose to WPP the nature and extent of the interest or situation in accordance with the articles of association.

 

A director shall not vote or be counted in the quorum at a meeting in respect of any resolution concerning his own appointment (including fixing and varying its terms), or the termination of his own appointment, as the holder of any office or place of profit with WPP or any other company in which WPP is interested but, where proposals are under consideration concerning the appointment (including fixing or varying its terms), or the termination of the appointment, of two or more directors to offices or places of profit with WPP or any company in which WPP is interested, those proposals may be divided and considered in relation to each director separately, and in such case each of the directors concerned (if not otherwise debarred from voting under the articles of association) shall be entitled to vote and be counted in the quorum in respect of each resolution except that concerning his own appointment or the termination of his own appointment.

 

A director shall not vote (or be counted in the quorum at a meeting) in respect of any transaction or arrangement or other proposal in which he has an interest that (together with any interest of a connected person) is to his knowledge a direct or indirect interest and as may reasonably be required as likely to give rise to a conflict. Notwithstanding the above, a director shall be entitled to vote (and be counted in the quorum) on: (A) any transaction or arrangement in which he is interested by virtue of an interest in ordinary shares, debentures or other securities of WPP or otherwise in or through WPP; (B) the giving of any guarantee, security or indemnity in respect of money lent or obligations incurred by him or by any other person at the request of, or for the benefit of, WPP or any of its subsidiaries; or a debt or obligation of WPP or any of its subsidiaries for which he himself has assumed responsibility under a guarantee or indemnity or by the giving of security; (C) (subject to the Statutes) indemnification (including loans made in connection with it) by WPP in relation to the performance of his duties on behalf of WPP or any of its subsidiaries; (D) any issue or offer of ordinary shares, debentures or other securities of WPP or any of its subsidiaries in respect of which he is or may be entitled to participate in his

 

76


Table of Contents

capacity as holder of any such securities or as an underwriter or sub-underwriter; (E) any transaction or arrangement concerning another company in which he and any connected person do not to his knowledge hold, directly or indirectly as shareholders, or through their direct or indirect holdings of financial instruments (within the meaning of Chapter 5 of the Disclosure and Transparency Rules) voting rights representing one percent or more of any class of shares in the capital of such company; (F) any arrangement for the benefit of employees of WPP or any of its subsidiaries that does not accord to him any privilege or benefit not generally accorded to the employees to whom the arrangement relates; and (G) the purchase or maintenance of insurance for the benefit of the directors or for the benefit of persons including the directors. “Disclosure and Transparency Rules” means the rules and regulations made by the Financial Services Authority in its capacity as the UK Listing Authority under Part VI of the UK Financial Services and Markets Act of 2000, as amended, and contained in the UK Listing Authority’s publication of the same name.

 

WPP shall not make a payment for loss of office to a director unless the payment has been approved by an ordinary resolution of WPP.

 

General meetings

 

The board of directors shall convene, and WPP shall hold, an annual general meeting in accordance with the Statutes. Other general meetings shall be held whenever the board of directors thinks fit or on the requisition of WPP share owners in accordance with the Statutes or the articles of association.

 

An annual general meeting shall be called by not less than 21 days’ written notice and any other general meeting shall be called by not less than 14 clear days’ written notice.

 

The requisite quorum for general meetings of WPP shall be two qualifying persons, entitled to vote on the business to be transacted at the meeting.

 

Borrowing powers

 

The board of directors may exercise all the powers of WPP to borrow money and to mortgage or charge all or any part of its undertaking, property and assets (both present and future) and uncalled capital and to issue debentures and other securities, whether outright or as collateral security for any debt, liability or obligations of WPP or of any third party. The board of directors shall restrict the borrowings of WPP and exercise all voting and other rights or powers of control exercisable by WPP in relation to its subsidiaries (if any) so as to secure (as regards subsidiaries only so far as by such exercise it can secure) that the aggregate principal amount outstanding at any time in respect of all borrowings by the WPP Group (exclusive of any borrowings that are owed by one WPP Group company to another WPP Group company) after deducting the amount of cash deposited will not, without the previous sanction of WPP in general meeting, exceed an amount equal to 2.5 times the adjusted capital and reserves (as defined in the articles of association) or any higher limit fixed by ordinary resolution of WPP that is applicable at the relevant time. “WPP Group” means WPP and its subsidiaries and subsidiary undertakings and, where the context requires, its associated undertakings.

 

To date, no resolution of the type referred to in the paragraph above has been passed.

 

Dividends

 

Declaration of dividends – subject to the provisions of the Jersey Companies Law, WPP may, by ordinary resolution, declare a dividend to be paid to the share owners, according to their respective rights and interests in the profits, and may fix the time for payment of such dividend, but no dividend shall exceed the amount recommended by the board of directors.

 

Fixed and interim dividends – subject to the provisions of the Jersey Companies Law, the board of directors may pay such interim dividends as appear to the board of directors to be justified by the financial position of WPP and

 

77


Table of Contents

may also pay any dividend payable at a fixed rate at intervals settled by the board of directors whenever the financial position of WPP, in the opinion of the board of directors, justifies its payment. If the board of directors acts in good faith, none of the directors shall incur any liability to the share owners conferring preferred rights for any loss such share owners may suffer in consequence of the lawful payment of an interim dividend on any shares having non-preferred or deferred rights.

 

Calculation and currency of dividends – except insofar as the rights attaching to, or the terms of issue of, any shares otherwise provide: (A) all dividends shall be declared and paid according to the amounts paid up on the shares in respect of which the dividend is paid, but no amount paid up on a share in advance of calls shall be treated as paid up on the share; (B) all dividends shall be apportioned and paid pro rata according to the amounts paid up on the shares during any portion or portions of the period in respect of which the dividend is paid; (C) any amount paid by WPP by way of dividend will be deemed to include any amount that WPP may be compelled by law to withhold or deduct; and (D) dividends may be declared or paid in any currency. The board of directors may agree with any share owner that dividends that may at any time or from time to time be declared or become due on his or her ordinary shares in one currency shall be paid or satisfied in another, and may agree the basis of conversion to be applied and how and when the amount to be paid in the other currency shall be calculated and paid and for WPP or any other person to bear any costs involved.

 

Dividends not to bear interest – no dividend or other moneys payable by WPP on or in respect of any share shall bear interest as against WPP unless otherwise provided by the rights attached to the share.

 

Calls or debts or amounts required by law may be deducted from dividends – the board of directors may deduct from any dividend or other moneys payable to any person (either alone or jointly with another) on or in respect of a share all such sums as may be due from him (either alone or jointly with another) to WPP on account of calls or otherwise in relation to shares.

 

Dividends in specie – with the authority of an ordinary resolution of WPP and on the recommendation of the board of directors, payment of any dividend may be satisfied wholly or in part by the distribution of specific assets and in particular of paid up ordinary shares or debentures of any other company.

 

Scrip dividends – the board of directors may, with the authority of an ordinary resolution of WPP, offer any share owners the right to elect to receive further ordinary shares (whether or not of that class) credited as fully paid, by way of scrip dividend instead of cash in respect of all (or some part) of any dividend specified by the ordinary resolution.

 

Unclaimed dividends – any dividend unclaimed for a period of 12 years after having become due for payment shall be forfeited and cease to remain owing by WPP.

 

Forfeiture of shares

 

If the whole or any part of any call or installment remains unpaid on any share after the due date for payment, the board of directors may serve a written notice on the share owner requiring him to pay so much of the call or installment as remains unpaid, together with any accrued interest.

 

The written notice shall state a further day, being not less than 14 clear days from the date of the notice, on or before which, and the place where, payment is to be made and shall state that, in the event of non-payment on or before the day and at the place appointed, the share in respect of which the call was made or installment is payable will be liable to be forfeited.

 

If the requirements of a notice are not complied with, any share in respect of which it was given may (before the payment required by the notice is made) be forfeited by a resolution of the board of directors. The forfeiture shall include all dividends declared and other moneys payable in respect of the forfeited share and not actually paid before the forfeiture.

 

78


Table of Contents

Every share that is forfeited or surrendered shall become the property of WPP and (subject to the Statutes) may be sold, re-allotted or otherwise disposed of, upon such terms and in such manner as the board of directors shall decide either to the person who was before the forfeiture the share owner or to any other person and whether with or without all or any part of the amount previously paid up on the share being credited as so paid up.

 

Website communication with share owners

 

The articles of association enable WPP to use its website as a means of sending or supplying documents or information to share owners. Before communicating with a share owner by means of its website, WPP must have asked the share owner, individually, to agree (generally or specifically) that WPP may send or supply documents or information to him by means of a website. A member shall be deemed to have agreed that WPP may send or supply a document or information by means of a website if no response to the request is received within 28 days. When communicating with share owners by means of website communications, WPP will notify the share owners (by post or other permitted means) of the presence of a document or information on the website.

 

Directors’ indemnity, insurance and defence

 

As far as the legislation allows, WPP may:

 

(i) indemnify any director (or of an associated body corporate) against any liability;

 

(ii) indemnify a director of a company that is a trustee of an occupational pension scheme for employees (or former employees) of WPP (or of an associated body corporate) against liability incurred in connection with WPP’s activities as trustee of the scheme;

 

(iii) purchase and maintain insurance against any liability for any director referred to in paragraph (i) or (ii) above; and

 

(iv) provide any director referred to in paragraph (i) or (ii) above with funds (whether by loan or otherwise) to meet expenditure incurred or to be incurred by him in defending any criminal, regulatory or civil proceedings or in connection with an application for relief (or to enable any such director to avoid incurring such expenditure).

 

Takeover Bids

 

The City Code on Takeovers and Mergers (the “City Code”) applies to WPP. Under the City Code, if an acquisition of ordinary shares were to increase the aggregate holding of an acquirer and its concert parties to ordinary shares carrying 30% or more of the voting rights in WPP, the acquirer (and, depending upon the circumstances, its concert parties) would be required, except with the consent of the Panel on Takeovers and Mergers (an independent body in the United Kingdom), to make a cash offer for the outstanding ordinary shares at a price not less than the highest price paid for the ordinary shares by the acquirer or its concert parties during the previous 12 months. A similar obligation to make a such a mandatory offer would also arise on the acquisition of ordinary shares by a person holding (together with its concert parties) ordinary shares carrying between 30% and 50% of the voting rights in WPP if the effect of such acquisition were to increase that person’s percentage of the voting rights they hold in ordinary shares.

 

The Jersey Companies Law provides that where a person (the “Offeror”) makes a takeover offer to acquire all of the shares (or all of the shares of any class) in a Jersey company (other than any shares already held by the Offeror at the date of the offer), if the Offeror has by virtue of acceptances of the offer acquired or contracted to acquire not less than 90% in nominal value of the shares (or class of shares) to which the offer relates, the Offeror may (subject to the requirements if the Jersey Companies Law), by notice to the holders of the shares (or class of shares) to which the offer relates which the Offeror has not already acquired or contracted to acquire, compulsorily acquire those shares. A holder of any shares who receives a notice of compulsory acquisition may, within six weeks from the date on which such notice was given apply to the Royal Court of Jersey (the “Jersey Court”) for an order that the Offeror not be entitled and bound to purchase the holder’s shares or that the Offeror purchase the holder’s shares on terms different to those of the Offeror’s offer.

 

79


Table of Contents

Where before the end of the period within which the takeover offer can be accepted, the Offeror has by virtue of acceptances of the offer acquired or contracted to acquire not less than 90% in nominal value of all of the shares (or all of the shares of a particular class) of the Jersey company, the holder of any shares (or class of shares) to which the offer relates who has not accepted the offer may, by written notice to the Offeror, require the Offeror to acquire the holder’s shares. The Offeror shall (subject to the requirements of the Jersey Companies Law) be entitled and bound to acquire the holder’s shares on the terms of the offer or on such other terms as may be agreed. Where a holder gives the Offeror a notice of compulsory acquisition, each of the Offeror and the holder of the shares is entitled to apply to the Jersey Court for an order that the terms on which the Offeror is entitled and bound to acquire the holder’s shares shall be such as the Jersey Court thinks fit.

 

C. Material Contracts

 

The following is a summary of each contract (not being a contract entered into in the ordinary course of business) that has been entered into by any member of the WPP Group: (a) within the two years immediately preceding the date of this Form 20-F which are, or may be, material to the WPP Group; or (b) at any time which contain obligations or entitlements which are, or may be, material to the WPP Group as at the date of this Form 20-F:

 

(i) On 3 August 1998, WPP 2005 Limited entered into an agreement with Asatsu pursuant to which WPP 2005 Limited subscribed for approximately 23% (at that time) of the share capital of Asatsu for approximately £139 million and Asatsu subscribed for 31,295,646 ordinary shares in WPP 2005 Limited representing approximately 4% (at that time) of the issued share capital of WPP 2005 Limited. Each party agreed not to transfer any shares held by them in the other for a period of five years and thereafter only to transfer such shares following a procedure set out in the agreement. Each party is further entitled to nominate a non-executive director to the board of the other subject to retaining its shareholding in the other. Due to the disparity of the percentage shareholdings of WPP 2005 Limited in Asatsu and of Asatsu in WPP 2005 Limited, an agreement was also entered into on 3 August 1998 imposing, inter alia , limitations, in certain circumstances, on the voting rights in respect of the shares held by WPP 2005 Limited in Asatsu;

 

(ii) On 23 June 2004, WPP Finance (UK) issued US$650,000,000 of 5.875% notes due 2014 pursuant to the Indenture and the First Supplemental Indenture both dated as at 23 June 2004 among WPP Finance (UK), as Issuer, WPP 2005 Limited, as guarantor and Citibank N.A., as Trustee. The Notes were fully and unconditionally guaranteed by WPP 2008 Limited pursuant to the Second Supplemental Indenture dated 27 June 2006 and by Young & Rubicam Brands US Holdings (a subsidiary of WPP) pursuant to the Third Supplemental Indenture dated 19 December 2006. The Notes were fully and unconditionally guaranteed by WPP 2012 Limited (formerly known as WPP plc) and WPP Air 1 Limited (a subsidiary of WPP) pursuant to the Fourth Supplemental Indenture dated 7 October 2008 and the Fifth Supplemental Indenture dated 30 April 2009. The Indenture contains events of default provisions (including a cross-default provision). It also contains a restriction on the Issuer or any of the guarantors referred to above consolidating or merging with any other person and conveying, transferring or leasing all or substantially all of their properties and assets to any person except where the entity resulting from such consolidation or merger or to whom such properties and assets are transferred becomes a primary obligor of the Notes and gives certain certificates and indemnities. The covenants of the Indenture also contain a negative pledge and a limitation on the sale and leaseback of any assets by the guarantors referred to above and their principal subsidiaries. The Indenture allows for defeasance of these covenants subject to certain conditions. The Indenture also contains a joint and several indemnity from the Issuer and the guarantors referred to above in favour of the Trustee. On 2 December 2011, holders exchanged US$281,369,000 of the foregoing notes for $312,387,000 principal amount of 4.75% guaranteed senior notes due November 2021 issued by WPP Finance 2010 and guaranteed by WPP 2012 Limited, WPP Air 1 Limited, WPP 2008 Limited and WPP 2005 Limited. The outstanding principal of the 5.875% notes due 2014 is therefore now US$368,631,000. In the Sixth Supplemental Indenture dated 14 December 2012, arrangements were made for WPP plc and

 

80


Table of Contents

WPP Jubilee Limited to accede as additional guarantors subject to the court approval of the scheme of arrangement referred to in the above ;

 

(iii) On 5 December 2006, WPP 2008 Limited issued EUR 600,000,000 4.375% guaranteed bonds due 2013. The bonds are guaranteed by WPP 2005 Limited and were constituted by a Trust Deed dated 5 December 2006 between Citicorp Trustee Company Limited, the guarantor and WPP 2008 Limited. The administration of payments to bondholders is provided for in a Paying Agency Agreement dated 5 December 2006 between WPP 2008 Limited, Citibank, N.A., London Branch and others. The bonds are listed on the London Stock Exchange and the terms and conditions contain a redemption provision at the option of the bondholders on a Change of Control, a negative pledge provision and the events of default provisions in the terms and conditions contain a cross-default provision. The Trust Deed also contains an indemnity by WPP 2008 Limited in favour of Citicorp Trustee Company Limited. Pursuant to a supplemental trust deed dated 14 November 2008, WPP 2012 Limited (formerly known as WPP plc), WPP Air 1 Limited and WPP Air 3 Limited acceded as additional guarantors to the bonds. In a second supplemental trust deed dated 14 December 2012, arrangements were made for WPP 2008 Limited to be substituted by WPP plc as issuer and WPP 2008 Limited and WPP Jubilee Limited to accede as additional guarantors subject to the court approval of the scheme of arrangement referred to in the above;

 

(iv) On 4 April 2007, WPP 2008 Limited issued £400,000,000 6.0% guaranteed bonds due 2017. The bonds are guaranteed by WPP 2005 Limited and were constituted by a Trust Deed dated 4 April 2007 between Citicorp Trustee Company Limited, the guarantor and WPP 2008 Limited. The bonds are listed on the London Stock Exchange and the terms and conditions contain a redemption provision at the option of the bondholders on a Change of Control, a negative pledge provision and events of default provisions (including a cross-default provision). The Trust Deed also contains an indemnity by WPP 2008 Limited in favour of Citicorp Trustee Company Limited. Pursuant to a supplemental trust deed dated 14 November 2008, WPP 2012 Limited (formerly known as WPP plc), WPP Air 1 Limited and WPP Air 3 Limited acceded as additional guarantors to the bonds. In a second supplemental trust deed dated 14 December 2012, arrangements were made for WPP plc to substitute WPP 2008 Limited as issuer and for WPP 2008 Limited and WPP Jubilee Limited to accede as additional guarantors subject to the court approval of the scheme of arrangement referred to in the above;

 

(v) On 6 November 2007, WPP Finance S.A. issued EUR 500,000,000 5.25% guaranteed bonds due 2015 and £200,000,000 6.375% guaranteed bonds due 2020. Both tranches of bonds are guaranteed by WPP 2005 Limited and WPP 2008 Limited and were constituted respectively by two Trust Deeds dated 6 November 2007 between Citicorp Trustee Company Limited, the guarantors and WPP Finance S.A. The bonds are listed on the London Stock Exchange and the terms and conditions contain a redemption provision at the option of the bondholders on a Change of Control, a negative pledge provision and events of default provisions (including a cross-default provision). The Trust Deeds also contain indemnities by WPP Finance S.A. in favour of Citicorp Trustee Company Limited. Pursuant to a supplemental trust deed dated 14 November 2008, WPP 2012 Limited (formerly known as WPP plc), WPP Air 1 Limited and WPP Air 3 Limited acceded as additional guarantors to the bonds. In two second supplemental trust deeds for each of the bonds respectively dated 14 December 2012, arrangements were made for WPP plc and WPP Jubilee Limited to accede as additional guarantors subject to the court approval of the scheme of arrangement referred to in the above;

 

(vi) On 12 May 2008, WPP 2008 Limited issued EUR 750,000,000 6.625% guaranteed bonds due 2016. The bonds are guaranteed by WPP 2005 Limited and were constituted by a Trust Deed dated 12 May 2008 between Citicorp Trustee Company Limited, the guarantor and WPP 2008 Limited. The bonds are listed on the London Stock Exchange and the terms and conditions contain a redemption provision at the option of the bondholders on a Change of Control, a negative pledge provision and events of default provisions (including a cross-default provision). The Trust Deed also contains an indemnity by WPP 2008 Limited in favour of Citicorp Trustee Company Limited. Pursuant to a

 

81


Table of Contents

supplemental trust deed dated 14 November 2008, WPP 2012 Limited (formerly known as WPP plc), WPP Air 1 Limited and WPP Air 3 Limited acceded as additional guarantors to the bonds. In a second supplemental trust deed dated 14 December 2012, arrangements were made for WPP 2008 Limited to be substituted by WPP plc as issuer, and WPP 2008 Limited and WPP Jubilee Limited to accede as additional guarantors subject to the court approval of the scheme of arrangement referred to in the above;

 

(vii) On 19 May 2009, WPP 2012 Limited (formerly known as WPP plc) issued £450,000,000 of 5.75% guaranteed convertible bonds due 2014. The bonds are guaranteed by WPP 2008 Limited, WPP 2005 Limited, WPP Air 1 Limited and WPP Air 3 Limited and were constituted by a trust deed dated May 19, 2009. The bonds are listed on the London Stock Exchange and the terms and conditions contain a conversion provision allowing bondholders to convert their bonds into ordinary shares of WPP within a specified period. The bonds contain a conversion option upon a Change of Control, a negative pledge and events of default provisions (including a cross default provision). The trust deed contains an indemnity in favour of Citicorp Trustee Company Limited. In a supplemental trust deed dated 14 December 2012, arrangements were made for: (i) WPP 2012 Limited to be substituted by WPP plc as issuer; and (ii) WPP Jubilee Limited to accede as additional guarantors subject to the court approval of the scheme of arrangement referred to in the above;

 

(viii) On 10 June 2009, WPP Finance (UK) issued US$600,000,000 of 8% guaranteed senior notes due 2014 pursuant to the Indenture and the First Supplemental Indenture both dated as at 10 June 2009 among WPP Finance (UK) as Issuer, WPP 2012 Limited (formerly known as WPP plc), WPP Air 1 Limited, WPP 2008 Limited and WPP 2005 Limited as Guarantors, and Wilmington Trust Company, as Trustee. The indenture contains events of default provisions (including a cross-default provision). It also contains a restriction on the Issuer or any of the Guarantors referred to above consolidating or merging with any other person and conveying, transferring or leasing all or substantially all of their properties and assets to any person except where the entity resulting from such consolidation or merger or to whom such properties and assets are transferred becomes a primary obligor of the notes and gives certain certificates and indemnities. The covenants of the Indenture also contain a negative pledge and a limitation on the sale and leaseback of any assets by the Guarantors referred to above and their principal subsidiaries. The Indenture allows for defeasance of these covenants subject to certain conditions. The holders of the notes have the right to require the Issuer to repurchase the notes at a price equal to 101% of the principal amount of the notes in the event that there is a Change of Control of WPP plc and the notes lose their investment grade rating. The Indenture also contains a joint and several indemnity from the Issuer and the Guarantors referred to above in favour of the Trustee. In the Second Supplemental Indenture dated 14 December 2012, arrangements were made for WPP plc and WPP Jubilee Limited to accede as additional guarantors subject to the court approval of the scheme of arrangement referred to in the above;

 

(ix) On 2 November 2011, WPP Finance 2010 issued US$500,000,000 of 4.75% guaranteed senior notes due November 2021. In December 2011 WPP Finance 2010 issued an additional $312,387,000 of 4.75% guaranteed senior notes due November 2021 in exchange for $281,369,000 of outstanding 5.875% Senior Notes due 2014 of WPP Finance (UK). In total, WPP Finance 2010 issued US$812,387,000 of the 4.75% guaranteed senior notes due November 2021 pursuant to the Indenture and the First Supplemental Indenture, both dated as at 2 November 2011, among WPP Finance 2010 as Issuer, WPP plc, WPP Air 1 Limited, WPP 2008 Limited and WPP 2005 Limited as Guarantors, and Wilmington Trust National Association as Trustee, Citibank, N.A., as Security Registrar and Principal Paying Agent and Citibank N.A., London Branch as Paying Agent. Aside from the coupon and repayment date, the terms and conditions of the notes are the same as those for the $600,000,000 8% notes due September 2014 described above. In the Fourth Supplemental Indenture dated 14 December 2012, arrangements were made for WPP plc and WPP Jubilee Limited to accede as additional guarantors subject to the court approval of the scheme of arrangement referred to in the above;

 

82


Table of Contents

(x) On 30 November 2011, WPP CP Finance plc, WPP Finance Co. Limited and WPP Group Canada Finance Inc (as borrowers), guaranteed by WPP 2012 Limited (formerly known as WPP plc) , WPP 2005 Limited, WPP 2008 Limited, WPP Air 1 Limited and WPP CP Finance plc entered into an agreement for a five-year multi-currency revolving credit facility (with a US Dollar swingline option) for US$1.05 billion and £375 million with a syndicate of banks and Citibank International plc as facility agent. The facility is available for drawing by way of multi-currency cash advances on a revolving basis, with an option to draw US Dollar swingline advances up to a sub-limit of US$825 million. The rate of margin for the facility is, if the long-term unsecured and non-credit enhanced debt rating of WPP published by Moody’s and Standard & Poor’s (the Credit Rating ) is A-/A3 or higher, 0.55% per annum. If the Credit Rating is BBB+ or Baa1, the rate of margin for the facility shall be 0.65% per annum. If the Credit Rating is BBB or Baa2, the rate of margin for the facility is 0.75% per annum. If the Credit Rating is BBB- or Baa3, the rate of margin for the facility is 0.95% per annum. If the Credit Rating is BB+ or Ba1 or lower, the rate of margin for the facility is 1.25% per annum. If Moody’s and Standard & Poor’s assign different Credit Ratings, the margin shall be the average of the margins determined by each of Moody’s and Standard & Poor’s. The commitment fee payable on undrawn commitments is equal to 35% of the then applicable margin. A utilisation fee of 0.20% per annum is payable on US dollar outstandings on any day on which the US dollar amount of dollar outstandings exceed 33% of the total dollar facility commitments but is less than or equal to 66% of the total dollar facility commitments. A utilisation fee of 0.40% per annum is payable on US dollar outstandings on any day on which the US dollar amount of dollar outstandings exceed 66% of the total dollar facility commitments. A utilisation fee of 0.20% per annum is payable on sterling outstandings on any day on which the sterling amount of sterling outstandings exceed 33% but is less than or equal to 66% of the total sterling facility commitments. A utilisation fee of 0.40% per annum is payable on sterling outstandings on any day on which the sterling amount of sterling outstandings exceed 66% of the total sterling facility commitments. The facility agreement contains customary representations, covenants and events of default. The interest rate for swingline advances is the higher of the US prime commercial lending rate and 0.50% per annum above the federal funds rate. In an Amendment and Restatement agreement dated 14 December 2012, arrangements were made for WPP plc and WPP Jubilee Limited to accede as additional guarantors subject to the court approval of the scheme of arrangement referred to in the above;

 

(xi) On 7 September 2012, WPP Finance 2010 issued US$500,000,000 3.625% guaranteed senior notes due September 2022 and $300,000,000 5.125% guaranteed senior notes due 2042. These notes were issued under the Indenture dated as at 2 November 2011, described above, as supplemented by the Second Supplemental Indenture and the Third Supplemental Indenture, respectively, each dated as at 7 September 2012, among WPP Finance 2010 as issuer, WPP 2012 Limited (formerly known as WPP plc), WPP Air 1 Limited, WPP 2008 Limited and WPP 2005 Limited as guarantors, Wilmington Trust, National Association as trustee, Citibank, N.A., as security registrar and Principal Paying Agent and Citibank, N.A., London Branch as Paying Agent. Aside from the coupon and repayment date, the terms and conditions of these notes are the same as those for the $600,000,000 8% notes due September 2014 described above. In the Fourth Supplemental Indenture dated 14 December 2012, arrangements were made for WPP plc and WPP Jubilee Limited to accede as additional guarantors subject to the court approval of the scheme of arrangement referred to above;

 

(xii) On 2 January 2013, WPP plc entered into a deposit agreement with Citibank, N.A., as US Depositary, and the holders and beneficial owners of ADSs that sets out the terms on which the US Depositary has agreed to act as depositary with respect to WPP ADSs The deposit agreement contains, amongst other things, customary provisions pertaining to the form of ADRs, the deposit and withdrawal of ordinary shares, distributions to holders of ADSs, voting of ordinary shares underlying ADSs, obligations of the US Depositary and WPP plc, charges of the US Depositary, and compliance with U.S. securities laws.

 

83


Table of Contents

D. Exchange Controls

 

There are currently no Jersey foreign exchange control restrictions on remittances of dividends on the ordinary shares or on the conduct of the Registrant’s operations.

 

E. Taxation

 

The taxation discussion set forth below is intended only as a descriptive summary and does not purport to be a complete technical analysis or listing of all potential tax effects relevant to a decision to purchase, hold or in any way transfer ordinary shares or ADSs. Each investor should seek advice based on their individual particular circumstances from an independent tax adviser.

 

The following summary of the Jersey (UK in relation to dividend distributions) and the United States tax consequences is not exhaustive of all possible tax considerations and should not be considered legal or tax advice. In addition, this summary does not represent a detailed description of the tax consequences applicable to persons subject to special treatment under Jersey and United States tax laws. Prospective purchasers of ADSs are advised to satisfy themselves as to the overall tax consequences of their ownership of ADSs and the ordinary shares represented thereby by consulting their own tax advisors. In addition, this summary only addresses holders that hold ordinary shares or ADSs as capital assets, and it does not address the taxation of a United States shareholder (either corporate or individual) where that shareholder controls, or is deemed to control, 10% or more of the voting stock of the Company.

 

References in this discussion to WPP Shares include references to WPP ADSs and corresponding references to WPP Share Owners (or holders of WPP ADSs) include references to holders of WPP ADSs, unless indicated otherwise.

 

United Kingdom, Jersey and the United States taxation

 

United Kingdom taxation

 

Tax on dividends

 

The Company will not be required to withhold UK tax at source from dividend payments it makes.

 

WPP Share Owners who are resident outside the UK for tax purposes will not generally be able to claim repayment from HMRC of any part of the tax credit attaching to dividends received from WPP, although this will depend on the existence and terms of any double taxation convention between the UK and the country in which such WPP Share Owner is resident. A WPP Share Owner resident outside the UK may also be subject to taxation on dividend income under local law. A WPP Share Owner who is not solely resident in the UK for tax purposes should consult his own tax advisers concerning his tax liabilities (in the UK and any other country) on dividends received from WPP, whether they are entitled to claim any part of the tax credit and, if so, the procedure for doing so, and whether any double taxation relief is due in any country in which they are subject to tax.

 

Taxation of disposals

 

An individual WPP Share Owner who has ceased to be resident or ordinarily resident for tax purposes in the UK for a period of less than five tax years and who disposes of all or part of his WPP Shares during that period may be liable to capital gains tax in respect of any chargeable gain arising from such a disposal on his return to the UK, subject to any available exemptions or reliefs.

 

Stamp duty and stamp duty reserve tax (SDRT)

 

No UK stamp duty or SDRT will be payable on the issue of WPP Shares. UK stamp duty should generally not need to be paid on a transfer of the WPP Shares. No UK SDRT will be payable in respect of any agreement to

 

84


Table of Contents

transfer WPP Shares unless they are registered in a register kept in the UK by or on behalf of WPP. It is not intended that such a register will be kept in the UK.

 

The statements in this paragraph summarise the current position on stamp duty and SDRT and are intended as a general guide only. Special rules apply to agreements made by, amongst others, intermediaries and certain categories of person may be liable to stamp duty or SDRT at higher rates.

 

Jersey taxation

 

General

 

The following summary of the anticipated tax treatment in Jersey of WPP and WPP Share Owners and holders of WPP ADSs (other than residents of Jersey) is based on Jersey taxation law as it is understood to apply at the date of this Form 20-F. It does not constitute legal or tax advice. WPP Share Owners or holders of WPP ADSs should consult their professional advisers on the implications of acquiring, buying, holding, selling or otherwise disposing of WPP Shares or WPP ADSs under the laws of the jurisdictions in which they may be liable to taxation. WPP Share Owners or holders of WPP ADSs should be aware that tax rules and practice and their interpretation may change.

 

Income Tax

 

(a) WPP

 

Under the Jersey Income Tax Law, WPP will be regarded as either:

 

(i) not resident in Jersey under Article 123(1) of the Jersey Income Tax Law provided that (and for so long as) it satisfies the conditions set out in that provision, in which case WPP will not (except as noted below) be liable to Jersey income tax; or

 

(ii) resident in Jersey and will fall under Article 123C of the Jersey Income Tax Law, in which case WPP (being neither a financial services company nor a specified utility company under the Jersey Income Tax Law at the date hereof) will (except as noted below) be subject to Jersey income tax at a rate of 0 per cent.

 

WPP is tax resident in the United Kingdom and therefore should not be regarded as resident in Jersey.

 

(b) Holders of WPP Shares

 

WPP will be entitled to pay dividends to holders of WPP Shares without any withholding or deduction for or on account of Jersey tax. Holders of WPP Shares (other than residents of Jersey) will not be subject to any tax in Jersey in respect of the holding, sale or other disposition of such WPP Shares.

 

(c)   Holders of WPP ADSs

 

Under Jersey law and the WPP Articles, WPP is only permitted to pay a dividend to a person who is recorded in its register of members as the holder of a WPP Share. The US Depositary will be recorded in WPP’s register of members as the holder of each WPP Share represented by a WPP ADS. Accordingly, WPP will pay all dividends in respect of each WPP Share represented by a WPP ADS to the US Depositary (as the registered holder of each such WPP Share) rather than to the holder of the ADS.

 

The US Depositary will not be subject to any tax in Jersey in respect of the holding, sale or other disposition of the WPP Shares held by it. In addition, holders of the WPP ADSs (other than residents of Jersey) should not be subject to any tax in Jersey in respect of the holding, sale or other disposition of such WPP ADSs.

 

85


Table of Contents

Goods and services tax

 

WPP is an “international services entity” for the purposes of the Goods and Services Tax (Jersey) Law 2007 (the GST Law ). Consequently, WPP is not required to:

 

(a) register as a taxable person pursuant to the GST Law;

 

(b) charge goods and services tax in Jersey in respect of any supply made by it; or

 

(c) subject to limited exceptions that are not expected to apply to WPP, pay goods and services tax in Jersey in respect of any supply made to it.

 

Stamp duty

 

No stamp duty is payable in Jersey on the issue or inter vivos transfer of WPP Shares or WPP ADSs.

 

Upon the death of a WPP Share Owner, a grant of probate or letters of administration will be required to transfer the WPP Shares of the deceased person. However, WPP may (at its discretion) dispense with this requirement where: (a) the deceased person was domiciled outside of Jersey at the time of death; and (b) the value of the deceased’s movable estate in Jersey (including any WPP Shares) does not exceed £10,000.

 

Upon the death of a WPP Share Owner, where the deceased person was domiciled outside of Jersey at the time of death, Jersey stamp duty will be payable on the registration in Jersey of a grant of probate or letters of administration, which will be required in order to transfer or otherwise deal the deceased person’s personal estate situated in Jersey (including any WPP Shares) if the net value of such personal estate exceeds £10,000.

 

The rate of stamp duty payable is:

 

  (i)   (where the net value of the deceased person’s relevant personal estate is more than £10,000 but does not exceed £100,000) 0.50 per cent. of the net value of the deceased person’s relevant personal estate; or

 

  (ii)   (where the net value of the deceased person’s relevant personal estate exceeds £100,000) £500 for the first £100,000 plus 0.75 per cent. of the net value of the deceased person’s relevant personal estate which exceeds £100,000.

 

In addition, application and other fees may be payable.

 

86


Table of Contents

US federal income taxation

 

Introduction

 

TO ENSURE COMPLIANCE WITH TREASURY DEPARTMENT CIRCULAR 230, HOLDERS OF WPP SHARES OR WPP ADSs ARE HEREBY NOTIFIED THAT: (A) ANY DISCUSSION OF US FEDERAL TAX ISSUES IS NOT INTENDED OR WRITTEN TO BE RELIED UPON, AND CANNOT BE RELIED UPON, BY HOLDERS OF WPP SHARES OR WPP ADSs FOR THE PURPOSE OF AVOIDING PENALTIES THAT MAY BE IMPOSED ON, HOLDERS OF WPP SHARES OR WPP ADSs UNDER THE INTERNAL REVENUE CODE OF 1986; AND (C) HOLDERS OF WPP SHARES OR WPP ADSs SHOULD SEEK ADVICE BASED ON THEIR PARTICULAR CIRCUMSTANCES FROM AN INDEPENDENT TAX ADVISER.

 

The following is a summary of certain material US federal income tax consequences of the ownership and disposition of WPP Shares or WPP ADSs by a US Holder (as defined below). This summary deals only with initial acquirers of WPP Shares or WPP ADSs that are US Holders and that will hold the WPP Shares or WPP ADSs as capital assets. The discussion does not cover all aspects of US federal income taxation that may be relevant to, or the actual tax effect that any of the matters described herein will have on, the acquisition, ownership or disposition of WPP Shares or WPP ADSs by particular investors, and does not address state, local, foreign or other tax laws. In particular, this summary does not address all of the tax considerations that may be relevant to investors subject to special treatment under the US federal income tax laws (such as financial institutions, insurance companies, investors liable for the alternative minimum tax, investors that own (directly or indirectly) 10% or more of the voting stock of WPP, investors that hold WPP Shares or WPP ADSs through a permanent establishment, individual retirement accounts and other tax-deferred accounts, tax-exempt organisations, dealers in securities or currencies, traders that elect to mark to market, investors that will hold the WPP Shares or WPP ADSs as part of straddles, hedging transactions or conversion transactions for US federal income tax purposes, investors whose functional currency is not the US dollar or persons who received their WPP Shares or WPP ADSs in connection with the performance of services or on exercise of options received as compensation in connection with the performance of services).

 

As used herein, the term “US Holder” means a beneficial owner of WPP Shares or WPP ADSs that is, for US federal income tax purposes: (i) a citizen or individual resident of the United States; (ii) a corporation, or other entity treated as a corporation for US federal tax purposes, created or organised in or under the laws of the United States or any State thereof; (iii) an estate the income of which is subject to US federal income tax without regard to its source; or (iv) a trust if a court within the United States is able to exercise primary supervision over the administration of the trust and one or more US persons have the authority to control all substantial decisions of the trust, or the trust has elected to be treated as a domestic trust for US federal income tax purposes.

 

This discussion does not address any tax consequences applicable to holders of equity interests in a holder of WPP Shares or WPP ADSs. The US federal income tax treatment of a partner in a partnership that holds WPP Shares or WPP ADSs will depend on the status of the partner and the activities of the partnership. Holders of WPP Shares or WPP ADSs that are partnerships should consult their tax advisers concerning the US federal income tax consequences to their partners of the acquisition, ownership and disposition of WPP Shares or WPP ADSs.

 

WPP does not expect to become a passive foreign investment company (a “PFIC”) for US federal income tax purposes and this summary assumes the correctness of this position. WPP’s possible status as a PFIC must be determined annually and therefore may be subject to change. If WPP were to be a PFIC in any year, materially adverse consequences could result for US Holders.

 

The summary is based on the US federal income tax laws, including the US Internal Revenue Code of 1986 as amended, its legislative history, existing and proposed regulations thereunder, published rulings and court decisions, all as currently in effect, and all of which are subject to change, perhaps with retroactive effect.

 

87


Table of Contents

The summary of US federal income tax consequences set out below is for general information only. US Holders are urged to consult their own tax advisers as to the particular tax consequences to them of owning the WPP Shares or WPP ADSs, including the applicability and effect of state, local, foreign and other tax laws and possible changes in tax law.

 

Classification of the WPP ADSs

 

US Holders of WPP ADSs should be treated for US federal income tax purposes as owners of the WPP Shares represented by the WPP ADSs. Accordingly, the US federal income tax consequences discussed below apply equally to US Holders of WPP ADSs.

 

Tax on dividends

 

Distributions paid by WPP out of current or accumulated earnings and profits (as determined for US federal income tax purposes) will generally be taxable to a US Holder as foreign source dividend income, and will not be eligible for the dividends received deduction generally allowed to US corporations. A US Holder of WPP ADSs generally will include dividends in gross income in the taxable year in which such holder actually or constructively receives the dividend. US Holders that surrender their WPP ADSs in exchange for the underlying WPP Shares should consult their tax advisers regarding the proper timing for including dividends in gross income.

 

Distributions in excess of current and accumulated earnings and profits will be treated as a non-taxable return of capital to the extent of the US Holder’s basis in the WPP Shares or WPP ADSs and thereafter as capital gains. However, WPP will not maintain calculations of its earnings and profits in accordance with US federal income tax accounting principles. US Holders should, therefore, assume that any distribution by WPP with respect to the WPP Shares or WPP ADSs will constitute ordinary dividend income. US Holders should consult their tax advisers with respect to the appropriate US federal income tax treatment of any distribution received from WPP.

 

Under current federal income tax law, for taxable years beginning before 2013, dividends paid by a foreign corporation to a non-corporate US Holder as “qualified dividend income” are taxable at the special reduced rate normally applicable to capital gains provided the foreign corporation qualifies for the benefits of the income tax treaty between the United States and the corporation’s country of residence. In such case, the non-corporate US Holder is eligible for the reduced rate only if the US Holder has held the shares or ADSs for more than 60 days during the 121 day-period beginning 60 days before the ex-dividend date. WPP believes it will qualify for the benefits of the income tax treaty between the United States and the United Kingdom (the “Treaty”).

 

US Holders of WPP Shares or WPP ADSs who receive distributions from WPP will need to consult their own tax advisors regarding the continued applicability of this special reduced rate to such distributions.

 

Dividends paid in pounds sterling will be included in income in a US dollar amount calculated by reference to the exchange rate in effect on the day the dividends are received by the US Holder in the case of WPP Shares or the US Depositary (in case of WPP ADSs), regardless of whether the pounds sterling are converted into US dollars at that time. If dividends received in pounds sterling are converted into US dollars on the day they are received, the US Holder generally will not be required to recognise a foreign currency gain or loss in respect of the dividend income. Generally, a gain or loss realised on a subsequent conversion of pounds sterling to US dollars or other disposition will be treated as US source ordinary income or loss.

 

Sale or other disposition

 

Upon a sale or other disposition of WPP Shares or WPP ADSs (other than an exchange of WPP ADSs for WPP Shares), a US Holder generally will recognise a capital gain or loss equal to the difference, if any, between the amount realised on the sale or other disposition and the US Holder’s adjusted tax basis in the WPP Shares or

 

88


Table of Contents

WPP ADSs. This capital gain or loss will generally be US source and will be a long-term capital gain or loss if the US Holder’s holding period in the WPP Shares or WPP ADSs exceeds one year. However, regardless of a US Holder’s actual holding period, any loss may be a long-term capital loss to the extent the US Holder receives a dividend that qualifies for the reduced rate described above under the section entitled “Tax on Dividends”, above, and exceeds 10% of the US Holder’s tax basis in its WPP Shares or WPP ADSs. Deductibility of capital losses is subject to limitations.

 

A US Holder’s tax basis in a WPP Share or a WPP ADS will generally be its US dollar cost. The US dollar cost of a WPP Share or a WPP ADS purchased with foreign currency will generally be the US dollar value of the purchase price on the date of purchase or, in the case of WPP Shares or WPP ADSs traded on an established securities market, as defined in the applicable Treasury Regulations, that are purchased by a cash basis US Holder (or an accrual basis US Holder that so elects), on the settlement date for the purchase. Such an election by an accrual basis US Holder must be applied consistently from year to year and cannot be revoked without the consent of the Internal Revenue Service (the “IRS”).

 

The surrender of WPP ADSs in exchange for WPP Shares (or vice versa) should not be a taxable event for US federal income tax purposes and US Holders should not recognise any gain or loss upon such a surrender. A US Holder’s tax basis in the withdrawn WPP Shares will be the same as the US Holder’s tax basis in the WPP ADSs surrendered, and the holding period of the WPP Shares will include the holding period of the WPP ADSs.

 

The amount realised on a sale or other disposition of WPP Shares or WPP ADSs for an amount in foreign currency will be the US dollar value of this amount on the date of sale or disposition. On the settlement date, the US Holder will recognise US source foreign currency gain or loss (taxable as ordinary income or loss) equal to the difference (if any) between the US dollar value of the amount received based on the exchange rates in effect on the date of sale or other disposition and the settlement date. However, in the case of WPP Shares or WPP ADSs traded on an established securities market that are sold by a cash basis US Holder (or an accrual basis US Holder that so elects), the amount realised will be determined using the exchange rate in effect on the settlement date for the sale, and no exchange gain or loss will be recognised at that time.

 

Foreign currency received on the sale or other disposition of a WPP Share or a WPP ADS will have a tax basis equal to its US dollar value on the settlement date. Any gain or loss recognised on a sale or other disposition of a foreign currency (including upon exchange for US dollars) will be US source ordinary income or loss.

 

Backup withholding and information reporting

 

Payments of dividends and other proceeds with respect to WPP Shares or WPP ADSs by a US paying agent or other US intermediary will be reported to the IRS and to the US Holder unless the holder is a corporation or otherwise establishes a basis for exemption. Backup withholding may apply to reportable payments if the US Holder fails to provide an accurate taxpayer identification number or certification of exempt status or fails to report all interest and dividends required to be shown on its US federal income tax returns. Any backup withholding tax will be refunded or allowed as a credit against the US Holder’s US federal income tax liability if the US Holder timely gives the appropriate information to the IRS. US Holders should consult their tax advisers as to their qualification for exemption from backup withholding and the procedure for obtaining an exemption.

 

F. Dividends and Paying Agents

 

Not applicable.

 

G. Statements by Experts

 

Not applicable.

 

89


Table of Contents

H. Documents on Display

 

The Company is subject to the informational requirements of the Exchange Act. In accordance with these requirements, the Company files reports and other information with the United States Securities and Exchange Commission. You may read and copy any materials filed with the SEC at the Public Reference Room at 100 F Street N.E., Washington, D.C. 20549. You may obtain information on the operation of the Public Reference Room by calling the SEC at 1-800-SEC-0330. The SEC also maintains a web site at http://www.sec.gov that contains reports, proxy statements and other information regarding registrants that file electronically with the SEC.

 

I. Subsidiary Information

 

Not applicable.

 

90


Table of Contents

ITEM 11. QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE DISCLOSURES ABOUT MARKET RISK

 

The Company’s principal market risks are changes in interest rates and currency exchange rates. Following evaluation of these positions, the Company selectively enters into derivative financial instruments to manage its risk exposure. The fair value of derivatives held by the Company at 31 December 2012 is estimated to be a net asset of £58.9 million (£170.2 million with respect to derivative assets and £111.3 million for derivative liabilities). These amounts are based on market values of equivalent instruments at the balance sheet date.

 

Interest rate and foreign currency risks

 

The Company’s interest rate and foreign currency risks management policies are discussed in note 24 to the consolidated financial statements.

 

Interest rate derivatives and currency derivatives utilised by the Group are discussed in note 25 to the consolidated financial statements.

 

Analysis of fixed and floating rate debt by currency, including the effect of interest rate and cross currency swaps, as at the balance sheet date is provided in note 10 to the consolidated financial statements.

 

Sensitivity analyses that address the effect of interest rate and currency risks on the Group’s financial instruments is provided in note 24 to the consolidated financial statements.

 

Credit risk

 

Our credit risk exposure and management policies are discussed in note 24 to the consolidated financial statements.

 

ITEM 12. DESCRIPTION OF SECURITIES OTHER THAN EQUITY SECURITIES

 

A. Debt Securities

 

Not applicable.

 

B. Warrants and Rights

 

Not applicable.

 

C. Other Securities

 

Not applicable.

 

91


Table of Contents

D. American Depositary Shares

 

Fees and Charges

 

Holders of ADSs and persons depositing ordinary shares or surrendering ADSs for cancellation are currently required to pay the following service fees to the Depositary:

 

Service

  

Rate

   By Whom Paid

(1)    Issuance of ADSs upon deposit of ordinary shares (excluding issuances as a result of distributions described in paragraph (4) below).

   Up to U.S.$5.00 per 100 ADSs (or fraction thereof) issued.    Person depositing ordinary
shares or person receiving
ADSs.

(2)    Delivery of deposited securities against surrender of ADSs.

   Up to U.S.$5.00 per 100 ADSs (or fraction thereof) surrendered.    Person surrendering ADSs for
purpose of withdrawal of
deposited securities or person to
whom deposited securities are
delivered.

(3)    Distribution of cash dividends or other cash distributions ( i.e ., sale of rights and other entitlements).

   Up to U.S.$2.00 per 100 ADSs (or fraction thereof) held, unless prohibited by the exchange upon which the ADSs are listed.    Person to whom distribution is
made.

(4)    Distribution of ADSs pursuant to (i) stock dividends or other free stock distributions, or (ii) exercise of rights to purchase additional ADSs.

   Up to U.S.$5.00 per 100 ADSs (or fraction thereof) issued, unless prohibited by the exchange upon which the ADSs are listed.    Person to whom distribution is
made.

(5)    Distribution of securities other than ADSs or rights to purchase additional ADSs ( i.e. , spin-off shares).

   Up to U.S.$5.00 per unit of 100 securities (or fraction thereof) distributed.    Person to whom distribution is
made.

(6)    Depositary Services.

   Up to U.S.$2.00 per 100 ADSs (or fraction thereof) held as of the last day of each calendar year, except to the extent of any cash dividend fee(s) charged under paragraph (3) above during the applicable calendar year.    Person of record on last day of
any calendar year.

(7)    Transfer of ADRs.

   U.S.$1.50 per certificate presented for transfer.    Person presenting certificate for
transfer.

 

Holders of ADSs and persons depositing ordinary shares or surrendering ADSs for cancellation and for the purpose of withdrawing deposited securities are also responsible for the payment of certain fees and expenses incurred by the Depositary, and certain taxes and governmental charges, such as:

 

  (i)   Taxes (including applicable interest and penalties) and other governmental charges;

 

  (ii)   Such registration fees as may from time to time be in effect for the registration of ordinary shares on the share register and applicable to transfers of ordinary shares or other securities on deposit to or from the name of the Custodian, the Depositary or any nominees upon the making of deposits and withdrawals, respectively;

 

92


Table of Contents
  (iii)   Such cable, telex and facsimile transmission and delivery expenses as are expressly provided in the deposit agreement to be at the expense of the person depositing or withdrawing ordinary shares or holders of ADSs;

 

  (iv)   The expenses and charges incurred by the Depositary in the conversion of foreign currency;

 

  (v)   Such fees and expenses as are incurred by the Depositary in connection with compliance with exchange control regulations and other regulatory requirements applicable to ordinary shares, ordinary shares on deposit, ADSs and ADRs; and

 

  (vi)   The fees and expenses incurred by the Depositary, the Custodian or any nominee in connection with the servicing or delivery of ordinary shares on deposit.

 

WPP has agreed to pay various other charges and expenses of the Depositary. Please note that the fees and charges that holders of ADSs may be required to pay may vary over time and may be changed by WPP and by the Depositary. Holders of ADSs will receive prior notice of such changes.

 

Depositary Payments—Fiscal Year 2012

 

WPP did not receive any payments from Citibank, N.A., the Depositary for its American Depositary Receipt program, in 2012.

 

93


Table of Contents

PART II

 

ITEM 13. DEFAULTS, DIVIDEND ARREARAGES AND DELINQUENCIES

 

None.

 

ITEM 14. MATERIAL MODIFICATIONS TO THE RIGHTS OF SECURITY HOLDERS AND USE OF PROCEEDS

 

None.

 

ITEM 15. CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES

 

Disclosure Controls and Procedures

 

We performed an evaluation under the supervision and with the participation of our management, including our Chief Executive and our Finance Director, of the effectiveness of our disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e) under the Exchange Act) as at 31 December 2012. Notwithstanding the foregoing, a control system, no matter how well designed and operated, can provide only reasonable, not absolute, assurance that it will detect or uncover failures within the Company to disclose material information otherwise required to be set forth in the Company’s periodic reports. Following the evaluation described above, our management, including the Chief Executive and Finance Director, concluded that our disclosure controls and procedures were effective at that time.

 

Management’s Annual Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting

 

Our management is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f) under the Exchange Act). Our management, with the participation of our Chief Executive and our Finance Director, carried out an assessment of the effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting (including those applicable to WPP DAS Ltd) as at 31 December 2012. The assessment was performed using the criteria for effective internal control reflected in the Internal Control-Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO).

 

Based on our assessment of the system of internal control, management concludes that as at 31 December 2012 our internal control over financial reporting (including those applicable to WPP DAS Ltd) was effective.

 

The Company’s internal control over financial reporting (including those applicable to WPP DAS Ltd) as at 31 December 2012, has been audited by Deloitte LLP, an independent registered public accounting firm, who also audited the Company’s consolidated financial statements. Their audit report on the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting is presented on page 95.

 

94


Table of Contents

REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

 

To the Board of Directors and Shareholders of WPP plc

 

We have audited the internal control over financial reporting of WPP plc and subsidiaries (the “Company”) as at 31 December 2012, based on criteria established in Internal Control—Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. The Company’s management is responsible for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in the accompanying Management’s Annual Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the Company’s internal control over financial reporting, including those controls applicable to WPP DAS Ltd. (“the Trust”) based on our audit.

 

We conducted our audit in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audit included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk, and performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinion.

 

A company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed by, or under the supervision of, the company’s principal executive and principal financial officers, or persons performing similar functions, and effected by the company’s board of directors, management, and other personnel to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorised acquisition, use, or disposition of the company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.

 

Because of the inherent limitations of internal control over financial reporting, including the possibility of collusion or improper management override of controls, material misstatements due to error or fraud may not be prevented or detected on a timely basis. Also, projections of any evaluation of the effectiveness of the internal control over financial reporting to future periods are subject to the risk that the controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.

 

In our opinion, the Company maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting, including those applicable to the Trust, as at 31 December 2012, based on the criteria established in Internal Control—Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission.

 

We have also audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States), the consolidated financial statements as at and for the year ended 31 December 2012 of the Company and financial statements as at and for the year ended 31 December 2012 of the Trust and our reports dated 30 April 2013 expressed an unqualified opinion on those financial statements.

 

/s/ Deloitte LLP

 

Deloitte LLP

London, United Kingdom

30 April 2013

 

95


Table of Contents

Changes in Internal Control Over Financial Reporting

 

There has been no change in the Company’s internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f) under the Exchange Act) that occurred during 2012, that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the Company’s internal control over financial reporting.

 

ITEM 16A. AUDIT COMMITTEE FINANCIAL EXPERT

 

The audit committee consisted of Paul Spencer, Jeffrey Rosen, Colin Day and Sol Trujillo at 31 December 2012. The board of directors has determined that all members of the audit committee are “independent” as that term is defined in the applicable NASDAQ listing standards and rules of the Securities and Exchange Commission.

 

WPP does have an audit committee financial expert, Paul Spencer, serving as Chairman of its audit committee. See the biography of Paul Spencer in Item 6A.

 

ITEM 16B. CODE OF ETHICS

 

WPP has in place a Code of Business Conduct that constitutes a “code of ethics” as defined in applicable regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission. The Code of Business Conduct (which is regularly reviewed by the Audit Committee and the Board) and was updated in 2012, sets out the principal obligations of all employees. Directors and senior executives throughout the Group are required each year to sign this Code. A copy of the WPP Code of Business Conduct may be obtained free of charge by contacting the Company’s investor relations department in London or New York at the following addresses or telephone numbers:

 

London:

 

Deputy Group finance director

WPP

27 Farm Street

London W1J 5RJ England

Tel: +44 (0)20 7408 2204

Fax: +44 (0)20 7493 6819

 

New York:

 

Investor Relations

WPP

100 Park Avenue

New York, New York 10017-5516

Tel: (212) 632-2200

Fax: (212) 632-2222

 

96


Table of Contents

ITEM 16C. PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTANT FEES AND SERVICES

 

     2012    2011
       £m    £m

Audit fees

   19.1    19.8

Tax fees 1

   3.5    3.4

All other fees 2

   4.4    5.2
     27.0    28.4
  1    

Tax fees comprise tax advisory, planning and compliance services.

  2    

Other fees comprise assurance services, including fees for due diligence, transition support fees and review of earn-out payment calculations.

 

See note 3 to the Consolidated Financial Statements for more details of auditors’ remuneration for the years ended 31 December 2012, 2011 and 2010.

 

Audit Committee Pre-Approval Policies and Procedures

 

The Audit Committee has adopted a pre-approval policy for the engagement of the external auditors in relation to the supply of permissible non-audit services (including taxation), taking into account relevant ethical and regulatory requirements. WPP’s policy regarding non-audit services that may be provided by the Group’s auditors, Deloitte LLP, prohibits certain categories of work in line with relevant guidance on independence, such as ethical standards issued by the Auditing Practices Board and independence rules of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States) and the SEC. Other categories of work may be undertaken by Deloitte LLP subject to an approvals process that is designed appropriately for different categories and values of proposed work.

 

ITEM 16D. EXEMPTIONS FROM THE LISTING STANDARDS FOR AUDIT COMMITTEES.

 

Not applicable.

 

ITEM 16E. PURCHASES OF EQUITY SECURITIES BY THE ISSUER AND AFFILIATED PURCHASERS.

 

At the Annual General Meeting of WPP plc on 2 June 2011 a special resolution was passed authorising WPP plc to make market purchases of its own shares up to a maximum number of 126,473,546 ordinary shares. This authority expired at the Annual General Meeting of WPP plc on 13 June 2012 and was replaced by a new authority to purchase up to a maximum number of 126,006,600 ordinary shares until the earlier of the conclusion of the Annual General Meeting of WPP plc in 2013 and 1 September 2013. This authorisation was replaced as part of the Scheme of Arrangement when a resolution was passed, authorising the Company, in accordance with its Articles of Association to purchase up to 126,300,365 of its own shares in the market.

 

       Total number of shares
purchased
     Average price      Total number of shares purchased as part
of publicly announced plan
     Maximum number of shares that
may yet be purchased  under plan
 

January

     —          —          —          108,999,416   

February

     —          —          —          108,999,416   

March

     2,925,000       £ 8.39         2,925,000         106,074,416   

April

     2,600,000       £ 8.44         2,600,000         103,474,416   

May

     2,220,000       £ 8.04         2,220,000         101,254,416   

June

     250,000       £ 7.46         250,000         125,756,600   

July

     —          —          —          125,756,600   

August

     —          —          —          125,756,600   

September

     933,400       £ 8.45         933,400         124,823,200   

October

     1,000,000       £ 7.96         1,000,000         123,823,200   

November

     4,300,000       £ 8.24         4,300,000         119,523,200   

December

     2,000,000       £ 8.60         2,000,000         117,523,200   

Total

     16,228,400       £ 8.30         16,228,400            

 

97


Table of Contents

ITEM 16F. CHANGE IN REGISTRANT’S CERTIFYING ACCOUNTANT

 

Not applicable.

 

ITEM 16G. CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

 

The Company’s ADSs are listed on the NASDAQ Global Select Market. In general, under NASDAQ’s Rule 5615, foreign private issuers such as WPP listed on NASDAQ are permitted to follow home country corporate governance practices instead of certain of the corporate governance requirements of NASDAQ’s Rule 5600 Series and Rule 5250(d). A foreign private issuer that elects to follow a home country practice instead of any such provisions of the Rule 5600 Series or Rule 5250(d) must submit in advance to NASDAQ a written statement from an independent counsel in such issuer’s home country certifying that the issuer’s practices are not prohibited by the home country’s laws. The Company’s independent Jersey counsel has certified to NASDAQ that the Company’s corporate governance practices are not prohibited by the laws of Jersey.

 

The requirements of the Rule 5600 Series and Rule 5250(d) and the corporate governance practices that the Company follows in lieu thereof are described below:

 

   

Rule 5620(c) requires that the quorum for any meeting of stockholders must not be less than 33  1 / 3 % of the outstanding shares of a company’s common voting stock. The Company’s Articles of Association provide that the necessary quorum for a general share owner meeting is a minimum of two persons entitled to vote on the business to be transacted, each being a share owner or a proxy for a share owner or a duly authorised representative of a corporate share owner.

 

   

Rule 5635(c) requires that issuers obtain stockholder approval before a stock option or purchase plan is established or materially amended or other equity compensation arrangement is made or materially amended pursuant to which stock may be acquired by officers, directors, employees or consultants of the issuer, subject to certain exceptions. The Company seeks share owner approval for the adoption or amendment of stock plans or stock purchase plans only as required by the Articles of Association of the Company, the Listing Rules of the UK Listing Authority (the Listing Rules) and the laws of Jersey. Subject to the exceptions permitted in the Listing Rules, this involves seeking share owner approval to any such plan that falls into either of the following categories (as defined in the Listing Rules):

 

  (a)   an employees’ share scheme if the scheme involves or may involve the issue of new shares or the transfer of treasury shares; and

 

  (b)   a long-term incentive scheme in which one or more directors of the Company is eligible to participate and to material amendments of that scheme to the extent required by the scheme’s rules. In this context, it should be noted that the provisions of the rules relating to whether amendments to the scheme rules must be approved by share owners must themselves be drafted to ensure compliance with the Listing Rules.

 

   

Rule 5250(d) requires that if an issuer posts its annual report to its investor relations website rather than mailing hard copies to its stockholders, the issuer must also post a prominent undertaking to provide shareholders, upon request, with a hard copy of the report free of charge. The issuer must also issue a press release stating that the report has been posted to the website and that stockholders can obtain a hard copy free of charge upon request. The Company posts its annual report to its investor relations website, issues a press release stating that the report has been posted and mails a hard copy of the report to all share owners of record, but does not undertake to send a copy of the report to any share owner upon request.

 

ITEM 16H. MINE SAFETY DISCLOSURE

 

Not applicable.

 

98


Table of Contents

PART III

 

ITEM 17. FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

Not applicable.

 

ITEM 18. FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

The Consolidated Financial Statements of WPP plc at 31 December 2012, 2011 and 2010 are included in this report beginning on page F-1.

 

ITEM 19. EXHIBITS

 

Exhibit No.

    

Exhibit Title

  1.1        Memorandum and Articles of Association of WPP plc (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 1 to the Registrant’s Report on Form 6-K filed on 2 January 2013).
  2.1        Deposit Agreement dated as of 2 January 2013 among the Registrant, Citibank, N.A. as Depositary, and all holders and beneficial owners from time to time of American Depositary Receipts issued thereunder (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 99(A)(I) to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form F-6EF filed on 31 December 2012).
  2.2        Restricted ADS Letter Agreement dated as of 2 January 2013 between the Registrant and Citibank, N.A., as Depositary (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 99(A)(II) to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form F-6EF filed on 31 December 2012).
  2.3        Agreement of Registrant to file, if requested by the Securities and Exchange Commission, instruments relating to $650,000,000 5.875% Notes due 2014.*
  2.4         Agreement of Registrant to file, if requested by the Securities and Exchange Commission, instruments relating to 600 million of 4.375% Bonds due 5 December 2013 (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 2.19 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F filed for the year ended 31 December 2006).
  2.5         Agreement of Registrant to file, if requested by the Securities and Exchange Commission, indenture instruments relating to £400 million of 6% Bonds due 4 April 2017 (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 2.20 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F filed for the year ended 31 December 2006).
  2.6         Agreement of Registrant to file, if requested by the Securities and Exchange Commission, instruments relating to 500 million of 5.25% bonds due 2015 (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 2.21 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2007).
  2.7         Agreement of Registrant to file, if requested by the Securities and Exchange Commission, instruments relating to £200 million of 6.375% bonds due 2020 (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 2.22 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2007).
  2.8         Agreement of Registrant to file, if requested by the Securities and Exchange Commission, instruments relating to 750 million of 6.25% Guaranteed Bonds due 2016 (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 2.23 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2007).
  2.9         Agreement of Registrant to file, if requested by the Securities and Exchange Commission, instruments relating to a U.S.$1,050,000,000 and £375,000,000 Revolving Credit Facilities Agreement (incorporating a U.S.$825,000,000 Swingline Facility) dated 30 November 2011, and Amended and Restated on 14 December 2012.*

 

99


Table of Contents

Exhibit No.

    

Exhibit Title

  2.10       Agreement of Registrant to file, if requested by the Securities and Exchange Commission, instruments relating to a £650,000,000 Term Facility Agreement dated 9 July 2008 and Amended and Restated on 17 November 2008 (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 2.17 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  2.11       Agreement of Registrant to file, if requested by the Securities and Exchange Commission, instruments relating to $600,000,000 of 8% Senior Notes due 2014 (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 2.19 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2009).
  2.12       Agreement of Registrant to file, if requested by the Securities and Exchange Commission, instruments relating to £450,000,000 of 5.75% Guaranteed Bonds due 2014 (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 2.20 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2009).
  2.13       Agreement of Registrant to file, if requested by the Securities and Exchange Commission, instruments relating to $30 million of 6.22% promissory notes due July 10, 2012, and $25 million of 6.34% promissory notes due July 10, 2014 (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 2.21 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2009).
  2.14       Agreement of Registrant to file, if requested by the Securities and Exchange Commission, instruments relating to $812.4 million of 4.75% Senior Notes due 2021 (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 2.22 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2011).
  2.15       Agreement of Registrant to file, if requested by the Securities and Exchange Commission, instruments relating to U.S.$500,000,000 3.625% Guaranteed Senior Notes due September 2022 and $300,000,000 5.125% Guaranteed Senior Notes due 2042.*
  4.1        J. Walter Thompson Company, Inc. Retained Benefit Supplemental Employee Retirement Plan (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.9 to the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2000).
  4.2        Young & Rubicam Inc. Deferred Compensation Plan (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 10.26 to Young & Rubicam’s Registration Statement on Form S-1 (File No. 333-46929)).
  4.3        Amendment No. 2 to Young & Rubicam Inc. Deferred Compensation Plan effective as of 1 January 1999 (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 10.27 to Young & Rubicam’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended 31 December 1998).
  4.4        Young & Rubicam Inc. Executive Income Deferral Program (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.19 to the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2000).
  4.5        Ogilvy & Mather ERISA Excess Plan Summary Plan Description (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.12 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  4.6         Ogilvy & Mather Executive Savings Plan Summary Plan Description, in connection with a 25% matching contribution (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.13 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  4.7         Ogilvy & Mather Executive Savings Plan Summary Plan Description, in connection with a 50% matching contribution (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.14 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  4.8         Ogilvy & Mather Deferred Compensation Plan Summary Plan Description (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.15 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  4.9         WPP Executive Stock Option Plan, as amended through 12 November 2012.*

 

100


Table of Contents

Exhibit No.

    

Exhibit Title

  4.10       WPP plc Restricted Stock Plan, as amended through 12 November 2012.*
  4.11       WPP 2005 Executive Stock Option Plan, as amended through 12 November 2012.*
  4.12       WPP plc Annual Bonus Deferral Programme, as amended through 12 November 2012.*
  4.13       GroupM Executive Savings Plan Summary Plan Description (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.24 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  4.14       WPP 2008 Executive Stock Option Plan, as amended through 12 November 2012.*
  4.15       UK Service Agreement, effective from 19 November 2008, between WPP 2005 Limited, Sir Martin Sorrell and WPP plc (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.28 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  4.16       Service Agreement in the USA, effective 26 November 2010, between WPP Group USA, Inc. and Sir Martin Sorrell (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.23 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2010).
  4.17       Service Agreement in the USA, dated 30 April 2009, between WPP Group USA, Inc. and Paul W.G. Richardson (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.30 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  4.18       Director’s appointment agreement, dated 21 November 2008, between WPP plc and Paul Richardson (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.31 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  4.19       Service Agreement, dated 12 February 2009, between WPP 2005 Limited and Mark Read (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.32 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  4.20       Director’s appointment agreement, dated 21 November 2008, between WPP plc and Mark Read (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.33 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  4.21       Supplemental Retirement Agreement, dated as of 1 July 2008, by and between WPP Group USA, Inc. and Paul Richardson (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.34 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  4.22       Amendment dated 19 November 2008 to Supplemental Retirement Agreement, dated as of 1 July 2008, by and between WPP Group USA, Inc. and Paul Richardson (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.35 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  4.23       Stock Purchase Agreement, dated 3 August 1998, among Asatsu Inc., WPP International Holding B.V. and WPP Group plc (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.36 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  4.24       24/7 Media, Inc. 1998 Stock Incentive Plan (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 10.1 to the Registration Statement on Form S-1 of 24/7 Media, Inc. filed on June 4, 2009, File No. 333-56085).
  4.25       24/7 Real Media, Inc. 2002 Stock Incentive Plan (incorporated herein by reference to a proxy statement filed by 24/7 Real Media, Inc. on August 9, 2002, File No. 000-29768).
  4.26       Grey Advertising Inc. Senior Executive Officer Post-Employment Compensation Plan (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.40 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  4.27       Amendment No. 1 to the Grey Advertising Inc. Senior Executive Officer Post-Employment Compensation Plan, effective as of January 1, 2009 (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.41 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).

 

101


Table of Contents

Exhibit No.

    

Exhibit Title

  4.28       Amendment No. 1 to the J. Walter Thompson Retained Benefit Supplemental Employee Retirement Plan, effective as of January 1, 2009 (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.42 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  4.29       WPP Group plc 2004 Leadership Equity Acquisition Plan, as amended through 12 November 2012.*
  4.30       WPP plc Leadership Equity Acquisition Plan III, as amended through 10 December 2012.*
  4.31       Second Amendment, dated 22 June 2011, to Supplemental Retirement Agreement, dated as of 1 July 2008, by and between WPP Group USA, Inc. and Paul Richardson (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.41 to the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2011).
  4.32       WPP 2012 Executive Stock Option Plan.*
  8.1        List of subsidiaries.*
  12.1       Certification of Chief Executive.*
  12.2       Certification of Finance Director.*
  13.1       Certification of Chief Executive under 18 U.S.C. Section 1350.*
  13.2       Certification of Finance Director under 18 U.S.C. Section 1350.*
  14.1       Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm (for WPP plc and subsidiaries).*
  14.2       Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm (for WPP DAS Limited).*

 

*   Filed herewith.

 

102


Table of Contents

Signatures

 

The Registrant hereby certifies that it meets all of the requirements for filing on Form 20-F and that it has duly caused and authorized the undersigned to sign this annual report on its behalf.

 

WPP plc

By:

  /s/    Paul W.G. Richardson
 

Paul W. G. Richardson

Group Finance Director

 

30 April 2013

 

103


Table of Contents

Item 18

 

INDEX TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

Financial
Statement
Number


          Page

 
  A.       Financial Statements of WPP plc as at 31 December 2012 and 2011 and for the years ended 31 December 2012, 2011 and 2010         
        

(i)  Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

     F-1   
        

(ii)  Accounting policies

     F-2   
        

(iii)  Consolidated income statement for the years ended 31 December 2012, 2011 and 2010

     F-8   
        

(iv)  Consolidated statement of comprehensive income for the years ended 31  December 2012, 2011 and 2010

     F-9   
        

(v)  Consolidated cash flow statement for the years ended 31 December 2012, 2011 and 2010

     F-10   
        

(vi)  Consolidated balance sheet at 31 December 2012 and 2011

     F-11   
        

(vii)   Consolidated statement of changes in equity for the years ended 31 December 2012, 2011 and 2010

     F-12   
        

(viii)  Notes to the consolidated financial statements

     F-13   
  B.       Financial Statements of WPP DAS Ltd as at 31 December 2012 and 2011 and for the years ended 31 December 2012, 2011 and 2010         
        

(i)  Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

     F-46   
        

(ii)  Cash flow statement for the years ended 31 December 2012, 2011 and 2010

     F-47   
        

(iii)  Balance sheet at 31 December 2012 and 2011

     F-47   
        

(iv)  Statement of changes in equity for the years ended 31 December 2012, 2011 and 2010

     F-47   
        

(v)  Notes to the financial statements

     F-48   


Table of Contents

REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

To the Board of Directors and Shareholders of WPP plc

 

We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of WPP plc and subsidiaries (the “Company”) as at 31 December 2012 and 2011, and the related consolidated income statements, consolidated statements of comprehensive income, consolidated cash flow statements, and consolidated statement of changes in equity for each of the three years in the period ended 31 December 2012. These consolidated financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these consolidated financial statements based on our audits.

 

We conducted our audits in accordance with standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

 

In our opinion, such consolidated financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of the Company as at 31 December 2012 and 2011, and the results of its operations and cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended 31 December 2012, in conformity with International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board.

 

We have also audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States), the Company’s internal control over financial reporting as at 31 December 2012, based on the criteria established in Internal Control—Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission and our report dated 30 April 2013 expressed an unqualified opinion on the Company’s internal control over financial reporting.

 

/s/ Deloitte LLP

Deloitte LLP

London, United Kingdom

30 April 2013

 

F-1


Table of Contents

Our 2012 financial statements

 

Accounting policies

 

The consolidated financial statements of WPP plc and its subsidiaries (the Group) for the year ended 31 December 2012 have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board as they apply to the financial statements of the Group for the year ended 31 December 2012.

 

Basis of preparation

The consolidated financial statements have been prepared under the historical cost convention, except for the revaluation of certain financial instruments. The principal accounting policies are set out below.

The financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors and authorized for issue on 30 April 2013.

 

Basis of consolidation

The consolidated financial statements include the results of the Company and all its subsidiary undertakings made up to the same accounting date. All intra-Group balances, transactions, income and expenses are eliminated in full on consolidation. The results of subsidiary undertakings acquired or disposed of during the period are included or excluded from the consolidated income statement from the effective date of acquisition or disposal.

 

Goodwill and other intangible assets

Intangible assets comprise goodwill, certain acquired separable corporate brand names, acquired customer relationships, acquired proprietary tools and capitalised computer software not integral to a related item of hardware.

Goodwill represents the excess of fair value attributed to investments in businesses or subsidiary undertakings over the fair value of the underlying net assets, including intangible assets, at the date of their acquisition.

Goodwill impairment reviews are undertaken annually or more frequently if events or changes in circumstances indicate a potential impairment. The carrying value of goodwill is compared to the net present value of future cash flows derived from the underlying assets using a projection period of up to five years for each cash-generating unit. After the projection period a steady growth rate representing an appropriate long-term growth rate for the industry is applied. Any impairment is recognised immediately as an expense and is not subsequently reversed.

Corporate brand names, customer relationships and proprietary tools acquired as part of acquisitions of businesses are capitalised separately from goodwill as intangible assets if their value can be measured reliably on initial recognition and it is probable that the expected future economic benefits that are attributable to the asset will flow to the Group.

Certain corporate brands of the Group are considered to have an indefinite economic life because of the institutional nature of the corporate brand names, their proven ability to maintain market leadership and profitable operations over long periods of time and the Group’s commitment to develop and enhance their value. The carrying value of these intangible assets is reviewed at least annually for impairment and adjusted to the recoverable amount if required.

Amortisation is provided at rates calculated to write off the cost less estimated residual value of each asset on a straight-line basis over its estimated useful life as follows:

 

 

Brand names (with finite lives) – 10-20 years.

 

 

Customer related intangibles – 3-10 years.

 

 

Other proprietary tools – 3-10 years.

 

 

Other (including capitalised computer software) – 3-5 years.

 

Contingent consideration

Contingent consideration is accounted for in accordance with IFRS 3 Business Combinations.

Future anticipated payments to vendors in respect of contingent consideration (earnout agreements) are initially recorded at fair value which is the present value of the expected cash outflows of the obligations. The obligations are dependent on the future financial performance of the interests acquired (typically over a four- to five-year period following the year of acquisition) and assume the operating companies improve profits in line with directors’ estimates. The directors derive their estimates from internal business plans together with financial due diligence performed in connection with the acquisition.

Subsequent adjustments to the fair value are recorded in the consolidated income statement within revaluation of financial instruments. For acquisitions completed prior to 1 January 2010, such adjustments are recorded in the consolidated balance sheet within goodwill.

 

Property, plant and equipment

Property, plant and equipment are shown at cost less accumulated depreciation and any provision for

 

F-2


Table of Contents

Accounting policies (continued)

 

impairment with the exception of freehold land which is not depreciated. The Group assesses the carrying value of its property, plant and equipment to determine if any impairment has occurred. Where this indicates that an asset may be impaired, the Group applies the requirements of IAS 36 Impairment of Assets in assessing the carrying amount of the asset. This process includes comparing its recoverable amount with its carrying value. Depreciation is provided at rates calculated to write off the cost less estimated residual value of each asset on a straight-line basis over its estimated useful life, as follows:

 

 

Freehold buildings – 50 years.

 

 

Leasehold land and buildings – over the term of the lease or life of the asset, if shorter.

 

 

Fixtures, fittings and equipment – 3-10 years.

 

 

Computer equipment – 3-5 years.

 

Interests in associates and joint ventures

An associate is an entity over which the Group has significant influence. In certain circumstances, significant influence may be represented by factors other than ownership and voting rights, such as representation on the Board of Directors.

The Group’s share of the profits less losses of associate undertakings net of tax, interest and non-controlling interests is included in the consolidated income statement and the Group’s share of net assets is shown within interests in associates in the consolidated balance sheet. The Group’s share of the profits less losses and net assets is based on current information produced by the undertakings, adjusted to conform with the accounting policies of the Group.

The Group assesses the carrying value of its associate undertakings to determine if any impairment has occurred. Where this indicates that an investment may be impaired, the Group applies the requirements of IAS 36 in assessing the carrying amount of the investment. This process includes comparing its recoverable amount with its carrying value.

The Group accounts for joint venture investments under the equity method which is consistent with the Group’s treatment of associates.

 

Other investments

Other investments are designated as ‘available for sale’ and are shown at fair value with any movements in fair value taken to equity.

On disposal the cumulative gain or loss previously recognised in equity is included in the profit or loss for the year.

 

Inventory and work in progress

Work in progress is valued at cost, which includes outlays incurred on behalf of clients and an appropriate proportion of directly attributable costs and overheads on incomplete assignments. Provision is made for irrecoverable costs where appropriate. Inventory is stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value.

 

Trade receivables

Trade receivables are stated net of provisions for bad and doubtful debts.

 

Foreign currency and interest rate hedging

The Group’s policy on interest rate and foreign exchange rate management sets out the instruments and methods available to hedge interest and currency risk exposures and the control procedures in place to ensure effectiveness.

The Group uses derivative financial instruments to reduce exposure to foreign exchange risk and interest rate movements. The Group does not hold or issue derivative financial instruments for speculative purposes.

Derivatives are initially recognised at fair value at the date a derivative contract is entered into and are subsequently remeasured to their fair value at each balance sheet date. The resulting gain or loss is recognised in profit or loss immediately unless the derivative is designated and effective as a hedging instrument, in which event the timing of the recognition in profit or loss depends on the nature of the hedge relationship.

At the inception of the hedge relationship the entity documents the relationship between the hedging instrument and hedged item, along with its risk management objectives and its strategy for undertaking various hedge transactions. Furthermore, at the inception of the hedge and on an ongoing basis, the Group documents whether the hedging instrument that is used in a hedging relationship is highly effective in offsetting changes in fair values or cash flows of the hedged item.

Note 25 contains details of the fair values of the derivative instruments used for hedging purposes.

Changes in the fair value of derivatives that are designated and qualify as fair value hedges are recorded in profit or loss immediately, together with any changes

 

F-3


Table of Contents

Accounting policies (continued)

 

in the fair value of the hedged item that is attributable to the hedged risk.

The effective portion of changes in the fair value of derivatives that are designated and qualify as cash flow or net investment hedges is deferred in equity. The gain or loss relating to the ineffective portion is recognised immediately in profit or loss. Amounts deferred in equity are recycled in profit or loss in the periods when the hedged item is recognised in profit or loss. However, when the forecast transaction that is hedged results in the recognition of a non-financial asset or a non-financial liability, the gains and losses previously deferred in equity are transferred from equity and included in the initial measurement of the cost of the asset or liability.

Hedge accounting is discontinued when the hedging instrument expires or is sold, terminated, or exercised, or no longer qualifies for hedge accounting. At that time, any cumulative gain or loss on the hedging instrument recognised in equity is retained in equity until the forecast transaction occurs. If a hedged transaction is no longer expected to occur, the net cumulative gain or loss recognised in equity is transferred to net profit or loss for the period.

Derivatives embedded in other financial instruments or other host contracts are treated as separate derivatives when their risks and characteristics are not closely related to those of host contracts and the host contracts are not carried at fair value with unrealised gains or losses reported in the consolidated income statement.

 

Liabilities in respect of option agreements

Option agreements that allow the Group’s equity partners to require the Group to purchase a non-controlling interest are treated as derivatives over equity instruments and are recorded in the consolidated balance sheet at fair value and the valuation is remeasured at each period end. Fair value is based on the present value of expected cash outflows and the movement in the fair value is recognised as income or expense within revaluation of financial instruments in the consolidated income statement.

 

Derecognition of financial liabilities

In accordance with IAS 39 Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement, a financial liability of the Group is only released to the consolidated income statement when the underlying legal obligation is extinguished.

 

Convertible debt

Convertible debt is assessed according to the substance of the contractual arrangements and is classified into liability and equity elements on the basis of the initial fair value of the liability element. The difference between this figure and the cash received is classified as equity.

The consolidated income statement charge for the finance cost is spread evenly over the term of the convertible debt so that at redemption the liability equals the redemption value.

 

Other debt

Other interest-bearing debt is recorded at the proceeds received, net of direct issue costs.

 

Borrowing costs

Finance costs of borrowing are recognised in the consolidated income statement over the term of those borrowings.

 

Revenue recognition

Revenue comprises commission and fees earned in respect of amounts billed. Direct costs include fees paid to external suppliers where they are retained to perform part or all of a specific project for a client and the resulting expenditure is directly attributable to the revenue earned. Revenue is stated exclusive of VAT, sales taxes and trade discounts.

 

Advertising and Media Investment Management

Revenue is typically derived from commissions on media placements and fees for advertising services. Revenue may consist of various arrangements involving commissions, fees, incentive-based revenue or a combination of the three, as agreed upon with each client.

Revenue is recognised when the service is performed, in accordance with the terms of the contractual arrangement. The amount of revenue recognised depends on whether we act as an agent or as a principal in an arrangement with a client. Where we act as an agent, the revenue recorded is the net amount retained when the fee or commission is earned. Although the Group may bear credit risk in respect of these activities, the arrangements with our clients are such that we consider that we are acting as an agent on their behalf. In such cases, costs incurred with external suppliers (such as media suppliers) are excluded from our revenue. Where the Group acts as a principal and contracts directly with suppliers for media payments and production costs, the revenue recorded is the gross amount billed.

 

F-4


Table of Contents

Accounting policies (continued)

 

Incentive-based revenue typically comprises both quantitative and qualitative elements; on the element related to quantitative targets, revenue is recognised when the quantitative targets have been achieved; on the element related to qualitative targets, revenue is recognised when the incentive is received or receivable.

The Group receives volume rebates from certain suppliers for transactions entered into on behalf of clients that, based on the terms of the relevant contracts and local law, are either remitted to clients or retained by the Group. If amounts are passed on to clients they are recorded as liabilities until settled or, if retained by the Group, are recorded as revenue when earned.

 

Consumer Insight

Revenue recognised in proportion to the level of service performed for market research contracts is based on proportional performance. In assessing contract performance, both input and output criteria are reviewed. Costs incurred are used as an objective input measure of performance. The primary input of all work performed under these arrangements is labour. As a result of the relationship between labour and cost, there is normally a direct relationship between costs incurred and the proportion of the contract performed to date. Costs incurred as a proportion of expected total costs is used as an initial proportional performance measure. This indicative proportional performance measure is subsequently validated against other more subjective criteria (i.e. relevant output measures) such as the percentage of interviews completed, percentage of reports delivered to a client and the achievement of any project milestones stipulated in the contract. In the event of divergence between the objective and more subjective measures, the more subjective measures take precedence since these are output measures.

While most of the studies provided in connection with the Group’s market research contracts are undertaken in response to an individual client’s or group of clients’ specifications, in certain instances a study may be developed as an off-the-shelf product offering sold to a broad client base. For these transactions, revenue is recognised when the product is delivered. Where the terms of transaction provide for licensing the product on a subscription basis, revenue is recognised over the subscription period on a straight-line basis or, if applicable, based on usage.

Substantially all services are provided on a fixed price basis. Pricing may also include a provision for a surcharge where the actual labour hours incurred in completing a project are significantly above the labour hours quoted in the project proposal. In instances where this occurs, the surcharge will be included in the total revenue base on which to measure proportional performance when the actual threshold is reached provided that collectability is reasonably assured.

 

Public Relations & Public Affairs and Branding & Identity, Healthcare and Specialist Communications

Revenue is typically derived from retainer fees and services to be performed subject to specific agreement. Revenue is recognised when the service is performed, in accordance with the terms of the contractual arrangement. Revenue is recognised on long-term contracts, if the final outcome can be assessed with reasonable certainty, by including in the consolidated income statement revenue and related costs as contract activity progresses.

 

Taxation

Corporate taxes are payable on taxable profits at current rates. The tax expense represents the sum of the tax currently payable and deferred tax.

The Group is subject to corporate taxes in a number of different jurisdictions and judgement is required in determining the appropriate provision for transactions where the ultimate tax determination is uncertain. In such circumstances, the Group recognises liabilities for anticipated taxes based on the best information available and where the anticipated liability is both probable and estimable. Such liabilities are classified as current when the Group expects to settle the liability within 12 months and the remainder as non-current. Any interest and penalties accrued are included in income taxes both in the consolidated income statement and balance sheet. Where the final outcome of such matters differs from the amount recorded, any differences may impact the income tax and deferred tax provisions in the period in which the final determination is made.

The tax laws that apply to the Group’s subsidiaries may be amended by the relevant tax authorities. Such potential amendments are regularly monitored and adjustments are made to the Group’s tax liabilities and deferred tax assets and liabilities where necessary.

The tax currently payable is based on taxable profit for the year. Taxable profit differs from net profit as reported in the consolidated income statement because it excludes items of income or expense that are taxable or deductible in other years and it further excludes items that are never taxable or deductible. The Group’s liability for current tax

 

F-5


Table of Contents

Accounting policies (continued)

 

is calculated using tax rates that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date.

Deferred tax is the tax expected to be payable or recoverable on differences between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities in the financial statements and the corresponding tax bases used in the computation of taxable profit, and is accounted for using the balance sheet liability method. Deferred tax liabilities are recognised for all taxable temporary differences unless specifically excepted by IAS 12 Income Taxes. Deferred tax is charged or credited in the consolidated income statement, except when it relates to items charged or credited to other comprehensive income or directly to equity, in which case the deferred tax is also dealt with in other comprehensive income or equity. Deferred tax assets are recognised to the extent that it is probable that taxable profits will be available against which deductible temporary differences can be utilised. Such assets and liabilities are not recognised if the temporary difference arises from the initial recognition of goodwill or other assets and liabilities (other than in a business combination) in a transaction that affects neither the tax profit nor the accounting profit.

The carrying amount of deferred tax assets is reviewed at each balance sheet date and reduced to the extent that it is no longer probable that sufficient taxable profits will be available to allow all or part of the asset to be recovered.

Deferred tax liabilities are recognised for taxable temporary differences arising on investments in subsidiaries and associates, and interests in joint ventures, except where the Group is able to control the reversal of the temporary difference and it is probable that the temporary difference will not reverse in the foreseeable future.

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are offset when there is a legally enforceable right to set off current tax assets against current tax liabilities and when they relate to income taxes levied by the same taxation authority and the Group intends to settle its current tax assets and liabilities on a net basis.

Deferred tax is calculated at the tax rates that are expected to apply in the period when the liability is settled or the asset is realised based on enacted or substantively enacted legislation. Deferred tax is charged or credited in the consolidated income statement, except when it relates to items charged or credited directly to equity or the consolidated statement of comprehensive income, in which case the deferred tax is also dealt with

in equity or the consolidated statement of comprehensive income.

 

Retirement benefit costs

For defined contribution plans, contributions are charged to the consolidated income statement as payable in respect of the accounting period.

For defined benefit plans the amounts charged to operating profit are the current service costs and gains and losses on settlements and curtailments. They are included as part of staff costs. Past service costs are recognised immediately in the consolidated income statement if the benefits have vested. If the benefits have not vested, the costs are recognised over the period until vesting occurs. The interest cost and the expected return on assets are shown within finance costs and finance income respectively. Actuarial gains and losses are recognised immediately in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income.

Where defined benefit plans are funded, the assets of the plan are held separately from those of the Group, in separate independently managed funds. Pension plan assets are measured at fair value and liabilities are measured on an actuarial basis using the projected unit method and discounted at a rate equivalent to the current rate of return on a high-quality corporate bond of equivalent currency and term to the plan liabilities. The actuarial valuations are obtained at least triennially and are updated at each balance sheet date.

Recognition of a surplus in a defined benefit plan is limited based on the economic gain the Company is expected to benefit from in the future by means of a refund or reduction in future contributions to the plan, in accordance with IAS 19 Employee Benefits.

 

Finance leases

Assets held under finance leases are recognised as assets of the Group at the inception of the lease at the lower of their fair value and the present value of the minimum lease payments. Depreciation on leased assets is charged to the consolidated income statement on the same basis as owned assets. Leasing payments are treated as consisting of capital and interest elements and the interest is charged to the consolidated income statement as it is incurred.

 

Operating leases

Operating lease rentals are charged to the consolidated income statement on a straight-line basis over the lease term. Any premium or discount on the acquisition of a lease is spread over the life of the lease on a straight-line basis.

 

F-6


Table of Contents

Accounting policies (continued)

 

 

Translation of foreign currencies

Foreign currency transactions arising from normal trading activities are recorded at the rates in effect at the date of the transaction. Monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies at the year end are translated at the year-end exchange rate. Foreign currency gains and losses are credited or charged to the consolidated income statement as they arise.

The income statements of overseas subsidiary undertakings are translated into pounds sterling at average exchange rates and the year-end net assets of these companies are translated at year-end exchange rates.

Exchange differences arising from retranslation of the opening net assets and on foreign currency borrowings (to the extent that they hedge the Group’s investment in such operations) are reported in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income.

Goodwill and fair value adjustments arising on the acquisition of a foreign entity are treated as assets and liabilities of the foreign entity and translated at the closing rate.

 

Share-based payments

The Group issues equity-settled share-based payments (including share options) to certain employees and accounts for these awards in accordance with IFRS 2 Share-Based Payment. Equity-settled share-based payments are measured at fair value (excluding the effect of non-market-based vesting conditions) at the date of grant. Details regarding the fair value of equity settled share-based transactions are set out in notes 22 and 26.

The fair value determined at the grant date is recognised in the consolidated income statement as an expense on a straight-line basis over the relevant vesting period, based on the Group’s estimate of the number of shares that will ultimately vest and adjusted for the effect of non-market-based vesting conditions.

 

New IFRS accounting pronouncements

At the date of authorisation of these financial statements, the following Standards and Interpretations, which have not been applied in these financial statements, were in issue but not yet effective:

 

 

IFRS 9: Financial Instruments;

 

 

IFRS 10: Consolidated Financial Statements;

 

 

IFRS 11: Joint Arrangements;

 

 

IFRS 12: Disclosure of Interests in Other Entities;

 

 

IFRS 13: Fair Value Measurement;

 

 

IAS 1 (amended): Presentation of Financial Statements;

 

 

IAS 19 (amended): Employee Benefits;

 

 

IAS 27 (revised): Separate Financial Statements;

 

 

IAS 28 (revised): Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures; and

 

 

IAS 32 (amended): Financial Instruments: Presentation.

 

The Group does not consider that these Standards and Interpretations will have a significant impact on the financial statements of the Group except for additional disclosures when the relevant standards come into effect.

In the current year, the following Standards and Interpretations became effective:

 

 

IFRS 7 (amended): Financial Instruments: Disclosures; and

 

 

IAS 12 (amended): Income Taxes.

 

The adoption of these Standards and Interpretations has not led to any changes in the Group’s accounting policies.

 

Critical judgements in applying accounting policies

Management is required to make key decisions and judgements in the process of applying the Group’s accounting policies. The most significant areas where such judgements have been necessary are revenue recognition, goodwill and other intangibles, payments due to vendors (earnout agreements), acquisition reserves, taxation and accounting for pension liabilities. Where judgement has been applied, the key factors taken into consideration are disclosed in the accounting policies and the appropriate note in these financial statements.

 

F-7


Table of Contents

Consolidated income statement

 

For the years ended 31 December 2012, 2011, 2010

 

     Notes   

2012

£m

   

2011

£m

   

2010

£m

 

Revenue

   2      10,373.1        10,021.8        9,331.0   

Direct costs

          (858.3     (783.3     (770.5

Gross profit

          9,514.8        9,238.5        8,560.5   

Operating costs

   3      (8,273.7     (8,046.3     (7,587.5

Operating profit

          1,241.1        1,192.2        973.0   

Share of results of associates

   4      69.4        66.1        55.2   

Profit before interest and taxation

          1,310.5        1,258.3        1,028.2   

Finance income

   6      85.9        97.3        81.7   

Finance costs

   6      (299.8     (297.2     (276.8

Revaluation of financial instruments

   6      (4.7     (50.0     18.2   

Profit before taxation

          1,091.9        1,008.4        851.3   

Taxation

   7      (197.2     (91.9     (190.3

Profit for the year

          894.7        916.5        661.0   
                               

Attributable to:

                             

Equity holders of the parent

          822.7        840.1        586.0   

Non-controlling interests

          72.0        76.4        75.0   
            894.7        916.5        661.0   
                               

Earnings per share 1

                             

Basic earnings per ordinary share

   9      66.2p        67.6p        47.5p   

Diluted earnings per ordinary share

   9      62.8p        64.5p        45.9p   

 

Notes

The accounting policies on pages F-2 to F-7 and the accompanying notes on pages F-13 to F-45 form an integral part of this consolidated income statement.

1    

The calculations of the Group’s earnings per share are set out in note 9.

 

F-8


Table of Contents

Consolidated statement of comprehensive income

 

For the years ended 31 December 2012, 2011, 2010

 

     2012
£m
    2011
£m
    2010
£m
 

Profit for the year

     894.7        916.5        661.0   

Exchange adjustments on foreign currency net investments

     (305.2     (256.3     156.3   

(Loss)/gain on revaluation of available for sale investments

     (3.5     11.3        (59.8

Actuarial loss on defined benefit pension plans

     (83.9     (72.0     (0.4

Deferred tax on defined benefit pension plans

     7.3        0.1        0.2   

Other comprehensive (loss)/income relating to the year

     (385.3     (316.9     96.3   

Total comprehensive income relating to the year

     509.4        599.6        757.3   
Attributable to:                         

Equity holders of the parent

     444.2        529.5        672.6   

Non-controlling interests

     65.2        70.1        84.7   
       509.4        599.6        757.3   

 

Note

The accounting policies on pages F-2 to F-7 and the accompanying notes on pages F-13 to F-45 form an integral part of this consolidated statement of comprehensive income.

 

F-9


Table of Contents

Consolidated cash flow statement

 

For the years ended 31 December 2012, 2011, 2010

 

     Notes     

2012

£m

   

2011

£m

   

2010

£m

 

Net cash inflow from operating activities

     11         908.3        665.2        1,361.2   

Investing activities

                                 

Acquisitions and disposals

     11         (566.5     (469.8     (200.1

Purchases of property, plant and equipment

              (290.3     (216.1     (190.5

Purchases of other intangible assets (including capitalised computer software)

              (39.8     (37.1     (27.0

Proceeds on disposal of property, plant and equipment

              123.5        13.2        7.6   

Net cash outflow from investing activities

              (773.1     (709.8     (410.0

Financing activities

                                 

Share option proceeds

              56.0        28.8        42.7   

Cash consideration for non-controlling interests

     11         (20.1     (62.6     (15.1

Share repurchases and buy-backs

     11         (134.5     (182.2     (46.4

Net increase in borrowings

     11         380.5        301.4        19.8   

Financing and share issue costs

              (8.2     (11.9     (3.5

Equity dividends paid

              (306.6     (218.4     (200.4

Dividends paid to non-controlling interests in subsidiary undertakings

              (51.9     (62.2     (66.7

Net cash outflow from financing activities

              (84.8     (207.1     (269.6

Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

              50.4        (251.7     681.6   

Translation differences

              (119.3     (29.9     82.2   

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

              1,428.2        1,709.8        946.0   

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

     11         1,359.3        1,428.2        1,709.8   

 

Note

The accounting policies on pages F-2 to F-7 and the accompanying notes on pages F-13 to F-45 form an integral part of this consolidated cash flow statement.

 

F-10


Table of Contents

Consolidated balance sheet

 

At 31 December 2012, 2011

 

     Notes     

2012

£m

   

2011

£m

 

Non-current assets

                         

Intangible assets:

                         

Goodwill

     12         9,457.2        9,430.8   

Other

     12         1,827.4        1,859.9   

Property, plant and equipment

     13         768.3        728.3   

Interests in associates and joint ventures

     14         887.2        801.3   

Other investments

     14         176.5        190.8   

Deferred tax assets

     15         91.2        86.0   

Trade and other receivables

     17         245.1        309.1   
                13,452.9        13,406.2   

Current assets

                         

Inventory and work in progress

     16         348.2        333.9   

Corporate income tax recoverable

              124.2        88.5   

Trade and other receivables

     17         9,007.0        8,919.7   

Cash and short-term deposits

              1,945.3        1,946.6   
                11,424.7        11,288.7   

Current liabilities

                         

Trade and other payables

     18         (10,907.8     (11,165.5

Corporate income tax payable

              (102.9     (113.4

Bank overdrafts and loans

     20         (1,085.9     (518.4
                (12,096.6     (11,797.3

Net current liabilities

              (671.9     (508.6

Total assets less current liabilities

              12,781.0        12,897.6   

Non-current liabilities

                         

Bonds and bank loans

     20         (3,680.6     (3,893.0

Trade and other payables

     19         (512.0     (553.1

Corporate income tax payable

              (375.3     (379.5

Deferred tax liabilities

     15         (680.3     (741.4

Provision for post-employment benefits

     23         (335.6     (282.3

Provisions for liabilities and charges

     21         (136.6     (154.0
                (5,720.4     (6,003.3

Net assets

              7,060.6        6,894.3   

Equity

                         

Called-up share capital

     26         126.5        126.6   

Share premium account

              175.9        105.7   

Shares to be issued

              1.8        2.4   

Merger reserve

              (5,135.7     (5,136.2

Other reserves

     27         622.7        938.9   

Own shares

              (166.5     (177.6

Retained earnings

              11,186.3        10,803.5   

Equity share owners’ funds

              6,811.0        6,663.3   

Non-controlling interests

              249.6        231.0   

Total equity

              7,060.6        6,894.3   

 

Note

The accounting policies on pages F-2 to F-7 and the accompanying notes on pages F-13 to F-45 form an integral part of this consolidated balance sheet.

 

F-11


Table of Contents

Consolidated statement of changes in equity

 

For the year ended 31 December 2012, 2011, 2010

 

    Called-up
share
capital
£m
    Share
premium
account
£m
   

Shares

to be
issued
£m

    Merger
reserve
£m
    Other
reserves 1
£m
    Own
shares
£m
    Retained
earnings
£m
    Total
equity
share
owners’
funds
£m
   

Non-
controlling

interests
£m

   

Total

£m

 

Balance at 1 January 2010

    125.6        12.6        5.5        (5,138.0     1,093.1        (154.0     9,949.2        5,894.0        181.7        6,075.7   
Ordinary shares issued     0.8        41.9        (2.4     1.2                      0.9        42.4               42.4   
Exchange adjustments on foreign currency net investments                                 146.6                      146.6        9.7        156.3   
Net profit for the year                                               586.0        586.0        75.0        661.0   
Dividends paid                                               (200.4     (200.4     (66.7     (267.1
Non-cash share-based incentive plans (including share options)                                               70.4        70.4               70.4   
Tax adjustment on share-based payments                                               21.1        21.1               21.1   
Net movement in own shares held by ESOP Trusts                                        9.2        (55.6     (46.4            (46.4
Actuarial loss on defined benefit pension plans                                               (0.4     (0.4            (0.4
Deferred tax on defined benefit pension plans                                               0.2        0.2               0.2   
Loss on revaluation of available for sale investments                                 (59.8                   (59.8            (59.8
Recognition/remeasurement of financial instruments                                 2.9               0.9        3.8               3.8   
Acquisition of subsidiaries 2                                               (10.9     (10.9     1.6        (9.3
Balance at 31 December 2010     126.4        54.5        3.1        (5,136.8     1,182.8        (144.8     10,361.4        6,446.6        201.3        6,647.9   

Ordinary shares issued

    0.6        30.4        (0.7     0.6                             30.9               30.9   

Share cancellations

    (0.7                          0.7               (45.9     (45.9            (45.9

Treasury share additions

                                       (29.8            (29.8            (29.8

Treasury share allocations

                                       0.8        (0.8                     

Exchange adjustments on foreign currency net investments

                                (250.0                   (250.0     (6.3     (256.3

Net profit for the year

                                              840.1        840.1        76.4        916.5   

Dividends paid

                                              (218.4     (218.4     (62.2     (280.6

Scrip dividend

    0.3        20.8                                    (21.1                     

Non-cash share-based incentive plans (including share options)

                                              78.8        78.8               78.8   

Tax adjustment on share-based payments

                                              (11.7     (11.7            (11.7

Net movement in own shares held by ESOP Trusts

                                       (3.8     (102.7     (106.5            (106.5

Actuarial loss on defined benefit pension plans

                                              (72.0     (72.0            (72.0

Deferred tax on defined benefit pension plans

                                              0.1        0.1               0.1   

Gain on revaluation of available for sale investments

                                11.3                      11.3               11.3   

Recognition/remeasurement of financial instruments

                                (5.9            33.8        27.9               27.9   

Acquisition of subsidiaries 2

                                              (38.1     (38.1     21.8        (16.3

Balance at 31 December 2011

    126.6        105.7        2.4        (5,136.2 )       938.9        (177.6 )       10,803.5        6,663.3        231.0        6,894.3   

Ordinary shares issued

    1.0        55.0        (0.6     0.5                             55.9               55.9   

Share issue/cancellation costs

           (0.2                                        (0.2            (0.2

Share cancellations

    (0.7                          0.7               (55.1     (55.1            (55.1

Treasury share additions

                                       (0.6            (0.6            (0.6

Treasury share allocations

                                       0.9        (0.9                     

Treasury share cancellations

    (0.6                          0.6        37.2        (37.2                     

Exchange adjustments on foreign currency net investments

                                (298.4                   (298.4     (6.8     (305.2

Net profit for the year

                                              822.7        822.7        72.0        894.7   

Dividends paid

                                              (306.6     (306.6     (51.9     (358.5

Scrip dividend

    0.2        15.4                                    (15.6                     

Non-cash share-based incentive plans (including share options)

                                              92.8        92.8               92.8   

Tax adjustment on share-based payments

                                              18.3        18.3               18.3   

Net movement in own shares held by ESOP Trusts

                                       (26.4     (52.4     (78.8            (78.8

Actuarial loss on defined benefit pension plans

                                              (83.9     (83.9            (83.9

Deferred tax on defined benefit pension plans

                                              7.3        7.3               7.3   

Loss on revaluation of available for sale investments

                                (3.5                   (3.5            (3.5

Recognition/remeasurement of financial instruments

                                2.7               14.8        17.5               17.5   

Share purchases – close period commitments

                                (18.3                   (18.3            (18.3

Acquisition of subsidiaries 2

                                              (21.4     (21.4     5.3        (16.1

Balance at 31 December 2012

    126.5        175.9        1.8        (5,135.7 )       622.7        (166.5 )       11,186.3        6,811.0        249.6        7,060.6   

 

Notes

The accounting policies on pages F-2 to F-7 and the accompanying notes on pages F-13 to F-45 form an integral part of this consolidated statement of changes in equity.

1    

Other reserves are analysed in note 27.

2    

Acquisition of subsidiaries represents movements in retained earnings and non-controlling interests arising from changes in ownership of existing subsidiaries and recognition of non-controlling interests on new acquisitions.

 

Total comprehensive income relating to the year ended 31 December 2012 was £509.4 million (2011: £599.6 million, 2010: £757.3 million).

 

F-12


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements

 

1. General information

 

WPP plc is a company incorporated in Jersey. The address of the registered office is Queensway House, Hilgrove Street, St Helier, Jersey, JE11ES and the address of the principal executive office is 27 Farm Street, London, United Kingdom, W1J 5RJ. The nature of the Group’s operations and its principal activities are set out in note 2. These consolidated financial statements are presented in pounds sterling.

 

2. Segment information

 

The Group is a leading worldwide communications services organisation offering national and multinational clients a comprehensive range of communications services.

 

The Group is organised into four reportable segments – Advertising and Media Investment Management; Consumer Insight; Public Relations & Public Affairs; and Branding & Identity, Healthcare and Specialist Communications. This last reportable segment includes WPP Digital and direct, digital, promotional and relationship marketing.

 

IFRS 8 Operating Segments requires operating segments to be identified on the same basis as is used internally for the review of performance and allocation of resources by the Group chief executive. Provided certain quantitative and qualitative criteria are fulfilled, IFRS 8 permits the aggregation of these components into reportable segments for the purposes of disclosure in the Group’s financial statements. In assessing the Group’s reportable segments, the directors have had regard to the similar economic characteristics of certain operating segments, their shared client base, the similar nature of their products or services and their long-term margins, amongst other factors.

 

Operating sectors

Reported contributions were as follows:

 

     Revenue 1      Headline
PBIT 2
     Headline
PBIT
margin
     Revenue 1      Headline
PBIT 2
     Headline
PBIT
margin
     Revenue 1      Headline
PBIT 2
     Headline
PBIT
margin
 
    

2012

£m

    

2012

£m

    

2012

%

    

2011

£m

    

2011

£m

    

2011

%

    

2010

£m

    

2010

£m

    

2010

%

 
Advertising and Media Investment Management      4,273.2         754.5         17.7         4,157.2         667.9         16.1         3,733.3         573.0         15.3   
Consumer Insight      2,460.2         246.9         10.0         2,458.0         258.7         10.5         2,430.2         234.8         9.7   
Public Relations & Public Affairs      917.1         136.4         14.9         885.4         142.9         16.1         844.5         133.1         15.8   

Branding & Identity, Healthcare and Specialist Communications

     2,722.6         393.2         14.4         2,521.2         359.5         14.3         2,323.0         287.8         12.4   
       10,373.1         1,531.0         14.8         10,021.8         1,429.0         14.3         9,331.0         1,228.7         13.2   

 

Notes

1    

Intersegment sales have not been separately disclosed as they are not material.

2    

A reconciliation from profit before interest and taxation (PBIT) to headline PBIT is provided in note 31. PBIT is reconciled to profit before taxation in the consolidated income statement.

 

Other information    Share-based
payments
     Capital
additions 1
    

Depreciation
and

amortisation 2

     Goodwill
impairment &
write-downs
     Share of
results of
associates
     Interests in
associates and
joint ventures
 
     £m      £m      £m      £m      £m      £m  
2012                                                      
Advertising and Media Investment Management      49.3         198.4         97.1         0.7         34.7         566.9   
Consumer Insight      16.6         60.5         55.5                 18.6         102.4   
Public Relations & Public Affairs      4.9         12.4         15.7         31.3         2.3         47.9   
Branding & Identity, Healthcare and Specialist Communications      22.0         66.9         56.4                 13.8         170.0   
       92.8         338.2         224.7         32.0         69.4         887.2   
2011                                                      
Advertising and Media Investment Management      44.5         112.7         94.2                 36.4         549.9   
Consumer Insight      12.7         63.1         49.8                 16.3         101.3   
Public Relations & Public Affairs      3.9         15.4         15.8                 3.2         42.6   
Branding & Identity, Healthcare and Specialist Communications      17.7         62.0         51.7                 10.2         107.5   
       78.8         253.2         211.5                 66.1         801.3   
2010                                                      
Advertising and Media Investment Management      36.8         95.6         94.2         0.3         26.2         487.3   
Consumer Insight      13.7         58.9         49.8                 15.1         122.6   
Public Relations & Public Affairs      3.3         12.9         14.1         2.0         4.1         58.7   
Branding & Identity, Healthcare and Specialist Communications      16.6         50.1         52.2         7.7         9.8         123.5   
       70.4         217.5         210.3         10.0         55.2         792.1   

 

Notes

 

1  

Capital additions include purchases of property, plant and equipment and other intangible assets (including capitalised computer software).

2  

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment and amortisation of other intangible assets.

 

F-13


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

2. Segment information (continued)

 

 

     Assets           Liabilities  
Balance sheet    Segment
assets
     Unallocated
corporate
assets 1
    

Consolidated
total

assets

          Segment
liabilities
    Unallocated
corporate
liabilities 1
    Consolidated
total
liabilities
 
     £m      £m      £m           £m     £m     £m  
2012                                                         
Advertising and Media Investment Management      12,013.9                                (9,152.7                
Consumer Insight      3,371.4                                (1,004.0                
Public Relations & Public Affairs      1,724.2                                (370.8                
Branding & Identity, Healthcare and Specialist Communications      5,607.4                                (1,364.5                
       22,716.9         2,160.7         24,877.6              (11,892.0     (5,925.0     (17,817.0
2011                                                         
Advertising and Media Investment Management      12,075.9                                (9,331.8                
Consumer Insight      3,525.3                                (1,058.2                
Public Relations & Public Affairs      1,825.0                                (411.4                
Branding & Identity, Healthcare and Specialist Communications      5,147.6                                (1,353.5                
       22,573.8         2,121.1         24,694.9              (12,154.9     (5,645.7     (17,800.6
2010                                                         
Advertising and Media Investment Management      11,795.7                                (9,553.6                
Consumer Insight      3,691.2                                (1,143.9                
Public Relations & Public Affairs      1,699.6                                (388.4                
Branding & Identity, Healthcare and Specialist Communications      5,031.4                                (1,409.4                
       22,217.9         2,127.2         24,345.1              (12,495.3     (5,201.9     (17,697.2

 

Note

1    

Included in unallocated corporate assets and liabilities are corporate income tax, deferred tax and net interest-bearing debt.

 

F-14


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

2. Segment information (continued)

 

 

Contributions by geographical area were as follows:

 

       

2012

£m

     

2011

£m

      2010
£m
Revenue 1                        
North America 4       3,546.5       3,388.2       3,299.8
UK       1,275.2       1,183.5       1,087.6
Western Continental Europe 5       2,439.2       2,505.1       2,325.3

Asia Pacific, Latin America,

Africa & Middle East and

Central & Eastern Europe

      3,112.2       2,945.0       2,618.3
        10,373.1       10,021.8       9,331.0
    Margin       Margin       Margin    
Headline PBIT 2                        
North America 4   16.3%   578.6   15.5%   525.6   14.7%   484.6
UK   13.6%   173.3   14.0%   165.3   13.6%   147.9
Western Continental Europe 5   10.4%   252.9   11.3%   284.0   9.5%   221.6

Asia Pacific, Latin America,

Africa & Middle East and

Central & Eastern Europe

  16.9%   526.2   15.4%   454.1   14.3%   374.6
    14.8%   1,531.0   14.3%   1,429.0   13.2%   1,228.7
Non-current assets 3                        
North America 4       5,131.9       4,960.4        
UK       1,766.7       1,728.1        
Western Continental Europe 5       3,590.3       3,681.8        
Asia Pacific, Latin America, Africa &
Middle East and Central & Eastern
Europe
      2,731.1       2,765.0        
        13,220.0       13,135.3        

Notes

1    

Intersegment sales have not been separately disclosed as they are not material.

2    

See note 31 for a reconciliation of headline PBIT to PBIT.

3    

Non-current assets excluding financial instruments and deferred tax.

4    

North America includes the US with revenue of £3,309.4 million (2011: £3,149.9 million, 2010: £3,097.9 million), headline PBIT of £547.8 million (2011: £490.2 million, 2010: £448.7 million) and non-current assets of £4,534.4 million (2011: £4,396.5 million).

5    

Western Continental Europe includes Ireland with revenue of £36.6 million (2011: £40.3 million, 2010: £37.4 million), headline PBIT of £0.7 million (2011: £1.1 million, 2010: £2.0 million) and non-current assets of £50.4 million (2011: £52.4 million).

 


3. Operating costs

 

     2012
£m
   2011
£m
   2010
£m
Staff costs (note 5)    6,106.1    5,872.5    5,438.7
Establishment costs    690.6    674.1    659.2
Other operating costs (net)    1,477.0    1,499.7    1,489.6
Total operating costs    8,273.7    8,046.3    7,587.5
Operating costs include:               
Goodwill impairment (note 12)    32.0       10.0
Investment write-downs    19.6    32.8    37.5
Gain on sale of freehold property in New York    (71.4)      
Cost of changes to corporate structure    4.1      
Restructuring costs    93.4      
Amortisation and impairment of acquired intangible assets
(note 12)
   171.9    172.0    170.5
Amortisation of other intangible assets (note 12)    33.7    25.7    25.4
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment    184.2    178.7    178.3
Losses/(gains) on sale of property, plant and equipment    0.7    (0.9)    0.7
Gains on disposal of investments    (26.8)    (0.4)    (4.1)
Gains on remeasurement of equity interest on acquisition
of controlling interest
   (5.3)    (31.6)    (13.7)
Net foreign exchange losses    7.7    1.1    8.0
Operating lease rentals:               
Land and buildings    464.6    459.6    449.9
Sublease income    (23.0)    (29.1)    (32.8)
     441.6    430.5    417.1
Plant and machinery    21.9    23.0    24.8
     463.5    453.5    441.9

 

3. Operating costs (continued)

 

 

In 2012, operating profit includes credits totalling £19.8 million (2011: £14.0 million, 2010: £16.5 million) relating to the release of excess provisions and other balances established in respect of acquisitions completed prior to 2011. Further details of the Group’s approach to acquisition reserves, as required by IFRS 3 Business Combinations, are given in note 28.

 

Investment write-downs of £19.6 million (2011: £32.8 million) relate to certain non-core minority investments in the US and Continental Europe where forecast financial performance and/or liquidity issues indicate a permanent decline in the recoverability of the Group’s investment.

 

Restructuring costs of £93.4 million include £62.9 million of severance costs arising from a structural reassessment of certain of the Group’s operations, primarily in Western Continental Europe; and £30.5 million of other costs, primarily accelerated depreciation of IT assets in the US and Europe, arising from an overhaul of its centralised IT infrastructure.

 

All of the operating costs of the Group are related to administrative expenses.

 

Auditors’ remuneration:


     2012
£m
     2011
£m
     2010
£m
 
Fees payable to the Company’s auditors for the audit of the Company’s annual accounts      1.4         1.4         1.4   
The audit of the Company’s subsidiaries pursuant to legislation      14.6         15.3         14.8   
       16.0         16.7         16.2   
Other services pursuant to legislation      3.1         3.1         3.1   
Fees payable to the auditors pursuant to legislation      19.1         19.8         19.3   
Tax advisory services      2.5         2.3         2.7   
Tax compliance services      1.0         1.1         1.2   
       3.5         3.4         3.9   
Corporate finance services      0.5         0.5         0.2   
Other services 1      3.9         4.7         5.1   
Total non-audit fees      7.9         8.6         9.2   
Total fees      27.0         28.4         28.5   

Note

1  

Other services include audits for earnout purposes and services for expatriate employees.

 

Minimum committed annual rentals

Amounts payable in 2013 under leases will be as follows:

 

     Plant and machinery

     Land and buildings

 
     2013
£m
     2012
£m
     2011
£m
     2013
£m
     2012
£m
     2011
£m
 
In respect of operating leases which expire:                                                      
– within one year      4.1         5.5         4.8         34.8         27.4         32.7   
– within two to five years      13.0         13.2         14.8         166.1         190.7         163.4   
– after five years      0.2         0.5         0.2         145.4         143.6         159.7   
       17.3         19.2         19.8         346.3         361.7         355.8   

 

Future minimum annual amounts payable under all lease commitments in existence at 31 December 2012 are as follows:

 

     Minimum
rental
payments
£m
     Less
sub-
let
rentals
£m
   

Net
payment

£m

 
Year ending 31 December                          
2013      363.6         (7.0     356.6   
2014      310.9         (4.3     306.6   
2015      277.9         (3.3     274.6   
2016      227.4         (1.7     225.7   
2017      179.8         (0.7     179.1   
Later years      829.0         (0.4     828.6   
       2,188.6         (17.4     2,171.2   

 

F-15


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

 


4. Share of results of associates

 

Share of results of associates include:

 

     2012
£m
    2011
£m
    2010
£m
 
Share of profit before interest and taxation      105.1        99.9        86.0   
Share of exceptional (losses)/gains      (3.0     2.1        (0.3
Share of interest and non-controlling interests      (1.6     (2.5     (2.7
Share of taxation      (31.1     (33.4     (27.8
       69.4        66.1        55.2   

 


5. Our people

 

Our staff numbers averaged 114,490 for the year ended 31 December 2012 against 109,971 in 2011 and 101,387 in 2010, including acquisitions. Their geographical distribution was as follows:

 

     2012      2011      2010  
North America      27,782         27,540         25,546   
UK      11,413         10,761         9,620   
Western Continental Europe      23,322         22,298         21,154   
Asia Pacific, Latin America, Africa & Middle East and Central & Eastern Europe      51,973         49,372         45,067   
       114,490         109,971         101,387   

 

Their operating sector distribution was as follows:

 

    2012     2011     2010  
Advertising and Media Investment Management     48,662        47,252        42,424   
Consumer Insight     28,989        29,204        28,167   
Public Relations & Public Affairs     8,437        7,869        7,364   
Branding & Identity, Healthcare and Specialist Communications     28,402        25,646        23,432   
      114,490        109,971        101,387   

 

At the end of 2012 staff numbers were 115,711 (2011: 113,615, 2010: 104,052). Including all employees of associated undertakings, this figure was approximately 165,000 at 31 December 2012 (2011: 158,000, 2010: 146,000).

 

Staff costs include:

 

     2012
£m
    2011
£m
    2010
£m
 
Wages and salaries      4,289.7        4,079.4        3,696.8   
Cash-based incentive plans      198.1        259.4        271.9   
Share-based incentive plans (note 22)      92.8        78.8        70.4   
Social security costs      524.7        499.3        450.1   
Pension costs (note 23)      148.7        135.4        120.6   
Severance      50.8        53.9        74.3   
Other staff costs 1      801.3        766.3        754.6   
       6,106.1        5,872.5        5,438.7   
Staff cost to revenue ratio      58.9     58.6     58.3

Note

1  

Freelance and temporary staff costs are included in other staff costs.

 

Included above are charges of £7.9 million (2011: £7.3 million, 2010: £7.7 million) for share-based incentive plans in respect of key management personnel (who comprise the directors of the Group). Total compensation received by key management personnel in respect of 2012 was £27.9 million (2011: £17.7 million, 2010: £17.6 million) of which £0.8 million (2011: £0.8 million, 2010: £0.7 million) were pension contributions. The value of the matching LEAP awards, which vest in the year following the end of the five-year performance period, is included in total compensation in the year the relevant five-year performance period ends.

 


6. Finance income, finance costs and revaluation of financial instruments

 

Finance income includes:

 

     2012
£m
     2011
£m
     2010
£m
 
Expected return on pension plan assets (note 23)      30.0         32.6         30.6   
Income from available for sale investments      1.2         0.6         9.3   
Interest income      54.7         64.1         41.8   
       85.9         97.3         81.7   

 

Finance costs include:

 

     2012
£m
     2011
£m
     2010
£m
 
Interest on pension plan liabilities (note 23)      41.3         43.8         45.9   
Interest on other long-term employee benefits      1.7         1.8         1.9   
Interest payable and similar charges 1      256.8         251.6         229.0   
       299.8         297.2         276.8   

 

Revaluation of financial instruments 2 include:

 

     2012
£m
    2011
£m
    2010
£m
 
Movements in fair value of treasury instruments      (14.8     (12.7     21.8   
Revaluation of put options over non-controlling interests      (5.1     (30.9     (3.6
Revaluation of payments due to vendors (earnout agreements)      15.2        (6.4       
       (4.7     (50.0     18.2   

 

Notes

1    

Interest payable and similar charges are payable on bank overdrafts, bonds and bank loans held at amortised cost.

2    

Financial instruments are held at fair value through profit and loss.

 

The majority of the Group’s long-term debt is represented by $2,581 million of US dollar bonds at an average interest rate of 5.49%, 1,850 million of Eurobonds at an average interest rate of 5.52% and £1,050 million of sterling bonds including convertible bonds at an average interest rate of 5.96%.

 

Average borrowings under the Revolving Credit Facilities (note 10) amounted to the equivalent of $186 million at an average interest rate of 1.72% inclusive of margin.

 

Average borrowings under the US Commercial Paper Program (note 10) amounted to $239 million at an average interest rate of 0.50% inclusive of margin.

 


7. Taxation

 

In 2012, the tax rate on profit before taxation was 18.1% (2011: 9.1%).

 

In 2011, the tax rate was lower, primarily due to the resolution of historic tax liabilities. The release of prior year corporate tax provisions resulted from the resolution of a number of open matters.

 

Cash taxes paid in the year were £257.0 million (2011: £247.9 million).

 

F-16


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

7. Taxation (continued)

 

 

The tax charge is based on the profit for the year and comprises:

 

     2012
£m
    2011
£m
    2010
£m
 
Corporation tax                         
Current year      335.5        310.3        276.2   
Prior years      (41.7     (47.7     (1.0
Release of prior year provisions             (106.1       
Tax credit relating to restructuring costs      (15.7              
       278.1        156.5        275.2   
Deferred tax                         
Current year      (14.4     4.5        (21.4
Net credit in relation to the amortisation of acquired intangible assets and other goodwill items      (86.0     (72.4     (37.5
Deferred tax on gain on sale of freehold property in New York      20.0                 
       (80.4     (67.9     (58.9
Prior years      (0.5     3.3        (26.0
       (80.9     (64.6     (84.9
Tax charge      197.2        91.9        190.3   

 

The tax charge for the year can be reconciled to profit before taxation in the consolidated income statement as follows:

 

     2012
£m
    2011
£m
    2010
£m
 
Profit before taxation      1,091.9        1,008.4        851.3   
Tax at the corporation tax rate of 25% 1      273.0        252.1        212.8   
Tax effect of share of results of associates      (17.4     (16.5     (13.8
Tax effect of items that are not deductible/ (taxable)      (7.5     13.0        (7.8
Effect of different tax rates of subsidiaries operating in other jurisdictions      13.9        9.2        15.4   
Origination and reversal of temporary differences not previously recognised      (39.2     20.2        12.0   
Tax losses not utilised in the year      45.4        49.3        46.2   
Tax effect of utilisation of tax losses not previously recognised      (18.6     (41.4     (47.5
Tax effect of recognition of tax losses not previously recognised      (10.2     (43.5       
Release of prior year provisions in relation to acquired businesses      (20.6     (21.4     (19.7
Other prior year adjustments      (21.6     (23.0     (7.3
Release of prior year provisions             (106.1       
Tax charge      197.2        91.9        190.3   
Effective tax rate on profit before tax      18.1     9.1     22.4

 

Note

1  

Irish non-trading corporation tax rate.

 


8. Ordinary dividends

 

Amounts recognised as distributions to equity holders in the year:

 

     2012     2011     2010     2012      2011      2010  
Per share    Pence per share     £m      £m      £m  
2011 Second interim dividend      17.14     11.82     10.28     212.8         147.3         126.6   
2012 First interim dividend      8.80     7.46     5.97     109.4         92.2         73.8   
       25.94     19.28     16.25     322.2         239.5         200.4   

 

8. Ordinary dividends (continued)

 

 

The Company operated a scrip dividend scheme in 2012 which enabled share owners to receive new fully paid ordinary shares in the Company instead of cash dividends. Included in the £322.2 million dividends recognised in 2012 are cash dividends of £306.6 million and scrip dividends of £15.6 million.

 

Proposed final dividend for the year ended 31 December 2012:

 

     2012     2011     2010  
Per share    Pence per share  
2012 Final dividend 1      19.71     17.14     11.82

 

Note

1    

Second interim dividend in 2011 and 2010.

 

The payment of dividends will not have any tax consequences for the Group.

 


9. Earnings per share

 

Basic EPS

 

The calculation of basic EPS is as follows:

 

     2012     2011     2010  
Earnings 1 (£m)      822.7        840.1        586.0   
Average shares used in basic EPS calculation (m)      1,243.4        1,242.7        1,233.1   
EPS      66.2     67.6     47.5

 

Note

1  

Earnings is equivalent to profit for the year attributable to equity holders of the parent.

 

Diluted EPS

 

The calculation of diluted EPS is as follows:

 

     2012     2011     2010  
Diluted earnings (£m)      848.8        866.2        614.3   
Average shares used in diluted EPS calculation (m)      1,352.6        1,342.2        1,339.0   
Diluted EPS      62.8     64.5     45.9

 

Diluted EPS has been calculated based on the diluted earnings amounts above. On 19 May 2009 the Group issued £450 million 5.75% convertible bonds due May 2014. For the year ended 31 December 2012 these convertible bonds were dilutive and earnings were consequently increased by £26.1 million (2011: £26.1 million, 2010: £28.3 million) for the purpose of the calculation of diluted earnings. In addition, at 31 December 2012, options to purchase 6.3 million ordinary shares (2011: 4.0 million, 2010: 11.6 million) were outstanding, but were excluded from the computation of diluted earnings per share because the exercise prices of these options were greater than the average market price of the Group’s shares and, therefore, their inclusion would have been accretive.

 

A reconciliation between the shares used in calculating basic and diluted EPS is as follows:

 

     2012
m
     2011
m
     2010
m
 
Average shares used in basic EPS calculation      1,243.4         1,242.7         1,233.1   
Dilutive share options outstanding      4.9         4.5         6.7   
Other potentially issuable shares      27.8         18.5         22.7   
£450 million 5.75% convertible bonds      76.5         76.5         76.5   
Shares used in diluted EPS calculation      1,352.6         1,342.2         1,339.0   

 

At 31 December 2012 there were 1,265,407,107 ordinary shares in issue.

 

F-17


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 


10. Sources of finance

 

The following table summarises the equity and debt financing of the Group, and changes during the year:

 

           Shares                Debt  
     2012
£m
    2011
£m
         2012
£m
    2011
£m
 
Analysis of changes in financing                                      
Beginning of year      232.3        180.9             3,893.0        3,598.2   
Ordinary shares issued      56.0        31.0                      
Share cancellations      (0.7     (0.7                   
Treasury share cancellations      (0.6                          
Share issue costs paid      (0.2                          
Scrip dividend      15.6        21.1                      
Net increase in drawings on bank loans, corporate bonds and convertible bonds                         380.5        301.4   
Net amortisation of financing costs included in debt                         6.8        7.6   
Debt acquired                         20.0        17.5   
Other movements                         (18.2     (2.7
Exchange adjustments                         (101.6     (29.0
End of year      302.4        232.3             4,180.5        3,893.0   

 

Note

The above table excludes bank overdrafts which fall within cash and cash equivalents for the purposes of the consolidated cash flow statement.

 

Shares

At 31 December 2012, the Company’s share base was entirely composed of ordinary equity share capital and share premium of £302.4 million (2011: £232.3 million), further details of which are disclosed in note 26.

 

Debt

US$ bonds The Group has in issue $369 million of 5.875% bonds due June 2014, $600 million of 8% bonds due September 2014 and $812 million of 4.75% bonds due November 2021. In September 2012, the Group issued $500 million of 3.625% bonds due September 2022 and $300 million of 5.125% bonds due September 2042.

 

Eurobonds The Group has in issue 600 million of 4.375% bonds due December 2013, 500 million of 5.25% bonds due January 2015 and 750 million of 6.625% bonds due May 2016.

 

Sterling bonds The Group has in issue £400 million of 6% bonds due April 2017 and £200 million of 6.375% bonds due November 2020.

 

Revolving Credit Facilities The Group has a five-year Revolving Credit Facility of $1.05 billion and £375 million due November 2016. The Group’s borrowing under these facilities, which are drawn down predominantly in US dollars and pounds sterling, averaged the equivalent of $186 million in 2012. The Group had available undrawn committed credit facilities of £1,021.5 million at December 2012 (2011: £972.3 million).

 

Borrowings under the Revolving Credit Facilities are governed by certain financial covenants based on the results and financial position of the Group.

 

US Commercial Paper Program

The Group operates a commercial paper program using the Revolving Credit Facility as a backstop. The average commercial paper outstanding during the year was $239.3 million. There was no US Commercial Paper outstanding at 31 December 2012.

 

Convertible bonds

The Group has in issue £450 million of 5.75% convertible bonds due May 2014. At the option of the holder, the bonds are convertible into 76,530,612 WPP ordinary shares at an initial share price of £5.88 per share.

 

The convertible bonds have a nominal value of £450 million at 31 December 2012. In accordance with IAS 39, these bonds have been split between a liability component and an equity component by initially valuing the liability component at fair value based on the present value of future cash flows and then holding it at amortised cost. This fair value has been calculated assuming redemption in May 2014 and using a discount rate of 8.25%, based on the estimated rate of interest that would have applied to a comparable bond issued at that time without the convertible option. The equity component represents the fair value, on initial recognition, of the embedded option to convert the liability into equity of the Group.

 

10. Sources of finance (continued)

 

 

The liability element is £435.0 million and the equity component is £44.5 million as at 31 December 2012.

 

The Group estimates that the fair value of the liability component of the convertible bonds at 31 December 2012 was approximately £453.8 million. This fair value has been calculated by discounting the future cash flows at the market rate.

 

The following table is an analysis of future anticipated cash flows in relation to the Group’s debt, on an undiscounted basis which, therefore, differs from the fair value and carrying value:

 

     2012
£m
    2011
£m
 
Within one year      (721.4     (240.8
Between one and two years      (1,244.8     (722.2
Between two and three years      (529.6     (1,259.3
Between three and four years      (707.4     (524.7
Between four and five years      (465.1     (787.1
Over five years      (1,610.3     (1,304.1
Debt financing under the Revolving Credit Facility and in relation to unsecured loan notes      (5,278.6     (4,838.2
Short-term overdrafts – within one year      (586.0     (518.4
Future anticipated cash flows      (5,864.6     (5,356.6
Effect of discounting/financing rates      1,098.1        945.2   
Debt financing      (4,766.5     (4,411.4

 

Analysis of fixed and floating rate debt by currency including the effect of interest rate and cross-currency swaps:

 

2012

Currency

   £m    

Fixed

rate 1

     Floating
basis
    

Period

(months) 1

 
$    – fixed      1,913.0        5.53%         n/a         92   
     – floating      444.0        n/a         LIBOR         n/a   
£    – fixed      550.0        6.07%         n/a         58   
     – floating      200.0        n/a         LIBOR         n/a   
   – fixed      690.7        6.50%         n/a         38   
     – floating      344.2        n/a         EURIBOR         n/a   
¥    – fixed      64.0        2.07%         n/a         11   
Other           (25.4     n/a         n/a         n/a   
            4,180.5                             

Note

1    

Weighted average. These rates do not include the effect of gains on interest rate swap terminations that are written to income over the life of the original instrument. At 31 December 2012 the amount still to be written to income was £0.7 million (2011: £1.2 million) in respect of US dollar swap terminations, to be written to income evenly until June 2014.

 

2011

Currency

   £m     Fixed
rate 1
     Floating
basis
     Period
(months) 1
 
$    – fixed      1,494.1        6.00%         n/a         63   
     – floating      477.9        n/a         LIBOR         n/a   
£    – fixed      550.0        6.07%         n/a         70   
     – floating      200.0        n/a         LIBOR         n/a   
   – fixed      710.3        6.50%         n/a         50   
     – floating      354.0        n/a         EURIBOR         n/a   
¥    – fixed      75.4        2.07%         n/a         24   
$C 2    – floating      79.7        n/a         LIBOR         n/a   
Other           (48.4     n/a         n/a         n/a   
            3,893.0                             

Notes

1  

Weighted average. These rates do not include the effect of gains on interest rate swap terminations that are written to income over the life of the original instrument.

2  

Represents Canadian dollars.

 

F-18


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

10. Sources of finance (continued)

 

 

The following table is an analysis of future anticipated cash flows in relation to the Group’s financial derivatives, which include interest rate swaps, cash flow hedges and other foreign exchange swaps:

 

     Financial liabilities           Financial assets  
2012    Payable
£m
     Receivable
£m
          Payable
£m
    

Receivable

£m

 
Within one year      333.0         262.7              773.9         865.8   
Between one and two years      339.9         280.8              753.5         839.8   
Between two and three years      454.1         352.5              525.9         608.7   
Between three and four years      1.1         0.4              2.4         12.4   
Between four and five years      26.1         25.4              226.7         237.4   
Over five years                                     
       1,154.2         921.8              2,282.4         2,564.1   

 

     Financial liabilities           Financial assets  
2011    Payable
£m
     Receivable
£m
          Payable
£m
    

Receivable

£m

 
Within one year      60.5         52.3              167.5         214.3   
Between one and two years      328.1         233.3              771.7         869.8   
Between two and three years      356.5         284.9              785.1         867.6   
Between three and four years      478.5         353.2              537.4         633.9   
Between four and five years      1.1         0.6              4.2         37.4   
Over five years      26.1         25.5              227.3         237.4   
       1,250.8         949.8              2,493.2         2,860.4   

 


11. Analysis of cash flows

 

The following tables analyse the items included within the main cash flow headings on page F-10.

 

Net cash from operating activities:

 

    

2012

£m

   

2011

£m

   

2010

£m

 
Profit for the year      894.7        916.5        661.0   
Taxation      197.2        91.9        190.3   
Revaluation of financial instruments      4.7        50.0        (18.2
Finance costs      299.8        297.2        276.8   
Finance income      (85.9     (97.3     (81.7
Share of results of associates      (69.4     (66.1     (55.2
Adjustments for:                         

Non-cash share-based incentive plans

(including share options)

     92.8        78.8        70.4   
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment      191.0        185.8        184.9   
Impairment of goodwill      32.0               10.0   
Amortisation and impairment of acquired intangible assets      171.9        172.0        170.5   
Amortisation of other intangible assets      33.7        25.7        25.4   
Investment write-downs      19.6        32.8        37.5   
Gains on disposal of investments      (26.8     (0.4     (4.1
Gains on remeasurement of equity interest on acquisition of controlling interest      (5.3     (31.6     (13.7
Gain on sale of freehold property in New York      (71.4              
Losses/(gains) on sale of property, plant and equipment      0.7        (0.9     0.7   
(Increase)/decrease in inventories and work in progress      (17.6     32.7        (46.3
Increase in receivables      (436.4     (1.8     (850.8
Increase/(decrease) in payables – short term      105.3        (618.5     1,135.7   
Increase in payables – long term      4.1        19.2        10.3   
Decrease in provisions      (43.6     (52.5     (23.4
Corporation and overseas tax paid      (257.0     (247.9     (207.4
Interest and similar charges paid      (228.3     (241.4     (219.7
Interest received      56.6        63.2        50.7   
Investment income      1.2        0.6        4.2   
Dividends from associates      44.7        57.2        53.3   
Net cash inflow from operating activities      908.3        665.2        1,361.2   

 

F-19


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

11. Analysis of cash flows (continued)

 

 

Acquisitions and disposals:

 

    2012
£m
    2011
£m
    2010
£m
 
Initial cash consideration     (462.0     (352.3     (138.6
Cash and cash equivalents acquired (net)     46.6        98.8        57.0   
Earnout payments     (85.7     (150.0     (113.3
Loan note redemptions     (1.0     (0.8     (5.1
Purchase of other investments (including associates)     (111.4     (68.1     (23.8
Proceeds on disposal of investments     47.0        2.6        23.7   
Acquisitions and disposals     (566.5     (469.8     (200.1
Cash consideration for non-controlling interests     (20.1     (62.6     (15.1
Net cash outflow     (586.6     (532.4     (215.2
Share repurchases and buy-backs:                  
    2012
£m
    2011
£m
    2010
£m
 
Purchase of own shares by ESOP Trusts     (78.8     (106.5     (46.4
Share cancellations (excluding brokerage fees)     (55.1     (45.9       
Shares purchased into treasury     (0.6     (29.8       
Net cash outflow     (134.5     (182.2     (46.4
Net increase in borrowings:                  
    2012
£m
    2011
£m
    2010
£m
 
Proceeds from issue of $500 million bonds     312.1        319.5          
Proceeds from issue of $300 million bonds     187.3                 
Repayment of debt acquired     (20.0     (18.1       
(Decrease)/increase in drawings on bank loans     (79.7            19.8   
Repayment of $30 million TNS private placements     (19.2              
Net cash inflow     380.5        301.4        19.8   
Cash and cash equivalents:                        
    2012
£m
    2011
£m
    2010
£m
 
Cash at bank and in hand     1,721.4        1,833.5        1,877.1   
Short-term bank deposits     223.9        113.1        88.1   
Overdrafts 1     (586.0     (518.4     (255.4
Cash and cash equivalents at end of year     1,359.3        1,428.2        1,709.8   

 

Note

1    

Bank overdrafts are included in cash and cash equivalents because they form an integral part of the Group’s cash management.

 

The Group considers that the carrying amount of cash and cash equivalents approximates their fair value.

 


12. Intangible assets

 

Goodwill

 

The movements in 2012 and 2011 were as follows:

 

     £m  
Cost:         
1 January 2011      9,678.8   
Additions 1      434.6   
Revision of earnout estimates      25.9   
Exchange adjustments      (150.8
31 December 2011      9,988.5   
Additions 1      360.8   
Revision of earnout estimates      8.6   
Exchange adjustments      (315.8
31 December 2012      10,042.1   
Accumulated impairment losses and write-downs:         
1 January 2011      572.5   
Exchange adjustments      (14.8
31 December 2011      557.7   
Impairment losses for the year      32.0   
Exchange adjustments      (4.8
31 December 2012      584.9   
Net book value:         
31 December 2012      9,457.2   
31 December 2011      9,430.8   
1 January 2011      9,106.3   

 

Note

1  

Additions represent goodwill arising on the acquisition of subsidiary undertakings including the effect of any revisions to fair value adjustments that had been determined provisionally at the immediately preceding balance sheet date, as permitted by IFRS 3 Business Combinations. The effect of such revisions was not material in either year presented. Goodwill arising on the acquisition of associate undertakings is shown within interests in associates and joint ventures in note 14.

 

Cash-generating units with significant goodwill as at 31 December 2012 and 2011 are:

 

     2012
£m
     2011
£m
 
GroupM      1,964.4         2,037.7   
Kantar      1,764.0         1,791.2   
Wunderman      1,096.9         1,119.9   
Y&R Advertising      984.5         1,025.5   
Burson-Marsteller      480.4         489.8   
Other      3,167.0         2,966.7   
Total goodwill      9,457.2         9,430.8   

 

Other goodwill represents goodwill on a large number of cash-generating units, none of which is individually significant in comparison to the total carrying value of goodwill.

 

F-20


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

12. Intangible assets (continued)

 

 

Other intangible assets

 

The movements in 2012 and 2011 were as follows:

 

     Brands
with an
indefinite
useful life
£m
   

Acquired
intangibles

£m

    Other
£m
   

Total

£m

 

Cost:

                                

1 January 2011

     1,053.7        1,332.5        229.9        2,616.1   

Additions

                   37.1        37.1   

Disposals

                   (11.7     (11.7

New acquisitions

            117.6        2.0        119.6   

Other movements 1

            21.2        1.5        22.7   

Exchange adjustments

     (17.3     (7.7     (5.0     (30.0

31 December 2011

     1,036.4        1,463.6        253.8        2,753.8   

Additions

                   39.8        39.8   

Disposals

                   (19.0     (19.0

New acquisitions

            185.2        1.3        186.5   

Other movements 1

            12.9        0.3        13.2   

Exchange adjustments

     (43.3     (34.1     (11.9     (89.3

31 December 2012

     993.1        1,627.6        264.3        2,885.0   

Amortisation and impairment:

                                

1 January 2011

            550.8        160.8        711.6   

Charge for the year

            172.0        25.7        197.7   

Disposals

                   (11.3     (11.3

Other movements

            (2.6     (1.0     (3.6

Exchange adjustments

            2.0        (2.5     (0.5

31 December 2011

            722.2        171.7        893.9   

Charge for the year

            171.9        33.7        205.6   

Disposals

                   (18.4     (18.4

Other movements

            (2.3     (2.8     (5.1

Exchange adjustments

            (10.2     (8.2     (18.4

31 December 2012

            881.6        176.0        1,057.6   

Net book value:

                                

31 December 2012

     993.1        746.0        88.3        1,827.4   

31 December 2011

     1,036.4        741.4        82.1        1,859.9   

1 January 2011

     1,053.7        781.7        69.1        1,904.5   

 

Note

1    

Other movements in acquired intangibles include revisions to fair value adjustments arising on the acquisition of subsidiary undertakings that had been determined provisionally at the immediately preceding balance sheet date, as permitted by IFRS 3 Business Combinations.

 

Brands with an indefinite life are carried at historical cost in accordance with the Group’s accounting policy for intangible assets. The carrying values of the separately identifiable brands are not individually significant in comparison with the total carrying value of brands with an indefinite useful life.

 

 

12. Intangible assets (continued)

 

Acquired intangible assets at net book value at 31 December 2012 include brand names of £408.8 million (2011: £371.9 million), customer-related intangibles of £287.7 million (2011: £294.1 million), and other assets (including proprietary tools) of £49.5 million (2011: £75.4 million).

 

In accordance with the Group’s accounting policy, the carrying values of goodwill and intangible assets with indefinite useful lives are reviewed for impairment annually or more frequently if events or changes in circumstances indicate that the asset might be impaired.

 

The carrying values of brands with an indefinite useful life are assessed for impairment purposes by using the royalty and loyalty methods of valuation, both of which utilise the net present value of future cash flows associated with the brands.

 

In years prior to 2012, the goodwill impairment review was initially undertaken as at 30 June and then updated as at 31 December which was the annual testing date. For 2012, the annual testing date was changed to 30 September to better align the impairment testing procedures with the financial planning process. This change did not accelerate, delay, avoid, or cause a goodwill impairment charge. The review assessed whether the carrying value of goodwill was supported by the net present value of future cash flows, using a pre-tax discount rate of 9.5% (2011: 9.5%) and management forecasts for a projection period of up to five years, followed by an assumed annual long-term growth rate of 3.0% (2011: 3.0%) and no assumed improvement in operating margin. Management have made the judgement that this long-term growth rate does not exceed the long-term average growth rate for the industry.

 

Goodwill impairment charges of £32.0 million and £nil were recorded in the years ended 31 December 2012 and 2011, respectively. The impairment charge relates to certain underperforming businesses in the Group. In certain markets, the impact of local economic conditions and trading circumstances on these businesses was sufficiently severe to indicate impairment to the carrying value of goodwill.

 

Under IFRS, an impairment charge is required for both goodwill and other indefinite-lived assets when the carrying amount exceeds the ‘recoverable amount’, defined as the higher of fair value less costs to sell and value in use.

 

Our approach in determining the recoverable amount utilises a discounted cash flow methodology, which necessarily involves making numerous estimates and assumptions regarding revenue growth, operating margins, appropriate discount rates and working capital requirements. These estimates will likely differ from future actual results of operations and cash flows, and it is possible that these differences could be material. In addition, judgements are applied in determining the level of cash-generating unit identified for impairment testing and the criteria used to determine which assets should be aggregated. A difference in testing levels could affect whether an impairment is recorded and the extent of impairment loss. Changes in our business activities or structure may also result in changes to the level of testing in future periods. Further, future events could cause the Group to conclude that impairment indicators exist and that the asset values associated with a given operation have become impaired. Any resulting impairment loss could have a material impact on the Group’s financial condition and results of operations.

 

Historically our impairment losses have resulted from a specific event, condition or circumstance in one of our companies, such as the loss of a significant client. As a result, changes in the assumptions used in our impairment model have not had a significant effect on the impairment charges recognised and a reasonably possible change in assumptions would not lead to a significant impairment. The carrying value of goodwill and other intangible assets will continue to be reviewed at least annually for impairment and adjusted to the recoverable amount if required.

 

F-21


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 


13. Property, plant and equipment

 

The movements in 2012 and 2011 were as follows:

 

    Land
£m
    Freehold
buildings
£m
    Leasehold
buildings
£m
    Fixtures,
fittings
and
equipment
£m
    Computer
equipment
£m
    Total
£m
 

Cost:

                                               

1 January 2011

    12.4        73.4        672.7        376.0        581.1        1,715.6   

Additions

           0.6        76.2        43.1        96.2        216.1   

New acquisitions

                  2.5        4.6        6.9        14.0   

Disposals

           (0.9     (33.2     (41.0     (57.8     (132.9
Exchange adjustments                   (4.3     (13.0     (14.2     (31.5

31 December 2011

    12.4        73.1        713.9        369.7        612.2        1,781.3   

Additions

    29.7        71.2        79.6        34.6        83.3        298.4   

New acquisitions

                  2.3        1.8        4.4        8.5   

Disposals

    (4.0     (26.3     (79.8     (54.0     (81.8     (245.9
Exchange adjustments     (1.0     (0.4     (29.7     (18.7     (25.5     (75.3

31 December 2012

    37.1        117.6        686.3        333.4        592.6        1,767.0   

Depreciation:

                                               

1 January 2011

           28.0        311.7        228.3        439.2        1,007.2   

Charge for the year

           3.2        58.3        42.9        81.4        185.8   

Disposals

           (0.3     (24.9     (37.7     (55.0     (117.9
Exchange adjustments            (1.4     (2.0     (7.9     (10.8     (22.1

31 December 2011

           29.5        343.1        225.6        454.8        1,053.0   

Charge for the year

           3.2        62.3        40.6        84.9        191.0   

Disposals

           (14.3     (56.5     (47.6     (78.0     (196.4
Exchange adjustments            (0.6     (14.3     (13.2     (20.8     (48.9

31 December 2012

           17.8        334.6        205.4        440.9        998.7   

Net book value:

                                               

31 December 2012

    37.1        99.8        351.7        128.0        151.7        768.3   

31 December 2011

    12.4        43.6        370.8        144.1        157.4        728.3   

1 January 2011

    12.4        45.4        361.0        147.7        141.9        708.4   

 

At the end of the year, capital commitments contracted, but not provided for in respect of property, plant and equipment were £47.0 million (2011: £127.4 million). The decrease is due to fewer significant property development projects in North America.

 


14. Interests in associates, joint ventures and other investments

 

The movements in 2012 and 2011 were as follows:

 

     Net
assets of
associates
and joint
ventures
£m
   

Goodwill
and other
intangibles
of associates
and joint
ventures

£m

    Total
associates
and joint
ventures
£m
    Other
investments
£m
 

1 January 2011

     372.8        419.3        792.1        173.7   

Additions

     39.3               39.3        29.3   
Goodwill arising on acquisition of new associates             3.4        3.4          
Share of results of associate undertakings (note 4)      66.1               66.1          
Dividends and other movements      (67.3     18.3        (49.0       
Exchange adjustments      (0.7     (4.8     (5.5       
Reclassification (to)/from subsidiaries      (16.0     (25.0     (41.0     7.3   
Revaluation of other investments                           11.3   
Amortisation of other intangible assets             (2.1     (2.1       
Write-downs      (2.0            (2.0     (30.8
31 December 2011      392.2        409.1        801.3        190.8   
Additions      32.1               32.1        24.8   
Goodwill arising on acquisition of new associates             54.5        54.5          
Share of results of associate undertakings (note 4)      69.4               69.4          
Dividends and other movements      (49.3     15.8        (33.5       
Exchange adjustments      (28.7     (29.6     (58.3     (6.1
Disposals      (9.6            (9.6     (14.4
Reclassification from subsidiaries      35.2        2.9        38.1          
Revaluation of other investments                           (3.5
Amortisation of other intangible assets             (2.3     (2.3       

Write-downs

     (0.7     (3.8     (4.5     (15.1

31 December 2012

     440.6        446.6        887.2        176.5   

 

The investments included above as ‘other investments’ represent investments in equity securities that present the Group with opportunity for return through dividend income and trading gains. They have no fixed maturity or coupon rate. The fair values of the listed securities are based on quoted market prices. For unlisted securities, where market value is not available, the Group has estimated relevant fair values on the basis of publicly available information from outside sources or on the basis of discounted cash flow models where appropriate.

 

The carrying values of the Group’s associates and joint ventures are reviewed for impairment in accordance with the Group’s accounting policies.

 

F-22


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

14. Interests in associates, joint ventures and other investments (continued)

 

 

The Group’s principal associates and joint ventures at 31 December 2012 included:

 

     %
owned
     Country of
incorporation
 
Asatsu-DK Inc      24.3         Japan   
Barrows Design and Manufacturing (Pty) Limited      35.0         South Africa   
CHI&Partners Limited      49.9         UK   
Chime Communications PLC      21.1         UK   
CTR Market Research Co., Ltd      46.0         China   
CVSC Sofres Media Co Limited      40.0         China   
GIIR Inc      28.8         Korea   
Globant      20.3         Argentina   
High Co SA      34.1         France   
IBOPE Latinoamericana SA      41.8         Brazil   
Scangroup Limited      31.8         Kenya   
Singleton Ogilvy & Mather (Holdings) Pty Limited      33.3         Australia   
STW Communications Group Limited 1      18.6         Australia   
The Jupiter Drawing Room (Proprietary) Limited      49.0         South Africa   
WVI Marketing Communications Group Limited      50.0         Russia   

 

Note

1    

Although the Group holds less than 20% of STW Communications Group Limited, it is considered to be an associate as the Group exercises significant influence by virtue of a position on the Board of Directors.

 

The market value of the Group’s shares in its principal listed associate undertakings at 31 December 2012 was as follows: Asatsu-DK Inc: £150.7 million, Chime Communications PLC: £40.0 million, High Co SA: £15.2 million, GIIR Inc: £18.3 million, Scangroup Limited: £40.6 million, and STW Communications Group Limited: £53.2 million (2011: Asatsu-DK Inc: £175.0 million, Chime Communications PLC: £20.8 million, High Co SA: £16.9 million, GIIR Inc: £22.9 million, Scangroup Limited: £19.2 million, and STW Communications Group Limited: £41.7 million).

 

The carrying value (including goodwill and other intangibles) of these equity interests in the Group’s consolidated balance sheet at 31 December 2012 was as follows: Asatsu-DK Inc: £197.0 million, Chime Communications PLC: £36.8 million, High Co SA: £32.4 million, GIIR Inc: £26.7 million, Scangroup Limited: £21.0 million, and STW Communications Group Limited: £67.8 million (2011: Asatsu-DK Inc: £229.4 million, Chime Communications PLC: £29.4 million, High Co SA: £32.4 million, GIIR Inc: £24.0 million, Scangroup Limited: £20.4 million, and STW Communications Group Limited: £68.3 million).

 

Where the market value of the Group’s listed associates is less than the carrying value, an impairment review is performed utilising the discounted cash flow methodology discussed in note 12.

 

The Group’s investments in its principal associate undertakings are represented by ordinary shares.

 

14. Interests in associates, joint ventures and other investments (continued)

 

 

Summarised financial information

The following tables present a summary of the aggregate financial performance and net asset position of the Group’s associate undertakings and joint ventures. These have been estimated and converted, where appropriate, to an IFRS presentation based on information provided by the relevant companies at 31 December 2012.

 

     2012
£m
     2011
£m
     2010
£m
 
Income statement                           
Revenue      2,268.0         2,127.2         2,142.3   
Operating profit      262.1         293.7         229.9   
Profit before taxation      262.8         316.5         245.1   
Profit for the year      176.5         190.5         179.1   

 


          2012
£m
    2011
£m
 
Balance sheet                      
Assets           4,956.5        4,388.2   
Liabilities           (2,424.0     (2,191.8
Net assets           2,532.5        2,196.4   

 

The application of equity accounting is ordinarily discontinued when the investment is reduced to zero and additional losses are not provided for unless the investor has guaranteed obligations of the investee or is otherwise committed to provide further financial support for the investee.

 

At the end of the year, capital commitments contracted, but not provided for in respect of interests in associates and other investments were £18.8 million (2011: £40.0 million).

 


15. Deferred tax

 

The Group’s deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured at the end of each period in accordance with IAS 12. The recognition of deferred tax assets is determined by reference to the Group’s estimate of recoverability, using models where appropriate to forecast future taxable profits.

 

Deferred tax assets have only been recognised for territories where the Group considers that it is probable there would be sufficient taxable profits for the future deductions to be utilised.

 

Based on available evidence, both positive and negative, we determine whether it is probable that all or a portion of the deferred tax assets will be realised. The main factors that we consider include:

 

– the future earnings potential determined through the use of internal forecasts;

– the cumulative losses in recent years;

– the various jurisdictions in which the potential deferred tax assets arise;

– the history of losses carried forward and other tax assets expiring;

– the timing of future reversal of taxable temporary differences;

– the expiry period associated with the deferred tax assets; and

– the nature of the income that can be used to realise the deferred tax asset.

 

If it is probable that some portion of these assets will not be realised, then no asset is recognised in relation to that portion.

 

If market conditions improve and future results of operations exceed our current expectations, our existing recognised deferred tax assets may be adjusted, resulting in future tax benefits. Alternatively, if market conditions deteriorate further or future results of operations are less than expected, future assessments may result in a determination that some or all of the deferred tax assets are not realisable. As a result, all or a portion of the deferred tax assets may need to be reversed.

 

F-23


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

15. Deferred tax (continued)

 

 

Certain deferred tax assets and liabilities have been offset as they relate to the same tax group. The following is the analysis of the deferred tax balances for financial reporting purposes:

 

     Gross
£m
    Offset
£m
    As
reported
£m
 
2012                         
Deferred tax assets      221.2        (130.0     91.2   
Deferred tax liabilities      (810.3     130.0        (680.3
       (589.1            (589.1
2011                         
Deferred tax assets      151.4        (65.4     86.0   
Deferred tax liabilities      (806.8     65.4        (741.4
       (655.4            (655.4

 

The following are the major gross deferred tax assets recognised by the Group and movements thereon in 2012 and 2011:

 

    Tax
losses
£m
    Retirement
benefit
obligations
£m
    Property,
plant &
equipment
£m
   

Share
based
pay-

ments
£m

   

Other
short-term

temporary
differences
£m

    Total
£m
 
1 January 2011     6.3        13.1        2.0        49.6        66.6        137.6   
Acquisition of subsidiaries     0.7                                    0.7   
Credit/(charge) to income     24.4               0.8        (2.8     3.8        26.2   
Credit/(charge) to other comprehensive income            0.5                      (0.3     0.2   
Charge to equity                          (11.8            (11.8
Exchange adjustments     0.2        (0.1     (0.1     (0.3     (1.2     (1.5
31 December 2011     31.6        13.5        2.7        34.7        68.9        151.4   
Credit/(charge) to income     5.7        3.0        41.2        9.9        (0.2     59.6   
Credit to other comprehensive income            7.7                             7.7   
Credit to equity                          13.3               13.3   
Transfer to corporation tax                                 3.9        3.9   
Exchange adjustments     (1.7     (0.5     (0.2     (2.0     (10.3     (14.7
31 December 2012     35.6        23.7        43.7        55.9        62.3        221.2   

 

Other short-term temporary differences comprise a number of items, none of which is individually significant to the Group’s consolidated balance sheet. At 31 December 2012 the balance related to temporary differences in relation to accounting provisions, tax credits, and tax deductible goodwill.

 

In addition the Group has recognised the following gross deferred tax liabilities and movements thereon in 2012 and 2011:

 

    Brands
and other
intangibles
£m
    Associate
earnings
£m
    Goodwill
£m
    Property,
plant &
equipment
£m
    Other
short-term
temporary
differences
£m
    Total
£m
 
1 January 2011     688.1        21.2        92.4        0.1        7.4        809.2   
Acquisition of subsidiaries     44.9                                    44.9   
(Credit)/ charge to income     (60.8     1.3        17.7               3.4        (38.4
Exchange adjustments     (9.7     0.4        0.4                      (8.9
31 December 2011     662.5        22.9        110.5        0.1        10.8        806.8   
Acquisition of subsidiaries     59.4                             1.9        61.3   
(Credit)/ charge to income     (71.8     1.5        21.1        30.2        (2.2     (21.2
Exchange adjustments     (25.4     (3.4     (5.9            (1.9     (36.6
31 December 2012     624.7        21.0        125.7        30.3        8.6        810.3   

 

15. Deferred tax (continued)

 

 

At the balance sheet date, the Group has gross tax losses and other temporary differences of £4,730.9 million (2011: £4,996.0 million) available for offset against future profits. Deferred tax assets have been recognised in respect of the tax benefit of £687.9 million (2011: £439.0 million) of such tax losses and other temporary differences. No deferred tax asset has been recognised in respect of the remaining £4,043.0 million (2011: £4,557.0 million) of losses and other temporary differences as the Group considers that there will not be enough taxable profits in the entities concerned such that any additional asset could be considered recoverable. Included in the total unrecognised temporary differences are losses of £398.7 million that will expire by 2022, £16.9 million that will expire by 2027, £58.9 million that will expire by 2029, £4.5 million that will expire by 2032 and £2,830.3 million of losses that may be carried forward indefinitely.

 

At the balance sheet date, the aggregate amount of the temporary differences in relation to the investment in subsidiaries for which deferred tax liabilities have not been recognised was £1,846.3 million. No liability has been recognised in respect of these differences because the Group is in a position to control the timing of the reversal of the temporary differences and the Group considers that it is probable that such differences will not reverse in the foreseeable future.

 


16. Inventory and work in progress

 

The following are included in the net book value of inventory and work in progress:

 

     2012
£m
     2011
£m
 
Work in progress      343.3         327.0   
Inventory      4.9         6.9   
       348.2         333.9   

 


17. Trade and other receivables

 

The following are included in trade and other receivables:

 

Amounts falling due within one year:


    

2012

£m

    

2011

£m

 
Trade receivables (net of bad debt provision)      6,204.2         6,305.1   
VAT and sales taxes recoverable      75.6         76.2   
Prepayments and accrued income      2,232.2         2,044.0   
Other debtors      495.0         494.4   
       9,007.0         8,919.7   

 

F-24


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

17. Trade and other receivables (continued)

 

 

The ageing of trade receivables and other financial assets is as follows:

 


2012                        
   

Carrying
amount at
31 December
2012

£m

    Neither
past due
nor
impaired
£m
    0-30
days
£m
    31-90
days
£m
    91-180
days
£m
    181
days-
1 year
£m
    Greater
than
1 year
£m
 
Trade receivables     6,204.2        3,942.5        1,447.2        659.2        140.1        9.5        5.7   
Other financial assets     467.4        311.3        77.0        35.7        7.4        10.1        25.9   
      6,671.6        4,253.8        1,524.2        694.9        147.5        19.6        31.6   

 

2011                        
   

Carrying
amount at
31 December
2011

£m

    Neither
past due
nor
impaired
£m
    0-30
days
£m
    31-90
days
£m
    91-180
days
£m
    181
days-
1 year
£m
    Greater
than
1 year
£m
 
Trade receivables     6,305.1        3,887.3        1,624.5        648.8        119.5        6.2        18.8   
Other financial assets     489.8        330.2        51.8        42.4        8.7        22.2        34.5   
      6,794.9        4,217.5        1,676.3        691.2        128.2        28.4        53.3   

 

Other financial assets are included in other debtors.

 

Past due amounts are not impaired where collection is considered likely.

 

Amounts falling due after more than one year:


     2012
£m
     2011
£m
 
Prepayments and accrued income 1      29.5         36.6   
Other debtors 1      73.9         87.6   
Fair value of derivatives      141.7         184.9   
       245.1         309.1   

Note

1  

Comparative figures have been restated to be consistent with current year presentation.

 

Movements on bad debt provisions were as follows:


     2012
£m
    2011
£m
    2010
£m
 
Balance at beginning of year      125.7        114.6        109.9   
New acquisitions      0.7        4.0        2.0   
Charged to operating costs      18.1        31.1        27.8   
Exchange adjustments      (4.1     (1.9     2.2   
Utilisations and other movements      (35.1     (22.1     (27.3
Balance at end of year      105.3        125.7        114.6   

 

The allowance for bad and doubtful debts is equivalent to 1.7% (2011: 2.0%, 2010: 1.8%) of gross trade accounts receivable.

 

The Group considers that the carrying amount of trade and other receivables approximates their fair value.

 


18. Trade and other payables: amounts falling due within one year

 

The following are included in trade and other payables falling due within one year:

 

     2012
£m
     2011
£m
 
Trade payables      7,227.5         7,292.7   
Other taxation and social security      433.6         420.5   
Payments due to vendors (earnout agreements)      33.4         96.8   
Liabilities in respect of put option agreements with vendors      64.3         79.2   
Deferred income      880.2         1,002.3   
Fair value of derivatives      31.6         0.5   
Share purchases – close period commitments      18.2           
Other creditors and accruals      2,219.0         2,273.5   
       10,907.8         11,165.5   

 

The Group considers that the carrying amount of trade and other payables approximates their fair value.

 


19. Trade and other payables: amounts falling due after more than one year

 

The following are included in trade and other payables falling due after more than one year:


     2012
£m
     2011
£m
 
Payments due to vendors (earnout agreements)      160.6         137.3   
Liabilities in respect of put option agreements with vendors      80.0         89.1   
Fair value of derivatives      79.7         139.9   
Other creditors and accruals      191.7         186.8   
       512.0         553.1   

 

The Group considers that the carrying amount of trade and other payables approximates their fair value.

 

The following tables set out payments due to vendors, comprising deferred consideration and the directors’ best estimates of future earnout-related obligations:

 

     2012
£m
     2011
£m
 
Within one year      33.4         96.8   
Between one and two years      35.7         31.6   
Between two and three years      28.7         25.2   
Between three and four years      30.4         18.6   
Between four and five years      63.8         28.9   
Over five years      2.0         33.0   
       194.0         234.1   

 

     2012
£m
    2011
£m
 
At the beginning of the year      234.1        275.3   
Earnouts paid (note 11)      (85.7     (150.0
New acquisitions      61.5        80.4   
Revision of estimates taken to goodwill (note 12)      8.6        25.9   
Revaluation of payments due to vendors (note 6)      (15.2     6.4   
Exchange adjustments      (9.3     (3.9
At the end of the year      194.0        234.1   

 

As of 31 December 2012, the potential undiscounted amount of future payments that could be required under the earnout agreements for acquisitions completed in the current year and for all earnout agreements range from £nil to £322 million (2011: £nil to £256 million) and £nil to £819 million (2011: £nil to £931 million), respectively. The decrease in the maximum potential undiscounted amount of future payments for all earnout agreements is due to earnout arrangements that have completed and payments made on active arrangements, partially offset by earnout arrangements related to new acquisitions during the year.

 

F-25


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

 


20. Bank overdrafts, bonds and bank loans

 

Amounts falling due within one year:

 

     2012
£m
     2011
£m
 
Bank overdrafts      586.0         518.4   

Corporate bonds and bank loans

     499.9           
       1,085.9         518.4   

 

The Group considers that the carrying amount of bank overdrafts

approximates their fair value.

 

Amounts falling due after more than 1 year:

 

     2012
£m
     2011
£m
 
Corporate bonds and bank loans      3,680.6         3,893.0   

 

The Group estimates that the fair value of convertible and corporate bonds is £4,759.7 million at 31 December 2012 (2011: £4,232.6 million). The Group considers that the carrying amount of bank loans approximates their fair value.

 

The corporate bonds, convertible bonds, bank loans and overdrafts included within liabilities fall due for repayment as follows:

 

     2012
£m
     2011
£m
 
Within one year      1,085.9         518.4   
Between one and two years      1,071.2         540.9   
Between two and three years      408.4         1,078.9   
Between three and four years      607.8         438.9   
Between four and five years      433.0         698.0   
Over five years      1,160.2         1,136.3   
       4,766.5         4,411.4   

 


21. Provisions for liabilities and charges

 

The movements in 2012 and 2011 were as follows:

 

     Property
£m
    Other
£m
    Total
£m
 
1 January 2011      58.4        103.2        161.6   
Charged to the income statement      11.8        16.5        28.3   
New acquisitions      4.3        15.5        19.8   
Utilised      (10.5     (13.3     (23.8
Released to the income statement      (6.3     (6.2     (12.5
Transfers      (9.6     (8.7     (18.3
Exchange adjustments      0.2        (1.3     (1.1
31 December 2011      48.3        105.7        154.0   
Charged to the income statement      8.9        14.8        23.7   
New acquisitions      0.7        11.4        12.1   
Utilised      (8.0     (18.8     (26.8
Released to the income statement      (6.8     (5.4     (12.2
Transfers      (0.7     (7.7     (8.4
Exchange adjustments      (1.1     (4.7     (5.8
31 December 2012      41.3        95.3        136.6   

 

Provisions comprise liabilities where there is uncertainty about the timing of settlement, but where a reliable estimate can be made of the amount. These include provisions for vacant space, sub-let losses and other property-related liabilities. Also included are other provisions, such as certain long-term employee benefits and legal claims, where the likelihood of settlement is considered probable.

 

The Company and various of its subsidiaries are, from time to time, parties to legal proceedings and claims which arise in the ordinary course of business. The directors do not anticipate that the outcome of these proceedings and claims will have a material adverse effect on the Group’s financial position or on the results of its operations.

 


22. Share-based payments

 

Charges for share-based incentive plans were as follows:

 

     2012
£m
     2011
£m
     2010
£m
 
Share-based payments      92.8         78.8         70.4   

 

Share-based payments comprise charges for stock options and restricted stock awards to employees of the Group.

 

As of 31 December 2012, there was £167.0 million (2011: £149.1 million) of total unrecognised compensation cost related to the Group’s restricted stock plans. That cost is expected to be recognised over a period of one to two years.

 

Further information on stock options is provided in note 26.

 

Restricted stock plans

The Group operates a number of equity-settled share incentive schemes, in most cases satisfied by the delivery of stock from one of the Group’s ESOP Trusts. The most significant current schemes are as follows:

 

Renewed Leadership Equity Acquisition Plan (Renewed LEAP) and Leadership Equity Acquisition Plan III (LEAP III)

Under Renewed LEAP and LEAP III, the most senior executives of the Group, including certain executive directors, commit WPP shares (‘investment shares’) in order to have the opportunity to earn additional WPP shares (‘matching shares’). The number of matching shares which a participant can receive at the end of the fixed performance period of five years is dependent on the performance (based on the Total Share Owner Return (TSR)) of the Company over that period against a comparator group of other listed communications services companies. The maximum possible number of matching shares for each of the 2012, 2011, 2010, 2009 and 2008 grants is five shares for each investment share. The 2008 Renewed LEAP plan vested in March 2013 at a match of 4.29 shares for each investment share.

 

Performance Share Awards (PSA)

Grants of stock under PSA are dependent upon annual performance targets, typically based on one or more of: operating profit, profit before taxation and operating margin. Grants are made in the year following the year of performance measurement, and vest two years after grant date provided the individual concerned is continually employed by the Group throughout this time.

 

Leaders, Partners and High Potential Group

Stock option grants under the executive stock option plan were not significant in 2012, 2011 or 2010 as the Group made grants of restricted stock (to be satisfied by stock from one of the Group’s ESOP Trusts) to participants instead. Performance conditions include continued employment over the three-year vesting period.

 

Valuation methodology

For all of these schemes, the valuation methodology is based upon fair value on grant date, which is determined by the market price on that date or the application of a Black-Scholes model, depending upon the characteristics of the scheme concerned. The assumptions underlying the Black-Scholes model are detailed in note 26, including details of assumed dividend yields. Market price on any given day is obtained from external, publicly available sources.

 

Market/non-market conditions

Most share-based plans are subject to non-market performance conditions, such as margin or growth targets, as well as continued employment. The Renewed LEAP and LEAP III schemes are subject to a number of performance conditions, including TSR, a market-based condition.

 

For schemes without market-based performance conditions, the valuation methodology above is applied and, at each year end, the relevant accrual for each grant is revised, if appropriate, to take account of any changes in estimate of the likely number of shares expected to vest.

 

F-26


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

22. Share-based payments (continued)

 

 

For schemes with market-based performance conditions, the probability of satisfying these conditions is assessed at grant date through a statistical model (such as the Monte Carlo Model) and applied to the fair value. This initial valuation remains fixed throughout the life of the relevant plan, irrespective of the actual outcome in terms of performance. Where a lapse occurs due to cessation of employment, the cumulative charge taken to date is reversed.

 

Movement on ordinary shares granted for significant restricted stock plans:

 

   

Non-vested
1 January
2012
number

m

    Granted
number
m
    Lapsed
number
m
    Vested
number
m
   

Non- vested
31 December
2012

number

m

 
Renewed LEAP/LEAP III 1     4.5        1.8        (0.1     (1.6     4.6   
Performance Share Awards (PSA)     4.9        3.9        (0.4     (1.4     7.0   
Leaders, Partners and High Potential Group     10.9        3.4        (0.8     (3.7     9.8   
Weighted average fair value (pence per share):                                        
Renewed LEAP/LEAP III 1     633p        745p        375p        633p        683p   
Performance Share Awards (PSA)     757p        824p        792p        705p        802p   
Leaders, Partners and High Potential Group     657p        781p        671p        546p        740p   

Note

1    

The number of shares granted represents the ‘investment shares’ committed by participants at grant date for the 2012 LEAP III plan in addition to the matched shares awarded on vest date for the 2007 Renewed LEAP plan which vested in March 2012. The actual number of shares that vest for each Renewed LEAP/LEAP III plan is dependent on the extent to which the relevant performance criteria are satisfied.

 

The total fair value of shares vested for all the Group’s restricted stock plans during the year ended 31 December 2012 was £47.5 million (2011: £76.5 million, 2010: £61.8 million).

 


23. Provision for post-employment benefits

 

Companies within the Group operate a large number of pension plans, the forms and benefits of which vary with conditions and practices in the countries concerned. The Group’s pension costs are analysed as follows:

 

     2012
£m
    2011
£m
    2010
£m
 
Defined contribution plans      124.9        114.7        101.5   
Defined benefit plans charge to operating profit      23.8        20.7        19.1   
Pension costs (note 5)      148.7        135.4        120.6   
Expected return on pension plan assets (note 6)      (30.0     (32.6     (30.6
Interest on pension plan liabilities (note 6)      41.3        43.8        45.9   
       160.0        146.6        135.9   

 

Defined benefit plans

The pension costs are assessed in accordance with the advice of local independent qualified actuaries. The latest full actuarial valuations for the various pension plans were carried out at various dates in the last three years. These valuations have been updated by the local actuaries to 31 December 2012.

 

The Group’s policy is to close existing defined benefit plans to new members. This has been implemented across a significant number of the pension plans.

 

Contributions to funded plans are determined in line with local conditions and practices. Contributions in respect of unfunded plans are paid as they fall due. The total contributions (for funded plans) and benefit payments (for unfunded plans) paid for 2012 amounted to £56.5 million (2011: £66.8 million, 2010: £53.3 million). Employer contributions and benefit payments in 2013 are expected to be in the range of £50 million to £70 million depending on the performance of the assets.

 

(a) Assumptions

The main weighted average assumptions used for the actuarial valuations at 31 December are shown in the following table:

 

     2012
% pa
     2011
% pa
     2010
% pa
     2009
% pa
 
UK                                    
Discount rate 1      4.2         4.7         5.4         5.7   
Rate of increase in salaries      2.9         3.0         3.4         3.5   
Rate of increase in pensions in payment      3.9         4.0         4.0         4.2   
Inflation      2.4         2.5         3.2         3.5   
Expected rate of return on equities      7.5         7.5         7.5         7.5   
Expected rate of return on bonds 1      3.6         3.6         4.5         4.8   
Expected rate of return on insured annuities      4.2         4.7         5.4         5.7   
Expected rate of return on property      n/a        6.9         6.9         6.9   
Expected rate of return on cash and other      4.3         3.9         4.0         4.4   
Weighted average return on assets      4.3         4.6         5.4         5.6   
North America                                    
Discount rate 1      3.5         4.4         5.1         5.7   
Rate of increase in salaries      3.0         3.0         3.0         3.0   
Inflation      2.5         2.5         2.5         2.5   
Expected rate of return on equities      7.9         7.9         7.9         7.9   
Expected rate of return on bonds 1      3.6         4.1         4.3         4.7   
Expected rate of return on cash and other      3.6         3.9         6.4         6.6   
Weighted average return on assets      5.3         5.9         6.4         6.5   
Western Continental Europe                                    
Discount rate 1      3.6         4.8         5.3         5.5   
Rate of increase in salaries      2.4         2.7         2.7         2.7   
Rate of increase in pensions in payment      2.0         2.0         2.0         2.0   
Inflation      2.0         2.0         2.0         2.1   
Expected rate of return on equities      7.1         7.1         7.1         7.8   
Expected rate of return on bonds 1      2.7         3.8         4.4         4.1   
Expected rate of return on property      5.4         6.1         6.1         6.5   
Expected rate of return on cash and other      4.0         4.3         4.6         4.6   
Weighted average return on assets      4.3         4.7         5.0         5.1   
Asia Pacific, Latin America, Africa & Middle East and Central & Eastern Europe                                    
Discount rate 1      4.1         4.8         4.0         4.2   
Rate of increase in salaries      6.1         5.7         4.4         4.2   
Inflation      4.7         4.8         5.1         4.9   
Expected rate of return on equities      8.7         n/a         10.0         10.1   
Expected rate of return on bonds 1      4.4         7.3         8.0         8.2   
Expected rate of return on cash and other      5.6         5.4         1.0         1.1   
Weighted average return on assets      5.3         5.8         3.4         3.6   

Note

1  

The assumptions used for the discount rates are based on high-quality corporate bond yields, whereas the assumptions used for the expected rate of return on bonds reflect the yield expected on actual bonds held.

 

There are a number of areas in pension accounting that involve judgements made by management based on advice of qualified advisors. These include establishing the long-term expected rates of investment return on pension assets, mortality assumptions, discount rates, inflation, rate of increase in pensions in payment and salary increases.

 

For the Group’s pension plans, the plans’ assets are invested with the objective of being able to meet current and future benefit payment needs, while controlling balance sheet volatility and future contributions. Pension plan assets are invested with a number of investment managers, and assets are diversified among equities, bonds, insured annuities, property and cash or other liquid investments. The primary use of bonds as an investment class is to match the anticipated cash flows from the plans to pay pensions. Various insurance policies have also been bought historically to provide a more exact match for the cash flows, including a match for

 

F-27


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

23. Provision for post-employment benefits (continued)

 

the actual mortality of specific plan members. These insurance policies effectively provide protection against both investment fluctuations and longevity risks. The strategic target allocation varies among the individual plans.

 

Management considers the types of investment classes in which the pension plan assets are invested and the expected compound return that can reasonably be expected for the portfolio to earn over time, which reflects forward-looking economic assumptions. Management reviews the expected long-term rates of return on an annual basis and revises them as appropriate.

 

Management periodically commissions detailed asset and liability studies performed by third-party professional investment advisors and actuaries, that generate probability-adjusted expected future returns on those assets. These studies also project the estimated future pension payments and evaluate the efficiency of the allocation of the pension plan assets into various investment categories. The studies performed at the time these assumptions were set support the reasonableness of the return assumptions based on the target allocation of investment classes and the then current market conditions.

 

At 31 December 2012, the life expectancies underlying the value of the accrued liabilities for the main defined benefit pension plans operated by the Group were as follows:

 

Years life expectancy

after age 65

   All
plans
     North
America
     UK      Western
Conti-
nental
Europe
     Other 1  

– current pensioners

(at age 65) – male

     21.9         20.4         24.4         20.5         19.3   

– current pensioners

(at age 65) – female

     23.9         22.6         25.6         23.6         24.7   

– future pensioners

(current age 45) – male

     24.1         22.5         26.5         23.0         19.3   

– future pensioners

(current age 45) – female

     26.0         24.5         27.9         25.6         24.7   

 

Note

1    

Includes Asia Pacific, Latin America, Africa & Middle East and Central & Eastern Europe.

 

The life expectancies after age 65 at 31 December 2011 were 20.9 years and 22.8 years for male and female current pensioners (at age 65) respectively, and 22.4 years and 24.0 years for male and female future pensioners (current age 45), respectively.

 

In the determination of mortality assumptions, management uses the most up-to-date mortality tables available in each country.

 

For a 0.25% increase or decrease in the discount rate at 31 December 2012, the effect on the year-end 2012 plan liabilities would be a decrease or increase, respectively, of approximately £34 million.

 

(b) Assets and liabilities

At 31 December, the fair value of the assets in the pension plans, and the assessed present value of the liabilities in the pension plans are shown in the following table:

 

    2012
£m
    %     2011
£m
    %     2010
£m
    %  
Equities     145.0        20.4        168.7        25.8        188.2        29.8   
Bonds     282.3        39.8        271.4        41.5        245.7        38.9   
Insured annuities     74.5        10.5        67.6        10.4        66.3        10.5   
Property     0.8        0.1        9.4        1.4        9.6        1.5   
Cash and other     207.2        29.2        136.6        20.9        121.5        19.3   
Total fair value of assets     709.8        100.0        653.7        100.0        631.3        100.0   
Present value of liabilities     (1,044.1             (934.5             (871.2        
Deficit in the plans     (334.3             (280.8             (239.9        
Irrecoverable surplus     (1.0             (1.1             (0.9        
Unrecognised past service cost     (0.3             (0.4             (0.7        
Net liability 1     (335.6             (282.3             (241.5        
Plans in surplus     1.5                5.6                2.8           
Plans in deficit     (337.1             (287.9             (244.3        

 

Note

1    

The related deferred tax asset is discussed in note 15.

 

The total fair value of assets, present value of pension plan liabilities and deficit in the plans were £588.1 million, £836.1 million and £248.0 million in 2009 and £550.4 million, £819.1 million and £268.7 million in 2008, respectively.

 

Deficit in plans by region    2012
£m
    2011
£m
    2010
£m
 
UK      (9.4     (1.6     (3.5
North America      (193.8     (172.5     (144.4
Western Continental Europe      (100.0     (84.5     (75.9
Asia Pacific, Latin America, Africa & Middle East and Central & Eastern Europe      (31.1     (22.2     (16.1
Deficit in the plans      (334.3     (280.8     (239.9

 

Some of the Group’s defined benefit plans are unfunded (or largely unfunded) by common custom and practice in certain jurisdictions. In the case of these unfunded plans, the benefit payments are made as and when they fall due. Pre-funding of these plans would not be typical business practice.

 

The following table shows the split of the deficit at 31 December 2012, 2011 and 2010 between funded and unfunded pension plans.

 

    2012
Deficit
£m
    2012
Present
value of
liabilities
£m
    2011
Deficit
£m
    2011
Present
value of
liabilities
£m
    2010
Deficit
£m
    2010
Present
value of
liabilities
£m
 
Funded plans by region                                                
UK     (9.4     (366.6     (1.6     (327.8     (3.5     (305.5
North America     (115.6     (375.0     (93.1     (340.2     (66.8     (306.5
Western Continental Europe     (45.5     (129.1     (36.4     (108.0     (29.7     (103.8
Asia Pacific, Latin America, Africa & Middle East and Central & Eastern Europe     (5.1     (14.7     (2.3     (11.1     (5.6     (21.1
Deficit/liabilities in the funded plans     (175.6     (885.4     (133.4     (787.1     (105.6     (736.9
Unfunded plans by region                                                
UK                                          
North America     (78.2     (78.2     (79.4     (79.4     (77.6     (77.6
Western Continental Europe     (54.5     (54.5     (48.1     (48.1     (46.2     (46.2
Asia Pacific, Latin America, Africa & Middle East and Central & Eastern Europe     (26.0     (26.0     (19.9     (19.9     (10.5     (10.5
Deficit/liabilities in the unfunded plans     (158.7     (158.7     (147.4     (147.4     (134.3     (134.3
Deficit/liabilities in the plans     (334.3     (1,044.1     (280.8     (934.5     (239.9     (871.2

 

In accordance with IAS 19, plans that are wholly or partially funded are considered funded plans.

 

F-28


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

23. Provision for post-employment benefits (continued)

 

 

(c) Pension expense

The following table shows the breakdown of the pension expense between amounts charged to operating profit, amounts charged to finance income and finance costs and amounts recognised in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income (OCI):

 

     2012
£m
    2011
£m
    2010
£m
 
Current service cost      23.8        23.7        23.3   
Past service income      (0.2     (2.8     (0.6
Gain on settlements and curtailments      0.2        (0.2     (3.6
Charge to operating profit      23.8        20.7        19.1   
Expected return on pension plan assets      (30.0     (32.6     (30.6
Interest on pension plan liabilities      41.3        43.8        45.9   
Charge to profit before taxation for defined benefit plans      35.1        31.9        34.4   
Gain/(loss) on pension plan assets relative to expected return      40.1        (5.7     31.9   
Experience (loss)/gain arising on the plan liabilities      (1.6     (3.9     3.4   
Changes in assumptions underlying the present value of the plan liabilities      (122.5     (62.2     (37.9
Change in irrecoverable surplus      0.1        (0.2     2.2   
Actuarial loss recognised in OCI      (83.9     (72.0     (0.4

 

As at 31 December 2012 the cumulative amount of net actuarial losses recognised in equity since 1 January 2001 was £336.6 million (2011: £252.7 million, 2010: £180.7 million). Of this amount, a net loss of £235.5 million was recognised since the 1 January 2004 adoption of IAS 19.

 

(d) Movement in plan liabilities

The following table shows an analysis of the movement in the pension plan liabilities for each accounting period:


     2012
£m
    2011
£m
    2010
£m
 
Plan liabilities at beginning of year      934.5        871.2        836.1   
Service cost      23.8        23.7        23.3   
Interest cost      41.3        43.8        45.9   
Actuarial loss      124.1        66.1        34.5   
Benefits paid      (56.9     (59.5     (57.2
(Gain)/loss due to exchange rate movements      (25.3     (2.0     9.7   
Settlements and curtailments      (1.7     (13.7     (26.4
Other 1      4.3        4.9        5.3   
Plan liabilities at end of year      1,044.1        934.5        871.2   

Note

1    

Other includes disposals, acquisitions, plan participants’ contributions, plan amendments and reclassifications. The reclassifications represent certain of the Group’s defined benefit plans which are included in this note for the first time in the periods presented.

 

(e) Movement in plan assets

The following table shows an analysis of the movement in the pension plan assets for each accounting period:


     2012
£m
    2011
£m
    2010
£m
 
Fair value of plan assets at beginning of year      653.7        631.3        588.1   
Expected return on plan assets      30.0        32.6        30.6   
Actuarial gain/(loss) on plan assets      40.1        (5.7     31.9   
Employer contributions      56.5        66.8        53.3   
Benefits paid      (56.9     (59.5     (57.2
(Loss)/gain due to exchange rate movements      (13.9     (1.3     5.9   
Settlements      (1.9     (13.5     (22.8
Other 1      2.2        3.0        1.5   
Fair value of plan assets at end of year      709.8        653.7        631.3   
Actual return on plan assets      70.1        26.9        62.5   

Note

1    

Other includes disposals, acquisitions, plan participants’ contributions and reclassifications. The reclassifications represent certain of the Group’s defined benefit plans which are included in this note for the first time in the periods presented.

 

(f) History of experience gains and losses


     2012
£m
    2011
£m
    2010
£m
     
Gain/(loss) on pension plan assets relative to expected return:                             
Amount      40.1        (5.7     31.9       
Percentage of plan assets      5.6     (0.9 %)      5.1    
Experience (loss)/gain arising on the plan liabilities:                             
Amount      (1.6     (3.9     3.4       
Percentage of the present value of the plan liabilities      (0.2 %)      (0.4 %)      0.4    
Total loss recognised in OCI:                             
Amount      (83.9     (72.0     (0.4    
Percentage of the present value of the plan liabilities      (8.0 %)      (7.7 %)      (0.0 %)     

 

The experience gain/(loss) on pension plan assets and plan liabilities was £44.0 million and (£7.6) million in 2009 and (£93.7) million and £4.4 million in 2008, respectively.

 


 

24. Risk management policies

 

Foreign currency risk

The Group’s results in pounds sterling are subject to fluctuation as a result of exchange rate movements. The Group does not hedge this translation exposure to its earnings but does hedge the currency element of its net assets using foreign currency borrowings, cross-currency swaps and forward foreign exchange contracts.

 

The Group effects these currency net asset hedges by borrowing in the same currencies as the operating (or ‘functional’) currencies of its main operating units. The majority of the Group’s debt is therefore denominated in US dollars, pounds sterling and euros. Borrowings in these currencies represented 98.5% of the Group’s gross indebtedness at 31 December 2012 (at $3,828 million, £750 million and 1,274 million) and 96.7% of the Group’s average gross debt during the course of 2012 (at $3,356 million, £767 million and 1,274 million).

 

The Group’s operations conduct the majority of their activities in their own local currency and consequently the Group has no significant transactional foreign exchange exposures. Any significant cross-border trading exposures are hedged by the use of forward foreign-exchange contracts. No speculative foreign exchange trading is undertaken.

 

Interest rate risk

The Group is exposed to interest rate risk on both interest-bearing assets and interest-bearing liabilities. The Group has a policy of actively managing its interest rate risk exposure while recognising that fixing rates on all its debt eliminates the possibility of benefiting from rate reductions and similarly, having all its debt at floating rates unduly exposes the Group to increases in rates.

 

Including the effect of interest rate and cross-currency swaps, 81.2% of the year-end US dollar debt is at fixed rates averaging 5.53% for an average period of 92 months; 73.3% of the sterling debt is at a fixed rate of 6.07% for an average period of 58 months; and 66.7% of the euro debt is at fixed rates averaging 6.50% for an average period of 38 months.

 

Other than fixed rate debt, the Group’s other fixed rates are achieved principally through interest rate swaps with the Group’s bankers. The Group also uses forward rate agreements and interest rate caps to manage exposure to interest rate changes. At 31 December 2012 no forward rate agreements or interest rate caps were in place. These interest rate derivatives are used only to hedge exposures to interest rate movements arising from the Group’s borrowings and surplus cash balances arising from its commercial activities and are not traded independently. Payments made under these instruments are accounted for on an accruals basis.

 

F-29


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

24. Risk management policies (continued)

 

 

Going concern and liquidity risk

In considering going concern and liquidity risk, the directors have reviewed the Group’s future cash requirements and earnings projections. The directors believe these forecasts have been prepared on a prudent basis and have also considered the impact of a range of potential changes to trading performance. The directors have concluded that the Group should be able to operate within its current facilities and comply with its banking covenants for the foreseeable future and therefore believe it is appropriate to prepare the financial statements of the Group on a going concern basis.

 

At 31 December 2012, the Group has access to £5.2 billion of committed bank facilities with maturity dates spread over the years 2013 to 2042 as illustrated below:

 

    £m     2013
£m
    2014
£m
    2015
£m
    2016
£m
    2017
£m
    2018+
£m
 
US bond $300m
(5.125% ’42)
    184.7                                                184.7   
US bond $500m
(3.625% ’22)
    307.8                                                307.8   
US bond $812m
(4.75% ’21)
    500.2                                                500.2   
£ bonds £200m
(6.375% ’20)
    200.0                                                200.0   
£ bonds £400m
(6.0% ’17)
    400.0                                        400.0           
Bank revolver ($1,050m
and £375m)
    1,021.5                                1,021.5                   
Eurobonds 750m
(6.625% ’16)
    609.4                                609.4                   
Eurobonds 500m
(5.25% ’15)
    406.3                        406.3                           
£450m convertible bonds
(5.75% ’14)
    450.0                450.0                                   
US bond $600m
(8.0% ’14)
    369.4                369.4                                   
US bond $369m
(5.875% ’14)
    227.0                227.0                                   
TNS private placements
$25m
    15.4                15.4                                   
Eurobonds 600m
(4.375% ’13)
    487.5        487.5                                           
Total committed facilities
available
    5,179.2        487.5        1,061.8        406.3        1,630.9        400.0        1,192.7   
Drawn down facilities at 31 December 2012     4,157.7        487.5        1,061.8        406.3        609.4        400.0        1,192.7   
Undrawn committed credit
facilities
    1,021.5                                                   

 

The Group’s borrowings are evenly distributed between fixed and floating rate debt. Given the strong cash generation of the business, its debt maturity profile and available facilities, the directors believe the Group has sufficient liquidity to match its requirements for the foreseeable future.

 

Treasury activities

Treasury activity is managed centrally from London, New York and Hong Kong, and is principally concerned with the monitoring of working capital, managing external and internal funding requirements and the monitoring and management of financial market risks, in particular interest rate and foreign exchange exposures.

 

The treasury operation is not a profit centre and its activities are carried out in accordance with policies approved by the Board of Directors and subject to regular review and audit.

 

The Group manages liquidity risk by ensuring continuity and flexibility of funding even in difficult market conditions. Undrawn committed borrowing facilities are maintained in excess of peak net-borrowing levels and debt maturities are closely monitored. Targets for debt and cash position are set on an annual basis and, to assist in meeting this, working capital targets are set for all the Group’s major operations.

 

Capital risk management

The Group manages its capital to ensure that entities in the Group will be able to continue as a going concern while maximising the return to stakeholders through the optimisation of the debt and equity balance. The capital structure of the Group consists of debt, which includes the borrowings disclosed in note 10, cash and cash equivalents and equity attributable to equity holders of the parent, comprising issued capital, reserves and retained earnings as disclosed in the consolidated statement of changes in equity and in notes 26 and 27.

 

Credit risk

The Group’s principal financial assets are cash and short-term deposits, trade and other receivables and investments, the carrying values of which represent the Group’s maximum exposure to credit risk in relation to financial assets, as shown in note 25.

 

The Group’s credit risk is primarily attributable to its trade receivables. The majority of the Group’s trade receivables are due from large national or multinational companies where the risk of default is considered low. The amounts presented in the consolidated balance sheet are net of allowances for doubtful receivables, estimated by the Group’s management based on prior experience and their assessment of the current economic environment. A relatively small number of clients make up a significant percentage of the Group’s debtors, but no single client represents more than 6% of total trade receivables as at 31 December 2012.

 

The credit risk on liquid funds and derivative financial instruments is limited because the counterparties are banks with high credit-ratings assigned by international credit-rating agencies or banks that have been financed by their government.

 

A relatively small number of clients contribute a significant percentage of the Group’s consolidated revenues. The Group’s clients generally are able to reduce advertising and marketing spending or cancel projects at any time for any reason. There can be no assurance that any of the Group’s clients will continue to utilise the Group’s services to the same extent, or at all, in the future. A significant reduction in advertising and marketing spending by, or the loss of one or more of, the Group’s largest clients, if not replaced by new client accounts or an increase in business from existing clients, would adversely affect the Group’s prospects, business, financial condition and results of operations.

 

Sensitivity analysis

The following sensitivity analysis addresses the effect of currency and interest rate risks on the Group’s financial instruments. The analysis assumes that all hedges are highly effective.

 

Currency risk

A 10% weakening of sterling against the Group’s major currencies would result in the following losses, which would be posted directly to equity. These losses would arise on the retranslation of foreign currency denominated borrowings and derivatives designated as effective net investment hedges of overseas net assets. These losses would be partially offset in equity by a corresponding gain arising on the retranslation of the related hedged foreign currency net assets. A 10% strengthening of sterling would have an equal and opposite effect. There are no other material foreign exchange exposures which would create gains or losses to the functional reporting currencies of individual entities in the Group.

 

     2012
£m
     2011
£m
 
US dollar      85.3         91.5   
Euro      69.8         71.8   

 

Interest rate risk

A one percentage point increase in market interest rates for all currencies in which the Group had cash and borrowings at 31 December 2012 would increase profit before tax by approximately £4.0 million (2011: £3.7 million). A one percentage decrease in market interest rates would have an equal and opposite effect. This has been calculated by applying the interest rate change to the Group’s variable rate cash and borrowings.

 


 

25. Financial instruments

 

Currency derivatives

The Group utilises currency derivatives to hedge significant future transactions and cash flows and the exchange risk arising on translation of the Group’s investments in foreign operations. The Group is a party to a variety of foreign currency derivatives in the management of its exchange rate exposures. The instruments purchased are primarily denominated in the currencies of the Group’s principal markets.

 

At 31 December 2012, the fair value of the Group’s currency derivatives is estimated to be a net liability of approximately £44.4 million (2011: £75.5 million). These amounts are based on market values of equivalent instruments at the balance sheet date, comprising £60.8 million (2011: £57.9 million) assets included in trade and other receivables and £105.2 million (2011: £133.4 million) liabilities included in trade and other payables. The amounts taken to and deferred in equity during the year for currency derivatives that are designated and effective hedges was a credit of £42.7 million (2011: charge of £1.9 million) for net investment hedges and a charge of £1.0 million (2011: £14.0 million) for cash flow hedges.

 

F-30


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

25. Financial instruments (continued)

 

 

Changes in the fair value relating to the ineffective portion of the currency derivatives amounted to a loss of £9.4 million (2011: gain of £3.1 million, 2010: gain of £11.7 million) which is included in the revaluation of financial instruments for the year. This loss resulted from a £32.3 million gain on hedging instruments and a £41.7 million loss on hedged items.

 

The Group currently designates its foreign currency-denominated debt and cross-currency swaps as hedging instruments against the currency risk associated with the translation of its foreign operations.

 

At the balance sheet date, the total nominal amount of outstanding forward foreign exchange contracts not designated as hedges was £63.6 million (2011: £124.4 million). The Group estimates the fair value of these contracts to be a net asset of £0.5 million (2011: £2.6 million).

 

These arrangements are designed to address significant exchange exposure and are renewed on a revolving basis as required.

 

Interest rate swaps

The Group uses interest rate swaps as hedging instruments in fair value hedges to manage its exposure to interest rate movements on its borrowings. Contracts with nominal values of 600 million have fixed interest receipts at 4.38% up until December 2013 and have floating interest payments averaging EURIBOR plus 0.56%. Contracts with a nominal value of 500 million have fixed interest receipts of 5.25% up until January 2015 and have floating interest payments averaging EURIBOR plus 0.80%. Contracts with a nominal value of 100 million have fixed interest payments of 5.56% until June 2014 and have floating rate receipts averaging EURIBOR plus 0.96%.

 

Contracts with a nominal value of £200 million have fixed interest receipts of 6.00% up until April 2017 and have floating rate payments averaging LIBOR plus 0.64%.

 

A contract with a nominal value of $25 million has fixed interest receipts averaging 6.34% until on average July 2014 and has floating rate payments averaging LIBOR plus 0.61%.

 

The fair value of interest rate swaps entered into at 31 December 2012 is estimated to be a net asset of approximately £102.8 million (2011: £121.0 million). These amounts are based on market values of equivalent instruments at the balance sheet date, comprising £108.7 million (2011: £127.5 million) assets included in trade and other receivables and £5.9 million (2011: £6.5 million) liabilities included in trade and other payables.

 

Changes in the fair value relating to the ineffective portion of interest rate swaps amounted to a gain of £0.6 million (2011: loss of £9.5 million, 2010: gain of £12.6 million) which is included in the revaluation of financial instruments for the year. This gain resulted from a £19.3 million loss on hedging instruments and a £19.9 million gain on hedged items.

 

25. Financial instruments (continued)

 

 

An analysis of the Group’s financial assets and liabilities by accounting classification is set out below:

 

    Derivatives
in
designated
hedge
relationships
    Held
for
trading
    Loans &
receivables
    Available
for sale
    Amortised
cost
    Carrying
value
 
    £m     £m     £m     £m     £m     £m  
2012                                                
Other investments                          176.5               176.5   
Cash and short-term deposits                   1,945.3                      1,945.3   
Bank overdrafts and loans                                 (1,085.9     (1,085.9
Bonds and bank loans                                 (3,680.6     (3,680.6
Trade and other receivables: amounts falling due within one year                   6,605.4                      6,605.4   
Trade and other receivables: amounts falling due after more than one year                   69.7                      69.7   
Trade and other payables: amounts falling due within one year                                 (7,306.5     (7,306.5
Trade and other payables: amounts falling due after more than one year                                 (14.2     (14.2
Derivative assets     169.5        0.7                             170.2   
Derivative liabilities     (111.1     (0.2                          (111.3
Share purchases – close period commitments            (18.2                          (18.2
Payments due to vendors (earnout agreements)            (194.0                          (194.0
Liabilities in respect of put options            (144.3                          (144.3
      58.4        (356.0     8,620.4        176.5        (12,087.2     (3,587.9

 

F-31


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

25. Financial instruments (continued)

 

 

    Derivatives
in
designated
hedge
relationships
    Held
for
trading
    Loans &
receivables
    Available
for sale
    Amortised
cost
    Carrying
value
 
    £m     £m     £m     £m     £m     £m  
2011                                                
Other investments                          190.8               190.8   
Cash and short-term deposits                   1,946.6                      1,946.6   
Bank overdrafts and loans                                 (518.4     (518.4
Bonds and bank loans                                 (3,893.0     (3,893.0
Trade and other receivables: amounts falling due within one year                   6,718.4                      6,718.4   
Trade and other receivables: amounts falling due after more than one year                   76.5                      76.5   
Trade and other payables: amounts falling due within one year                                 (7,376.7     (7,376.7
Trade and other payables: amounts falling due after more than one year                                 (10.2     (10.2
Derivative assets     185.4        3.1                             188.5   
Derivative liabilities     (139.9     (0.5                          (140.4
Payments due to vendors (earnout agreements)            (234.1                          (234.1
Liabilities in respect of put options            (168.3                          (168.3
      45.5        (399.8     8,741.5        190.8        (11,798.3     (3,220.3

 

The following table provides an analysis of financial instruments that are measured subsequent to initial recognition at fair value, grouped into levels 1 to 3 based on the degree to which the fair value is observable:

 

Level 1 fair value measurements are those derived from quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities;

 

Level 2 fair value measurements are those derived from inputs other than quoted prices included within level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly (i.e. as prices) or indirectly (i.e. derived from prices);

 

Level 3 fair value measurements are those derived from valuation techniques that include inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data (unobservable inputs).

 

25. Financial instruments (continued)

 

 

     Level 1
£m
    Level 2
£m
    Level 3
£m
    Carrying
value
£m
 
2012                                 
Derivatives in designated hedge relationships                                 
Derivative assets             169.5               169.5   
Derivative liabilities             (111.1            (111.1
Held for trading                                 
Derivative assets             0.7               0.7   
Derivative liabilities             (0.2            (0.2
Share purchases – close period commitments      (18.2                   (18.2
Payments due to vendors (earnout agreements) (note 19)                    (194.0     (194.0
Liabilities in respect of put options                    (144.3     (144.3
Available for sale                                 
Other investments                    176.5        176.5   
       (18.2     58.9        (161.8     (121.1

 

     Level 1
£m
     Level 2
£m
    Level 3
£m
   

Carrying
value

£m

 
2011                                  
Derivatives in designated hedge relationships                                  
Derivative assets              185.4               185.4   
Derivative liabilities              (139.9            (139.9
Held for trading                                  
Derivative assets              3.1               3.1   
Derivative liabilities              (0.5            (0.5
Payments due to vendors (earnout agreements) (note 19)                     (234.1     (234.1
Liabilities in respect of put options                     (168.3     (168.3
Available for sale                                  
Other investments                     190.8        190.8   
               48.1        (211.6     (163.5

 

Reconciliation of level 3 fair value measurements 1 :

 

     Liabilities in
respect of
put options
£m
    Other
investments
£m
    Carrying
value
£m
 
1 January 2011      (171.0     173.7        2.7   
Losses recognised in the income statement      (30.9     (30.8     (61.7
Gain recognised in other comprehensive income             11.3        11.3   
Exchange adjustments      5.7               5.7   
Additions      (29.6     36.6        7.0   
Settlements      57.5               57.5   
31 December 2011      (168.3     190.8        22.5   
Losses recognised in the income statement      (5.1     (15.1     (20.2
Losses recognised in other comprehensive income             (3.5     (3.5
Exchange adjustments      11.6        (6.1     5.5   
Additions      (4.6     24.8        20.2   
Disposals             (14.4     (14.4
Settlements      22.1               22.1   
31 December 2012      (144.3     176.5        32.2   

 

Note

1    

Refer to note 19 for the reconciliation of payments due to vendors (earnout agreements).

 

F-32


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

25. Financial instruments (continued)

 

 

The fair values of financial assets and liabilities are based on quoted market prices where available. Where the market value is not available, the Group has estimated relevant fair values on the basis of publicly available information from outside sources or on the basis of discounted cash flow models where appropriate.

 


26. Authorised and issued share capital


     Equity
ordinary
shares
    Nominal
value
£m
 
Authorised                 
1 January 2011      1,750,000,000        175.0   
31 December 2011      1,750,000,000        175.0   
31 December 2012      1,750,000,000        175.0   
                  
Issued and fully paid                 
1 January 2011      1,264,391,221        126.4   
Exercise of share options      5,548,684        0.6   
Share cancellations      (6,955,523     (0.7
Scrip dividend      3,051,689        0.3   
Other      337,750          
31 December 2011      1,266,373,821        126.6   
Exercise of share options      10,002,292        1.0   
Share cancellations      (6,703,400     (0.7
Scrip dividend      2,001,145        0.2   
Treasury share cancellations      (6,266,751     (0.6
31 December 2012      1,265,407,107        126.5   

 

Company’s own shares

The Company’s holdings of own shares are stated at cost and represent shares held in treasury and purchases by the Employee Share Ownership Plan (‘ESOP’) trusts of shares in WPP plc for the purpose of funding certain of the Group’s share-based incentive plans.

 

The trustees of the ESOP purchase the Company’s ordinary shares in the open market using funds provided by the Company. The Company also has an obligation to make regular contributions to the ESOP to enable it to meet its administrative costs. The number and market value of the ordinary shares of the Company held by the ESOP at 31 December 2012 was 22,570,364 (2011: 20,599,871), and £200.4 million (2011: £139.2 million) respectively. There were no ordinary shares held in treasury at 31 December 2012. The number and market value of ordinary shares held in treasury at 31 December 2011 was 6,351,371 and £42.9 million respectively.

 

26. Authorised and issued share capital (continued)

 

 

Share options

WPP Executive Share Option Scheme

As at 31 December 2012, unexercised options over ordinary shares of 1,186,129 and unexercised options over ADRs of 325,435 have been granted under the WPP Executive Share Option Scheme as follows:

 

Number of ordinary

shares under option

   Exercise price
per share (£)
     Exercise dates  
21,197      3.763         2006 - 2013   
21,830      5.520         2008 - 2014   
534,240      5.535         2007 - 2014   
1,185      5.535         2008 - 2014   
463,407      5.595         2006 - 2013   
2,546      5.595         2007 - 2013   
2,902      5.725         2007 - 2014   
11,423      5.775         2009 - 2015   
15,814      5.818         2008 - 2015   
14,304      5.895         2008 - 2015   
10,670      5.903         2011 - 2018   
6,420      6.718         2009 - 2016   
54,526      6.718         2009 - 2016   
12,447      7.378         2014 - 2021   
9,522      7.723         2010 - 2017   
3,696      8.333         2015 - 2022   

 

Number of ADRs

under option

   Exercise price
per ADR ($)
     Exercise dates  
822      30.410         2011 - 2018   
125,981      47.410         2006 - 2013   
1,478      50.670         2008 - 2015   
160,779      50.800         2007 - 2014   
3,275      51.220         2007 - 2014   
2,244      55.740         2008 - 2015   
12,723      57.020         2008 - 2015   
12,402      58.460         2009 - 2016   
844      59.170         2011 - 2018   
938      63.900         2009 - 2020   
3,949      75.940         2010 - 2017   

 

F-33


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

26. Authorised and issued share capital (continued)

 

 

WPP Worldwide Share Ownership Program

As at 31 December 2012, unexercised options over ordinary shares of 10,963,206 and unexercised options over ADRs of 1,571,326 have been granted under the WPP Worldwide Share Ownership Program as follows:

 

Number of ordinary

shares under option

   Exercise price
per share (£)
     Exercise dates  
20,600      3.903         2006 - 2013   
1,000      3.903         2007 - 2013   
12,625      4.819         2011 - 2018   
56,375      5.435         2007 - 2014   
14,000      5.483         2012 - 2016   
621,889      5.483         2012 - 2019   
6,000      5.483         2012 - 2020   
209,680      5.483         2013 - 2019   
51,125      5.608         2012 - 2019   
875      5.775         2008 - 2015   
8,700      5.913         2011 - 2018   
22,750      5.917         2011 - 2018   
315,025      6.028         2011 - 2018   
106,450      6.195         2008 - 2015   
2,459,902      6.268         2014 - 2021   
89,375      6.268         2014 - 2018   
340,177      6.268         2015 - 2021   
2,500      6.668         2009 - 2017   
18,750      6.740         2009 - 2016   
196,525      6.938         2009 - 2016   
7,900      7.005         2010 - 2017   
14,750      7.113         2013 - 2017   
1,854,778      7.113         2013 - 2020   
240,113      7.113         2014 - 2020   
36,625      7.478         2011 - 2017   
63,853      7.543         2014 - 2020   
680,850      7.718         2010 - 2017   
3,510,014      8.458         2015 - 2022   

 

Number of ADRs

under option

   Exercise price
per ADR ($)
     Exercise dates  
4,470      30.800         2006 - 2013   
150,572      44.560         2012 - 2019   
345,463      49.230         2014 - 2021   
17,135      49.880         2007 - 2014   
260,601      56.560         2013 - 2020   
120,260      59.500         2011 - 2018   
53,750      59.520         2008 - 2015   
74,760      60.690         2009 - 2016   
426,660      67.490         2014 - 2021   
117,655      75.760         2010 - 2017   

 

26. Authorised and issued share capital (continued)

 

 

24/7 Real Media, Inc. 2002 Stock Incentive Plan

As at 31 December 2012, unexercised options over ADRs of 30,640 have been granted under the 24/7 Real Media, Inc. 2002 Stock Incentive Plan as follows:

 

Number of ADRs
under option
   Exercise price
per ADR ($)
     Exercise
dates
 
8      1.3400         2007 - 2013   
184      15.8800         2007 - 2014   
427      17.1500         2007 - 2014   
187      20.0700         2007 - 2015   
79      23.1800         2007 - 2015   
263      24.2000         2007 - 2014   
50      25.1500         2007 - 2014   
7,001      27.5000         2007 - 2015   
170      34.6200         2007 - 2015   
89      38.8700         2007 - 2015   
16,476      40.6500         2007 - 2015   
110      41.4700         2007 - 2015   
110      45.2900         2007 - 2016   
118      46.0500         2007 - 2016   
115      49.6000         2007 - 2016   
89      50.4900         2007 - 2016   
472      51.3800         2008 - 2017   
78      52.5900         2008 - 2017   
157      53.4800         2008 - 2017   
314      54.1100         2007 - 2016   
944      54.2400         2007 - 2016   
314      55.2600         2007 - 2016   
74      55.6400         2007 - 2016   
157      56.2700         2007 - 2016   
574      56.7200         2007 - 2016   
235      58.9400         2007 - 2017   
393      60.0200         2007 - 2016   
78      61.2300         2008 - 2017   
108      61.9200         2007 - 2016   
314      62.0500         2007 - 2016   
708      63.8900         2008 - 2017   
112      64.2700         2007 - 2016   
54      64.6500         2007 - 2016   
78      65.5400         2007 - 2016   

 

1999 Worldwide Employee Sharesave Plan

As at 31 December 2012, unexercised options over ordinary shares of 775,351 have been granted under the Taylor Nelson Sofres plc 1999 Worldwide Employee Sharesave Plan as follows:

 

Number of ordinary shares
under option
   Exercise price
per share (£)
     Exercise
dates
 
762,925      1.7300         2013 - 2015   
6,092      2.6500         2012 - 2014   
6,334      3.0000         2011 - 2013   

 

F-34


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

26. Authorised and issued share capital (continued)

 

 

The aggregate status of the WPP Share Option Plans during 2012 was as follows:

 

Movements on options granted (represented in ordinary shares)

 

    1 January
2012
    Granted     Exercised     Lapsed     Outstanding
31 December
2012
    Exercisable
31 December
2012
 
WPP     10,276,370        3,696        (7,223,514     (243,248     2,813,304        2,797,161   
WWOP     18,101,132        5,763,600        (2,499,698     (2,545,198     18,819,836        4,873,574   
Grey     27,295               (27,295                     
24/7     218,915               (44,525     (21,190     153,200        105,970   
TNS     1,002,691               (207,260     (20,080     775,351        12,426   
      29,626,403        5,767,296        (10,002,292     (2,829,716     22,561,691        7,789,131   

 

Weighted-average exercise price for options over

 

     1 January
2012
     Granted      Exercised      Lapsed      Outstanding
31 December
2012
     Exercisable
31 December
2012
 
Ordinary shares (£)                                                
WPP      5.510         8.333         5.443         6.924         5.647         5.620   
WWOP      6.463         8.458         6.010         6.621         7.163         6.465   
TNS      1.755                 1.786         1.726         1.748         2.828   
ADRs ($)                                                      
WPP      46.836                 38.140         48.595         50.373         50.373   
WWOP      54.569         67.490         51.418         53.995         58.581         58.498   
Grey      29.983                 29.983                           
24/7      38.585                 33.185         41.622         39.735         39.327   

 

Options over ordinary shares

Outstanding

 

Range of

exercise

prices

£

  

Weighted average
exercise price

£

   Weighted average
contractual life
Months
1.730 – 8.458    6.699    88

 

Options over ADRs

Outstanding

 

Range of

exercise

prices

£

  

Weighted average
exercise price

£

   Weighted average
contractual life
Months
1.340 – 75.940    56.895    78

 

As at 31 December 2012 there was £8.5 million (2011: £7.9 million) of total unrecognised compensation cost related to share options. That cost is expected to be recognised over a weighted average period of 20 months (2011: 17 months).

 

Share options are satisfied out of newly issued shares.

 

The weighted average fair value of options granted in the year calculated using the Black-Scholes model was as follows:

 

     2012      2011      2010  
Fair value of UK options (shares)      135.3p         120.6p         144.5p   
Fair value of US options (ADRs)    $ 10.90       $ 9.20       $ 10.97   
Weighted average assumptions:                           

UK Risk-free interest rate

     0.56%         0.84%         1.76%   

US Risk-free interest rate

     0.51%         0.67%         1.05%   

Expected life (months)

     48         48         48   

Expected volatility

     27%         30%         30%   

Dividend yield

     2.8%         2.5%         2.5%   

 

26. Authorised and issued share capital (continued)

 

 

Options are issued at an exercise price equal to market value on the date of grant.

 

The weighted average share price of the Group for the year ended 31 December 2012 was £8.17 (2011: £7.11, 2010: £6.78) and the weighted average ADR price for the same period was $64.90 (2011: $57.09, 2010: $52.51).

 

Expected volatility is sourced from external market data and represents the historic volatility in the Group’s share price over a period equivalent to the expected option life.

 

Expected life is based on a review of historic exercise behaviour in the context of the contractual terms of the options, as described in more detail below.

 

Terms of share option plans

The Worldwide Share Ownership Program is open for participation to employees with at least two years’ employment in the Group. It is not available to those participating in other share-based incentive programs or to executive directors. The vesting period for each grant is three years and there are no performance conditions other than continued employment with the Group.

 

The Executive Stock Option Plan has historically been open for participation to WPP Group Leaders, Partners and High Potential Group. It is not currently offered to parent company executive directors. The vesting period is three years and performance conditions include achievement of various TSR (Total Share Owner Return) and EPS (Earnings Per Share) objectives, as well as continued employment. In 2005, the Group moved away from the issuance of stock options for Leaders, Partners and High Potential Group and has since largely made grants of restricted stock instead (note 22).

 

The Group grants stock options with a life of 10 years, including the vesting period. The terms of stock options with performance conditions are such that if, after nine years and eight months, the performance conditions have not been met, then the stock option will vest automatically.

 

F-35


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

 


27. Other reserves

 

Other reserves comprise the following:

 

   

Capital
redemption
reserve

£m

    Equity
reserve
£m
   

Revaluation
reserve

£m

   

Translation
reserve

£m

    Total
other
reserves
£m
 
1 January 2010            (84.6     73.8        1,103.9        1,093.1   
Exchange adjustments on foreign currency net investments                          146.6        146.6   
Loss on revaluation of available for sale investments                   (59.8            (59.8
Recognition and remeasurement of financial instruments            2.9                      2.9   
31 December 2010            (81.7     14.0        1,250.5        1,182.8   
Exchange adjustments on foreign currency net investments                          (250.0     (250.0
Gain on revaluation of available for sale investments                   11.3               11.3   
Recognition and remeasurement of financial instruments            (5.9                   (5.9
Share cancellations     0.7                             0.7   
31 December 2011     0.7        (87.6     25.3        1,000.5        938.9   
Exchange adjustments on foreign currency net investments                          (298.4     (298.4
Gain on revaluation of available for sale investments                   (3.5            (3.5
Recognition and remeasurement of financial instruments            2.7                      2.7   
Share cancellations     0.7                             0.7   
Treasury share cancellations     0.6                             0.6   
Share purchases – close period commitments            (18.3                   (18.3
31 December 2012     2.0        (103.2     21.8        702.1        622.7   

 


 

28. Acquisitions

 

The Group accounts for acquisitions in accordance with IFRS 3 Business Combinations. IFRS 3 requires the acquiree’s identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities (other than non-current assets or disposal groups held for sale) to be recognised at fair value at acquisition date. In assessing fair value at acquisition date, management make their best estimate of the likely outcome where the fair value of an asset or liability may be contingent on a future event. In certain instances, the underlying transaction giving rise to an estimate may not be resolved until some years after the acquisition date. IFRS 3 requires the release to profit of any acquisition reserves which subsequently become excess in the same way as any excess costs over those provided at acquisition date are charged to profit. At each period end management assess provisions and other balances established in respect of acquisitions for their continued probability of occurrence and amend the relevant value accordingly through the consolidated income statement or as an adjustment to goodwill as appropriate under IFRS 3.

 

28. Acquisitions (continued)

 

 

Acquisitions in 2012

The Group acquired a number of subsidiaries in the year. The following table sets out the book values of the identifiable assets and liabilities acquired and their fair value to the Group. The fair value adjustments for certain acquisitions have been determined provisionally at the balance sheet date.

 

     Book
value at
acquisition
£m
    Fair value
adjustments
£m
    Fair
value
to
Group
£m
 
Intangible assets      1.3        185.2        186.5   
Property, plant and equipment      8.5               8.5   
Cash (net of overdrafts)      48.1               48.1   
Trade receivables due within one year      66.9        (1.9     65.0   
Other current assets      36.8               36.8   
Total assets      161.6        183.3        344.9   
Current liabilities      (91.3            (91.3
Trade and other payables due after one year      (3.3     (20.2     (23.5
Deferred tax liabilities      (1.9     (59.4     (61.3
Provisions      (0.9     (11.2     (12.1
Bank loans      (20.0            (20.0
Total liabilities      (117.4     (90.8     (208.2
Net assets      44.2        92.5        136.7   
Non-controlling interests                      (10.2
Fair value of equity stake in associate undertakings before acquisition of controlling interest                      (10.3
Goodwill                      385.3   
Consideration                      501.5   
Consideration satisfied by:                         
Cash                      454.4   
Payments due to vendors                      47.1   

 

Goodwill arising from acquisitions represents the value of synergies with our existing portfolio of businesses and to deliver services to our clients. Goodwill that is expected to be deductible for tax purposes is £34.3 million.

 

Non-controlling interests in acquired companies are measured at the non-controlling interests’ proportionate share of the acquiree’s identifiable net assets.

 

The contribution to revenue and operating profit of acquisitions completed in the year was not material. There were no material acquisitions completed between 31 December 2012 and the date the financial statements have been authorised for issue.

 

F-36


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

28. Acquisitions (continued)

 

 

Acquisitions in 2011

The Group acquired a number of subsidiaries in the year. The following table sets out the book values of the identifiable assets and liabilities acquired and their fair value to the Group. The fair value adjustments for certain acquisitions have been determined provisionally at the balance sheet date.

 

     Book
value at
acquisition
£m
    Fair value
adjustments
£m
    Fair
value
to
Group
£m
 
Intangible assets      2.0        117.6        119.6   
Property, plant and equipment      14.4        (0.4     14.0   
Cash (net of overdrafts)      98.8               98.8   
Trade receivables due within one year      211.3        (1.3     210.0   
Other current assets      16.8        1.3        18.1   
Total assets      343.3        117.2        460.5   
Current liabilities      (283.1            (283.1
Trade and other payables due after one year      (5.7     (27.4     (33.1
Deferred tax liabilities             (37.2     (37.2
Provisions      (3.7     (16.1     (19.8
Bank loans      (17.5            (17.5
Total liabilities      (310.0     (80.7     (390.7
Net assets      33.3        36.5        69.8   
Non-controlling interests                      (20.7
Fair value of equity stake in associate undertakings before acquisition of controlling interest                      (72.6
Goodwill                      454.5   
Consideration                      431.0   
Consideration satisfied by:                         
Cash                      350.6   
Payments due to vendors (note 19)                      80.4   

 

Goodwill arising from acquisitions represents the value of synergies with our existing portfolio of businesses and skilled staff to deliver services to our clients. Goodwill that is expected to be deductible for tax purposes is £126.0 million.

 

Non-controlling interests in acquired companies are measured at the non-controlling interest’s proportionate share of the acquirees’ identifiable net assets.

 

The contribution to revenue and operating profit of acquisitions completed in the year was not material.

 

28. Acquisitions (continued)

 

 

Acquisitions in 2010

The Group acquired a number of subsidiaries in the year. The following table sets out the book values of the identifiable assets and liabilities acquired and their fair value to the Group. The fair value adjustments for certain acquisitions have been determined provisionally at the balance sheet date.

 

     Book
value at
acquisition
£m
    Fair value
adjustments
£m
    Fair
value
to
Group
£m
 
Intangible assets      0.7        25.5        26.2   
Property, plant and equipment      9.1               9.1   
Cash      57.0               57.0   
Trade receivables due within one year      161.7               161.7   
Other current assets      56.2               56.2   
Total assets      284.7        25.5        310.2   
Current liabilities      (259.1            (259.1
Trade and other payables due after one year      (1.1     (3.4     (4.5
Deferred tax liabilities      (0.1     (9.3     (9.4
Provisions      (0.5     (0.7     (1.2
Total liabilities      (260.8     (13.4     (274.2
Net assets      23.9        12.1        36.0   
Non-controlling interests                      (0.5
Fair value of equity stake in associate undertakings before acquisition of controlling interest                      (32.6
Goodwill                      161.1   
Consideration                      164.0   
Consideration satisfied by:                         
Cash                      131.2   
Payments due to vendors (note 19)                      32.8   

 

 

Goodwill arising from acquisitions represents the value of synergies with our existing portfolio of businesses and skilled staff to deliver services to our clients. Goodwill expected to be deductible for tax purposes is £14.3 million.

 

The contribution to revenue and operating profit of acquisitions completed in the year was not material.

 


29. Principal subsidiary undertakings

 

The principal subsidiary undertakings of the Group are:

 

     Country of incorporation
Grey Global Group, Inc    US
J. Walter Thompson Company, Inc    US
GroupM Worldwide, Inc    US
The Ogilvy Group, Inc    US
Young & Rubicam, Inc    US
TNS Group Holdings Ltd    UK

 

All of these subsidiaries are operating companies and are 100% owned by the Group.

 


30. Related party transactions

 

From time to time the Group enters into transactions with its associate undertakings. These transactions were not material for any of the years presented.

 

F-37


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

 


31. Reconciliation to non-GAAP measures of performance

 

Reconciliation of profit before interest and taxation to headline PBIT:

 

   

2012

£m

   

2011

£m

   

2010

£m

 
Profit before interest and taxation     1,310.5        1,258.3        1,028.2   
Amortisation and impairment of acquired intangible assets     171.9        172.0        170.5   
Goodwill impairment     32.0               10.0   
Gains on disposal of investments   (26.8)     (0.4)     (4.1)  
Gains on remeasurement of equity on acquisition of controlling interest     (5.3     (31.6     (13.7
Investment write-downs     19.6        32.8        37.5   
Cost of changes to corporate structure     4.1                 
Gain on sale of freehold property in New York     (71.4              
Restructuring costs     93.4                 
Share of exceptional losses/(gains) of associates     3.0        (2.1     0.3   
Headline PBIT     1,531.0        1,429.0        1,228.7   
Headline PBIT margin (as a percent of revenue)     14.8     14.3     13.2

 


32. Condensed consolidating financial information

 

In September 2012, WPP Finance 2010 issued $500 million of 3.625% bonds due September 2022 and $300 million of 5.125% bonds due September 2042, with WPP plc as parent guarantor and WPP Air 1 Limited, WPP 2008 Limited, and WPP 2005 Limited as subsidiary guarantors.

 

In November 2011, WPP Finance 2010 issued $812 million of 4.75% bonds due November 2021, with WPP plc as parent guarantor and WPP Air 1 Limited, WPP 2008 Limited, and WPP 2005 Limited as subsidiary guarantors. $312 million of these bonds were issued in exchange for $281 million of the 5.875% bonds due June 2014 which were issued by WPP Finance (UK). Consequently, the amount in issue of the 5.875% bonds due June 2014 has reduced to $369 million from the previous $650 million.

 

WPP Finance (UK) is the issuer of $369 million of 5.875% bonds due June 2014, with WPP plc as parent guarantor and WPP Air 1 Limited, WPP 2008 Limited, WPP 2005 Limited, and Young & Rubicam Brands US Holdings as subsidiary guarantors, previously registered under the Securities Act of 1933. A Form 15 giving notice of termination of registration was filed with the SEC in relation to this security on 2 August 2006. In June 2009, WPP Finance (UK) issued $600 million of 8% bonds due September 2014, with WPP plc as parent guarantor and WPP Air 1 Limited, WPP 2008 Limited and WPP 2005 Limited as subsidiary guarantors.

 

The issuer and guarantors of the bonds (issuers and subsidiary guarantors are 100% owned by WPP plc) are each subject to the reporting requirements under section 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934. In accordance with SEC Rule 3-10, condensed consolidating financial information containing financial information for WPP Finance (UK), WPP Finance 2010 and the guarantors is presented beginning on page F-39. Condensed consolidating financial information is prepared in accordance with IFRS as issued by the IASB, except to the extent that, in the parent company, subsidiary issuer and subsidiary guarantors columns investments in subsidiaries are accounted for under the equity method of accounting. Under the equity method, earnings of subsidiaries are reflected as “share of results of subsidiaries” in the income statement and as “investment in subsidiaries” in the balance sheet, as required by the SEC.

 

Although the $600 million, $812 million, $500 million and $300 million bonds do not have the identical subsidiary guarantor structure to the $369 million bonds, the exclusion of the financial information of Young & Rubicam Brands US Holdings has no financial impact on the columns presented in the condensed consolidating financial information for the years ended 31 December 2012, 2011 and 2010, as it is an indirect wholly owned subsidiary of WPP Air 1 Limited with no operations or cash flows of its own and its sole assets are its interests in certain operating subsidiaries.

 

In the event that WPP Finance (UK) and WPP Finance 2010 fail to pay the holders of the securities, thereby requiring WPP plc, WPP 2008 Limited, WPP 2005 Limited, Young & Rubicam Brands US Holdings or WPP Air 1 Limited to make payment pursuant to the terms of its full and unconditional, and joint and several guarantee of those securities, there is no impediment to WPP plc, WPP 2008 Limited, WPP 2005 Limited, Young & Rubicam Brands US Holdings or WPP Air 1 Limited in obtaining reimbursement for any such payments from WPP Finance (UK) and WPP Finance 2010.

 

The condensed consolidating financial information has been presented using the guarantor structure as of 31 December 2012.

 

On 2 January 2013, under the scheme of arrangement discussed on page 7, WPP plc completed a reorganization of its corporate structure (“the reorganization”) and WPP 2012 plc (now known as WPP plc) became the new parent company of the Group.

 

The former WPP plc was renamed WPP 2012 Limited and became a wholly owned subsidiary of WPP plc. Following the reorganization, the bonds are guaranteed by WPP plc as parent guarantor and WPP Air 1 Limited, WPP 2008 Limited, WPP 2005 Limited, WPP 2012 Limited, another company formed as part of the reorganization, WPP Jubilee Limited, and Young & Rubicam Brands US Holdings (only for the $369 million bond) as subsidiary guarantors.

 

F-38


Table of Contents

 

32.    Condensed consolidating financial information (continued)

 

Condensed consolidating income statement information

 

For the year ended 31 December 2012, £m

 

    

WPP

plc

   

Subsidiary

Guarantors 1

    WPP
Finance
(UK)
    WPP
Finance
2010
    Other
Subsidiaries
    Reclassifications /
Eliminations
    Consolidated
WPP plc
 

Revenue

     —         —         —         —         10,373.1        —         10,373.1   

Direct costs

     —         —         —         —         (858.3     —         (858.3

Gross profit

     —         —         —         —         9,514.8        —         9,514.8   

Operating costs

     (5.7     (79.5     (0.1 )     —         (8,188.4     —         (8,273.7

Operating profit/(loss)

     (5.7     (79.5     (0.1 )     —         1,326.4        —         1,241.1   

Share of results of subsidiaries

     877.7        1,135.5        (1.7     —         —         (2,011.5     —    

Share of results of associates

     —         —         —         —         69.4        —         69.4   

Profit/(loss) before interest and taxation

     872.0        1,056.0        (1.8     —         1,395.8        (2,011.5     1,310.5   

Finance income

     —         63.6        41.4        30.2        (49.3     —         85.9   

Finance costs

     (49.3     (244.0     (54.8     (31.9     80.2        —         (299.8

Revaluation of financial instruments

     —         (0.5     —         —         (4.2     —         (4.7

Profit/(loss) before taxation

     822.7        875.1        (15.2     (1.7     1,422.5        (2,011.5     1,091.9   

Taxation

     —         2.6        —         —         (199.8     —         (197.2

Profit/(loss) for the year

     822.7        877.7        (15.2     (1.7     1,222.7        (2,011.5     894.7   

Attributable to:

                                                        

Equity holders of the parent

     822.7        877.7        (15.2     (1.7     1,150.7        (2,011.5     822.7   

Non-controlling interests

     —         —         —         —         72.0        —         72.0   
       822.7        877.7        (15.2     (1.7     1,222.7        (2,011.5     894.7   

 

For the year ended 31 December 2011, £m

    

WPP

plc

   

Subsidiary

Guarantors 1

    WPP
Finance
(UK)
    WPP
Finance
2010
    Other
Subsidiaries
    Reclassifications /
Eliminations
    Consolidated
WPP plc
 

Revenue

     —         —         —         —         10,021.8        —         10,021.8   

Direct costs

     —         —         —         —         (783.3     —         (783.3

Gross profit

     —         —         —         —         9,238.5        —         9,238.5   

Operating costs

     (5.5     (62.5     —         —         (7,978.3     —         (8,046.3

Operating profit/(loss)

     (5.5     (62.5     —         —         1,260.2        —         1,192.2   

Share of results of subsidiaries

     886.4        1,148.8        (1.9     —         —         (2,033.3     —    

Share of results of associates

     —         —         —         —         66.1        —         66.1   

Profit/(loss) before interest and taxation

     880.9        1,086.3        (1.9     —         1,326.3        (2,033.3     1,258.3   

Finance income

     —         60.8        3.9        0.8        31.8        —         97.3   

Finance costs

     (40.8     (268.5     (75.0     (2.7     89.8        —         (297.2

Revaluation of financial instruments

     —         4.7        —         —         (54.7     —         (50.0

Profit/(loss) before taxation

     840.1        883.3        (73.0     (1.9     1,393.2        (2,033.3     1,008.4   

Taxation

     —         3.1        —         —         (95.0     —         (91.9

Profit/(loss) for the year

     840.1        886.4        (73.0     (1.9     1,298.2        (2,033.3     916.5   

Attributable to:

                                                        

Equity holders of the parent

     840.1        886.4        (73.0     (1.9     1,221.8        (2,033.3     840.1   

Non-controlling interests

     —         —         —         —         76.4        —         76.4   
       840.1        886.4        (73.0     (1.9     1,298.2        (2,033.3     916.5   

 

Note

1  

Includes: WPP Air 1 Limited, WPP 2008 Limited, WPP 2005 Limited and Young & Rubicam Brands US Holdings.

 

F-39


Table of Contents

 

32.    Condensed consolidating financial information (continued)

 

 

Condensed consolidating income statement information (continued)

 

For the year ended 31 December 2010, £m

    

WPP

plc

   

Subsidiary

Guarantors 1

    WPP
Finance
(UK)
   

WPP
Finance

2010

     Other
Subsidiaries
    Reclassifications /
Eliminations
    Consolidated
WPP plc
 

Revenue

     —         —          —          —           9,331.0        —          9,331.0   

Direct costs

     —          —          —          —           (770.5     —          (770.5

Gross profit

     —          —          —          —           8,560.5        —          8,560.5   

Operating costs

     (3.1     19.4        (0.1     —           (7,603.7     —          (7,587.5

Operating profit/(loss)

     (3.1     19.4        (0.1     —           956.8        —          973.0   

Share of results of subsidiaries

     626.8        734.7        —          —           —          (1,361.5     —     

Share of results of associates

     —          —          —          —           55.2        —          55.2   

Profit/(loss) before interest and taxation

     623.7        754.1        (0.1     —           1,012.0        (1,361.5     1,028.2   

Finance income

     —          94.6        18.3        —           (31.2     —          81.7   

Finance costs

     (37.7     (224.5     (57.6     —           43.0        —          (276.8

Revaluation of financial instruments

     —          0.7        —          —           17.5        —          18.2   

Profit/(loss) before taxation

     586.0        624.9        (39.4     —           1,041.3        (1,361.5     851.3   

Taxation

     —          1.9        —          —           (192.2     —          (190.3

Profit/(loss) for the year

     586.0        626.8        (39.4     —           849.1        (1,361.5     661.0   

Attributable to:

                                                         

Equity holders of the parent

     586.0        626.8        (39.4     —           774.1        (1,361.5     586.0   

Non-controlling interests

     —          —          —          —           75.0        —          75.0   
       586.0        626.8        (39.4     —           849.1        (1,361.5     661.0   

 

Note

1  

Includes: WPP Air 1 Limited, WPP 2008 Limited, WPP 2005 Limited and Young & Rubicam Brands US Holdings.

 

F-40


Table of Contents

 

32.    Condensed consolidating financial information (continued)

 

Condensed consolidating statement of comprehensive income

 

For the year ended 31 December 2012, £m

 

   

WPP

plc

   

Subsidiary

Guarantors 1

    WPP
Finance
(UK)
   

WPP

Finance

2010

    Other
Subsidiaries
    Reclassifications /
Eliminations
    Consolidated
WPP plc
 

Profit/(loss) for the year

    822.7       877.7       (15.2 )     (1.7     1,222.7        (2,011.5 )     894.7   
Exchange adjustments on foreign currency net investments     (298.4 )     (298.4 )     6.6       0.1       (330.7     615.6        (305.2
Loss on revaluation of available for sale investments     (3.5 )     (3.5 )     —          —          (3.5     7.0        (3.5

Actuarial loss on defined benefit pension plans

    (83.9     (83.9     —          —          (83.9     167.8       (83.9
Deferred tax on defined benefit pension plans     7.3        7.3        —          —          7.3        (14.6 )     7.3   

Other comprehensive (loss)/income relating to the year

    (378.5     (378.5     6.6        0.1       (410.8 )     775.8        (385.3 )

Total comprehensive income/(loss) relating to the year

    444.2       499.2       (8.6     (1.6     811.9        (1,235.7 )     509.4   
Attributable to:                                                        
Equity holders of the parent     444.2       499.2       (8.6 )     (1.6     746.7        (1,235.7 )     444.2   
Non-controlling interests     —          —          —          —          65.2        —          65.2   
      444.2       499.2       (8.6 )     (1.6     811.9        (1,235.7 )     509.4   

 

For the year ended 31 December 2011, £m

 

   

WPP

plc

   

Subsidiary

Guarantors 1

    WPP
Finance
(UK)
   

WPP

Finance

2010

    Other
Subsidiaries
    Reclassifications /
Eliminations
    Consolidated
WPP plc
 
Profit/(loss) for the year     840.1       886.4       (73.0 )     (1.9     1,298.2        (2,033.3 )     916.5   
Exchange adjustments on foreign currency net investments     (250.0 )     (250.0 )     (3.0 )     (0.1 )     (248.1     494.9       (256.3
Gain on revaluation of available for sale investments     11.3       11.3       —          —          11.3        (22.6 )     11.3   

Actuarial loss on defined benefit pension plans

    (72.0     (72.0     —          —          (72.0     144.0       (72.0
Deferred tax on defined benefit pension plans     0.1        0.1        —          —          0.1        (0.2 )     0.1   

Other comprehensive loss relating to the year

    (310.6     (310.6     (3.0     (0.1 )     (308.7 )     616.1        (316.9 )

Total comprehensive income/(loss) relating to the year

    529.5       575.8       (76.0     (2.0     989.5        (1,417.2 )     599.6   
Attributable to:                                                        
Equity holders of the parent     529.5       575.8       (76.0 )     (2.0     919.4        (1,417.2 )     529.5   
Non-controlling interests     —          —          —          —          70.1        —          70.1   
      529.5       575.8       (76.0 )     (2.0     989.5        (1,417.2 )     599.6   

 

For the year ended 31 December 2010, £m

 

   

WPP

plc

   

Subsidiary

Guarantors 1

    WPP
Finance
(UK)
   

WPP

Finance

2010

    Other
Subsidiaries
    Reclassifications /
Eliminations
    Consolidated
WPP plc
 

Profit/(loss) for the year

    586.0       626.8       (39.4 )     —         849.1        (1,361.5 )     661.0   

Exchange adjustments on foreign currency net investments

    146.6       146.6       (1.2 )     —         183.6        (319.3 )     156.3   

Loss on revaluation of available for sale investments

    (59.8 )     (59.8 )     —         —         (59.8     119.6       (59.8

Actuarial loss on defined benefit pension plans

    (0.4     (0.4     —         —         (0.4     0.8       (0.4

Deferred tax on defined benefit pension plans

    0.2        0.2        —         —         0.2        (0.4 )     0.2   

Other comprehensive income/(loss) relating to the period

    86.6        86.6        (1.2     —         123.6        (199.3     96.3  

Total comprehensive income/(loss) relating to the period

    672.6        713.4       (40.6     —         972.7        (1,560.8 )     757.3   

Attributable to:

                                                       

Equity holders of the parent

    672.6       713.4       (40.6 )     —         888.0        (1,560.8 )     672.6   

Non-controlling interests

    —          —          —          —          84.7        —          84.7   
      672.6       713.4       (40.6 )     —         972.7        (1,560.8 )     757.3   

 

Note

1 Includes:  

WPP Air 1 Limited, WPP 2008 Limited, WPP 2005 Limited and Young & Rubicam Brands US Holdings

 

F-41


Table of Contents

 

32.    Condensed consolidating financial information (continued)

 

Condensed consolidating cash flow statement information

 

For the year ended 31 December 2012, £m

 

     WPP
plc
    Subsidiary
Guarantors 1
   

WPP

Finance

(UK)

    WPP
Finance
2010
    Other
Subsidiaries
    Reclassifications /
Eliminations
    

Consolidated

WPP plc

 
Net cash inflow/(outflow) from operating activities      (43.9     1,579.4        (652.6     (489.7     515.1        —           908.3   
Investing activities                                                          
Acquisitions and disposals      —          —          —          —          (566.5     —           (566.5
Purchases of property, plant and equipment      —          (5.5     —          —          (284.8     —           (290.3

Purchases of other intangible assets (including capitalised computer software)

     —          —          —          —          (39.8     —           (39.8
Proceeds on disposal of property, plant and equipment      —          —          —          —          123.5        —           123.5   
Net cash outflow from investing activities      —          (5.5     —          —          (767.6     —           (773.1
Financing activities                                                          
Share option proceeds      56.0        —          —          —          —          —           56.0   
Cash consideration for non-controlling interests      —          —          —          —          (20.1     —           (20.1
Share repurchases and buy-backs      (55.7     —          —          —          (78.8     —           (134.5
Net increase/(decrease) in borrowings      —          —          —          499.4        (118.9     —           380.5   
Financing and share issue costs      (0.2 )     —          —          (7.9     (0.1     —           (8.2
Capital contribution (paid)/received      (287.7     —          —          —          287.7        —           —     
Equity dividends paid      (18.9     —          —          —          (287.7     —           (306.6

Dividends paid to non-controlling interests in subsidiary undertakings

     —          —          —          —          (51.9     —           (51.9
Net cash (outflow)/inflow from financing activities      (306.5     —          —          491.5        (269.8     —           (84.8
Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents      (350.4     1,573.9        (652.6     1.8       (522.3     —           50.4   
Translation differences      0.1        (18.6     (30.6     (6.8     (63.4     —           (119.3
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year      (144.4     (2,923.5     679.6        —          3,816.5        —           1,428.2   
Cash and cash equivalents at end of year      (494.7     (1,368.2     (3.6     (5.0 )     3,230.8        —           1,359.3   

 

For the year ended 31 December 2011, £m

 

     WPP
plc
    Subsidiary
Guarantors 1
   

WPP

Finance

(UK) 2

    WPP
Finance
2010 2
     Other
Subsidiaries 2
    Reclassifications /
Eliminations
    

Consolidated

WPP plc

 

Net cash inflow/(outflow) from operating activities

     474.2        (404.7     (46.1     —           641.8        —           665.2   

Investing activities

                                                          

Acquisitions and disposals

     —          —          —          —           (469.8     —           (469.8

Purchases of property, plant and equipment

     —          (5.0     —          —           (211.1     —           (216.1

Purchases of other intangible assets (including capitalised computer software)

     —          —          —          —           (37.1     —           (37.1

Proceeds on disposal of property, plant and equipment

     —          0.5        —          —           12.7        —           13.2   

Net cash outflow from investing activities

     —          (4.5     —          —           (705.3     —           (709.8

Financing activities

                                                          

Share option proceeds

     28.8        —          —          —           —          —           28.8   

Cash consideration for non-controlling interests

     —          —          —          —           (62.6     —           (62.6

Share repurchases and buy-backs

     (75.7     —          —          —           (106.5     —           (182.2

Net increase in borrowings

     —          —          —          —           301.4        —           301.4   

Financing and share issue costs

     —          —          —          —           (11.9     —           (11.9

Capital contribution (paid)/received

     (554.9     475.1        —          —           79.8        —           —     

Equity dividends paid

     (18.0     (121.0     —          —           (79.4     —           (218.4

Dividends paid to non-controlling interests in subsidiary undertakings

     —          —          —          —           (62.2     —           (62.2

Net cash (outflow)/inflow from financing activities

     (619.8     354.1        —          —           58.6        —           (207.1

Net decrease in cash and cash equivalents

     (145.6     (55.1     (46.1     —           (4.9     —           (251.7

Translation differences

     (0.2     (29.2     3.7        —           (4.2     —           (29.9

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

     1.4        (2,839.2     722.0        —           3,825.6        —           1,709.8   

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

     (144.4     (2,923.5     679.6        —           3,816.5        —           1,428.2   

 

Note

1  

Includes: WPP Air 1 Limited, WPP 2008 Limited, WPP 2005 Limited and Young & Rubicam Brands US Holdings.

2    

Net cash inflow/(outflow) from operating activities and financing activities figures have been restated to better reflect the nature of the transactions.

 

F-42


Table of Contents

 

32.    Condensed consolidating financial information (continued)

 

 

Condensed consolidating cash flow statement information (continued)

 

For the year ended 31 December 2010, £m

 

     WPP
plc
    Subsidiary
Guarantors 1
   

WPP

Finance

(UK)

   

WPP
Finance

2010

     Other
Subsidiaries
    Reclassifications /
Eliminations
    

Consolidated

WPP plc

 

Net cash inflow/(outflow) from operating activities

     28.1        (395.6     (30.6     —           1,759.3        —           1,361.2   

Investing activities

                                                          

Acquisitions and disposals

     —          20.2        —          —           (220.3     —           (200.1

Purchases of property, plant and equipment

     —          (3.9     —          —           (186.6     —           (190.5

Purchases of other intangible assets (including capitalised computer software)

     —          —          —          —           (27.0     —           (27.0

Proceeds on disposal of property, plant and equipment

     —          —          —          —           7.6        —           7.6   

Net cash (outflow)/inflow from investing activities

     —          16.3        —          —           (426.3     —           (410.0

Financing activities

                                                          

Share option proceeds

     42.7        —          —          —           —          —           42.7   

Cash consideration for non-controlling interests

     —          —          —          —           (15.1     —           (15.1

Share repurchases and buy-backs

     —          —          —          —           (46.4     —           (46.4

Net increase in borrowings

     —          —          —          —           19.8        —           19.8   

Financing and share issue costs

     —          —          —          —           (3.5     —           (3.5

Capital contribution (paid)/received

     —          —          —          —           —          —           —     

Equity dividends paid

     (13.4     (187.0     —          —           —          —           (200.4

Dividends paid to non-controlling interests in subsidiary undertakings

     —          —          —          —           (66.7     —           (66.7

Net cash (outflow)/inflow from financing activities

     29.3        (187.0     —          —           (111.9     —           (269.6

Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

     57.4        (566.3     (30.6     —           1,221.1        —           681.6   

Translation differences

     0.1        (27.9     25.9        —           84.1        —           82.2   

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

     (56.1     (2,245.0     726.7        —           2,520.4        —           946.0   

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

     1.4        (2,839.2     722.0        —           3,825.6        —           1,709.8   

 

Note

1  

Includes: WPP Air 1 Limited, WPP 2008 Limited, WPP 2005 Limited and Young & Rubicam Brands US Holdings.

 

F-43


Table of Contents

 

32.    Condensed consolidating financial information (continued)

 

Condensed consolidating balance sheet information

 

At 31 December 2012, £m

 

    

WPP

plc

    Subsidiary
guarantors 1
    WPP
Finance
(UK)
    WPP
Finance
2010
     Other
Subsidiaries
    Reclassifications/
Eliminations
    Consolidated
WPP plc
 

Non-current assets

                                                         

Intangible assets:

                                                         

Goodwill

     —          —          —          —           9,457.2        —          9,457.2   

Other

     —          —          —          —           1,827.4        —          1,827.4   

Property, plant and equipment

     —          12.2        —          —           756.1        —          768.3   

Investment in subsidiaries

     7,877.5        13,319.6        —          —           —          (21,197.1     —     

Interests in associates and joint ventures

     —          —          —          —           887.2        —          887.2   

Other investments

     —          —          —          —           176.5        —          176.5   

Deferred tax assets

     —          —          —          —           91.2        —          91.2   

Trade and other receivables

     —          74.9        —          —           170.2        —          245.1   
       7,877.5        13,406.7        —          —           13,365.8        (21,197.1     13,452.9   

Current assets

                                                         

Inventory and work in progress

     —          —          —          —           348.2        —          348.2   

Corporate income tax recoverable

     —          —          —          —           124.2        —          124.2   

Trade and other receivables

     0.3       135.8        0.6        —           8,870.3        —          9,007.0   

Cash and short-term deposits

     1.2       1,763.0        —          —           3,816.7        (3,635.6     1,945.3   
       1.5       1,898.8        0.6        —           13,159.4        (3,635.6     11,424.7   

Current Liabilities

                                                         

Trade and other payables

     (23.9     (119.0     (9.2     (9.5      (10,746.2     —          (10,907.8

Corporate income tax payable

     —          —          —          —           (102.9     —          (102.9

Bank overdrafts and loans

     (495.9     (3,631.1     (3.6 )     (5.0 )      (585.9     3,635.6        (1,085.9
       (519.8     (3,750.1     (12.8     (14.5      (11,435.0     3,635.6        (12,096.6

Net current (liabilities)/assets

     (518.3     (1,851.3     (12.2     (14.5      1,724.4        —          (671.9

Total assets less current liabilities

     7,359.2        11,555.4        (12.2     (14.5      15,090.2        (21,197.1     12,781.0   

Non-current liabilities

                                                         

Bonds and bank loans

     (435.0     (1,042.0     (594.8     (980.2      (628.6     —          (3,680.6

Trade and other payables

     —          (51.7     (3.6     —           (460.3     3.6        (512.0

Corporate income tax payable

     —          —          —          —           (375.3     —          (375.3

Deferred tax liabilities

     —          —          —          —           (680.3     —          (680.3

Provision for post-employment benefits

     —          —          —          —           (335.6     —          (335.6

Provisions for liabilities and charges

     —          —          —          —           (136.6     —          (136.6
       (435.0     (1,093.7     (598.4     (980.2      (2,616.7     3.6        (5,720.4

Net intercompany (payable)/receivable

     (113.2     (2,584.2     443.3        991.1         1,263.0        —          —     

Net assets/(liabilities)

     6,811.0        7,877.5        (167.3     (3.6      13,736.5        (21,193.5     7,060.6   

Attributable to:

                                                         

Equity share owners’ funds

     6,811.0        7,877.5        (167.3     (3.6      13,486.9        (21,193.5     6,811.0   

Non-controlling interests

     —          —          —          —           249.6        —          249.6   

Total equity

     6,811.0        7,877.5        (167.3     (3.6      13,736.5        (21,193.5     7,060.6   

 

Note

1    

Includes: WPP Air 1 Limited, WPP 2008 Limited, WPP 2005 Limited and Young & Rubicam Brands US Holdings.

 

F-44


Table of Contents

 

32.    Condensed consolidating financial information (continued)

 

 

Condensed consolidating balance sheet information (continued)

 

At 31 December 2011, £m

 

    

WPP

plc

    Subsidiary
guarantors 1
    WPP
Finance
(UK)
    WPP
Finance
2010
    Other
Subsidiaries
    Reclassifications/
Eliminations
    Consolidated
WPP plc
 

Non-current assets

                                                        

Intangible assets:

                                                        

Goodwill

     —          —          —          —          9,430.8        —          9,430.8   

Other

     —          —          —          —          1,859.9        —          1,859.9   

Property, plant and equipment

     —          8.0        —          —          720.3        —          728.3   

Investment in subsidiaries

     7,350.0        13,282.1        —          —          —          (20,632.1     —     

Interests in associates and joint ventures

     —          —          —          —          801.3        —          801.3   

Other investments

     —          —          —          —          190.8        —          190.8   

Deferred tax assets

     —          —          —          —          86.0        —          86.0   

Trade and other receivables

     —          128.9        —          —          180.2        —          309.1   
       7,350.0        13,419.0        —          —          13,269.3        (20,632.1     13,406.2   

Current assets

                                                        

Inventory and work in progress

     —          —          —          —          333.9        —          333.9   

Corporate income tax recoverable

     —          —          —          —          88.5        —          88.5   

Trade and other receivables

     —          109.4        2.1        0.2        8,808.0        —          8,919.7   

Cash and short-term deposits

     0.5        1,123.9        679.6        —          4,334.9        (4,192.3     1,946.6   
       0.5        1,233.3        681.7        0.2        13,565.3        (4,192.3     11,288.7   

Current Liabilities

                                                        

Trade and other payables

     (5.2     (87.5     (9.6     (4.0     (11,059.2     —          (11,165.5

Corporate income tax payable

     —          —          —          —          (113.4     —          (113.4

Bank overdrafts and loans

     (144.9     (4,047.4     —          —          (518.4     4,192.3        (518.4
       (150.1     (4,134.9     (9.6     (4.0     (11,691.0     4,192.3        (11,797.3

Net current (liabilities)/assets

     (149.6     (2,901.6     672.1        (3.8     1,874.3        —          (508.6

Total assets less current liabilities

     7,200.4        10,517.4        672.1        (3.8     15,143.6        (20,632.1     12,897.6   

Non-current liabilities

                                                        

Bonds and bank loans

     (424.0     (1,586.4     (621.9     (518.3     (742.4     —          (3,893.0

Trade and other payables

     —          (109.5     (2.0     —          (443.6     2.0        (553.1

Corporate income tax payable

     —          —          —          —          (379.5     —          (379.5

Deferred tax liabilities

     —          —          —          —          (741.4     —          (741.4

Provision for post-employment benefits

     —          —          —          —          (282.3     —          (282.3

Provisions for liabilities and charges

     —          —          —          —          (154.0     —          (154.0
       (424.0     (1,695.9     (623.9     (518.3     (2,743.2     2.0        (6,003.3

Net intercompany (payable)/receivable

     (113.1     (1,471.5     (206.9     520.1        1,271.4        —          —     

Net assets/(liabilities)

     6,663.3        7,350.0        (158.7     (2.0     13,671.8        (20,630.1     6,894.3   

Attributable to:

                                                        

Equity share owners’ funds

     6,663.3        7,350.0        (158.7     (2.0     13,440.8        (20,630.1     6,663.3   

Non-controlling interests

     —          —          —          —          231.0        —          231.0   

Total equity

     6,663.3        7,350.0        (158.7     (2.0     13,671.8        (20,630.1     6,894.3   

 

Note

1    

Includes: WPP Air 1 Limited, WPP 2008 Limited, WPP 2005 Limited and Young & Rubicam Brands US Holdings.

 

F-45


Table of Contents

REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

 

 

To the Board of Directors and Shareholder of WPP DAS Ltd

 

We have audited the accompanying balance sheets of WPP DAS Ltd (the “Trust”) as at 31 December 2012 and 2011 and the related cash flow statements and statement of changes in equity for each of the three years in the period ended 31 December 2012. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Trust’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits.

 

We conducted our audits in accordance with standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. The Trust is not required to have an audit of its internal control over financial reporting. Our audit includes consideration of internal control over financial reporting as a basis for designing audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing any opinion on the Trust’s internal control over financial reporting. Accordingly, we express no such separate opinion. Our audits of the financial statements included examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, and evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

 

In our opinion, such financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of the Trust as at 31 December 2012 and 2011, and its cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended 31 December 2012, in conformity with International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board.

 

/s/ Deloitte LLP

Deloitte LLP

London, United Kingdom

30 April 2013

 

F-46


Table of Contents

Cash flow statement

 

For the years ended 31 December 2012, 2011 and 2010

 

     Notes   

2012

£m

   

2011

£m

   

2010

£m

 

Net cash inflow from operating activities

                          

Investing activities

                          

Financing activities

                          

Issue of ordinary shares

   3      287.7        79.4          

Dividends paid

   4      (287.7     (79.4       

Net cash inflow from financing activities

                          

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents

                          

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

                          

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

                          

Note

The accompanying notes form an integral part of this cash flow statement.

 

Balance sheet

 

At 31 December 2012, 2011

 

    

2012

£m

  

2011

£m

Assets

     

Liabilities

     

Net assets

     

Equity

     

Note

The accompanying notes form an integral part of this balance sheet.

 

Statement of changes in equity

 

For the years ended 31 December 2012, 2011 and 2010

 

     Notes     

Share
capital

£m

   

Distributable
Reserve

£m

   

Total

£m

 

At 31 December 2009

                              

Issue of ordinary shares

     3         187.0               187.0   

Capital reduction

     3         (187.0     187.0          

Dividends

     4                (187.0     (187.0

At 31 December 2010

                              

Issue of ordinary shares

     3         200.4                200.4   

Capital reduction

     3         (200.4     200.4           

Dividends

     4                (200.4     (200.4

At 31 December 2011

                              

Issue of ordinary shares

     3         287.7                287.7   

Capital reduction

     3         (287.7     287.7          

Dividends

     4                (287.7     (287.7

At 31 December 2012

                              

Note

The accompanying notes form an integral part of this statement of changes in equity.

 

F-47


Table of Contents

Notes to the financial statements

 


1. The dividend access trust

 

WPP DAS Limited (the “Trust”) was established on 9 July 2008 by WPP 2012 Limited (formerly known as WPP plc) to which the Trust issued a called-up share capital of 1 ordinary share with a nominal value of £1. The Trust is governed by the applicable laws of England and Wales and is a resident for tax purposes in the United Kingdom, WPP 2012 Limited is a resident for tax purposes in the Republic of Ireland. The Trust is a wholly owned subsidiary of WPP 2008 Limited which is an indirect wholly owned subsidiary of WPP 2012 Limited.

 

WPP DAS Limited was formed as part of WPP 2012 Limited’s Dividend Access Plan, which was primarily designed to ensure that its share owners may continue to receive UK dividends, meaning in particular that under the Dividend Access Plan, no Irish tax is required to be withheld from the payment of dividends to share owners. To facilitate the Dividend Access Plan, in April 2009 the Trust issued one non-voting dividend access share with a nominal value of £1 to the trustee. WPP share owners will not have any interest in the dividend access share and will not have any rights against the Trust as the issuer of the dividend access share. The only assets held in trust for the benefit of share owners will be dividends paid to the trustee in respect of the dividend access share.

 

To ensure compliance with UK trust law rules, the period during which the dividend access trust may continue is restricted. However, the dividend access trust under current law is able to continue for 80 years from inception.

 

The Dividend Access Plan was terminated on 2 January 2013, pursuant to the Scheme of Arrangement becoming effective. Following the Scheme, the new parent company (WPP plc) is resident for tax purposes in the UK.

 


2. Accounting policies

 

Basis of preparation

The financial statements have been prepared under the historical cost convention and in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) as they apply to the financial statements of the Trust for the year ended 31 December 2012.

 

The financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors and authorised for issue on 30 April 2013.

 

Income statement and statement of comprehensive income

An income statement and a statement of comprehensive income are not presented with these financial statements because the Trust did not receive income, incur expense or recognise any gain or loss during the periods presented.

 

The directors received no remuneration for services to the Trust and the Trust had no employees during the periods presented. All operating expenses were borne by WPP 2005 Limited.

 

Functional currency

The functional currency of the Trust is pounds sterling.

 

Taxation

The Trust is not required to withhold at source any amount in respect of UK tax from dividend payments it makes under the Dividend Access Plan regardless of who the recipient of the payments is.

 


3. Share capital and distributable reserve

 

On 25 March 2010 the Trust issued 117,301,956 ordinary shares of £1 each to another Group company and on the same date a capital reduction was performed. On 28 October 2010 the Trust issued a further 69,706,978 ordinary shares of £1 each and on the same date a capital reduction was performed. As a result of this transaction the Trust remained with called-up share capital of 1 ordinary share of £1 and 1 dividend access share of £1.

 

On 29 June 2011 the Trust issued 121,002,475 ordinary shares of £1 each to another Group company and on the same date a capital reduction was performed. On 8 November 2011 the Trust issued a further 79,370,302 ordinary shares of £1 each and on the same date a capital reduction was performed. As a result of this transaction the Trust remained with called-up share capital of 1 ordinary share of £1 and 1 dividend access share of £1.

 

On 3 July 2012 the Trust issued 193,551,933 ordinary shares of £1 each to another Group company and on the same date a capital reduction was performed. On 6 July 2012 the Trust issued a further 94,175,711 ordinary shares of £1 each and on 7 November 2012 a capital reduction was performed. As a result of this transaction the Trust remained with called-up share capital of 1 ordinary share of £1 and 1 dividend access share of £1.

 


4. Dividends

 

    

2012

£m

    

2011

£m

    

2010

£m

 
2009 second interim dividend of 10.28p per ordinary share 1                      117.3   
2010 first interim dividend of 5.97p per ordinary share 1                      69.7   
2010 second interim dividend of 11.82p per ordinary share 1              121.0           
2011 first interim dividend of 7.46p per ordinary share              79.4           
2011 second interim dividend of 17.14p per ordinary share      193.5                   
2012 first interim dividend of 8.80p per ordinary share      94.2                   
       287.7         200.4         187.0   

 

1    

This dividend was settled in cash by another Group company on behalf of the Trust.


 

F-48


Table of Contents

Exhibit Index

 

Exhibit No.

  

Exhibit Title

  2.3    Agreement of Registrant to file, if requested by the Securities and Exchange Commission, instruments relating to $650,000,000 5.875% Notes due 2014.
  2.9    Agreement of Registrant to file, if requested by the Securities and Exchange Commission, instruments relating to a U.S.$1,050,000,000 and £375,000,000 Revolving Credit Facilities Agreement (incorporating a U.S.$825,000,000 Swingline Facility) dated 30 November 2011, and Amended and Restated on 14 December 2012.
2.15    Agreement of Registrant to file, if requested by the Securities and Exchange Commission, instruments relating to U.S.$500,000,000 3.625% Guaranteed Senior Notes due September 2022 and $300,000,000 5.125% Guaranteed Senior Notes due 2042.
  4.9    WPP Executive Stock Option Plan, as amended through 12 November 2012.
4.10    WPP plc Restricted Stock Plan, as amended through 12 November 2012.
4.11    WPP 2005 Executive Stock Option Plan, as amended through 12 November 2012.
4.12    WPP plc Annual Bonus Deferral Programme, as amended through 12 November 2012.
4.14    WPP 2008 Executive Stock Option Plan, as amended through 12 November 2012.
4.29    WPP Group plc 2004 Leadership Equity Acquisition Plan, as amended through 12 November 2012.
4.30    WPP plc Leadership Equity Acquisition Plan III, as amended through 10 December 2012.
4.32    WPP 2012 Executive Stock Option Plan.
  8.1    List of subsidiaries.
12.1    Certification of Chief Executive.
12.2    Certification of Finance Director.
13.1    Certification of Chief Executive under 18 U.S.C. Section 1350.
13.2    Certification of Finance Director under 18 U.S.C. Section 1350.
14.1    Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm (for WPP plc and subsidiaries).
14.2   

Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm (for WPP DAS Limited).

Exhibit 2.3

WPP plc

27 Farm Street

London W1J 5RJ, England

                    30 April 2013

Securities and Exchange Commission

100 F Street, N.E.

Washington, D.C. 20549

Dear Sir or Madam:

In 2004 WPP Finance (UK), a subsidiary of the Registrant, issued U.S.$650,000,000 5.875% Notes due 2014 (the “5.875% Notes”). The 5.87% Notes are guaranteed by WPP 2012 Limited (formerly known as WPP plc), WPP Air 1 Limited, WPP 2005 Limited, WPP 2008 Limited, Young & Rubicam Brands US Holdings, WPP plc and WPP Jubilee Limited.

The Company hereby agrees, pursuant to instruction 2(b)(i) to the Exhibits to Form 20-F, to furnish the Securities and Exchange Commission with a copy of the instruments relating to the 5.875% Notes upon request.

 

Very truly yours,

 

WPP PLC

By:   /s/ Paul W.G. Richardson
 

Paul W.G. Richardson

Group Finance Director

Exhibit 2.9

WPP plc

27 Farm Street

London W1J 5RJ, England

                    30 April 2013

Securities and Exchange Commission

100 F Street, N.E.

Washington, D.C. 20549

Dear Sir or Madam:

Reference is made to an Amendment and Restatement Agreement, dated 14 December 2012, by and among WPP CP Finance plc and WPP Finance Co. Limited, as Borrowers, WPP 2012 plc, WPP Jubilee Limited, WPP 2012 Limited (formerly WPP plc), WPP 2005 Limited, WPP 2008 Limited, WPP Air 1 Limited and WPP CP Finance plc, as Guarantors, and Citibank International plc, as Facility Agent, relating to a US$1,050,000,000 and £375,000,000 Revolving Credit Facilities Agreement (Incorporating a US$825,000,000 Swingline Facility) dated 30 November 2011 (the “Loan Facility”)

The Company hereby agrees, pursuant to instruction 2(b)(i) to the Exhibits to Form 20-F, to furnish the Securities and Exchange Commission with a copy of the instruments relating to the Loan Facility upon request.

 

Very truly yours,

 

WPP PLC

By:   /s/ Paul W.G. Richardson
 

Paul W.G. Richardson

Group Finance Director

Exhibit 2.15

 

WPP plc

27 Farm Street

London W1J 5RJ, England

 

30 April 2013

 

Securities and Exchange Commission

100 F Street, N.E.

Washington, D.C. 20549

 

Dear Sir or Madam:

 

In 2012 WPP Finance 2010, a subsidiary of the Registrant, issued U.S.$500,000,000 3.625% Guaranteed Senior Notes due September 2022 (the “3.625% Notes”) and $300,000,000 5.125% Guaranteed Senior Notes due 2042 (the “5.125% Notes”). The 3.625% Notes and the 5.125% Notes are guaranteed by WPP 2012 Limited (formerly known as WPP plc), WPP Air 1 Limited, WPP 2008 Limited, WPP 2005 Limited, WPP plc and WPP Jubilee Limited.

 

The Company hereby agrees, pursuant to instruction 2(b)(i) to the Exhibits to Form 20-F, to furnish the Securities and Exchange Commission with a copy of the instruments relating to the 3.625% Notes and 5.125% Notes upon request.

 

Very truly yours,

 

WPP PLC

By:

 

/s/ Paul W.G. Richardson

 

 

Paul W.G. Richardson

Group Finance Director

Exhibit 4.9

 

   

THE WPP EXECUTIVE STOCK OPTION PLAN

As adopted by the Directors on 24th June 1996 and amended on 23rd April 1997, 24th September, 1998, 5th May 1999 (with the approval of the shareholders on 28th June 1999), 22nd September 1999, 20th September 2000 (with the approval of shareholders on 26th June, 2000), 17 th  April 2001 (with the approval of shareholders on 25th June 2001), 6 th  August 2003, 25 October 2004, 18 August 2005, such amendments taking effect on 25 October 2005, 14 December 2006, 9 August 2007 and amended on 12 November 2012

By a resolution on 30 August 2005 the Board of WPP Group plc has committed to issue WPP Group plc shares in exchange for the shares of the Company issued to Participants, as set out in the Articles of Association of the Company

As approved by shareholders of WPP Group plc on 30 October 2008 prior to the introduction of a new holding company by a scheme of arrangement under part 26 of the Companies Act 2006 as approved by the shareholders of WPP plc on 30 September 2008 and adopted by the Board of Directors of WPP plc on 30 September 2008, and amended in November 2008

 

   

Squire Sanders (UK) LLP

7 Devonshire Square

London

EC2M 4YH

United Kingdom

DX 136546 Bishopsgate 2

Office: +44 (0)20 7655 1000

Fax:    +44 (0)20 7655 1001

Reference WPP.002-1470


CONTENTS

 

1       DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

   1

2       ELIGIBILITY

   3

3       GRANT OF OPTIONS

   3

4       LIMITS

   4

5       EXERCISE OF OPTIONS

   5

6       TAKEOVER, RECONSTRUCTION AND WINDING-UP

   7

7       VARIATION OF CAPITAL

   8

8       ALTERATIONS

   9

9       MISCELLANEOUS

   9

10     WITHHOLDING

   10

SCHEDULE

   11

APPENDIX 1

   13

APPENDIX 2

   16

APPENDIX 3

   17

APPENDIX 4

   19

APPENDIX 5

   20

APPENDIX 6

   21

APPENDIX 7

   22

 

i


1

DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

 

1.1

In this Plan 1 , unless the context otherwise requires:

the “ Board ” means the board of directors of the Company or a committee appointed by such board of directors; 2

Company ” means

 

  (a)

for the period before 25 October 2005 the reference shall be to WPP 2005 Limited a private limited company incorporated in England and Wales with registered number 1003653;

 

  (b)

for the period between 25 October 2005 and 18 November 2008 the reference shall be to WPP 2008 Limited, a private limited company incorporated in England and Wales with registered number 5537577;

 

  (c)

for the period between 19 November 2008 and the Effective Date, the reference shall be to WPP plc, a public limited company incorporated in Jersey with registered number 101749, to be re-named WPP 2012 plc; and

 

  (d)

for the period from and including the Effective Date the reference shall be to WPP plc, a public limited company incorporated in Jersey with registered number 111714; 3 4 5

Depository ” means any depository or depositories which hold or whose nominee holds WPP ADSs;

Effective Date ” means the date on which the Scheme, as set out in part 3 of the circular to share owners of WPP plc, a company registered in Jersey with company number 101749, relating to the recommended proposals for the introduction of a new parent company becomes effective, expected to be 2 January 2013; 6

the “Grant Date ” in relation to an Option means the date on which the Option was granted;

Group Member ” means:

 

  (a)

a Participating Company or a body corporate which is (within the meaning of section 736 of the Companies Act 1985 or, as the context may require, Articles 2 and 2A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991) the Company‘s holding company or a subsidiary of the Companys holding company; or 7

 

  (b)

a body corporate which is (within the meaning of section 258 of that Act or or, as the context may require, Articles 2 and 2A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991) a subsidiary undertaking of a body corporate within paragraph (a) above and has been designated by the Board for this purpose; 8

 

1  

As amended by the Compensation Committee of the Board on 25 October 2004

2  

Definition of “the Board of WPP Group plc” removed by resolution of the Board of WPP 2005 Limited in November 2008.

3  

As amended by the Compensation Committee of the Board on 18 August 2005

4  

Amended by resolution of the Board of WPP 2005 Limited in November 2008

5  

Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012

6  

Inserted by resolution of the Board of WPP 2005 Limited in November 2008 and amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012

7  

Amended by resolution of the Board of WPP 2005 Limited in November 2008

8  

Amended by resolution of the Board of WPP 2005 Limited in November 2008

 

1


ITEPA ” means the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003; 9

Key Feature ” means a provision of the Plan which is necessary in order to meet the requirements of Schedule 4; 10

Option ” means a right to acquire Shares or WPP ADSs under the Plan; and a right to acquire Shares shall be known as a “Share Option” and a right to acquire WPP ADSs shall be known as an “ADS Option”;

Participant ” means a person who holds an Option granted under the Plan 11 ;

Participating Company ” means the Company or any Subsidiary;

the “Plan ” means the WPP Executive Stock Option Plan as herein set out but subject to any alterations or additions made under Rule 8 below;

Schedule 4 ” means Schedule 4 to ITEPA 12 ;

Schedule 9 ” means Schedule 9 to the Taxes Act 1988;

“Scheme” means a scheme of arrangement under Article 125 of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991 or with or subject to any modification, addition or condition approved or imposed by the Royal Court of Jersey relating to proposals for the introduction of a new parent company; 13

Share ” means an ordinary share in the capital of the Company, and for the purposes of Rule 4 (Limits) and if the context requires, other provisions of the Rules “Shares” include WPP ADSs;

Subsidiary ” means a body corporate which is a subsidiary of the Company within the meaning of section 736 of the Companies Act 1985 or, as the context may require, Articles 2 and 2A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991; 14

the Taxes Act 1988 ” means the Income and Corporation Taxes Act 1988;

the WWOP ” means the WPP Worldwide Ownership Plan (originally adopted on 24th June, 1996) as from time to time amended;

WPP ADS ” means an American Depository Share representing 5 Shares pursuant to the Amended and Restated Deposit Agreement between the Company and Citibank NA dated as of 2 January 2013 15 and/or any other American depository share arrangement sponsored by the Company;

WPP Receipt ” means an American Depository Receipt evidencing WPP ADSs;

and expressions not otherwise defined herein have the same meanings as they have in Schedule 4 16 .

 

(2)

Any reference in the Plan to any enactment includes a reference to that enactment as from time to time modified, extended or re-enacted.

 

9  

As amended by the Compensation Committee of the Board on 25 October 2004

10  

As amended by the Compensation Committee of the Board on 25 October 2004

11  

As amended by the Compensation Committee of the Board on 25 October 2004

12  

As amended by the Compensation Committee of the Board on 25 October 2004

13  

Amended by resolution of the Board of WPP 2005 Limited in November 2008 and by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012

14  

Amended by resolution of the Board of WPP 2005 Limited in November 2008

15  

Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012

16  

As amended by the Compensation Committee of the Board on 25 October 2004

 

2


2

ELIGIBILITY

 

(1)

Subject to sub-rule (3) below, a person is eligible to be granted an Option under the Plan if (and only if) he is a full-time director or qualifying employee of a Participating Company.

 

(2)

For the purposes of sub-rule (1) above:

 

  (a)

a person shall be treated as a full-time director of a Participating Company if he is obliged to devote to the performance of the duties of his office or employment with that and any other Participating Company not less than 25 hours a week;

 

  (b)

a qualifying employee, in relation to a Participating Company, is an employee of the Participating Company (other than one who is a director of a Participating Company).

 

(3)

A person is not eligible to be granted an Option under the Plan at any time within the two years immediately preceding the date (if any) on which he is bound to retire in accordance with the terms of his contract of employment.

 

3

GRANT OF OPTIONS

 

(1)

Subject to sub-rule (2) below and Rule 4 below, the Board may grant or procure the grant to any person who is eligible to be granted an Option under the Plan an Option to acquire Shares, upon the terms set out in the Plan and upon such other objective terms as the Board may specify; and for this purpose an option to acquire means 17 an option to subscribe. Unless the Board otherwise determines Share Options shall be granted to persons who are eligible under the Plan and who are resident in the United Kingdom and ADS Options shall be granted to other persons who are eligible. 18

 

(2)

An Option may only be granted under the Plan:

 

  (a)

within the period of 6 weeks beginning with the date on which the Plan is approved and adopted by the Company in general meeting or the dealing day next following the date on which the Company announces its results for any period, or at any other time when the circumstances are considered by the Board to be sufficiently exceptional to justify the grant thereof; and

 

  (b)

within the period of 10 years beginning with the date on which the Plan is approved and adopted as aforesaid 24th June, 1996.

 

(3)

The price at which Shares may be acquired by the exercise of an Option shall be determined by the Board before the grant thereof, but shall not be less than:

 

  (a)

in the case of a Share Option, if Shares of the same class as those Shares are listed in the London Stock Exchange Daily Official List, the average middle-market quotation of Shares of that class (as derived from that list) over a number of consecutive dealing days (being not more than five) immediately preceding the Grant Date;

 

  (b)

in the case of a Share Option, if paragraph (a) above does not apply, the market value (within the meaning of Part VIII of the Taxation of Chargeable Gains Act 1992) of Shares of that class, as reasonably determined by the Board;

 

17  

As amended by the Compensation Committee of the Board on 25 October 2004.

18  

As amended by the Compensation Committee of the Board on 25 October 2004.

 

3


  (c)

in the case of an ADS Option, the fair market value of a WPP ADS as quoted on NASDAQ over a number of consecutive dealing days (being not more than five) immediately preceding the Grant Date; or

 

  (d)

except in the case of an Option to acquire Shares otherwise than by subscription, the nominal value of those Shares.

 

(4)

An Option granted under the Plan to any person:

 

  (a)

shall not, except as provided in Rule 5(4) below, be capable of being transferred by him; and

 

  (c)

shall lapse forthwith if he is adjudged bankrupt.

 

(5)

Except as referred to in Rule 6.4 and paragraph 10 of Appendix 1, no new Options shall be granted under the Plan after 25 October 2005. 19

 

4

LIMITS

 

(1)

No Options or options under the WWOP shall be granted which would, at the time they are granted, exceed the limit set out in this Rule 4(1).

That limit is that the number of shares which;

 

  (a)

shall have been issued; or

 

  (b)

may be issued

in pursuance of options granted under the Plan or the WWOP in the period of 10 years beginning with 28th June, 1999 (which is subject to the requirement under Rule 3(2)(b) that Options may only be granted within 10 years after 28th June, 1996) must not exceed such number as represents 10 per cent 20 of the ordinary share capital of the Company in issue at the time of grant of the options. In applying this Rule, Shares issued under any other employee share scheme adopted by the Company after 28th June 1999 (or Shares issued or capable of issue under any other share option scheme of the Company adopted after that date, as the case may be) shall also count against that limit.

 

(2)

No person shall be granted Options under the Plan in any period of 12 months (except in exceptional circumstances as determined by the Board) or in the year of appointment of any person) which would, at the time they are granted, cause the market value of the Shares for which he may subscribe in pursuance of Options granted to him in that period of 12 months under the Plan or under any other share option scheme (other than a savings related scheme) adopted by the Company, to exceed 400% of the person’s annual salary as at that time; 21 and for the purposes of this sub-rule:

 

  (a)

any Option which shall have been released to any extent shall be treated to that extent as if it were still exercisable;

 

19  

Amended by resolution of the Board of WPP 2005 Limited in November 2008 and by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012

20  

This limit should be read in conjunction with the limit agreed in a letter, dated 18 June 1999, to the Association of British Insurers from the group finance director (this footnote was added following the meeting of the Compensation Committee of the Board on 25 October 2004).

21  

As amended by the Compensation Committee of the Board on 17 April 2001

 

4


  (b)

shares in a Participating Company shall not be regarded as benefits in kind;

 

  (d)

where a payment of remuneration is made otherwise than in sterling, the payment shall be treated as being of the amount of sterling ascertained by applying such rate of exchange published in a national newspaper as the Board shall reasonably determine; and

 

  (e)

a person’s remuneration shall be deemed to include fees paid to a company whose principal purpose is to provide his services, being services of a nature which he would be expected to perform as an employee of a Participating Company, and being fees referable to those services and exclusive of VAT.

 

(3)

For the purposes of this Rule, the market value of the Shares in relation to which an Option was granted shall be calculated:

 

  (a)

in the case of an Option granted under the Plan, as on the day by reference to which the price at which Shares may be acquired by the exercise thereof was determined in accordance with Rule 3(3) above;

 

  (b)

in the case of an option granted under any option scheme (other than a savings related scheme) approved by the Inland Revenue, as at the time when it was granted or, in a case where an agreement relating to the Shares has been made under paragraph 29 of Schedule 9 or paragraph 22 of Schedule 4, such earlier time or times as may be provided in the agreement; and 22

 

  (c)

in the case of any other option, as on the day or days by reference to which the price at which Shares may be acquired by the exercise thereof was determined

 

  (d)

and the Board may adopt such exchange rate as it thinks fit for the conversion of one currency to another currency.

 

(4)

No person shall be granted an Option under the Plan if the number of Shares which may be acquired on exercise of that Option, when added to the number of Shares which have been or may still be acquired on the exercise of Options previously granted to him under the Plan, exceeds 3% of the total of:

 

  (a)

the number of Shares which have been or may still be acquired on the exercise of Options previously granted to all persons under the Plan, and

 

  (b)

the number of Shares still available for the grant of Options under the Plan.

 

(5)

Any Option granted under the Plan shall be limited and take effect so that the above limits are complied with.

 

5

EXERCISE OF OPTIONS

 

(1)

The exercise of any Option granted under the Plan shall be effected in such form and manner as the Board may from time to time prescribe.

 

(2)

Subject to sub-rules (4) and (5) below and to sub-rules (1) and (3) of Rule 6 below, an Option granted under the Plan may not be exercised before the third anniversary of the Grant Date.

 

22  

As amended by the Compensation Committee of the Board on 25 October 2004

 

5


(3)

Subject to sub-rule (4) and paragraphs (a) and (c) of sub-rule (5) and paragraph (b) of sub-rule 7 below and to sub-rules (1) and (3) of Rule 6 below, an Option granted under the Plan may not be exercised if the relevant condition is not satisfied; and in this sub-rule the relevant condition is a condition related to performance which constitutes a term specified by the Board as mentioned in Rule 3(1) above or, if there is no such condition, the condition in the Schedule hereto provided that if the grant of an Option was made subject to the satisfaction of a condition the Board may determine that the sub-rule (3) shall not apply to the exercise of that Option. 23

 

(4)

24

 

(5)

If any Participant dies before exercising an Option granted to him under the Plan and at a time when either he is a director or employee of a Group Member or he is or would but for sub-rule (3) above be entitled to exercise the Option by virtue of sub-rule (5) below, the Option may (and must, if at all) be exercised by his personal representatives within 12 months after the date of his death.

 

(6)

If any Participant ceases to be a director or employee of a Group Member (otherwise than by reason of his death), the following provisions apply in relation to any Option granted to him under the Plan:

 

  (a)

if he so ceases by reason of injury or disability, or by reason only that his office or employment is in a company which ceases to be a Group Member, or relates to a business or part of a business which is transferred to a person who is not a Group Member, the Option may (and subject to sub-rule (4) above must, if at all) be exercised within the exercise period;

 

  (b)

if he so ceases by reason of retirement on or after reaching the retirement age (if any) as specified in his contract of employment (or, if there is no such age, if he retires at all), the Option may (and subject to sub-rule (4) above must, if at all) be exercised within the exercise period, but subject to sub-rule (3) above; 25

 

  (c)

if he so ceases for any other reason, the Option may not be exercised at all unless the Board shall so permit, in which event it may (and subject to sub-rule (4) above must, if at all) be exercised to the extent permitted by the Board within the exercise period;

and in this sub-rule the exercise period is the period which shall expire 12 months after his so ceasing or 42 months after the Grant Date, whichever shall be the latest.

 

(7)

Subject to sub-rule 6(A) below, a Participant shall not be treated for the purposes of sub-rule (5) above as ceasing to be a director or employee of a Group Member until such time as he is no longer a director or employee of any Group Member and a female Participant who ceases to be such a director or employee by reason of pregnancy or confinement and who exercises her right to return to work under the Employment Rights Act 1996 (or any equivalent legislation in any jurisdiction) before exercising an Option under the Plan shall be treated for those purposes as not having ceased to be such a director or employee. 26

 

(7A)

In the case of Options granted after 1st September 1999 (other than under the Approved Part), a Participant, who gives or is given notice to leave employment as a director or employee of a Group Member in any circumstances other than death or in those circumstances referred to in

 

23  

As amended by the Compensation Committee of the Board on 25 October 2004

24  

Clause 5(4) deleted by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012

25  

As amended by the Compensation Committee of the Board on 14 December 2006

26  

Amended by resolution of the Board of WPP 2005 Limited in November 2008

 

6


 

sub-rule (5)(a) or (b), shall, if he subsequently ceases to be in such employment, be treated for the purposes of sub-rule (5) above as ceasing to be a director or employee of a Group Member on the date on which that notice is given (and for the avoidance of doubt any purported exercise of the option during the period of notice shall be of no effect). If a Participant is given notice to leave employment as a director or employee of a Group Member and the Board subsequently uses its discretion under sub-rule (5)(c) to allow his Option to be exercisable, nothing in this sub-rule (6)A will make his Option lapse or cease to be exercisable.

 

(8)

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan, an Option granted under the Plan (a) may not be exercised after the expiration of the period of 10 years (or such shorter period as the Board may have determined before the grant thereof) beginning with the Grant Date (the last day of such period being the “Expiry Date”); and (b) in respect of any option granted after 1 September 1998, such option shall be exercisable for the period of four (4) months ending on the Expiry Date irrespective of whether the relevant condition (as that term is defined in Rule 5(3)) has been satisfied.

 

(9)

Within 30 days after an Option under the Plan has been exercised by any person, the grantor of the Option shall, in the case of a Share Option, procure the allotment 27 to him (or a nominee for him) of the number of Shares in respect of which the Option has been exercised and, in the case of an ADS Option, procure the issue to him of a WPP Receipt evidencing the WPP ADSs in respect of which the Option has been exercised (including, if appropriate, by procuring the allotment or transfer of Shares to a Depository) unless:

 

  (a)

the Board considers that the issue or transfer thereof would not be lawful in all relevant jurisdictions; or

 

  (b)

in a case where a Group Member is obliged to account for any tax (in any jurisdiction) for which the person in question is liable by virtue of the exercise of the Option, that or another Group Member is unable to withhold the tax from his remuneration nor has received payment from him of a corresponding amount.

 

(9A)

The Board may agree with any Participant at any time that an Option granted under the Plan before 28th June, 1999 shall be treated as if it had been an ADS Option (and not a Share Option). The Board shall select such exchange rate as it considers appropriate for converting the price at which Shares may be acquired from sterling to U.S. dollars.

 

(10)

All Shares allotted under the Plan shall rank pari passu in all respects with the Shares of the same class for the time being in issue save as regards any rights attaching to such Shares by reference to a record date prior to the date of the allotment.

 

(11)

If Shares of the same class as those allotted under the Plan are listed in the London Stock Exchange Official List, the Company shall apply to the London Stock Exchange for any Shares so allotted to be admitted to that list.

 

6

TAKEOVER, RECONSTRUCTION AND WINDING-UP

 

(1)

If any person obtains control of the Company (within the meaning of section 840 of the Taxes Act 1988) as a result of making a general offer to acquire Shares in the Company or Old WPP, or having obtained such control makes such an offer, the Board shall within 7 days of becoming

 

27  

As amended by the Compensation Committee of the Board on 25 October 2004.

 

7


 

aware thereof notify every Participant thereof and, subject to sub-rules (4), (5) and (7) of Rule 5 above, an Option granted under the Plan may be exercised within three months (or such longer period as the Board may permit) of such notification. 28 29

 

(2)

For the purposes of sub-rule (1) above, a person shall be deemed to have obtained control of the Company if he and others acting in concert with him have together obtained control of it. 30 31

 

(3)

If any person becomes bound or entitled to acquire Shares in the Company under Part 18 of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991, or if under Part 18A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991 the Court sanctions a compromise or arrangement proposed for the purposes of or in connection with a scheme for the reconstruction of the Company or the amalgamation of either of those companies with any other company or companies, or if the Company passes a resolution for the winding up of the Company or the assets of the Company are declared en désastre , the Board shall forthwith notify every Participant thereof and any Option granted under the Plan may, subject to sub-rules (4), (5) and (7) of Rule 5 above, be exercised within one month of such notification, but to the extent that it is not exercised within that period shall (notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan) lapse on the expiration thereof. 32 33 34

 

(4)

The Board may determine (the determination to apply equally to all Options outstanding at the time) that the provisions of sub-rules (1) and (3) above will neither cause Options to become exercisable nor to lapse at different times than would otherwise be the case, if the Board considers that the Options will continue to be an appropriate incentive notwithstanding the changed circumstances, or that the position of Participants can be adequately preserved by the grant to them of some other right or rights in substitution for or addition to the existing rights.

 

7

VARIATION OF CAPITAL

 

(1)

In the event of any increase or variation of the share capital of the Company (whenever effected), the Board may make such adjustments as it considers appropriate under sub-rule (2) below.

 

(2)

An adjustment made under this sub-rule shall be to one or more of the following:

 

  (a)

the number of Shares in respect of which any Option granted under the Plan may be exercised;

 

  (b)

the price at which Shares may be acquired by the exercise of any such Option;

 

  (c)

where any such Option has been exercised, but no Shares have been allotted or transferred pursuant to such exercise, the number of Shares which may be so allotted or transferred and the price at which they may be acquired.

 

(3)

An adjustment under sub-rule (2) above may have the effect of reducing the price at which Shares may be acquired by the exercise of an Option to less than their nominal value, but only if and to the extent that the Board shall be authorised to capitalise from the reserves of the Company a sum equal to the amount by which the nominal value of the Shares in respect of

 

28  

Amended by resolution of the Board of WPP 2005 Limited in November 2008

29  

Amended by resolution of the Board of WPP 2005 Limited in November 2008

30  

Amended by resolution of the Board of WPP 2005 Limited in November 2008

31  

Amended by resolution of the Board of WPP 2005 Limited in November 2008

32  

Amended by resolution of the Board of WPP 2005 Limited in November 2008

33  

Amended by resolution of the Board of WPP 2005 Limited in November 2008

34  

Amended by resolution of the Board of WPP 2005 Limited in November 2008

 

8


 

which the Option is exercised and which are to be allotted pursuant to such exercise exceeds the price at which the same may be subscribed for and to apply such sum in paying up such amount on such Shares; and so that on exercise of any Option in respect of which such a reduction shall have been made the Board shall capitalise such sum (if any) and apply the same in paying up such amount as aforesaid.

 

(4)

As soon as reasonably practicable after making any adjustment under sub-rule (2) above, the Board shall give notice in writing thereof to any Participant affected thereby.

 

8

ALTERATIONS

 

(1)

Subject to sub-rule (2) below, the Board may at any time alter or add to all or any of the provisions of the Plan, or the terms of any Option granted under it, in any respect. 35 36

 

(2)

No alteration or addition to the advantage of Participants shall be made under sub-rule (1) above to any Rule of the Plan without the prior approval by ordinary resolution of the members of the Company in general meeting other than a minor amendment to benefit the administration of the Plan, to take account of a change in legislation or to obtain or maintain favourable tax, exchange control or regulatory treatment for any Participant or Group Member. 37

 

(3)

As soon as reasonably practicable after making any alteration or addition under sub-rule (1) above, the Board shall give notice in writing thereof to any Participant affected thereby.

 

9

MISCELLANEOUS

 

(1)

The rights and obligations of any individual under the terms of his office or employment with any Group Member shall not be affected by his participation in the Plan or any right which he may have to participate therein, and an individual who participates therein shall by participating be deemed to waive any and all rights to compensation or damages in consequence of the termination of his office or employment for any reason whatsoever insofar as those rights arise or may arise from his ceasing to have rights under or be entitled to exercise any Option under the Plan as a result of such termination.

 

(2)

In the event of any dispute or disagreement as to the interpretation of the Plan, or as to any question or right arising from or related to the Plan, the decision of the Board shall be final and binding upon all persons.

 

(3)

The Company and any Subsidiary may provide money to the trustees of any trust or any other person to enable them or him to acquire Shares to be held for the purposes of the Plan (which Shares may be held by a Depository on behalf of any such trustees or other person) or enter into any guarantee or indemnity for these purposes, to the extent permitted by section 153 of the Companies Act 1985 or the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991. 38

 

(4)

In the event that Shares are transferred to a Participant in pursuance of any Option granted under the Plan, the Participant shall, if so required by the person making the transfer, join that person in making a claim for relief under section 165 of the Taxation of Chargeable Gains Act 1992 in respect of the disposal made by him in effecting such transfer, should such relief be available.

 

(5)

Any notice or other communication under or in connection with the Plan may be given by personal delivery or by sending the same by post, in the case of a company to its registered

 

35  

As amended by the Compensation Committee of the Board on 18 August 2005

36  

As further amended by resolution of the Board of WPP 2005 Limited in November 2008

37  

Amended by resolution of the Board of WPP 2005 Limited in November 2008

38  

Amended by resolution of the Board of WPP 2005 Limited in November 2008

 

9


 

office, and in the case of an individual to his last known address, or, where he is a director or employee of a Group Member, either to his last known address or to the address of the place of business at which he performs the whole or substantially the whole of the duties of his office or employment.

 

(6)

The Board may establish further plans based on the Plan but modified to take account of local tax, exchange control or securities laws in overseas territories, provided that any Shares made available under such further plans are treated as counting against the limits expressed in Rule 4(1) to (6).

 

10

WITHHOLDING

 

(1)

The grant or exercise of any Option under the Plan is subject to the condition that the grant or an exercise of the Option shall not be valid unless the Participant has, in addition to complying with the other requirements of the Plan, paid or procured the payment to the Group Member which is his employer, or otherwise provided for (in a manner satisfactory to that Group Member or, if appropriate, the trustees of any employee benefit trust) an amount equal to the Taxation for which any Group Member may be liable by reason of that grant or exercise. 39

 

(2)

Without limitation to (1) above, the Company or any other Group Member which is a Participant’s employer or the trustees of any employee benefit trust may withhold any amount and make such arrangements as it considers necessary which comply with applicable law to meet any liability to Taxation in respect of the grant, exercise or cancellation of Options or other event relating to Options or in respect of any benefit under the Plan. These arrangements may include the sale of any Shares on behalf of a Participant, which the Participant is deemed to have authorised, to produce a cash sum sufficient to meet the Taxation liabilities referred to in this Rule 10. 40

 

(3)

The Company may in its sole discretion waive the requirements set out in this Rule 10 in respect of any part of the Participant’s employer’s liability to Taxation, including in particular, any employer’s liability to National Insurance Contributions.

In this Rule, “Taxation” means all forms of taxation or levy by any state or any political subdivision of a state and includes income tax, Pay as You Earn, National Insurance or other social security contributions, whether being the primary liability of the employer or the employee, or any other person.

 

11

41

 

39  

As amended by the Compensation Committee of the Board on 25 October 2004

40  

As amended by the Compensation Committee of the Board on 25 October 2004

41  

Rule 11 deleted by resolution of the Board of WPP 2005 Limited in November 2008

 

10


SCHEDULE

 

1

42

 

2

The condition in this Schedule is that

 

(i)

The average WPP TSR for a Relevant End Period exceeds the average WPP TSR for a Relevant Base Period by an amount which, expressed as a percentage, is greater than the percentage by which the average FT-SE 100 TSR for the same Relevant End Period exceeds the average FT-SE 100 TSR for the same Relevant Base Period; and that the same shall have been computed by the Company and communicated to the Participant. The Company shall be obliged to perform the calculation and communicate the result to the Participant not later than the fifth working day following the end of the calendar month in which the last weekday of the Relevant End Period falls.

For the purposes of the paragraph above:

 

  (a)

a Relevant Base Period is any period of 60 weekdays of which the last is the day 3 years prior to the last weekday of the Relevant End Period (or, if that day is not a weekday, the last preceding weekday) and is not earlier than the last weekday before the Grant Date (weekdays in this Schedule being Monday to Friday inclusive, including bank holidays);

 

  (b)

a Relevant End Period is any period of 60 weekdays;

 

  (c)

FT-SE 100 TSR on any day means the total shareholder return figure for the index FT-SE 100 companies (currently known as the index of “total return”) published in the Financial Times in respect of that day;

 

  (d)

WPP TSR on any day means the total shareholder return figure for the Company calculated on the same basis as total shareholder return is calculated for the purposes of FT-SE 100 TSR.

AND

 

(ii)

Looking at two associated financial years of the Company of which the later one is the third financial year after the earlier one, the earnings per Share of the Company for the later one must have exceeded its earnings per share for the earlier one by an amount which, when expressed as a fraction of the last mentioned earnings per share, is not less than ((R2-R1)/R1) + 0.06, where R1 is the retail prices index for the last month in the earlier year and R2 is the retail prices index for the last month in the later year.

For the purposes of the paragraph above

 

  (f)

the earnings per share of the Company shall be taken to be its headline earnings per Share, as calculated in accordance with the principles set out in Statement of Investment Practice No.1 “The Definition of IIMR Headline Earnings” issued by The Institute of Investment Management and Research, or shall be calculated on such basis as shall have been determined by the Board before the grant of the Option;

 

42  

Paragraph 1 deleted by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012

 

11


  (g)

two financial years of the Company are associated if the earlier one is not earlier than the financial year of the Company last preceding the Grant Date and the later one is not later than the financial year of the Company last preceding the date on which the Option is exercised;

 

  (h)

43

 

  (i)

the retail prices index is the general index of retail prices (for all items) published by the Central Statistical Office of the Chancellor of the Exchequer or, if that index is not published for the month in question, any substituted index or index figures published by that Office.

 

2

The Board may make such adjustments to the method of calculating WPP TSR, FT-SE 100 TSR, earnings per share or any other feature of the above condition as it considers appropriate to take account of any increase or variation of the share capital of the Company, any change to the calculation of FT-SE 100 TSR or to earnings per share or any other factors considered by the Board to be relevant.

 

43  

Definition of “financial year” deleted by Resolution of the Board of WPP 2005 Limited in November 2008

 

12


APPENDIX 1

This Appendix constitutes the Inland Revenue approved part of the WPP Executive Stock Option Plan ( “the Approved Part” ). The terms of the Approved Part are identical to those of the other part of the said scheme to which this Approved Part is appended except as follows:

 

1.

In the definition of “ Subsidiary ” in Rule 1(1), add to the end words “and is under the control of the Company within the meaning of Section 840 of the Taxes Act 1988”.

 

2.

In Rule 2(3), add to the end the words “nor when he is not eligible to participate in the Plan by virtue of paragraph 9 of Schedule 4”. 44

 

2A.

Only Share Options, and not ADS Options, shall be granted under the Approved Part.

 

3.

In Rule 3(1), after the word “Company”, add the words “which satisfy the requirements of paragraphs 16 – 20 of Schedule 4”. 45

 

4.

In Rule 3(2), after the words “general meeting”, add the words “the date on which the Approved Part is approved by the Inland Revenue under Schedule 9”.

 

5.

In Rule 3(3)(a), add at the end the words “(or such other dealing day or days as may be agreed with the Inland Revenue)”.

 

6.

In Rule 3(3)(b), delete the words “reasonably determined by the Board” and substitute the words “agreed in advance for the purposes of the Plan with the Shares Valuation Division of the Inland Revenue, on the Grant Date (or such other day as may be agreed with the Inland Revenue)”.

 

7.

Add the following as Rule 4(3A):

“No person shall be granted Options under the Approved Part which would, at the time they are granted, cause the aggregate market value of the Shares which he may acquire in pursuance of Options granted to him under the Approved Part or under any other share option scheme, not being a savings related share option scheme, approved under Schedule 9 or Schedule 4 and established by the Company or by any associated company of the Company (and not exercised) to exceed or further exceed £30,000 or such other limit as may be prescribed in paragraph 6 of Schedule 4”. 46

 

7A.

In sub-rule 5(3) the additional words beginning “provided that” to the end of sub-rule 5(3) shall not apply to Options granted under the Approved Part. 47

 

8.

In Rule 5(5), delete the words “or 42 months after the Grant Date” and substitute the words “42 months after the Grant Date or 42 months after the last date prior to his so ceasing on which he exercised an option (not being one granted under a savings related share option scheme) in circumstances in which paragraphs (a) and (b) of Section 185(3) of the Taxes Act 1988 applied”.

 

8A.

Add the following after Rule 5(5)(b) as Rule 5(5)(bb):

“if he so ceases by reason of redundancy (within the meaning of the Employment Rights Act 1996) the Option may not be exercised at all following such cessation”.

 

44  

As amended by the Compensation Committee of the Board on 25 October 2004

45  

As amended by the Compensation Committee of the Board on 25 October 2004

46  

As amended by the Compensation Committee of the Board on 25 October 2004

47  

As amended by the Compensation Committee on 6 August 2003

 

13


8B.

In Rule 5(5)(c), delete the words “(including without limitation by reason of redundancy (within the meaning of the Employment Rights Act 1996))”.

 

8C.

In Rule 5(6A) delete the words “after 1st September 1999 (other than under the Approved Part” and replace those words with “18 th May, 2000”.

 

9.

Add the following as Rule 5(7A):

“A Participant shall not be eligible to exercise an Option under the Plan at any time when he is not eligible to participate in the Plan by virtue of paragraph 9 of Schedule 4”.

 

9A.

Rule 5(8A) shall not apply.

 

10.

Add the following as Rules 6(5) and (6):

 

  “(5)

(a)       If any company (“ the acquiring company ”):

 

      

           obtains control of the Company as a result of making –

 

  (i)

a general offer to acquire the whole of the issued ordinary share capital of the Company which is made on a condition such that if it is satisfied the person making the offer will have control of the Company, or

 

  (ii)

a general offer to acquire all the Shares in the Company which are of the same class as the Shares which may be acquired by the exercise of Options granted under the Plan, or

 

  (b)

obtains control of the Company in pursuance of a compromise or arrangement sanctioned by the court under Part 18A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991, or 48

 

  (c)

becomes bound or entitled to acquire Shares in the Company under Part 18 of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991, 49

any Participant may at any time within the appropriate period (which expression shall be construed in accordance with paragraph 26 of Schedule 4), by agreement with the acquiring company, release any Option granted under the Plan which has not lapsed (“the old option”) in consideration of the grant to him of an option (“the new option”) which (for the purposes of that paragraph) is equivalent to the old option but relates to shares in a different company (whether the acquiring company itself or some other company falling within paragraph 16(b) or (c) of Schedule 4). 50

 

  (6)

The new option shall not be regarded for the purposes of sub-rule (5) above as equivalent to the old option unless the conditions set out in paragraph 27 of Schedule 4 are satisfied, but so that the provisions of the Plan shall for this purpose be construed as if: 51

 

  (i)

the new option were an option granted under the Plan at the same time as the old option;

 

48  

Amended by resolution of the Board of WPP 2005 Limited in November 2008

49  

Amended by resolution of the Board of WPP 2005 Limited in November 2008

50  

As amended by the Compensation Committee of the Board on 25 October 2004

51  

As amended by the Compensation Committee of the Board on 25 October 2004

 

14


  (ii)

except for the purposes of the definitions of “Group Member”, “Participating Company” and “Subsidiary” in Rule 1(1) above and the reference to “the Board” in Rule 5(7) above, the expression “the Company” were defined as “a company whose shares may be acquired by the exercise of options granted under the Plan”;

 

  (iii)

the relevant condition referred to in Rule 5(3) above had been satisfied; and

 

  (iv)

Rule 8(2) below were omitted.”

 

11.

At the start of Rule 7(1), add the words “Subject to sub-rule (2A) below”.

 

12.

In Rule 7(1), delete the words “increase or.”

 

13.

Add the following as Rule 7(2A):

“At a time when the Plan is approved by the Inland Revenue under Schedule 4, no adjustment under sub-rule (2) above shall be made without the prior approval of the Inland Revenue.”

 

14.

In Rule 8(1) delete the words “sub-rule (2)” and substitute the words “sub-rules (2), (2A) and (2B)”.

 

15.

At the end of Rule 8(1), add the words “(having regard to the fact that, if an alteration or addition which does not solely relate to a special term is made at a time when the Plan is approved by the Inland Revenue under Schedule 4, the alteration or addition to any Key Feature will not thereafter have effect unless the Inland Revenue have approved the alteration or addition)”. 52

 

16.

Add the following as Rule 8(2A) and (2B):

 

“(2A)

No alteration or addition to the disadvantage of any Participant, other than to a special term, shall be made under sub-rule (1) above unless:

 

  (a)

the Board shall have invited every relevant Participant to give an indication as to whether or not he approves the alteration or addition, and

 

  (b)

the alteration or addition is approved by a majority of those Participants who have given such an indication.

 

(2B)

No alteration or addition which solely relates to a special term subject to which an Option has been granted shall be under sub-rule (1) above unless:

 

  (a)

there shall have occurred an event which shall have caused the Board reasonably to consider that the special term would not, without the alteration or addition, achieve its original purpose, and

 

  (b)

the Board shall act fairly and reasonably in making the alteration or addition.”

 

17.

At the end of Rule 8(3), add the words “and if the Plan is then approved by the Inland Revenue under Schedule 4, to the Inland Revenue.” 53

 

18.

Add as Rule 8(4):

“Any reference in this Rule to a special term is a reference to a term specified by the Board as mentioned in Rule 3(1) above or a term of the Schedule hereto”.

 

19.

Delete Rule 9(6).

 

52  

As amended by the Compensation Committee of the Board on 25 October 2004

53  

As amended by the Compensation Committee of the Board on 25 October 2004

 

15


APPENDIX 2

Special Rules Applicable to Grants of Incentive Stock Options

 

1.

Options granted in accordance with the Plan (either including or excluding Appendix 1 thereto) may be designated as “Incentive Stock Options” ( “ISOs” ) within the meaning of section 422 of the United States Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “U.S. Tax Code” ).

 

2.

The aggregate number of Shares (including Shares comprised in any WPP ADS) for which ISOs may be granted under Appendix 2 shall not exceed 73,811,500.

 

3.

The class of persons who may receive ISOs shall, in addition to the limitations imposed by Rule 2 of the Plan, be limited to those persons who are employees of the Company or its “parent” or “subsidiary” corporations within the meaning of sections 424(f) and (g), respectively, of the U.S. Tax Code.

 

4.

In addition to any other restrictions contained in the Plan, ISOs shall not be transferable otherwise than by will or the laws of descent and distribution. During the lifetime of the person to whom an ISO is granted, the ISO shall be exercisable only by such person.

 

5.

To the extent that the aggregate market value of Shares (including Shares comprised in any WPP ADS) with respect to which ISOs are exercisable (determined without regard to this sentence) for the first time by a Participant during any calendar year (under all plans or schemes of the Company or its “parent” and “subsidiary” corporations within the meaning of sections 424(f) and (g), respectively, of the U.S. Tax Code) exceeds US $100,000, such Options shall to the extent of such excess be treated as Options which are not ISOs. For the purposes of the preceding sentence, the market value of any Shares (including Shares comprised in any WPP ADS) subject to an ISO shall be determined at the time such ISO is granted.

 

6.

This schedule shall be deemed to be included within the Plan as adopted by shareholders for the purpose of any ISO grants.

 

16


APPENDIX 3

India

The plan will apply to options granted to residents in India with the following modifications:

 

1.

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan, a person is eligible to be granted an option under this Appendix if (and only if) he is a full-time director or qualifying employee (as defined in Rule 2(2)) of a Participating Company (whether or not the Company itself) resident in India.

 

2.

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan, the exercise of an option will only take effect on the date on which the Shares acquired by virtue of that exercise are sold by the Participant.

 

3.

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan, an option granted to a Participant under this Appendix shall not be capable of being transferred by that Participant except as provided in Rule 5(4) (in the event of a Participant’s death).

 

4.

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan:

 

  (a)

any exercise of an option by a Participant is only effective if, and to the extent that, the net proceeds (that is, after taking account of dealing costs and any interest on the money, if any, lent to the Participant to facilitate the exercise of the option) from the immediate sale of the Shares acquired by the exercise of that option would be not less than the price at which the Participant is able to acquire the Shares by virtue of that option;

 

  (b)

in the event that the net proceeds from the sale of Shares acquired by the exercise of an option by a Participant on the day of acquisition of such Shares would be less than the price at which the Participant may acquire the Shares by virtue of that option, with the result that there would be a shortfall between the acquisition price and the net proceeds of such sale, any purported exercise of the option will not take effect.

 

5.

Further to 4 above, and notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan, neither the Company nor any Participating Companies make any representation or guarantee as to whether an intended exercise of an option by Participant on any given day will be effective, and neither the Company nor any Participating Company shall be considered to be or held accountable or liable in any way for the inability of a Participant to exercise his option as a consequence of the restrictions on exercise set out in 4 above.

 

6.

The exercise of an option granted under this Appendix shall be effected in the following manner:

 

  (a)

The exercise shall be deemed to take effect, if at all, 3 working days after the receipt by the Company of the Participant’s notice of his intention to exercise it.

 

  (b)

Assuming that the Company is able to establish that the condition referred to in paragraph 4(a) above is met, a third party selected by the Company will lend the option exercise price to the Participant by way of transferring the sum directly to the Company.

 

  (c)

The Company will then issue the Shares to a nominee for the Participant, which nominee will be a company controlled by a firm of stockbrokers nominated by the Company.

 

  (d)

The nominee will sell the Shares in question on the Participant’s behalf.

 

  (e)

The nominee will receive the sale price and deduct from this dealing costs and the interest, if any referred to in paragraph 4(a) above.

 

17


  (f)

As soon as practicable the remaining balance will be converted into Indian Rupees at the best rate reasonably obtainable on the foreign exchange markets and the resulting sum (net of costs of conversion) remitted to the Participant.

 

7.

The Plan shall be administered by the Board or a committee appointed by it and any determination by it shall be final for the purposes of the Plan’s administration in respect of employees of a Participating Company (whether or not the Company itself) resident in India.

 

18


APPENDIX 4

Belgium

The Plan will apply to Options granted to residents of Belgium after 1 January 1999 with the following modifications.

 

1.

In Rule 3(4), a further sub-rule (c) shall be added as follows:

“(c) shall be cancelled if he notifies the Company that he refuses to accept the Option within 60 days of the date of the Company’s communication to him in respect of the Option.”

 

2.

In Rule 5(2), delete the words:

“the third anniversary of the Grant Date”

and substitute the words

“the 1 January following the third anniversary of the Grant Date.”

 

3.

In Rule 5(4), delete the words:

“within 12 months after the date of his death.”

and substitute the words

“in the later of the period of 12 months commencing with the date of his death or the period of 6 months commencing on 1 January following the third anniversary of the Grant Date.”

 

4.

In Rule 5(5), delete the words:

“and in this sub-rule the exercise period is the period which shall expire 12 months after his so ceasing on 42 months after the Grant Date, whichever shall be the latest”

and substitute the words

“and in this sub-rule the exercise period is the period which shall commence on the 1 January following the third anniversary of the Grant Date (the “Third Anniversary” ) and expire 12 months after his so ceasing or 6 months after the Third Anniversary, whichever shall be the latest.”

 

19


APPENDIX 5

Netherlands

The Plan will apply to Options granted to residents of the Netherlands with the following alterations:

 

1.

Rule 5(7) shall be deleted and replaced by the following in substitution:-

“(7) Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan, an Option granted under the Plan may not be exercised after the expiration of 4 years (or such shorter period as the Board may have determined before the grant thereof) beginning with the Grant Date.”

 

2.

Rule 10 shall be amended by the insertion of the following sub-rule:

“(5) Without prejudice to sub-rules (1) to (4) above, each Option is granted subject to the condition that, upon such Option becoming exercisable in accordance with the Rules of the Plan, the Participant will pay or procure the payment to the Group Member which is his employer or otherwise provide for (in a manner satisfactory to that Group Member or, if appropriate, the trustees of any employee benefit trust), an amount equal to Taxation which any Group Member or the trustees of any employee benefit trust may be required to withhold on the Participant’s behalf by reason of that Option becoming exercisable. No Option in the Netherlands may be exercised, unless the Participant has complied with his obligations under this Rule 10(5).”

 

20


APPENDIX 6

Switzerland

The Plan will apply to Options granted to the residents of Switzerland on or after 1 January 2002 with the modification that in Rule 5(7) the words “and six months” be inserted after the words “10 years”. 54

 

54  

As amended by the Compensation Committee of the Board on 17 April 2001

 

21


APPENDIX 7 55

Taxpayers Subject to Section 409A of the United States Internal Revenue Code

The plan will apply to participants who are taxpayers subject to Section 409A of the United States Internal Revenue Code (“Section 409A”), with the following modifications:

 

1.

The options granted under the plan are intended to be exempt from the requirements of Section 409A by satisfying the requirements of the exemption set forth under Section 1.409A-1(b)(5)(i)(A) of the United States Treasury Regulations or other applicable guidance (the “Exemption”). The plan shall be construed and interpreted in accordance with such intent. Any discretion afforded to any person or entity under the plan the existence of which itself would cause an option to fail to satisfy the requirements of the Exemption is hereby removed from the plan.

 

2.

At the end of Rule 5(8A), add the sentence “However, the exchange rate shall not cause a direct or indirect reduction in the price at which Shares may be acquired if it would cause the Option to fail to meet the requirements of Section 1.409A-1(b)(5)(i)(A) of the United States Treasury Regulations or other applicable guidance.”

 

3.

Add the following as Rule 7(5):

“Notwithstanding the foregoing, only adjustments permitted by Section 409A shall be permitted to be made under Rule 7, including pro rata adjustments necessary to reflect a stock split, reverse stock split, and stock dividend.”

 

55  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 9 August 2007

 

22

Exhibit 4.10

 

WPP PLC 1

 

   

RESTRICTED STOCK PLAN

Approved by the Board of Directors of WPP Group plc on 30th August 2005 and amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee on 27 th  October 2005 and amended by written resolution on 11 th  November 2005 and amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee on 21 st  February 2006 and amended by resolutions of the Compensation Committee on 27 th  April 2007 and amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee on 9 th  August 2007 and amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee on 24 th  October 2007.

As approved by shareholders of WPP Group plc on 30 th  October 2008 prior to the introduction of a new holding company by a scheme of arrangement under Part 26 of the Companies Act 2006.

Approved by the shareholders of WPP plc on 30 th  September 2008 and adopted by the Board of Directors of WPP plc on 30 th  September 2008; amended by written resolution of the Compensation Committee on 17 th  December 2008, amended by resolutions of the Compensation Committee on 3 rd  March 2009 and 11 th  May 2010 and amended by written resolution on 2 nd  June 2011 signed by Mark Linaugh pursuant to the delegated authority given to him by the Compensation Committee on 11 th  April 2011 and amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee on 12 November 2012

 

   

 

 

1  

Amended by written resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 17 December 2008

Squire Sanders (UK) LLP

7 Devonshire Square

London

EC2M 4YH

United Kingdom

DX 136546 Bishopsgate 2

Office: +44 (0)20 7655 1000

Fax:     +44 (0)20 7655 1001

Reference WPP.002-1470


CONTENTS

 

1       PURPOSE

   1

2       INTERPRETATION

   1

3       ELIGIBILITY

   4

4       AWARDS

   4

5       CESSATION OF EMPLOYMENT

   6

6       VARIATION OF CAPITAL

   7

7       CHANGE OF CONTROL

   7

8       DISCHARGE OF AWARDS

   9

9       MISSTATEMENT

   9

10     MISCELLANEOUS

   10

11     AMENDMENT

   12

APPENDIX 1

   13

APPENDIX 2

   15

APPENDIX 3

   16

APPENDIX 4

   17

APPENDIX 5

   17

APPENDIX 6

   17

APPENDIX 7

   17

APPENDIX 8

   18

APPENDIX 9

   18

 

i


1

    PURPOSE

The purpose of the Plan is to motivate and reward selected employees of the Group.

 

2

    INTERPRETATION

 

2.1

The following words and expressions have the following meanings in the Rules of the Plan and in the Schedule:

Act ” means the Companies Act 1985 as amended.

ADR ” means an American Depository Receipt representing, for the time being, 5 ordinary shares in the capital of the Company deposited with Citibank NA as depository under the Deposit Agreement between the Company and Citibank NA as of 2 January 2013 or any other American depository receipt arrangement sponsored by the Company. 2 3

Award ” means an award or grant made to an Eligible Person subject to and on the terms of the Plan.

Award Period ” means the period of 42 days commencing on:

 

  (a)

the date of adoption of the Plan by the board of directors of the Company;

 

  (b)

any day on which the Company releases its results for any period; or

 

  (c)

the date of commencement of Employment of an Eligible Person (but only in respect of that Eligible Person).

Bad Leaver ” means a Participant whose Employment terminates as a result of the proper termination by a Group Company of his Employment (which shall include a termination which is not a proper termination only by virtue of a procedural error in the termination) where that Participant:

 

  (a)

shall have committed any act or omission which entitles a Group Company to terminate his contract of employment without notice; or

 

  (b)

shall have committed any serious breach or repeated or continued breach (after warning in writing) of his obligations under his contract of employment including, without limitation, ceasing to work full time for the Group without the prior consent of the relevant Group Company except in circumstances where the Participant retires (but does not take early retirement other than with the prior consent of the Company); or

 

  (c)

shall have become prohibited by law from being a director or employee of a Group Company as a result of his own act, omission or misfeasance; or

 

  (d)

shall have been convicted of any criminal offence which is punishable by a custodial sentence or involves dishonesty or violence,

provided that a Participant shall not be a Bad Leaver if he shall have been found to have been constructively dismissed by the Group (in which case the Participant shall be regarded as an Other Leaver). 4

 

2  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

3  

Further amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012

4  

Amended by Written Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 November 2005

 

1


Basic Salary ” means an Eligible Person’s basic annual salary for a particular year. In the event of any dispute, such basic annual salary will be as determined by the Compensation Committee.

Change of Control Date ” means the date on which a person or persons obtains Control of the Company as described in Rule 7.1(a) or 7.1(b).

Company ” means:

 

  (a)

for the period before 25 October 2005 the reference shall be to WPP 2005 Limited a private limited company incorporated in England and Wales with registered number 1003653;

 

  (b)

for the period between 25 October 2005 and 18 November 2008 the reference shall be to WPP 2008 Limited, a private limited company incorporated in England and Wales with registered number 5537577; and

 

  (c)

for the period between 19 November 2008 and the Effective Date, the reference shall be to WPP plc, a public limited company incorporated in Jersey with registered number 101749, to be re-named WPP 2012 plc; and

 

  (d)

for the period from and including the Effective Date the reference shall be to WPP plc, a public limited company incorporated in Jersey with registered number 111714. 5 6

Company Secretary ” means the company secretary of the Company from time to time.

Compensation Committee ” means the compensation committee for the time being of the board of directors of the Company.

Control ” has the same meaning as in section 840 of the Income and Corporation Taxes Act 1988.

Effective Date ” means the date on which the Scheme, as set out in part 3 of the circular to share owners of WPP plc, a company registered in Jersey with company number 101749, relating to the recommended proposals for the introduction of a new parent company becomes effective, expected to be 2 January 2013. 7 8

Eligible Person ” means any employee (including an executive director) of a Group Company.

Employment ” means employment as a director or employee of any Group Company.

ESOP ” means any of the WPP Group plc Grantor Trust, the WPP Group plc ROW ESOP, the WPP Group plc UK ESOP and any other employee benefit trust in existence at the date of adoption of the Plan or as may otherwise be nominated from time to time by the Compensation Committee to operate in conjunction with the Plan.

Good Leaver ” means a Participant whose termination of Employment is as a result of:

 

  (a)

death;

 

  (b)

permanent disability;

 

5  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

6  

Further amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012

7  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

8  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012

 

2


  (c)

serious long-term illness preventing the Participant from carrying out his duties of employment; or

 

  (d)

retirement on a basis agreed with the Company. 9

Group ” means the Company and all of its subsidiaries (as defined in section 736 of the Act or, as the context may require, articles 2 and 2A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991). 10

Group Company ” means any member of the Group.

 

 

Original Accounts ” means any accounts or other data used to assess the extent to which a Relevant Performance Condition is or was satisfied. 15

Other Leaver ” means a Participant whose Employment terminates as a result of:

 

  (a)

the voluntary leaving or giving notice voluntarily to leave Employment with the Group or voluntarily resigning as a director of any Group Company including, for the avoidance of doubt, taking early retirement without the prior consent of the relevant Group Company;

 

  (b)

the wrongful termination by that Participant of his contract of employment with any Group Company;

 

  (c)

any other reason not referred to in the definition of Good Leaver or Bad Leaver.

Participant ” means a person who holds an Award including, if relevant, his legal personal representatives.

Performance Related Remuneration ” means any element of the Participant’s remuneration (for the avoidance of doubt, payable in cash or shares and including, for the avoidance of doubt, any Award) where the payment, or the extent of the payment, of that remuneration is determined, at least in part, by reference to a Relevant Performance Condition. 16

Plan ” means the WPP plc 17 Restricted Stock Plan as from time to time amended in accordance with the provisions of the Rules.

Relevant Performance Condition ” means a condition or term which affects the amount of any remuneration of a Participant (for the avoidance of doubt, payable in cash or shares) that vests, is exercisable or receivable and which depends on any measure of performance including the financial performance of the Company, the Group or any business (or any part of any business) or company within the Group. 18

Scheme ” means a scheme of arrangement under Article 125 of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991 or with or subject to any modification, addition or condition approved or imposed by the Royal Court of Jersey relating to proposals for the introduction of a new parent company; 19

 

9  

Amended by Written Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 November 2005

10  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

11  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

12  

Definition of “New WPP” deleted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012

13  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

14  

Definition of “Old WPP” deleted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012

15  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010

16  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010

17  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 17 December 2008

18  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010

19  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012

 

3


Share ” means an ordinary share in the capital of the Company and includes ADRs.

Trading Day ” means a day (excluding Saturdays, Sundays and Bank Holidays) on which clearing banks are generally open for business in the City of London and in New York.

Treasury Shares ” means any Shares which are purchased by the Company in accordance with Article 57 of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991 and held by the Company as treasury shares pursuant to Article 58A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991. 20

UK Listing Authority ” means the United Kingdom Listing Authority, a division of the Financial Services Authority.

Vesting Date ” means the day after the end of the Vesting Period unless the Company is prohibited from discharging the Award on that date in which case the Vesting Date will be the first available Trading Day when the Company is no longer prohibited from discharging that Award.

Vesting Period ” means the period of two calendar years commencing on the date on which an Award is granted or such other period as may be specified by the Compensation Committee at the time an Award is granted.

 

2.2

Words importing the singular shall include the plural and vice versa and words importing the masculine shall include the feminine.

 

2.3

Any reference, express or implied, to an enactment includes references to:

 

  (a)

that enactment as amended, extended or applied by or under any other enactment; and

 

  (b)

any enactment which that enactment re-enacts (with or without modification).

 

2.4

Any reference to a Rule is a reference to one of these Rules.

 

3

    ELIGIBILITY

 

3.1

No person is entitled, by virtue of the provisions of the Plan or any other means, to participate as of right in the Plan through the grant of an Award and consequently the receipt of an Award shall in no circumstances give or imply any right to receive any further award and any further right that is in fact granted to the same Participant may be on the same or on different terms. 21

 

3.2

The Compensation Committee will decide from time to time when to grant Awards under the Plan and 22 which Eligible Persons may participate and the extent of their participation in the Plan.

 

4

    AWARDS

 

4.1

The Compensation Committee may decide, following the end of a financial year, or at such other time as the Compensation Committee may determine, to grant an Award to an Eligible Person, that the grant of an Award may be subject to such terms (including performance conditions) as it determines provided that no such terms may be applied to any Award that is or is to be granted to a director of the Company that would result in the Plan being a Long Term Incentive Scheme for the purposes of the Listing Rules of the UK Listing Authority or which could result in the issue of new Shares by the Company or to the transfer of Treasury Shares by the Company. Where such terms are inconsistent with the other terms of the Plan, the terms specified by the Compensation Committee shall take precedence. For the avoidance of doubt,

 

20  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

21  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 21 February 2006

22  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 21 February 2006

 

4


 

there is no restriction on the grant of Awards to Participants who are not directors of the Company relating to whether the Award is in the form of a deferred bonus.

In cases where the Compensation Committee grants an award under this Rule 4.1 by reference to the value of Shares to be comprised in an Award rather than by reference to the number of Shares to be comprised in an Award, the number of Shares comprised in the Award will be calculated:

 

  (a)

in the case of an Award over ordinary shares in the capital of the Company, by converting the value of the Award into GB pounds (if specified in a currency other than GB pounds) by applying the London closing conversion rate provided by Bloomberg for the date of grant of that Award, and using the lower of the two prices for Shares on the date of grant plus one quarter of the difference between them (as derived from the Daily Official List or other reputable market source that is able to provide the relevant information at a more appropriate time, even though that source may not be able to guarantee that the information provided will be identical to that subsequently published in the Daily Official List); and

 

  (b)

in the case of an Award over ADRs, by converting the value of the Award into US dollars (if specified in a currency other than US dollars) by applying the London closing conversion rate provided by Bloomberg for the date of grant of that Award, and using the fair market value of an ADR as quoted on the NASDAQ National Market System at the close of the market on the date of grant of that Award. 23

 

4.2

The maximum Award to any Participant in respect of a particular financial year shall be 200% (two hundred per cent) of that Participant’s Basic Salary or such other percentage as the Compensation Committee may from time to time determine.

 

4.3

Awards will normally be made during an Award Period, but exceptionally may be made at other times.

 

4.4

The Compensation Committee may determine that an Award may be satisfied by the trustees of an ESOP (with the agreement of the trustees) or otherwise as it considers appropriate, provided that in no circumstances shall an Award be satisfied through the issue of new Shares or the transfer of Treasury Shares.

 

4.5

Subject to Rule 5 a Participant shall become entitled to receive the number of Shares comprised in an Award on the Vesting Date only if the Participant continues in Employment throughout the Vesting Period until the Vesting Date.

 

4.6

An Award is personal to a Participant and cannot be transferred, assigned, used as security or otherwise charged or turned to account. Any breach of the terms of this Rule 4.6 shall result in the immediate lapse of the Award.

 

4.7

An Award shall lapse if the Participant commits an act of bankruptcy or enters into any arrangement with his creditors under any formal insolvency procedure.

 

4.8

The receipt of an Award shall not confer on the Participant (unless otherwise provided in the terms of the Award) any right to the transfer of a specified number of Shares from any particular transferor. The discharge of the Award shall be in accordance with Rule 8.

 

23  

Amended by Written Resolution dated 2 June 2011 signed by Mark Linaugh pursuant to the delegated authority given to him by the Compensation Committee on 11 April 2011

 

5


4.9

When an Award is granted the Compensation Committee may determine that 24 the Participant shall, subject to Rule 4.10, be entitled to receive at the time of the discharge of the Award a transfer of that number of Shares which could have been purchased if:

 

  (a)

the dividends which would have been paid on such Shares during the Vesting Period had been reinvested in Shares on the date each dividend is paid after the date that the Award is made; and

 

  (b)

the dividends which would have been paid on Shares which would have been held pursuant to that reinvestment in Shares had those dividends been further reinvested in Shares, again on the date each dividend is paid during the Vesting Period.

 

4.10

If a Participant is a Bad Leaver any right to receive additional Shares under 4.9 shall, unless the Compensation Committee determines otherwise, lapse on the date of termination of Employment.

 

4.11

For the avoidance of doubt a Participant shall not be entitled to any voting rights in respect of Shares to be transferred in respect of an Award until those Shares are actually transferred to the Participant.

 

5

CESSATION OF EMPLOYMENT

 

5.1

Subject to Rules 5.2 and 5.4, if a Participant ceases to be in Employment prior to the Vesting Date of an Award, that Award shall lapse except to the extent that the Compensation Committee determines otherwise.

 

5.2

If a Participant ceases to be in Employment during the Vesting Period and is a Good Leaver then except to the extent that the Compensation Committee determines otherwise the Award applicable to that Vesting Period shall not lapse and shall (subject to Rule 5.7) be discharged at the time that the Award would have been discharged but for the cessation of Employment, being the original Vesting Date except that (subject to the exercise of the discretion of the Compensation Committee to determine otherwise) the number of Shares comprised in an Award shall be reduced on a pro-rata basis to reflect the proportion of the Vesting Period between the grant of an Award and the date of cessation of employment. Where the grant of an Award was preceded by a period during which performance targets were measured as a pre-cursor to the granting of the Award, then the Vesting Period (subject to the exercise of the discretion of the Compensation Committee to determine otherwise) shall be taken for the purpose of the time pro-rata calculation referred to in this Rule 5.2 only as beginning at the start of the earlier period during which the performance target was measured. 25

 

5.3

If a Participant ceases to be in Employment during the Vesting Period and is a Bad Leaver the Award applicable to that Vesting Period shall lapse immediately.

 

5.4

If a Participant ceases to be in Employment during the Vesting Period and is an Other Leaver the Award applicable to that Vesting Period shall lapse immediately unless the Compensation Committee determines that the Award shall not lapse and/or shall be discharged early and/or shall be reduced in such manner as the Compensation Committee determines. 26

 

5.5

Subject to any relevant legal or regulatory requirements prevailing in any relevant jurisdiction, for the purposes of this Rule a woman who ceases to be in Employment due to pregnancy or

 

24  

Amended by Written Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 November 2005

25  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 27 April 2007

26  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 27 October 2005

 

6


 

confinement will be regarded as having ceased Employment on the date on which she indicates that she does not intend to return to work. In the absence of such indication and if she has not already returned to work she will be regarded as having ceased Employment on the last day on which she is entitled to return to work. A woman who exercises her statutory right or any equivalent contractual right to return to work following pregnancy or confinement shall not be treated as having ceased to be in Employment.

 

5.6

If a Participant who has ceased to be in Employment breaches any contractual obligation owed to any Group Company relating to restrictions on that Participant following the termination of his Employment the Participant’s Award shall be forfeited unless the Compensation Committee determines otherwise.

 

5.7

If a Participant ceases to be in Employment during the Vesting Period and is a Good Leaver due to leaving by reason of death, then the provisions of Rule 5.2 shall apply except that the discharge of the Award shall (except to the extent that the Compensation Committee determines otherwise) take place as soon as practicable following the death of the Participant. 27

 

6

VARIATION OF CAPITAL

 

6.1

In the event of any increase or variation in the capital of the Company arising out of or in connection with a capitalisation issue, an offer to the holders of Shares, a rights issue, a subdivision, consolidation or reduction of capital, special dividend, demerger, or other variation of capital, the terms of outstanding Awards may be adjusted in such manner and on such terms as the Compensation Committee considers appropriate. An adjustment shall not have effect unless the auditors or other advisers appointed by the Compensation Committee acting as experts and not arbitrators confirm that in their opinion the adjustment is fair and reasonable and such confirmation shall be final and binding.

 

6.2

Participants shall be notified of any adjustment made under this Rule.

 

7

CHANGE OF CONTROL

 

7.1

Subject to Rule 7.3:

 

  (a)

if any person (and/or persons acting in concert) obtains Control of the Company as a result or in consequence of making a general offer to acquire the whole of the issued share capital of the Company which is made subject to a condition such that if satisfied the person making the offer will have Control of the Company, or

 

  (b)

if any person (and/or persons acting in concert) obtains Control of the Company other than as a result of or in consequence of making such general offer but the offeror is bound by Rule 5 of the City Code on Takeovers and Mergers to make a general offer for the minority,

then in relation to all outstanding Awards the Vesting Period shall be deemed to end on the Change of Control Date.

 

7.2

If:

 

  (a)

under Part 18A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991 the Court sanctions a compromise or arrangement for the purposes of or in connection with a scheme for the reconstruction of the Company or its amalgamation with any other company or companies; or

 

27  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 27 April 2007

 

7


  (b)

a resolution is passed for the winding up of the Company for the purposes of or in connection with a reconstruction or division of the Company or its business;

the terms of outstanding Awards will be varied in such manner as the Compensation Committee considers appropriate. A variation shall not have effect unless the auditors or other advisers appointed by the Compensation Committee acting as experts and not as arbitrators confirm that in their opinion the variation is fair and reasonable and such confirmation shall be final and binding. 28

 

7.3

If any company (the “Acquiring Company”) obtains Control of the Company in accordance with Rule 7.1 and:

 

  (a)

the Acquiring Company also obtains Control of another company (the “Target Company”) within such period as the Compensation Committee may determine and, as a consequence of obtaining such Control, the Company and the Target Company become subsidiaries of the Acquiring Company; and

 

  (b)

the shareholders of the Company and the Target Company before the Acquiring Company obtained Control of the Company and the Target Company are the same persons who substantially comprise the shareholders of the Acquiring Company after the Acquiring Company obtained such Control,

then in relation any outstanding Awards the Compensation Committee may determine that the Vesting Period shall not be deemed to end on the Change of Control Date under Rule 7.1 and it may determine (with the agreement of the Acquiring Company) that a Participant is required to release any outstanding Awards in consideration of the grant to the Participant by the Acquiring Company of an equivalent award.

 

7.4

For the purpose of Rule 7.3 an award granted pursuant to Rule 7.3 is an equivalent award to an Award if, but only if:

 

  (a)

the shares to which it relates are in the Acquiring Company, and it is subject to the provisions of the Plan in the same manner as the Award immediately prior to its release;

 

  (b)

the shares to which it relates are of an equivalent value to the value of the Shares which were subject to the Award immediately prior to the release, and for this purpose the Compensation Committee shall determine such equivalent value provided that the release of an Award and the grant of an equivalent award under Rule 7.3 shall not have effect unless the auditors or other advisers appointed by the Compensation Committee acting as experts and not arbitrators confirm that in their opinion the equivalent value is fair and reasonable and such confirmation shall be final and binding; and

 

  (c)

such Award is subject to the performance conditions as the original Award (if any) or such other performance conditions that the Compensation Committee determines are substantially no more and no less onerous than those performance conditions.

 

7.5

With effect from the release of an Award and the grant of an equivalent award pursuant to Rule 7.3 the Plan will be construed as if:

 

  (a)

the equivalent award had been granted at the same time as the Award it replaces;

 

  (b)

references to the Company in the Rules were references to the Acquiring Company; and

 

  (c)

references to Shares were references to shares in the Acquiring Company,

 

28  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

 

8


and the Compensation Committee may make such amendments as may be necessary to give effect to Rule 7.3.

 

7.6

Notwithstanding the other provisions of this Rule 7, in any circumstances where Awards (other than Awards made to directors of the Company) would otherwise have been receivable before the end of the Vesting Period by reason of this Rule 7, the Compensation Committee may determine (the determination to apply equally to all such Awards outstanding at the time) that the provisions of the Rule 7 will neither cause such Awards to become receivable nor to lapse at different times than would otherwise be the case, if the Compensation Committee considers that the Awards will continue to be appropriate notwithstanding the changed circumstances, or that the position of Participants can and will be adequately preserved by the grant to them of some other right or rights in substitution for or addition to the existing rights. The Compensation Committee may alternatively specify that such Awards may become receivable before the end of the Vesting Period on the basis of being reduced on pro-rata time basis to take account of the reduced part of the Vesting Period that has elapsed.

 

8

DISCHARGE OF AWARDS

 

8.1

Subject to any adjustment to an Award under Rule 9.3 29 and to Rule 8.3 Awards will be discharged by the transfer of Shares to the Participant (or as he may direct, or to a depository in the case of ADRs) from an ESOP or otherwise as the Company may determine.

 

8.2

Any transfer of Shares to a Participant (or as he may direct or to a depository in the case of ADRs) in respect of an Award is subject to the Compensation Committee being satisfied that the transfer would be lawful in any relevant jurisdiction.

 

8.3

The transfer of Shares under the Plan is subject to obtaining any approval or consent required under the Listing Rules published by the UK Listing Authority, the Rules of the London Stock Exchange, the Admission and Disclosure Standards of the London Stock Exchange, and otherwise complying with the provision of City Code on Take-overs and Mergers and any other applicable regulations or enactment (whether in the United Kingdom or overseas). The Participant shall do all things necessary to obtain, or obviate the need for, such approval or consent.

 

9

MISSTATEMENT 30

 

9.1

The provisions of 9.2 will apply if:

 

  (a)

a Participant has committed an act of fraud, dishonesty or deceit in relation to a Group Company;

 

  (b)

as a result of the actions or omissions of a Participant, any Original Accounts are required to be materially corrected, or any accounts or other data for a later period include write downs, adjustments or other items; or

 

  (c)

a Participant knew or ought reasonably to have known, given that Participant’s role and position in the Group, that the relevant financial performance or other data by reference to which a Relevant Performance Condition was measured was materially different than shown in the Original Accounts,

 

29  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010

30  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010

 

9


and the Compensation Committee considers that the quantum of any Performance Related Remuneration of that Participant would have been affected if the circumstance or circumstances referred to in (a), (b) or (c) above had been known of, acted upon or otherwise taken into account at the relevant time.

 

9.2

In the event that the Compensation Committee determines that it would be clear to a reasonable, objective assessor that one of the events as detailed in Rule 9.1 above has occurred the Compensation Committee shall be entitled, but in no circumstances shall be obliged, to take action as described in Rule 9.3 below.

 

9.3

The Compensation Committee may determine that:

 

  (a)

an Award is cancelled in its entirety; or

 

  (b)

the number of Shares comprised in an Award will be reduced by such amount and/or in such manner as the Compensation Committee determines.

For the avoidance of doubt, this Rule 9.3 may be operated in respect of Awards where the event or events in respect of which the Compensation Committee has made a determination under Rule 9.2 relates to Performance Related Remuneration under another Award or another plan.

 

10

MISCELLANEOUS

 

10.1

The Plan shall be administered by the Compensation Committee whose decision on any matter concerning the Plan shall be final and binding unless it is a matter in respect of which the Rules provide that the decision of the auditors or any other adviser is final and binding. In particular the Compensation Committee may establish such procedures and regulations for the administration and implementation of the Plan as it thinks fit. Notwithstanding the provisions of Rule 11.3 and without prejudice to the generality of the other provisions of this Rule 10.1, such procedures and regulations that relate to securities laws and exchange control compliance may affect the operation of Awards granted before the establishment of such procedures and regulations. 31

 

10.2

The Compensation Committee or any committee or agent that they may from time to time delegate authority to, shall approve all documents required in connection with Awards.

 

10.3

The Compensation Committee may establish arrangements under which the cash value of an Award may be paid to an Eligible Person in lieu of the discharge of the Award under Rule 8.

 

10.4

The cost of establishing and operating the Plan (including but not limited to stamp duty and stamp duty reserve tax arising on a transfer of Shares pursuant to Rule 8, if any) shall be borne by the Company but may be recharged to the relevant Group Companies on such arm’s length basis as is considered appropriate from time to time.

 

10.5

Any notice given under the Plan may be given by personal delivery, delivery by email or by sending the same by post in the case of the Company to its registered office from time to time marked for the attention of the Company Secretary (or to such other address and person as may be specified by the Company from time to time) 32 and in the case of a Participant, the address which he shall have given to the Company for the purpose or which shall be known to the Company to be his address from time to time.

 

31  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 21 February 2006

32  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 21 February 2006

 

10


10.6

Any notice served shall be deemed to have been received:

 

  (a)

at the time of delivery if delivery is by hand; or

 

  (b)

at the time the email is sent, if delivery is by email; or 33

 

  (c)

in the case of pre-paid post, on the fifth Trading Day after the date of posting.

 

10.7

Evidence that the notice was properly addressed, stamped and put in the post shall be conclusive evidence of posting.

 

10.8

Participation in the Plan is a matter separate from any contract of employment or other agreement and any benefit conferred by the Plan shall not be regarded as salary or 34 counted for pension or any other purpose. Participation in the Plan by any individual is entirely at the discretion of the Board and in no circumstances shall the fact that an individual has received an Award or Awards in the past give that individual any right to receive a further Award or Awards. 35

 

10.9

The rights and obligations of any individual under the terms of his office or employment with any Group Company will not be affected by his participation in the Plan and the Plan does not form part of any contract of employment between any individual and any Group Company.

 

10.10

A Participant shall have no entitlement by way of compensation or damages resulting from the termination of the office or employment (for any reason and whether lawful or not) by virtue of which he is or may be eligible to participate in the Plan or for the loss or reduction of any right or benefit or prospective right or benefit under the Plan which he might otherwise have enjoyed whether the compensation is claimed for wrongful dismissal or otherwise.

 

10.11

The Plan is intended to operate on a worldwide basis and, accordingly, the Compensation Committee may adopt any rate of exchange for converting any currency into any other currency as it decides at any time and from time to time for any purpose in connection with the Plan.

 

10.12

No obligation to transfer Shares shall arise, nor shall there be any obligation to do any other thing in relation to a Participant under or in connection with the Plan or the making or vesting of any Award unless and until the Compensation Committee is satisfied in its discretion that either:

 

  (a)

the Participant has made payment or has made arrangements (which may include where specified at the date of grant of an Award by the Compensation Committee, validly electing for the Participant to be liable directly for any employer’s National Insurance contributions) satisfactory to the Compensation Committee for the payment to the relevant Group Company or other person of such sum as is, in the sole discretion of the Compensation Committee, sufficient to settle any liability for any tax and/or, unless the Compensation Committee otherwise determines, social security contributions (which, within the UK shall include employees’ National Insurance contributions, and where determined by the Compensation Committee at the time of the grant of the Award, employer’s National Insurance contributions and which outside the UK shall only include taxes which are equivalent to UK employer’s National Insurance Contributions where determined by the Compensation Committee at the time of the grant of the Award) or the

 

33  

Amended by Written Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 November 2006

34  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 21 February 2006

35  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 21 February 2006

 

11


 

like (in any jurisdiction) which are or may be recovered from such person in connection with the Plan or any Award and in respect of which the relevant Group Company or other person is or may be liable to account for or pay in any jurisdiction; or

 

  (b)

the Participant has entered into an agreement satisfactory to the Compensation Committee to ensure that such a payment will be made by the Participant.

 

10.13

Receipt of an Award shall authorise the Company or any person nominated by the Company at its sole discretion to sell such number of Shares due to be transferred to a Participant as it may estimate as being necessary to produce a cash sum sufficient to meet the liabilities referred to in Rule 10.12 and account to the relevant Group Company or other person and/or the relevant authorities in respect of such tax and/or social security liabilities (in any jurisdiction) at the appropriate time provided that any excess sum generated by such sale that is not required shall be accounted for to the Participant.

 

10.14

If a Participant owes a debt or other monetary obligation to a Group Company, the relevant Group Company has a charge over the Participant’s interest in the Plan. Satisfaction of an Award may be withheld until the Participant has discharged, to the satisfaction of the Compensation Committee, the debt or other monetary obligation.

 

10.15

The Plan and any Award shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of England and Wales and the Company and the Participants (together with any Eligible Persons who do not become Participants) shall submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the Courts of England and Wales.

 

11

AMENDMENT

 

11.1

Subject to Rules 11.2 and 11.3, the Compensation Committee may at any time alter or add to all or any provisions of the Plan, or the terms of all or any Awards made under it, in any respect.

 

11.2

No alteration or addition shall be made under Rule 11.1 that would or might result in new Shares being issued in respect of the Plan or that would or might result in Treasury Shares being transferred in respect of the Plan or which would result in the Plan becoming a Long Term Incentive Scheme as defined in the Listing Rules of the UK Listing Authority, in each case without the prior approval of the Company in general meeting.

 

11.3

No alteration or addition shall be made to the terms of any Award made prior to the date of the alteration or addition which would adversely affect a Participant’s interest in that Award in any material respect without the consent of the relevant Participant.

 

12


APPENDIX 1 36

The Plan will apply to Awards granted to Participants who are or may become subject to French taxation (i.e. income tax and/or social security contributions) as a result of an Award made under this Plan. Awards to such Participants will be subject to the modifications set out in this Appendix and in the event of any difference or conflict between the terms of this Appendix and the Rules, the terms of this Appendix will prevail.

 

1

The grant of an Award to Eligible Persons is made under the same conditions as those set forth by Articles L225-197-1 to L225-197-5 of the French Commercial Code. The grant of an Award is notably authorised by the corporate structure, which is qualified to make decisions regarding Company share capital.

 

2

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan:

 

2.1

Awards for the purpose of this Appendix mean a conditional right to receive, free of charge, at the Vesting Date, Shares (which for this purpose shall not include ADRs);

 

2.2

for the purposes of this Appendix, Eligible Persons shall mean current salaried employees, as defined by French labour law or mandataire social as listed in Article L225-197-1, II of the French Commercial Code;

 

2.3

Awards may only be satisfied with Shares;

 

2.4

the Company may only offer Awards to employees of its French subsidiaries whose share capital (or voting rights) are held as to at least 10% directly or indirectly by Company;

 

2.5

no Award may be granted to any Eligible Person who owns more than 10% of the issued ordinary share capital of the Company for the time being;

 

2.6

the number of Shares comprised in Awards under the Plan cannot exceed 10% of the issued ordinary share capital of the Company at the time of grant of the Awards. Once the 10% threshold is met, no additional Awards can thereafter be granted by the Company;

 

2.7

subject to paragraph 2.12 below, the Vesting Period must not be less than two years and the Award must not therefore be satisfied for a period of at least two years after the date on which the Award is granted;

 

2.8

subject to paragraph 2.13 below, the Participant must hold the Shares received on the Vesting Date for at least two years;

 

2.9

during the Vesting Period, the Participant is not the beneficial or legal owner of the Shares in respect of which the Award has been made and at the end of the Vesting Period the Participant shall only become entitled to receive the number of Shares comprised in his Award. A Participant is not entitled under Rule 4.9 or otherwise to any voting rights, dividends or any extra Shares that the Participant would have been able to buy with the dividends that he would have received had he actually held the Shares during the Vesting Period;

 

2.10

once a Participant is free to dispose of the Shares comprised in an Award at the end of the holding period specified in paragraph 2.8, the Participant may still not sell those Shares within the periods set forth in Article L225-197-1, I of the French Commercial Code;

 

36  

Amended by Resolutions of the Compensation Committee dated 27 April 2007 and 9 August 2007

 

13


2.11

a mandataire social shall be required to retain (either in his own name or deposited with a nominee on his behalf) a proportion of the Shares awarded under the Plan as determined by the Compensation Committee until he ceases his role as a mandataire social. If no other proportion is determined when the relevant Award is granted, the proportion required to be retained will be 10%;

 

2.12

as an exception to the minimum two-year Vesting Period (specified at paragraph 2.7 above) if a Participant‘s employment terminates as a result of death, the number of Shares in respect of which the Award was granted shall be receivable in full without any pro-rated reduction provided that the Participant’s heirs formally request distribution of the Shares within six months of the death of the Participant;

 

2.13

if a Participant’s employment terminates as a result of death or disability within the meaning corresponding to the second and third category of Article L341-4 of the Social Security Code, the minimum two-year holding period (specified at paragraph 2.8 above) shall not apply;

 

2.14

Shares underlying the Awards can be exchanged for shares (without any other additional compensation) in the event of a merger or spin-off operation performed during the Vesting Period. In addition Shares can be exchanged for shares (without any other additional compensation) in the event of a public offer, a merger, a spin-off, a stock-split or a reverse stock-split operation performed during the holding period described in paragraph 2.8 above, such holding period remains applicable to the shares received in exchange for the time period remaining at the date of the exchange;

 

2.15

an Award may only be granted under this Appendix within the period of 10 years beginning with the date on which the Plan was approved by the board of Directors of the Company (30 August 2005).

 

14


APPENDIX 2 37

Taxpayers Subject to Section 409A of the United States Internal Revenue Code

The plan will apply to participants who are taxpayers subject to Section 409A of the United States Internal Revenue Code (“Section 409A”), with the following modifications:

 

1

The plan shall be interpreted and construed in accordance with Section 409A. Any discretion afforded to any person or entity under the plan the existence of which itself would cause a participant to be taxed under Section 409A is hereby removed from the plan.

 

2

Notwithstanding any provision of the plan to the contrary, if a participant is a “specified employee” within the meaning of Section 409A, any payment otherwise required to be made pursuant to the plan as a result of the participant’s “separation from service” within the meaning of Section 409A shall be delayed for 6 months following the date of the participant’s separation, if necessary to prevent the participant from being taxed under Section 409A. On the earliest date on which such payments can be made without violating the foregoing requirements of Section 409A, there shall (subject to Rules 10.12 38 and 10.13 39 ) be paid to the participant, in a single cash lump sum, an amount equal to the aggregate amount of all payments delayed pursuant to the preceding sentence.

 

3

In Rule 5.1, delete “except to the extent that the Compensation Committee determines otherwise.”

 

4

In Rule 5.2, delete “except to the extent that the Compensation Committee determines otherwise” and “(subject to the exercise of the discretion of the Compensation Committee to determine otherwise)”.

 

5

In Rule 5.4, substitute the following “If a Participant ceases to be in Employment during the Vesting Period and is an Other Leaver the Award applicable to that Vesting Period shall lapse immediately, unless the Compensation Committee determines that the Award applicable to that Vesting Period shall not lapse in which case the Award shall be paid in accordance with Rule 5.2.”

 

6

In Rule 5.7, delete “(except to the extent that the Compensation Committee determines otherwise) take place as soon as practicable” and add “take place within 90 days”.

 

7

Add the following as Rule 7.1(A):

“Notwithstanding the foregoing, Rule 7.1 shall apply only if the transaction or circumstances by which any person (and/or persons acting in concert) obtains Control of the Company would constitute a “change in the ownership or effective control of the [Company], or in the ownership of a substantial portion of the assets of the [Company]” within the meaning of Section 409A, and if Rule 7.1 does apply, Awards will be discharged by the later of (i) the December 31st immediately following the end of the Vesting Period, or (ii) two and one-half months following the end of the Vesting Period.”

 

8

Notwithstanding the foregoing, any award under the plan shall not be subject to the provisions of this Appendix 2 to the extent such award is earned and vested prior to January 1, 2005.

 

37  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 9 August 2007

38  

Numbering amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010

39  

Numbering amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010

 

15


APPENDIX 3 40

 

1

The Compensation Committee may grant awards under the terms of the Plan but subject to the modifications set out in this Appendix 3 (provided that the provisions of Rule 11.2 41 shall continue to apply).

 

2

Notwithstanding any other provisions of the Plan:

 

2.1

sub-paragraph (h) of the definition of “Good Leaver” shall be amended by the addition of the words “but retirement will include ceasing to work in all sectors in which any Group Company operates” after the words “agreed with the Company”;

 

2.2

Rule 4.5 will be amended by the addition of the words “or cash” after the words “the number of Shares”;

 

2.3

Rule 5.2 will be amended to read as follows:

“If a Participant ceases to be in Employment during the Vesting Period and is a Good Leaver then the Award applicable to that Vesting Period shall not lapse and shall (subject to Rule 5.7) be discharged at the time that the Award would have been discharged but for the cessation of Employment, being the original Vesting Date.”;

 

2.4

if the Award is to be satisfied in cash rather than Shares (which will be specified at the time the Award is granted) the Participant shall also be entitled to receive at the time of the discharge of the Award an amount equivalent to interest as if it had accrued at a rate to be determined by the Compensation Committee during the Vesting Period, which interest will be paid when the Award is discharged provided that if the Award lapses the right to this additional payment will also lapse;

 

2.5

if the Award is to be satisfied in Shares (which will be specified at the time the Award is granted), the Participant shall also be entitled to receive at the time of the discharge of the Award a transfer of that number of Shares which could have been purchased if the dividends which would have been paid on such Shares during the Vesting Period had been reinvested in further Shares on the Vesting Date provided that if the Award lapses, the right to the further Shares will also lapse;

 

2.6

Rule 8.1 will be amended by the addition of the words “or in cash if the Participant has elected to receive the Award in cash” at the end of the Rule.

 

40  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 24 October 2007

41  

Numbering amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010

 

16


APPENDIX 4 42

Australia

The Plan will apply to Awards granted to residents in Australia with the following modification:

Any Shares acquired by a Participant pursuant to this Plan cannot be traded within Australia within 12 months of the Vesting Date relating to such Shares and, by receiving such Shares, each Participant shall be taken to have agreed to observe this restriction.

APPENDIX 5

Canada

The Plan will apply to Awards granted to residents in Canada with the following modification:

Any Shares acquired by a Participant pursuant to this Plan cannot be traded within Canada at any time and, by receiving such Shares, each Participant shall be taken to have agreed to observe this restriction.

APPENDIX 6

Hong Kong

The Plan will apply to Awards granted to residents in Hong Kong with the following modifications:

 

1

Any Shares acquired by a Participant pursuant to this Plan cannot be traded within Hong Kong within 6 months of the Vesting Date relating to such Shares and, by receiving such Shares, each Participant shall be taken to have agreed to observe this restriction.

 

2

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan the grant of Awards under and the operation of the Plan does not constitute an offer or invitation to the public within the meaning of the Companies Ordinance or the Securities and Futures Ordinance.

APPENDIX 7

India

The Plan will apply to Awards granted to residents in India (which shall include for the purposes of the paragraph below Participants in respect of whose Award a liability to Indian Fringe Benefit Tax arises) with the following modification:

For the avoidance of doubt any Fringe Benefit Tax which is payable in respect of any Awards will be recoverable from the relevant Participants in the same way as if it were a tax liability of those Participants unless the Compensation Committee determines otherwise at the time of grant of such Awards.

 

42  

Appendices 4 to 9 inclusive inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 3 March 2009

 

17


APPENDIX 8

Mexico

The Plan will apply to Awards granted to residents in Mexico with the addition of the following rules:

 

1

Interests under the Plan have not and will not be registered with the National Registry of Securities maintained by the National Banking and Securities Commission of Mexico and therefore may not be publicly offered in Mexico.

 

2

Any Award is a private offering under Article 8 paragraph III of the Securities Law of Mexico. Any such offering is limited to employees or groups of employees of companies issuing interests under any employee stock plan or program (including any other program where interests are awarded with or without consideration to such employee or employees), or of the companies which are controlled by such issuer, as defined under the Securities Law and applicable regulations of Mexico in effect.

APPENDIX 9

Russia

The Plan will apply to Awards granted to residents in Russia with the following modification:

For the purposes of the securities laws of Russia, all transactions carried out and contracts entered into in connection with the Plan and any Shares acquired by Participants will be carried out or entered into outside Russia.

 

18

Exhibit 4.11

 

WPP GROUP PLC

 

   

THE WPP 2005 EXECUTIVE STOCK OPTION PLAN

As approved by shareholders of WPP Group plc on 26 th  September 2005 prior to the introduction of a new holding company by a scheme of arrangement under section 425 of the Companies Act 1985 and adopted by the Board of Directors of WPP Group Plc on 27 th  October 2005 and as amended by a written resolution dated 16 February 2006 and as amended by a resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 21 February 2006 and as amended by a resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 14 December 2006 and as amended by a resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 20 February 2007 and as amended by a resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 27 April 2007 and as amended by a resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 9 August 2007

As approved by shareholders of WPP Group plc on 30 October 2008 prior to the introduction of a new holding company by a scheme of arrangement under part 26 of the Companies Act 2006 as approved by the shareholders of WPP plc on 30 September 2008 and adopted by the Board of Directors of WPP plc on 30 September 2008 and as amended by resolutions of the Compensation Committee dated 3 March 2009 and 12 November 2012

 

   

Squire Sanders (UK) LLP

7 Devonshire Square

London

EC2M 4YH

United Kingdom

DX 136546 Bishopsgate 2

Office: +44 (0)20 7655 1000

Fax:     +44 (0)20 7655 1001

Reference WPP.002-1470


CONTENTS

 

1       DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

   1

2       ELIGIBILITY

   2

3       GRANT OF OPTIONS

   3

4       LIMITS

   4

5       PERFORMANCE CONDITIONS

   5

6       EXERCISE OF OPTIONS

   6

7       TAKEOVER, RECONSTRUCTION AND WINDING-UP

   8

8       VARIATION OF CAPITAL

   8

9       ALTERATIONS

   9

10     MISCELLANEOUS

   9

11     WITHHOLDING

   10

APPENDIX 1

   11

APPENDIX 2

   16

APPENDIX 3

   17

APPENDIX 4

   18

APPENDIX 5

   18

APPENDIX 6

   19

APPENDIX 7

   19

APPENDIX 8

   21

APPENDIX 9

   21

APPENDIX 10

   22

APPENDIX 11

   22

APPENDIX 12

   22

APPENDIX 13

   22

APPENDIX 14

   23

APPENDIX 15

   23

APPENDIX 16

   23

 

i


1

DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

 

1.1

In this Plan, unless the context otherwise requires:

Act ” means the Companies Act 1985 as amended;

Board ” means the board of directors of the Company or a committee appointed by such board of directors;

Depository ” means any depository or depositories which hold or whose nominee holds WPP ADRs;

Company ” means

 

  (a)

for the period between 25 October 2005 and 18 November 2008 the reference shall be to WPP 2008 Limited, a private limited company incorporated in England and Wales with registered number 5537577;

 

  (b)

for the period between 19 November 2008 and the Effective Date, the reference shall be to WPP plc, a public limited company incorporated in Jersey with registered number 101749, to be re-named WPP 2012 plc; and

 

  (c)

for the period from and including the Effective Date the reference shall be to WPP plc, a public limited company incorporated in Jersey with registered number 111714; 1

Effective Date ” means the date on which the Scheme, as set out in part 3 of the circular to share owners of WPP plc, a company registered in Jersey with company number 101749, relating to the recommended proposals for the introduction of a new parent company becomes effective, expected to be 2 January 2013; 2

Grant Date ” in relation to an Option means the date on which the Option was granted;

Group Member ” means:

 

  (a)

a Participating Company or a body corporate which is (within the meaning of section 736 of the Act or, as the context may require, Articles 2 and 2A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991) the Company’s holding company or a subsidiary of the Company’s holding company; or 3

 

  (b)

a body corporate which is (within the meaning of section 258 of the Act or, as the context may require, Articles 2 and 2A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991) a subsidiary undertaking of a body corporate within paragraph (a) above and has been designated by the Board for this purpose; 4

ITEPA ” means the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003;

Key Feature ” means a provision of this Plan which is necessary in order to meet the requirements of Schedule 4;

 

1  

Amended by Resolutions of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008 and 12 November 2012

2  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008 and amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012

3  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

4  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

 

1


Option ” means a right to acquire Shares or WPP ADRs under the Plan; and a right to acquire Shares shall be known as a “Share Option” and a right to acquire WPP ADRs shall be known as an “ADR Option”;

Participant ” means a person who holds an Option granted under the Plan;

Participating Company” means the Company or any Subsidiary;

Plan ” means the WPP 2005 Executive Stock Option Plan as herein set out but subject to any alterations or additions made under Rule 8 below;

Schedule 4 ” means Schedule 4 to ITEPA;

Schedule 9 ” means Schedule 9 to the Taxes Act 1988;

Scheme ” means a scheme of arrangement under Article 125 of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991 or with or subject to any modification, addition or condition approved or imposed by the Royal Court of Jersey relating to proposals for the introduction of a new parent company; 5

Share ” means an ordinary share in the capital of the Company and for the purposes of Rule 4 (Limits) and, if the context requires, other provisions of the Rules, “Shares” include WPP ADRs;

Specified Age ” means 65 years of age;

Subsidiary ” means a body corporate which is a subsidiary of the Company within the meaning of section 736 of the Act or, as the context may require, Articles 2 and 2A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991; 6

Taxes Act 1988 ” means the Income and Corporation Taxes Act 1988;

Treasury Shares ” means any Shares which are purchased by the Company in accordance with Article 57 of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991 and held by the Company as treasury shares pursuant to Article 58A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991; 7

WPP ADR ” means an American Depository Receipt representing, for the time being, 5 Shares deposited with Citibank NA as depository pursuant to the Deposit Agreement between the Company and Citibank NA as of 2 January 2013 8 as amended from time to time and/or any other American depository receipt arrangement sponsored by the Company, 9

and expressions not otherwise defined herein have the same meanings as they have in Schedule 4.

 

1.2

Any reference in the Plan to any enactment includes a reference to that enactment as from time to time modified, extended or re-enacted.

 

2

ELIGIBILITY

 

2.1

Subject to Rule 2.2 below, a person is eligible to be granted an Option under the Plan if (and only if) he is an executive director or employee of a Participating Company.

 

5  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008 and amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012

6  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

7  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

8  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012

9  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

 

2


2.2

There is no Rule 2.2. 10

 

2.3

No person is entitled, by virtue of the provisions of the Plan or any other means, to participate as of right in the Plan through the grant of an Award and consequently the receipt of an Award shall in no circumstances give or imply any right to receive any further award and any further right that is in fact granted to the same Participant may be on the same or on different terms. 11

 

3

GRANT OF OPTIONS

 

3.1

Subject to Rules 3.2 and 3.5 below and Rule 4 below, the Board may grant or procure the grant to any person who is eligible to be granted an Option under the Plan a Share Option or an ADR Option, upon the terms set out in the Plan; and for this purpose a Share Option to acquire means an option to subscribe for Shares or receive the transfer of Treasury Shares or other Shares as determined by the Board from time to time.

 

3.2

An Option may only be granted under the Plan:

 

  (a)

within the period of 6 weeks beginning with the date on which the Plan is adopted by the Board or the 6 week period beginning with the dealing day next following the date on which the Company announces its interim or final results for any period, or at any other time when the circumstances are considered by the Board to be sufficiently exceptional to justify the grant thereof; and

 

  (b)

within the period of 10 years beginning with the date on which the Plan is approved by shareholders on 26 September 2005.

 

3.3

The price at which Shares may be acquired by the exercise of an Option shall be determined by the Board before the grant thereof, but shall not be less than:

 

  (a)

in the case of a Share Option, if Shares of the same class as those Shares are listed in the London Stock Exchange Daily Official List, the lower of the two prices shown for the shares on that day plus one quarter of the difference between them (as derived from that List or other reputable market source that is able to provide the relevant information at a more appropriate time, even though that source may not be able to guarantee that the information provided will be identical to that subsequently published in that List) on the Grant Date;

 

  (b)

in the case of a Share Option, if paragraph (a) above does not apply, the market value (within the meaning of Part VIII of the Taxation of Chargeable Gains Act 1992) of Shares of that class at the relevant Grant Date, as reasonably determined by the Board;

 

  (c)

in the case of an ADR Option, the fair market value of a WPP ADR as quoted on NASDAQ National Market System over a number of consecutive dealing days (being not more than five) immediately preceding or ending on the Grant Date; or

 

  (d)

except in the case of an Option to acquire Shares otherwise than by subscription, the nominal value of those Shares.

 

3.4

An Option granted under the Plan to any person:

 

  (a)

shall not, except as provided in Rule 6.3 below, be capable of being transferred by him; and

 

10  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 14 December 2006

11  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 21 February 2006

 

3


  (b)

shall lapse immediately if he is adjudged bankrupt.

 

3.5

An Option granted under the Plan to a person shall lapse if that person ceases to be a director or employee of a Group Member, other than by reason of his death, injury or disability, within six months of the Grant Date unless the Board shall determine otherwise.

 

3.6

Except as provided in Rule 7 and paragraph 17 of Appendix 1, no new Option may be granted after 18 November 2008. 12

 

4

LIMITS

 

4.1

The number of Shares in respect of which Options may be granted under the Plan on any day which are to be satisfied by the issue of Shares when added to the aggregate of:

 

  (a)

the number of Shares which immediately prior to that day have been or are to be issued to satisfy outstanding Options under the Plan; and

 

  (b)

the number of Shares which immediately prior to that day have been or are to be issued to satisfy options or awards granted or made under any other employees’ share scheme of any Group Member in the ten years immediately before that day

shall not exceed 10% of the issued ordinary share capital of the Company for the time being.

 

4.2

The aggregate market value of the Shares subject to an Option granted under the Plan on any day to a Participant may not, when added to the aggregate market value of the Shares (valued at the date or dates of grant of the relevant Option or Options) which are or have been subject to options granted to him within the preceding twelve months under the Plan or any Relevant Scheme, exceed four times his Annual Remuneration. For the purposes of this Rule 4.2 the following terms will have the following meanings:

 

“Annual Remuneration”

  

in relation to a Participant, the gross rate of basic annual salary (excluding any bonuses, company pension contributions and any other benefits in kind) payable to the relevant Eligible Employee by any Group Company as at the relevant Grant Date;

“Relevant Scheme”

  

any employees’ share scheme (within the meaning given to that term in section 743 of the Act or, as the context may require, Article 58A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991 13 ) established by any Group Member (other than savings-related schemes or profit sharing schemes approved by the Inland Revenue under Schedule 9 to the Taxes Act 1988 or Schedule 3 to ITEPA or any other schemes linked to contractual savings schemes or any share incentive plans approved by HM Revenue & Customs under Schedule 8 to the Finance Act 2000 or Schedule 2 to ITEPA);

and for the purposes of this Rule:

 

  (a)

any Option which shall have been released to any extent shall be treated to that extent as if it were still exercisable;

 

  (b)

shares in a Participating Company shall not be regarded as benefits in kind;

 

12  

Inserted by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008 and amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012

13  

Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

 

4


  (c)

where a payment of remuneration is made otherwise than in sterling, the payment shall be treated as being of the amount of sterling ascertained by applying such rate of exchange for that day published in a national newspaper as the Board shall reasonably determine; and

 

  (d)

a person’s remuneration shall be deemed to include fees paid to a company whose principal purpose is to provide his services being services of a nature which he would be expected to perform as an employee of a Participating Company, and being fees referable to those services and exclusive of VAT.

 

4.3

For the purposes of this Rule, the market value of the Shares in relation to which an Option was granted shall be calculated:

 

  (a)

in the case of an Option granted under the Plan, as of the day by reference to which the price at which Shares may be acquired by the exercise thereof was determined in accordance with Rule 3.3 above;

 

  (b)

in the case of an option granted under any option scheme (other than a savings related scheme) approved by HM Revenue & Customs, as at the time when it was granted or, in a case where an agreement relating to the Shares has been made under paragraph 29 of Schedule 9 or paragraph 22 of Schedule 4, such earlier time or times as may be provided in the agreement; and

 

  (c)

in the case of any other option, as on the day or days by reference to which the price at which Shares may be acquired by the exercise thereof was determined

and the Board may adopt such exchange rate as it thinks fit for the conversion of one currency to another currency.

 

4.4

For the purpose of this Rule 4, any Treasury Shares which are or are to be transferred for the purpose of satisfying options or other awards shall be taken as being Shares that are issued or to be issued for that purpose.

 

4.5

All Options granted under the Plan shall be regarded for the purposes of this Rule 4 as Options that will involve the issue of new Shares unless and until the Board determines that the Option will be satisfied by the transfer of Shares (or WPP ADRs which have not been created using new Shares issued for the purpose of satisfying options or awards under employee share schemes). The Board may only make such a determination in respect of an Option that has already been issued if it has made arrangements under which the relevant Shares or WPP ADRs will be available when required.

 

4.6

Any Option granted under the Plan shall be limited and take effect so that the above limits are complied with (with all Options being granted on the same day being scaled back on a pro-rata basis and rounded down to the nearest whole Share or WPP ADR).

 

5

PERFORMANCE CONDITIONS

 

5.1

An Option granted under the Plan to a director of the Company may not be exercised if the relevant condition is not satisfied; and in this Rule the relevant condition is the condition in Appendix 7 14 or such other objective condition relating to performance as may be specified by the Board at the time of the grant of that Option.

 

5.2

In determining whether the relevant condition has been met where an Option is to be exercised in accordance with any of Rules 6.3, 6.4(a), 6.4(b), 6.4(c), 7.1 and 7.3, the Board may determine that the relevant condition should be adjusted on a pro-rated basis to allow for any

 

14  

Numbering amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 3 March 2009

 

5


 

reduction in time between the Grant Date and the date of cessation, compared to the time between Grant Date and the end of the performance period. Where such a determination is made, the Board shall be entitled to take into account such information relating to the performance of the Company as it considers to be appropriate and may adjust the method of assessment of the performance condition as it considers to be appropriate to the circumstances (so that, for example, if the cessation occurs one month after the end of the accounting period in which the Option was granted, the Board may assess the satisfaction of the relevant condition from the earnings of the Company for the accounting period in which the Option was granted without reference to the performance in the following month).

 

5.3

The Board may at the time of grant of any Option, impose conditions on that grant relating to performance and specify terms relating to how those conditions interact with the other provisions of this Plan.

 

5.4

15

 

6

EXERCISE OF OPTIONS

 

6.1

The exercise of any Option granted under the Plan shall be effected in such form and manner as the Board may from time to time prescribe.

 

6.2

Subject to Rules 6.3 and 6.4 below and to Rules 7.1 and 7.3 below, an Option granted under the Plan may not be exercised before the third anniversary of the Grant Date.

 

6.3

Subject to Rule 5 above, if any Participant dies before exercising an Option granted to him under the Plan and at a time when either he is a director or employee of a Group Member or he is entitled to exercise the Option by virtue of Rule 6.4 below, the Option may (and must, if at all) be exercised by his personal representatives within 12 months after the date of his death.

 

6.4

If any Participant ceases to be a director or employee of a Group Member (otherwise than by reason of his death), the following provisions apply in relation to any Option granted to him under the Plan:

 

  (a)

if he so ceases by reason of injury or disability, or by reason only that his office or employment is in a company which ceases to be a Group Member, or relates to a business or part of a business which is transferred to a person who is not a Group Member, subject to Rule 5 above, the Option may (and subject to Rule 6.3 above must, if at all) be exercised within the exercise period;

 

  (b)

if he so ceases by reason of retirement on or after reaching the retirement age (if any) as specified in his contract of employment (or, if there is no such age, if he retires at all) 16 in each case more than six months after the Grant Date subject to Rule 5 above, the Option may (and subject to Rule 6.3 above must, if at all) be exercised within the exercise period; and

 

  (c)

if he so ceases for any other reason, the Option may not be exercised at all unless the Board shall so permit, in which event, subject to Rule 5 above, it may (and subject to Rule 6.3 above must, if at all) be exercised to the extent permitted by the Board within the exercise period;

 

15  

Clause 5.4 deleted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012

16  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 14 December 2006

 

6


and in this Rule the “exercise period” is the period which commences on the date of cessation of employment and expires 6 months after such date. 17

 

6.5

Subject to Rule 6.6 below, a Participant shall not be treated for the purposes of Rule 6.4 above as ceasing to be a director or employee of a Group Member until such time as he is no longer a director or employee of any Group Member and a female Participant who ceases to be such a director or employee by reason of pregnancy or confinement and who exercises her right to return to work under the Employment Rights Act 1996 (or any equivalent legislation in any jurisdiction) 18 before exercising an Option under the Plan shall be treated for those purposes as not having ceased to be such a director or employee.

 

6.6

Other than in respect of Options granted under the Approved Part, a Participant who gives or is given notice to leave employment as a director or employee of a Group Member in any circumstances other than death or in those circumstances referred to in Rule 6.4(a) or 6.4(b) shall, if he subsequently ceases to be in such employment, be treated for the purposes of Rule 6.4 above as ceasing to be a director or employee of a Group Member on the date on which that notice is given (and for the avoidance of doubt any purported exercise by him of an Option during the period of notice shall be of no effect). If a Participant gives or is given notice to leave employment as a director or employee of a Group Member and the Board subsequently uses its discretion under Rule 6.4(c) to allow his Option to be exercisable, nothing in this Rule 6.6 will make his Option lapse or cease to be exercisable.

 

6.7

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan, an Option granted under the Plan may not be exercised after the expiration of the period of 10 years (or such shorter period as the Board may have determined before the grant thereof) beginning with the Grant Date.

 

6.8

Within 30 days after an Option under the Plan has been exercised by any person, the grantor of the Option shall, in the case of a Share Option, procure the allotment or transfer to him (or a nominee for him) of the number of Shares in respect of which the Option has been exercised and, in the case of an ADR Option, procure the issue or transfer to him of WPP ADRs in respect of which the Option has been exercised (including, if appropriate, by procuring the allotment or transfer of Shares to a Depository) unless:

 

  (a)

the Board considers that the issue or transfer thereof would not be lawful in all relevant jurisdictions; or

 

  (b)

in a case where a Group Member is obliged to account for any tax (in any jurisdiction) for which the person in question is liable by virtue of the exercise of the Option, that or another Group Member is unable to withhold the tax from his remuneration nor has received payment from him of a corresponding amount.

 

6.9

All Shares allotted under the Plan shall rank pari passu in all respects with the Shares of the same class for the time being in issue save as regards any rights attaching to such Shares by reference to a record date prior to the date of the allotment.

 

6.10

If Shares of the same class as those allotted under the Plan are listed in the London Stock Exchange Official List, the Company shall apply to the London Stock Exchange for any Shares so allotted to be admitted to that list.

 

6.11

Where any Option becomes exercisable by reason of the provisions of Rules 6.3 or 6.4, the number of Shares or WPP ADRs in respect of which the Option may be exercised shall be

 

17  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 27 April 2007

18  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

 

7


 

reduced on a pro-rated basis to take account of the fact that the Participant ceased to be a director or employee of a Group Member before the date on which the Option would have become exercisable had the Participant not ceased to be a director or employee of a Group Member (calculated on the basis of the number of days until the date of such cessation compared to the number of days in the whole period between the Grant Date and the date on which the Option becomes exercisable) unless the Board determines to the contrary. 19

 

7

TAKEOVER, RECONSTRUCTION AND WINDING-UP

 

7.1

If any person obtains control of the Company (within the meaning of section 840 of the Taxes Act 1988) as a result of making a general offer to acquire Shares in the Company, or having obtained such control makes such an offer, the Board shall within 7 days of becoming aware thereof notify every Participant thereof and, subject to Rule 5 above and Rules 6.3, 6.4, 6.6 and 6.7 above, an Option granted under the Plan may be exercised within one month (or such longer period as the Board may permit) of such notification.

 

7.2

For the purposes of Rule 7.1 above, a person shall be deemed to have obtained control of the Company if he and others acting in concert with him have together obtained control of it.

 

7.3

If any person becomes bound or entitled to acquire Shares in the Company under Part 18 of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991, or if under Part 18A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991 the Court sanctions a compromise or arrangement proposed for the purposes of or in connection with a scheme for the reconstruction of the Company or its amalgamation with any other company or companies, or if the Company passes a resolution for the winding up of the Company or the assets of the Company are declared en désastre, the Board shall forthwith notify every Participant thereof and any Option granted under the Plan may, subject to Rule 5 above and Rules 6.3, 6.4 and 6.6 above, be exercised within one month of such notification, but to the extent that it is not exercised within that period shall (notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan) lapse on the expiration thereof. 20

 

7.4

The Board may determine (the determination to apply equally to all Options outstanding at the time) that the provisions of Rules 7.1 and 7.3 above will neither cause Options to become exercisable nor to lapse at different times than would otherwise be the case, if the Board considers that the Options will continue to be an appropriate incentive notwithstanding the changed circumstances, or that the position of Participants can be adequately preserved by the grant to them of some other right or rights in substitution for or addition to the existing rights.

 

7.5

Where any Option becomes exercisable before the end of the period referred to in Rule 6.2 by reason of the provisions of Rules 7.1 or 7.3, the number of Shares or WPP ADRs in respect of which the Option may be exercised shall be reduced on a pro-rated basis to take account of the early date on which the Option may be exercised (calculated on the basis of the number of days until the end of the period compared to the number of days in the whole period).

 

8

VARIATION OF CAPITAL

 

8.1

In the event of any increase or variation of the share capital of the Company (whenever effected), the Board may make such adjustments as it considers appropriate under Rule 8.2 below provided that the auditors or other financial advisers appointed by the Board acting as experts and not as arbitrators confirm that in their opinion the variation is fair and reasonable and such confirmation shall be final and binding.

 

19  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 27 April 2007

20  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

 

8


8.2

An adjustment made under this Rule shall be to one or more of the following:

 

  (a)

the number and description of Shares in respect of which any Option granted under the Plan may be exercised;

 

  (b)

the price at which Shares may be acquired by the exercise of any such Option; and/or

 

  (c)

where any such Option has been exercised, but no Shares have been allotted or transferred pursuant to such exercise, the number and description of Shares which may be so allotted or transferred and the price at which they may be acquired.

 

8.3

An adjustment under Rule 8.2 above may have the effect of reducing the price at which Shares may be acquired by the exercise of an Option to less than their nominal value, but only if and to the extent that the Board shall be authorised to capitalise from the reserves of the Company a sum equal to the amount by which the nominal value of the Shares in respect of which the Option is exercised and which are to be allotted pursuant to such exercise exceeds the price at which the same may be subscribed for and to apply such sum in paying up such amount on such Shares; and so that on exercise of any Option in respect of which such a reduction shall have been made the Board shall capitalise such sum (if any) and apply the same in paying up such amount as aforesaid.

 

8.4

As soon as reasonably practicable after making any adjustment under Rule 8.2 above, the Board shall give notice in writing thereof to any Participant affected thereby.

 

9

ALTERATIONS

 

9.1

Subject to Rule 9.2 below, the Board may at any time alter or add to all or any of the provisions of the Plan, or the terms of any Option granted under it, in any respect.

 

9.2

No alteration or addition to the advantage of Participants or potential Participants shall be made under Rule 9.1 above to any Rule of the Plan without the prior approval by ordinary resolution of the members of the Company in general meeting other than a minor amendment to benefit the administration of the Plan, to take account of a change in legislation, or to obtain or maintain favourable tax, exchange control or regulatory treatment for any Participant or any Group Member.

 

9.3

As soon as reasonably practicable after making any alteration or addition under Rule 9.1 above, the Board shall give notice in writing thereof to any Participant affected thereby.

 

10

MISCELLANEOUS

 

10.1

The rights and obligations of any individual under the terms of his office or employment with any Group Member shall not be affected by his participation in the Plan or any right which he may have to participate therein, and an individual who participates therein shall by participating be deemed to waive any and all rights to compensation or damages in consequence of the termination of his office or employment for any reason whatsoever insofar as those rights arise or may arise from his ceasing to have rights under or be entitled to exercise any Option under the Plan as a result of such termination. Any benefit under the Plan shall not be regarded as salary or counted for pension or any other purpose. Participation in the Plan by any individual is entirely at the discretion of the Board and in no circumstances shall the fact that an individual has received an Option or Options in the past give that individual any right to receive a further Option or Options. 21

 

10.2

In the event of any dispute or disagreement as to the interpretation of the Plan, or as to any question or right arising from or related to the Plan, the decision of the Board shall be final and binding upon all persons.

 

21  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 21 February 2006

 

9


10.3

The Company and any Subsidiary may provide money to the trustees of any trust or any other person to enable them or him to acquire Shares to be held for the purposes of the Plan (which Shares may be held by a Depository on behalf of any such trustees or other person) or enter into any guarantee or indemnity for these purposes, to the extent permitted by section 153 of the Act or the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991. 22

 

10.4

Any notice or other communication under or in connection with the Plan may be given by personal delivery, delivery by email or by sending the same by post, in the case of a company to its registered office (or to such other address and person as may be specified by that company from time to time), and in the case of an individual to his last known address, or, where he is a director or employee of a Group Member, either to his last known address or to the address of the place of business at which he performs the whole or substantially the whole of the duties of his office or employment.

 

10.5

The Board may establish further plans based on the Plan but modified to take account of local tax, exchange control or securities laws in overseas territories, provided that any Shares made available under such further plans are treated as counting against the limits expressed in Rules 4.1 to 4.6.

 

10.6

The Plan and any Option shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of England and Wales and the Company and the Participants (together with any eligible persons who do not become Participants) shall submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the Courts of England and Wales. 23

 

11

WITHHOLDING

 

11.1

The grant or exercise of any Option under this Plan is subject to the condition that the grant or an exercise of the Option shall not be valid unless the Participant has, in addition to complying with the other requirements of this Plan, paid or procured the payment to the Group Member which is his employer, or otherwise provided for (in a manner satisfactory to that Group Member or, if appropriate, the trustees of any employee benefit trust) an amount equal to the Taxation for which any Group Member may be liable by reason of that grant or exercise.

 

11.2

Without limitation to 11.1 above, the Company or any other Group Member which is a Participant’s employer or the trustees of any employee benefit trust may withhold any amount and make such arrangements as it considers necessary which comply with applicable law to meet any liability to Taxation in respect of the grant, exercise or cancellation of Options or other event relating to Options or in respect of any benefit under this Plan. These arrangements may include the sale of any Shares on behalf of a Participant, which the Participant is deemed to have authorised, to produce a cash sum sufficient to meet the Taxation liabilities referred to in this Rule 11.

 

11.3

The Company may in its sole discretion waive the requirements set out in this Rule 11 in respect of any part of the Participant’s employer’s liability to Taxation, including in particular, any employer’s liability to National Insurance Contributions.

 

11.4

In this Rule, “Taxation” means all forms of taxation or levy by any state or any political subdivision of a state and includes income tax, Pay as You Earn, National Insurance or other social security contributions, whether being the primary liability of the employer or the employee, or any other person.

 

22  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

23  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 21 February 2006

 

10


APPENDIX 1

This Appendix constitutes the HM Revenue & Customs approved part of the WPP 2005 Executive Stock Option Plan (the “ Approved Part ”). In the event of any conflict between the Plan and Appendix 1, the latter shall prevail. The terms of the Approved Part are identical to those of the other part of the said Plan, to which this Approved Part is appended except as follows:

 

1

In the definition of “ Subsidiary ” in Rule 1.1, add to the end words “and is under the control of the Company within the meaning of Section 840 of the Taxes Act 1988”.

 

2

In Rule 2.1, delete the words “an executive director or employee of a Participating Company.” and substitute the words:

“a full-time director or qualifying employee of a Participating Company. For the purposes of this Rule 2.1:

a person shall be treated as a full-time director of a Participating Company if he is obliged to devote to the performance of the duties of his office or employment with that and any other Participating Company not less than 25 hours a week (excluding meal breaks);

a qualifying employee , in relation to a Participating Company, is an employee of the Participating Company (other than one who is a director of a Participating Company).”

 

3

In Rule 2.2, substitute the words “A person is not eligible to be granted an Option under the Plan at any time when he is not eligible to participate in the Plan by virtue of paragraph 9 of Schedule 4 (material interest).” 24

 

4

Only Share Options, and not ADR Options, shall be granted under the Approved Part and therefore no references to WPP ADRs or ADR Options shall apply in respect of an Option granted under this Appendix 1.

 

5

In Rule 3.1, after the words “procure the grant” add the words “by deed, seal or for consideration” and after the word “Company” in the definition of “Share”, add the words “which satisfy the requirements of paragraphs 16 – 20 of Schedule 4”.

 

6

In Rule 3.2, after the first mention of the word “Board” add the words “the date on which the Approved Part is approved by HM Revenue & Customs under Schedule 4”. 25

 

7

In Rule 3.3(a), delete the words “or other reputable market source that is able to provide the relevant information at a more appropriate time, even though that source may not be able to guarantee that the information provided will be identical to that subsequently published in that list”.

 

8

In Rule 3.3(b), delete the words “reasonably determined by the Board” and substitute the words “agreed in advance for the purposes of the Plan with Shares Valuation of HM Revenue & Customs, on the Grant Date (or such other day as may be agreed with HM Revenue & Customs)”. 26

 

24  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 14 December 2006

25  

Amended by Written Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 16 February 2006

26  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 16 February 2006

 

11


9

At the end of Rule 3.5 add the words “(provided that in the case of a cessation due to redundancy or retirement within six months of the Grant Date there shall be no such discretion and the Option shall lapse immediately on such cessation)”, and add the words “acting fairly and reasonably” after the word “Board” where it appears in that Rule.

 

10

Add the following as Rule 4.3A:

“No person shall be granted Options under the Approved Part which would, at the time they are granted cause the aggregate market value (determined as at the date of each relevant grant) of the Shares which he may acquire in pursuance of Options granted to him under the Approved Part or under any other share option scheme, not being a savings related share option scheme, approved under Schedule 9 or any option scheme approved under Schedule 4 and established by the Company or by any associated company of the Company (and not exercised) to exceed or further exceed £30,000 or such other limit as may be prescribed in paragraph 6 of Schedule 4”. 27

 

11

In Rule 5.2, add the words “acting fairly and reasonably” after the word “Board” in the 3rd line. 28

 

12A

In Rule 6.4(b), add the words “or on or after the Specified Age,” after the words “retires at all),”. 29

 

12

In Rule 6(4)(c), after the words “the Board” (on both occasions where those words appear) add the words “(acting fairly and reasonably) and, at the end of the Rule, add the words “provided that the discretions of the Board contained in this Rule 6.4(c) shall not apply in the case of a cessation by reason of redundancy (in which case the Option shall lapse immediately)”.

 

13

Add the following as Rule 6.7A:

“A Participant shall not be eligible to exercise an Option under the Plan at any time when he is not eligible to participate in the Plan by virtue of paragraph 9 of Schedule 4”. 30

 

14

Delete Rule 6.8 (b) and insert the following as Rule 6.8A:

“In a case where a Group Member is obliged to account for any tax (in any jurisdiction) for which the person in question is liable by virtue of the exercise of the Option, the Board may require the Participant to make a payment to the Company of an amount equal to the reasonable estimate of the Company of that tax as a condition precedent to the exercise of the Option provided that if that estimate proves to be in excess of the actual liability then the excess will be refunded to the Participant.”

 

15

At the end of Rule 6.11, add the words “acting fairly and reasonably”. 31

 

16

In Rule 7.1, insert the words “not exceeding four months” after the word “period” in the penultimate line.

 

27  

Amended by Written Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 16 February 2006

28  

Amended by Written Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 16 February 2006

29  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 14 December 2006

30  

Amended by Written Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 16 February 2006

31  

Amended by Written Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 16 February 2006

 

12


17

Add the following as Rules 7.6 and 7.7:

 

  “7.6

(a)       If any company (the “acquiring company”):

 

      

           obtains control of the Company as a result of making –

 

  (i)

a general offer to acquire the whole of the issued ordinary share capital of the Company which is made on a condition such that if it is met the person making the offer will have control of the Company, or

 

  (ii)

a general offer to acquire all the Shares in the Company which are of the same class as the Shares which may be acquired by the exercise of Options granted under the Plan, or

 

  (b)

obtains control of the Company in pursuance of a compromise or arrangement sanctioned by the court under Part 18A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991, or 32

 

  (c)

becomes bound or entitled to acquire Shares in the Company under Part 18 of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991, 33

any Participant may at any time within the appropriate period (which expression shall be construed in accordance with paragraph 26 of Schedule 4), by agreement with the acquiring company, release any Option granted under the Plan which has not lapsed (the “old option”) in consideration of the grant to him of an option (the “new option”) which (for the purposes of that paragraph) is equivalent to the old option but relates to shares in a different company (whether the acquiring company itself or some other company falling within paragraph 16(b) or (c) of Schedule 4).

 

  7.7

The new option shall not be regarded for the purposes of Rule 7.6 above as equivalent to the old option unless the conditions set out in paragraph 27 of Schedule 4 are satisfied, but so that the provisions of the Plan shall for this purpose be construed as if:

 

  (i)

the new option were an option granted under the Plan at the same time as the old option;

 

  (ii)

except for the purposes of the definitions of “Group Member”, “Participating Company” and “Subsidiary” in Rule 1.1 above and the reference to “the Board” in Rule 6.7 above, the expression the “Company” were defined as “a company whose shares may be acquired by the exercise of options granted under the Plan”;

 

  (iii)

the relevant condition referred to in Rule 6.3 above had been satisfied; and

 

  (iv)

Rule 9.2 below were omitted.”

 

18

At the start of Rule 8.1, add the words “Subject to Rule 8.2A below”.

 

19

In Rule 8.1, delete the words “increase or.” 34

 

32  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

33  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

34  

Amended by Written Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 16 February 2006

 

13


20

In Rules 8.2(a) and (c), insert the words “(but not the class)” after the word “description”.

 

21

Add the following as Rule 8.2A:

“At a time when the Plan is approved by HM Revenue & Customs under Schedule 4, no adjustment under Rule 8.2 above shall be made without the prior approval of HM Revenue & Customs.”

 

22

In Rule 9.1 delete the words “Rule 9.2” and substitute the words “Rules 9.2, 9.2A and 9.2B”.

 

23

At the end of Rule 9.1, add the words “(having regard to the fact that, if an alteration or addition which does not solely relate to a special term is made at a time when the Plan is approved by HM Revenue & Customs under Schedule 4, the alteration or addition to any Key Feature will not thereafter have effect unless and until HM Revenue & Customs have approved the alteration or addition)”.

 

24

Add the following as Rule 9.2A and 9.2B:

 

  “9.2A

No alteration or addition to the disadvantage of any Participant, other than to a special term, shall be made under Rule 9.1 above unless:

 

  (a)

the Board shall have invited every relevant Participant to give an indication as to whether or not he approves the alteration or addition, and

 

  (b)

the alteration or addition is approved by a majority of those Participants who have given such an indication.

 

  9.2B

No alteration or addition which solely relates to a special term subject to which an Option has been granted shall be made under Rule 9.1 above unless:

 

  (a)

there shall have occurred an event which shall have caused the Board reasonably to consider that the special term would not, without the alteration or addition, achieve its original purpose, and

 

  (b)

the Board shall act fairly and reasonably in making the alteration or addition which must be no more difficult to satisfy than the original.”

 

25

At the end of Rule 9.3, add the words “and if the Plan is then approved by HM Revenue & Customs under Schedule 4, to HM Revenue & Customs.”

 

26

Add as Rule 9.4:

“Any reference in this Rule to a special term is a reference to a term specified by the Board as mentioned in Rule 3.1 above or a term of the Schedule hereto”. 35

 

27

Delete Rule 11 and substitute the following Rule 11:

 

  “11.

Withholding

 

 

35  

Amended by Written Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 16 February 2006

 

14


  11.1

The exercise of any Option under this Plan is subject to the condition that the exercise of the Option shall not be valid unless the Participant has, in addition to complying with the other requirements of this Plan, paid or procured the payment to the Group Member which is his employer, or otherwise provided for (in a manner satisfactory to that Group Member or, if appropriate, the trustees of any employee benefit trust) an amount equal to the Taxation for which any Group Member may be liable by reason of that exercise.

 

  11.2

Without limitation to 11.1 above, the Company or any other Group Member which is a Participant’s employer or the trustees of any employee benefit trust may withhold any amount and make such arrangements as it considers necessary which comply with applicable law to meet any liability to Taxation in respect of the exercise of Options under this Plan. These arrangements may include the sale of any Shares on behalf of a Participant, which the Participant is deemed to have authorised, to produce a cash sum sufficient to meet the Taxation liabilities referred to in this Rule 11.

 

  11.3

The Company may, acting fairly and reasonably, waive the requirements set out in this Rule 11 in respect of any part of the Participant’s employer’s liability to Taxation, including in particular, any employer’s liability to National Insurance Contributions.

 

  11.4

In this Rule, “Taxation” means taxation by any state or any political subdivision of a state and includes income tax, Pay as You Earn and primary National Insurance and their equivalents in jurisdictions outside of the united Kingdom.”

 

15


APPENDIX 2

Special Rules Applicable to Grants of Incentive Stock Options

 

1

Options granted in accordance with the Plan (either including or excluding Appendix 1 thereto) may be designated as “Incentive Stock Options” (“ISOs”) within the meaning of section 422 of the United States Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “U.S. Tax Code”).

 

2

The aggregate number of Shares (including Shares comprised in any WPP ADR) for which ISOs may be granted under Appendix 2 shall not exceed 125,665,004.

 

3

The class of persons who may receive ISOs shall, in addition to the limitations imposed by Rule 2 of the Plan, be limited to those persons who are employees of the Company or its “parent” or “subsidiary” corporations within the meaning of sections 424(f) and (g), respectively, of the U.S. Tax Code.

 

4

In addition to any other restrictions contained in the Plan, ISOs shall not be transferable otherwise than by will or the laws of descent and distribution. During the lifetime of the person to whom an ISO is granted, the ISO shall be exercisable only by such person.

 

5

To the extent that the aggregate market value of Shares (including Shares comprised in any WPP ADR) with respect to which ISOs are exercisable (determined without regard to this sentence) for the first time by a Participant during any calendar year (under all plans or schemes of the Company or its “parent” and “subsidiary” corporations within the meaning of sections 424(f) and (g), respectively, of the U.S. Tax Code) exceeds US $100,000, such Options shall to the extent of such excess be treated as Options which are not ISOs. For the purposes of the preceding sentence, the market value of any Shares (including Shares comprised in any WPP ADR) subject to an ISO shall be determined at the time such ISO is granted.

 

6

This schedule shall be deemed to be included within the Plan as adopted by shareholders for the purpose of any ISO grants.

 

16


APPENDIX 3

India

The plan will apply to Options granted to residents in India (which shall include for the purposes of paragraph 4 below Participants in respect of whose Option a liability to Indian Fringe Benefit Tax arises) with the following modifications:

 

1

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan, a person is eligible to be granted an option under this Appendix if (and only if) he is a full-time director or qualifying employee (as defined in Paragraph 2 of Appendix 1) of a Participating Company (whether or not the Company itself) resident in India.

 

2

All or any of the terms of the Option may be altered to comply with requirements imposed under applicable exchange control regulations and other laws of India in relation to that Option and an Option may only be exercised if and to the extent permitted by those regulations. 36

 

3

Applicable regulations of the Reserve Bank of India (“RBI”) do not currently limit the amount of funds that may be transferred for the purchase of stock pursuant to the exercise of a stock option under the Plan, but such regulations are subject to change. Any cash balances received in respect of, (i) dividends must be repatriated to India within seven days of receipt, and (ii) proceeds from sale of shares acquired pursuant to the Plan must be repatriated to India within ninety days of receipt. 37

 

4

For the avoidance of doubt any Fringe Benefit Tax which is payable in respect of any Options will be recoverable from the relevant Participants in the same way as if it were a tax liability of those Participants unless the Compensation Committee determines otherwise at the time of grant of such Options. 38

 

36  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 21 February 2006

37  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 21 February 2006

38  

Paragraph 4 inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 3 March 2009

 

17


APPENDIX 4

Belgium

The Plan will apply to Options granted to residents of Belgium with the following modifications.

 

1

In Rule 3(4), a further Rule (c) shall be added as follows:

 

  “(c)

shall be cancelled if he notifies the Company that he refuses to accept the Option or if he fails to accept the Option within 60 days of the date of the Company’s communication to him in respect of the Option.”

 

2

In Rule 6(2), delete the words:

 

      

“the third anniversary of the Grant Date”

 

    

and substitute the words

“the 1 January following the third anniversary of the Grant Date.”

 

3

In Rule 6(3), delete the words:

“within 12 months after the date of his death.”

 

    

and substitute the words

“in the later of the period of 12 months commencing with the date of his death or the period of 6 months commencing on 1 January following the third anniversary of the Grant Date.”

 

4

In Rule 6(4), delete the words:

“and in this Rule the exercise period is the period which shall expire 6 months after his so ceasing”

and substitute the words

“and in this Rule the exercise period is the period which shall commence on the 1 January following the third anniversary of the Grant Date (the “Third Anniversary”) and expire 12 months after his so ceasing or 6 months after the Third Anniversary, whichever shall be the latest.”

APPENDIX 5 39

Switzerland

The Plan will apply to Options granted to the residents of Switzerland with the modification that in Rule 6.7 the words “and six months” be inserted after the words “10 years”.

 

39  

The Appendix which previously followed Appendix 4 (the Netherlands) has been deleted; the amendment was made by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 3 March 2009

 

18


APPENDIX 6 40

Italy

The Plan will apply to Options granted to the residents of Italy with the following modifications:

 

1

In Rule 3.3, delete subsections (a) and (c) and replace them with the following provisions:

 

  (a)

in the case of a Share Option, if Shares of the same class as those Shares are listed in the London Stock Exchange Daily Official List, the arithmetical average quotation of Shares of that class (as derived from that List) over a period from (and including) the Grant Date to the same day of the previous month;

 

  (c)

in the case of an ADR Option, the arithmetical average of the fair market value of a WPP ADR as quoted on NASDAQ over a period from (and including) the Grant Date to the same day of the previous month;

APPENDIX 7 41

Executive directors

 

1

Pursuant and subject to Rule 5, any Option granted to a director of the Company will be subject to the relevant condition given in this Appendix 7.

 

2

42

 

3

The relevant condition shall be:

 

3.1

the performance period shall be the period of three calendar years commencing with the start of the accounting period including the Grant Date (or with such later period as may be specified by the Board at the time of the grant of the Option) (the “ Performance Period ”).

 

3.2

that the percentage increase in earnings per share of the Company over the Performance Period shall have exceeded the growth in the RPI by 5% per annum (compounded annually); and

 

3.3

in the event that, at the end of the Performance Period, it is determined that the percentage increase in earnings per share of the Company over the Performance Period has not exceeded the growth in the RPI by 5% per annum (compounded annually), the Option shall immediately lapse; and

 

4

For the purposes of the relevant condition:

 

4.1

Growth in Earnings Per Share shall be calculated by dividing the Earnings Per Share in respect of the third of the three consecutive financial years by the Earnings Per Share achieved in the financial year ending immediately prior to the first day of the first of those three consecutive financial years (commencing no earlier than the financial year in which the Grant Date occurs).

 

40  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 20 February 2007

41  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 20 February 2006

42  

Paragraph 2 deleted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012

 

19


4.2

Growth in the Retail Prices Index shall be calculated by dividing such Retail Prices Index as is published in respect of the month containing the last day of the third of the three consecutive financial years referred to in 4.1 above by such Retail Prices Index as was published in respect of the month containing the last day of the financial year of the Company ending immediately prior to the first day of the first of those three consecutive financial years.

 

5

The Board may make such fair and reasonable adjustments to the terms of the relevant condition as in its opinion it considers appropriate to take account of any Issue or Reorganisation.

 

6

If SSAP 3 and/or FRS 3 are modified, replaced or substituted or if the composition of the Retail Prices Index changes and/or the Retail Prices Index is replaced by another similar index, the Board may make such adjustments to the terms of the relevant condition as it in its opinion considers to be fair and reasonable.

 

7

Any adjustments made to the Performance Target pursuant to paragraphs 5 and 6 above shall be in accordance with and subject to Rule 9 of the Scheme and that any adjusted Performance Target will in the reasonable opinion of the Board be materially no more difficult and no less difficult to satisfy than the Performance Target to which the exercise of the Option was originally subject; 43

 

8

As soon as is reasonably practical following the end of any relevant financial year of the Company the Board shall determine whether the Performance Target has been satisfied and shall notify the Participant in writing if it has been satisfied and once satisfied the Option may, subject as otherwise provided in the Rules, be exercised at any time during the Option Period notwithstanding that for subsequent financial years the Growth in Earnings Per Share may not exceed the Growth in the Retail Prices Index.

 

9

Any calculations or determinations by the Board in accordance with the Performance Target shall not be open to question and shall be final and binding on all persons concerned. The Board may request the Auditors to carry out any or all of the calculations and determinations of it in connection with the Performance Target. If so, the Auditors shall act as experts and not as arbitrators and their calculations and determinations shall not be open to question and shall be final and binding on all persons concerned.

 

10

For the purposes of the relevant condition the following terms shall have the following meanings:

Earnings Per Share ” means the earnings per share (as defined in SSAP 3 paragraph 10 as amended by FRS 3) of the Company determined in accordance with such standards and as shown in the audited financial statements of the Company after making such adjustments to the earnings per share as the Board in its opinion considers appropriate in order to ensure that the measure of earnings per share for the relevant financial years is on a fair and consistent basis including, without limitation, the following adjustments to earnings per share for the relevant financial years:

 

10.1

a proportionate upwards or downwards amendment in a case where the relevant financial year is more than or less than a calendar year; and/or

 

10.2

ignoring all exceptional and extraordinary items as defined in paragraphs 5 and 6 of FRS 3; and/or

 

10.3

ignoring the results of discontinued operations as defined in paragraph 4 of FRS 3.

 

43  

Amended by Written Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 16 February 2006

 

20


FRS ” means Financial Reporting Standard of the Accounting Standards Board Limited.

Issue or Reorganisation ” means any capitalisation issue (other than the issue of shares pursuant to the exercise of an option given to the shareholders of the Company to receive shares in lieu of dividend) or rights offer or any other variation in the share capital of the Company including (without limitation) any consolidation, sub-division or reduction of capital of the Company.

Retail Prices Index ” means the Retail Prices All Items Index Table: Indices back to 1947 (Table RP02) as published by the Office for National Statistics or any table which replaces it.

SSAP ” means Statement of Standard Accounting Practice of the Accounting Standards Board Limited.

APPENDIX 8 44

Taxpayers Subject to Section 409A of the United States Internal Revenue Code

The plan will apply to participants who are taxpayers subject to Section 409A of the United States Internal Revenue Code (“Section 409A”), with the following modifications:

 

1

The options granted under the plan are intended to be exempt from the requirements of Section 409A by satisfying the requirements of the exemption set forth under Section 1.409A-1(b)(5)(i)(A) of the United States Treasury Regulations or other applicable guidance (the “Exemption”). The plan shall be construed and interpreted in accordance with such intent. Any discretion afforded to any person or entity under the plan the existence of which itself would cause an option to fail to satisfy the requirements of the Exemption is hereby removed from the plan.

 

2

At the end of Rule 3.3(c) after the words “Grant Date”, add the words “provided that the price shall in no case be less than fair market value determined in accordance with Section 409A.”

 

3

Add the following as Rule 8.5:

 

4

“Notwithstanding the foregoing, only adjustments permitted by Section 409A shall be permitted to be made under Rule 8, including pro rata adjustments necessary to reflect a stock split, reverse stock split, and stock dividend.”

APPENDIX 9 45

Canada

The Plan will apply to Options granted to residents in Canada with the following modification:

Any Shares acquired by a Participant pursuant to this Plan may not be traded within Canada at any time and, by receiving such Shares, each Participant shall be taken to have agreed to observe this restriction.

 

44  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 9 August 2007

45  

Appendices 9 to 16 inclusive inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 3 March 2009

 

21


APPENDIX 10

Hong Kong

The Plan will apply to Options granted to residents in Hong Kong with the following modifications:

 

1

Any Shares acquired by a Participant pursuant to this Plan cannot be traded within Hong Kong within 6 months of the date of exercise of the Option(s) pursuant to which such Shares are acquired and, by receiving such Shares, each Participant shall be taken to have agreed to observe this restriction.

 

2

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan the grant of Options under and the operation of the Plan does not constitute an offer or invitation to the public within the meaning of the Companies Ordinance or the Securities and Futures Ordinance.

APPENDIX 11

Ireland

The Plan will apply to Options granted to residents of the Republic of Ireland with the following modification:

Any Option that is held by a person who is a director of a company resident or incorporated in the Republic of Ireland shall be satisfied by the issue of new Shares and not the transfer of Shares.

APPENDIX 12

Japan

The Plan will apply to Options granted to residents of Japan with the addition of the following rules:

In a case where Japanese laws and regulations would inhibit the exercise of an Option or the delivery of Shares or WPP ADRs (or the issue of a WPP receipt) following exercise of the Option, the Board may make such regulations as it thinks fit for dealing with this (whether or not consistent with the rules of the Plan), which for the avoidance of doubt may include:

 

  (a)

declining to deliver Shares or WPP ADRs (or the issue of a WPP receipt) within 30 days after an Option under the Plan has been exercised, or at all, and

 

  (b)

requiring Participants to give advance notice, of whatever length, of their intention to exercise an Option.

APPENDIX 13

Korea

The Plan will apply to Options granted to residents of Korea with the addition of the following rule:

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan unless the Company determines otherwise, no person will acquire any rights under an Option unless and until the relevant report has been filed with and, if necessary approved by, an authorised foreign exchange bank.

 

22


APPENDIX 14

Malaysia

The Plan will apply to Options granted to residents of Malaysia with the addition of the following rule:

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan, no person will acquire any rights under an Option unless and until the relevant registration has been filed with, or approval has been obtained from (in each case if required) the Controller of Foreign Exchange.

APPENDIX 15

Mexico

The Plan will apply to Options granted to residents in Mexico with the addition of the following rules:

 

1

Interests under the Plan have not and will not be registered with the National Registry of Securities maintained by the National Banking and Securities Commission of Mexico and therefore may not be publicly offered in Mexico.

 

2

Any grant of Options is a private offering under Article 8 paragraph III of the Securities Law of Mexico. Any such offering is limited to employees or groups of employees of companies which issue interests under any employee stock option plan or program, or the companies which are controlled by said company, as defined under the Securities Law and applicable regulations of Mexico in effect.

APPENDIX 16

Russia

The Plan will apply to Options granted to residents in Russia with the following modifications:

For the purposes of the securities laws of Russia, all transactions carried out and contracts entered into in connection with the Plan and any Shares acquired by Participants will be carried out or entered into outside Russia.

 

23

Exhibit 4.12

 

 

WPP PLC

 

   

RULES OF THE WPP PLC ANNUAL BONUS DEFERRAL PROGRAMME 1

Adopted by the Compensation Committee on 29 November 2000 and amended by resolutions of the Compensation Committee dated 18 August 2005, 9 August 2007, 4 August 2008, 29 September 2008 and 17 December 2008

As approved by shareholders of WPP Group plc on 30 October 2008 prior to the introduction of a new holding company by a scheme of arrangement under Part 26 of the Companies Act 2006.

As approved by the shareholders of WPP plc on 30 September 2008 and adopted by the Board of Directors of WPP plc on 30 September 2008

Amended by resolutions of the Compensation Committee on 21 October 2008, 11 May 2010 and 12 November 2012

 

   

 

 

1  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 17 December 2008

Squire Sanders (UK) LLP

7 Devonshire Square

London

EC2M 4YH

United Kingdom

DX 136546 Bishopsgate 2

Office: +44 (0)20 7655 1000

Fax:     +44 (0)20 7655 1001

Reference WPP.002-1470


CONTENTS

 

1       DEFINITIONS

   2

2       AWARDS AND INVESTED SHAREHOLDINGS

   6

3       FORFEITURE OF AWARDS

   8

4       DIVIDENDS, SCRIP DIVIDENDS AND VOTING RIGHTS

   8

5       TRANSFER, EXERCISE, LAPSE OF AWARDS AND INVESTED SHAREHOLDINGS

   8

6       CHANGE OF CONTROL

   10

7       VARIATIONS OF CAPITAL

   11

8       MISSTATEMENT

   11

9       ADMINISTRATION AND AMENDMENT OF THE PLAN

   12

10     TERMINATION

   13

11     GOVERNING LAW

   13

SCHEDULE 1

   14

SCHEDULE 2

   15

SCHEDULE 3

   16

APPENDIX 1

   17

 

i


RULES OF THE WPP PLC 2

ANNUAL BONUS DEFERRAL PROGRAMME

 

1

    DEFINITIONS

 

1.1

In these Rules the following words and expressions shall have, where the context so admits, the meanings set forth below:

Acceptance Date ” means the date (if any) by which an Eligible Employee must state a preference for the grant of a Bonus Share Award or a Bonus Share Right made pursuant to Rule 2.

Acceptance Notice ” means the notice signed by an Eligible Employee in accordance with Rule 2 to acquire an Invested Shareholding.

Act ” means the Companies Act 1985. 3

Annual Bonus ” means the amount of annual bonus (if any), before the deduction of any taxes and social taxes, allocated to an Eligible Employee in respect of annual bonus arrangements, operated by a Participating Company, in respect of a Base Year.

Award ” means a Basic Share Award, a Basic Share Right, a Bonus Share Award or a Bonus Share Right, as the case may be.

Award Certificate ” means a notice confirming an Award made to a Participant.

Base Year ” means a financial year of the Company.

Basic Award ” means the Annual Bonus that the Board determines that would have been paid to an Eligible Employee in respect of a Base Year, in respect of annual bonus arrangements, operated by a Participating Company if the Eligible Employee had not expressed a preference to participate under this Program.

Basic Share Award ” means an irrevocable contingent award of Shares, such number of Shares being determined by the Board on the Date of Award in accordance with Schedule 1.

Basic Share Right ” means an option to acquire Shares where the option price for all the Shares subject to the option shall be £1 (or such other amount determined by the Board) such number of Shares being determined by the Board on the Date of Award in accordance with Schedule 1.

Board ” means the board of directors of the Company or a committee to whom they have delegated their powers for the purposes of this Program, which, where the circumstances require, shall include but not limited to the Compensation Committee.

Bonus Share Award ” means an irrevocable contingent award of Shares, such number of Shares being determined by the Board on the Date of Award in accordance with Schedule 2.

 

 

2  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 17 December 2008

3  

Inserted by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 4 August 2008

 

2


Bonus Share Right ” means an option to acquire Shares where the option price for all the Shares subject to the option shall be £1 (or such other amount determined by the Board) such number of shares being determined by the Board on the Date of Award in accordance with Schedule 2.

Close Period ” means such time as the directors or other employees of the Company are prohibited from dealing in Shares, for whatever reason, in accordance with the “Model Code for Transactions” or such code as the Company may have adopted from time to time or such other statutory order, regulation or other prohibition from dealing in Shares or rights over Shares;

Company ” means

 

  (a)

for the period before 25 October 2005 the reference shall be to WPP 2005 Limited, a private limited company incorporated in England and Wales with registered number 1003653;

 

  (b)

for the period between 25 October 2005 and 18 November 2008 the reference shall be to WPP 2008 Limited, a private limited company incorporated in England and Wales with registered number 5537577;

 

  (c)

for the period between 19 November 2008 and the Effective Date, the reference shall be to WPP plc, a public limited company incorporated in Jersey with registered number 101749, to be re-named WPP 2012 plc; and

 

  (d)

for the period from and including the Effective Date the reference shall be to WPP plc, a public limited company incorporated in Jersey with registered number 111714. 4 5

Change of Control ” means an occurrence where any person, partnership, corporation, trust or similar entity or group acquires in a transaction of a series of transactions more than 50% of the voting securities of the Company 6 .

Date of Award ” means the date on which an Award is granted in accordance with the provisions of Rule 2.

Dealing Day ” means any day on which the London Stock Exchange is open for the transaction of business.

Dividend Shares ” means Shares awarded under Rule 4.4.

Effective Date ” means the date on which the Scheme, as set out in part 3 of the circular to share owners of WPP plc, a company registered in Jersey with company number 101749, relating to the recommended proposals for the introduction of a new parent company becomes effective, expected to be 2 January 2013. 7 8 9

Eligible Employee ” means an executive director or employee of a Participating Company who is eligible to receive an Annual Bonus.

 

 

4  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 18 August 2005

5  

Further amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012

6  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012

7  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 18 August 2005

8  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

9  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012

 

3


Exercise Period ” means the period of ten years starting with the Date of Award or such other period as may be determined by the Board prior to the making of an Award.

Group ” means the Company and its Subsidiaries together with any other body corporate nominated by the Board for this purpose which is not under the control of any single person, but is under the control of two or more persons, one of whom being the Company and in relation to which either the Company is able (whether directly or indirectly) to exercise 20% or more of its equity voting rights or has the power to control the composition of the board of directors of that body corporate. The expression “member of the Group” shall be construed accordingly.

Invested Amount ” means the amount of Net Annual Bonus with which an Eligible Employee purchases Shares pursuant to the Program; being a multiple of 10%, but not less than 10%, of the Net Annual Bonus.

Invested Shareholding ” means such number of Shares as is purchased by or on behalf of an Eligible Employee with his Invested Amount in accordance with these Rules (and in particular in accordance with Rule 2.5 and Schedule 3) and which he undertakes to hold pursuant to the terms of the Program for the Vesting Period applicable to any relevant Bonus Share Award or Bonus Share Right.

Market Value ” means in relation to a Share, its value as calculated by reference to its middle market quotation as derived from the Daily Official List of the London Stock Exchange published on the Dealing Day preceding the Date of Award (or at the discretion of the Board on such other date or dates as the Board deems in its discretion to be reasonable) and in relation to a WPP Receipt, the average of the high and low prices reported by Nasdaq on the Date of Award (or at the discretion of the Board on such other date as the Board deems reasonable).

Net Annual Bonus ” means the amount of the Annual Bonus after the deduction of all taxes and/or employees’ social taxes properly deductible therefrom (adjusted as the Board at its discretion deems reasonable to take account of tax allowances and exemptions).

 

 

Original Accounts ” means any accounts or other data used to assess the extent to which a Relevant Performance Condition is or was satisfied. 16

 

Participant ” means any Eligible Employee to whom an Award has been granted. Reference to a Participant shall include, where the context so admits or requires, his personal representative(s).

 

10  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 18 August 2005

11  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

12  

Definition of “New WPP” removed by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012

13  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 18 August 2005

14  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

15  

Definition of “Old WPP” removed by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012

16  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010

17  

Definition of “Original WPP” removed by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012

 

4


Participating Companies ” means those companies in the Group which the Board determine shall be the participating companies. 18

Participating Country ” means the country to which the Program will be extended and consequently any Subsidiary of the Company which is registered in that country, unless the Board determines to exclude that subsidiary.

Performance Related Remuneration ” means any element of the Participant’s remuneration (payable in cash or shares and including, for the avoidance of doubt, any Bonus Share Award or Bonus Share Right paid or payable under this Program) where the payment, or the extent of the payment, of that remuneration is determined, at least in part, by reference to a Relevant Performance Condition. 19

Period ” means a period of 4 weeks.

Program ” means this Program which shall be known as the WPP plc Annual Bonus Deferral Program 20 as constituted in accordance with these Rules.

Program Year ” means a financial year of the Company commencing immediately after a Base Year.

Relevant Performance Condition ” means a condition or term which affects the amount of any remuneration of a Participant (for the avoidance of doubt, payable in cash or shares) that vests, is exercisable or receivable and which depends on any measure of performance including the financial performance of the Company, the Group or any business (or part of any business) or company within the Group. 21

Rules ” means the rules of this Program and includes any amendments effected in accordance with Rule 9 22 from time to time in force.

Scheme ” means a scheme of arrangement under Article 125 of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991 or with or subject to any modification, addition or condition approved or imposed by the Royal Court of Jersey relating to proposals for the introduction of a new parent company. 23 24 25

Service Factor ” means a number between zero and 1 determined by dividing the number of Periods within the Vesting Period prior to the date of the Change of Control or, as the case may be, the date on which the Company passes a resolution for the winding-up of the Company or the date on which the assets of the Company are declared en désastre by the total number of Periods in the Vesting Period (provided that the Board shall have power in all cases to vary the resulting numbers, provided that it may never exceed 1). 26

Shares ” means fully paid ordinary shares in the capital of the Company or at the discretion of the Board a WPP Receipt.

 

18  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 18 August 2005

19  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010

20  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 17 December 2008

21  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010

22  

Numbering amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010

23  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 18 August 2005

24  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

25  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012

26  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

 

5


Subsidiary ” means a company as defined by Section 736 of the Act, or as the context may require, articles 2 and 2A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991. 27

Tax Liability ” means the amount of all taxes and/or primary social security taxes which any person would be required to account for to any taxation authority by reference to an Award or an Invested Shareholding.

Transfer ” means the receipt by transfer of the Shares which are the subject of an Award or an Invested Shareholding, which shall include at the discretion of the Board the transfer of Treasury Shares of the Company (and derivative terms shall be construed accordingly). 28

Treasury Shares ” means any Shares which are purchased by the Company in accordance with Article 57 of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991 and held by the Company as treasury shares pursuant to Article 58A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991. 29 30

Trustees ” means the trustees for the time being of any employee benefit trust established for the benefit of some or all of the Eligible Employees.

Vesting Period ” means a period of four Program Years, (or such other period as is determined by the Board prior to a Date of Award), commencing on the first date in the Program Year in which the Date of Award falls.

WPP ADS ” means an American depository share representing Shares pursuant to any American depository share arrangement sponsored by the Company.

WPP Receipt ” means an American Depository Receipt evidencing WPP ADSs.

 

1.2

Where the context so admits or requires words importing the singular shall include the plural and vice versa and words importing the masculine shall include the feminine.

 

1.3

Reference in these Rules to any statutory provisions are to those provisions as amended, extended or re-enacted from time to time and shall include any regulations made thereunder. The Interpretation Act 1978 shall apply to these Rules mutatis mutandis as if they were an Act of Parliament.

 

1.4

The headings to these Rules are for the sake of convenience only and shall be ignored when construing the Rules.

 

2

    AWARDS AND INVESTED SHAREHOLDINGS

 

2.1

For each Base Year the Board shall select those Participating Companies whose Eligible Employees are to participate in the Program and shall decide in relation to each such Eligible Employee:

  (a)

the number of Shares (as determined in accordance with Schedule 1) which are to be the subject of any Basic Share Award or any Basic Share Right and the Vesting Period applicable thereto;

 

  (b)

subject to Rule 2.4, the number of Shares which are to be the subject of any Bonus Share Award or any Bonus Share Right (as determined in accordance with Schedule 2) and the Vesting Period applicable thereto; and

 

 

27  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

28  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 4 August 2008

29  

Inserted by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 4 August 2008

30  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

 

6


  (c)

whether an Eligible Employee may be invited to acquire an Invested Shareholding with some or all of their Net Annual Bonus for the Base Year and the Acceptance Date in relation to such acquisition, provided that such invitation may only be accepted in relation to an Eligible Employee who is not granted a Basic Share Award or a Basic Share Right.

 

2.2

An Award Certificate shall be issued to each Participant specifying the number of Shares subject to the Award, the Vesting Period, the number of Shares in any Invested Shareholding, and, in relation to a Basic Share Right or a Bonus Share Right, the Exercise Period.

 

2.3

No Award shall be granted:

 

  (a)

unless an Eligible Employee is employed by a Participating Company at the Date of Award and is not under notice to leave at such date whether such notice has been given to or by the Eligible Employee; and

 

  (b)

unless otherwise agreed by the Board, during a Close Period.

 

2.4

To apply to acquire an Invested Shareholding, an Eligible Employee must return to the Board (or to such person as it directs) no later than the Acceptance Date:

 

  (a)

the Acceptance Notice, duly signed; and

 

  (b)

confirmation of the method of payment of the Invested Amount by such method specified in the invitation.

 

2.5

By signing the Acceptance Notice the Eligible Employee will agree that his Invested Amount will be applied by the Trustees to purchase his Invested Shareholding on the Date of Award (or at the discretion of the Board, on such other date as the Board deems reasonable) and that his Invested Shareholding will be held by the Trustees as his nominee pursuant to the Rules. At the discretion of the Board, his Invested Shareholding may be calculated in accordance with Schedule 3. His Invested Amount may be converted at the discretion of the Board into pounds Sterling or US Dollars at the mid-market spot rate for that currency at the close of business as shown in the Financial Times, on the Dealing Day immediately preceding the Date of Award (or at the discretion of the Board, on such other date as the Board deems reasonable).

 

2.6

If the Board decides not to grant any Award to an Eligible Employee who has paid an Invested Amount, that Invested Amount shall be returned to the Eligible Employee as soon as practicable thereafter, and without any liability to pay interest or any other amount thereon.

 

2.7

The number of Shares in respect of which Awards may be granted under the Program on any day which are to be satisfied by the issue of Shares when added to the aggregate of:

 

  (a)

the number of Shares which immediately prior to that day have been or are to be issued to satisfy outstanding Awards under the Program; and

  (b)

the number of Shares which immediately prior to that day have been or are to be issued to satisfy options or awards granted or made under any other employees’ share scheme of any member of the Group in the ten years immediately before that day;

shall not exceed 10% of the issued ordinary share capital of the Company for the time being, and for the purposes of this Rule, any Treasury Shares that are or are to be transferred for the purpose of satisfying options or other awards shall be taken as being Shares that are issued or to be issued for that purpose. 31 32

 

31  

Inserted by resolution of the Compensation Committee on 4 August 2008

32  

Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee on 29 September 2008

 

7


3

    FORFEITURE OF AWARDS

 

3.1

An Award shall be personal to a Participant and neither any Award, nor any rights under any Award may be transferred, assigned, pledged, charged or otherwise disposed of by a Participant to any other person and if a Participant shall do, suffer or permit any such act or thing whereby he would or might be deprived of any rights under an Award, such rights , shall forthwith lapse.

 

3.2

Subject to Rule 5, Bonus Share Awards and Bonus Share Rights granted to a Participant in respect of an Invested Shareholding shall be granted contingently on the continuous holding by or on behalf of a Participant of the Invested Shareholding during the Vesting Period.

 

3.3

Subject to Rule 5, during the Vesting Period the Participant may not withdraw, transfer, pledge, assign, charge or otherwise dispose of all or part of any Invested Shareholding unless the Board, in its absolute discretion, determines otherwise; if a Participant shall do, suffer or permit any such act or thing whereby he would or might be deprived of any Invested Shareholding, the corresponding Bonus Share Award or Bonus Share Rights shall forthwith lapse (unless the Board in its absolute discretion determines otherwise).

 

4

    DIVIDENDS, SCRIP DIVIDENDS AND VOTING RIGHTS

 

4.1

Bonus Share Awards and Bonus Share Rights granted to a Participant in respect of an Invested Shareholding shall be granted contingently on the Participant waiving any right to all dividends or scrip dividends declared in respect of the Invested Shareholding until such Invested Shareholding is Transferred to the Participant.

 

4.2

In relation to an Invested Shareholding, a Participant shall not be entitled to instruct the Trustees on:

 

  (a)

how to vote or abstain from voting; and

 

  (b)

whether to accept or reject any offer.

 

4.3

If dividends or scrip dividends are declared by reference to a record date prior to the Transfer in respect of any Awards, the dividends or scrip dividends shall belong and be paid to the Trustees.

 

4.4

Where a dividend is declared by reference to a record date after the Date of Award and paid before the Transfer, the amount which would have been paid on the Shares subject to the Basic Share Award, Basic Share Right and the Invested Shareholding will be used to acquire Dividend Shares (acquired by the Trustees at the best price reasonably available to them) calculated by reference to the dividend which would have been paid.

 

4.5

The Trustees shall, at their discretion, be entitled to vote or abstain from voting in respect of the Shares which are the subject of any Award.

 

5

    TRANSFER, EXERCISE, LAPSE OF AWARDS AND INVESTED SHAREHOLDINGS

 

5.1

The Shares subject to a Basic Share Award, subject to such adjustment as may be required pursuant to Rule 8 33 , a Bonus Share Award and an Invested Shareholding shall be Transferred to the Participant in full or in part as soon as reasonably practicable after the final day of the

 

33  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010

 

8


 

Vesting Period together with such number of Dividend Shares, as the Board determines appropriate, earned in respect of the Basic Share Awards or Invested Shareholding subject to the provisions of this Rule 5 and Rule 6. No Shares shall be Transferred during any Close Period, but shall be Transferred as soon as reasonably practicable thereafter.

 

5.2

For the avoidance of doubt, the Participant is not, with the exception of Invested Shareholdings, the beneficial owner of any Shares awarded under this Program until such time as they are Transferred, and only then will the Participant have the legal and beneficial ownership of the Shares.

 

5.3

A Basic Share Right or, subject to such adjustment as may be required pursuant to Rule 8 34 , a Bonus Share Right may be exercised in whole or in part by the Participant during the Exercise Period by delivery to the Company (or to such other person as it shall direct) of a notice in the form prescribed by the Board and signed by the Participant, together with the appropriate option price. The date of receipt of such notice shall be deemed to be the date of exercise of the right and the Shares, together with such number of Dividend Shares as the Board determines appropriate, earned in respect of the Basic Share Rights, shall be Transferred as soon as reasonably practicable thereafter. A Basic Share Right or a Bonus Share Right shall lapse and become of no effect at the expiry of the Exercise Period.

 

5.4

A Basic Share Right or a Bonus Share Right shall not become exercisable prior to the end of the Vesting Period and shall be subject to the provisions of this Rule 5 and Rule 6.

 

5.5

If the Participant ceases employment with the Group for any reason in relation to a Basic Share Award, Invested Shareholding and Dividend Shares, the Shares shall be Transferred to the Participant as soon as is reasonably practicable following the date of cessation, unless the Board in its absolute discretion, determines otherwise within a period of 14 days of the date of cessation. Without prejudice, it is intended that this discretion will not normally be exercised in cases other than cessation of employment by reason of gross misconduct.

 

5.6

If the Participant ceases employment with the Group for any reason in relation to a Basic Share Right, the right shall become exercisable for a defined period unless, within 14 days of the date of cessation of employment the Board, in its absolute discretion, determines otherwise, (without prejudice it is intended that this discretion will not normally be exercised in cases other than cessation of employment by reason of gross misconduct). The defined period will commence 14 days after the date of cessation of employment and end on the earlier of 30 days later and the end of the Exercise Period. Thereafter the right shall lapse.

 

5.7

The Trustee may decide that, instead of the Shares to which the Participant would otherwise be entitled under this Program, the Participant will be paid the cash alternative. The cash alternative will be determined using the following formula:

MV x N

 

  where

MV  is the Market Value of . a Share on such date as the Board may select falling within

      

       the period of 30 days following:

 

  (i)

the end of the Vesting Period in respect of a Basic Share Award, a Bonus Share Award and an Invested Shareholding; and

 

  (ii)

the date of exercise in respect of a Basic Share Right or a Bonus Share Right; and

 

34  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010

 

9


  N

is the number of Shares vesting under a Basic Share Award, a Bonus Share Award (subject to such adjustment as may be required pursuant to Rule 8 35 ) or an Invested Shareholding or in respect of a Basic Share Right or Bonus Share Right the number of rights being exercised (again, subject to such adjustment as may be required pursuant to Rule 8 36 ), together with such number of Dividend Shares as the Board determines appropriate earned in respect of the Basic Share Award, Invested Shareholding or Basic Share Right.

As soon as reasonably possible after the Board has made its decision, subject to Rule 9.8 37 , the Trustee must pay the Participant the cash alternative (or arrange for it to be paid to him).

 

6

    CHANGE OF CONTROL

 

6.1

If there is a Change of Control, other than a Change of Control arising as a result of a Scheme which the Board determines will not entitle Participants to have the Shares in their Awards transferred to them or to exercise their Awards 38 , the Trustees shall as soon as is reasonably practicable after the Change of Control Transfer to the Participant:

 

  (a)

all of his Invested Shareholding; or

 

  (b)

all of the Shares subject to his Basic Share Award; and

 

  (c)

the number of Shares subject to his Bonus Share Award multiplied by the Service Factor (and the remainder of the Award shall lapse and be of no effect); and

 

  (d)

all of his Dividend Shares

 

6.2

If the Company passes a resolution for the winding up of the Company or the assets of the Company are declared en désastre 39 , the Trustees shall as soon as is reasonably practicable Transfer to the Participant:

 

  (a)

all of his Invested Shareholding; or

 

  (b)

all of the Shares subject to his Basic Share Award; and

 

  (c)

the number of Shares subject to his Bonus Share Award multiplied by the Service Factor (and the remainder of the Award shall lapse and be of no effect); and

 

  (d)

all of his Dividend Shares.

 

6.3

In the circumstances set out in Rules 6.1 and 6.2 (unless the Board has determined pursuant to Rule 6.1 that Participants will not be entitled to have the Shares in their Awards transferred to them or to exercise their Awards) 40 , the Board shall immediately notify Participants of the relevant event and:

 

  (a)

a Participant’s Basic Share Right shall become exercisable for a period of 60 days (or such other period as the Board determines appropriate) immediately following the relevant event over all of the Shares subject to the right and thereafter the right shall lapse and be of no effect; and

 

35  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010

36  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010

37  

Numbering amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010

38  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012

39  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

40  

Words in brackets inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012.

 

10


  (b)

the Participant’s Bonus Share Right shall become exercisable for the period of 60 days immediately following the relevant event over that number of Shares subject to the right multiplied by the Service Factor and the remainder of the right shall lapse and be of no effect; and

 

  (c)

to the extent that the rights are not exercised thereafter they shall lapse and become of no effect.

 

7

    VARIATIONS OF CAPITAL

 

7.1

In the event of any capitalisation issue, rights issue, rights offer or the issue of shares as consideration for an acquisition or any sub-division, consolidation, reduction or other variation of the capital of the Company or any specie dividend, demerger or in such other circumstances as the Board determine, the Board may:

 

  (a)

make such adjustment(s) to the Invested Shareholdings and the Awards, as the Board, in its absolute discretion, considers fair and reasonable; and

 

  (b)

confirm to each Participant any such adjustment(s) made to his Invested Shareholdings and his Awards,

provided that in each case the Company’s auditors confirm that such adjustment is fair and reasonable.

 

8

    MISSTATEMENT 41

 

8.1

The provisions of 8.2 will apply if:

 

  (a)

a Participant has committed an act of fraud, dishonesty or deceit in relation to a company in the Group;

 

  (b)

as a result of the actions or omissions of a Participant, any Original Accounts are required to be materially corrected, or any accounts or other data for a later period include write downs, adjustments or other items; or

 

  (c)

a Participant knew or ought reasonably to have known, given that Participant’s role and position in the Group, that the relevant financial performance or other data by reference to which a Relevant Performance Condition was measured was materially different than shown in the Original Accounts;

and the Compensation Committee considers that the quantum of any Performance Related Remuneration of that Participant would have been affected if the circumstance or circumstances referred to in (a), (b) or (c) above had been known of, acted upon or otherwise taken into account at the relevant time.

 

8.2

In the event that the Compensation Committee determines that it would be clear to a reasonable, objective assessor that one of the events as detailed in Rule 8.1 above has occurred the Compensation Committee shall be entitled, but in no circumstances shall be obliged, to take action as described in Rule 8.3 below.

 

41  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010

 

11


8.3

The Compensation Committee may determine that:

 

  (a)

an Award is cancelled in its entirety; or

 

  (b)

the number of Shares comprised in an Award will be reduced by such amount and/or in such manner as the Compensation Committee determines.

For the avoidance of doubt, this Rule 8.3 may be operated in respect of Awards where the event or events in respect of which the Compensation Committee has made a determination under Rule 8.2 relates to Performance Related Remuneration under another Award or another plan.

 

9

    ADMINISTRATION AND AMENDMENT OF THE PLAN

 

9.1

The Board, with the consent of the Trustees, may at any time alter or add to all or any of the provisions of the Program in any respect, provided that:

 

  (a)

no alteration or addition to the advantage of Participants or potential Participants shall be made under this Rule to any Rule of the Program relating to:

 

  (i)

Participants or Eligible Employees;

 

  (ii)

limitations on the number of Shares or amount of cash subject to the Program;

 

  (iii)

the maximum entitlement for any one Participant; and

 

  (iv)

the basis for determining a Participant’s entitlement to Shares or cash to be provided under the Program, and the terms of that entitlement, and for the adjustment thereof if in the event of a capitalisation issue, rights issue or open offer, sub-division or consolidation of shares or reduction of capital or any other variation of capital of the Company

 

   

without the prior approval by ordinary resolution of the members of the Company in general meeting, other than a minor amendment to benefit the administration of the Program, to take account of a change in legislation or to obtain or maintain favourable tax, exchange control or regulatory treatment for any Participant or any member of the Group; and

 

  (b)

any alteration or addition which would abrogate or adversely affect to any material extent the subsisting rights of a Participant shall not be made without the consent of such Participant. 42

 

9.2

Any matter pertaining or pursuant to the Program which is not dealt with by these Rules, and any uncertainty as to the meaning of these Rules, shall be determined or resolved by the decision of the Board. Any such decision shall be final and conclusive.

 

9.3

The Company may (but shall not be obliged to) distribute to Participants copies of any notice or document sent by the Company to the holders of Shares.

 

9.4

No account shall be taken of Invested Shareholdings or the grant of Awards or rights in prospect under them for the purposes of any redundancy payments or severance scheme operating within a member of the Group.

 

42  

Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 4 August 2008

 

12


9.5

The rights and obligations of any individual under the terms of his office or employment with a member of the Group shall not be affected by his participation in the Program or any right which he may have to participate therein, and an individual who participates therein shall waive all and any rights to compensation or damages in consequence of the termination of his office or employment with any such company for any reason whatsoever insofar as those rights arise or may arise from this ceasing to have rights under or be entitled to Shares subject to any Award under the Program or any Invested Shareholding as a result of such termination or from the loss or diminution in value of such rights or entitlements.

 

9.6

The Company shall bear the costs of establishing and administering the Program.

 

9.7

A Participant may at any time renounce an Award (in whole or in part) by serving notice in writing on the Board of such intention. The renunciation shall be effective from the date of receipt of such notice by the Board.

 

9.8

In the event that a Tax Liability becomes due from any person (the “relevant person” ) on the Transfer of Shares subject to an Award or an Invested Shareholding or Dividend Shares or on the exercise of a Basic Share Right or a Bonus Share Right or on the payment of the cash alternative under Rule 5.7, no Transfer or payment will occur unless:

 

  (a)

the relevant person is able to deduct an amount equal to the whole of the Tax Liability from the Participant’s net pay for the next pay period; or

 

  (b)

the Participant has paid to the relevant person an amount equal to the Tax Liability; or

 

  (c)

the sum of the amount that the Participant has paid to the relevant person in respect of the relevant person’s obligation to satisfy the Tax Liability and the total amount that the relevant person is able to deduct from the Participant’s net pay for the next pay period is equal to or more than the Tax Liability; or

 

  (d)

the Board or relevant Board determines otherwise.

In the absence of Rules 9.8(a) to 9.8(d) 43 applying, the Participant will be deemed to have given irrevocable instructions to the Company’s brokers (or any person acceptable to the Company) for the sale of sufficient Shares acquired under this Program to realise an amount equal to the Tax Liability and the payment of the Tax Liability to the relevant person.

 

9.9

A Participating Company may provide money to the Trustees or any other person to enable them or him to acquire Shares to be held for the purposes of the Program, or enter into any guarantee or indemnity for those purposes, to the extent permitted by the Companies Act 1985 or, as the context may require, the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991. 44

 

10

    TERMINATION

The Board reserves the right to terminate this Program at any time, but any rights of Participants then subsisting shall remain in force.

 

11

    GOVERNING LAW

These Rules shall be governed by and construed in accordance with English law.

 

 

43  

Numbering amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010

44  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

 

13


SCHEDULE 1

The number of Shares subject to a Basic Share Award or a Basic Share Right granted to an Eligible Employee shall be calculated as follows:

 

     N            =       BA
         MV

Where

     N            =       the number of Shares subject to such Award;
     BA         =       the Basic Award expressed in pounds sterling (or, at the discretion of the Board, US dollars), any currency conversion taking place at the mid-market spot rate for the relevant currency at the close of business published by the Financial Times on the day preceding the Date of Award (or at the discretion of the Board, on such other date as the Board deems reasonable); and
     MV         =       the Market Value of a Share.

 

14


SCHEDULE 2

The number of Shares subject to a Bonus Share Award or a Bonus Share Right granted to an Eligible Employee shall be calculated as follows:

 

M

     =         X            x      

Y

            Z

Where

        M            =       the number of Shares subject to such Award;
        X            =       0.25 where an Eligible Employee is granted a Basic Share Award or Basic Share Right and where a Basic Share Award or Basic Share Right is not granted 0.4 (or such other multipliers determined by the Board prior to the Date of Award, but not exceeding 1);
        Y            =       BA, where an Eligible Employee is granted a Basic Share Award or Basic Share Right and where a Basic Share Award or Basic Share Right is not granted, IA;
        IA           =       the Invested Amount;
        BA         =       the meaning in Schedule 1; and
        Z            =       the Market Value of a Share.

 

15


SCHEDULE 3

The number of Shares acquired as an Invested Shareholding, if the Board exercises its discretion in Rule 2.5, shall be calculated as follows:

 

Invested Shareholding

       =       IA
        Z

Where

 

IA

     =       the Invested Amount expressed in US dollars; and
 

Z

     =       the Market Value of a WPP Receipt.

 

16


APPENDIX 1 45

Taxpayers Subject to Section 409A of the United States Internal Revenue Code

The plan will apply to participants who are taxpayers subject to Section 409A of the United States Internal Revenue Code (“Section 409A”), with the following modifications:

 

  1.

The plan shall be interpreted and construed in accordance with Section 409A. Any discretion afforded to any person or entity under the plan the existence of which itself would cause a participant to be taxed under Section 409A is hereby removed from the plan.

 

  2.

Notwithstanding any provision in the plan to the contrary, if a participant is a “specified employee” within the meaning of Section 409A, any payment otherwise required to be made pursuant to the plan as a result of the participant’s “separation from service” within the meaning of Section 409A shall be delayed for 6 months following the date of the participant’s separation, if necessary to prevent the participant from being taxed under Section 409A. On the earliest date on which such payments can be made without violating the foregoing requirements of Section 409A, there shall (subject to Rule 9.8 46 ) be paid to the participant, in a single cash lump sum, an amount equal to the aggregate amount of all payments delayed pursuant to the preceding sentence.

 

  3.

No Basic Share Rights or Bonus Share Rights shall be granted.

 

  4.

In Rule 1.1, the definition of “Change of Control” shall be amended to read ““Change of Control” means an occurrence where any person, partnership, corporation, trust or similar entity or group acquires in a transaction or a series of transactions more than 50% of the voting securities of the Company and which constitutes a permissible payment event under U.S. Treasury Regulation Section 1.409A-3(A)(5)”. 47

 

  5.

In Rule 3.3, delete the word “withdraw” and at the end of Rule 3.3 add the sentence “A Participant may withdraw all or part of any Invested Shareholding on account of an “unforeseeable emergency” within the meaning of Section 409A.”

 

  6.

In Rule 5.1, after the words “Vesting Period” add the parenthetical “(but in no event later than the later of (i) the December 31 st immediately following the final day of the Vesting Period, or (ii) two and one-half months following the final day of the Vesting Period)”.

 

  7.

In Rule 5.5, delete “as soon as is reasonably practicable” and add “within 90 days”.

 

  8.

In Rule 6.1, delete “as soon as is reasonably practicable” and add “within 90 days” 48 49 .

 

  9.

Rule 6.2 shall not apply.

 

  10.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, any award under the plan shall not be subject to the provisions of this Appendix 1 to the extent such award is earned and vested prior to January 1, 2005.

 

45  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 9 August 2007

46  

Numbering amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010

47  

Inserted by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 21 October 2008

48  

Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

49  

Second amendment deleted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 21 October 2008

 

17

Exhibit 4.14

 

WPP PLC

 

        
          

THE WPP 2008 EXECUTIVE STOCK OPTION PLAN

As approved by shareholders of WPP Group plc on 30 October 2008 prior to the introduction of a new holding company by a scheme of arrangement under part 26 of the Companies Act 2006 as approved by the shareholders of WPP plc on 30 September 2008 and adopted by the Board of Directors of WPP plc on 30 September 2008 and as amended by resolutions of the Compensation Committee dated 3 March 2009 and 11 May 2010 and by written resolutions dated 22 November 2011 and 12 November 2012

HMRC reference for approved section (appendix 1): X104196

 

        
          

 

Squire Sanders (UK) LLP

7 Devonshire Square

London

EC2M 4YH

United Kingdom

DX 136546 Bishopsgate 2

Office: +44 (0)20 7655 1000

Fax:     +44 (0)20 7655 1001

Reference WPP.002-1470


CONTENTS

 

1       DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

   1

2       ELIGIBILITY

   3

3       GRANT OF OPTIONS

   3

4       LIMITS

   4

5       PERFORMANCE CONDITIONS

   6

6       EXERCISE OF OPTIONS

   6

7       TAKEOVER, RECONSTRUCTION AND WINDING-UP

   8

8       VARIATION OF CAPITAL

   9

9       ALTERATIONS

   9

10     MISSTATEMENT

   10

11     MISCELLANEOUS

   10

12     WITHHOLDING

   11

APPENDIX 1

   13

APPENDIX 2

   18

APPENDIX 3

   19

APPENDIX 4

   20

APPENDIX 5

   21

APPENDIX 6

   23

APPENDIX 7

   23

APPENDIX 8

   23

APPENDIX 9

   24

APPENDIX 10

   24

APPENDIX 11

   24

APPENDIX 12

   25

APPENDIX 13

   25

APPENDIX 14

   25

APPENDIX 15

   25

APPENDIX 16

   26

APPENDIX 17

   26

 

i


1

DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

 

1.1

In this Plan, unless the context otherwise requires:

Act ” means the Companies Act 1985 as amended;

Board ” means the board of directors of the Company or a committee appointed by such board of directors;

Company ” means

 

  (a)

for the period between 19 November 2008 and the Effective Date, the reference shall be to WPP plc, a public limited company incorporated in Jersey with registered number 101749, to be re-named WPP 2012 plc; and

 

  (b)

for the period from and including the Effective Date the reference shall be to WPP plc, a public limited company incorporated in Jersey with registered number 111714; 1

Constituent Company ” means the Company or any Subsidiary;

Depositary ” means any depositary or depositaries which hold or whose nominee holds WPP ADRs;

Effective Date ” means the date on which the Scheme, as set out in part 3 of the circular to share owners of WPP plc, a company registered in Jersey with company number 101749, relating to the recommended proposals for the introduction of a new parent company becomes effective, expected to be 2 January 2013; 2

Grant Date ” in relation to an Option means the date on which the Option was granted;

Group Member ” means:

 

  (a)

a Constituent Company or a body corporate which is (within the meaning of section 736 of the Act or, as the context may require, Articles 2 and 2A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991) the Company’s holding company or a subsidiary of the Company’s holding company; or

 

  (b)

a body corporate which is (within the meaning of section 258 of the Act or, as the context may require, Articles 2 and 2A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991) a subsidiary undertaking of a body corporate within paragraph (a) above and has been designated by the Board for this purpose;

ITEPA ” means the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003;

Key Feature ” means a provision of the Plan which is necessary in order to meet the requirements of Schedule 4;

Official List ” means the Daily Official List of the United Kingdom Listing Authority, a division of the Financial Services Authority; 3

 

1  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012.

2  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012.

3  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010.

 

1


Option ” means a right to acquire Shares or WPP ADRs under the Plan; and a right to acquire Shares shall be known as a “Share Option” and a right to acquire WPP ADRs shall be known as an “ADR Option”;

Original Accounts ” means any accounts or other data used to assess the extent to which a Relevant Performance Condition is satisfied; 4

Participant ” means a person who holds an Option granted under the Plan;

Performance Related Remuneration ” means any element of the Participant’s remuneration (for the avoidance of doubt, payable in cash or shares and including, for the avoidance of doubt, any Option) where the payment, or the extent of the payment, of that remuneration is determined, at least in part, by reference to a Relevant Performance Condition; 5

Plan ” means the WPP 2008 Executive Stock Option Plan as herein set out but subject to any alterations or additions made under Rule 9 below;

Relevant Performance Condition ” means a condition or term which affects the amount of any remuneration of a Participant (for the avoidance of doubt payable in cash or shares) that vests, is exercisable or receivable and which depends on any measure of performance including the financial performance of the Company, any Group Member or any business (or any part of any business) of any Group Member; 6

Schedule 4 ” means Schedule 4 to ITEPA;

Schedule 9 ” means Schedule 9 to the Taxes Act 1988;

Scheme ” means a scheme of arrangement under Article 125 of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991 or with or subject to any modification, addition or condition approved or imposed by the Royal Court of Jersey relating to proposals for the introduction of a new parent company; 7

Share ” means an ordinary share in the capital of the Company and for the purposes of Rule 4 (Limits) and, if the context requires, other provisions of the Rules, “Shares” include WPP ADRs;

Specified Age ” means 65 years of age;

Subsidiary ” means a body corporate which is a subsidiary of the Company within the meaning of section 736 of the Act or, as the context may require, Articles 2 and 2A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991;

Taxes Act 1988 ” means the Income and Corporation Taxes Act 1988;

Treasury Shares ” means any Shares which are purchased by the Company in accordance with Article 57 of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991 and held by the Company as treasury shares pursuant to Article 58A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991;

WPP ADR ” means an American Depositary Receipt representing, for the time being, 5 Shares deposited with Citibank NA as depositary pursuant to the Deposit Agreement between the Company and Citibank NA dated as of 2 January 2013 8 as amended from time to time and/or any other American depositary receipt arrangement sponsored by the Company;

 

4  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010.

5  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010.

6  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010.

7  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012.

8  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012.

 

2


and expressions not otherwise defined herein have the same meanings as they have in Schedule 4.

 

1.2

Any reference in the Plan to any enactment includes a reference to that enactment as from time to time modified, extended or re-enacted.

 

1.3

The Plan has been adopted in substitution for the WPP 2005 Executive Stock Option Plan, under which no further grants of options will be made.

 

2

ELIGIBILITY

 

2.1

Subject to Rule 2.2 below, a person is eligible to be granted an Option under the Plan if (and only if) he is an executive director or employee of a Constituent Company.

 

2.2

No person is entitled, by virtue of the provisions of the Plan or any other means, to participate as of right in the Plan through the grant of an Award and consequently the receipt of an Award shall in no circumstances give or imply any right to receive any further award and any further right that is in fact granted to the same Participant may be on the same or on different terms.

 

3

GRANT OF OPTIONS

 

3.1

Subject to Rules 3.2 and 3.5 below and Rule 4 below, the Board may grant or procure the grant to any person who is eligible to be granted an Option under the Plan a Share Option or an ADR Option, upon the terms set out in the Plan; and for this purpose a Share Option to acquire means an option to subscribe for Shares or receive the transfer of Treasury Shares or other Shares as determined by the Board from time to time.

 

3.2

An Option may only be granted under the Plan:

 

  (a)

within the period of 6 weeks beginning with the date on which the Plan is adopted by the Board or the 6 week period beginning with the dealing day next following the date on which the Company announces its interim or final results for any period, or at any other time when the circumstances are considered by the Board to be sufficiently exceptional to justify the grant thereof; and

 

  (b)

within the period of 10 years beginning with the date on which the Plan is approved by shareholders.

 

3.3

The price at which Shares may be acquired by the exercise of an Option shall be determined by the Board before the grant thereof, but shall not be less than:

 

  (a)

in the case of a Share Option, if Shares of the same class as those Shares are listed in the Official List 9 , the lower of the two prices shown for the Shares on that day plus one quarter of the difference between them (as derived from that list or other reputable market source that is able to provide the relevant information at a more appropriate time, even though that source may not be able to guarantee that the information provided will be identical to that subsequently published in that list) on the Grant Date;

 

 

9  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010.

 

3


  (b)

in the case of a Share Option, if paragraph (a) above does not apply, the market value (within the meaning of Part VIII of the Taxation of Chargeable Gains Act 1992) of Shares of that class at the relevant Grant Date, as reasonably determined by the Board;

 

  (c)

in the case of an ADR Option, the fair market value of a WPP ADR as quoted on NASDAQ National Market System over a number of consecutive dealing days (being not more than five) immediately preceding or ending on the Grant Date; or

 

  (d)

except in the case of an Option to acquire Shares otherwise than by subscription, the nominal value of those Shares.

 

3.4

An Option granted under the Plan to any person:

 

  (a)

shall not, except as provided in Rule 6.3 below, be capable of being transferred by him; and

 

  (b)

shall lapse immediately if he is adjudged bankrupt.

 

3.5

An Option granted under the Plan to a person shall lapse if that person ceases to be a director or employee of a Group Member, other than by reason of his death, injury or disability, within six months of the Grant Date unless the Board shall determine otherwise.

 

3.6

Except as referred to in Rule 7.4 and paragraph 17 of Appendix 1, no new Options may be granted under the Plan after the Effective Date. 10

 

 

4

LIMITS

 

4.1

The number of Shares in respect of which Options may be granted under the Plan on any day which are to be satisfied by the issue of Shares when added to the aggregate of:

 

  (a)

the number of Shares which immediately prior to that day have been or are to be issued to satisfy outstanding Options under the Plan; and

 

  (b)

the number of Shares which immediately prior to that day have been or are to be issued to satisfy options or awards granted or made under any other employees’ share scheme of any Group Member in the ten years immediately before that day;

shall not exceed 10% of the issued ordinary share capital of the Company for the time being.

 

4.2

The aggregate market value of the Shares subject to an Option granted under the Plan on any day to a Participant may not, when added to the aggregate market value of the Shares (valued at the date or dates of grant of the relevant Option or Options) which are or have been subject to options granted to him within the preceding twelve months under the Plan or any Relevant Scheme, exceed four times his Annual Remuneration. For the purposes of this Rule 4.2 the following terms will have the following meanings:

 

“Annual Remuneration”

  

in relation to a Participant, the gross rate of basic annual salary (excluding any bonuses, company pension contributions and any other benefits in kind) payable to the relevant Eligible Employee by any Group Company as at the relevant Grant Date;

 

10  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012.

 

4


“Relevant Scheme”

  

any employees’ share scheme (within the meaning given to that term in section 743 of the Act or, as the context may require, Article 58A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991) established by any Group Member (other than savings-related schemes or profit sharing schemes approved by the Inland Revenue under Schedule 9 to the Taxes Act 1988 or Schedule 3 to ITEPA or any other schemes linked to contractual savings schemes or any share incentive plans approved by HM Revenue & Customs under Schedule 8 to the Finance Act 2000 or Schedule 2 to ITEPA);

and for the purposes of this Rule:

 

  (a)

any Option which shall have been released to any extent shall be treated to that extent as if it were still exercisable;

 

  (b)

shares in a Constituent Company shall not be regarded as benefits in kind;

 

  (c)

where a payment of remuneration is made otherwise than in sterling, the payment shall be treated as being of the amount of sterling ascertained by applying such rate of exchange for that day published in a national newspaper as the Board shall reasonably determine; and

 

  (d)

a person’s remuneration shall be deemed to include fees paid to a company whose principal purpose is to provide his services being services of a nature which he would be expected to perform as an employee of a Constituent Company, and being fees referable to those services and exclusive of VAT.

 

4.3

For the purposes of this Rule, the market value of the Shares in relation to which an Option was granted shall be calculated:

 

  (a)

in the case of an Option granted under the Plan, as of the day by reference to which the price at which Shares may be acquired by the exercise thereof was determined in accordance with Rule 3.3 above;

 

  (b)

in the case of an option granted under any option scheme (other than a savings related scheme) approved by HM Revenue & Customs, as at the time when it was granted or, in a case where an agreement relating to the Shares has been made under paragraph 29 of Schedule 9 or paragraph 22 of Schedule 4, such earlier time or times as may be provided in the agreement; and

 

  (c)

in the case of any other option, as on the day or days by reference to which the price at which Shares may be acquired by the exercise thereof was determined;

and the Board may adopt such exchange rate as it thinks fit for the conversion of one currency to another currency.

 

4.4

For the purpose of this Rule 4, any Treasury Shares which are or are to be transferred for the purpose of satisfying options or other awards shall be taken as being Shares that are issued or to be issued for that purpose.

 

4.5

All Options granted under the Plan shall be regarded for the purposes of this Rule 4 as Options that will involve the issue of new Shares unless and until the Board determines that the Option will be satisfied by the transfer of Shares (or WPP ADRs which have not been created using

 

5


 

new Shares issued for the purpose of satisfying options or awards under employee share schemes). The Board may only make such a determination in respect of an Option that has already been issued if it has made arrangements under which the relevant Shares or WPP ADRs will be available when required.

 

4.6

Any Option granted under the Plan shall be limited and take effect so that the above limits are complied with (with all Options being granted on the same day being scaled back on a pro-rata basis and rounded down to the nearest whole Share or WPP ADR).

 

5

PERFORMANCE CONDITIONS

 

5.1

An Option granted under the Plan to a director of the Company may not be exercised if the relevant condition is not satisfied; and in this Rule “the relevant condition” is the condition in Appendix 5 11 or such other objective condition relating to performance as may be specified by the Board at the time of the grant of that Option.

 

5.2

In determining whether the relevant condition has been met where an Option is to be exercised in accordance with any of Rules 6.3, 6.4(a), 6.4(b), 6.4(c), 7.1 and 7.3, the Board may determine that the relevant condition should be adjusted on a pro-rated basis to allow for any reduction in time between the Grant Date and the date of cessation, compared to the time between Grant Date and the end of the performance period. Where such a determination is made, the Board shall be entitled to take into account such information relating to the performance of the Company as it considers to be appropriate and may adjust the method of assessment of the performance condition as it considers to be appropriate to the circumstances (so that, for example, if the cessation occurs one month after the end of the accounting period in which the Option was granted, the Board may assess the satisfaction of the relevant condition from the earnings of the Company for the accounting period in which the Option was granted without reference to the performance in the following month).

 

5.3

The Board may at the time of grant of any Option, impose conditions on that grant relating to performance and specify terms relating to how those conditions interact with the other provisions of the Plan.

 

6

EXERCISE OF OPTIONS

 

6.1

The exercise of any Option granted under the Plan shall be effected in such form and manner as the Board may from time to time prescribe.

 

6.2

Subject to Rules 6.3 and 6.4 below and to Rules 7.1 and 7.3 below, an Option granted under the Plan may not be exercised before the third anniversary of the Grant Date.

 

6.3

Subject to Rule 5 above, if any Participant dies before exercising an Option granted to him under the Plan and at a time when either he is a director or employee of a Group Member or he is entitled to exercise the Option by virtue of Rule 6.4 below, the Option may (and must, if at all) be exercised by his personal representatives within 12 months after the date of his death.

 

6.4

If any Participant ceases to be a director or employee of a Group Member (otherwise than by reason of his death), the following provisions apply in relation to any Option granted to him under the Plan:

 

  (a)

if he so ceases by reason of injury or disability, or by reason only that his office or employment is in a company which ceases to be a Group Member, or relates to a

 

11  

Numbering amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 3 March 2009.

 

6


 

business or part of a business which is transferred to a person who is not a Group Member, subject to Rule 5 above, the Option may (and subject to Rule 6.3 above must, if at all) be exercised within the exercise period;

 

  (b)

if he so ceases by reason of retirement on or after reaching the retirement age (if any) as specified in his contract of employment (or, if there is no such age, if he retires at all) in each case more than six months after the Grant Date subject to Rule 5 above, the Option may (and subject to Rule 6.3 above must, if at all) be exercised within the exercise period; and

 

  (c)

if he so ceases for any other reason, the Option may not be exercised at all unless the Board shall so permit, in which event, subject to Rule 5 above, it may (and subject to Rule 6.3 above must, if at all) be exercised to the extent permitted by the Board within the exercise period;

and in this Rule the “exercise period” is the period which commences on the date of cessation of employment and expires 6 months after such date.

 

6.5

Subject to Rule 6.6 below, a Participant shall not be treated for the purposes of Rule 6.4 above as ceasing to be a director or employee of a Group Member until such time as he is no longer a director or employee of any Group Member and a female Participant who ceases to be such a director or employee by reason of pregnancy or confinement and who exercises her right to return to work under the Employment Rights Act 1996 (or any equivalent legislation in any jurisdiction) before exercising an Option under the Plan shall be treated for those purposes as not having ceased to be such a director or employee.

 

6.6

Other than in respect of Options granted under the Approved Part, a Participant who gives or is given notice to leave employment as a director or employee of a Group Member in any circumstances other than death or in those circumstances referred to in Rule 6.4(a) or 6.4(b), shall, if he subsequently ceases to be in such employment, be treated for the purposes of Rule 6.4 above as ceasing to be a director or employee of a Group Member on the date on which that notice is given (and for the avoidance of doubt any purported exercise by him of an Option during the period of notice shall be of no effect). If a Participant gives or is given notice to leave employment as a director or employee of a Group Member and the Board subsequently uses its discretion under Rule 6.4(c) to allow his Option to be exercisable, nothing in this Rule 6.6 will make his Option lapse or cease to be exercisable.

 

6.7

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan, an Option granted under the Plan may not be exercised after the expiration of the period of 10 years (or such shorter period as the Board may have determined before the grant thereof) beginning with the Grant Date.

 

6.8

Within 30 days after an Option under the Plan has been exercised by any person, the grantor of the Option shall, subject to such adjustment as may be required pursuant to Rule 10.3 12 , in the case of a Share Option, procure the allotment or transfer to him (or a nominee for him) of the number of Shares in respect of which the Option has been exercised and, in the case of an ADR Option, procure the issue or transfer to him of WPP ADRs in respect of which the Option has been exercised (including, if appropriate, by procuring the allotment or transfer of Shares to a Depositary) unless:

 

  (a)

the Board considers that the issue or transfer thereof would not be lawful in all relevant jurisdictions; or

 

12  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010.

 

7


  (b)

in a case where a Group Member is obliged to account for any tax (in any jurisdiction) for which the person in question is liable by virtue of the exercise of the Option, that or another Group Member is unable to withhold the tax from his remuneration nor has received payment from him of a corresponding amount.

 

6.9

All Shares allotted under the Plan shall rank pari passu in all respects with the Shares of the same class for the time being in issue save as regards any rights attaching to such Shares by reference to a record date prior to the date of the allotment.

 

6.10

If Shares of the same class as those allotted under the Plan are listed in the Official List 13 , the Company shall apply to the London Stock Exchange for any Shares so allotted to be admitted to that list.

 

6.11

Where any Option becomes exercisable by reason of the provisions of Rules 6.3 or 6.4, the number of Shares or WPP ADRs in respect of which the Option may be exercised shall be reduced on a pro-rated basis to take account of the fact that the Participant ceased to be a director or employee of a Group Member before the date on which the Option would have become exercisable had the Participant not ceased to be a director or employee of a Group Member (calculated on the basis of the number of days until the date of such cessation compared to the number of days in the whole period between the Grant Date and the date on which the Option becomes exercisable) unless the Board determines to the contrary.

 

7

TAKEOVER, RECONSTRUCTION AND WINDING-UP

 

7.1

if any person obtains control of the Company (within the meaning of section 719 of the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003) as a result of making a general offer to acquire Shares in the Company, or having obtained such control makes such an offer, the Board shall within 7 days of becoming aware thereof notify every Participant thereof and, subject to Rule 5 above and Rules 6.3, 6.4, 6.6 and 6.7 above, an Option granted under the Plan may be exercised within one month (or such longer period as the Board may permit) of such notification.

 

7.2

For the purposes of Rule 7.1 above, a person shall be deemed to have obtained control of the Company if he and others acting in concert with him have together obtained control of it.

 

7.3

If any person becomes bound or entitled to acquire Shares in the Company under Part 18 of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991 (provided that at the time of such event H M Revenue & Customs accepts such provisions as equivalent to section 979 of the Companies Act 2006), or if the Court sanctions a compromise or arrangement proposed for the purposes of or in connection with a scheme for the reconstruction of the Company or its amalgamation with any other company or companies under Part 18A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991 (provided that at the time of such event H M Revenue & Customs accepts such provisions as equivalent to Part 26 of the Companies Act 2006), or if the Company passes a resolution for the winding up of the Company or the assets of the Company are declared en désastre, the Board shall forthwith notify every Participant thereof and any Option granted under the Plan may, subject to Rule 5 above and Rules 6.3, 6.4 and 6.6 above, be exercised within one month of such notification, but to the extent that it is not exercised within that period shall (notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan) lapse on the expiration thereof.

 

7.4

The Board may determine (the determination to apply equally to all Options outstanding at the time) that the provisions of Rules 7.1 and 7.3 above will neither cause Options to become exercisable nor to lapse at different times than would otherwise be the case, if the Board considers that the Options will continue to be an appropriate incentive notwithstanding the

 

13  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010.

 

8


 

changed circumstances, or that the position of Participants can be adequately preserved by the grant to them of some other right or rights in substitution for or addition to the existing rights.

 

7.5

Where any Option becomes exercisable before the end of the period referred to in Rule 6.2 by reason of the provisions of Rules 7.1 or 7.3, the number of Shares or WPP ADRs in respect of which the Option may be exercised shall be reduced on a pro-rated basis to take account of the early date on which the Option may be exercised (calculated on the basis of the number of days until the end of the period compared to the number of days in the whole period).

 

8

VARIATION OF CAPITAL

 

8.1

In the event of any increase or variation of the share capital of the Company (whenever effected), the Board may make such adjustments as it considers appropriate under Rule 8.2 below provided that the auditors or other financial advisers appointed by the Board acting as experts and not as arbitrators confirm that in their opinion the variation is fair and reasonable and such confirmation shall be final and binding.

 

8.2

An adjustment made under this Rule shall be to one or more of the following:

 

  (a)

the number and description of Shares in respect of which any Option granted under the Plan may be exercised;

 

  (b)

the price at which Shares may be acquired by the exercise of any such Option; and/or

 

  (c)

where any such Option has been exercised, but no Shares have been allotted or transferred pursuant to such exercise, the number and description of Shares which may be so allotted or transferred and the price at which they may be acquired.

 

8.3

An adjustment under Rule 8.2 above may have the effect of reducing the price at which Shares may be acquired by the exercise of an Option to less than their nominal value, but only if and to the extent that the Board shall be authorised to capitalise from the reserves of the Company a sum equal to the amount by which the nominal value of the Shares in respect of which the Option is exercised and which are to be allotted pursuant to such exercise exceeds the price at which the same may be subscribed for and to apply such sum in paying up such amount on such Shares; and so that on exercise of any Option in respect of which such a reduction shall have been made the Board shall capitalise such sum (if any) and apply the same in paying up such amount as aforesaid.

 

8.4

As soon as reasonably practicable after making any adjustment under Rule 8.2 above, the Board shall give notice in writing thereof to any Participant affected thereby.

 

9

ALTERATIONS

 

9.1

Subject to Rule 9.2 below, the Board may at any time alter or add to all or any of the provisions of the Plan, or the terms of any Option granted under it, in any respect.

 

9.2

No alteration or addition to the advantage of Participants or potential Participants shall be made under Rule 9.1 above to any Rule of the Plan without the prior approval by ordinary resolution of the members of the Company in general meeting other than a minor amendment to benefit the administration of the Plan, to take account of a change in legislation, or to obtain or maintain favourable tax, exchange control or regulatory treatment for any Participant or any Group Member.

 

9


9.3

As soon as reasonably practicable after making any alteration or addition under Rule 9.1 above, the Board shall give notice in writing thereof to any Participant affected thereby.

 

10

MISSTATEMENT 14

 

10.1

The provisions of 10.2 will apply if:

 

  (a)

a Participant has committed an act of fraud, dishonesty or deceit in relation to a Group Member;

 

  (b)

as a result of the actions or omissions of a Participant, any Original Accounts are required to be materially corrected, or any accounts or other data for a later period include write downs, adjustments or other items; or

 

  (c)

a Participant knew or ought reasonably to have known, given that Participant’s role and position in the Group, that the relevant financial performance or other data by reference to which a Relevant Performance Condition was measured was materially different than shown in the Original Accounts;

and the Compensation Committee considers that the quantum of any Performance Related Remuneration of that Participant would have been affected if the circumstance or circumstances referred to in (a), (b) or (c) above had been known of, acted upon or otherwise taken into account at the relevant time.

 

10.2

In the event that the Compensation Committee determines that it would be clear to a reasonable, objective assessor that one of the events as detailed in Rule 10.1 above has occurred the Compensation Committee shall be entitled, but in no circumstances shall be obliged, to take action as described in Rule 10.3 below.

 

10.3

The Compensation Committee may determine that:

 

  (a)

an Option is cancelled in its entirety; or

 

  (b)

the number of Shares in respect of which an Option may be exercised will be reduced by such amount and/or in such manner as the Compensation Committee determines.

For the avoidance of doubt, this Rule 10.3 may be operated in respect of Options where the event or events in respect of which the Compensation Committee has made a determination under Rule 10.2 relates to Performance Related Remuneration under another Option or another plan.

 

11

MISCELLANEOUS

 

11.1

The rights and obligations of any individual under the terms of his office or employment with any Group Member shall not be affected by his participation in the Plan or any right which he may have to participate therein, and an individual who participates therein shall by participating be deemed to waive any and all rights to compensation or damages in consequence of the termination of his office or employment for any reason whatsoever insofar as those rights arise or may arise from his ceasing to have rights under or be entitled to exercise any Option under the Plan as a result of such termination. Any benefit under the Plan shall not be regarded as salary or counted for pension or any other purpose. Participation in the Plan by any individual is

 

14  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010.

 

10


 

entirely at the discretion of the Board and in no circumstances shall the fact that an individual has received an Option or Options in the past give that individual any right to receive a further Option or Options.

 

11.2

In the event of any dispute or disagreement as to the interpretation of the Plan, or as to any question or right arising from or related to the Plan, the decision of the Board shall be final and binding upon all persons.

 

11.3

The Company and any Subsidiary may provide money to the trustees of any trust or any other person to enable them or him to acquire Shares to be held for the purposes of the Plan (which Shares may be held by a Depositary on behalf of any such trustees or other person) or enter into any guarantee or indemnity for these purposes, to the extent permitted by section 153 of the Act or, as the context may require, the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991.

 

11.4

Any notice or other communication under or in connection with the Plan may be given by personal delivery, delivery by email or by sending the same by post, in the case of a company to its registered office (or to such other address and person as may be specified by that company from time to time), and in the case of an individual to his last known address, or, where he is a director or employee of a Group Member, either to his last known address or to the address of the place of business at which he performs the whole or substantially the whole of the duties of his office or employment.

 

11.5

The Board may establish further plans based on the Plan but modified to take account of local tax, exchange control or securities laws in overseas territories, provided that any Shares made available under such further plans are treated as counting against the limits expressed in Rules 4.1 to 4.6.

 

11.6

The Plan and any Option shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of England and Wales and the Company and the Participants (together with any eligible persons who do not become Participants) shall submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the Courts of England and Wales.

 

12

WITHHOLDING

 

12.1

The grant or exercise of any Option under the Plan is subject to the condition that the grant or an exercise of the Option shall not be valid unless the Participant has, in addition to complying with the other requirements of the Plan, paid or procured the payment to the Group Member which is his employer, or otherwise provided for (in a manner satisfactory to that Group Member or, if appropriate, the trustees of any employee benefit trust) an amount equal to the taxation for which any Group Member may be liable by reason of that grant or exercise.

 

12.2

Without limitation to 12.1 above, the Company or any other Group Member which is a Participant’s employer or the trustees of any employee benefit trust may withhold any amount and make such arrangements as it considers necessary which comply with applicable law to meet any liability to taxation in respect of the grant, exercise or cancellation of Options or other event relating to Options or in respect of any benefit under the Plan. These arrangements may include the sale of any Shares on behalf of a Participant, which the Participant is deemed to have authorised, to produce a cash sum sufficient to meet the taxation liabilities referred to in this Rule 12.

 

12.3

The Company may in its sole discretion waive the requirements set out in this Rule 12 in respect of any part of the Participant’s employer’s liability to taxation, including in particular, any employer’s liability to National Insurance Contributions.

 

11


12.4

In this Rule, “taxation” means all forms of taxation or levy by any state or any political subdivision of a state and includes income tax, Pay as You Earn, National Insurance or other social security contributions, whether being the primary liability of the employer or the employee, or any other person.

 

12


APPENDIX 1

This Appendix constitutes the HM Revenue & Customs approved part of the WPP 2008 Executive Stock Option Plan (the “Approved Part”). In the event of any conflict between the Plan and Appendix 1, the latter shall prevail. The terms of the Approved Part are identical to those of the other part of the said Plan, to which this Approved Part is appended except as follows:

 

1

In the definition of “Subsidiary” in Rule 1.1, add to the end words “and is under the control of the Company within the meaning of Section 719 of the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003”.

 

2

In Rule 2.1, delete the words “an executive director or employee of a Constituent Company.” and substitute the words:

“a full-time director or qualifying employee of a Constituent Company. For the purposes of this Rule 2.1:

 

  (a)

a person shall be treated as a full-time director of a Constituent Company if he is obliged to devote to the performance of the duties of his office or employment with that and any other Constituent Company not less than 25 hours a week (excluding meal breaks);

 

  (b)

a qualifying employee, in relation to a Constituent Company, is an employee of the Constituent Company (other than one who is a director of a Constituent Company).”

 

3

In Rule 2.1, add the words “A person is not eligible to be granted an Option under the Plan at any time when he is not eligible to participate in the Plan by virtue of paragraph 9 of Schedule 4 (material interest).”

 

4

Only Share Options, and not ADR Options, shall be granted under the Approved Part and therefore no references to WPP ADRs or ADR Options shall apply in respect of an Option granted under this Appendix 1. No Share Option may be granted under this Appendix 1 prior to the date of approval of the Approved Part by H M Revenue & Customs.

 

5

In Rule 3.1, after the words “procure the grant” add the words “by deed, seal or for consideration” and after the word “Company” in the definition of “Share”, add the words “which satisfy the requirements of paragraphs 16 – 20 of Schedule 4”.

 

6

In Rule 3.2, after the first mention of the word “Board” add the words “the date on which the Approved Part is approved by HM Revenue & Customs under Schedule 4”.

 

7

In Rule 3.3(a), delete the words “or other reputable market source that is able to provide the relevant information at a more appropriate time, even though that source may not be able to guarantee that the information provided will be identical to that subsequently published in that list”.

 

8

In Rule 3.3(b), delete the words “reasonably determined by the Board” and substitute the words “agreed in advance for the purposes of the Plan with Shares Valuation of HM Revenue & Customs, on the Grant Date (or such other day as may be agreed with HM Revenue & Customs)”.

 

9

At the end of Rule 3.5 add the words “(provided that in the case of a cessation due to redundancy or retirement within six months of the Grant Date there shall be no such discretion and the Option shall lapse immediately on such cessation)”, and add the words “acting fairly and reasonably” after the word “Board” where it appears in that Rule.

 

13


10

Add the following as Rule 4.3A:

“No person shall be granted Options under the Approved Part which would, at the time they are granted cause the aggregate market value (determined as at the date of each relevant grant) of the Shares which he may acquire in pursuance of Options granted to him under the Approved Part or under any other share option scheme, not being a savings related share option scheme, approved under Schedule 9 or any option scheme approved under Schedule 4 and established by the Company or by any associated company of the Company (and not exercised) to exceed or further exceed £30,000 or such other limit as may be prescribed in paragraph 6 of Schedule 4”.

 

11

In Rule 5.2, add the words “acting fairly and reasonably” after the word “Board” in the 3rd line.

 

11A

In Rule 6.4(b), add the words “or on or after the Specified Age,” after the words “retires at all),”.

 

12

In Rule 6(4)(c), after the words “the Board” (on both occasions where those words appear) add the words “(acting fairly and reasonably) and, at the end of the Rule, add the words “provided that the discretions of the Board contained in this Rule 6.4(c) shall not apply in the case of a cessation by reason of redundancy (in which case the Option shall lapse immediately)”.

 

13

Add the following as Rule 6.7A:

“A Participant shall not be eligible to exercise an Option under the Plan at any time when he is not eligible to participate in the Plan by virtue of paragraph 9 of Schedule 4”.

 

14

Delete Rule 6.8 (b) and insert the following as Rule 6.8A:

“In a case where a Group Member is obliged to account for any tax (in any jurisdiction) for which the person in question is liable by virtue of the exercise of the Option, the Board may require the Participant to make a payment to the Company of an amount equal to the reasonable estimate of the Company of that tax as a condition precedent to the exercise of the Option provided that if that estimate proves to be in excess of the actual liability then the excess will be refunded to the Participant.”

 

15

At the end of Rule 6.11, add the words “acting fairly and reasonably”.

 

16

In Rule 7.1, insert the words “not exceeding four months” after the word “period” in the penultimate line.

 

17

Add the following as Rules 7.6 and 7.7:

 

  “7.6

If any company (the “acquiring company”):

 

  (a)

obtains control of the Company as a result of making:

 

  (i)

a general offer to acquire the whole of the issued ordinary share capital of the Company which is made on a condition such that if it is met the person making the offer will have control of the Company, or

 

  (ii)

a general offer to acquire all the Shares in the Company which are of the same class as the Shares which may be acquired by the exercise of Options granted under the Plan, or

 

  (b)

obtains control of the Company in pursuance of a compromise or arrangement sanctioned by the court under Part 18A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991 (provided that at the time of such event H M Revenue & Customs accepts such provisions as equivalent to Part 26 of the Companies Act 2006), or

 

14


  (c)

becomes bound or entitled to acquire Shares in the Company under Part 18 of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991 (provided that at the time of such event H M Revenue & Customs accepts such provisions as equivalent to section 979 of the Companies Act 2006);

any Participant may at any time within the appropriate period (which expression shall be construed in accordance with paragraph 26 of Schedule 4), by agreement with the acquiring company, release any Option granted under the Plan which has not lapsed (the “old option”) in consideration of the grant to him of an option (the “new option”) which (for the purposes of that paragraph) is equivalent to the old option but relates to shares in a different company (whether the acquiring company itself or some other company falling within paragraph 16(b) or (c) of Schedule 4).

 

  7.7

The new option shall not be regarded for the purposes of Rule 7.6 above as equivalent to the old option unless the conditions set out in paragraph 27 of Schedule 4 are satisfied, but so that the provisions of the Plan shall for this purpose be construed as if:

 

  (i)

the new option were an option granted under the Plan at the same time as the old option;

 

  (ii)

except for the purposes of the definitions of “Group Member”, “Constituent Company” and “Subsidiary” in Rule 1.1 above and the reference to “the Board” in Rule 6.7 above, the expression “the Company” were defined as “a company whose shares may be acquired by the exercise of options granted under the Plan”;

 

  (iii)

the relevant condition referred to in Rule 6.3 above had been satisfied; and

 

  (iv)

Rule 9.2 below were omitted.”

 

18

At the start of Rule 8.1, add the words “Subject to Rule 8.2A below”.

 

19

In Rule 8.1, delete the words “increase or.”

 

20

In Rules 8.2(a) and (c), insert the words “(but not the class)” after the word “description”.

 

21

Add the following as Rule 8.2A:

“At a time when the Plan is approved by HM Revenue & Customs under Schedule 4, no adjustment under Rule 8.2 above shall be made without the prior approval of HM Revenue & Customs.”

 

22

In Rule 9.1 delete the words “Rule 9.2” and substitute the words “Rules 9.2, 9.2A and 9.2B”.

 

23

At the end of Rule 9.1, add the words “(having regard to the fact that, if an alteration or addition which does not solely relate to a special term is made at a time when the Plan is approved by HM Revenue & Customs under Schedule 4, the alteration or addition to any Key Feature will not thereafter have effect unless and until HM Revenue & Customs have approved the alteration or addition)”.

 

24

Add the following as Rule 9.2A and 9.2B:

 

  “9.2A

No alteration or addition to the disadvantage of any Participant, other than to a special term, shall be made under Rule 9.1 above unless:

 

  (d)

the Board shall have invited every relevant Participant to give an indication as to whether or not he approves the alteration or addition, and

 

15


  (e)

the alteration or addition is approved by a majority of those Participants who have given such an indication.

 

  9.2B

No alteration or addition which solely relates to a special term subject to which an Option has been granted shall be made under Rule 9.1 above unless:

 

  (a)

there shall have occurred an event which shall have caused the Board reasonably to consider that the special term would not, without the alteration or addition, achieve its original purpose; and

 

  (b)

the Board shall act fairly and reasonably in making the alteration or addition which must be no more difficult to satisfy than the original.”

 

25

At the end of Rule 9.3, add the words “and if the Plan is then approved by HM Revenue & Customs under Schedule 4, to HM Revenue & Customs.”

 

26

Add as Rule 9.4:

“Any reference in this Rule to a special term is a reference to a term specified by the Board as mentioned in Rule 3.1 above or a term of the Schedule hereto”.

 

27

Delete Rule 10 in its entirety. 15

 

28

Delete Rule 12 16 and substitute the following Rule 12:

 

  “12.

Withholding

 

  12.1

The exercise of any Option under the Plan is subject to the condition that the exercise of the Option shall not be valid unless the Participant has, in addition to complying with the other requirements of the Plan, paid or procured the payment to the Group Member which is his employer, or otherwise provided for (in a manner satisfactory to that Group Member or, if appropriate, the trustees of any employee benefit trust) an amount equal to the taxation for which any Group Member may be liable by reason of that exercise.

 

  12.2

Without limitation to 12.1 above, the Company or any other Group Member which is a Participant’s employer or the trustees of any employee benefit trust may withhold any amount and make such arrangements as it considers necessary which comply with applicable law to meet any liability to taxation in respect of the exercise of Options under the Plan. These arrangements may include the sale of any Shares on behalf of a Participant, which the Participant is deemed to have authorised, to produce a cash sum sufficient to meet the taxation liabilities referred to in this Rule 12.

 

  12.3

The Company may, acting fairly and reasonably, waive the requirements set out in this Rule 12 in respect of any part of the Participant’s employer’s liability to taxation, including in particular, any employer’s liability to National Insurance Contributions.

 

  12.4

In this Rule, “taxation” means taxation by any state or any political subdivision of a state and includes income tax, Pay as You Earn and primary National Insurance and their equivalents in jurisdictions outside of the United Kingdom.”

 

15  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010 and approved by HM Revenue & Customs on 22 March 2011.

16  

Numbering amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010 and approved by HM Revenue & Customs on 22 March 2011.

 

16


29

Add the following after Rule 5.3:

 

  “5.4

The Board may make such fair and reasonable adjustments to the terms of the relevant condition as in its opinion it considers appropriate to take account of any Issue or Reorganisation.

 

 

  5.5

If any accounting standard used in the relevant condition is modified, replaced or substituted or if the composition of any market index used in the relevant condition changes and/or is replaced by another similar index, the Board may make such adjustments to the terms of the relevant condition as it in its opinion considers to be fair and reasonable.

 

  5.6

Any adjustments made to the relevant condition pursuant to Rules 5.4 and 5.5 shall be in accordance with and subject to Rule 9 of the Scheme and any adjusted relevant condition will in the reasonable opinion of the Board be materially no more difficult and no less difficult to satisfy than the relevant condition to which the exercise of the Option was originally subject.”

 

17


APPENDIX 2

Special Rules Applicable to Grants of Incentive Stock Options

 

1

Options granted in accordance with the Plan (either including or excluding Appendix 1 thereto) may be designated as “Incentive Stock Options” (“ISOs”) within the meaning of section 422 of the United States Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “U.S. Tax Code”).

 

2

The aggregate number of Shares (including Shares comprised in any WPP ADR) for which ISOs may be granted under Appendix 2 shall not exceed 125,665,004.

 

3

The class of persons who may receive ISOs shall, in addition to the limitations imposed by Rule 2 of the Plan, be limited to those persons who are employees of the Company or its “parent” or “subsidiary” corporations within the meaning of sections 424(f) and (g), respectively, of the U.S. Tax Code.

 

4

In addition to any other restrictions contained in the Plan, ISOs shall not be transferable otherwise than by will or the laws of descent and distribution. During the lifetime of the person to whom an ISO is granted, the ISO shall be exercisable only by such person.

 

5

To the extent that the aggregate market value of Shares (including Shares comprised in any WPP ADR) with respect to which ISOs are exercisable (determined without regard to this sentence) for the first time by a Participant during any calendar year (under all plans or schemes of the Company or its “parent” and “subsidiary” corporations within the meaning of sections 424(f) and (g), respectively, of the U.S. Tax Code) exceeds US $100,000, such Options shall to the extent of such excess be treated as Options which are not ISOs. For the purposes of the preceding sentence, the market value of any Shares (including Shares comprised in any WPP ADR) subject to an ISO shall be determined at the time such ISO is granted.

 

6

This schedule shall be deemed to be included within the Plan as adopted by shareholders for the purpose of any ISO grants.

 

18


APPENDIX 3

India

The plan will apply to Options granted to residents in India 17 with the following modifications: 18

 

1

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan, a person is eligible to be granted an option under this Appendix if (and only if) he is a full-time director or qualifying employee (as defined in Paragraph 2 of Appendix 1) of a Constituent Company (whether or not the Company itself) resident in India.

 

2

All or any of the terms of the Option may be altered to comply with requirements imposed under applicable exchange control regulations and other laws of India in relation to that Option and an Option may only be exercised if and to the extent permitted by those regulations.

 

3

Applicable regulations of the Reserve Bank of India (“RBI”) do not currently limit the amount of funds that may be transferred for the purchase of stock pursuant to the exercise of a stock option under the Plan, but such regulations are subject to change. Any cash balances received in respect of, (i) dividends must be repatriated to India within seven days of receipt, and (ii) proceeds from sale of shares acquired pursuant to the Plan must be repatriated to India within ninety days of receipt.

 

  19  

 

17  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 16 March 2010.

18  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 3 March 2009.

19  

Paragraph 4 of Appendix 3 (India) deleted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 16 March 2010.

 

19


APPENDIX 4

Belgium

The Plan will apply to Options granted to residents of Belgium with the following modifications.

 

1

In Rule 3(4), a further Rule (c) shall be added as follows:

 

  “(c)

shall be cancelled if he notifies the Company that he refuses to accept the Option or if he fails to accept the Option within 60 days of the date of the Company’s communication to him in respect of the Option.”

 

2

In Rule 6(2), delete the words:

“the third anniversary of the Grant Date”

and substitute the words

“the 1 January following the third anniversary of the Grant Date.”

 

3

In Rule 6(3), delete the words:

“within 12 months after the date of his death.”

and substitute the words

“in the later of the period of 12 months commencing with the date of his death or the period of 6 months commencing on 1 January following the third anniversary of the Grant Date.”

 

4

In Rule 6(4), delete the words:

“and in this Rule the exercise period is the period which shall expire 6 months after his so ceasing”

and substitute the words:

“and in this Rule the exercise period is the period which shall commence on the 1 January following the third anniversary of the Grant Date (the “Third Anniversary”) and expire 12 months after his so ceasing or 6 months after the Third Anniversary, whichever shall be the latest.”

 

  20   21  

 

20  

The Appendices which previously followed Appendix 4 (Switzerland and the Netherlands) have been deleted, which amendment was made by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 3 March 2009.

21  

The original Appendix 5 (Italy) was deleted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 16 March 2010

 

20


APPENDIX 5

Executive directors

 

1

Pursuant and subject to Rule 5, any Option granted to a director of the Company will be subject to the relevant condition given in this Appendix 5. 22

 

2

The relevant condition shall be:

 

2.1

the performance period shall be the period of three calendar years commencing with the start of the accounting period including the Grant Date (or with such later period as may be specified by the Board at the time of the grant of the Option) (the “Performance Period”).

 

2.2

that the percentage increase in earnings per share of the Company over the Performance Period shall have exceeded the growth in the RPI by 5% per annum (compounded annually); and

 

2.3

in the event that, at the end of the Performance Period, it is determined that the percentage increase in earnings per share of the Company over the Performance Period has not exceeded the growth in the RPI by 5% per annum (compounded annually), the Option shall immediately lapse; and

 

2.4

For the purposes of the relevant condition:

 

  (a)

Growth in Earnings Per Share shall be calculated by dividing the Earnings Per Share in respect of the third of the three consecutive financial years by the Earnings Per Share achieved in the financial year ending immediately prior to the first day of the first of those three consecutive financial years (commencing no earlier than the financial year in which the Grant Date occurs).

 

  (b)

Growth in the Retail Prices Index shall be calculated by dividing such Retail Prices Index as is published in respect of the month containing the last day of the third of the three consecutive financial years referred to in 2.4(a) above by such Retail Prices Index as was published in respect of the month containing the last day of the financial year of the Company ending immediately prior to the first day of the first of those three consecutive financial years.

 

2.5

The Board may make such fair and reasonable adjustments to the terms of the relevant condition as in its opinion it considers appropriate to take account of any Issue or Reorganisation.

 

2.6

If SSAP 3 and/or FRS 3 are modified, replaced or substituted or if the composition of the Retail Prices Index changes and/or the Retail Prices Index is replaced by another similar index, the Board may make such adjustments to the terms of the relevant condition as it in its opinion considers to be fair and reasonable.

 

2.7

Any adjustments made to the Performance Target pursuant to paragraphs 2.5 and 2.6 above shall be in accordance with and subject to Rule 9 of the Scheme and that any adjusted Performance Target will in the reasonable opinion of the Board be materially no more difficult and no less difficult to satisfy than the Performance Target to which the exercise of the Option was originally subject.

 

22  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 3 March 2009.

 

21


2.8

As soon as is reasonably practical following the end of any relevant financial year of the Company the Board shall determine whether the Performance Target has been satisfied and shall notify the Participant in writing if it has been satisfied and once satisfied the Option may, subject as otherwise provided in the Rules, be exercised at any time during the Option Period notwithstanding that for subsequent financial years the Growth in Earnings Per Share may not exceed the Growth in the Retail Prices Index.

 

2.9

Any calculations or determinations by the Board in accordance with the Performance Target shall not be open to question and shall be final and binding on all persons concerned. The Board may request the Auditors to carry out any or all of the calculations and determinations of it in connection with the Performance Target. If so, the Auditors shall act as experts and not as arbitrators and their calculations and determinations shall not be open to question and shall be final and binding on all persons concerned.

 

3

For the purposes of the relevant condition the following terms shall have the following meanings:

Earnings Per Share ” means the earnings per share (as defined in SSAP 3 paragraph 10 as amended by FRS 3) of the Company determined in accordance with such standards and as shown in the audited financial statements of the Company after making such adjustments to the earnings per share as the Board in its opinion considers appropriate in order to ensure that the measure of earnings per share for the relevant financial years is on a fair and consistent basis including, without limitation, the following adjustments to earnings per share for the relevant financial years:

 

  (a)

a proportionate upwards or downwards amendment in a case where the relevant financial year is more than or less than a calendar year; and/or

 

  (b)

ignoring all exceptional and extraordinary items as defined in paragraphs 5 and 6 of FRS 3; and/or

 

  (c)

ignoring the results of discontinued operations as defined in paragraph 4 of FRS 3.

FRS ” means Financial Reporting Standard of the Accounting Standards Board Limited.

Issue or Reorganisation ” means any capitalisation issue (other than the issue of shares pursuant to the exercise of an option given to the shareholders of the Company to receive shares in lieu of dividend) or rights offer or any other variation in the share capital of the Company including (without limitation) any consolidation, sub-division or reduction of capital of the Company.

Retail Prices Index ” means the Retail Prices All Items Index Table: Indices back to 1947 (Table RP02) as published by the Office for National Statistics or any table which replaces it.

SSAP ” means Statement of Standard Accounting Practice of the Accounting Standards Board Limited.

 

22


APPENDIX 6

Taxpayers Subject to Section 409A of the United States Internal Revenue Code

The plan will apply to participants who are taxpayers subject to Section 409A of the United States Internal Revenue Code (“Section 409A”), with the following modifications:

 

1

The options granted under the plan are intended to be exempt from the requirements of Section 409A by satisfying the requirements of the exemption set forth under Section 1.409A- 1(b)(5)(i)(A) of the United States Treasury Regulations or other applicable guidance (the “Exemption”). The plan shall be construed and interpreted in accordance with such intent. Any discretion afforded to any person or entity under the plan the existence of which itself would cause an option to fail to satisfy the requirements of the Exemption is hereby removed from the plan.

 

2

At the end of Rule 3.3(c) after the words “Grant Date”, add the words “provided that the price shall in no case be less than fair market value determined in accordance with Section 409A.”

 

3

Add the following as Rule 8.5:

“Notwithstanding the foregoing, only adjustments permitted by Section 409A shall be permitted to be made under Rule 8, including pro rata adjustments necessary to reflect a stock split, reverse stock split, and stock dividend.”

23 24

APPENDIX 7

Canada

The Plan will apply to Options granted to residents of Canada with the following modification:

Any Shares acquired by a Participant pursuant to this Plan may not be traded within Canada at any time and, by receiving such Shares, each Participant shall be taken to have agreed to observe this restriction.

APPENDIX 8

Denmark

The Plan will apply to options granted to residents of Denmark with the following modification:

Where the provisions of Rule 6.3 to 6.6 conflict with Danish law, Danish law will prevail and the terms of these Rules will be taken to be amended accordingly but only in respect of Options granted to employees in Denmark.

 

 

23

Appendices 8 to 18 inclusive were inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 3 March 2009.

24

The previous Appendix 8 (Austria) was deleted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 16 March 2010.

 

23


APPENDIX 9

Hong Kong

The Plan will apply to Options granted to residents of Hong Kong with the addition of the following rules.

 

1

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan the grant of Options under and the operation of the Plan does not constitute an offer or invitation to the public within the meaning of the Companies Ordinance or the Securities and Futures Ordinance.

 

2

Any Shares acquired by a Participant pursuant to this Plan cannot be traded within Hong Kong within 6 months of the date of exercise of the Option(s) pursuant to which such Shares are acquired and, by receiving such Shares, each Participant shall be taken to have agreed to observe this restriction.

APPENDIX 10

Ireland

The Plan will apply to Options granted to residents of the Republic of Ireland with the following modifications:

 

1

In Rule 6.7, delete “10” and substitute “7” and delete “(or such shorter period as the Board may have determined before the grant thereof)”.

 

2

Any Option that is held by a person who is a director of a company resident or incorporated in the Republic of Ireland shall be satisfied by the issue of new Shares and not the transfer of Shares.

APPENDIX 11

Japan

The Plan will apply to Options granted to residents of Japan with the addition of the following Rules:

 

1

In a case where Japanese laws and regulations would inhibit the exercise of an Option or the delivery of Shares or WPP ADRs (or the issue of a WPP receipt) following exercise of the Option, the Board may make such regulations as it thinks fit for dealing with this (whether or not consistent with the rules of the Plan), which for the avoidance of doubt may include:

 

  (a)

declining to deliver Shares or WPP ADRs (or the issue of a WPP receipt) within 30 days after an Option under the Plan has been exercised, or at all, and

 

  (b)

requiring Participants to give advance notice, of whatever length, of their intention to exercise an Option.

 

2

For the purposes of ensuring that a securities notice may be filed before the actual Grant Date, the Board may specify a date (“the Notional Grant Date”) prior to the Grant Date by reference to which the price at which WPP ADRs may be acquired on exercise of an ADR Option shall be calculated (as if that date was the Grant Date) and the Notional Grant Date shall, for all purposes of these Rules, be taken as being the Grant Date except that the Participants shall not acquire their Options until they are actually granted on the actual Grant Date.

 

24


APPENDIX 12

Korea

The Plan will apply to Options granted to residents of Korea with the addition of the following rule:

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan unless the Company determines otherwise, no person will acquire any rights under an Option unless and until the relevant report has been filed with and, if necessary approved by, an authorised foreign exchange bank.

APPENDIX 13

Malaysia

The Plan will apply to Options granted to residents of Malaysia with the addition of the following rule:

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan, no person will acquire any rights under an Option unless and until the relevant registration has been filed with, or approval has been obtained from (in each case if required) the Controller of Foreign Exchange.

APPENDIX 14

Mexico

The Plan will apply to Options granted to residents in Mexico with the addition of the following rules:

 

1

Interests under the Plan have not and will not be registered with the National Registry of Securities maintained by the National Banking and Securities Commission of Mexico and therefore may not be publicly offered in Mexico.

 

2

Any grant of Options is a private offering under Article 8 paragraph III of the Securities Law of Mexico. Any such offering is limited to employees or groups of employees of companies which issue interests under any employee stock option plan or program, or the companies which are controlled by said company, as defined under the Securities Law and applicable regulations of Mexico in effect.

APPENDIX 15

Russia

The Plan will apply to Options granted to residents in Russia with the addition of the following rule:

For the purposes of the securities laws of Russia, all transactions carried out and contracts entered into in connection with the Plan and any Shares acquired by Participants will be carried out or entered into outside Russia.

 

25


APPENDIX 16

Slovak Republic

The Plan will apply to Options granted to residents of the Slovak Republic with the following alteration:

If a Participant gives notice to a Group Member that he intends to leave employment at any time within the two month period following the giving of the notice, for any of the reasons set out in Rule 6.4(a), 6.4(b) and 6.4(c) and in respect of any reason set out in Rule 6.4(c) only if the Board shall so permit, then the Option may be exercised before he leaves employment.

APPENDIX 17 25

France

The Plan will apply to Options granted to Participants who are or may become subject to French taxation (i.e. income tax and/or social security contributions) as a result of a Grant of Options made under this Plan. Grants of Options to such Participants will be subject to the modifications set out in this Appendix and in the event of any difference or conflict between the terms of this Appendix and the Rules, the terms of this Appendix will prevail.

 

1

Options may only be granted to Eligible Persons who can be either the salaried employees, within the meaning of French labour law or directors (“ mandataires sociaux ”) as defined in Section L 225-185 of the French Commercial Code, of a French company satisfying the conditions mentioned in Section L 225-180 of the same Code.

 

2

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan, no Option may be granted to any Eligible Person who owns more than 10% of the ordinary share capital of the Company then in issue.

 

3

Options may not be granted (i) during the 10 business days preceding and following the date at which the consolidated accounts and the annual accounts of the Company have been disclosed to the public and (ii) between (x) the day on which the management bodies of the Company have received an information which, if it were disclosed to the public, could affect significantly the market quotation of the Company and (y) the day after the 10 business days following the date at which such information has been disclosed to the public.

 

4

In the case of a Share Option the price at which Shares may be acquired by the exercise of an Option shall be at least equal to 80% of the arithmetical average of the middle market quotations of a Share (as derived from the London Stock Exchange Daily Official List) on the 20 business days last preceding the date on which the Option is granted.

 

5

In the case of an ADR Option, the price at which Shares may be acquired by the exercise of an Option shall be at least equal to 80% of the fair market value of a WPP ADR as quoted on NASDAQ on the 20 business days last preceding the date on which the Option is granted.

 

6

Notwithstanding Rule 8 of the Plan, the price at which Shares may be acquired by the exercise of the Option shall be adjusted only upon the occurrence of the events specified under Section L 225-181 of the French Commercial Code.

 

7

Options may not be sold or transferred.

 

25  

Inserted by Written Resolution of Mark Linaugh on 22 November 2011 pursuant to the authority delegated to him by the Compensation Committee on 11 April 2011.

 

26


8

Notwithstanding Rule 6.3 of the Plan, on the death of a Participant at a time when the Option in question has not lapsed, the Option may not be exercised later than six months after the date of his death.

 

9

Notwithstanding Rule 6.2 of the Plan (but subject to Rules 6.3. 6.4, 7.1 and 7.3), an Option granted under the Plan may not be exercised before the day after the fourth anniversary of the Grant Date.

 

10

A Director within the meaning of Section L 225-185 §4 of the French Commercial Code shall be required to retain (either registered in his own name or deposited with a nominee on his behalf) a proportion of the Shares received as a result of exercising an Option as determined by the Compensation Committee, until he ceases his role as a Director. If no other proportion is determined when the relevant option is granted, the proportion required to be retained will be 10%.

 

11

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan, no option granted more than 76 months after the Plan was last approved by shareholders as required by Rule 9.4.1 of the Listing Rules of the UK Listing Authority may be satisfied by any means involving the issue of new Shares or the transfer of Treasury Shares.

 

27

Exhibit 4.29

 

WPP GROUP PLC

 

 

 

2004 LEADERSHIP EQUITY PLAN

 

 

Approved by the Company in General Meeting on 16 April 2004 and amended by the Compensation Committee of the board of directors of the Company on 21 May 2004, 27 October 2005, 15 December 2005, 26 October 2006, 14 December 2006,

20 February 2007, 24 October 2007, 21 October 2008 and 12 November 2012

As approved by shareholders of WPP plc on 30 September 2008 and adopted by the Board of

Directors of WPP plc on 30 September 2008

As approved by shareholders of WPP Group plc on 30 October 2008 prior to the introduction

of a new holding company by a scheme of arrangement under Part 26 of the Companies Act 2006

 

Squire Sanders (UK) LLP

7 Devonshire Square

London

EC2M 4YH

United Kingdom

DX 136546 Bishopsgate 2

Office: +44 (0)20 7655 1000

Fax: +44 (0)20 7655 1001

Reference WPP.002-1470


CONTENTS

 

1        PURPOSE

     1   

2        INTERPRETATION

     1   

3        ELIGIBILITY

     6   

4       ACQUISITION OF INVESTMENT SHARES

     7   

5       PLAN LIMITS

     8   

6       AWARDS

     9   

7       COMMITMENT OF INVESTMENT SHARES

     11   

8       PERFORMANCE CONDITIONS

     11   

9       CESSATION OF EMPLOYMENT

     12   

10     VARIATION OF CAPITAL

     13   

11     CHANGE OF CONTROL

     13   

12     DISCHARGE OF AWARDS

     15   

13     MISCELLANEOUS

     16   

14     AMENDMENT

     18   

15     DURATION

     18   

SCHEDULE 1

     19   

SCHEDULE 2

     23   

SCHEDULE 3

     27   

SCHEDULE 4

     31   

 

i


1

    PURPOSE

 

1.1

The purpose of the Plan is to incentivise those executive directors of the Company and operating company executives whose contributions transcend their day to day role.

 

2

    INTERPRETATION

 

2.1

The following words and expressions have the following meanings in the Rules of the Plan and in the Schedule:

“Act” means the Companies Act 1985 as amended.

“ADR” means an American Depository Receipt representing, for the time being, 5 ordinary shares in the capital of the Company deposited with Citibank NA as depository under the Deposit Agreement between the Company and Citibank NA dated as of 2 January 2013 1 as amended from time to time or any other American depository receipt arrangement sponsored by the Company. 2

“Annual Earnings” means an Eligible Person’s annual earnings at any time comprising his basic salary and Target Bonus for a particular year. In the event of any dispute, such annual earnings will be as determined by the Compensation Committee.

“Award” means an award or grant made to an Eligible Person subject to and on the terms of the Plan.

“Award Period” means the period of 42 days commencing on:

 

  (a)

the date of adoption of the Plan by the shareholders of Original 3 WPP;

 

  (b)

any day on which the Company releases its results for any financial period; or

 

  (c)

the date of commencement of Employment of an Eligible Person (but only in respect of that Eligible Person).

“Bad Leaver” means a Participant whose Employment terminates as a result of:

 

  (a)

the proper termination by a Group Company of his Employment (which shall include a termination which is not a proper termination by virtue of a procedural error in the termination) where that Participant:

 

  (i)

shall have committed any act or omission which entitles a Group Company to terminate his contract of employment without notice; or

 

  (ii)

shall have committed any serious breach or repeated or continued breach (after warning in writing) of his obligations under his contract of employment including, without limitation, ceasing to work full time for the Group without the prior consent of the relevant Group Company except in circumstances where the Participant retires 4 with the prior consent of the Company; or

 

1  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012

2  

Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

3  

Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

4  

Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 14 December 2006

 

1


  (iii)

shall have become prohibited by law from being a director or employee of a Group Company as a result of his own act, omission or misfeasance; or

 

  (iv)

shall have been convicted of any criminal offence which is punishable by a custodial sentence or involves dishonesty or violence; or

 

  (v)

shall have, otherwise than at the request of the relevant Group Company, resigned as a director or employee of the Group; or

 

  (b)

the voluntary leaving or giving notice voluntarily to leave Employment with the Group or voluntarily resigning as a director of any Group Company including, for the avoidance of doubt, taking 5 retirement without the prior consent of the relevant Group Company;

 

  (c)

the wrongful termination by that Participant of his contract of employment with any Group Company unless the Company has agreed in writing that such termination shall not constitute the Participant as being a Bad Leaver,

provided that a Participant shall not be a Bad Leaver if he shall have been found to have been constructively dismissed by the Group. 6

“Bonus Deferral Program” means the WPP Group plc Annual Bonus Deferral Programme adopted by the Compensation Committee on 29 November 2000.

“Change of Control Date” means the date on which a person or persons obtains Control of the Company as described in Rule 11.1(a) or 11.1(b).

“Close Family” means, in relation to a person, that person’s spouse, children and siblings and such other persons as may be agreed to be Close Family from time to time by the Compensation Committee.

“Commitment Date” means the date by which Investment Shares must be committed to the Plan to be eligible for an Award which shall be such date in the year in which an Award is made as is determined by the Compensation Committee but being a date which is not normally later than 30 June in that year, provided that the Compensation Committee may, in its discretion, decide to extend the date by which the Investment Shares must be committed to the Plan to such later date as they may determine.

Company ” means:

 

  (a)

for the period before 25 October 2005 the reference shall be to WPP 2005 Limited a private limited company incorporated in England and Wales with registered number 1003653;

 

  (b)

for the period between 25 October 2005 and 18 November 2008 the reference shall be to WPP 2008 Limited, a private limited company incorporated in England and Wales with registered number 5537577;

 

  (c)

for the period between 19 November 2008 and the Effective Date, the reference shall be to WPP plc, a public limited company incorporated in Jersey with registered number 101749, to be re-named WPP 2012 plc; and

 

 

5  

Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 14 December 2006

6  

Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 14 December 2006

 

2


  (d)

for the period from and including the Effective Date the reference shall be to WPP plc, a public limited company incorporated in Jersey with registered number 111714. 7 8 9

“Company Secretary” means the company secretary of the Company from time to time.

“Compensation Committee” means the compensation committee for the time being of the board of directors of the Company.

“Control” has the same meaning as in section 840 of the Income and Corporation Taxes Act 1988.

“Effective Date” means the date on which the Scheme becomes effective, expected to be 2 January 2013. 10 11 12

“Eligible Person” means any employee (including an executive director) of a Group Company.

“Employment” means employment as a director or employee of any Group Company.

“Encumbrance” means any mortgage, charge, assignment or assignation by way of security, guarantee, debenture, hypothecation, pledge, declaration of trust, lien, right of set-off or any other encumbrance (including any conditionality or forfeiture right) or security interest whatsoever, howsoever created or arising provided that the Compensation Committee may determine that any particular encumbrance or security interest shall not be an Encumbrance for the purposes of this definition and, for the avoidance of doubt any Shares which are committed as Investment Shares to an existing Award under the Plan will be treated as being subject to an Encumbrance for the purposes of this definition except in relation to the Award in respect of which they are committed.

“ESOP” means any of the WPP Group plc Grantor Trust, the WPP Group plc ROW ESOP, the WPP Group plc UK ESOP and any other employee benefit trust in existence at the date of adoption of the Plan or as may otherwise be nominated from time to time by the Compensation Committee to operate in conjunction with the Plan.

 

“Good Leaver” means a Participant whose termination of Employment does not constitute him as a Bad Leaver, including by reason of his ceasing to be in Employment as a result of:

 

  (a)

death;

 

  (b)

wrongful or constructive dismissal;

 

  (c)

permanent disability;

 

  (d)

serious long-term illness preventing the Participant from carrying out his duties of employment;

 

  (e)

retirement on a basis agreed with the Company; 13

provided that a Participant will cease to be treated as a Good Leaver if within six months of the date of cessation of employment he takes up an employment or engagement with another company, business or organisation which the Compensation Committee considers to be a competitor of any part of the Group.

 

7  

Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 18 August 2005

8  

Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

9  

Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012

10  

Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 18 August 2005

11  

Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

12  

Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012

13  

Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 14 December 2006

 

3


“Group ” means the Company and all of its subsidiaries (as defined in section 736 of the Act).

“Group Company” means any member of the Group.

“I&P Period” means the investment and performance period which, in relation to:

 

  (a)

an Award in respect of which the I&P Period commences in 2004, is the period ending on 31 December 2007; and

 

  (b)

any other Award, is the period ending on 31 December in the 5th year from the commencement of the I&P Period 14 .

in either case commencing on a date specified by the Compensation Committee.

“Investment Shares” means the Shares committed to the Plan by an Eligible Person to qualify for an Award in accordance with Rule 7.

“IRC” means the United States’ Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

“ITEPA” means the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003.

“Matching Shares” means Shares which are comprised in an Award.

“MSS” means Sir Martin Sorrell. 15 16 17 18 19 20

“Official List” means the Daily Official List of the UK Listing Authority.

“Original LEAP” means the Leadership Equity Acquisition Plan adopted by the Company in General Meeting on 2 September 1999 as amended from time to time and including the sub-plans set out in the appendices to that plan.

“Participant” means a person who holds an Award including, if relevant, his legal personal representatives.

“Performance Conditions” means the conditions set out in the Schedule or such other conditions as may be determined from time to time by the Compensation Committee pursuant to Rule 8.

“Plan” means the WPP Group plc 2004 Leadership Equity Acquisition Plan as from time to time amended in accordance with the provisions of the Rules.

“Relevant Event” means the date on which an Employment terminates in circumstances where the Participant is a Good Leaver.

“Relevant Proportion” means the proportion that the length of the period from the start of an I&P Period to the occurrence of the Relevant Event bears to the length of that I&P Period (calculated in days).

 

14  

Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 21 May 2004

15  

Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 18 August 2005

16  

Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

17  

Definition of “New WPP” removed by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012

18  

Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 18 August 2005

19  

Definition of “Old WPP” removed by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012

20  

Definition of “Original WPP” removed by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012

 

4


“Schedule” means the Schedule to the Rules.

“Scheme” means the scheme of arrangement set out in part 3 of the circular to share owners of WPP plc, a company registered in Jersey with company number 101749, relating to the recommended proposals for the introduction of a new parent company by means of a scheme of arrangement under Article 125 of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991 or with or subject to any modification, addition or condition approved or imposed by the Royal Court of Jersey. 21 22

“Share” means an ordinary share in the capital of the Company and includes ADRs.

“Target Bonus” means, in relation to any particular year, the target bonus which may be payable to an Eligible Person in that particular year and which has previously been notified to them in relation to that year.

“Trading Day” means a day (excluding Saturdays, Sundays and Bank Holidays) on which clearing banks are generally open for business in the City of London and in New York.

 

“Treasury Shares” means any Shares which are purchased by the Company in accordance with Article 57 of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991 and held by the Company as treasury shares pursuant to Article 58A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991. 23

“UK Listing Authority” means the United Kingdom Listing Authority, a division of the Financial Services Authority.

“Value” means the average of:

 

  (a)

in the case of an ordinary share in the capital of the Company, the middle-market quotation of a Share on the Daily Official List; and

 

  (b)

in the case of ADRs, the average of the highest and lowest price of an ADR on a Trading Day on the Nasdaq National Market System or on such other trading market as is for the time being the principal trading market for the ADR,

in either case taken over the five Trading Days before the date on which such value is to be determined.

“Vested Matching Shares” means the number of Matching Shares comprised in an Award which is determined as at the end of the I&P Period as being the number of Matching Shares which vest in accordance with paragraph 5 of the Schedule.

“Vesting Date” means the date determined by the Compensation Committee to be the date on which restrictions attaching to Vested Matching Shares are to be released or Vested Matching Shares are to be transferred or issued to a Participant, or as he may direct, or to a depository in the case of ADRs, to discharge an Award which shall, in any event, be no later than 15th March in the year following the end of the I&P Period unless the Company is prohibited from discharging the Award on that date in which case the Vesting Date will be the first available Trading Day when the Company is no longer prohibited from discharging that Award. 24

 

 

21  

Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

22  

Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012

23  

Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

24  

Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 24 October 2007

 

5


2.2

An Eligible Person or Participant will be treated as “Interested” in Shares if those Shares are held by:

 

  (a)

the Eligible Person or Participant beneficially;

 

  (b)

a member of the Eligible Person’s or Participant’s Close Family beneficially;

 

  (c)

a family trust or pension trust (not including a pension scheme of any Group Company) in which the Eligible Person or Participant is interested;

 

  (d)

a private company in which the Eligible Person or Participant or their Close Family is interested as to more than 25% of the voting power, income and capital on a winding up; or

 

  (e)

a nominee for any of the above,

and not (save with the written consent of the Compensation Committee) subject to any Encumbrance provided that any Shares which are the subject of a Basic Share Award or a Basic Share Right will be treated as Shares in which an Eligible Person or Participant is Interested but, for the avoidance of doubt, any Shares which are issued as Bonus Share Awards or pursuant to Bonus Shares Rights pursuant to the Bonus Deferral Program shall not be treated as Shares in which an Eligible Person is Interested prior to:

 

  (a)

in the case of a Bonus Share Award, any contingency attaching to such award lapsing; and

 

  (b)

in the case of a Bonus Share Right, the option to acquire Shares pursuant to the rights being validly exercised,

and, also for the avoidance of doubt any unexercised options under the WPP Executive Stock Ownership Plan adopted by the directors of the Company on 24 June 1996 shall also not be treated as Shares in which an Eligible Person or Participant is Interested.

 

2.3

The terms Basic Share Award, Basic Share Right, Bonus Share Award and Bonus Shares Right will have the same meanings as they have in the rules of the Bonus Deferral Program as amended from time to time.

 

2.4

Words importing the singular shall include the plural and vice versa and words importing the masculine shall include the feminine.

 

2.5

Any reference, express or implied, to an enactment includes references to:

 

  (a)

that enactment as amended, extended or applied by or under any other enactment; and

 

  (b)

any enactment which that enactment re-enacts (with or without modification).

 

2.6

Any reference to a Rule is a reference to one of these Rules.

 

3

ELIGIBILITY 25

 

3.1

No person is entitled, by virtue of the provisions of the Plan, to participate as of right in the Plan.

 

25  

Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 14 December 2006

 

6


3.2

The Compensation Committee may decide from time to time which Eligible Persons may participate and the extent of their participation in the Plan.

 

4

ACQUISITION OF INVESTMENT SHARES

 

4.1

In order to participate in the Plan and to be eligible to receive an Award an Eligible Person must:

 

  (a)

agree to commit Shares in which he is Interested to the Plan on or before the Commitment Date which the Compensation Committee has specified in relation to an Award; and

 

  (b)

actually commit Shares in accordance with Rule 7 in which he is Interested to the Plan on or before that Commitment Date and thereby agree to remain Interested in those Shares from that Commitment Date to the end of the I&P Period.

 

4.2

Subject to Rule 4.3 the maximum aggregate Value of Shares (being the Value determined as at the date of the letter from the Company to an Eligible Person inviting him to receive an Award) which an Eligible Person may commit as Investment Shares over all Awards made to that Eligible Person under the Plan for which the relevant I&P Period has not yet expired shall be 400 per cent. of the Eligible Person’s Annual Earnings. The Compensation Committee may decide a lower maximum Value of Shares for an Eligible Person in relation to any Award.

 

4.3

The maximum aggregate Value of Shares (determined in accordance with Rule 4.2) which MSS may commit as Investment Shares over all Awards under the Plan for which the relevant I&P Period has not yet expired shall be $18m provided that MSS may not commit Investment Shares with a Value of more than:

 

  (a)

$10m in respect of Awards for which the I&P Period commences in 2004; and

 

  (b)

$2m in respect of any year thereafter.

 

4.4

The Compensation Committee shall establish arrangements for permitting Eligible Persons whom it has invited to participate in the Plan to acquire their Investment Shares by the Commitment Date provided that any such arrangements shall be in accordance with the investment policy (if any) determined from time to time by the Compensation Committee.

 

4.5

In the case of Eligible Persons who were not granted Awards under the Original LEAP, at least one third of the Investment Shares required to be committed to the Plan to enable the first Award to be granted pursuant to the Plan to that Eligible Person must, unless the Compensation Committee determines otherwise, be Shares which the Eligible Person has not received or purchased pursuant to any incentive arrangement of a Group Company (except pursuant to the exercise of a share option in respect of which the exercise price payable to acquire the shares was not less than the market value of those shares at the date of grant of the option) or which have not been purchased in the market for cash by means of a matched sale and purchase (bed and breakfasting).

 

4.6

If, by the Commitment Date, a Participant has failed to commit the number of Investment Shares which it has been determined he should commit in relation to an Award, then, except in such exceptional circumstances as the Compensation Committee may from time to time determine, that Award will lapse.

 

7


5

PLAN LIMITS

 

5.1

In relation to Awards granted prior to 31 December 2006 (but disregarding any awards or grants which have lapsed):

 

  (a)

on average over the 10 year period, ending on the date on which an Award is to be granted under the Plan, the number of Shares which are required to be issued to satisfy:

 

  (i)

Awards granted under the Plan (including the Award which is about to be granted); and

 

  (ii)

options or awards granted or made under any other employees’ share scheme of the Company 26 during that 10 year period

will not exceed 10% of the issued ordinary share capital of the Company from time to time; and

 

  (b)

the number of Shares in respect of which Awards may be granted under the Plan on any day which are to be satisfied by the issue of Shares when added to the aggregate of:

 

  (i)

the number of Shares which immediately prior to that day have been or are to be issued to satisfy outstanding Awards under the Plan; and

 

  (ii)

the number of Shares which immediately prior to that day have been or are to be issued to satisfy options or awards granted or made under any other employees’ share scheme of the Company 27 in the ten years immediately before that day

 

  shall

not exceed 13% of the issued ordinary share capital of the Company for the time being.

 

5.2

In relation Awards granted after 31 December 2006 the number of Shares in respect of which Awards may be granted under the Plan on any day which are to be satisfied by the issue of Shares when added to the aggregate of:

 

  (a)

the number of Shares which immediately prior to that day have been or are to be issued to satisfy outstanding Awards under the Plan; and

 

  (b)

the number of Shares which immediately prior to that day have been or are to be issued to satisfy options or awards granted or made under any other employees’ share scheme of the Company 28 in the ten years immediately before that day

shall not exceed 10% of the issued ordinary share capital of the Company for the time being. 29

 

26  

Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

27  

Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

28  

Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

29  

Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 26 October 2006

 

8


6

    AWARDS

 

6.1

The Compensation Committee may decide, from time to time, that the grant of an Award may be subject to the satisfaction of such conditions as it determines and as it shall notify to an Eligible Person at the time that he is invited to participate.

 

6.2

By agreeing to participate in the Plan (having been invited to do so) and by agreeing to commit Investment Shares by the Commitment Date in accordance with Rule 4, an Eligible Person shall be entitled to receive an Award granted by the Compensation Committee. Awards will normally be made during an Award Period, but exceptionally may be made at other times.

 

6.3

An Award shall relate to such number of Matching Shares as the Compensation Committee may determine not exceeding five Matching Shares (four in the case of Awards for which the I&P Period commences in 2004) per Participant for every one Investment Share committed by the Participant in question. Subject to Rule 12.7, the number of Matching Shares which become Vested Matching Shares shall be determined at the end of the I&P Period and will depend on the extent to which the Performance Conditions or other conditions as referred to in Rule 8 are satisfied.

 

6.4

The Compensation Committee shall determine the form in which the Award is made and its full terms. In particular, the Award may take the form of any one or more of the following, provided that the terms of the Award are consistent with the Plan:

 

  (a)

an award of Matching Shares, subject to restrictions, or a promise of Matching Shares;

 

  (b)

an option to acquire the Matching Shares exercisable for a nil or a nominal consideration; or

 

  (c)

such other form which the Compensation Committee considers has a substantially similar economic purpose or effect,

and the Compensation Committee may determine that an Award may be satisfied by a Group Company or the trustees of an ESOP (with the agreement of such Group Company or trustees, as appropriate) or otherwise as it considers appropriate.

 

6.5

A Participant shall become entitled to acquire, receive or retain (depending on the form of the Award) the number of Vested Matching Shares comprised in an Award in accordance with the form of the Award under Rule 6.4 on the Vesting Date, only if both the following conditions are met:

 

  (a)

unless the Compensation Committee determines otherwise:

 

  (i)

the Participant remains Interested in all of the relevant Investment Shares until the end of the I&P Period; and

 

  (ii)

if a Participant ceases to be in Employment prior to the Vesting Date and is a Good Leaver, the Participant remains Interested in all of the relevant Investment Shares until the Vesting Date; and

 

  (b)

subject to Rules 9 and 11, if the Participant continues in Employment throughout the I&P Period until the Vesting Date.

 

6.6

The Participant shall cease to have any rights in respect of the number of Matching Shares comprised in an Award which are not Vested Matching Shares with effect from the end of the

 

9


 

I&P Period, and shall cease to have any rights in respect of all the Matching Shares comprised in an Award which shall lapse with effect from the earliest of:

 

  (a)

subject to Rules 9 and 11, the cessation of Employment;

 

  (b)

unless the Compensation Committee determines otherwise, his failure to remain Interested in accordance with Rule 6.5 in all of the Investment Shares that relate to that Award;

 

  (c)

subject to Rule 6.7, the date on which a Participant transfers, assigns, uses as security or otherwise charges an Award or turns an Award to account, or attempts or purports to do any of the same;

 

  (d)

the date on which an Award lapses under Rule 6.8; and

 

  (e)

the date on which Rule 13.15 applies.

 

6.7

An Award is personal to a Participant and cannot be transferred, assigned, used as security or otherwise charged or turned to account except that the Award may be transferred if, immediately after the transfer, the Participant would be Interested in the Award within the meaning of Rule 2.2 if when applying the provisions of Rule 2.2 the word Shares in that Rule were replaced by the word Award (and making such further changes to the wording of Rule 2.2 as are required to give effect to this Rule) but only for so long as the Participant remains so Interested.

 

6.8

An Award shall lapse if the Participant commits an act of bankruptcy or enters into any arrangement with his creditors under any formal insolvency procedure.

 

6.9

The receipt of an Award shall not confer on the Participant (unless otherwise provided in the terms of the Award) any right to the allotment of a specified number of Shares by the Company or to the transfer of a specified number of Shares from any particular transferor. The discharge of the Award shall be in accordance with Rule 12.

 

6.10

If an Award is made in a form that does not confer on the Participant the right to receive dividends on the relevant Vested Matching Shares from the date the Award is made, the Compensation Committee may provide that the Participant shall, subject to Rule 6.11, be entitled to receive at the time of the discharge of the Award to which the entitlement relates an issue or transfer of, or a release of restrictions in respect of, that number of Shares which could have been purchased if:

 

  (a)

the dividends which would have been paid on such Vested Matching Shares (had the form of the Award conferred the right to receive dividends) been reinvested in Shares on the date each dividend is paid after the date that the Award is made and during the I&P Period; and

 

  (b)

the dividends which would have been paid on Shares which would have been held pursuant to that reinvestment in Shares had those dividends been further reinvested in Shares, again on the date each dividend is paid during the I&P Period. 30

 

6.11

If a Participant is a Bad Leaver any right to receive additional Shares under 6.10 shall, unless the Compensation Committee determines otherwise, lapse on the date of termination of Employment.

 

30   Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 24 October 2007

 

10


6.12

For the avoidance of doubt a Participant shall not be entitled to any voting rights in respect of Shares to be issued or transferred or released from restrictions pursuant to Rule 6.10 until those Shares are actually issued or transferred or released from those restrictions to the Participant.

 

6.13

If the Company and the Participant agree that an election under Section 431 ITEPA should be made, the Company and the Participant will both sign such an election and do all such other things as are necessary to give effect to such an election.

 

7

    COMMITMENT OF INVESTMENT SHARES

 

7.1

Any Shares in which an Eligible Person is or becomes Interested for the purposes of Rule 4 shall be committed to the Plan and held under arrangements approved by the Compensation Committee so as to constitute the Investment Shares of the Participant for a particular Award.

 

7.2

The Compensation Committee shall be entitled to rely on a declaration in a form satisfactory to it that an Eligible Person or Participant is or continues to be (respectively) Interested in the Investment Shares.

 

7.3

A Participant shall forthwith notify the Company Secretary if he ceases to be Interested in the Investment Shares or any of them.

 

7.4

The commitment of Shares to the Plan as Investment Shares shall not of itself affect any right of the Eligible Person to dividends or other rights attaching to those Shares.

 

7.5

Shares shall cease to be Investment Shares at the end of the I&P Period or on the Vesting Date if Rule 6.5(a)(ii) applies or, if earlier, when the corresponding Award lapses under Rule 6.6.

 

8

    PERFORMANCE CONDITIONS

 

8.1

Subject to Rule 8.4, the number of Matching Shares comprised in an Award which become Vested Matching Shares shall be determined as soon as practicable following the end of the I&P Period and will depend on the extent to which such Performance Conditions or other conditions as the Compensation Committee shall, from time to time determine on the making of an Award, are satisfied.

 

8.2

In the absence of a determination by the Compensation Committee to the contrary under Rule 8.1 above, the Performance Conditions set out in the Schedule 1 will apply to Awards granted in respect of the year 2004, the Performance Conditions in Schedule 2 will apply to Awards granted in respect of the year 2005 and the Performance Conditions in Schedule 3 will apply to other Awards granted 31 under the Plan.

 

8.3

If the Compensation Committee determines that exceptional circumstances have occurred or have prevailed at any time during the I&P Period applicable to an Award, the Compensation Committee shall have the power to determine that the number of Matching Shares which may become Vested Matching Shares at the end of an I&P Period, in respect of all Awards having the same I&P Period, shall be varied by such number as the Compensation Committee considers appropriate.

 

31   Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 26 October 2006

 

11


8.4

If a Participant ceases to be in Employment by reason of his death or serious long term illness preventing the Participant from carrying out his duties of employment, and unless the Compensation Committee determines otherwise, in respect of that Participant’s Award, the I&P Period will be treated as ending on the date of the Participant’s death or cessation of employment (or such other date as the Compensation Committee may determine). 32

 

9

    CESSATION OF EMPLOYMENT

 

9.1

Subject to Rules 9.2 and 9.3, if a Participant ceases to be in Employment prior to the Vesting Date of an Award, that Award shall lapse except to the extent that the Compensation Committee determines otherwise.

 

9.2

If a Participant ceases to be in Employment in the first year of an I&P Period and is a Good Leaver the Award applicable to that I&P Period shall lapse except to the extent that the Compensation Committee determines otherwise.

 

9.3

Subject to Rule 9.2, if a Participant ceases to be in Employment prior to the Vesting Date and is a Good Leaver, Rule 6 shall apply as if:

 

  (a)

the number of Matching Shares which the Participant could become entitled to acquire at the end of the I&P Period, depending on the extent to which the Performance Conditions are satisfied at the end of the I&P Period under Rule 8; and

 

  (b)

the number of Shares which the Participant could become entitled to pursuant to Rule 6.10

were reduced to the Relevant Proportion of the number of Matching Shares and Shares respectively to which the Participant would have been entitled if his Employment had not terminated.

 

9.4

In consequence of Rule 9.3:

 

  (a)

Rule 6.5(b) shall cease to apply; and

 

  (b)

the Participant shall become entitled to acquire, receive or retain (depending on the form of the Award) on the date determined pursuant to Rule 12:

 

  (i)

a number of Matching Shares; and

 

  (ii)

the Shares issued, transferred or retained pursuant to Rule 6.10,

(reduced in either case to the Relevant Proportion in accordance with Rule 9.3), and dependent, in both cases, on the extent to which the Performance Conditions are satisfied.

 

9.5

Subject to any relevant legal or regulatory requirements prevailing in any relevant jurisdiction, for the purposes of this Rule a woman who ceases to be in Employment due to pregnancy or confinement will be regarded as having ceased Employment on the date on which she indicates that she does not intend to return to work. In the absence of such indication and if she has not already returned to work she will be regarded as having ceased Employment on the last day on which she is entitled to return to work. A woman who exercises her statutory right or any equivalent contractual right to return to work following pregnancy or confinement shall not be treated as having ceased to be in Employment.

 

32   Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 15 December 2005

 

12


10

    VARIATION OF CAPITAL

 

10.1

In the event of any increase or variation in the capital of the Company arising out of or in connection with a capitalisation issue, an offer to the holders of Shares, a rights issue, a subdivision, consolidation or reduction of capital, special dividend, demerger, or other variation of capital, the terms of outstanding Awards and the terms on which Investment Shares have been contributed to the Plan may be adjusted in such manner and on such terms as the Compensation Committee considers appropriate. An adjustment shall not have effect unless the auditors or other advisers appointed by the Compensation Committee acting as experts and not arbitrators confirm that in their opinion the adjustment is fair and reasonable and such confirmation shall be final and binding.

 

10.2

Participants shall be notified of any adjustment made under this Rule.

 

11

    CHANGE OF CONTROL

 

11.1

Subject to Rule 11.4:

 

  (a)

if any person (and/or persons acting in concert) obtains Control of the Company as a result or in consequence of making a general offer to acquire the whole of the issued share capital of the Company which is made subject to a condition such that if satisfied the person making the offer will have Control of the Company, or

 

  (b)

if any person (and/or persons acting in concert) obtains Control of the Company other than as a result of or in consequence of making such general offer but the offeror is bound by Rule 9 of the City Code on Takeovers and Mergers to make a general offer for the minority,

then:

 

  (i)

in relation to all outstanding Awards the I&P Period shall be deemed to end on the Change of Control Date;

 

  (ii)

the number of Vested Matching Shares which a Participant may become entitled to acquire shall be determined as at the Change of Control Date dependent on the extent to which the Performance Conditions are satisfied at that date, having regard to Rule 11.2 below; and

 

  (iii)

on the Change of Control Date the Participant shall cease to have any rights in respect of outstanding Awards except in relation to the Vested Matching Shares under Rule 11.1(b)(ii)

provided that if the value (as determined pursuant to Section 280G of IRC) of the Vested Matching Shares which a Participant may become entitled to acquire upon a person or persons obtaining Control of the Company when aggregated with any other amounts which the Participant becomes entitled to receive or acquire upon that person or persons obtaining Control and which in either case must be aggregated for the purposes of calculating the imposition of any excise tax pursuant to Section 4999 of IRC is equal to or exceeds by 20% or less three times the “base amount” (as defined in Section 280G(b)(3) of IRC) for that Participant the number of Vested Matching Shares will be reduced, but only if the Participant would be better off by such reduction after taking into account all arrangements between the Participant and the Company, by such number as shall be necessary to avoid the imposition of the excise tax imposed by Section 4999 of IRC on the amounts which the Participant is entitled to acquire or receives upon that person or persons obtaining Control of the Company.

 

13


11.2

For the purpose of Rule 11.1 in determining the Company’s TSR the End Period (as defined in the Schedule) shall be deemed to be a period ending on the Change of Control Date.

 

11.3

If:

 

  (a)

under Part 18A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991 the Court sanctions a compromise or arrangement for the purposes of or in connection with a scheme for the reconstruction of the Company or its amalgamation with any other company or companies; or

 

  (b)

a resolution is passed for the winding up of the Company for the purposes of or in connection with a reconstruction or division of the Company or its business,

the terms of outstanding Awards and the terms on which Investment Shares have been contributed to the Plan will be varied in such manner as the Compensation Committee considers appropriate. A variation shall not have effect unless the auditors or other advisers appointed by the Compensation Committee acting as experts and not as arbitrators confirm that in their opinion the variation is fair and reasonable and such confirmation shall be final and binding. 33

 

11.4

If any company (the “Acquiring Company”) obtains Control of the Company in accordance with Rule 11.1 and:

 

  (a)

the Acquiring Company also obtains Control of another company (the “Target Company”) within such period as the Compensation Committee may determine and, as a consequence of obtaining such Control, the Company and the Target Company become subsidiaries of the Acquiring Company; and

 

  (b)

the shareholders of the Company and the Target Company before the Acquiring Company obtained Control of the Company and the Target Company are the same persons who substantially comprise the shareholders of the Acquiring Company after the Acquiring Company obtained such Control,

then in relation any outstanding Awards the Compensation Committee may determine that the I&P Period shall not be deemed to end on the Change of Control Date under Rule 11.1(i) and it may determine (with the agreement of the Acquiring Company) that a Participant is required to release any outstanding Awards in consideration of the grant to the Participant by the Acquiring Company of an equivalent award.

 

11.5

For the purpose of Rule 11.4 an award granted pursuant to Rule 11.4 is an equivalent award to an Award if, but only if:

 

  (a)

the shares to which it relates are in the Acquiring Company, and it is subject to the provisions of the Plan in the same manner as the Award immediately prior to its release;

 

  (b)

the shares to which it relates are of an equivalent value to the value of the Shares which were subject to the Award immediately prior to the release, and for this purpose the Compensation Committee shall determine such equivalent value provided that the release of an Award and the grant of an equivalent award under Rule 11.4 shall not have effect unless the auditors or other advisers appointed by the Compensation Committee acting as experts and not arbitrators confirm that in their opinion the equivalent value is fair and reasonable and such confirmation shall be final and binding; and

 

33   Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

 

14


  (c)

such award is subject to the Performance Conditions or such other performance conditions that the Compensation Committee determines are substantially no more and no less onerous than the Performance Conditions.

 

11.6

With effect from the release of an Award and the grant of an equivalent award pursuant to Rule 11.4 the Plan will be construed as if:

 

  (a)

the equivalent award had been granted at the same time as the Award it replaces;

 

  (b)

references to the Company in the Rules were references to the Acquiring Company; and

 

  (c)

references to Shares were references to shares in the Acquiring Company

and the Compensation Committee may make such amendments as may be necessary to give effect to Rule 11.4.

 

12

    DISCHARGE OF AWARDS

 

12.1

The manner in which an Award is discharged on the Vesting Date will depend on the form of the Award determined by the Compensation Committee under Rule 6.4.

 

12.2

Awards will be discharged by the transfer or issue of or the release of restrictions relating to the number of Vested Matching Shares to the Participant (or as he may direct, or to a depository in the case of ADRs) normally from an ESOP or from Treasury Shares held by the Company.

 

12.3

Following the end of the last financial year of the I&P Period, the Compensation Committee will determine the extent to which the Performance Conditions have been satisfied such determination to be made at least one week before the Vesting Date.

 

12.4

Subject to Rule 12.7, once the Compensation Committee has determined the extent to which the Performance Conditions have been satisfied in relation to an Award and, subject to the Participant being in Employment on the Vesting Date (or if the Participant has been a Good Leaver and the provisions of Rule 9.3 apply or if the Compensation Committee has otherwise exercised its discretion under Rule 9), the Compensation Committee will procure that the Award is discharged on the Vesting Date in accordance with Rule 12.2.

 

12.5

Any transfer or issue of or release of restrictions relating to Vested Matching Shares to a Participant (or as he may direct or to a depository in the case of ADRs) is subject to the Compensation Committee being satisfied that the transfer, issue or release would be lawful in any relevant jurisdiction.

 

12.6

The transfer or issue of, or release of restrictions relating to, Shares under the Plan is subject to obtaining any approval or consent required under the Listing Rules published by the United Kingdom Listing Authority, the Rules of the London Stock Exchange, the Admission and Disclosure Standards of the London Stock Exchange, and otherwise complying with the provision of City Code on Take-overs and Mergers and any other applicable regulations or enactment (whether in the United Kingdom or overseas). The Participant shall do all things necessary to obtain, or obviate the need for, such approval or consent.

 

15


12.7

If a Participant ceases to be in Employment by reason of his death or serious long term illness preventing the Participation from carrying out his duties of employment, and unless the Compensation Committee exercises its discretion under Rule 8.4:

 

  (a)

the Participant’s Award shall be discharged in favour of his personal representatives prior to the Vesting Date (in the case of a Participant’s death);

 

  (b)

the date upon which such discharge should occur within 6 months of the Participant ceasing to be in Employment 34 ; and

 

  (c)

the number of Matching Shares to be treated as Vested Matching Shares at the date the I&P Period shall be treated as ending under Rule 8.4 based upon the extent to which the Performance Conditions would have been satisfied as at the date of death or termination of employment by reason of serious illness. 35

 

13

    MISCELLANEOUS

 

13.1

The Plan shall be administered by the Compensation Committee whose decision on any matter concerning the Plan shall be final and binding unless it is a matter in respect of which the Rules provide that the decision of the auditors or any other adviser is final and binding.

 

13.2

The Compensation Committee or any committee or agent that they may from time to time delegate authority to, shall approve all documents required in connection with Awards.

 

13.3

The Compensation Committee may establish arrangements under which the cash value of an Award may be paid to an Eligible Person in lieu of the discharge of the Award under Rule 12.

 

13.4

The cost of establishing and operating the Plan (including but not limited to stamp duty and stamp duty reserve tax, if any, arising on a transfer of Shares pursuant to Rule 12) shall be borne by the Company but may be recharged to the relevant Group Companies on such arm’s length basis as is considered appropriate from time to time. 36

 

13.5

Any notice given under the Plan is to be in writing and signed by or on behalf of the party giving it. The notice may be served by hand or by sending it by pre-paid post to:

 

  (a)

in the case of the Company, its registered office from time to time marked for the attention of the Company Secretary; and

 

  (b)

in the case of a Participant, the address which he shall have given to the Company for the purpose or which shall be known to the Company to be his address from time to time.

 

13.6

Any notice served shall be deemed to have been received:

 

  (a)

at the time of delivery if delivery is by hand; or

 

  (b)

in the case of pre-paid post, on the fifth Trading Day after the date of posting.

 

13.7

Evidence that the notice was properly addressed, stamped and put in the post shall be conclusive evidence of posting.

 

34   Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 15 December 2005
35   Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 15 December 2005
36   Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

 

16


13.8

Participation in the Plan is a matter separate from any contract of employment or other agreement and any benefit conferred by the Plan shall not be counted for pension or any other purpose.

 

13.9

The rights and obligations of any individual under the terms of his office or employment with any Group Company will not be affected by his participation in the Plan and the Plan does not form part of any contract of employment between any individual and any Group Company.

 

13.10

A Participant shall have no entitlement by way of compensation or damages resulting from the termination of the office or employment (for any reason and whether lawful or not) by virtue of which he is or may be eligible to participate in the Plan or for the loss or reduction of any right or benefit or prospective right or benefit under the Plan which he might otherwise have enjoyed whether the compensation is claimed for wrongful dismissal or otherwise.

 

13.11

The Plan is intended to operate on a worldwide basis and, accordingly, the Compensation Committee may adopt any rate of exchange for converting any currency into any other currency as it decides at any time and from time to time for any purpose in connection with the Plan.

 

13.12

No obligation to transfer, issue or release any restrictions or procure the transfer or release of any restrictions of Shares shall arise, nor shall there be any obligation to do any other thing in relation to a Participant under or in connection with the Plan or the making or vesting of any Award unless and until the Compensation Committee is satisfied in its discretion that either:

 

  (a)

the Participant has made payment or has made arrangements (which may include where specified at the date of grant of an Award by the Compensation Committee, validly electing for the Participant to be liable directly for any employer’s National Insurance contributions) satisfactory to the Compensation Committee for the payment to the relevant Group Company or other person of such sum as is, in the sole discretion of the Compensation Committee, sufficient to settle any liability for any tax and/or, unless the Compensation Committee otherwise determines, social security contributions (which, within the UK shall include employees’ National Insurance contributions, and where determined by the Compensation Committee at the time of the grant of the Award, employer’s National Insurance contributions) or the like (in any jurisdiction) which are or may be recovered from such person in connection with the Plan or any Award and in respect of which the relevant Group Company or other person is or may be liable to account for or pay in any jurisdiction; or

 

  (b)

the Participant has entered into an agreement satisfactory to the Compensation Committee to ensure that such a payment will be made by the Participant.

 

13.13

Receipt of an Award shall authorise the Company or any person nominated by the Company at its sole discretion to sell such number of Vested Matching Shares as it may estimate as being necessary to produce a cash sum sufficient to meet the liabilities referred to in Rule 13.12 and account to the relevant Group Company or other person and/or the relevant authorities in respect of such tax and/or social security liabilities (in any jurisdiction) at the appropriate time.

 

13.14

If a Participant owes a debt or other monetary obligation to a Group Company, the relevant Group Company has a charge over the Participant’s interest in the Plan (but not over his Investment Shares). Satisfaction of an Award may be withheld until the Participant has discharged, to the satisfaction of the Compensation Committee, the debt or other monetary obligation.

 

17


13.15

If a Participant who has ceased to be in Employment breaches any contractual obligation owed to any Group Company relating to restrictions on that Participant following the termination of his Employment the Participant’s Award shall be forfeited.

 

13.16

The Plan and any Award shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of England and Wales and the Company and the Participants (together with any Eligible Persons who do not become Participants) shall submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the Courts of England and Wales.

 

14

    AMENDMENT

 

14.1

Subject to Rules 14.2 and 14.4, the Compensation Committee may at any time alter or add to all or any provisions of the Plan, or the terms of all or any Awards made under it, in any respect.

 

14.2

No alteration or addition to the advantage of Eligible Persons or Participants shall be made under Rule 14.1 without the prior approval of the Company in general meeting, other than a minor amendment to benefit the administration of the Plan, to take account of a change in legislation or to obtain or maintain favourable tax, exchange control or regulatory treatment for Eligible Persons, Participants or Group Companies.

 

14.3

The Compensation Committee may make such amendments and modifications to all or any provisions of the Plan as are necessary or required in order to take account of laws and regulations in any jurisdiction which enable non-UK resident Eligible Persons to participant in the Plan including the establishment of separate plans in any such jurisdictions which replicate in all substantial respects the provisions of the Plan.

 

14.4

No alteration or addition shall be made to the terms of any Award made prior to the date of the alteration or addition which would adversely affect a Participant’s interest in that Award in any material respect without the consent of the relevant Participant.

 

15

    DURATION

No Award may be granted under the Plan after the fifth anniversary of the approval of the Plan in General Meeting without the prior approval of the Company in general meeting.

 

18


SCHEDULE 1

1

    DEFINITIONS

 

1.1

The following words and expressions have the following meanings in this Schedule.

“Comparator Group” means the group of companies which the Compensation Committee shall from time to time, determine should be the Comparator Group (which shall be set out in the documentation granting the Award) and which shall be, at the date of adoption of the Plan the companies listed below (the ticker numbers for the following companies are those used on the companies’ respective domestic exchanges):

Aegis Group plc (GB:965756), Arbitron Inc (US:ARB), Dentsu Inc (US:DTSUF), Digitas LLC (US:DTAS), GfK AG (DE:587530), Grey Global Group Inc (GREY), Havas SA (FR:12188), Interpublic Group of Companies Inc (US:IPG), Ipsos SA (FR:7329), Omnicom Group Inc (US:OMC), Publicis Groupe SA (FR:13057), Taylor Nelson Sofres PLC (GB:191539) and VNU nv (NL:VNUA).

“Comparator Group Company” means a company in the Comparator Group.

“End Period” means a period of 6 months, ending on the last day of the I&P Period.

“Matching Factor” means the factor determined pursuant to paragraph 4 of this Schedule which is to be multiplied by the number of Investment Shares committed to the Plan in respect of an Award which shall determine the extent to which Matching Shares become Vested Matching Shares in relation to that Award under the terms of the Plan which, for the avoidance of doubt, will not be greater than 4 in respect of Awards in respect of which the I&P Period commences in 2004 and 5 in respect of Awards made in respect of other years and will not, in any circumstances, be less than 0.

“Start Period” means a period of 6 months, ending on the day before the start of the relevant I&P Period.

“TSR” means the total return to the holders of ordinary shares or units of common stock in the capital of the Company or Comparator Group Company (as appropriate) based on:

 

  (a)

share price appreciation; and

 

  (b)

the assumed reinvestment of dividends,

calculated in accordance with paragraph 3 of this Schedule below.

 

2

    PERFORMANCE CONDITIONS

 

2.1

Subject to the Compensation Committee determining otherwise (pursuant to Rule 8.1) the Performance Condition that will apply to Awards under the Plan will be the TSR Condition.

 

2.2

The TSR Condition is the extent to which the TSR of the Company over the I&P Period compares to the TSR of the respective Comparator Group Companies over the same period determined in accordance with paragraph 4 below.

 

37  

Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 24 October 2007

 

19


2.3

The TSR for each Company, and Comparator Group Company over the I&P Period shall be calculated as follows:

TSR = (End Value / Start Value) - 1

Where:

 

End Value =    the average daily closing price of an ordinary share or unit of common stock in the capital of the Company or Comparator Group Company (as ascertained from the Official List or other relevant exchange on which that share or unit of common stock is quoted and as determined from time to time by the Compensation Committee) during the End Period, multiplied by the End Shareholding
End Shareholding =    the Start Shareholding increased by that number of notional shares that could be acquired using dividends paid during the course of the I&P Period. For this purpose, dividends are assumed to be paid without any deduction or withholding in respect of tax on the Start Shareholding and the notional shares acquired from previous dividend payments during the I&P Period and on the basis that dividends are assumed to be reinvested in full in notional shares at the closing price of a Share on the ex-dividend date relative to each such dividend. For the avoidance of doubt, the number of notional shares may include fractions of one share.
Start Shareholding =    1,000 shares. 38

 

2.4

Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph 0, the Compensation Committee may determine that the TSR of the Company and/or any Comparator Group Company shall be performed using appropriate alternative data sources (including, but not limited to “total-return” data supplied by Bloomberg or Datastream). In this case, references to End Value and Start Value shall be construed accordingly.

 

3

    CALCULATION OF THE MATCHING FACTOR

 

3.1

At the end of the I&P Period the TSR for the Company and each Comparator Group Company shall be determined in accordance with paragraph 3 of this Schedule.

 

3.2

The Comparator Group Companies will then be ranked according to the TSR of each of them with the Comparator Group Company with the highest TSR ranking first.

 

3.3

If the TSR of the Company is equal to or better than the Comparator Group Company ranked second pursuant to paragraph 4.2, the Matching Factor shall be four in respect of Awards for which the I&P Period commences in 2004 and five in respect of other Awards.

 

3.4

If the TSR of the Company is less than the TSR of the median Comparator Group Company the Matching Factor shall be zero.

 

38  

Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 27 October 2005

 

20


3.5

If the TSR of the Company is equal to the TSR of the median Comparator Group Company the Matching Factor shall be 1.2 in respect of Awards for which the I&P Period commences in 2004 and 1.5 in respect of other Awards.

 

3.6

If the TSR of the Company is equal to the TSR of any Comparator Group Company ranked between the median Comparator Group Company and the Comparator Group Company ranked second, the Matching Factor shall be determined by the following table (depending on whether the Awards are granted in respect of which the I&P Period commences in 2004 or otherwise):

 

     No. of Matching Shares for each Investment Share  

WPP Rank within

Comparator Group

   Reduced four year I&P
Period (F)
     Five year I&P Period  

1 st

     4         5   

2 nd

     4         5   

3 rd

     3.6         4.5   

4 th

     2.8         3.5   

5 th

     2         2.5   

6 th

     1.6         2.0   

7 th

     1.2         1.5   

Lower than 7 th

     Nil         Nil   

Provided that if the Comparator Group Companies relevant to any particular Award are determined by the Compensation Committee to be different to those set in the definition of that term, the Compensation Committee may amend this table or any part of it as it considers appropriate but on the basis that no such amendment shall materially

 

Matching Factor

    =        {     

(F(a) – F(b))x(TSR(wpp) – TSR(b))

    }        +        F(b)   
      TSR(a) – TSR(b)      

advantage any Participants in respect of any existing Awards without the prior approval of the Company in general meeting.

 

3.7

If the TSR of the Company is not equal to the TSR of a Comparator Group Company but is above the TSR of the median ranked Comparator Group Company and below the TSR of the second ranked Comparator Group Company the Matching Factor will be determined by the following formula 39 :

 

Matching Factor

    =        {     

(F(a) – F(b))x(TSR(wpp) – TSR(b))

    }        +        F(b)   
      TSR(a) – TSR(b)      

 

39  

Formula amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 20 February 2007

 

21


Where:

 

a =   

refers to the Comparator Group Company that has the lowest recorded TSR result that is also greater than the TSR of the Company.

b =   

refers to the Comparator Group Company that has the highest recorded TSR result that is also less than the TSR of the Company.

TSR(a) =    the TSR result relating to company a.
TSR(b) =    the TSR result relating to company b.
F(a) =    the Factor given by this Schedule at 4.6 relating to company a.
F(b) =    the Factor given by this Schedule at 4.6 relating to company b.
TSR(wpp) =    the TSR of the Company.

 

4

    APPLICATION OF THE MATCHING FACTOR

The Matching Factor determined pursuant to paragraph 4 of this Schedule will be multiplied by the number of Investment Shares relevant to an Award and the result of that calculation shall be the number of Vested Matching Shares in respect of that Award.

 

22


SCHEDULE 2

 

 

1

    DEFINITIONS

 

1.1

The following words and expressions have the following meanings in this Schedule.

“Comparator Group” means the group of companies which the Compensation Committee shall from time to time, determine should be the Comparator Group (which shall be set out in the documentation granting the Award) and which shall be, at the date of adoption of the Plan the companies listed below (the ticker numbers for the following companies are those used on the companies’ respective domestic exchanges):

Aegis Group plc (GB:965756), Arbitron Inc (US:ARB), Dentsu Inc (US:DTSUF), GfK AG (DE:587530), Havas SA (FR:12188), Interpublic Group of Companies Inc (US:IPG), Ipsos SA (FR:7329), Omnicom Group Inc (US:OMC), Publicis Groupe SA (FR:13057), Taylor Nelson Sofres PLC (GB:191539) and VNU nv (NL:VNUA).

“Comparator Group Company” means a company in the Comparator Group.

“End Period” means a period of 6 months, ending on the last day of the I&P Period.

“Matching Factor” means the factor determined pursuant to paragraph 4 of this Schedule which is to be multiplied by the number of Investment Shares committed to the Plan in respect of an Award which shall determine the extent to which Matching Shares become Vested Matching Shares in relation to that Award under the terms of the Plan which, for the avoidance of doubt, will not be greater than 5 and will not be less than 0.

“Start Period” means a period of 6 months, ending on the day before the start of the relevant I&P Period.

“TSR” means the total return to the holders of ordinary shares or units of common stock in the capital of the Company or Comparator Group Company (as appropriate) based on:

 

  (a)

share price appreciation; and

 

  (b)

the assumed reinvestment of dividends,

calculated in accordance with paragraph 3 of this Schedule below.

 

2

    PERFORMANCE CONDITIONS

 

2.1

Subject to the Compensation Committee determining otherwise (pursuant to Rule 8.1) the Performance Condition that will apply to Awards under the Plan will be the TSR Condition.

 

2.2

The TSR Condition is the extent to which the TSR of the Company over the I&P Period compares to the TSR of the respective Comparator Group Companies over the same period determined in accordance with paragraph 4 below.

 

 

40  

amended by resolution of the Copensation Committee dated 24 October 2007

 

23


3

    CALCULATION OF TSR

 

3.1

The TSR for each Company, and Comparator Group Company over the I&P Period shall be calculated as follows:

TSR = (End Value / Start Value) - 1

where:

 

End Value =    the average daily closing price of an ordinary share or unit of common stock in the capital of the Company or Comparator Group Company (as ascertained from the Official List or other relevant exchange on which that share or unit of common stock is quoted and as determined from time to time by the Compensation Committee) during the End Period, multiplied by the End Shareholding
Start Value =    the average daily closing price of an ordinary share or unit of common stock in the capital of the Company or Comparator Group Company (as ascertained from the Official List or other relevant exchange on which that share or unit of common stock is quoted and as determined from time to time by the Compensation Committee) during the Start Period, multiplied by the Start Shareholding
End Shareholding =    the Start Shareholding increased by that number of notional shares that could be acquired using dividends paid during the course of the I&P Period. For this purpose, dividends are assumed to be paid without any deduction or withholding in respect of tax on the Start Shareholding and the notional shares acquired from previous dividend payments during the I&P Period and on the basis that dividends are assumed to be reinvested in full in notional shares at the closing price of a Share on the ex-dividend date relative to each such dividend. For the avoidance of doubt, the number of notional shares may include fractions of one share.
Start Shareholding =    1,000 shares. 41

 

3.2

Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph 3.1, the Compensation Committee may determine that the TSR of the Company and/or any Comparator Group Company shall be performed using appropriate alternative data sources (including, but not limited to “total-return” data supplied by Bloomberg or Datastream). In this case, references to End Value and Start Value shall be construed accordingly.

 

4

    CALCULATION OF THE MATCHING FACTOR

 

4.1

At the end of the I&P Period the TSR for the Company and each Comparator Group Company shall be determined in accordance with paragraph 3 of this Schedule.

 

4.2

The Comparator Group Companies will then be ranked according to the TSR of each of them with the Comparator Group Company with the highest TSR ranking first.

 

4.3

If the TSR of the Company is equal to or better than the Comparator Group Company ranked second pursuant to paragraph 4.2, the Matching Factor shall be four in respect of Awards for which the I&P Period commences in 2004 and five in respect of other Awards.

 

41  

Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 27 October 2005

 

24


4.4

If the TSR of the Company is less than the TSR of the median Comparator Group Company the Matching Factor shall be zero.

 

4.5

If the TSR of the Company is equal to the TSR of the median Comparator Group Company the Matching Factor shall be 1.2 in respect of Awards for which the I&P Period commences in 2004 and 1.5 in respect of other Awards.

 

4.6

If the TSR of the Company is equal to the TSR of any Comparator Group Company ranked between the median Comparator Group Company and the Comparator Group Company ranked second, the Matching Factor shall be determined by the following table (depending on whether the Awards are granted in respect of which the I&P Period commences in 2004 or otherwise). 42

 

WPP Rank within    No. of Matching Shares for each Investment Share
Comparator Group    Five year I&P Period

1 st

   5

2 nd

   5

3 rd

   4.5

4 th

   3.5

5 th

   2.5

6 th

   1.5

Lower than 6 th

   0

Provided that if the Comparator Group Companies relevant to any particular Award are determined by the Compensation Committee to be different to those set in the definition of that term, the Compensation Committee may amend this table or any part of it as it considers appropriate but on the basis that no such amendment shall materially advantage any Participants in respect of any existing Awards without the prior approval of the Company in general meeting.

 

4.7

If the TSR of the Company is not equal to the TSR of a Comparator Group Company but is above the TSR of the median ranked Comparator Group Company and below the TSR of the second ranked Comparator Group Company the Matching Factor will be determined by the following formula: 43

 

Matching Factor

    =        {     

(F(a) – F(b))x(TSR(wpp) – TSR(b))

    }        +        F(b)   
      TSR(a) – TSR(b)      

 

42  

Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 27 October 2005

43  

Formula amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 20 February 2007

 

25


where:

 

a =   

refers to the Comparator Group Company that has the lowest recorded TSR result that is also greater than the TSR of the Company.

b =   

refers to the Comparator Group Company that has the highest recorded TSR result that is also less than the TSR of the Company.

TSR(a) =   

the TSR result relating to company a.

TSR(b) =   

the TSR result relating to company b.

F(a) =   

the Factor given by this Schedule at 4.6 relating to company a.

F(b) =   

the Factor given by this Schedule at 4.6 relating to company b.

TSR(wpp) =   

the TSR of the Company.

 

5

    APPLICATION OF THE MATCHING FACTOR

The Matching Factor determined pursuant to paragraph 4 of this Schedule will be multiplied by the number of Investment Shares relevant to an Award and the result of that calculation shall be the number of Vested Matching Shares in respect of that Award.

 

26


SCHEDULE 3

 

 

1

DEFINITIONS

 

1.1

The following words and expressions have the following meanings in this Schedule.

“Comparator Group” means the group of companies which the Compensation Committee shall from time to time, determine should be the Comparator Group (which shall be set out in the documentation granting the Award) and which shall be, at the date of adoption of the Plan the companies listed below (the ticker numbers for the following companies are those used on the companies’ respective domestic exchanges):

Aegis Group plc (GB:965756), Arbitron Inc (US:ARB), Dentsu Inc (US:DTSUF), GfK AG (DE:587530), Havas SA (FR:12188), Interpublic Group of Companies Inc (US:IPG), Ipsos SA (FR:7329), Omnicom Group Inc (US:OMC), Publicis Groupe SA (FR:13057), and Taylor Nelson Sofres PLC (GB:191539).

“Comparator Group Company” means a company in the Comparator Group.

“End Period” means a period of 6 months, ending on the last day of the I&P Period.

“Matching Factor” means the factor determined pursuant to paragraph 4 of this Schedule which is to be multiplied by the number of Investment Shares committed to the Plan in respect of an Award which shall determine the extent to which Matching Shares become Vested Matching Shares in relation to that Award under the terms of the Plan which, for the avoidance of doubt, will not be greater than 5 and will not be less than 0.

“Median” means a TSR exactly half way between the TSR of the 5th ranked Comparator Group Company and the 6th ranked Comparator Group Company.

“Start Period” means a period of 6 months, ending on the day before the start of the relevant I&P Period.

“TSR” means the total return to the holders of ordinary shares or units of common stock in the capital of the Company or Comparator Group Company (as appropriate) based on:

 

  (c)

share price appreciation; and

 

  (d)

the assumed reinvestment of dividends,

calculated in accordance with paragraph 3 of this Schedule below.

 

2

PERFORMANCE CONDITIONS

 

2.1

Subject to the Compensation Committee determining otherwise (pursuant to Rule 8.1) the Performance Condition that will apply to Awards under the Plan will be the TSR Condition.

 

44  

Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 24 October 2007

 

27


2.2

The TSR Condition is the extent to which the TSR of the Company over the I&P Period compares to the TSR of the respective Comparator Group Companies over the same period determined in accordance with paragraph 4 below.

 

3

CALCULATION OF TSR

 

3.1

The TSR for each Company, and Comparator Group Company over the I&P Period shall be calculated as follows:

TSR = (End Value / Start Value) - 1

where:

 

End Value =

   the average daily closing price of an ordinary share or unit of common stock in the capital of the Company or Comparator Group Company (as ascertained from the Official List or other relevant exchange on which that share or unit of common stock is quoted and as determined from time to time by the Compensation Committee) during the End Period, multiplied by the End Shareholding

Start Value =

   the average daily closing price of an ordinary share or unit of common stock in the capital of the Company or Comparator Group Company (as ascertained from the Official List or other relevant exchange on which that share or unit of common stock is quoted and as determined from time to time by the Compensation Committee) during the Start Period, multiplied by the Start Shareholding

End Shareholding =

   the Start Shareholding increased by that number of notional shares that could be acquired using dividends paid during the course of the I&P Period. For this purpose, dividends are assumed to be paid without any deduction or withholding in respect of tax on the Start Shareholding and the notional shares acquired from previous dividend payments during the I&P Period and on the basis that dividends are assumed to be reinvested in full in notional shares at the closing price of a Share on the ex-dividend date relative to each such dividend. For the avoidance of doubt, the number of notional shares may include fractions of one share.

Start Shareholding =

   1,000 shares.

 

3.2

Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph 3.1, the Compensation Committee may determine that the TSR of the Company and/or any Comparator Group Company shall be performed using appropriate alternative data sources (including, but not limited to “total-return” data supplied by Bloomberg or Datastream). In this case, references to End Value and Start Value shall be construed accordingly.

 

4

CALCULATION OF THE MATCHING FACTOR

 

4.1

At the end of the I&P Period the TSR for the Company and each Comparator Group Company shall be determined in accordance with paragraph 3 of this Schedule.

 

4.2

The Comparator Group Companies will then be ranked according to the TSR of each of them with the Comparator Group Company with the highest TSR ranking first.

 

28


4.3

If the TSR of the Company is equal to or better than the Comparator Group Company ranked second pursuant to paragraph 4.2, the Matching Factor shall be four in respect of Awards for which the I&P Period commences in 2004 and five in respect of other Awards.

 

4.4

If the TSR of the Company is less than the TSR of the Median the Matching Factor shall be zero.

 

4.5

If the TSR of the Company is equal to the Median the Matching Factor shall be 1.5 in respect of other Awards.

 

4.6

If the TSR of the Company is equal to the TSR of any Comparator Group Company ranked between the Median and the Comparator Group Company ranked second, the Matching Factor shall be determined by the following table:

 

WPP Rank within

Comparator Group

  

No. of Matching Shares for

each Investment Share

1 st

   5

2 nd

   5

3 rd

   4.5

4 th

   3.5

5 th

   2.5

Median

   1.5

Lower than Median

   0

Provided that if the Comparator Group Companies relevant to any particular Award are determined by the Compensation Committee to be different to those set in the definition of that term, the Compensation Committee may amend this table or any part of it as it considers appropriate but on the basis that no such amendment shall materially advantage any Participants in respect of any existing Awards without the prior approval of the Company in general meeting.

 

4.7

If the TSR of the Company is not equal to the TSR of a Comparator Group Company but is above the Median and below the TSR of the second ranked Comparator Group Company the Matching Factor will be determined by the following formula 45 :

 

Matching Factor

    =        {     

(F(a) – F(b))x(TSR(wpp) – TSR(b))

    }        +        F(b)   
      TSR(a) – TSR(b)      

 

45  

Formula amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 20 February 2007

 

29


where:

 

a =

  

refers to the Comparator Group Company that has the lowest recorded TSR result that is also greater than the TSR of the Company.

b =

  

refers to the Comparator Group Company that has the highest recorded TSR result that is also less than the TSR of the Company.

TSR(a) =

   the TSR result relating to company a.

TSR(b) =

   the TSR result relating to company b.

F(a) =

   the Factor given by this Schedule at 4.6 relating to company a.

F(b) =

   the Factor given by this Schedule at 4.6 relating to company b.

TSR(wpp) =

   the TSR of the Company.

Provided that where company b would otherwise be the 6th ranked Comparator Group Company, company b shall a notional company with a TSR exactly half way between the TSR of 5th ranked Comparator Group Company and the 6th ranked Comparator Group Company and in respect of which the Factor given by this schedule at 4.6 shall be 1.5.

 

5

APPLICATION OF THE MATCHING FACTOR

The Matching Factor determined pursuant to paragraph 4 of this Schedule will be multiplied by the number of Investment Shares relevant to an Award and the result of that calculation shall be the number of Vested Matching Shares in respect of that Award. 46

 

46  

Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 26 October 2006

 

30


SCHEDULE 4

 

1

DEFINITIONS

The following words and expressions have the following meanings in this Schedule.

“Comparator Group” means the group of companies which the Compensation Committee shall from time to time, determine should be the Comparator Group (which shall be set out in the documentation granting the Award) and which shall be, at the date of adoption of the Plan the companies listed below (the ticker numbers for the following companies are those used on the companies’ respective domestic exchanges):

Aegis Group plc (GB:965756), Arbitron Inc (US:ARB), Dentsu Inc (US:DTSUF), GfK AG (DE:587530), Havas SA (FR:12188), Interpublic Group of Companies Inc (US:IPG), Ipsos SA (FR:7329), Omnicom Group Inc (US:OMC) and Publicis Groupe SA (FR:13057).

“Comparator Group Company” means a company in the Comparator Group.

“End Period” means a period of 6 months, ending on the last day of the I&P Period.

“Matching Factor” means the factor determined pursuant to paragraph 4 of this Schedule which is to be multiplied by the number of Investment Shares committed to the Plan in respect of an Award which shall determine the extent to which Matching Shares become Vested Matching Shares in relation to that Award under the terms of the Plan which, for the avoidance of doubt, will not be greater than 5 and will not be less than 0.

“Start Period” means a period of 6 months, ending on the day before the start of the relevant I&P Period.

“TSR” means the total return to the holders of ordinary shares or units of common stock in the capital of the Company or Comparator Group Company (as appropriate) based on:

 

  (e)

share price appreciation; and

 

  (f)

the assumed reinvestment of dividends,

calculated in accordance with paragraph 3 of this Schedule below.

 

2

PERFORMANCE CONDITIONS

Subject to the Compensation Committee determining otherwise (pursuant to Rule 8.1) the Performance Condition that will apply to Awards under the Plan will be the TSR Condition.

 

The TSR Condition is the extent to which the TSR of the Company over the I&P Period compares to the TSR of the respective Comparator Group Companies over the same period determined in accordance with paragraph 4 below.

 

47  

Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 21 October 2008

 

31


3 CALCULATION OF TSR

 

3.1

The TSR for each Company, and Comparator Group Company over the I&P Period shall be calculated as follows:

TSR = (End Value / Start Value) - 1

where:

 

End Value =

   the average daily closing price of an ordinary share or unit of common stock in the capital of the Company or Comparator Group Company (as ascertained from the Official List or other relevant exchange on which that share or unit of common stock is quoted and as determined from time to time by the Compensation Committee) during the End Period, multiplied by the End Shareholding

Start Value =

   the average daily closing price of an ordinary share or unit of common stock in the capital of the Company or Comparator Group Company (as ascertained from the Official List or other relevant exchange on which that share or unit of common stock is quoted and as determined from time to time by the Compensation Committee) during the Start Period, multiplied by the Start Shareholding

End Shareholding =

   the Start Shareholding increased by that number of notional shares that could be acquired using dividends paid during the course of the I&P Period. For this purpose, dividends are assumed to be paid without any deduction or withholding in respect of tax on the Start Shareholding and the notional shares acquired from previous dividend payments during the I&P Period and on the basis that dividends are assumed to be reinvested in full in notional shares at the closing price of a Share on the ex-dividend date relative to each such dividend. For the avoidance of doubt, the number of notional shares may include fractions of one share.

Start Shareholding =

   1,000 shares.

 

3.2

Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph 3.1, the Compensation Committee may determine that the TSR of the Company and/or any Comparator Group Company shall be performed using appropriate alternative data sources (including, but not limited to “total-return” data supplied by Bloomberg or Datastream). In this case, references to End Value and Start Value shall be construed accordingly.

 

4

CALCULATION OF THE MATCHING FACTOR

 

4.1

At the end of the I&P Period the TSR for the Company and each Comparator Group Company shall be determined in accordance with paragraph 3 of this Schedule.

 

32


4.2

The Comparator Group Companies will then be ranked according to the TSR of each of them with the Comparator Group Company with the highest TSR ranking first.

 

4.3

If the TSR of the Company is equal to or better than the Comparator Group Company ranked second pursuant to paragraph 4.2, the Matching Factor shall be 5.

 

4.4

If the TSR of the Company is less than the TSR of the median Comparator Group Company the Matching Factor shall be zero.

 

4.5

If the TSR of the Company is equal to the median Comparator Group Company the Matching Factor shall be 1.5.

 

4.6

If the TSR of the Company is equal to the TSR of any Comparator Group Company ranked between the median Comparator Group Company and the Comparator Group Company ranked second, the Matching Factor shall be determined by the following table:

 

WPP Rank within

Comparator Group

  

No. of Matching Shares for

each Investment Share

1 st

   5

2 nd

   5

3 rd

   4

4 th

   3

5 th

   1.5

Provided that if the Comparator Group Companies relevant to any particular Award are determined by the Compensation Committee to be different to those set in the definition of that term, the Compensation Committee may amend this table or any part of it as it considers appropriate but on the basis that no such amendment shall materially advantage any Participants in respect of any existing Awards without the prior approval of the Company in general meeting.

 

4.7

If the TSR of the Company is not equal to the TSR of a Comparator Group Company but is above the TSR of the median ranked Comparator Group Company and below the TSR of the second ranked Comparator Group Company the Matching Factor will be determined by the following formula 48 :

 

Matching Factor

    =        {     

(F(a) – F(b))x(TSR(wpp) – TSR(b))

    }        +        F(b)   
      TSR(a) – TSR(b)      

 

48  

Formula amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 20 February 2007

 

33


where:

 

a =

  

refers to the Comparator Group Company that has the lowest recorded TSR result that is also greater than the TSR of the Company.

b =

  

refers to the Comparator Group Company that has the highest recorded TSR result that is also less than the TSR of the Company.

TSR(a) =

   the TSR result relating to company a.

TSR(b) =

   the TSR result relating to company b.

F(a) =

   the Factor given by this Schedule at 4.6 relating to company a.

F(b) =

   the Factor given by this Schedule at 4.6 relating to company b.

TSR(wpp) =

   the TSR of the Company.

 

5

APPLICATION OF THE MATCHING FACTOR

The Matching Factor determined pursuant to paragraph 4 of this Schedule will be multiplied by the number of Investment Shares relevant to an Award and the result of that calculation shall be the number of Vested Matching Shares in respect of that Award.

 

34

Exhibit 4.30

 

WPP PLC

 

 

 

LEADERSHIP EQUITY ACQUISITION PLAN III

 

 

Approved by the Company in General Meeting on 2 June 2009 and

adopted by the board of directors of the Company on 12 May 2009

and amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee on 11 May 2010,

12 November 2011, 12 November 2012 and 10 December 2012

Squire Sanders (UK) LLP

7 Devonshire Square

London

EC2M 4YH

United Kingdom

DX 136546 Bishopsgate 2

Office: +44 (0)20 7655 1000

Fax: +44 (0)20 7655 1001

Reference WPP.002-1470

 

 


CONTENTS

 

1         PURPOSE

     1   

2         INTERPRETATION

     1   

3         ELIGIBILITY

     8   

4         ACQUISITION OF INVESTMENT SHARES AND INVESTMENT OPTIONS

     8   

5         PLAN LIMITS

     9   

6         AWARDS

     10   

7         COMMITMENT OF INVESTMENT SHARES AND INVESTMENT OPTIONS

     12   

8         PERFORMANCE CONDITIONS

     12   

9         CESSATION OF EMPLOYMENT

     13   

10      VARIATION OF CAPITAL

     14   

11      CHANGE OF CONTROL

     14   

12      SATISFACTION OF AWARDS

     16   

13      MISSTATEMENT

     17   

14      MISCELLANEOUS

     18   

15      AMENDMENT

     19   

16      DURATION

     20   

SCHEDULE 1

     21   

SCHEDULE 2

     25   

SCHEDULE 3

     29   

 

i


1

PURPOSE

The purpose of the Plan is to incentivise those executive directors of the Company and operating company executives whose contributions transcend their day-to-day role.

 

2

INTERPRETATION

 

2.1

The following words and expressions have the following meanings in the Rules and in Schedule 1, Schedule 2 and Schedule 3 1 :

“Act” means the Companies Act 2006 as amended.

“ADR” means an American Depository Receipt representing, for the time being, 5 ordinary shares in the capital of the Company deposited with Citibank NA as depository under the Deposit Agreement between the Company and Citibank NA dated as of 2 January 2013 2 as amended from time to time or any other American depository receipt arrangement sponsored by the Company.

“Annual Earnings” means an Eligible Person’s annual earnings for the time being, comprising their basic salary, directorship fee (if applicable) and Target Bonus for a particular year as determined by the Compensation Committee. 3

“Award” means an award or grant made to an Eligible Person subject to and on the terms of this Plan.

“Award Period” means the period of 42 days commencing on:

 

  (a)

the date of approval of the Plan by the shareholders of the Company;

 

  (b)

any day on which the Company releases its results for any financial period; or

 

  (c)

the date of commencement of Employment of an Eligible Person (but only in respect of that Eligible Person).

“Bad Leaver” means a Participant whose Employment terminates as a result of:

 

  (a)

termination by a Group Company of their Employment where that Participant:

 

  (i)

has, in the opinion of the Compensation Committee, committed any act or omission which entitles a Group Company to terminate their contract of employment without notice; or

 

  (ii)

has, in the opinion of the Compensation Committee, committed any serious breach or repeated or continued breach (after warning in writing) of their obligations under their contract of employment including, without limitation, ceasing to work full time for the Group without the prior consent of the relevant Group Company except in circumstances where the Participant retires with the prior consent of the Company; or

 

1  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 10 December 2012.

2  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012.

3  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

 

1


  (iii)

has become prohibited by law from being a director or employee of a Group Company as a result of their own act, omission or misfeasance; or

 

  (iv)

has been convicted of any criminal offence which is punishable by a custodial sentence or involves dishonesty or violence; or

 

  (v)

has, otherwise than at the request of the relevant Group Company, resigned as a director or employee of the Group; or

 

  (b)

the voluntary leaving or giving notice voluntarily to leave Employment with the Group or voluntarily resigning as a director of any Group Company including, for the avoidance of doubt, taking retirement without the prior consent of the relevant Group Company; or

 

  (c)

the wrongful termination by that Participant of their contract of employment with any Group Company unless the Company has agreed in writing that such termination will not constitute the Participant a Bad Leaver;

provided that a Participant will not be a Bad Leaver if they have been found to have been constructively dismissed by any Group Company.

“Bonus Deferral Programme” means the WPP plc Annual Bonus Deferral Programme adopted by the Company on 30 September 2008.

“Change of Control Date” means the date on which a person obtains or persons obtain Control of the Company as described in Rule 11.1(a) or 11.1(b).

“Close Family” means, in relation to a person, that person’s spouse, civil partner, children and siblings and any other persons as may be agreed to be Close Family from time to time by the Compensation Committee.

“Company” means:

 

  (a)

for the period up to the Effective Date, the reference shall be to WPP plc, a public limited company incorporated in Jersey with registered number 101749, to be re-named WPP 2012 plc; and

 

  (b)

for the period from and including the Effective Date the reference shall be to WPP plc, a public limited company incorporated in Jersey with registered number 111714. 4

“Company Secretary” means the company secretary of the Company from time to time.

“Compensation Committee” means the compensation committee for the time being of the board of directors of the Company.

“Control” has the same meaning as in section 1124 of the Corporation Tax Act 2010. 5

“Effective Date” means the date on which the Scheme becomes effective, expected to be 2 January 2013. 6

 

 

4  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012.

5  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

6  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012.

 

2


“Eligible Person” means any employee (including an executive director) of a Group Company.

“Employment” means employment as a director or employee of any Group Company.

“Encumbrance” means any mortgage, charge, assignment or assignation by way of security, guarantee, debenture, hypothecation, pledge, declaration of trust, lien, right of set-off or any other encumbrance (including any conditionality or forfeiture right) or security interest whatsoever, howsoever created or arising provided that the Compensation Committee may determine that any particular encumbrance or security interest will not be an Encumbrance for the purposes of this definition and, for the avoidance of doubt any Shares which are committed as Investment Shares or any Investment Option committed to an existing Award under the Plan will be treated as being subject to an Encumbrance for the purposes of this definition except in relation to the Award to which they are committed.

“ESOP” means any employee benefit trust nominated by the Compensation Committee to operate in conjunction with the Plan. 7

“Good Leaver” means a Participant whose termination of Employment does not constitute them a Bad Leaver, including by reason of their ceasing to be in Employment as a result of:

 

  (a)

death;

 

  (b)

wrongful dismissal (being a termination by a Group Company without notice or payment in lieu of notice in circumstances where that Group Company was not entitled to terminate the Employment of that Participant summarily) or constructive dismissal;

 

  (c)

permanent disability;

 

  (d)

Serious Illness 8 ; or

 

  (e)

retirement on a basis agreed with the Company;

provided that a Participant will cease to be treated as a Good Leaver if within six months of the date of cessation of their Employment they take up an employment or engagement with another company, business or organisation which the Compensation Committee considers to be a competitor of any part of the Group.

“Group” means the Company and all of its subsidiaries (as defined in section 736 of the Act or, as the context may require, articles 2 and 2A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991). 9

“Group Company” means any member of the Group.

 

“I&P Period” means the investment and performance period which is the period commencing on a date specified by the Compensation Committee and ending on 31 December in the 5th year from the commencement of the I&P Period.

“Interested” has the meaning set out in Rules 2.2 and 2.3.

 

7  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

8  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

9  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

 

3


“Investment Option” means an option to purchase Shares the terms of which are consistent with any terms specified by the Compensation Committee at the relevant time and which is committed to the Plan by an Eligible Person to qualify for an Award in accordance with Rule 7 and which becomes exercisable following the end of the I&P Period.

“Investment Option Shares” means Shares that are the subject of an Investment Option.

“Investment Shares” means Shares committed to the Plan by an Eligible Person to qualify for an Award in accordance with Rule 7.

“IO Commitment Date” means the date by which a Participant must:

 

  (a)

agree to commit Investment Shares; and

 

  (b)

commit an Investment Option (if applicable);

to the Plan to be eligible for an Award which will be a date determined by the Compensation Committee, provided that the Compensation Committee may, in its discretion, decide to extend the date by which agreement to commit Investment Shares must be received and/or by which an Investment Option (if applicable) must be committed to the Plan to a later date, either for all Eligible Persons invited to apply for an Award or any one or more of them provided that the IO Commitment Date must be before the relevant Awards are granted. 10

“IRC” means the United States’ Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

“IS Commitment Date” means the date by which Investment Shares must be committed to the Plan to be eligible for an Award which will be a date determined by the Compensation Committee provided that the Compensation Committee may, in its discretion, decide to extend the date by which Investment Shares must be committed to the Plan to a later date either for all Eligible Persons invited to apply for an Award or any one or more of them. 11

“ITEPA” means the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003.

“LSE” means the London Stock Exchange being the principal London exchange for equity and bond trading. 12

“Matching Shares” means the Shares that are comprised in an Award in accordance with Rule 6.3.

“NASDAQ” means the US screen-based system for the quotation and transfer of equity securities. 13

“Official List” means the Daily Official List of the UKLA.

“Original Accounts” means any accounts or other data used to assess the extent to which a Relevant Performance Condition is or was satisfied. 14

 

10  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

11  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

12  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

13  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

14  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010.

 

4


“Participant” means a person who holds an Award including, if relevant, that person’s legal representatives.

“Performance Conditions” means the conditions set out in Schedule 1, Schedule 2 and Schedule 3 or such other conditions as may be determined from time to time by the Compensation Committee pursuant to Rule 8. 15

“Performance Related Remuneration” means any element of the Participant’s remuneration (payable in cash or shares and including any Vested Matching Shares paid or payable under the Plan) where the payment, or the extent of the payment, of that remuneration is determined, at least in part, by reference to a Relevant Performance Condition. 16

“Plan” means the WPP plc Leadership Equity Acquisition Plan III as from time to time amended in accordance with the provisions of these Rules.

“Relevant Event” means the earlier of:

 

  (a)

the date on which an Employment terminates in circumstances where the Participant is a Good Leaver; or

 

  (b)

the Change of Control Date.

“Relevant Performance Condition” means a condition or term which affects the amount of any remuneration of a Participant (for the avoidance of doubt, payable in cash or shares) that vests, is exercisable or receivable and which depends on any measure of performance including the financial performance of the Company, the Group or any business (or any part of any business) or company within the Group. 17

“Relevant Proportion” means the proportion that the length of the period from the start of an I&P Period to the occurrence of the Relevant Event bears to the length of that I&P Period (calculated in days).

“Rules” means the rules of the Plan.

“Schedule 1” means Schedule 1 to these Rules.

“Schedule 2” means Schedule 2 to these Rules. 18

“Schedule 3” means Schedule 3 to these Rules. 19

“Scheme” means the scheme of arrangement set out in part 3 of the circular to share owners of WPP plc (registered in Jersey with company number 101749) relating to the recommended proposals for the introduction of a new parent company by means of a scheme of arrangement under Article 125 of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991 or with or subject to any modification, addition or condition approved or imposed by the Royal Court of Jersey. 20

 

15  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 10 December 2012.

16  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010.

17  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010.

18  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

19  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 10 December 2012.

20  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2012.

 

5


“Serious Illness” means a serious long-term illness that prevents the Participant from carrying out their duties of employment. 21

“Share” means an ordinary share in the capital of the Company and includes ADRs.

“Share Requirement” means the number of Shares or Treasury Shares which have in the previous ten years been or are to be issued or (in the case of Treasury Shares) transferred to satisfy outstanding Awards under any employee share scheme of the Company (including the Plan). 22

“Target Bonus” means, in relation to any particular year, the target bonus which may be payable to an Eligible Person in relation to that particular year and which is paid in cash or in Shares to be received either immediately or on a deferred basis.

“Tax Liability” means any liability for any tax and/or, unless the Compensation Committee determines otherwise, social security contributions (which, where determined by the Compensation Committee at the time of the grant of the Award, include employer’s social security contributions) or the like arising in any jurisdiction in connection with the Plan or any Award which the Company, relevant Group Company or other person is or may be liable to account for or pay in any jurisdiction. 23

“Trading Day” means a day on which Shares can be traded on the LSE and NASDAQ. 24

“Treasury Shares” means any Shares which are purchased by the Company in accordance with Article 57 of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991 and held by the Company as treasury shares pursuant to Article 58A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991.

“UKLA” means the United Kingdom Listing Authority. 25

“Value” means:

 

  (a)

in the case of Shares, the average of:

 

  (i)

in the case of an ordinary share in the capital of the Company, the middle-market quotation of a Share on the Official List 26 ; and

 

  (ii)

in the case of ADRs, the average of the highest and lowest price of an ADR on a Trading Day on NASDAQ or on any other trading market that is for the time being the principal trading market for the ADR;

in either case taken over the five Trading Days before the date on which that value is to be determined; and

 

  (b)

in the case of an Investment Option, the price payable to acquire the Investment Option.

 

21  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

22  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

23  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

24  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

25  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

26  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010.

 

6


“Vested Matching Shares” means the number of Matching Shares comprised in an Award which is determined as at the end of the I&P Period as being the number of Matching Shares which vest in accordance with paragraph 5 of Schedule 1, Schedule 2 or Schedule 3 as applicable.

“Vesting Date” means the date determined by the Compensation Committee to be the date on which restrictions attaching to Vested Matching Shares are to be released or Vested Matching Shares are to be transferred or issued (pursuant to the exercise of an option or otherwise) to a Participant, or as the Participant may direct, or to a depository in the case of ADRs, to satisfy an Award which will, in any event, be no later than 15 March in the year following the end of the I&P Period unless the Company is prohibited from discharging the Award on that date in which case the Vesting Date will be the first available Trading Day when the Company is no longer prohibited from discharging that Award.

 

2.2

An Eligible Person or Participant will be treated as Interested in Shares if those Shares are held by:

 

  (a)

the Eligible Person or Participant beneficially;

 

  (b)

a member of the Eligible Person’s or Participant’s Close Family beneficially;

 

  (c)

a family trust or pension trust (not including a pension scheme of any Group Company) in which the Eligible Person or Participant or a member of the Eligible Person’s or Participant’s Close Family is interested;

 

  (d)

a private company in which the Eligible Person or Participant or a member of their Close Family is interested as to more than 25% of the voting power, income and capital on a winding up;

 

  (e)

a nominee for any of the above; or

 

  (f)

an ESOP, but only in a case where the Participant’s entitlement to receive those Shares under an Award is not subject to any outstanding employment or performance-related conditions and the Participant has agreed with the Company to defer receipt of those Shares until a date after the first date on which those Shares could have first been delivered to the Participant;

and not (save with the written consent of the Compensation Committee) subject to any Encumbrance provided that any Shares which are the subject of a Basic Share Award or a Basic Share Right will be treated as Shares in which an Eligible Person or Participant is Interested but, for the avoidance of doubt, any Shares which are issued as Bonus Share Awards or pursuant to Bonus Shares Rights pursuant to the Bonus Deferral Programme will not be treated as Shares in which an Eligible Person is Interested prior to:

 

  (a)

in the case of a Bonus Share Award, any contingency attaching to such award lapsing; and

 

  (b)

in the case of a Bonus Share Right, the option to acquire Shares pursuant to the rights being validly exercised;

and, also for the avoidance of doubt, any unexercised options where the option price is more than a nominal amount will also not be treated as Shares in which an Eligible Person or Participant is Interested.

 

7


2.3

An Eligible Person or Participant will be treated as Interested in an Investment Option if that Investment Option is a subsisting Investment Option held by:

 

  (a)

the Eligible Person or Participant beneficially;

 

  (b)

a member of the Eligible Person’s or Participant’s Close Family beneficially;

 

  (c)

a family trust or pension trust (not including a pension scheme of any Group Company) in which the Eligible Person or Participant is interested or a member of the Eligible Person’s or Participant’s Close Family is interested;

 

  (d)

a private company in which the Eligible Person or Participant or their Close Family is interested as to more than 25% of the voting power, income and capital on a winding up; or

 

  (e)

a nominee for any of the above;

and not (save with the written consent of the Compensation Committee) subject to any Encumbrance.

 

2.4

The terms Basic Share Award, Basic Share Right, Bonus Share Award and Bonus Shares Right have the same meanings as they have in the rules of the Bonus Deferral Programme as amended from time to time.

 

2.5

Words importing the singular include the plural and vice versa.

 

2.6

Any reference, express or implied, to an enactment includes references to:

 

  (a)

that enactment as amended, extended or applied by or under any other enactment; and

 

  (b)

any enactment which that enactment re-enacts (with or without modification).

 

2.7

Any reference to a Rule is a reference to one of these Rules.

 

3

ELIGIBILITY

 

3.1

No person is entitled, by virtue of the provisions of the Plan, to participate as of right in the Plan.

 

3.2

The Compensation Committee may decide from time to time which Eligible Persons may participate and the extent of their participation in the Plan.

 

4

ACQUISITION OF INVESTMENT SHARES AND INVESTMENT OPTIONS

 

4.1

In order to participate in the Plan and to be eligible to receive and retain an Award an Eligible Person must:

 

  (a)

agree to commit to the Plan Shares in which that Eligible Person is Interested and, where agreed between the Compensation Committee and the Participant, acquire an Investment Option in which that Eligible Person is Interested on or before the IO Commitment Date which the Compensation Committee has specified in relation to that Award;

 

8


  (b)

be Interested in that number of Investment Shares which are committed to the Plan in accordance with Rule 7 on or before the IS Commitment Date; and

 

  (c)

remain Interested in that number of Investment Shares from the IS Commitment Date and in the Investment Option from the IO Commitment Date (if applicable) to the end of the I&P Period.

 

4.2

Subject to Rule 4.3 the maximum aggregate Value of Shares together with, if applicable, the Value of Investment Options (in both cases being the Value determined as at the date of the letter from the Company to an Eligible Person inviting them to receive an Award) which an Eligible Person may commit as Investment Shares and Investment Options (in aggregate) over:

 

  (a)

all Awards made to that Eligible Person under the Plan shall be 500 per cent. of the Eligible Person’s Annual Earnings; and

 

  (b)

all Awards made to that Eligible Person under the Plan in respect of a particular I&P Period shall be 100% per cent of the Eligible Person’s Annual Earnings;

provided that in respect of any particular Award, the Compensation Committee may prescribe a maximum aggregate Value of Investment Shares for that Award and (if applicable) the associated Investment Option lower than the aggregate Values necessary to reach these limits.

 

4.3

The maximum Value of an Investment Option for any particular Award must not exceed one-third of the Value of the Investment Shares in respect of that Award. In respect of any particular Award, the Compensation Committee may prescribe a maximum Value of an Investment Option lower than one-third of the Value of the Investment Shares in respect of that Award.

 

4.4

If, by the IS Commitment Date, a Participant has failed to commit the number of Investment Shares which it has been determined they should commit in relation to an Award, then, except in those exceptional circumstances that the Compensation Committee may from time to time determine, that Award will lapse. In those exceptional circumstances, the Compensation Committee may determine that an Award will not lapse but will be adjusted in any manner that the Compensation Committee decide, including adjustments to:

 

  (a)

specify a later date by which the Investment Shares must be committed and Investment Option (if applicable) acquired;

 

  (b)

reduce the number of Investment Shares to be committed;

 

  (c)

allow a different Investment Option (if applicable) to be committed;

 

  (d)

reduce the number of Investment Option Shares (if applicable) comprised in the Award; and/or

 

  (e)

reduce the number of Matching Shares comprised in the Award.

 

4.5

Neither the Company nor any Group Company will grant, be a party to or negotiate any Investment Option.

 

5

PLAN LIMITS

The Share Requirement must not exceed 10% of the issued ordinary share capital of the Company for the time being. 27

 

27  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

 

9


6

AWARDS

 

6.1

The Compensation Committee may decide, from time to time, that the grant of an Award may be subject to the satisfaction of any conditions it determines and notifies to an Eligible Person at the time that the Eligible Person is invited to participate.

 

6.2

By agreeing to participate in the Plan (having been invited to do so) and by agreeing to commit Investment Shares and an Investment Option (if applicable) by the Commitment Date in accordance with Rule 4, an Eligible Person will be eligible to receive an Award granted by the Compensation Committee. Awards will normally be made during an Award Period, but exceptionally may be made at other times.

 

6.3

An Award will relate to that number of Matching Shares as the Compensation Committee may determine not exceeding five Matching Shares per Participant for each Investment Share and (if applicable) each Investment Option Share, in both cases, committed by the Participant in question. Subject to Rules 11.2 and 12.7, the number of Matching Shares which become Vested Matching Shares will be determined at the end of the I&P Period and will depend on the extent to which the Performance Conditions or other conditions as referred to in Rule 8 are satisfied.

 

6.4

The Compensation Committee will determine the form in which the Award is made and its full terms. In particular, the Award may take the form of any one or more of the following, provided that the terms of the Award are consistent with the Plan:

 

  (a)

an award of Matching Shares, subject to restrictions, or a promise of Matching Shares;

 

  (b)

an option to acquire the Matching Shares exercisable for a nil or a nominal consideration; or

 

  (c)

any other form which the Compensation Committee considers has a substantially similar economic purpose or effect;

and the Compensation Committee may determine that an Award may be satisfied by a Group Company or the trustees of an ESOP (with the agreement of such Group Company or trustees, as appropriate) or otherwise as it considers appropriate.

 

6.5

A Participant will become entitled to acquire, receive or retain (depending on the form of the Award) the number of Vested Matching Shares comprised in an Award in accordance with the form of the Award under Rule 6.4 on the Vesting Date, only if both the following conditions are met:

 

  (a)

unless the Compensation Committee determines otherwise:

 

  (i)

the Participant remains Interested in the relevant number of Investment Shares and the Investment Option (if applicable) until the end of the I&P Period; or

 

  (ii)

if a Participant ceases to be in Employment prior to the Vesting Date and is a Good Leaver, the Participant remains Interested in all of the relevant Investment Shares and the Investment Option (if applicable) until the Vesting Date; and

 

  (b)

subject to Rules 9 and 11, if the Participant continues in Employment throughout the I&P Period and until the Vesting Date.

 

10


6.6

The Participant will cease to have any rights in respect of the number of Matching Shares comprised in an Award which are not Vested Matching Shares with effect from the end of the I&P Period, and will cease to have any rights in respect of all the Matching Shares comprised in an Award which will lapse with effect from the earliest of:

 

  (a)

subject to Rules 9 and 11, the cessation of Employment;

 

  (b)

unless the Compensation Committee determines otherwise, the Participant’s failure to remain Interested in accordance with Rule 6.5 in that number of Investment Shares and the Investment Option (if applicable) that relates to that Award;

 

  (c)

subject to Rule 6.7, the date on which a Participant transfers, assigns, uses as security or otherwise charges an Award or turns an Award to account, or attempts or purports to do any of the same;

 

  (d)

the date on which an Award lapses under Rule 6.8; and

 

  (e)

the date on which Rule 9.8 applies.

 

6.7

An Award is personal to a Participant and cannot be transferred, assigned, used as security or otherwise charged or turned to account except that the Award may be transferred if, immediately after the transfer, the Participant would be Interested in the Award within the meaning of Rule 2.2 if when applying the provisions of Rule 2.2 the word Shares in that Rule were replaced by the word Award (and making such further changes to the wording of Rule 2.2 as are required to give effect to this Rule) but only for so long as the Participant remains so Interested.

 

6.8

An Award will lapse if the Participant commits an act of bankruptcy or enters into any arrangement with their creditors under any formal insolvency procedure.

 

6.9

The receipt of an Award will not confer on the Participant (unless otherwise provided in the terms of the Award) any right to the allotment of a specified number of Shares by the Company or to the transfer of a specified number of Shares from any particular transferor. The satisfaction of the Award will be in accordance with Rule 12.

 

6.10

If an Award is made in a form that does not confer on the Participant the right to receive dividends on the relevant Vested Matching Shares from the date the Award is made, the Compensation Committee may provide that the Participant will, subject to Rule 6.11, be entitled to receive at the time of the satisfaction of the Award to which the entitlement relates an issue or transfer of, or a release of restrictions in respect of, that number of Shares which could have been purchased if:

 

  (a)

the dividends which would have been paid on such Vested Matching Shares (had the form of the Award conferred the right to receive dividends) been reinvested in Shares on the date each dividend is paid after the date that the Award is made and during the I&P Period; and

 

  (b)

the dividends which would have been paid on Shares which would have been held pursuant to that reinvestment in Shares had those dividends been further reinvested in Shares, again on the date each dividend is paid during the I&P Period.

 

11


6.11

If a Participant is a Bad Leaver any right to receive additional Shares under Rule 6.10 will, unless the Compensation Committee determines otherwise, lapse on the date of termination of Employment.

 

6.12

For the avoidance of doubt a Participant will not be entitled to any voting rights in respect of Shares to be issued or transferred or released from restrictions pursuant to Rule 6.10 until those Shares are actually issued or transferred or released from those restrictions to the Participant. 28

 

7

COMMITMENT OF INVESTMENT SHARES AND INVESTMENT OPTIONS

 

7.1

Any Shares or Investment Option in which an Eligible Person is or becomes Interested for the purposes of Rule 4 will be committed to the Plan and held under arrangements approved by the Compensation Committee so as to constitute Investment Shares and an Investment Option (if applicable) of the Participant for a particular Award.

 

7.2

The Compensation Committee will be entitled to rely on a declaration in a form satisfactory to it that an Eligible Person or Participant is or continues to be (respectively) Interested in the required number of Investment Shares and the Investment Option (if applicable).

 

7.3

A Participant is required to immediately notify the Company Secretary if they cease to be Interested in the number of Investment Shares required to be committed (or any of them) and/or the Investment Option (if applicable).

 

7.4

The commitment of Shares to the Plan as Investment Shares will not of itself affect any right of the Eligible Person to dividends or other rights attaching to those Shares.

 

7.5

An Investment Option will cease to be committed at the end of the I&P Period and from the end of the I&P Period the Participant will be entitled to release the Investment Option, exercise it or continue to hold it in accordance with its terms as the Participant may determine.

 

8

PERFORMANCE CONDITIONS

 

8.1

Subject to Rule 9.6, the number of Matching Shares comprised in an Award which become Vested Matching Shares will be determined as soon as practicable following the end of the I&P Period and will depend on the extent to which such Performance Conditions or other conditions as the Compensation Committee will, from time to time determine on the making of an Award, are satisfied.

 

8.2

In the absence of a determination by the Compensation Committee to the contrary under Rule 8.1 above, the Performance Conditions set out in Schedule 1 will apply to Awards granted in 2009 and 2010, the Performance Conditions set out in Schedule 2 will apply to Awards granted in 2011 and the Performance Conditions set out in Schedule 3 will apply to Awards granted in 2012. 29

 

8.3

If the Compensation Committee determines that exceptional circumstances have occurred or have prevailed at any time during the I&P Period applicable to an Award, the Compensation Committee will have the power to determine that the number of Matching Shares which may become Vested Matching Shares at the end of an I&P Period, in respect of all Awards having the same I&P Period, will be varied by such number as the Compensation Committee considers appropriate.

 

28  

Rule 6.13 removed by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

29  

Amended by Resolutions of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011 and 10 December 2012.

 

12


9

CESSATION OF EMPLOYMENT

 

9.1

Subject to Rules 9.3 and 9.4, if a Participant ceases to be in Employment prior to the Vesting Date of an Award, that Award will lapse except to the extent and on such terms and conditions that the Compensation Committee determines.

 

9.2

For the avoidance of doubt, Rule 9.1 applies where a Participant is a Bad Leaver.

 

9.3

If a Participant ceases to be in Employment in the first year of an I&P Period and is a Good Leaver the Award applicable to that I&P Period will lapse except to the extent that the Compensation Committee determines otherwise.

 

9.4

Subject to Rule 9.3, if a Participant ceases to be in Employment prior to the Vesting Date and is a Good Leaver, Rule 6 will apply as if:

 

  (a)

the number of Matching Shares which the Participant could become entitled to acquire at the end of the I&P Period, depending on the extent to which the Performance Conditions are satisfied at the end of the I&P Period under Rule 8; and

 

  (b)

the number of Shares which the Participant could become entitled to pursuant to Rule 6.10;

were reduced to the Relevant Proportion of the number of Matching Shares and Shares respectively to which the Participant would have been entitled if their Employment had not terminated.

 

9.5

In consequence of Rule 9.4:

 

  (a)

Rule 6.5(b) will cease to apply; and

 

  (b)

the Participant will become entitled to acquire, receive or retain (depending on the form of the Award) on the date determined pursuant to Rule 12:

 

  (i)

a number of Matching Shares; and

 

  (ii)

the Shares issued, transferred or retained pursuant to Rule 6.10;

(reduced in either case to the Relevant Proportion in accordance with Rule 9.4), and dependent, in both cases, on the extent to which the Performance Conditions are satisfied.

 

9.6

Unless the Compensation Committee determines otherwise, if a Participant ceases to be in Employment due to death or Serious Illness, the I&P Period of the Participant’s outstanding Award will be treated as ending on the date of cessation of Employment and the number of Matching Shares to be treated as Vested Matching Shares will be based upon the extent to which the Performance Conditions have been satisfied as at the date of cessation. 30

 

9.7

Subject to any relevant legal or regulatory requirements prevailing in any relevant jurisdiction, for the purposes of this Rule a woman who ceases to be in Employment following maternity or adoption leave (or the equivalent in any relevant jurisdiction) (“ Leave ”) will be regarded as having ceased Employment on the date on which she indicates that she does not intend to

 

30  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

 

13


 

return from Leave to work. In the absence of such indication and if she has not already returned to work she will be regarded as having ceased Employment on the last day on which she is entitled to return to work. A woman who exercises her statutory right or any equivalent contractual right to return to work following Leave will not be treated as having ceased to be in Employment. Where a male in any relevant jurisdiction has the legal right to family related leave similar to Leave then the wording above will apply to that male. 31

 

9.8

If a Participant who has ceased to be in Employment breaches any contractual obligation owed to any Group Company relating to restrictions on that Participant following the termination of their Employment the Participant’s Award(s) will be forfeited.

 

10

VARIATION OF CAPITAL

 

10.1

In the event of any increase or variation in the capital of the Company arising out of or in connection with a capitalisation issue, an offer to the holders of Shares, a rights issue, a subdivision, consolidation or reduction of capital, special dividend, demerger, or other

 

variation of capital, the terms of outstanding Awards and the terms on which Investment Shares and an Investment Option (if applicable) have been committed to the Plan may be adjusted in such manner and on such terms as the Compensation Committee considers appropriate. An adjustment will not have effect unless the auditors or other advisers appointed by the Compensation Committee acting as experts and not arbitrators confirm that in their opinion the adjustment is fair and reasonable and such confirmation will be final and binding.

 

10.2

Participants will be notified of any adjustment made under this Rule.

 

11

CHANGE OF CONTROL

 

11.1

Subject to Rule 11.4:

 

  (a)

if any person (and/or persons acting in concert) obtains Control of the Company as a result or in consequence of making a general offer to acquire the whole of the issued share capital of the Company which is made subject to a condition such that if satisfied the person making the offer will have Control of the Company; or

 

  (b)

if any person (and/or persons acting in concert) obtains Control of the Company other than as a result of or in consequence of making such general offer but the offeror is bound by Rule 9 of the City Code on Takeovers and Mergers to make a general offer for the minority;

then:

 

  (i)

in relation to all outstanding Awards the I&P Period will be deemed to end on the Change of Control Date;

 

  (ii)

the number of Vested Matching Shares which a Participant may become entitled to acquire will be determined as at the Change of Control Date dependent on the extent to which the Performance Conditions are satisfied at that date, having regard to Rules 11.2 and 11.3 below and subject to Rule 8.3; and

 

  (iii)

on the Change of Control Date the Participant will cease to have any rights in respect of outstanding Awards except in relation to the Vested Matching Shares under Rule 11.1(b)(ii).

 

31  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

 

14


11.2

For the purpose of Rule 11.1 in determining TSR of the Company and the Comparator Group Companies, the End Period (as defined in Schedule 1, Schedule 2 and Schedule 3) will be deemed to be a period ending on the Change of Control Date.

 

11.3

The number of Vested Matching Shares which a Participant may become entitled to on a Change of Control will be the number of Vested Matching Shares determined by the application of Rules 11.1 and 11.2 reduced to the Relevant Proportion of the number of Matching Shares to which the Participant would have been potentially entitled if the Change of Control had not occurred.

 

11.4

If the value (as determined pursuant to Section 280G of IRC) of the Vested Matching Shares which a Participant may become entitled to acquire pursuant to Rules 11.1, 11.2 and 11.3 upon a person or persons obtaining Control of the Company when aggregated with any other amounts which the Participant becomes entitled to receive or acquire upon that person or persons obtaining Control and which in either case must be aggregated for the purposes of calculating the imposition of any excise tax pursuant to Section 4999 of IRC is equal to or exceeds by 20% or less three times the “base amount” (as defined in Section 280G(b)(3) of IRC) for that Participant the number of Vested Matching Shares will be reduced, but only if the Participant would be better off by such reduction after taking into account all arrangements between the Participant and the Company, by such number as is necessary to avoid the imposition of the excise tax imposed by Section 4999 of IRC on the amounts which the Participant is entitled to acquire or receives upon that person or persons obtaining Control of the Company.

 

11.5

If:

 

  (a)

under Part 18A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991 the Court sanctions a compromise or arrangement for the purposes of or in connection with a scheme for the reconstruction of the Company or its amalgamation with any other company or companies; or

 

  (b)

a resolution is passed for the winding up of the Company for the purposes of or in connection with a reconstruction or division of the Company or its business;

the terms of outstanding Awards and the terms on which Investment Shares and Investment Options (if applicable) have been committed to the Plan will be varied in such manner as the Compensation Committee considers appropriate. A variation will not have effect unless the auditors or other advisers appointed by the Compensation Committee acting as experts and not as arbitrators confirm that in their opinion the variation is fair and reasonable and such confirmation will be final and binding.

 

11.6

If any company (the “Acquiring Company”) obtains Control of the Company in accordance with Rule 11.1 and:

 

  (a)

the Acquiring Company also obtains Control of another company (the “Target Company”) within such period as the Compensation Committee may determine and, as a consequence of obtaining such Control, the Company and the Target Company become subsidiaries of the Acquiring Company; and

 

  (b)

the shareholders of the Company and the Target Company before the Acquiring Company obtained Control of the Company and the Target Company are the same persons who substantially comprise the shareholders of the Acquiring Company after the Acquiring Company obtained such Control,

 

15


then in relation any outstanding Awards the Compensation Committee may determine that the I&P Period will not be deemed to end on the Change of Control Date under Rule 11.1(b)(i) and it may determine (with the agreement of the Acquiring Company) that a Participant is required to release any outstanding Awards in consideration of the grant to the Participant by the Acquiring Company of an equivalent award.

 

11.7

For the purpose of Rule 11.6 an award granted pursuant to Rule 11.6 is an equivalent award to an Award if, but only if:

 

  (a)

the shares to which it relates are in the Acquiring Company, and it is subject to the provisions of the Plan in the same manner as the Award immediately prior to its release;

 

  (b)

the shares to which it relates are of an equivalent value to the value of the Shares which were subject to the Award immediately prior to the release, and for this purpose the Compensation Committee will determine such equivalent value provided that the release of an Award and the grant of an equivalent award under Rule 11.4 will not have effect unless the auditors or other advisers appointed by the Compensation Committee acting as experts and not arbitrators confirm that in their opinion the equivalent value is fair and reasonable and such confirmation will be final and binding;

 

  (c)

such award is subject to the Performance Conditions or such other performance conditions that the Compensation Committee determines are substantially no more and no less onerous than the Performance Conditions; and

 

  (d)

the Participant continues to be Interested in the relevant number of Investment Shares and the Investment Option (if applicable) in such manner as the Compensation Committee determines provided that and so far as reasonably possible, the terms on which Investment Shares and the Investment Option are committed to Awards are substantially no more and no less onerous than before the Change of Control.

 

11.8

With effect from the release of an Award and the grant of an equivalent award pursuant to Rule 11.6 the Plan will be construed as if:

 

  (a)

the equivalent award had been granted at the same time as the Award it replaces;

 

  (b)

references to the Company in the Rules were references to the Acquiring Company; and

 

  (c)

references to Shares were references to shares in the Acquiring Company;

and the Compensation Committee may make such amendments to these Rules and to the terms of existing awards as may be necessary to give effect to Rule 11.6.

 

12

SATISFACTION OF AWARDS

 

12.1

The manner in which an Award is satisfied on the Vesting Date will depend on the form of the Award determined by the Compensation Committee under Rule 6.4.

 

12.2

Awards will be satisfied by the transfer or issue of or the release of restrictions relating to the number of Vested Matching Shares to the Participant (or as the Participant may direct, or to a depository in the case of ADRs) normally from an ESOP or from Treasury Shares held by the Company.

 

16


12.3

Following the end of the last financial year of the I&P Period, the Compensation Committee will determine the extent to which the Performance Conditions have been satisfied. That determination will be made at least one week before the Vesting Date.

 

12.4

Subject to Rule 12.7, once the Compensation Committee has determined the extent to which the Performance Conditions have been satisfied in relation to an Award (including after having taken account of the provisions of Rule 13.3, if relevant 32 ) and, subject to the Participant being in Employment on the Vesting Date (or if the Participant has been a Good Leaver and the provisions of Rule 9.4 apply or if the Compensation Committee has otherwise exercised its discretion under Rule 9), the Compensation Committee will procure that the Award is satisfied on the Vesting Date in accordance with Rule 12.2.

 

12.5

Any transfer or issue of or release of restrictions relating to Vested Matching Shares to a Participant (or as the Participant may direct or to a depository in the case of ADRs) is subject to the Compensation Committee being satisfied that the transfer, issue or release would be lawful in any relevant jurisdiction.

 

12.6

The transfer or issue of, or release of restrictions relating to, Shares under the Plan is subject to obtaining any approval or consent required under the Listing Rules published by the UKLA, the Rules of the LSE, the Admission and Disclosure Standards of the LSE, and otherwise complying with the provision of City Code on Take-overs and Mergers and any other applicable regulations or enactment (whether in the United Kingdom or overseas). The Participant will do all things necessary to obtain, or obviate the need for, such approval or consent.

 

12.7

If a Participant ceases to be in Employment due to death or Serious Illness, Rule 9.6 will apply and:

 

  (a)

the date upon which the Participant’s Award will be satisfied will be within 6 months of the Participant ceasing to be in Employment; and

 

  (b)

in the case of a Participant’s death, the Participant’s Award will be satisfied in favour of their personal representatives prior to the Vesting Date. 33

 

13

MISSTATEMENT 34

 

13.1

The provisions of 13.2 will apply if:

 

  (a)

a Participant has committed an act of fraud, dishonesty or deceit in relation to a Group Company;

 

  (b)

as a result of the actions or omissions of a Participant, any Original Accounts are required to be materially corrected, or any accounts or other data for a later period include write downs, adjustments or other items; or

 

  (c)

a Participant knew or ought reasonably to have known, given that Participant’s role and position in the Group, that the relevant financial performance or other data by reference to which a Relevant Performance Condition was measured was materially different than shown in the Original Accounts;

 

32  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010.

33  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

34  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010

 

17


and the Compensation Committee considers that the quantum of any Performance Related Remuneration of that Participant would have been affected if the circumstance or circumstances referred to in (a), (b) or (c) above had been known of, acted upon or otherwise taken into account at the relevant time.

 

13.2

In the event that the Compensation Committee determines that it would be clear to a reasonable, objective assessor that one of the events as detailed in Rule 13.1 above has occurred the Compensation Committee will be entitled, but in no circumstances will be obliged, to take action as described in Rule 13.3 below.

 

13.3

The Compensation Committee may determine that:

 

  (a)

an Award is cancelled in its entirety; or

 

  (b)

the number of Vested Matching Shares in respect of an Award determined in accordance with paragraph 5 of Schedule 1, Schedule 2 or Schedule 3 as applicable will be reduced by such amount and/or in such manner as the Compensation Committee determines.

For the avoidance of doubt, this Rule 13.3 may be operated in respect of Awards where the event or events in respect of which the Compensation Committee has made a determination under Rule 13.2 relates to Performance Related Remuneration under another Award or another plan.

 

14

MISCELLANEOUS

 

14.1

The Plan will be administered by the Compensation Committee whose decision on any matter concerning the Plan will be final and binding unless it is a matter in respect of which the Rules provide that the decision of the auditors or any other adviser is final and binding.

 

14.2

The Compensation Committee or any committee or agent that they may from time to time delegate authority to, will approve all documents required in connection with Awards.

 

14.3

The Compensation Committee may establish arrangements under which the cash value of an Award may be paid to an Eligible Person in lieu of the satisfaction of the Award under Rule 12.

 

14.4

The cost of establishing and operating the Plan (including but not limited to stamp duty and stamp duty reserve tax, if any, arising on a transfer of Shares pursuant to Rule 12) will be borne by the Company but may be recharged to the relevant Group Companies on such arm’s length basis as is considered appropriate from time to time.

 

14.5

Any notice or other communication under or in connection with the Plan may be given by personal delivery, delivery by email or by sending the same by post, in the case of a company to its registered office (or to such other address and person as may be specified by that company from time to time), and in the case of an individual to their last known address, or, where the individual is a director or employee of a Group Member, either to their last known address or to the address of the place of business at which the individual performs the whole or substantially the whole of the duties of their office or employment or of any such office or employment.

 

14.6

Evidence that the notice was properly addressed, stamped and put in the post will be conclusive evidence of posting.

 

18


14.7

Participation in the Plan is a matter separate from any contract of employment or other agreement and any benefit conferred by the Plan will not be counted for pension or any other purpose.

 

14.8

The rights and obligations of any individual under the terms of their office or employment with any Group Company will not be affected by their participation in the Plan and the Plan does not form part of any contract of employment between any individual and any Group Company.

 

14.9

A Participant will not have any entitlement by way of compensation or damages resulting from the termination of the office or employment (for any reason and whether lawful or not) by virtue of which they are or may be eligible to participate in the Plan or for the loss or reduction of any right or benefit or prospective right or benefit under the Plan which they may otherwise have enjoyed whether the compensation is claimed for wrongful dismissal or otherwise.

 

14.10

The Plan is intended to operate on a worldwide basis and, accordingly, the Compensation Committee may adopt any rate of exchange for converting any currency into any other currency as it decides at any time and from time to time for any purpose in connection with the Plan.

 

14.11

The Participant must make payment, or arrangements (which are satisfactory to the Compensation Committee) for payment, to the relevant Group Company or other person of such sum as is sufficient, in the sole discretion of the Compensation Committee, to settle any Tax Liability. Unless the Compensation Committee determines otherwise, there will be no obligation to satisfy an Award until the Participant has done so. 35

 

14.12

Receipt of an Award will authorise the Company or any person nominated by the Company at its sole discretion to sell such number of Vested Matching Shares as it may estimate as being necessary to produce a cash sum sufficient to meet the Tax Liability and account to the relevant Group Company or other person and/or the relevant authorities in respect of such Tax Liability at the appropriate time. 36

 

14.13

If a Participant owes a debt or other monetary obligation to a Group Company, the relevant Group Company has a charge over the Participant’s interest in the Plan (but not over the Participant’s Investment Shares). Satisfaction of an Award may be withheld until the Participant has discharged, to the satisfaction of the Compensation Committee, the debt or other monetary obligation.

 

14.14

The Plan and any Award will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of England and Wales and the Company and the Participants (together with any Eligible Persons who do not become Participants) submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the Courts of England and Wales.

 

15

AMENDMENT

 

15.1

Subject to Rules 15.2 and 15.4, the Compensation Committee may at any time alter or add to all or any provisions of the Plan, or the terms of all or any Awards made under it, in any respect.

 

15.2

No alteration or addition to the advantage of Eligible Persons or Participants can be made under Rule 15.1 without the prior approval of the Company in general meeting, other than a minor amendment to benefit the administration of the Plan, to take account of a change in legislation or to obtain or maintain favourable tax, exchange control or regulatory treatment for Eligible Persons, Participants or Group Companies.

 

35  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

36  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

 

19


15.3

The Compensation Committee may make such amendments and modifications to all or any provisions of the Plan as are necessary or required in order to take account of laws and regulations in any jurisdiction which enable non-UK resident Eligible Persons to participant in the Plan including the establishment of separate plans in any such jurisdictions which replicate in all substantial respects the provisions of the Plan.

 

15.4

No alteration or addition can be made to the terms of any Award made prior to the date of the alteration or addition which would adversely affect a Participant’s interest in that Award in any material respect without the consent of the relevant Participant.

 

16

DURATION

No Award may be granted under the Plan after 31 December 2013 without the prior approval of the Company in general meeting.

 

20


SCHEDULE 1

 

1

DEFINITIONS

 

1.1

The following words and expressions have the following meanings in this Schedule.

“Comparator Group” means the group of companies which the Compensation Committee shall from time to time determine should be the Comparator Group (which shall be set out in the documentation granting the Award) and which shall be, at the date of adoption of the Plan the companies listed below (the ticker numbers for the following companies are those used on the companies’ respective domestic exchanges):

Aegis Group plc (GB:965756), Arbitron Inc (US:ARB), Dentsu Inc (JP:4324), GfK AG (DE:587530), Havas SA (FR:12188), Interpublic Group of Companies Inc (US:IPG), Ipsos SA (FR:7329), Omnicom Group Inc (US:OMC) and Publicis Groupe SA (FR:13057).

“Comparator Group Company” means a company in the Comparator Group.

“End Period” means a period of 6 months, ending on the last day of the I&P Period.

“Market Capitalisation” means the average daily closing price, calculated in a common currency, of an ordinary share or unit of common stock in the capital of each Comparator Group Company (as ascertained from the Official List or other relevant exchange on which that share or unit of common stock is quoted and as determined from time to time by the Compensation Committee) during the Start Period, multiplied by the average number of ordinary shares or units of common stock in issue during the Start Period, provided that the Compensation Committee may decide that the market capitalisation of the Company and/or any Comparator Group Company shall be determined using alternative appropriate data sources (including, but not limited to data supplied by Bloomberg or Datastream).

“Market Capitalisation Weighting” means the proportion, expressed as a percentage, that the Market Capitalisation of a particular Comparator Group Company bears to the Market Capitalisation Sum.

“Market Capitalisation Sum” means the sum of the Market Capitalisations of the Comparator Group (which, for the avoidance of doubt, does not include the Company).

“Matching Factor” means the factor determined pursuant to paragraph 4 of this Schedule which is to be multiplied by the number of Investment Shares and Investment Option Shares, in both cases, committed to the Plan in respect of an Award which shall determine the extent to which Matching Shares become Vested Matching Shares in relation to that Award under the terms of the Plan. For the avoidance of doubt, the Matching Factor will not be greater than 500% and will not, in any circumstances, be less than 0.

“Start Period” means a period of 6 months, ending on the day before the start of the relevant I&P Period.

“TSR” means the total return to the holders of ordinary shares or units of common stock in the capital of the Company or Comparator Group Company (as appropriate) based on:

 

  (a)

share price appreciation; and

 

21


  (b)

the assumed reinvestment of dividends,

calculated in accordance with paragraph 3 of this Schedule.

 

2

PERFORMANCE CONDITIONS

 

2.1

Subject to the Compensation Committee determining otherwise (pursuant to Rule 8.2) the Performance Condition that will apply to Awards under the Plan will be the TSR Condition.

 

2.2

The TSR Condition is a comparison of the TSR of the Company over the I&P Period to the TSR of the respective Comparator Group Companies over the same period determined in accordance with paragraph 4 below.

 

3

CALCULATION OF TSR

 

3.1

The TSR for the Company, and each Comparator Group Company over the I&P Period shall be calculated as follows:

TSR = (End Value / Start Value) - 1

where:

 

  End Value =    the average daily closing price of an ordinary share or unit of common stock in the capital of the Company or Comparator Group Company (as ascertained from the Official List or other relevant exchange on which that share or unit of common stock is quoted and as determined from time to time by the Compensation Committee) during the End Period, multiplied by the End Shareholding.
 

Start Value =

   the average daily closing price of an ordinary share or unit of common stock in the capital of the Company or Comparator Group Company (as ascertained from the Official List or other relevant exchange on which that share or unit of common stock is quoted and as determined from time to time by the Compensation Committee) during the Start Period, multiplied by the Start Shareholding.
  End Shareholding =    the Start Shareholding increased by that number of notional shares that could be acquired using dividends paid during the course of the I&P Period. For this purpose, dividends are assumed to be paid without any deduction or withholding in respect of tax on the Start Shareholding and the notional shares acquired from previous dividend payments during the I&P Period and on the basis that dividends are assumed to be reinvested in full in notional shares at the closing price of a Share on the ex-dividend date relative to each such dividend. For the avoidance of doubt, the number of notional shares may include fractions of one share.
 

Start Shareholding =

   1,000 shares.

 

22


3.2

Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph 3.1 the Compensation Committee may determine that the TSR of the Company and/or any Comparator Group Company shall be performed using appropriate alternative data sources (including, but not limited to “total-return” data supplied by Bloomberg or Datastream). In this case, references to End Value and Start Value shall be construed accordingly.

 

3.3

The End Value and the Start Value for the Company and each Comparator Group Company shall be calculated in the same currency.

 

4

CALCULATION OF THE MATCHING FACTOR

 

4.1

At the end of the I&P Period the TSR for the Company and each Comparator Group Company shall be determined in accordance with paragraph 3 of this Schedule.

 

4.2

The Comparator Group Companies will then be ranked according to the TSR of each of them with the Comparator Group Company with the highest TSR ranking first.

 

4.3

The TSR of the Company will then be compared to the TSR of the Comparator Group Companies.

 

4.4

The sum of the Market Capitalisation Weightings of the Comparator Group Companies whose TSR is less than the TSR of the Company is then calculated (the “MCW Aggregate” ).

 

4.5

The Matching Factor will be determined by the application (consecutively) of the following two calculations:

 

  (a)

an amount will be calculated (the “Adjusted MCW Aggregate” ) by applying the following formula:

Adjusted MCW Aggregate = MCW Aggregate + ((TSR W - TSR B ) / (TSR A -TSR B ) x MCF)

where:

TSR A = the TSR of the company ranked above the Company

TSR B = the TSR of the company ranked below the Company

TSR W = the TSR of the Company

MCF = Market Capitalisation Weighting of the company whose TSR ranked above the Company

 

  (b)

the Matching Factor is then calculated by the application of the following formula:

Matching Factor = Match B + ((Adjusted MCW Aggregate - MCW B ) x (Match A -Match B ) / (MCW A - MCW B ))

where

Match A = the Match (derived from the table set out below (the “Table” ) associated with the Percentile Step above the Adjusted MCW Aggregate

Match B = Match (derived from the Table) associated with the Percentile Step below the Adjusted MCW Aggregate

 

23


MCW A = the percentile (derived from the Table) associated with the Percentile Step above the Adjusted MCW Aggregate

MCW B = the percentile (derived from the Table) associated with the Percentile Step below the Adjusted MCW Aggregate

and where the Matching Factors associated with distinct percentile steps are defined as follows (and the term “Percentile Step” shall be construed accordingly):

 

PERCENTILE    MATCH

90th percentile

   500%

80th percentile

   420%

70th percentile

   330%

60th percentile

   240%

50th percentile

   150%

40th percentile

   0%

30th percentile

   0%

20th percentile

   0%

10th percentile

   0%

Bottom

   0%

Provided that:

 

  (a)

if the Adjusted MCW Aggregate is less than 50% the Matching Factor will be zero;

 

  (b)

if the Adjusted MCW Aggregate is more than 90% the Matching Factor will be 500%;

 

  (c)

if the Adjusted MCW Aggregate is exactly equal to 50%, 60%, 70% or 90%, the Matching Factor shall be determined directly from the Table; and

 

  (d)

if the Comparator Group Companies relevant to any particular Award are determined by the Compensation Committee to be different to those set in the definition of that term, the Compensation Committee may amend this table or any part of it as it considers appropriate but on the basis that no such amendment shall materially advantage any Participants in respect of any existing Awards without the prior approval of the Company in general meeting.

 

5

APPLICATION OF THE MATCHING FACTOR

The Matching Factor determined pursuant to paragraph 4 of this Schedule will be multiplied by the number of Investment Shares and the number of Investment Option Shares relevant to an Award and the result of that calculation shall be the number of Vested Matching Shares in respect of that Award.

 

24


SCHEDULE 2 37

 

1

DEFINITIONS

 

1.1

The following words and expressions have the following meanings in this Schedule.

“Comparator Group” means the group of companies which the Compensation Committee from time to time determine should be the Comparator Group (which will be set out in the documentation granting the Award) and which will be, at the date of adoption of the Plan the companies listed below (the ticker numbers for the following companies are those used on the companies’ respective domestic exchanges):

Aegis Group plc (GB:965756), Arbitron Inc (US:ARB), Dentsu Inc (JP:4324), GfK AG (DE:587530), Havas SA (FR:12188), Interpublic Group of Companies Inc (US:IPG), Ipsos SA (FR:7329), Nielsen Holdings NV (US:NLSN), Omnicom Group Inc (US:OMC) and Publicis Groupe SA (FR:13057).

“Comparator Group Company” means a company in the Comparator Group.

“End Period” means a period of 6 months, ending on the last day of the I&P Period.

“Market Capitalisation” means the average daily closing price, calculated in a common currency, of an ordinary share or unit of common stock in the capital of each Comparator Group Company (as ascertained from the Official List or other relevant exchange on which that share or unit of common stock is quoted and as determined from time to time by the Compensation Committee) during the Start Period, multiplied by the average number of ordinary shares or units of common stock in issue during the Start Period, provided that the Compensation Committee may decide that the market capitalisation of the Company and/or any Comparator Group Company will be determined using alternative appropriate data sources (including, but not limited to data supplied by Bloomberg or Datastream).

“Market Capitalisation Weighting” means the proportion, expressed as a percentage, that the Market Capitalisation of a particular Comparator Group Company bears to the Market Capitalisation Sum.

“Market Capitalisation Sum” means the sum of the Market Capitalisations of the Comparator Group (which, for the avoidance of doubt, does not include the Company).

“Matching Factor” means the factor determined pursuant to paragraph 4 of this Schedule which is to be multiplied by the number of Investment Shares and Investment Option Shares, in both cases, committed to the Plan in respect of an Award which will determine the extent to which Matching Shares become Vested Matching Shares in relation to that Award under the terms of the Plan. For the avoidance of doubt, the Matching Factor will not be greater than 500% and will not, in any circumstances, be less than 0.

Start Period ” means:

 

  (a)

other than in respect of Nielsen Holdings NV, a period of 6 months ending on the day before the start of the relevant I&P Period; and

 

  (b)

in respect of Nielsen Holdings NV, a period of 6 months ending on 30 June 2011.

“TSR” means the total return to the holders of ordinary shares or units of common stock in the capital of the Company or Comparator Group Company (as appropriate) based on:

 

  (a)

share price appreciation; and

 

37  

Schedule 2 inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

 

25


  (b)

the assumed reinvestment of dividends,

calculated in accordance with paragraph 3 of this Schedule.

 

2

PERFORMANCE CONDITIONS

 

2.1

Subject to the Compensation Committee determining otherwise (pursuant to Rule 8.2) the Performance Condition that will apply to Awards under the Plan will be the TSR Condition.

 

2.2

The TSR Condition is a comparison of the TSR of the Company over the I&P Period to the TSR of the respective Comparator Group Companies over the same period determined in accordance with paragraph 4 below.

 

3

CALCULATION OF TSR

 

3.1

The TSR for the Company, and each Comparator Group Company over the I&P Period will be calculated as follows:

TSR = (End Value / Start Value) - 1

where:

 

  End Value =    the average daily closing price of an ordinary share or unit of common stock in the capital of the Company or Comparator Group Company (as ascertained from the Official List or other relevant exchange on which that share or unit of common stock is quoted and as determined from time to time by the Compensation Committee) during the End Period, multiplied by the End Shareholding.
  Start Value =    the average daily closing price of an ordinary share or unit of common stock in the capital of the Company or Comparator Group Company (as ascertained from the Official List or other relevant exchange on which that share or unit of common stock is quoted and as determined from time to time by the Compensation Committee) during the Start Period, multiplied by the Start Shareholding.
  End Shareholding =    the Start Shareholding increased by that number of notional shares that could be acquired using dividends paid during the course of the I&P Period. For this purpose, dividends are assumed to be paid without any deduction or withholding in respect of tax on the Start Shareholding and the notional shares acquired from previous dividend payments during the I&P Period and on the basis that dividends are assumed to be reinvested in full in notional shares at the closing price of a Share on the ex-dividend date relative to each such dividend. For the avoidance of doubt, the number of notional shares may include fractions of one share.
  Start Shareholding =    1,000 shares.

 

26


3.2

Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph 3.1 the Compensation Committee may determine that the TSR of the Company and/or any Comparator Group Company will be performed using appropriate alternative data sources (including, but not limited to “total-return” data supplied by Bloomberg or Datastream). In this case, references to End Value and Start Value will be construed accordingly.

 

3.3

The End Value and the Start Value for the Company and each Comparator Group Company shall be calculated in the same currency.

 

4

CALCULATION OF THE MATCHING FACTOR

 

4.1

At the end of the I&P Period the TSR for the Company and each Comparator Group Company will be determined in accordance with paragraph 3 of this Schedule.

 

4.2

The Comparator Group Companies will then be ranked according to the TSR of each of them with the Comparator Group Company with the highest TSR ranking first.

 

4.3

The TSR of the Company will then be compared to the TSR of the Comparator Group Companies.

 

4.4

The sum of the Market Capitalisation Weightings of the Comparator Group Companies whose TSR is less than the TSR of the Company is then calculated (the “MCW Aggregate” ).

 

4.5

The Matching Factor will be determined by the application (consecutively) of the following two calculations:

 

  (a)

an amount will be calculated (the “Adjusted MCW Aggregate” ) by applying the following formula:

Adjusted MCW Aggregate = MCW Aggregate + ((TSR W - TSR B ) / (TSR A TSR B ) x MCF)

where:

TSR A = the TSR of the company ranked above the Company

TSR B = the TSR of the company ranked below the Company

TSR W = the TSR of the Company

MCF = Market Capitalisation Weighting of the company whose TSR ranked above the Company

 

  (b)

the Matching Factor is then calculated by the application of the following formula:

Matching Factor = Match B + ((Adjusted MCW Aggregate - MCW B ) x (Match A —Match B ) / (MCW A - MCW B ))

where:

Match A = the Match (derived from the table set out below (the “Table” ) associated with the Percentile Step above the Adjusted MCW Aggregate

Match B = Match (derived from the Table) associated with the Percentile Step below the Adjusted MCW Aggregate

 

27


MCW A = the percentile (derived from the Table) associated with the Percentile Step above the Adjusted MCW Aggregate

MCW B = the percentile (derived from the Table) associated with the Percentile Step below the Adjusted MCW Aggregate

and where the Matching Factors associated with distinct percentile steps are defined as follows (and the term “Percentile Step” will be construed accordingly):

 

PERCENTILE    MATCH
90th percentile    500%
80th percentile    420%
70th percentile    330%
60th percentile    240%
50th percentile    150%
40th percentile    0%
30th percentile    0%
20th percentile    0%
10th percentile    0%
Bottom    0%

Provided that:

 

  (a)

if the Adjusted MCW Aggregate is less than 50% the Matching Factor will be zero;

 

  (b)

if the Adjusted MCW Aggregate is more than 90% the Matching Factor will be 500%;

 

  (c)

if the Adjusted MCW Aggregate is exactly equal to 50%, 60%, 70% or 90%, the Matching Factor will be determined directly from the Table; and

 

  (d)

if the Comparator Group Companies relevant to any particular Award are determined by the Compensation Committee to be different to those set in the definition of that term, the Compensation Committee may amend this table or any part of it as it considers appropriate but on the basis that no such amendment will materially advantage any Participants in respect of any existing Awards without the prior approval of the Company in general meeting.

 

5

APPLICATION OF THE MATCHING FACTOR

The Matching Factor determined pursuant to paragraph 4 of this Schedule will be multiplied by the number of Investment Shares and the number of Investment Option Shares relevant to an Award and the result of that calculation will be the number of Vested Matching Shares in respect of that Award.

 

 

28


SCHEDULE 3 38

 

1

DEFINITIONS

 

1.1

The following words and expressions have the following meanings in this Schedule.

“Comparator Group” means the group of companies which the Compensation Committee from time to time determine should be the Comparator Group (which will be set out in the documentation granting the Award) and which will be, at the date of adoption of the Plan the companies listed below (the ticker numbers for the following companies are those used on the companies’ respective domestic exchanges):

Aegis Group plc (GB:965756), Arbitron Inc (US:ARB), Dentsu Inc (JP:4324), GfK AG (DE:587530), Havas SA (FR:12188), Interpublic Group of Companies Inc (US:IPG), Ipsos SA (FR:7329), Nielsen Holdings NV (US:NLSN), Omnicom Group Inc (US:OMC) and Publicis Groupe SA (FR:13057).

“Comparator Group Company” means a company in the Comparator Group.

“End Period” means a period of 6 months, ending on the last day of the I&P Period.

“Market Capitalisation” means the average daily closing price, calculated in a common currency, of an ordinary share or unit of common stock in the capital of each Comparator Group Company (as ascertained from the Official List or other relevant exchange on which that share or unit of common stock is quoted and as determined from time to time by the Compensation Committee) during the Start Period, multiplied by the average number of ordinary shares or units of common stock in issue during the Start Period, provided that the Compensation Committee may decide that the market capitalisation of the Company and/or any Comparator Group Company will be determined using alternative appropriate data sources (including, but not limited to data supplied by Bloomberg or Datastream).

“Market Capitalisation Weighting” means the proportion, expressed as a percentage, that the Market Capitalisation of a particular Comparator Group Company bears to the Market Capitalisation Sum.

“Market Capitalisation Sum” means the sum of the Market Capitalisations of the Comparator Group (which, for the avoidance of doubt, does not include the Company).

“Matching Factor” means the factor determined pursuant to paragraph 4 of this Schedule which is to be multiplied by the number of Investment Shares and Investment Option Shares, in both cases, committed to the Plan in respect of an Award which will determine the extent to which Matching Shares become Vested Matching Shares in relation to that Award under the terms of the Plan. For the avoidance of doubt, the Matching Factor will not be greater than 500% and will not, in any circumstances, be less than 0.

“Start Period” means a period of 6 months, ending on the day before the start of the relevant I&P Period.

 

 

38  

Schedule 3 inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 10 December 2012.

 

29


“TSR” means the total return to the holders of ordinary shares or units of common stock in the capital of the Company or Comparator Group Company (as appropriate) based on:

 

  (a)

share price appreciation; and

 

  (b)

the assumed reinvestment of dividends,

calculated in accordance with paragraph 3 of this Schedule.

 

2

PERFORMANCE CONDITIONS

 

2.1

Subject to the Compensation Committee determining otherwise (pursuant to Rule 8.2) the Performance Condition that will apply to Awards under the Plan will be the TSR Condition.

 

2.2

The TSR Condition is a comparison of the TSR of the Company over the I&P Period to the TSR of the respective Comparator Group Companies over the same period determined in accordance with paragraph 4 below.

 

3

CALCULATION OF TSR

 

3.1

The TSR for the Company, and each Comparator Group Company over the I&P Period will be calculated as follows:

TSR = (End Value / Start Value) - 1

where:

 

  End Value =    the average daily closing price of an ordinary share or unit of common stock in the capital of the Company or Comparator Group Company (as ascertained from the Official List or other relevant exchange on which that share or unit of common stock is quoted and as determined from time to time by the Compensation Committee) during the End Period, multiplied by the End Shareholding.
  Start Value =    the average daily closing price of an ordinary share or unit of common stock in the capital of the Company or Comparator Group Company (as ascertained from the Official List or other relevant exchange on which that share or unit of common stock is quoted and as determined from time to time by the Compensation Committee) during the Start Period, multiplied by the Start Shareholding.
  End Shareholding =    the Start Shareholding increased by that number of notional shares that could be acquired using dividends paid during the course of the I&P Period. For this purpose, dividends are assumed to be paid without any deduction or withholding in respect of tax on the Start Shareholding and the notional shares acquired from previous dividend payments during the I&P Period and on the basis that dividends are assumed to be reinvested in full in notional shares at the closing price of a Share on the ex-dividend date relative to each such dividend. For the avoidance of doubt, the number of notional shares may include fractions of one share.
  Start Shareholding =    1,000 shares.

 

30


3.2

Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph 3.1 the Compensation Committee may determine that the TSR of the Company and/or any Comparator Group Company will be performed using appropriate alternative data sources (including, but not limited to “total-return” data supplied by Bloomberg or Datastream). In this case, references to End Value and Start Value will be construed accordingly.

 

3.3

The End Value and the Start Value for the Company and each Comparator Group Company shall be calculated in the same currency.

 

4

CALCULATION OF THE MATCHING FACTOR

 

4.1

At the end of the I&P Period the TSR for the Company and each Comparator Group Company will be determined in accordance with paragraph 3 of this Schedule.

 

4.2

The Comparator Group Companies will then be ranked according to the TSR of each of them with the Comparator Group Company with the highest TSR ranking first.

 

4.3

The TSR of the Company will then be compared to the TSR of the Comparator Group Companies.

 

4.4

The sum of the Market Capitalisation Weightings of the Comparator Group Companies whose TSR is less than the TSR of the Company is then calculated (the “ MCW Aggregate ”).

 

4.5

The Matching Factor will be determined by the application (consecutively) of the following two calculations:

 

  (a)

an amount will be calculated (the “Adjusted MCW Aggregate” ) by applying the following formula:

Adjusted MCW Aggregate = MCW Aggregate + ((TSR W - TSR B ) / (TSR A TSR B ) x MCF)

where:

TSR A = the TSR of the company ranked above the Company

TSR B = the TSR of the company ranked below the Company

TSR W = the TSR of the Company

MCF = Market Capitalisation Weighting of the company whose TSR ranked above the Company

 

  (b)

the Matching Factor is then calculated by the application of the following formula:

Matching Factor = Match B + ((Adjusted MCW Aggregate - MCW B ) x (Match A Match B ) / (MCW A - MCW B ))

 

31


where:

Match A = the Match (derived from the table set out below (the “Table” ) associated with the Percentile Step above the Adjusted MCW Aggregate

Match B = Match (derived from the Table) associated with the Percentile Step below the Adjusted MCW Aggregate

MCW A = the percentile (derived from the Table) associated with the Percentile Step above the Adjusted MCW Aggregate

MCW B = the percentile (derived from the Table) associated with the Percentile Step below the Adjusted MCW Aggregate

and where the Matching Factors associated with distinct percentile steps are defined as follows (and the term “Percentile Step” will be construed accordingly):

 

PERCENTILE    MATCH
90th percentile    500%
80th percentile    420%
70th percentile    330%
60th percentile    240%
50th percentile    150%
40th percentile    0%
30th percentile    0%
20th percentile    0%
10th percentile    0%
Bottom    0%

Provided that:

 

  (c)

if the Adjusted MCW Aggregate is less than 50% the Matching Factor will be zero;

 

  (d)

if the Adjusted MCW Aggregate is more than 90% the Matching Factor will be 500%;

 

  (e)

if the Adjusted MCW Aggregate is exactly equal to 50%, 60%, 70% or 90%, the Matching Factor will be determined directly from the Table; and

 

  (f)

if the Comparator Group Companies relevant to any particular Award are determined by the Compensation Committee to be different to those set in the definition of that term, the Compensation Committee may amend this table or any part of it as it considers appropriate but on the basis that no such amendment will materially advantage any Participants in respect of any existing Awards without the prior approval of the Company in general meeting.

 

32


5

APPLICATION OF THE MATCHING FACTOR

The Matching Factor determined pursuant to paragraph 4 of this Schedule will be multiplied by the number of Investment Shares and the number of Investment Option Shares relevant to an Award and the result of that calculation will be the number of Vested Matching Shares in respect of that Award.

 

33

Exhibit 4.32

 

WPP PLC

 

   

THE WPP 2012 EXECUTIVE STOCK OPTION PLAN

As approved by shareholders of WPP plc on 5 November 2012 and adopted by the Board of Directors of WPP plc on 5 November 2012 and amended by written resolution dated 21 February 2013.

HMRC reference for approved section (appendix 1): X110396

 

   

Squire Sanders (UK) LLP

7 Devonshire Square

London

EC2M 4YH

United Kingdom

DX 136546 Bishopsgate 2

Office: +44 (0)20 7655 1000

Fax:     +44 (0)20 7655 1001

Reference WPP.002-1470


CONTENTS

 

1       DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

   1

2       ELIGIBILITY

   2

3       GRANT OF OPTIONS

   2

4       LIMITS

   3

5       PERFORMANCE CONDITIONS

   5

6       EXERCISE OF OPTIONS

   5

7       TAKEOVER, RECONSTRUCTION AND WINDING-UP

   7

8       VARIATION OF CAPITAL

   8

9       ALTERATIONS

   8

10     MISSTATEMENT

   9

11     MISCELLANEOUS

   9

12     WITHHOLDING

   10

APPENDIX 1

   11

APPENDIX 2

   16

APPENDIX 3

   17

APPENDIX 4

   17

APPENDIX 5

   18

APPENDIX 6

   20

APPENDIX 7

   20

APPENDIX 8

   20

APPENDIX 9

   21

APPENDIX 10

   21

APPENDIX 11

   21

APPENDIX 12

   22

APPENDIX 13

   22

APPENDIX 14

   22

APPENDIX 15

   22

APPENDIX 16

   23

APPENDIX 17

   23

 

i


1

DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

 

1.1

In this Plan, unless the context otherwise requires:

Act ” means the Companies Act 2006 as amended;

Board ” means the board of directors of the Company or a committee appointed by such board of directors;

Company ” means WPP plc (incorporated in Jersey under the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991 with registered number 111714);

Constituent Company ” means the Company or any Subsidiary;

Depositary ” means any depositary or depositaries which hold or whose nominee holds WPP ADRs;

Grant Date ” in relation to an Option means the date on which the Option was granted;

Group Member ” means a Constituent Company or a body corporate which is (within the meaning of section 1159 of the Act or, as the context may require, Articles 2 and 2A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991) the Company’s holding company or a subsidiary of the Company’s holding company;

ITEPA ” means the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003;

Key Feature ” means a provision of the Plan which is necessary in order to meet the requirements of Schedule 4;

Official List ” means the Daily Official List of the United Kingdom Listing Authority, a division of the Financial Services Authority;

Option ” means a right to acquire Shares or WPP ADRs under the Plan; and a right to acquire Shares shall be known as a “Share Option” and a right to acquire WPP ADRs shall be known as an “ADR Option”;

Original Accounts ” means any accounts or other data used to assess the extent to which a Relevant Performance Condition is satisfied;

Participant ” means a person who holds an Option granted under the Plan;

Performance Related Remuneration ” means any element of the Participant’s remuneration (for the avoidance of doubt, payable in cash or shares and including, for the avoidance of doubt, any Option) where the payment, or the extent of the payment, of that remuneration is determined, at least in part, by reference to a Relevant Performance Condition;

Plan ” means the WPP 2012 Executive Stock Option Plan as herein set out but subject to any alterations or additions made under Rule 9 below;

Relevant Performance Condition ” means a condition or term which affects the amount of any remuneration of a Participant (for the avoidance of doubt payable in cash or shares) that vests, is exercisable or receivable and which depends on any measure of performance including the financial performance of the Company, any Group Member or any business (or any part of any business) of any Group Member;

 

1


Schedule 4 ” means Schedule 4 to ITEPA;

Schedule 9 ” means Schedule 9 to the Taxes Act 1988;

Share ” means an ordinary share in the capital of the Company and for the purposes of Rule 4 (Limits) and, if the context requires, other provisions of the Rules, “Shares” include WPP ADRs;

Specified Age ” means 65 years of age;

Subsidiary ” means a body corporate which is a subsidiary of the Company within the meaning of section 1159 of the Act or, as the context may require, Articles 2 and 2A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991;

Taxes Act 1988 ” means the Income and Corporation Taxes Act 1988;

Treasury Shares ” means any Shares which are purchased by the Company in accordance with Article 57 of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991 and held by the Company as treasury shares pursuant to Article 58A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991;

WPP ADR ” means an American Depositary Receipt representing, for the time being, 5 Shares deposited with Citibank NA as depositary pursuant to the Deposit Agreement between the Company and Citibank NA dated as of 3 January 2013 as amended from time to time and/or any other American depositary receipt arrangement sponsored by the Company;

and expressions not otherwise defined herein have the same meanings as they have in Schedule 4.

 

1.2

Any reference in the Plan to any enactment includes a reference to that enactment as from time to time modified, extended or re-enacted.

 

1.3

The Plan has been adopted in substitution for the WPP 2008 Executive Stock Option Plan, under which no further grants of options will be made.

 

2

ELIGIBILITY

 

2.1

Subject to Rule 2.2 below, a person is eligible to be granted an Option under the Plan if (and only if) he is an executive director or employee of a Constituent Company.

 

2.2

No person is entitled, by virtue of the provisions of the Plan or any other means, to participate as of right in the Plan through the grant of an Award and consequently the receipt of an Award shall in no circumstances give or imply any right to receive any further award and any further right that is in fact granted to the same Participant may be on the same or on different terms.

 

3

GRANT OF OPTIONS

 

3.1

Subject to Rules 3.2 and 3.5 below and Rule 4 below, the Board may grant or procure the grant to any person who is eligible to be granted an Option under the Plan a Share Option or an ADR Option, upon the terms set out in the Plan; and for this purpose a Share Option to acquire means an option to subscribe for Shares or receive the transfer of Treasury Shares or other Shares as determined by the Board from time to time.

 

3.2

An Option may only be granted under the Plan:

 

  (a)

within the period of 6 weeks beginning with the date on which the Plan is adopted by the Board or the 6 week period beginning with the dealing day next following the date on

 

2


 

which the Company announces its interim or final results for any period, or at any other time when the circumstances are considered by the Board to be sufficiently exceptional to justify the grant thereof; and

 

  (b)

before 26 September 2015.

 

3.3

The price at which Shares may be acquired by the exercise of an Option shall be determined by the Board before the grant thereof, but shall not be less than:

 

  (a)

in the case of a Share Option, if Shares of the same class as those Shares are listed in the Official List, the lower of the two prices shown for the Shares on that day plus one quarter of the difference between them (as derived from that list or other reputable market source that is able to provide the relevant information at a more appropriate time, even though that source may not be able to guarantee that the information provided will be identical to that subsequently published in that list) on the Grant Date;

 

  (b)

in the case of a Share Option, if paragraph (a) above does not apply, the market value (within the meaning of Part VIII of the Taxation of Chargeable Gains Act 1992) of Shares of that class at the relevant Grant Date, as reasonably determined by the Board;

 

  (c)

in the case of an ADR Option, the fair market value of a WPP ADR as quoted on NASDAQ National Market System over a number of consecutive dealing days (being not more than five) immediately preceding or ending on the Grant Date; or

 

  (d)

except in the case of an Option to acquire Shares otherwise than by subscription, the nominal value of those Shares.

 

3.4

An Option granted under the Plan to any person:

 

  (a)

shall not, except as provided in Rule 6.3 below, be capable of being transferred by him; and

 

  (b)

shall lapse immediately if he is adjudged bankrupt.

 

3.5

An Option granted under the Plan to a person shall lapse if that person ceases to be a director or employee of a Group Member, other than by reason of his death, injury or disability, within six months of the Grant Date unless the Board shall determine otherwise.

 

4

LIMITS

 

4.1

The number of Shares in respect of which Options may be granted under the Plan on any day which are to be satisfied by the issue of Shares when added to the aggregate of:

 

  (a)

the number of Shares which immediately prior to that day have been or are to be issued to satisfy outstanding Options under the Plan; and

 

  (b)

the number of Shares which immediately prior to that day have been or are to be issued to satisfy options or awards granted or made under any other employees’ share scheme of any Group Member in the ten years immediately before that day;

shall not exceed 10% of the issued ordinary share capital of the Company for the time being.

 

3


4.2

The aggregate market value of the Shares subject to an Option granted under the Plan on any day to a Participant may not, when added to the aggregate market value of the Shares (valued at the date or dates of grant of the relevant Option or Options) which are or have been subject to options granted to him within the preceding twelve months under the Plan or any Relevant Scheme, exceed four times his Annual Remuneration. For the purposes of this Rule 4.2 the following terms will have the following meanings:

 

“Annual Remuneration”

  

in relation to a Participant, the gross rate of basic annual salary (excluding any bonuses, company pension contributions and any other benefits in kind) payable to the relevant Eligible Employee by any Group Company as at the relevant Grant Date;

“Relevant Scheme”

  

any employees’ share scheme (within the meaning given to that term in section 1166 of the Act or, as the context may require, Article 58A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991) established by any Group Member (other than savings-related schemes or profit sharing schemes approved by the Inland Revenue under Schedule 3 to ITEPA or any other schemes linked to contractual savings schemes or any share incentive plans approved by HM Revenue & Customs under Schedule 2 to ITEPA);

and for the purposes of this Rule:

 

  (a)

any Option which shall have been released to any extent shall be treated to that extent as if it were still exercisable;

 

  (b)

shares in a Constituent Company shall not be regarded as benefits in kind;

 

  (c)

where a payment of remuneration is made otherwise than in sterling, the payment shall be treated as being of the amount of sterling ascertained by applying such rate of exchange for that day published in a national newspaper as the Board shall reasonably determine; and

 

  (d)

a person’s remuneration shall be deemed to include fees paid to a company whose principal purpose is to provide his services being services of a nature which he would be expected to perform as an employee of a Constituent Company, and being fees referable to those services and exclusive of VAT.

 

4.3

For the purposes of this Rule, the market value of the Shares in relation to which an Option was granted shall be calculated:

 

  (a)

in the case of an Option granted under the Plan, as of the day by reference to which the price at which Shares may be acquired by the exercise thereof was determined in accordance with Rule 3.3 above;

 

  (b)

in the case of an option granted under any option scheme (other than a savings related scheme) approved by HM Revenue & Customs, as at the time when it was granted or, in a case where an agreement relating to the Shares has been made under paragraph 22 of Schedule 4, such earlier time or times as may be provided in the agreement; and

 

  (c)

in the case of any other option, as on the day or days by reference to which the price at which Shares may be acquired by the exercise thereof was determined;

and the Board may adopt such exchange rate as it thinks fit for the conversion of one currency to another currency.

 

4


4.4

For the purpose of this Rule 4, any Treasury Shares which are or are to be transferred for the purpose of satisfying options or other awards shall be taken as being Shares that are issued or to be issued for that purpose.

 

4.5

All Options granted under the Plan shall be regarded for the purposes of this Rule 4 as Options that will involve the issue of new Shares unless and until the Board determines that the Option will be satisfied by the transfer of Shares (or WPP ADRs which have not been created using new Shares issued for the purpose of satisfying options or awards under employee share schemes). The Board may only make such a determination in respect of an Option that has already been issued if it has made arrangements under which the relevant Shares or WPP ADRs will be available when required.

 

4.6

Any Option granted under the Plan shall be limited and take effect so that the above limits are complied with (with all Options being granted on the same day being scaled back on a pro-rata basis and rounded down to the nearest whole Share or WPP ADR).

 

5

PERFORMANCE CONDITIONS

 

5.1

An Option granted under the Plan to a director of the Company may not be exercised if the relevant condition is not satisfied; and in this Rule “the relevant condition” is the condition in Appendix 5 or such other objective condition relating to performance as may be specified by the Board at the time of the grant of that Option.

 

5.2

In determining whether the relevant condition has been met where an Option is to be exercised in accordance with any of Rules 6.3, 6.4(a), 6.4(b), 6.4(c), 7.1 and 7.3, the Board may determine that the relevant condition should be adjusted on a pro-rated basis to allow for any reduction in time between the Grant Date and the date of cessation, compared to the time between Grant Date and the end of the performance period. Where such a determination is made, the Board shall be entitled to take into account such information relating to the performance of the Company as it considers to be appropriate and may adjust the method of assessment of the performance condition as it considers to be appropriate to the circumstances (so that, for example, if the cessation occurs one month after the end of the accounting period in which the Option was granted, the Board may assess the satisfaction of the relevant condition from the earnings of the Company for the accounting period in which the Option was granted without reference to the performance in the following month).

 

5.3

The Board may at the time of grant of any Option, impose conditions on the exercise of that Option relating to performance and specify terms relating to how those conditions interact with the other provisions of the Plan.

 

6

EXERCISE OF OPTIONS

 

6.1

The exercise of any Option granted under the Plan shall be effected in such form and manner as the Board may from time to time prescribe.

 

6.2

Subject to Rules 6.3 and 6.4 below and to Rules 7.1 and 7.3 below, an Option granted under the Plan may not be exercised before the third anniversary of the Grant Date.

 

6.3

Subject to Rule 5 above, if any Participant dies before exercising an Option granted to him under the Plan and at a time when either he is a director or employee of a Group Member or he is entitled to exercise the Option by virtue of Rule 6.4 below, the Option may (and must, if at all) be exercised by his personal representatives within 12 months after the date of his death.

 

5


6.4

If any Participant ceases to be a director or employee of a Group Member (otherwise than by reason of his death), the following provisions apply in relation to any Option granted to him under the Plan:

 

  (a)

if he so ceases by reason of injury or disability, or by reason only that his office or employment is in a company which ceases to be a Group Member, or relates to a business or part of a business which is transferred to a person who is not a Group Member, subject to Rule 5 above, the Option may (and subject to Rule 6.3 above must, if at all) be exercised within the exercise period;

 

  (b)

if he so ceases by reason of retirement on or after reaching the retirement age (if any) as specified in his contract of employment (or, if there is no such age, if he retires at all) in each case more than six months after the Grant Date subject to Rule 5 above, the Option may (and subject to Rule 6.3 above must, if at all) be exercised within the exercise period; and

 

  (c)

if he so ceases for any other reason, the Option may not be exercised at all unless the Board shall so permit, in which event, subject to Rule 5 above, it may (and subject to Rule 6.3 above must, if at all) be exercised to the extent permitted by the Board within the exercise period;

and in this Rule the “exercise period” is the period which commences on the date of cessation of employment and expires 6 months after such date.

 

6.5

Subject to Rule 6.6 below, a Participant shall not be treated for the purposes of Rule 6.4 above as ceasing to be a director or employee of a Group Member until such time as he is no longer a director or employee of any Group Member and a female Participant who ceases to be such a director or employee by reason of pregnancy or confinement and who exercises her right to return to work under the Employment Rights Act 1996 (or any equivalent legislation in any jurisdiction) before exercising an Option under the Plan shall be treated for those purposes as not having ceased to be such a director or employee.

 

6.6

Other than in respect of Options granted under the Approved Part, a Participant who gives or is given notice to leave employment as a director or employee of a Group Member in any circumstances other than death or in those circumstances referred to in Rule 6.4(a) or 6.4(b), shall, if he subsequently ceases to be in such employment, be treated for the purposes of Rule 6.4 above as ceasing to be a director or employee of a Group Member on the date on which that notice is given (and for the avoidance of doubt any purported exercise by him of an Option during the period of notice shall be of no effect). If a Participant gives or is given notice to leave employment as a director or employee of a Group Member and the Board subsequently uses its discretion under Rule 6.4(c) to allow his Option to be exercisable, nothing in this Rule 6.6 will make his Option lapse or cease to be exercisable.

 

6.7

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan, an Option granted under the Plan may not be exercised after the expiration of the period of 10 years (or such shorter period as the Board may have determined before the grant thereof) beginning with the Grant Date.

 

6.8

Within 30 days after an Option under the Plan has been exercised by any person, the grantor of the Option shall, subject to such adjustment as may be required pursuant to Rule 10.3, in the case of a Share Option, procure the allotment or transfer to him (or a nominee authorised by him) of the number of Shares in respect of which the Option has been exercised and, in the

 

6


 

case of an ADR Option, procure the issue or transfer to him of WPP ADRs in respect of which the Option has been exercised (including, if appropriate, by procuring the allotment or transfer of Shares to a Depositary) unless:

 

  (a)

the Board considers that the issue or transfer thereof would not be lawful in all relevant jurisdictions; or

 

  (b)

in a case where a Group Member is obliged to account for any tax (in any jurisdiction) for which the person in question is liable by virtue of the exercise of the Option, that or another Group Member is unable to withhold the tax from his remuneration nor has received payment from him of a corresponding amount.

 

6.9

All Shares allotted under the Plan shall rank pari passu in all respects with the Shares of the same class for the time being in issue save as regards any rights attaching to such Shares by reference to a record date prior to the date of the allotment.

 

6.10

If Shares of the same class as those allotted under the Plan are listed in the Official List, the Company shall apply to the London Stock Exchange for any Shares so allotted to be admitted to that list.

 

6.11

Where any Option becomes exercisable by reason of the provisions of Rules 6.3 or 6.4, the number of Shares or WPP ADRs in respect of which the Option may be exercised shall be reduced on a pro-rated basis to take account of the fact that the Participant ceased to be a director or employee of a Group Member before the date on which the Option would have become exercisable had the Participant not ceased to be a director or employee of a Group Member (calculated on the basis of the number of days until the date of such cessation compared to the number of days in the whole period between the Grant Date and the date on which the Option becomes exercisable) unless the Board determines to the contrary.

 

7

TAKEOVER, RECONSTRUCTION AND WINDING-UP

 

7.1

if any person obtains control of the Company (within the meaning of section 719 of ITEPA) as a result of making a general offer to acquire Shares in the Company, or having obtained such control makes such an offer, the Board shall within 7 days of becoming aware thereof notify every Participant thereof and, subject to Rule 5 above and Rules 6.3, 6.4, 6.6 and 6.7 above, an Option granted under the Plan may be exercised within one month (or such longer period as the Board may permit) of such notification.

 

7.2

For the purposes of Rule 7.1 above, a person shall be deemed to have obtained control of the Company if he and others acting in concert with him have together obtained control of it.

 

7.3

If any person becomes bound or entitled to acquire Shares in the Company under Part 18 of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991, or if the Court sanctions a compromise or arrangement proposed for the purposes of or in connection with a scheme for the reconstruction of the Company or its amalgamation with any other company or companies under Part 18A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991, or if the Company passes a resolution for the winding up of the Company or the assets of the Company are declared en désastre, the Board shall forthwith notify every Participant thereof and any Option granted under the Plan may, subject to Rule 5 above and Rules 6.3, 6.4 and 6.6 above, be exercised within one month of such notification, but to the extent that it is not exercised within that period shall (notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan) lapse on the expiration thereof.

 

7


7.4

The Board may determine (the determination to apply equally to all Options outstanding at the time) that the provisions of Rules 7.1 and 7.3 above will neither cause Options to become exercisable nor to lapse at different times than would otherwise be the case, if the Board considers that the Options will continue to be an appropriate incentive notwithstanding the changed circumstances, or that the position of Participants can be adequately preserved by the grant to them of some other right or rights in substitution for or addition to the existing rights.

 

7.5

Where any Option becomes exercisable before the end of the period referred to in Rule 6.2 by reason of the provisions of Rules 7.1 or 7.3, the number of Shares or WPP ADRs in respect of which the Option may be exercised shall be reduced on a pro-rated basis to take account of the early date on which the Option may be exercised (calculated on the basis of the number of days until the end of the period compared to the number of days in the whole period).

 

8

VARIATION OF CAPITAL

 

8.1

In the event of any increase or variation of the share capital of the Company (whenever effected) by way of capitalisation or rights issue (including a variation in share capital having an effect similar to a rights issue) or sub-division, consolidation or reduction or otherwise, the Board may make such adjustments as it considers appropriate under Rule 8.2 below provided that the auditors or other financial advisers appointed by the Board acting as experts and not as arbitrators confirm that in their opinion the variation is fair and reasonable and such confirmation shall be final and binding.

 

8.2

An adjustment made under this Rule shall be to one or more of the following:

 

  (a)

the number and description of Shares in respect of which any Option granted under the Plan may be exercised;

 

  (b)

the price at which Shares may be acquired by the exercise of any such Option; and/or

 

  (c)

where any such Option has been exercised, but no Shares have been allotted or transferred pursuant to such exercise, the number and description of Shares which may be so allotted or transferred and the price at which they may be acquired.

 

8.3

An adjustment under Rule 8.2 above may have the effect of reducing the price at which Shares may be acquired by the exercise of an Option to less than their nominal value, but only if and to the extent that the Board shall be authorised to capitalise from the reserves of the Company a sum equal to the amount by which the nominal value of the Shares in respect of which the Option is exercised and which are to be allotted pursuant to such exercise exceeds the price at which the same may be subscribed for and to apply such sum in paying up such amount on such Shares; and so that on exercise of any Option in respect of which such a reduction shall have been made the Board shall capitalise such sum (if any) and apply the same in paying up such amount as aforesaid.

 

8.4

As soon as reasonably practicable after making any adjustment under Rule 8.2 above, the Board shall give notice in writing thereof to any Participant affected thereby.

 

9

ALTERATIONS

 

9.1

Subject to Rule 9.2 below, the Board may at any time alter or add to all or any of the provisions of the Plan, or the terms of any Option granted under it, in any respect.

 

9.2

No alteration or addition to the advantage of Participants or potential Participants shall be made under Rule 9.1 above to any Rule of the Plan without the prior approval by ordinary resolution of the members of the Company in general meeting other than a minor amendment to benefit the

 

8


 

administration of the Plan, to take account of a change in legislation, or to obtain or maintain favourable tax, exchange control or regulatory treatment for any Participant or any Group Member.

 

9.3

As soon as reasonably practicable after making any alteration or addition under Rule 9.1 above, the Board shall give notice in writing thereof to any Participant affected thereby.

 

10

MISSTATEMENT

 

10.1

The provisions of 10.2 will apply if:

 

  (a)

a Participant has committed an act of fraud, dishonesty or deceit in relation to a Group Member;

 

  (b)

as a result of the actions or omissions of a Participant, any Original Accounts are required to be materially corrected, or any accounts or other data for a later period include write downs, adjustments or other items; or

 

  (c)

a Participant knew or ought reasonably to have known, given that Participant’s role and position in the Group, that the relevant financial performance or other data by reference to which a Relevant Performance Condition was measured was materially different than shown in the Original Accounts;

and the Compensation Committee considers that the quantum of any Performance Related Remuneration of that Participant would have been affected if the circumstance or circumstances referred to in (a), (b) or (c) above had been known of, acted upon or otherwise taken into account at the relevant time.

 

10.2

In the event that the Compensation Committee determines that it would be clear to a reasonable, objective assessor that one of the events as detailed in Rule 10.1 above has occurred the Compensation Committee shall be entitled, but in no circumstances shall be obliged, to take action as described in Rule 10.3 below.

 

10.3

The Compensation Committee may determine that:

 

  (a)

an Option is cancelled in its entirety; or

 

  (b)

the number of Shares in respect of which an Option may be exercised will be reduced by such amount and/or in such manner as the Compensation Committee determines.

For the avoidance of doubt, this Rule 10.3 may be operated in respect of Options where the event or events in respect of which the Compensation Committee has made a determination under Rule 10.2 relates to Performance Related Remuneration under another Option or another plan.

 

11

MISCELLANEOUS

 

11.1

The rights and obligations of any individual under the terms of his office or employment with any Group Member shall not be affected by his participation in the Plan or any right which he may have to participate therein, and an individual who participates therein shall by participating be deemed to waive any and all rights to compensation or damages in consequence of the termination of his office or employment for any reason whatsoever insofar as those rights arise or may arise from his ceasing to have rights under or be entitled to exercise any Option under the Plan as a result of such termination. Any benefit under the Plan shall not be regarded as salary or counted for pension or any other purpose. Participation in the Plan by any individual is entirely at the discretion of the Board and in no circumstances shall the fact that an individual has received an Option or Options in the past give that individual any right to receive a further Option or Options.

 

9


11.2

In the event of any dispute or disagreement as to the interpretation of the Plan, or as to any question or right arising from or related to the Plan, the decision of the Board shall be final and binding upon all persons.

 

11.3

The Company and any Subsidiary may provide money to the trustees of any trust or any other person to enable them or him to acquire Shares to be held for the purposes of the Plan (which Shares may be held by a Depositary on behalf of any such trustees or other person) or enter into any guarantee or indemnity for these purposes, to the extent permitted by sections 678-682 and 840 of the Act or, as the context may require, the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991.

 

11.4

Any notice or other communication under or in connection with the Plan may be given by personal delivery, delivery by email or by sending the same by post, in the case of a company to its registered office (or to such other address and person as may be specified by that company from time to time), and in the case of an individual to his last known address, or, where he is a director or employee of a Group Member, either to his last known address or to the address of the place of business at which he performs the whole or substantially the whole of the duties of his office or employment.

 

11.5

The Board may establish further plans based on the Plan but modified to take account of local tax, exchange control or securities laws in overseas territories, provided that any Shares made available under such further plans are treated as counting against the limits expressed in Rules 4.1 to 4.6.

 

11.6

The Plan and any Option shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of England and Wales and the Company and the Participants (together with any eligible persons who do not become Participants) shall submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the Courts of England and Wales.

 

12

WITHHOLDING

 

12.1

The grant or exercise of any Option under the Plan is subject to the condition that the grant or an exercise of the Option shall not be valid unless the Participant has, in addition to complying with the other requirements of the Plan, paid or procured the payment to the Group Member which is his employer, or otherwise provided for (in a manner satisfactory to that Group Member or, if appropriate, the trustees of any employee benefit trust) an amount equal to the taxation for which any Group Member may be liable by reason of that grant or exercise.

 

12.2

Without limitation to 12.1 above, the Company or any other Group Member which is a Participant’s employer or the trustees of any employee benefit trust may withhold any amount and make such arrangements as it considers necessary which comply with applicable law to meet any liability to taxation in respect of the grant, exercise or cancellation of Options or other event relating to Options or in respect of any benefit under the Plan. These arrangements may include the sale of any Shares on behalf of a Participant, which the Participant is deemed to have authorised, to produce a cash sum sufficient to meet the taxation liabilities referred to in this Rule 12.

 

12.3

The Company may in its sole discretion waive the requirements set out in this Rule 12 in respect of any part of the Participant’s employer’s liability to taxation, including in particular, any employer’s liability to National Insurance Contributions.

 

12.4

In this Rule, “taxation” means all forms of taxation or levy by any state or any political subdivision of a state and includes income tax, Pay as You Earn, National Insurance or other social security contributions, whether being the primary liability of the employer or the employee, or any other person.

 

10


APPENDIX 1

This Appendix constitutes the HM Revenue & Customs approved part of the WPP 2012 Executive Stock Option Plan (the “Approved Part”). In the event of any conflict between the Plan and Appendix 1, the latter shall prevail. The terms of the Approved Part are identical to those of the other parts of the said Plan (excluding all appendices other than Appendix 1), to which this Approved Part is appended except as follows:

 

1

In Rule 1.1, in the definition of “Subsidiary”, add to the end the words “and is under the control of the Company within the meaning of Section 719 of ITEPA” and in the definition of “Share”, after the word “Company” add the words “which satisfy the requirements of paragraphs 16-20 of Schedule 4”.

 

2

In Rule 2.1, delete the words “an executive director or employee of a Constituent Company.” and substitute the words:

“a full-time director or qualifying employee of a Constituent Company. For the purposes of this Rule 2.1:

 

  (a)

a person shall be treated as a full-time director of a Constituent Company if he is obliged to devote to the performance of the duties of his office or employment with that and any other Constituent Company not less than 25 hours a week (excluding meal breaks);

 

  (b)

a qualifying employee, in relation to a Constituent Company, is an employee of the Constituent Company (other than one who is a director of a Constituent Company).”

 

3

In Rule 2.1, add the words “A person is not eligible to be granted an Option under the Plan at any time when he is not eligible to participate in the Plan by virtue of paragraph 9 of Schedule 4 (material interest).”

 

4

Only Share Options, and not ADR Options, shall be granted under the Approved Part and therefore no references to WPP ADRs or ADR Options shall apply in respect of an Option granted under this Appendix 1. No Share Option may be granted under this Appendix 1 prior to the date of approval of the Approved Part by H M Revenue & Customs.

 

5

In Rule 3.1, after the words “procure the grant” add the words “by deed, seal or for consideration” and at the end add “The price at which Shares may be acquired on the exercise of an Option as determined in accordance with Rule 3.3 must be stated at the time the Option is granted.”.

 

6

In Rule 3.2, after the first mention of the word “Board” add the words “the date on which the Approved Part is approved by HM Revenue & Customs under Schedule 4”.

 

7

In Rule 3.3(a), delete the words “or other reputable market source that is able to provide the relevant information at a more appropriate time, even though that source may not be able to guarantee that the information provided will be identical to that subsequently published in that list”.

 

8

In Rule 3.3(b), delete the words “reasonably determined by the Board” and substitute the words “agreed in advance for the purposes of the Plan with Shares Valuation of HM Revenue & Customs, on the Grant Date (or such other day as may be agreed with HM Revenue & Customs)”.

 

11


9

Rule 3.5 will be amended to read “An Option will lapse if that person ceases to be a director or employee of a Group Member, other than by reason of his death, injury or disability, within six months of the Grant Date. For the avoidance of doubt, in the event of such cessation due to redundancy or retirement within six months of the Grant Date the Option shall lapse immediately on such cessation”. 1

 

10

Add the following as Rule 4.3A:

“No person shall be granted Options under the Approved Part which would, at the time they are granted cause the aggregate market value (determined as at the date of each relevant grant) of the Shares which he may acquire in pursuance of Options granted to him under the Approved Part or under any other share option scheme, not being a savings related share option scheme, approved under Schedule 9 or any option scheme approved under Schedule 4 and established by the Company or by any associated company of the Company (and not exercised) to exceed or further exceed £30,000 or such other limit as may be prescribed in paragraph 6 of Schedule 4”.

 

11

In Rule 5.2, add the words “acting fairly and reasonably” after the word “Board” in the 3rd line.

 

11A

In Rule 6.4(b), add the words “or on or after the Specified Age,” after the words “retires at all),”.

 

12

In Rule 6(4)(c), after the words “the Board” (on both occasions where those words appear) add the words “(acting fairly and reasonably) and, at the end of the Rule, add the words “provided that the discretions of the Board contained in this Rule 6.4(c) shall not apply in the case of a cessation by reason of redundancy (in which case the Option shall lapse immediately)”.

 

13

Add the following as Rule 6.7A:

“A Participant shall not be eligible to exercise an Option under the Plan at any time when he is not eligible to participate in the Plan by virtue of paragraph 9 of Schedule 4”.

 

14

Delete Rule 6.8 (b) and insert the following as Rule 6.8A:

“In a case where a Group Member is obliged to account for any tax (in any jurisdiction) for which the person in question is liable by virtue of the exercise of the Option, the Board may require the Participant to make a payment to the Company of an amount equal to the reasonable estimate of the Company of that tax as a condition precedent to the exercise of the Option provided that if that estimate proves to be in excess of the actual liability then the excess will be refunded to the Participant.”

 

15

At the end of Rule 6.11, add the words “acting fairly and reasonably”.

 

16

In Rule 7.1, insert the words “not exceeding four months” after the word “period” in the penultimate line.

 

1  

Amended by written resolution dated 21 February 2013.

 

12


17

Add the following as Rules 7.6 and 7.7:

 

  “7.6

If any company (the “acquiring company”):

 

  (a)

obtains control of the Company as a result of making:

 

  (i)

a general offer to acquire the whole of the issued ordinary share capital of the Company which is made on a condition such that if it is met the person making the offer will have control of the Company, or

 

  (ii)

a general offer to acquire all the Shares in the Company which are of the same class as the Shares which may be acquired by the exercise of Options granted under the Plan, or

 

  (b)

obtains control of the Company in pursuance of a compromise or arrangement sanctioned by the court under Part 18A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991 (provided that at the time of such event H M Revenue & Customs accepts such provisions as equivalent to section 899 of the Act), or

 

  (c)

becomes bound or entitled to acquire Shares in the Company under Part 18 of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991 (provided that at the time of such event H M Revenue & Customs accepts such provisions as equivalent to section 979 of the Act);

any Participant may at any time within the appropriate period (which expression shall be construed in accordance with paragraph 26 of Schedule 4), by agreement with the acquiring company, release any Option granted under the Plan which has not lapsed (the “old option”) in consideration of the grant to him of an option (the “new option”) which (for the purposes of that paragraph) is equivalent to the old option but relates to shares in a different company (whether the acquiring company itself or some other company falling within paragraph 16(b) or (c) of Schedule 4).

 

  7.7

The new option shall not be regarded for the purposes of Rule 7.6 above as equivalent to the old option unless the conditions set out in paragraph 27 of Schedule 4 are satisfied, but so that the provisions of the Plan shall for this purpose be construed as if:

 

  (i)

the new option were an option granted under the Plan at the same time as the old option;

 

  (ii)

except for the purposes of the definitions of “Group Member”, “Constituent Company” and “Subsidiary” in Rule 1.1 above and the reference to “the Board” in Rule 6.7 above, the expression “the Company” were defined as “a company whose shares may be acquired by the exercise of options granted under the Plan”;

 

  (iii)

the relevant condition referred to in Rule 6.3 above had been satisfied; and

 

  (iv)

Rule 9.2 below were omitted.”

 

18

At the start of Rule 8.1, add the words “Subject to Rule 8.2A below”.

 

19

In Rule 8.1, delete the words “increase or.”

 

20

In Rules 8.2(a) and (c), insert the words “(but not the class)” after the word “description”.

 

21

Add the following as Rule 8.2A:

“At a time when the Plan is approved by HM Revenue & Customs under Schedule 4, no adjustment under Rule 8.2 above shall be made without the prior approval of HM Revenue & Customs.”

 

13


22

In Rule 9.1 delete the words “Rule 9.2” and substitute the words “Rules 9.2, 9.2A and 9.2B” and delete the words “or the terms of any Option granted under it”. 2

 

23

At the end of Rule 9.1, add the words “(having regard to the fact that, if an alteration or addition which does not solely relate to a special term is made at a time when the Plan is approved by HM Revenue & Customs under Schedule 4, the alteration or addition to any Key Feature will not thereafter have effect unless and until HM Revenue & Customs have approved the alteration or addition)”.

 

24

Add the following as Rule 9.2A and 9.2B:

 

  “9.2A

No alteration or addition to the disadvantage of any Participant, other than to a special term, shall be made under Rule 9.1 above unless:

 

  (d)

the Board shall have invited every relevant Participant to give an indication as to whether or not he approves the alteration or addition, and

 

  (e)

the alteration or addition is approved by a majority of those Participants who have given such an indication.

 

  9.2B

No alteration or addition which solely relates to a special term subject to which an Option has been granted shall be made under Rule 9.1 above unless:

 

  (a)

there shall have occurred an event which shall have caused the Board reasonably to consider that the special term would not, without the alteration or addition, achieve its original purpose; and

 

  (b)

the Board shall act fairly and reasonably in making the alteration or addition which must be no more difficult to satisfy than the original.”

 

25

At the end of Rule 9.3, add the words “and if the Plan is then approved by HM Revenue & Customs under Schedule 4, to HM Revenue & Customs.”

 

26

Add as Rule 9.4:

“Any reference in this Rule to a special term is a reference to a term specified by the Board as mentioned in Rule 3.1 above or a term of Appendix 1 hereto”.

 

27

Delete Rule 10 in its entirety.

 

28

3 Delete Rule 12 and substitute the following Rule 12:

 

  “12.

Taxation

 

  12.1

The exercise of any Option under the Plan is subject to the condition that the exercise of the Option shall not be valid unless the Participant has, in addition to complying with the other requirements of the Plan, paid or procured the payment to the Group Member which is his employer, or otherwise provided for (in a manner satisfactory to that Group Member or, if appropriate, the trustees of any employee benefit trust) an amount equal to the taxation for which any Group Member may be liable by reason of that exercise.

 

2  

Amended by written resolution dated 21 February 2013.

3  

Amended by written resolution dated 21 February 2013.

 

14


  12.2

Arrangements for the satisfaction of the condition in Rule 12.1 may include, without limitation, the Participant authorising the Company or the trustees of any employee benefit trust to sell sufficient of Shares on his behalf so as to produce a cash sum sufficient to meet the taxation liabilities referred to in this Rule 12.

 

  12.3

The Company may, acting fairly and reasonably, waive the requirements set out in this Rule 12 in respect of any part of the Participant’s employer’s liability to taxation, including in particular, any employer’s liability to National Insurance Contributions.

 

  12.4

In this Rule, “taxation” means taxation by any state or any political subdivision of a state and includes income tax, Pay as You Earn and primary National Insurance and their equivalents in jurisdictions outside of the United Kingdom.”

 

29

Add the following after Rule 5.3:

 

  “5.4

The Board may make such fair and reasonable adjustments to the terms of the relevant condition as in its opinion it considers appropriate to take account of any variation of share capital as set out in Rule 8.1.

 

  5.5

If any accounting standard used in the relevant condition is modified, replaced or substituted or if the composition of any market index used in the relevant condition changes and/or is replaced by another similar index, the Board may make such adjustments to the terms of the relevant condition as it in its opinion considers to be fair and reasonable.

 

  5.6

Any adjustments made to the relevant condition pursuant to Rules 5.4 and 5.5 shall be in accordance with and subject to Rule 9 of the Plan and any adjusted relevant condition will in the reasonable opinion of the Board be materially no more difficult and no less difficult to satisfy than the relevant condition to which the exercise of the Option was originally subject.”

 

15


APPENDIX 2

Special Rules Applicable to Grants of Incentive Stock Options

 

1

Options granted in accordance with the Plan (either including or excluding Appendix 1 thereto) may be designated as “Incentive Stock Options” (“ISOs”) within the meaning of section 422 of the United States Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “U.S. Tax Code”).

 

2

The aggregate number of Shares (including Shares comprised in any WPP ADR) for which ISOs may be granted under Appendix 2 shall not exceed [125,665,004]

 

3

The class of persons who may receive ISOs shall, in addition to the limitations imposed by Rule 2 of the Plan, be limited to those persons who are employees of the Company or its “parent” or “subsidiary” corporations within the meaning of sections 424(f) and (g), respectively, of the U.S. Tax Code.

 

4

In addition to any other restrictions contained in the Plan, ISOs shall not be transferable otherwise than by will or the laws of descent and distribution. During the lifetime of the person to whom an ISO is granted, the ISO shall be exercisable only by such person.

 

5

To the extent that the aggregate market value of Shares (including Shares comprised in any WPP ADR) with respect to which ISOs are exercisable (determined without regard to this sentence) for the first time by a Participant during any calendar year (under all plans or schemes of the Company or its “parent” and “subsidiary” corporations within the meaning of sections 424(f) and (g), respectively, of the U.S. Tax Code) exceeds US $100,000, such Options shall to the extent of such excess be treated as Options which are not ISOs. For the purposes of the preceding sentence, the market value of any Shares (including Shares comprised in any WPP ADR) subject to an ISO shall be determined at the time such ISO is granted.

 

6

This schedule shall be deemed to be included within the Plan as adopted by shareholders for the purpose of any ISO grants.

 

16


APPENDIX 3

India

The plan will apply to Options granted to residents in India with the following modifications:

 

1

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan, a person is eligible to be granted an option under this Appendix if (and only if) he is a full-time director or qualifying employee (as defined in Paragraph 2 of Appendix 1) of a Constituent Company (whether or not the Company itself) resident in India.

 

2

All or any of the terms of the Option may be altered to comply with requirements imposed under applicable exchange control regulations and other laws of India in relation to that Option and an Option may only be exercised if and to the extent permitted by those regulations.

 

3

Applicable regulations of the Reserve Bank of India (“RBI”) do not currently limit the amount of funds that may be transferred for the purchase of stock pursuant to the exercise of a stock option under the Plan, but such regulations are subject to change. Any cash balances received in respect of, (i) dividends must be repatriated to India within seven days of receipt, and (ii) proceeds from sale of shares acquired pursuant to the Plan must be repatriated to India within ninety days of receipt.

APPENDIX 4

Belgium

The Plan will apply to Options granted to residents of Belgium with the following modifications.

 

1

In Rule 3(4), a further Rule (c) shall be added as follows:

 

  “(c)

shall be cancelled if he notifies the Company that he refuses to accept the Option or if he fails to accept the Option within 60 days of the date of the Company’s communication to him in respect of the Option.”

 

2

In Rule 6(2), delete the words:

“the third anniversary of the Grant Date”

and substitute the words

“the 1 January following the third anniversary of the Grant Date.”

 

3

In Rule 6(3), delete the words:

“within 12 months after the date of his death.”

and substitute the words

“in the later of the period of 12 months commencing with the date of his death or the period of 6 months commencing on 1 January following the third anniversary of the Grant Date.”

 

17


4

In Rule 6(4), delete the words:

“and in this Rule the exercise period is the period which shall expire 6 months after his so ceasing”

and substitute the words:

“and in this Rule the exercise period is the period which shall commence on the 1 January following the third anniversary of the Grant Date (the “Third Anniversary”) and expire 12 months after his so ceasing or 6 months after the Third Anniversary, whichever shall be the latest.”

APPENDIX 5

Executive directors

 

1

Pursuant and subject to Rule 5, any Option granted to a director of the Company will be subject to the relevant condition given in this Appendix 5.

 

2

The relevant condition shall be:

 

2.1

the performance period shall be the period of three calendar years commencing with the start of the accounting period including the Grant Date (or with such later period as may be specified by the Board at the time of the grant of the Option) (the “Performance Period”).

 

2.2

that the percentage increase in earnings per share of the Company over the Performance Period shall have exceeded the growth in the RPI by 5% per annum (compounded annually); and

 

2.3

in the event that, at the end of the Performance Period, it is determined that the percentage increase in earnings per share of the Company over the Performance Period has not exceeded the growth in the RPI by 5% per annum (compounded annually), the Option shall immediately lapse; and

 

2.4

For the purposes of the relevant condition:

 

  (a)

Growth in Earnings Per Share shall be calculated by dividing the Earnings Per Share in respect of the third of the three consecutive financial years by the Earnings Per Share achieved in the financial year ending immediately prior to the first day of the first of those three consecutive financial years (commencing no earlier than the financial year in which the Grant Date occurs).

 

  (b)

Growth in the Retail Prices Index shall be calculated by dividing such Retail Prices Index as is published in respect of the month containing the last day of the third of the three consecutive financial years referred to in 2.4(a) above by such Retail Prices Index as was published in respect of the month containing the last day of the financial year of the Company ending immediately prior to the first day of the first of those three consecutive financial years.

 

2.5

The Board may make such fair and reasonable adjustments to the terms of the relevant condition as in its opinion it considers appropriate to take account of any Issue or Reorganisation.

 

18


2.6

If SSAP 3 and/or FRS 3 are modified, replaced or substituted or if the composition of the Retail Prices Index changes and/or the Retail Prices Index is replaced by another similar index, the Board may make such adjustments to the terms of the relevant condition as it in its opinion considers to be fair and reasonable.

 

2.7

Any adjustments made to the Performance Target pursuant to paragraphs 2.5 and 2.6 above shall be in accordance with and subject to Rule 9 of the Scheme and that any adjusted Performance Target will in the reasonable opinion of the Board be materially no more difficult and no less difficult to satisfy than the Performance Target to which the exercise of the Option was originally subject.

 

2.8

As soon as is reasonably practical following the end of any relevant financial year of the Company the Board shall determine whether the Performance Target has been satisfied and shall notify the Participant in writing if it has been satisfied and once satisfied the Option may, subject as otherwise provided in the Rules, be exercised at any time during the Option Period notwithstanding that for subsequent financial years the Growth in Earnings Per Share may not exceed the Growth in the Retail Prices Index.

 

2.9

Any calculations or determinations by the Board in accordance with the Performance Target shall not be open to question and shall be final and binding on all persons concerned. The Board may request the Auditors to carry out any or all of the calculations and determinations of it in connection with the Performance Target. If so, the Auditors shall act as experts and not as arbitrators and their calculations and determinations shall not be open to question and shall be final and binding on all persons concerned.

 

3

For the purposes of the relevant condition the following terms shall have the following meanings:

Earnings Per Share ” means the earnings per share (as defined in SSAP 3 paragraph 10 as amended by FRS 3) of the Company determined in accordance with such standards and as shown in the audited financial statements of the Company after making such adjustments to the earnings per share as the Board in its opinion considers appropriate in order to ensure that the measure of earnings per share for the relevant financial years is on a fair and consistent basis including, without limitation, the following adjustments to earnings per share for the relevant financial years:

 

  (a)

a proportionate upwards or downwards amendment in a case where the relevant financial year is more than or less than a calendar year; and/or

 

  (b)

ignoring all exceptional and extraordinary items as defined in paragraphs 5 and 6 of FRS 3; and/or

 

  (c)

ignoring the results of discontinued operations as defined in paragraph 4 of FRS 3.

FRS ” means Financial Reporting Standard of the Accounting Standards Board Limited.

Issue or Reorganisation ” means any capitalisation issue (other than the issue of shares pursuant to the exercise of an option given to the shareholders of the Company to receive shares in lieu of dividend) or rights offer or any other variation in the share capital of the Company including (without limitation) any consolidation, sub-division or reduction of capital of the Company.

Retail Prices Index ” means the Retail Prices All Items Index Table: Indices back to 1947 (Table RP02) as published by the Office for National Statistics or any table which replaces it.

 

19


SSAP ” means Statement of Standard Accounting Practice of the Accounting Standards Board Limited.

APPENDIX 6

Taxpayers Subject to Section 409A of the United States Internal Revenue Code

The plan will apply to participants who are taxpayers subject to Section 409A of the United States Internal Revenue Code (“Section 409A”), with the following modifications:

 

1

The options granted under the plan are intended to be exempt from the requirements of Section 409A by satisfying the requirements of the exemption set forth under Section 1.409A-1(b)(5)(i)(A) of the United States Treasury Regulations or other applicable guidance (the “Exemption”). The plan shall be construed and interpreted in accordance with such intent. Any discretion afforded to any person or entity under the plan the existence of which itself would cause an option to fail to satisfy the requirements of the Exemption is hereby removed from the plan.

 

2

At the end of Rule 3.3(c) after the words “Grant Date”, add the words “provided that the price shall in no case be less than fair market value determined in accordance with Section 409A.”

 

3

Add the following as Rule 8.5:

“Notwithstanding the foregoing, only adjustments permitted by Section 409A shall be permitted to be made under Rule 8, including pro rata adjustments necessary to reflect a stock split, reverse stock split, and stock dividend.”

APPENDIX 7

Canada

The Plan will apply to Options granted to residents of Canada with the following modification:

Any Shares acquired by a Participant pursuant to this Plan may not be traded within Canada at any time and, by receiving such Shares, each Participant shall be taken to have agreed to observe this restriction.

APPENDIX 8

Denmark

The Plan will apply to options granted to residents of Denmark with the following modification:

Where the provisions of Rule 6.3 to 6.6 conflict with Danish law, Danish law will prevail and the terms of these Rules will be taken to be amended accordingly but only in respect of Options granted to employees in Denmark.

 

20


APPENDIX 9

Hong Kong

The Plan will apply to Options granted to residents of Hong Kong with the addition of the following rules.

 

1

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan the grant of Options under and the operation of the Plan does not constitute an offer or invitation to the public within the meaning of the Companies Ordinance or the Securities and Futures Ordinance.

 

2

Any Shares acquired by a Participant pursuant to this Plan cannot be traded within Hong Kong within 6 months of the date of exercise of the Option(s) pursuant to which such Shares are acquired and, by receiving such Shares, each Participant shall be taken to have agreed to observe this restriction.

APPENDIX 10

Ireland

The Plan will apply to Options granted to residents of the Republic of Ireland with the following modifications:

 

1

In Rule 6.7, delete “10” and substitute “7” and delete “(or such shorter period as the Board may have determined before the grant thereof)”.

 

2

Any Option that is held by a person who is a director of a company resident or incorporated in the Republic of Ireland shall be satisfied by the issue of new Shares and not the transfer of Shares.

APPENDIX 11

Japan

The Plan will apply to Options granted to residents of Japan with the addition of the following Rules:

 

1

In a case where Japanese laws and regulations would inhibit the exercise of an Option or the delivery of Shares or WPP ADRs (or the issue of a WPP receipt) following exercise of the Option, the Board may make such regulations as it thinks fit for dealing with this (whether or not consistent with the rules of the Plan), which for the avoidance of doubt may include:

 

  (a)

declining to deliver Shares or WPP ADRs (or the issue of a WPP receipt) within 30 days after an Option under the Plan has been exercised, or at all, and

 

  (b)

requiring Participants to give advance notice, of whatever length, of their intention to exercise an Option.

 

2

For the purposes of ensuring that a securities notice may be filed before the actual Grant Date, the Board may specify a date (“the Notional Grant Date”) prior to the Grant Date by reference to which the price at which WPP ADRs may be acquired on exercise of an ADR Option shall be calculated (as if that date was the Grant Date) and the Notional Grant Date shall, for all purposes of these Rules, be taken as being the Grant Date except that the Participants shall not acquire their Options until they are actually granted on the actual Grant Date.

 

21


APPENDIX 12

Korea

The Plan will apply to Options granted to residents of Korea with the addition of the following rule:

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan unless the Company determines otherwise, no person will acquire any rights under an Option unless and until the relevant report has been filed with and, if necessary approved by, an authorised foreign exchange bank.

APPENDIX 13

Malaysia

The Plan will apply to Options granted to residents of Malaysia with the addition of the following rule:

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan, no person will acquire any rights under an Option unless and until the relevant registration has been filed with, or approval has been obtained from (in each case if required) the Controller of Foreign Exchange.

APPENDIX 14

Mexico

The Plan will apply to Options granted to residents in Mexico with the addition of the following rules:

 

1

Interests under the Plan have not and will not be registered with the National Registry of Securities maintained by the National Banking and Securities Commission of Mexico and therefore may not be publicly offered in Mexico.

 

2

Any grant of Options is a private offering under Article 8 paragraph III of the Securities Law of Mexico. Any such offering is limited to employees or groups of employees of companies which issue interests under any employee stock option plan or program, or the companies which are controlled by said company, as defined under the Securities Law and applicable regulations of Mexico in effect.

APPENDIX 15

Russia

The Plan will apply to Options granted to residents in Russia with the addition of the following rule:

For the purposes of the securities laws of Russia, all transactions carried out and contracts entered into in connection with the Plan and any Shares acquired by Participants will be carried out or entered into outside Russia.

 

22


APPENDIX 16

Slovak Republic

The Plan will apply to Options granted to residents of the Slovak Republic with the following alteration:

If a Participant gives notice to a Group Member that he intends to leave employment at any time within the two month period following the giving of the notice, for any of the reasons set out in Rule 6.4(a), 6.4(b) and 6.4(c) and in respect of any reason set out in Rule 6.4(c) only if the Board shall so permit, then the Option may be exercised before he leaves employment.

APPENDIX 17

France

The Plan will apply to Options granted to Participants who are or may become subject to French taxation (i.e. income tax and/or social security contributions) as a result of a Grant of Options made under this Plan. Grants of Options to such Participants will be subject to the modifications set out in this Appendix and in the event of any difference or conflict between the terms of this Appendix and the Rules, the terms of this Appendix will prevail.

 

1

Options may only be granted to Eligible Persons who can be either the salaried employees, within the meaning of French labour law or directors (“ mandataires sociaux ”) as defined in Section L 225-185 of the French Commercial Code, of a French company satisfying the conditions mentioned in Section L 225-180 of the same Code.

 

2

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan, no Option may be granted to any Eligible Person who owns more than 10% of the ordinary share capital of the Company then in issue.

 

3

Options may not be granted (i) during the 10 business days preceding and following the date at which the consolidated accounts and the annual accounts of the Company have been disclosed to the public and (ii) between (x) the day on which the management bodies of the Company have received an information which, if it were disclosed to the public, could affect significantly the market quotation of the Company and (y) the day after the 10 business days following the date at which such information has been disclosed to the public.

 

4

In the case of a Share Option the price at which Shares may be acquired by the exercise of an Option shall be at least equal to 80% of the arithmetical average of the middle market quotations of a Share (as derived from the London Stock Exchange Daily Official List) on the 20 business days last preceding the date on which the Option is granted.

 

5

In the case of an ADR Option, the price at which Shares may be acquired by the exercise of an Option shall be at least equal to 80% of the fair market value of a WPP ADR as quoted on NASDAQ on the 20 business days last preceding the date on which the Option is granted.

 

6

Notwithstanding Rule 8 of the Plan, the price at which Shares may be acquired by the exercise of the Option shall be adjusted only upon the occurrence of the events specified under Section L 225-181 of the French Commercial Code.

 

7

Options may not be sold or transferred.

 

23


8

Notwithstanding Rule 6.3 of the Plan, on the death of a Participant at a time when the Option in question has not lapsed, the Option may not be exercised later than six months after the date of his death.

 

9

Notwithstanding Rule 6.2 of the Plan (but subject to Rules 6.3. 6.4, 7.1 and 7.3), an Option granted under the Plan may not be exercised before the day after the fourth anniversary of the Grant Date.

 

10

A Director within the meaning of Section L 225-185 §4 of the French Commercial Code shall be required to retain (either registered in his own name or deposited with a nominee on his behalf) a proportion of the Shares received as a result of exercising an Option as determined by the Compensation Committee, until he ceases his role as a Director. If no other proportion is determined when the relevant option is granted, the proportion required to be retained will be 10%.

 

11

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan, no option granted more than 76 months after the Plan was last approved by shareholders as required by Rule 9.4.1 of the Listing Rules of the UK Listing Authority may be satisfied by any means involving the issue of new Shares or the transfer of Treasury Shares.

 

24

Exhibit 8.1

Our principal subsidiaries as of December 31, 2012, are listed below. All other subsidiaries, if considered in the aggregate, would not constitute a significant subsidiary under Rule 1-02(w) of Regulation S-X.

 

COMPANY NAME

  

JURISDICTION
UNDER
WHICH
ORGANISED

United States

  

24/7 Media US, Inc.

   Delaware

24/7 Media, Inc.

   Delaware

A. Eicoff & Company, Inc.

   Delaware

AKQA, Inc.

   California

Burson-Marsteller, LLC

   Delaware

Competitive Media Reporting LLC

   Delaware

G2 Worldwide Inc.

   New York

Global Market Insite, Inc.

   Delware

Glover Park Group LLC

   Delaware

Grey Global Group Inc.

   Delaware

Grey Healthcare Group Inc.

   New York

Group M Worldwide, Inc.

   Delaware

I-Behavior Inc.

   Delaware

J. Walter Thompson Company

   Delaware

J. Walter Thompson U.S.A., Inc.

   Delaware

KnowledgeBase Marketing Inc.

   Delaware

Landor Ohio LLC

   Delaware

Landor, LLC

   Delaware

Lightspeed Online Research LLC

   Delaware

Marketing and Planning Systems LLC

   Delaware

Maxus Communications LLC

   Delaware

Mediacom Worldwide Inc.

   Delaware

Mediaedge:CIA LLC

   Delaware

Millward Brown, Inc.

   Illinois

Mindshare USA, LLC

   New York

Ogilvy CommonHealth Worldwide LLC

   Delaware

Ogilvy Public Relations Worldwide, Inc.

   Delaware

OgilvyOne, LLC

   Delaware

Sudler & Hennessey, LLC

   Delaware

TeamDetroit, Inc.

   Delaware

The Ogilvy Group, Inc.

   Delaware

VML, Inc.

   Missouri

WPP Finance Square LLC

   Delaware

WPP Group U.S. Finance Corp.

   Delaware

WPPIH 2001, Inc

   Delaware

Wunderman Worldwide, LLC

   Nevada

Young & Rubicam Inc

 

   Delaware

COMPANY NAME

  

JURISDICTION
UNDER
WHICH
ORGANISED

Non-US

  

Mediacom Australia Pty Limited

   Australia

J Walter Thompson Publicidade Ltda

   Brazil

Newdesign Participações Ltda

   Brazil

Y&R Propaganda Ltda

   Brazil

Mediacom Canada

   Canada

GroupM (Shanghai) Advertising Co. Ltd

   China

J.Walter Thompson Bridge Advertising Co. Ltd.

   China

Kinetic Advertising (Shanghai) Co. Ltd

   China

Millward Brown ACSR Co. Ltd

   China

Kantar SAS

   France

KR MEDIA France SAS

   France

Media Insight SNC

   France

Taylor Nelson Sofres SAS

   France

Advanced Techniques Group (ATG) GmbH

   Germany

Commarco GmbH

   Germany

GroupM Competence Center GmbH

   Germany

groupm Germany GmbH

   Germany

MEC GmbH

   Germany

MediaCom Agentur für Media-Beratung GmbH

   Germany

MindShare GmbH

   Germany

TNS Infratest GmbH

   Germany

MindShare Communications Limited

   Hong Kong

Total Glory International Limited

   Hong Kong

GroupM Media India Pvt Ltd

   India

Hindustan Thompson Associates Private Limited

   India

Ogilvy & Mather Pvt Ltd

   India

CIA Medianetwork Club Srl

   Italy

CIA Medianetwork Milano Srl

   Italy

Mediacom Italia Srl

   Italy

Mindshare SpA

   Italy

WPP Luxembourg Gamma Four Sarl

   Luxembourg

WPP Luxembourg Gamma Sarl

   Luxembourg
 

 

1


COMPANY NAME

  

JURISDICTION
UNDER WHICH
ORGANISED

WPP Luxembourg Sarl

   Luxembourg

WPP TNS US Sarl

   Luxembourg

JWT México, S.R.L. de C.V.

   Mexico

Berkeley Square Holding BV

   Netherlands

Dolphin Square Holding B.V.

   Netherlands

GroupM B.V.

   Netherlands

Luxembourg Finance Gamma CV

   Netherlands

Kantar Media S.A.

   Spain

Mediacom Iberia SA

   Spain

Mediaedge:CIA SL

   Spain

Mindshare Spain SA

   Spain

Vinizius Young & Rubicam SL

   Spain

WPP Holdings Spain, SL

   Spain

Mediaedge:cia Taiwan Ltd.

   Taiwan

Enduring Organisation

   United Kingdom

Flexible Organisation

   United Kingdom

J. Walter Thompson Group Limited

   United Kingdom

Kantar Media UK Ltd

   United Kingdom

Kinetic Worldwide Limited

   United Kingdom

Lightspeed Research Ltd

   United Kingdom

COMPANY NAME

  

JURISDICTION
UNDER WHICH
ORGANISED

Maxus Communications (UK) Limited

   United Kingdom

MediaCom UK Limited

   United Kingdom

Mediaedge:CIA Worldwide Limited

   United Kingdom

Millward Brown UK Limited

   United Kingdom

Mindshare Media UK Limited

   United Kingdom

Ogilvy & Mather Group (Holdings) Limited

   United Kingdom

Ogilvyone Worldwide Limited

   United Kingdom

Prophaven Limited

   United Kingdom

TNS Group Holdings Limited

   United Kingdom

TNS UK Limited

   United Kingdom

WPP 2005 Limited

   United Kingdom

WPP 2008 Limited

   United Kingdom

WPP Finance Co. Limited

   United Kingdom

WPP Marketing Communications Spain

   United Kingdom

WPP No. 2337 Limited

   United Kingdom

WPP Pearls Limited

   United Kingdom

WPP Unicorn Limited

   United Kingdom
 

 

2

Exhibit 12.1

 

Certification

 

I, Sir Martin Sorrell, certify that:

 

1.   I have reviewed this annual report on Form 20-F of WPP plc;

 

2.   Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

 

3.   Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the company as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

 

4.   The company’s other certifying officer and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the company and have:

 

  a)   Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the company, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

 

  b)   Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

 

  c)   Evaluated the effectiveness of the company’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

 

  d)   Disclosed in this report any change in the company’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the period covered by the annual report that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the company’s internal control over financial reporting; and

 

5.   The company’s other certifying officer and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the company’s auditors and the audit committee of the company’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):

 

  a)   All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the company’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

 

  b)   Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the company’s internal control over financial reporting.

 

Date: 30 April 2013

 

/s/ Sir Martin Sorrell    

Sir Martin Sorrell
Chief Executive
(principal executive officer)

Exhibit 12.2

 

Certification

 

I, Paul Richardson, certify that:

 

1.   I have reviewed this annual report on Form 20-F of WPP plc;

 

2.   Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

 

3.   Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the company as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

 

4.   The company’s other certifying officer and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the company and have:

 

  a)   Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the company, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

 

  b)   Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

 

  c)   Evaluated the effectiveness of the company’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

 

  d)   Disclosed in this report any change in the company’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the period covered by the annual report that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the company’s internal control over financial reporting; and

 

5.   The company’s other certifying officer and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the company’s auditors and the audit committee of the company’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):

 

  a)   All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the company’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

 

  b)   Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the company’s internal control over financial reporting.

 

Date: 30 April 2013

/s/ Paul W.G. Richardson

Paul W.G. Richardson
Finance Director
(principal financial officer)

Exhibit 13.1

 

CERTIFICATION PURSUANT TO 18 U.S.C. SECTION 1350,

AS ADOPTED PURSUANT TO SECTION 906

OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

 

In connection with the Annual Report of WPP plc (the “Company”) on Form 20-F for the period ending 31 December 2012 (the “Report”), I, Sir Martin Sorrell, Chief Executive Officer of the Company, certify, pursuant to 18 U.S.C. Section 1350, as adopted pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, that:

 

1)   The Report fully complies with the requirements of Section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934; and

 

2)   The information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the Company’s financial position and results of operations.

 

Date: 30 April 2013

/s/ Sir Martin Sorrell    

Sir Martin Sorrell
Chief Executive

Exhibit 13.2

 

CERTIFICATION PURSUANT TO 18 U.S.C. SECTION 1350,

AS ADOPTED PURSUANT TO SECTION 906

OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

 

In connection with the Annual Report of WPP plc (the “Company”) on Form 20-F for the period ending 31 December 2012 (the “Report”), I, Paul Richardson, Finance Director of the Company, certify, pursuant to 18 U.S.C. Section 1350, as adopted pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, that:

 

1)   The Report fully complies with the requirements of Section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934; and

 

2)   The information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the Company’s financial position and results of operations.

 

Date: 30 April 2013

/s/ Paul W.G. Richardson

Paul W.G. Richardson
Finance Director

Exhibit 14.1

 

CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

 

We consent to the incorporation by reference in Registration Statement No. 333-06378, No. 333-103888, No. 333-108149, No. 333-119949, No. 333-129640, No. 333-129733, No. 333-145041, No. 333-152662, No. 333-157729, No. 333-185886, No. 333-185887, No. 333-185889 and No. 333-185890 each on Form S-8, and Registration Statement No. 333-158262 and 333-183695 each on Form F-3 of our reports dated 30 April 2013 relating to the consolidated financial statements of WPP plc and subsidiaries (the “Company”) and the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting , appearing in this Annual Report on Form 20-F of WPP plc for the year ended 31 December 2012.

 

/s/ Deloitte LLP

London, United Kingdom

30 April 2013

Exhibit 14.2

CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

We consent to the incorporation by reference in Registration Statement No. 333-06378, No. 333-103888, No. 333-108149, No. 333-119949, No. 333-129640, No. 333-129733, No. 333-145041, No. 333-152662, No. 333-157729, No. 333-185886, No. 333-185887, No. 333-185889 and No. 333-185890 each on Form S-8, and Registration Statement No. 333-158262 and 333-183695 each on Form F-3 of our report dated 30 April 2013 relating to the financial statements of WPP DAS Limited appearing in this Annual Report on Form 20-F of WPP plc for the year ended 31 December 2012.

/s/ Deloitte LLP

London, United Kingdom

30 April 2013